Autocad 2004 Command Reference

AutoCAD ®
Command Reference
2004
February 2003
Copyright © 2003 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND
MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE
SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.
Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the
time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.
Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D
Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC,
AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University
(logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD
Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet,
EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG,
ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The
AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads,
Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo).
The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD
Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk
Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner
Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit,
DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax
ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint,
Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.
Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame,
flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire.
The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master
Editing.
Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc.
Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved.
InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved.
PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards.
Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color.
PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002
Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in
combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or
into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product.
Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved.
Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002
Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL
German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin."
Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992.
Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-
Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using AutoCAD Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Using This Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Executing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
References to Other Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3DARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3DCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjust Clipping Planes Window . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3DCONFIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3DCORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3DDISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3DFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3DMESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3DORBIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cursor Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3DOrbit Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3DORBITCTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3DPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3DPOLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3DSIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 37
3DSOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3D Studio File Export Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 40
iii
3DSWIVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3DZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
ABOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ACISIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ACISOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ADCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
ADCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
DesignCenter Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Search Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
ADCNAVIGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ALIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
AMECONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
APERTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
APPLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 58
Startup Suite Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ARC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ARRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Array Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
ARRAY Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ARX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Active Assistance Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 78
ATTACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
ATTDEF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 80
ATTDEF Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ATTDISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
ATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Edit Attributes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ATTEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ATTEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 91
ATTEXT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
ATTREDEF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
ATTSYNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
AUDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Adjust Background Bitmap Placement Dialog Box . . . . . 100
BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
iv | Contents
BATTMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Block Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Edit Attribute Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
BHATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 107
Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 116
BHATCH Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
BLIPMODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Block Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
BLOCK Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
BLOCKICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
BMPOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
BOUNDARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Boundary Creation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 127
BOUNDARY Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
BREAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
BROWSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
CAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Understanding Syntax of Expressions . . . . . . . . . 135
Formatting Feet and Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Formatting Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using Points and Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using AutoLISP Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Using AutoCAD System Variables . . . . . . . . . . 139
Converting Units of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . 140
Using Standard Numeric Functions. . . . . . . . . . 140
Calculating a Vector from Two Points . . . . . . . . . 141
Calculating the Length of a Vector . . . . . . . . . . 143
Obtaining a Point by Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Obtaining the Last-Specified Point . . . . . . . . . . 143
Using AutoCAD Snap Modes in Arithmetic Expressions . . . 144
Converting Points between UCS and WCS . . . . . . . 145
Calculating a Point on a Line . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Rotating a Point About an Axis . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Obtaining an Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Calculating a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Obtaining a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Obtaining an Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Calculating a Normal Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Using Shortcut Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
CHAMFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Contents | v
CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
CHECKSTANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Check Standards Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
CHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
CLOSEALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
COLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Select Color Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
COLOR Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
COMPILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
CONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
CONVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
CONVERTCTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
CONVERTPSTYLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
COPYBASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
COPYCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
COPYHIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
COPYLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
CUSTOMIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Customize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
New Toolbar Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Button Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CUTCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
DBCCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
DBCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
dbConnect Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Data View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Query Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Column Values Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Link Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Configure a Data Source Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 225
Data View and Query Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 225
Export Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Export Query Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Export Template Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Format Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Import Query Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Import Template Set Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Label Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Label Template Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 233
Link Conversion Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
vi | Contents
Link Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Link Template Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 239
New Label Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 240
New Link Template Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 240
New Query Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Select a Database Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 242
Select a Data Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sort Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Synchronize Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
DBLCLKEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DBLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Edit Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 248
DDPTYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Point Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
DDVPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 250
DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
DETACHURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
DIM and DIM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
DIMALIGNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
DIMANGULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
DIMBASELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
DIMCENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
DIMCONTINUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
DIMDIAMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
DIMDISASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
DIMEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
DIMLINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
DIMORDINATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
DIMOVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
DIMRADIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
DIMREASSOCIATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
DIMREGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
DIMSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Dimension Style Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 288
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes . . 288
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 308
DIMSTYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
DIMTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Contents | vii
DIVIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
DONUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
DRAGMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
DRAWORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
DSETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Drafting Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
DSVIEWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Aerial View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
DVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
DWGPROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Drawing Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 342
DXBIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
EATTEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Enhanced Attribute Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
EATTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Attribute Extraction Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
EDGESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
ELEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
ELLIPSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
ERASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
ETRANSMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Create Transmittal Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
EXPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
EXPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
EXTEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
EXTRUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
FILLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 383
FIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Find and Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Find and Replace Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 389
FOG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Fog/Depth Cue Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
GOTOURL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
GRAPHSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Object Grouping Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Order Group Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
GROUP Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
viii | Contents
HATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
HATCHEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Hatch Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
HATCHEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 410
HELP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
HIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
HLSETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 414
HYPERLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Select Place in Document Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 419
HYPERLINK Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
HYPERLINKOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Image Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
IMAGE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
IMAGEADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Image Adjust Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
IMAGEADJUST Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 432
IMAGEATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Image Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
IMAGECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
IMAGEFRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
IMAGEQUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
IMPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Insert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
INSERT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
INSERTOBJ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Insert Object Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
INTERFERE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
INTERSECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
ISOPLANE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
JPGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
JUSTIFYTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
LAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Layer Properties Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Named Layer Filters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Save Layer States Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Layer States Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Select Linetype Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Lineweight Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
LAYER Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Contents | ix
LAYERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
LAYERPMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
LAYOUTWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Layout Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
LAYTRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Layer Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Edit/New Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
LEADER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
LENGTHEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Lights Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
New or Modify Point Light Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 492
New or Modify Distant Light Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 494
New or Modify Spotlight Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . 496
North Location Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Shadow Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Geographic Location Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 501
LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
LINETYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Linetype Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 509
LINETYPE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
LOGFILEOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
LOGFILEON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
LSEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Landscape Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
LSLIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Landscape Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Landscape Library Edit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 518
LSNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Landscape New Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
LTSCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
LWEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Lineweight Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 523
LWEIGHT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
MASSPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
MATCHPROP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Property Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
x | Contents
MATLIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Materials Library Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box. . . . . . 535
Reconcile Exported Material Names Dialog Box . . . . . . 536
MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
MENULOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Menu Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 540
MENULOAD Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . 543
MENUUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
MINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
MIRROR3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
MLEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 556
MLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
MLSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 569
Element Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Multiline Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 570
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
MOVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
MREDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
MSLIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
MSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
MTEXT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Multiline Text Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Indents and Tabs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Replace Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
. . . . . . . . . . . . Stack Properties Dialog Box582
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 584
MTEXT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Unicode Strings, Control Codes, and Special Characters . . . 589
MULTIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
MVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
MVSETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Using MVSETUP on the Model Tab . . . . . . . . . . 596
Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab . . . . . . . . . . 596
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Create New Drawing Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 605
Quick Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Advanced Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
NEW Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
OFFSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Contents | xi
OLELINKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Links Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Convert Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Change Icon Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
OLESCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
OLE Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
OOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . 621
Find Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 628
Partial Open Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
OPEN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Alternate Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Color Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Command Line Window Font Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 667
Right-Click Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 667
Add Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Change Profile Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
ORTHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
OSNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
PAGESETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 682
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Page Setup) . 682
PAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Panning in Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
PAN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
Pan Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
PARTIALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Partial Load Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
PARTIALOAD Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
PARTIALOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
PASTEBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
PASTECLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .693
PASTEORIG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
PASTESPEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
Paste Special Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
PCINWIZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
PEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
PFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .710
PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712
PLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713
xii | Contents
PLOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Plot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog Box (Plot) . . 728
Plot Progress Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box . . . . . . 729
PLOT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
PLOTSTAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
Plot Stamp Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
User Defined Fields Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 738
Advanced Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 739
PLOTSTAMP Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . 742
PLOTSTYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Current Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 745
Select Plot Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
PLOTSTYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
PLOTTERMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Add-a-Plotter Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Plotter Configuration Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
Configure LPT Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 761
Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box . . . . . . . 762
PNGOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
POLYGON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
PREVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Properties Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
General Properties of Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . 770
Properties Palette with No Objects Selected . . . . . . . 771
3D Orbit View Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
3D Face Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
3D Solid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Arc Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
Attribute Definition Properties . . . . . . . . . . . 776
Block Reference Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
Body Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Circle Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
Ellipse Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
External Reference Properties . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Hatch Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
Image Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Leader Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
Line Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Multiline Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Contents | xiii
Multiline Text (Mtext) Properties . . . . . . . . . . 785
Multiple Insertion Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Point Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Polyline (2D and Lightweight) Properties . . . . . . . . 787
Polyline (3D) Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Polyline (3D Polygon Mesh) Properties . . . . . . . . . 789
Polyline (Polyface Mesh) Properties . . . . . . . . . . 790
Ray Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790
Region Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Shape Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Solid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Spline Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Text Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Tolerance Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Trace Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
Viewport Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Xline Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
PROPERTIESCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798
PSETUPIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .798
Import User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box . . . . . . . 798
PSETUPIN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
PSPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .799
PUBLISH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .800
Publish Drawing Sheets Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 801
Change Page Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Publishing Complete Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 806
PUBLISH Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
PUBLISHTOWEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808
Publish to Web Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
PURGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .809
Purge Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
PURGE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
QDIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813
QLEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814
Leader Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
QNEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .819
QSAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820
QSELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820
Quick Select Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
QTEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824
QUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824
RAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825
RECOVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825
xiv | Contents
RECTANG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
REDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
REDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
REDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
REDRAWALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
REFCLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
REFEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Reference Edit Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
REFEDIT Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
REFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
REGEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
REGENALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
REGENAUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
REGION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
REINIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
Re-initialization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 842
RENAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Rename Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
RENAME Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
RENDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
Render Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Render Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Windows Render Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 849
RENDSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
REPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Image Specifications Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 852
RESUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
REVCLOUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
REVOLVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
REVSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
RMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Materials Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
New or Modify Standard Material Dialog Box . . . . . . 862
Adjust Material Bitmap Placement Dialog Box . . . . . . 865
New or Modify Granite Material Dialog Box . . . . . . . 868
New or Modify Marble Material Dialog Box . . . . . . . 869
New or Modify Wood Material Dialog Box . . . . . . . 871
Attach by AutoCAD Color Index Dialog Box . . . . . . . 873
Attach by Layer Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
RMLIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Map Markup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
RMLIN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
ROTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
ROTATE3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
Contents | xv
RPREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .882
Rendering Preferences Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . 882
Render Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 885
Photo Real Render Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 886
Photo Raytrace Render Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . 888
File Output Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 891
RSCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .893
RULESURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .893
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .897
SAVEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .897
Save to Earlier Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Template Description Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Saveas Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
SAVEAS Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
SAVEIMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .902
Save Image Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902
TGA Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
TIFF Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
SCALE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .905
SCALETEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .906
SCENE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .908
Scenes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
New Scene Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Modify Scene Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
SCRIPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .911
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .911
SECURITYOPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .914
Security Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Confirm Password Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
Advanced Options Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . 916
SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .917
SETIDROPHANDLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .920
SETUV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .920
Mapping Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Adjust Planar Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 922
Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates Dialog Box. . . . . . . . 924
Adjust Spherical Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . 926
Adjust UVW Coordinates Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 927
Adjust Object Bitmap Placement Dialog Box . . . . . . . 928
SETVAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .931
SHADEMODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .931
SHAPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .933
SHELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .934
SHOWMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .934
xvi | Contents
SIGVALIDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . 935
Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . 936
SKETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937
SLICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939
SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
SOLDRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
SOLID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
SOLIDEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
SOLPROF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964
SOLVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
SPACETRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974
SPELL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Check Spelling Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 975
Change Dictionaries Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 977
SPHERE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978
SPLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
SPLINEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981
STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988
Configure Standards Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . 988
CAD Standards Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . 990
STATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Statistics Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992
STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993
STLOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995
STRETCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996
STYLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Text Style Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998
STYLE Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
STYLESMANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Plot Style Table Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004
Edit Lineweights Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011
SUBTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
SYSWINDOWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013
TABLET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015
TABSURF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
TEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021
Special Unicode Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027
Control Codes and Special Characters . . . . . . . . . 1027
TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable . . . . . . . 1028
TEXTSCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
TIFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
Contents | xvii
TOLERANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .1031
Symbol Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1033
Material Condition Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .1035
TOOLBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
TOOLBAR Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . .1036
TOOLPALETTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
View Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1039
Tool Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1040
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
TORUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042
TRACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
TRANSPARENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044
TRAYSETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
Tray Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1045
TREESTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1046
TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
UCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
UCSICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
UCS Icon Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1062
UCSMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
UCS Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1064
UCS Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1069
UNDEFINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070
UNDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
UNION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074
UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075
Drawing Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1075
Direction Control Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . .1077
UNITS Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1078
VBAIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
VBALOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection Dialog Box . . . . . . .1082
VBAMAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
VBA Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1083
VBARUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085
Macros Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1086
Select Project Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1088
VBA Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .1088
VBARUN Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . .1089
VBASTMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
VBAUNLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
xviii | Contents
VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
View Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091
New View Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
View Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1094
VIEW Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095
VIEWRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
VLISP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
VPCLIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099
VPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100
VPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1102
VPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
Viewports Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104
VPORTS Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108
VSLIDE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
WBLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
Write Block Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113
WBLOCK Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115
WEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116
WHOHAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
WIPEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119
WMFIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
WMFOPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
WMF In Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
WMFOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125
XATTACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
External Reference Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . 1127
XBIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130
Xbind Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
XBIND Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131
XCLIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132
XLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135
XOPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137
XPLODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138
XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140
Xref Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
Bind Xrefs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143
XREF Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
ZOOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149
Zoom Shortcut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
Contents | xix
Appendix A Command Aliases . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
Appendix B System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
Appendix C Dimension Variables Quick Reference . . . . . . 1235

Map of Dimension Variables in Dimension Style Dialog Boxes . . .1236
Dimension Variable Settings for Common Dimensioning Standards .1239
Appendix D Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Attach Digital Signatures . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .1246
Attach Digital Signatures Dialog Box. . . .
. . . . . .1246
Search Folders Dialog Box . . . . . . .
. . . . . .1247
Batch Standards Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
Batch Standards Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . .1248
AutoCAD Batch Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
SLIDELIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
Appendix E Standard Libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . 1255

Standard Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1256
Complex Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1257
Standard Hatch Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1258
PostScript Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1264
Standard Text and Symbol Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . .1265
List of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts. . . . . . . . .1265
Examples of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts . . . . . . .1267
TrueType Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1268
Geometric Characteristic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . .1269
Appendix F AutoCAD Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . 1271
Appendix G Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277

Overview of Unicode Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1278
Code Page Independent Format (CIF) . . . . . . . . . . .1278
Multibyte Interchange Format (MIF) . . . . . . . . . . .1280
Code Page Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1281
xx | Contents
Appendix H Command Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . 1283
Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . 1284
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . 1284
FROM (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . . . 1285
TRACKING (Command Modifier). . . . . . . . . . 1285
Object Snaps (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . . 1286
Selection Modes (Command Modifier) . . . . . . . . 1286
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287
Contents | xxi
xxii
Introduction
The Command Reference, a comprehensive guide to In this chapter

AutoCAD® commands, lists all AutoCAD commands in ■ Using AutoCAD
Documentation
alphabetical order.
■ Using This Reference
In addition to the command listings, the Command ■ Typographical Conventions
Reference covers several topics in the appendixes:
command aliases, system variables, dimension
variables, utilities, standard libraries, graphical
database objects, and Unicode fonts.
The index for the Command Reference is at the end of
Volume II.
1
Using AutoCAD Documentation
In addition to this Command Reference, several other resources are available to
help you learn and use AutoCAD. The complete documentation set for
AutoCAD is online. You can access it from the Help menu.
Note For the latest documentation corrections and additions, refer to the
Readme file.
Using This Reference

The Command Reference provides detailed information on all commands,
command options, and system variables. The explanations reflect the default
AutoCAD system variable settings and the default prototype drawing. If you
change system variable settings, the prompts on your screen might differ
from what you see here. For example, the setting of the FILEDIA system vari-
able governs whether you work in a dialog box or on the command line
when you use certain commands. See appendix B, “System Variables.”
Executing Commands
The process of executing a command begins by starting the command, using
one of several methods. For some commands, such as REGEN, no further
action is required. For other commands, you must respond by providing
additional information or actions in order to complete the command.
As you work with commands, note that right-clicking in the drawing area
either acts as ENTER or displays a shortcut menu. You can control this behav-
ior in the Options dialog box or with the SHORTCUTMENU system variable.
Starting Commands
You can start a command by doing one of the following:
■ Select the command from a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut menu.
■ Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt
and press ENTER or SPACEBAR .
For a list of the aliases that correspond to each command, see appendix A,
“Command Aliases.”
2 | Introduction
In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description
is a command access section, listing the specific ways you can start that com-
mand. For example, following is the command access section for the PAN
command:
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Pan ➤ Realtime
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Pan.
Command line: pan (or 'pan for transparent use)
The availability of certain shortcut menus depends on the current setting of

the SHORTCUTMENU system variable. The instructions in the command
access sections assume that you have made the indicated menu available.
You can exit a command at any time by pressing ESC .
Using Transparent Commands
In many cases, you can start a command while using another command. The
command you start is called a transparent command. For example, to turn on
the grid while drawing a line, you can start the GRID command transparently
by preceding the command with an apostrophe. Two right angle brackets
(>>) precede prompts for transparent commands.
Command: line
Specify first point: 'grid
>>Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>: on
Resuming LINE command
Specify first point:
In the Command Reference, the command access sections identify commands

that you can use transparently.
Suppressing Dialog Boxes
Many commands provide both command line and dialog box interfaces. In
most cases, when both a command line and dialog box interface are avail-
able, the command line version is preceded with a hyphen character. For
example, the command line version of GROUP is -GROUP.
You can also control the display of file dialog boxes through the FILEDIA
system variable. See appendix B, “System Variables.”
Using This Reference | 3

Responding to Prompts
If a command does not immediately execute, AutoCAD either displays a
dialog box or displays prompts on the command line requesting more
information. Command line prompts are structured as follows:
Command: commandname
Current settings: Setting1 Setting2 Setting3
Instructional text [Option1/oPtion2/opTion3/...] <default option or value>:
The optional current value line displays the current settings for the com-
mand or for system variables related to the command. The succeeding
prompts identify the type of input required to complete the command and,
when applicable, list the available options in straight brackets and a default
option or value in angle brackets. In some cases, AutoCAD determines
default options and values based on the option or value that you last speci-
fied, or based on the settings of certain system variables.
Typically, the first word of a prompt indicates the type of action you can take.
Most command line prompts begin with the word enter, select, or specify.
These words indicate how you can respond to the prompt.
Terminology in command line prompts
If the prompt starts with... You can...
Select Select objects on the screen using your pointing

device.
Enter Enter text on the command line.
Specify Use your pointing device or enter text on the

command line to select a point location on the
screen.
Selecting Options on the Command Line

To select one of the options contained within the straight brackets, you can
enter the entire option name or only the capitalized letters, and then press
ENTER or SPACEBAR . To select the default option enclosed in angle brackets
(<>), if available, press ENTER or SPACEBAR .
4 | Introduction
You can also choose command options from a shortcut menu by right-
clicking in the drawing area while the command is active. The options avail-
able on the command line appear in the shortcut menu. For information
about how to enable or disable this shortcut menu, see “Shortcut Menus” in
the User’s Guide.
Entering Data on the Command Line
Some prompts ask you to enter data, rather than (or as an alternative to)
choosing an option. To do so, enter the text on the command line and press
ENTER or SPACEBAR . However, be aware that when the command line prompt
requests an object name, SPACEBAR inserts a space on the command line
rather than acting as ENTER . This allows for the support of extended symbol
names.
Just as default command options are often provided, prompts may include
default values, enclosed in angle brackets (<>), when data is requested. For
example, the POLYGON command displays the following prompt, suggesting
4 as the number of sides for your polygon:
Command: polygon
Enter number of sides <4>:
To accept the default value, press ENTER or SPACEBAR .

Using Wild-Card Characters on the Command Line
When the prompt directions ask for a name list, such as a block name, vari-
able name, named view, and so on, you can use wild-card characters to
specify names. See the table in “Filter and Sort the List of Layers” in the User’s
Guide.
Repeating Commands
If no command is active, you can repeat the previous command by pressing
ENTER or SPACEBAR or by right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing the
Repeat Command Name option from the shortcut menu.
Accessing Recently Used Commands

You can access the six most recently used commands from a shortcut menu
by right-clicking in the command window and choosing Recent Commands.
References to Other Sections

At the end of most command descriptions, you’ll find a section called “See
Also.” This section includes references to chapters in other AutoCAD guides
and other AutoCAD commands and system variables related to the current
command.
Using This Reference | 5

Typographical Conventions
To orient you to AutoCAD features as they appear on the screen, specific
terms are set in typefaces that distinguish them from the body text. Through-
out AutoCAD documentation, the following conventions are used.
Typographical conventions
Text element Example
AutoCAD commands ADCENTER, DBCONNECT, SAVE

AutoCAD system variables DIMBLK, DWGNAME, LTSCALE
AutoCAD named-objects, such as linetypes and DASHDOT, STANDARD
styles
Prompts Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]:
Instructions after prompt sequences Select objects: Use an object selection method
File names and file name extensions acad.exe, Readme file, .dwg file extension
Folder or directory names Sample folder, c:\autocad 2002\support
Text you enter At the Command prompt, enter shape.
Keys you press on the keyboard CTRL, F10, ESC, ENTER
Keys you press simultaneously on the keyboard CTRL + C
AutoLISP variable names, sample code, and text in The variable pi is preset to a value of pi
ASCII files ***POP1
AutoLISP and DIESEL function names command ads_command( )
Formal arguments specified in function definitions The string and mode arguments
6 | Introduction
You can start a command by using one of the following methods:
■ Click the command name on a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut

menu.
■ Enter the command name or command alias at the Command prompt
and press ENTER or SPACEBAR .
For a list of the aliases that correspond to each command, see “Command
Aliases.”
In this Command Reference, near the beginning of each command description
is a command access section that lists the specific ways you can start that
command.
3D
Creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects
3D creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects in common geometric
shapes, including boxes, cones, spheres, tori, wedges, and pyramids.
When you use 3D to construct polygon mesh objects, the resulting objects
are surfaces that can be hidden, shaded, or rendered.
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ 3D Surfaces
Command line: 3d
Enter an option
[Box/Cone/DIsh/DOme/Mesh/Pyramid/Sphere/Torus/Wedge]:
Box
Creates a 3D box polygon mesh.
Specify corner point of box:
length Specify length of box: Specify a distance
Specify width of box or [Cube]: Specify a distance or enter c
width
Width
Specifies the width of the box. Enter a distance or specify a point relative to
the corner point of the box.
Specify height of box: Specify a distance
height Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle
or enter r
angle
3D | 7
Rotation Angle Rotates the box about the first corner specified. If you
enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X
and Y axes.
Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or
relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the
rotation is the first corner of the box.
Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an
angle, or press ENTER
You can define a reference angle by specifying two

points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For
example, you can rotate the box to align two specified
points on the box with a point on another object. After
defining a reference angle, specify a point for the
reference angle to align with. The box then rotates
around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation
specified for the reference angle.
If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone
determines the rotation of the box.
Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle
To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point

relative to the base point. The base point for the
rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates by
the angle between the reference angle and the new
angle. If you want to align the box with another object,
specify two points on the target object to define the
new angle of rotation for the box.
If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the
angular distance entered relative to the first corner of
the box.
Cube
Creates a cube using the length for the width and height of the box.
Specify rotation angle of box about the Z axis or [Reference]: Specify an angle
or enter r
Rotation Angle Rotates the cube about the first corner of the box. If you
enter 0, the box remains orthogonal to the current X
and Y axes.
8 | 3D
Reference Aligns the box with other objects in the drawing or
relative to an angle you specify. The base point for the
rotation is the first corner of the box.
Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify a point, enter an
You can define a reference angle by specifying two

points or an angle from the X axis on the XY plane. For
example, you can rotate the box to align two specified
points on the box with a point on another object. After
defining a reference angle, specify a point for the
reference angle to align with. The box then rotates
around the first corner relative to the angle of rotation
specified for the reference angle.
If you enter 0 as a reference angle, the new angle alone
determines the rotation of the box.
Specify the new angle: Specify a point or enter an angle
To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point

relative to the base point. The base point for the
rotation is the first corner of the box. The box rotates
the angular distance between the reference angle and
the new angle. If you want to align the box with
another object, specify two points on the target object
to define the new angle of rotation for the box.
If the reference angle of rotation is 0, the box rotates the
angular distance entered relative to the first corner
point of the box.
Cone
Creates a cone-shaped polygon mesh.
Specify center point for base of cone: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
1
Radius for Base
Defines the base of the cone by its radius.
Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or
press ENTER
3D | 9
top radius Radius for Top Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0
produces a cone. A value greater than 0 produces a
truncated cone.
height
Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
Enter number of segments for surface of cone <16>:
Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
base
Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0
radius
top diameter = 0
truncated cone.
Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance
or press ENTER
Diameter for Base

Defines the base of the cone by its diameter.
Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance
Specify radius for top of cone or [Diameter] <0>: Specify a distance, enter d, or
press ENTER
Defines the top of the cone by its radius. A value of 0
top diameter Radius for Top
truncated cone.
height Specify height of cone: Specify a distance
base diameter Diameter for Top Defines the top of the cone by its diameter. A value of 0
truncated cone.
Specify diameter for top of cone <0>: Specify a distance
10 | 3D
Dish
Creates the lower half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of dish: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of dish or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius Defines the dish by its radius.

Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish
<16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish
Diameter Defines the dish by its diameter.

Specify diameter of dish: Specify a distance
Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of dish
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dish
radius diameter
1
Dome
Creates the upper half of a spherical polygon mesh.
Specify center point of dome: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of dome or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius Defines the dome by its radius.

Enter number of longitudinal segments for surface of
dome: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome
3D | 11
Diameter Defines the dome by its diameter.
Specify diameter of dome: Specify a distance
dome <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of dome
radius diameter
Mesh
4 3 Creates a planar mesh whose M and N sizes determine the number of lines
drawn in each direction along the mesh. The M and N directions are similar
N=8 to the X and Y axes of an XY plane.
1 Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify a point (1)

Specify second corner point of mesh: Specify a point (2)
M=6 Specify third corner point of mesh: Specify a point (3)
2
Specify fourth corner point of mesh: Specify a point (4)
Enter mesh size in the M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Enter mesh size in the N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Pyramid
Creates a pyramid or a tetrahedron.
Specify first corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (1)
Specify second corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (2)
Specify third corner point for base of pyramid: Specify a point (3)
Specify fourth corner point for base of pyramid or [Tetrahedron]: Specify a point
(4) or enter t
apex point 5 Fourth Corner Point

Defines the fourth corner point of the base of a pyramid.
4 Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an

3
option
1 The Z value of the point specified determines the height for the pyramid’s
2 apex, top, or ridge line.
12 | 3D
Apex Point Defines the top of the pyramid as a point (apex).
ridge
1 Ridge Defines the top of the pyramid as a ridge line. The two
points
endpoints must lie in the same direction as the base
2 points to prevent a self-intersecting wireframe.
Specify first ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a point
(1)
Specify second ridge end point of pyramid: Specify a
point (2)
Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top

points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon
mesh.
Specify first corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a
point
Specify second corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a
point
Specify third corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a
point
Specify fourth corner point for top of pyramid: Specify a
point
Tetrahedron
Creates a tetrahedral polygon mesh.
Specify apex point of tetrahedron or [Top]: Specify a point or enter t
Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point (apex).

Top Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a triangle. If the
top points cross, they create a self-intersecting polygon
mesh.
Specify first corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify a
point (1)
Specify second corner point for top of tetrahedron: Spec-
ify a point (2)
Specify third corner point for top of tetrahedron: Specify
a point (3)
3D | 13
top Sphere
points 3
2 Creates a spherical polygon mesh.
1
1
Specify center point of sphere: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
radius Radius Defines the sphere by its radius.

sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere
diameter Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter.

Specify diameter of sphere: Specify a distance
sphere <16>: Enter a value greater than 1 or press ENTER
Enter number of latitudinal segments for surface of sphere
Torus
Creates a toroidal polygon mesh that is parallel to the XY plane of the current
UCS.
1
Specify center point of torus: Specify a point (1)
Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
The radius of the torus is measured from its center point to its outside edge,
not to the center of the tube.
Radius
torus radius Defines the torus by its radius.
tube Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

radius
The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to
the outside edge of the tube.
14 | 3D
Radius Defines the tube by its radius.
Enter number of segments around tube circumference
Enter number of segments around torus circumference
Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter.

Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance
Diameter
torus diameter
Defines the torus by its diameter.
tube
Specify diameter of torus: Specify a distance
diameter
Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
The radius of the tube of the torus is measured from the center of the tube to
the outside edge of the tube.
Radius Defines the tube by its radius.
Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter.

Specify diameter of tube: Specify a distance
3D | 15
Wedge
Creates a right-angle, wedge-shaped polygon mesh with a sloped face
tapering along the X axis.
Specify corner point of wedge: Specify a point (1)
Specify length of wedge: Specify a distance
height Specify width of wedge: Specify a distance
Specify height of wedge: Specify a distance
1 Specify rotation angle of wedge about the Z axis: Specify an angle
length
width
The base point for the rotation is the corner point of the wedge. If you enter
0, the wedge remains orthogonal to the current UCS plane.
See Also
See “Create 3D Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DVIEW establishes a viewpoint from anywhere in space.
HIDE temporarily removes lines that would be hidden
by other objects. PLAN provides a convenient means of
viewing the drawing from plan view. RENDER creates a
realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional
wireframe model using all the geometry, view, and light
information in the model. SHADEMODE provides shad-
ing and wireframe options for objects in the current
viewport. VPOINT sets the viewing position for a 3D
visualization in the current viewport. UCS controls user
coordinate systems.
3DARRAY
Creates a three-dimensional array
Modify menu: 3D Operation ➤ 3D Array
object
selected Command line: 3darray
Select objects: Use an object selection method
The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array.

Enter type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <R>: Enter an option or press ENTER
levels
Rectangular Array Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis), columns (Y

axis), and levels (Z axis). An array must have at least two
rows or two columns or two levels.
columns rows
16 | 3DARRAY
Enter the number of rows (—) <1>: Enter a positive value
or press ENTER
Enter the number of columns ( | | | ) <1>: Enter a positive
value or press ENTER
Enter the number of levels ( . . . ) <1>: Enter a positive
Specifying one row requires that more than one

column be specified, and vice versa. Specifying one
level creates a two-dimensional array.
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD® prompts:
Specify the distance between rows (—): Specify a
distance
If you specify more than one column, AutoCAD

prompts:
Specify the distance between columns ( | | | ): Specify a
distance
If you specify more than one level, AutoCAD prompts:

Specify the distance between levels ( . . . ): Specify a
distance
Positive values generate the array along the positive X,

Y, and Z axes. Negative values generate the array along
the negative X, Y, and Z axes.
Polar Array Copies objects about an axis of rotation.
Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive
value
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Specify an
angle or press ENTER
3DARRAY | 17
The specified angle determines how far AutoCAD arrays
the objects about the axis of rotation. A positive
number produces a counterclockwise array rotation. A
negative number produces a clockwise array rotation.
1 Rotate arrayed objects? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n, or
2 press ENTER
Entering y or pressing ENTER rotates each array

objects rotated element.
Specify center point of array: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point on axis of rotation: Specify a point
(2)
See Also
See “Create an Array of Objects” in the User’s Guide.
objects not rotated
Commands ARRAY copies the selected objects to a rectangular or cir-
cular pattern. Each object can be independently edited.
COPY duplicates objects. DIVIDE places evenly spaced
point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of
a selected object. GROUP creates logical groups of
objects. MEASURE measures an object and places mark-
ers at specified intervals. MINSERT inserts multiple cop-
ies of a block into a single rectangular array. MULTIPLE
causes the next command to repeat until canceled.
System Variables GRIPS turns on grips, with which you can manipulate
objects directly with the pointing device.
3DCLIP
Starts the interactive 3D view and opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window
3D Orbit toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Start the 3DORBIT command, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose More ➤ Adjust Clipping Planes.
Command line: 3dclip
AutoCAD displays the Adjust Clipping Planes window.
18 | 3DCLIP
Adjust Clipping Planes Window
The Adjust Clipping Planes window displays objects rotated at a 90-degree
angle from the current 3D Orbit view. You set the clipping planes in the
Adjust Clipping Planes window, and the results are displayed in the main 3D
Orbit view. Use the Adjust Clipping Planes toolbar, or right-click in the
Adjust Clipping Planes window and select an option from the shortcut
menu.
Adjust Clipping Planes Shortcut Menu

To choose any of the following options, right-click in the Adjust Clipping
Planes window.
Adjust Front Adjusts only the front clipping plane. The line near the
Clipping bottom of the window adjusts the front clipping plane.
If a check mark is displayed next to Front Clipping On,
you can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you
move the line up or down.
Adjust Back Adjusts only the back clipping plane. The line near the
Clipping top of the window adjusts the back clipping plane. If a
check mark is displayed next to Back Clipping On, you
can see the clipping in the 3D Orbit view as you move
the line up or down.
Create Slice Causes the back and front clipping planes to move
together, which shows you a “slice” of the objects in the
3D Orbit view. Adjust the front and back clipping
planes, and then choose Create Slice. You can then
move the front and back clipping planes as one unit.
3DCLIP | 19
Front Clipping Turns the front clipping plane on or off. A check mark
On indicates that the front clipping plane is on, and you
can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the
front clipping plane. Choose this option again to turn
the front clipping plane off and remove the check
mark.
Back Clipping On Turns the back clipping plane on or off. A check mark
indicates that the back clipping plane is on, and you
can see the results of moving the line that adjusts the
back clipping plane. Choose this option again to turn
the back clipping plane off and remove the check mark.
Close the Adjust Clipping Planes window by clicking the Close button in the
upper-right corner of the window. Closing the Adjust Clipping Planes win-
dow does not turn the clipping planes off. You can rotate the view in 3DORBIT
and still see the effect of the clipping planes. As you rotate the view, different
portions of the objects are clipped as they pass in and out of the clipping
planes.
To turn clipping planes off, right-click in the drawing area and choose More
from the shortcut menu. A check mark in front of Front Clipping On or Back
Clipping On indicates that the clipping plane is on. Choose the option that
you want to turn off. Or, choose More ➤ Adjust Clipping Planes from the
shortcut menu. Right-click in the Adjust Clipping Planes window, and ensure
that the Front Clipping On and Back Clipping On options aren’t checked.
See Also
See “Adjust Clipping Planes (3D Orbit)” in the User’s Guide.
3DCONFIG
Provides a command-line interface to the 3D graphics system’s configuration settings
If you enter 3dconfig at the Command prompt, the following prompt is dis-
played on the command line:
Enter option: [Adaptive degradation/Dynamic tessellation/Render options/
Geometry/acceLeration/eXit] <Adaptive degradation>: Enter the configuration
you want to change or press ENTER to change adaptive degradation settings.
You will stay in the 3DCONFIG command until you enter eXit or press ESC.
20 | 3DCONFIG
Adaptive Degradation
Specifies the display options to which the view can degrade to maintain the
speed of the view manipulation. For example, if a large drawing is currently
Gouraud shaded, you can select Wireframe to allow the drawing to degrade
to a wireframe representation of the view.
You can turn on one or more than one of the available options. If more than
one option is turned on, the display changes to the most detailed option first
and then degrades until it reaches the least detailed option.
Configure: Adaptive Degradation
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want adaptive degradation
turned on or off
If Adaptive Degradation is turned on, you can specify the type. If no type is
specified, then no degradation will occur.
Current display options: Wireframe Bounding Box

Enter option [Flat shaded/Wireframe/Bounding box/Maintain speed fps/eXit]
<Flat shaded>: Specify the type of adaptive degradation you want to use
Configure: Flat shaded
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want flat-shaded display
turned on or off
Configure: Wireframe
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want wireframe display
turned on or off
Configure: Bounding box
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <OFF>: Specify whether you want bounding box display
turned on or off
Configure: Maintain speed fps
Enter speed <5>: Enter a value between 1 and 60 to adjust the frame rate
Flat Shaded Specifies that the display can change to flat shaded.
Wireframe Specifies that the display can change to wireframe. This
uses less of the system resources and allows the drawing
to move at a faster speed.
Bounding Box Specifies that the display can change to a bounding
box. A box is displayed in place of each object in your
view. This choice requires the least amount of system
resources.
Maintain Speed Specifies the display speed in frames per second. The
FPS drawing degrades to maintain the specified speed.
3DCONFIG | 21
Dynamic Tesselation
Sets the options that determine the smoothness of the objects in a drawing.
AutoCAD draws objects using many short lines (or triangles when drawing
spheres). These lines are called tessellation lines. Objects in your drawing
appear smoother when you use more tessellation lines.
Configure: Dynamic tessellation
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want dynamic tessellation
turned on or off
If Dynamic Tessellation is turned on, you can specify the number of surface
tessellations, curve tessellations, or tessellations to cache.
Configure: Dynamic tessellation

Enter option [Surface tessellation/Curve tessellation/Tessellations to cache/eXit]
<Surface tessellations>: Specify the type of dynamic tessellation you want to use
Configure: Surface tessellation
Enter tolerance <88>: Enter a value between 0 and 100
Configure: Curve tessellation
Enter tolerance <88>: Enter a value between 0 and 100
Configure: Tessellations to cache
Enter number of tessellations to cache <3>: Enter a value between 1 and 10
Surface Determines the amount of detail for surfaces in your

Tessellation drawing. The lower numbers provide less detail; the
higher numbers provide more detail but use more
tessellation lines and more memory.
Curve Determines the amount of detail for curves in your
Tessellation drawing. The lower numbers provide less detail; the
higher numbers provide more detail but use more
tessellation lines and more memory.
Number of Configures your system according to memory and
Tessellations to performance requirements. A cache is a special memory
Cache subsystem that stores frequently accessed information.
The 3D cache always stores at least one tessellation.
When the number of tessellations to cache is set to 1,
the tessellation for all viewports is the same and may
cause some objects in the drawing to be regenerated as
you zoom in and out.
22 | 3DCONFIG
Setting the number of tessellations to cache to 2 or
more is useful when you have more than one viewport
with different views. Increasing the number requires
more memory.
Render Options
Makes settings available for enhancing the display of lights, materials, tex-
tures, and transparency in 3D views. This includes objects in the 3D Orbit
view and objects shaded using the SHADEMODE command.
Configure: Render options
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want to turn on render options
Configure: Render options
Enter option [Lights/Materials/eXit] <Lights>: Specify whether you want to
configure lights or materials
Configure: Lights
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want lights turned on or off
Configure: Materials
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want materials turned on or
off
If Render Options is turned on, you can specify if you want lights and mate-
rials turned on or off.
Lights In 3D views, illuminates objects and attached materials
by lights that were defined with the LIGHT command. If
this option is not selected, or if the LIGHT command has
not been used for the drawing, then the default lighting
for 3D views is used.
Enable Materials In 3D views, displays materials for objects that have
materials that were attached using the RMAT command.
If the object has no attached material, the default global
material is used. If this option is not selected, or if the
RMAT command has not been used in the drawing, then
no materials are displayed.
Configure: Textures
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want textures turned on or off
Configure: Transparency
Enter mode [Low/Medium/High] <Low>: Select a transparency level
If Materials is turned on, you can also configure textures and transparency.
3DCONFIG | 23
Enable Textures In 3D views, shows textures attached to objects using
the RMAT and SETUV commands. Materials must also be
turned on for textures to be visible.
Transparency Adjusts the transparency quality to improve image
quality, but at the expense of redraw time. At the low-
quality setting, a screen-door effect achieves
transparency without sacrificing speed. At the medium-
quality setting, blending improves image quality. At the
high-quality setting, blending and extra processing
produce an image free of visual artifacts, but at the cost
of drawing speed. Materials must also be turned on for
transparency to be visible.
Geometry
Determines how to display isolines in 3D and whether to display back faces
in 3D.
Configure: Geometry
Enter option [Isolines on top/Discard backfaces] <Isolines on top>: Specify an
option to configure
Configure: Isolines on top
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want isolines on top
Configure: Discard backfaces
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want back faces to be
discarded
Isolines on Top Displays isolines for front and back faces in all shade
modes except Hidden. Isolines for the back faces are
displayed on top of the shading for the objects in 3D.
Turning this option off hides the isolines for the back
faces.
Discard Back Discards back faces when drawing objects. You cannot
Faces see the effect of discarding back faces on some objects,
such as spheres, because you cannot see the back face
even when it is present. The effect of discarding back
faces is visible on objects such as those that don’t have
a top. Discarding back faces enhances performance.
24 | 3DCONFIG
Acceleration
Specifies whether you want to use software or hardware acceleration in 3D.
Configure: Acceleration
Enter option [Hardware/Software/eXit] <Hardware>: Specify whether you want
to configure hardware or software
Configure: Hardware
Enter option [Driver name/Geometry acceleration/Antialias lines/eXit] <Driver
name>: Specify an option to configure
Available drivers: wopengl8.hdi
Enter driver name <wopengl8.hdi>: Enter a driver name
Configure: Geometry acceleration
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want geometry acceleration
turned on or off
Configure: Antialias lines
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <ON>: Specify whether you want anti-alias lines turned
on or off
If you select Hardware, you can also specify whether geometry acceleration
and anti-alias lines are turned on or off.
Hardware Specifies hardware acceleration. Select to use the
hardware graphics card to perform most of the drawing
tasks in 3D. This speeds up the drawing time.
When you select Hardware, the default driver is set to
the wopengl8.hdi driver that is included with AutoCAD.
If you select the Driver Name option, you can select a
driver from a list of available hardware-accelerated
drivers found in the AutoCAD drv directory. If you want
to use a hardware driver from another vendor, it must
be supported by the Heidi Graphics System.
Software Specifies software acceleration. Select to use the
software graphics system to perform all of the drawing
tasks in 3D.
Geometry Specifies whether to use geometry acceleration.
Acceleration Geometry acceleration must be supported by your
graphics card. See your vendor documentation for
information on your graphics card.
3DCONFIG | 25
Using geometry acceleration makes more efficient use
of the graphics card. With this option turned on, you
are drawing in single precision. Use this option only if
you know that your drawing is within the single-
precision limit.
Anti-alias Lines Specifies using anti-aliasing lines. Lines appear
smoother and less gradient.
Exit
Exits the 3DCONFIG command.
3DCORBIT
Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to set the objects in the 3D view into
continuous motion
3D Orbit toolbar:
and choose More ➤ Continuous Orbit.
Command line: 3dcorbit
3DCORBIT changes the cursor to a sphere with two continuous lines encir-
cling it. Click in the drawing area and drag the pointing device in any
direction to start the objects moving in the direction that you’re dragging.
Release the button on the pointing device and the objects continue their
orbit in the direction that you specified. The speed of the cursor movement
determines the speed at which the objects spin.
You can change the direction of the continuous orbit by clicking and
dragging again. You can also change the display of the continuous orbit by
right-clicking in the drawing area and choosing an option from the shortcut
menu. For example, you can choose Visual Aids ➤ Grid to add a grid to the
view without exiting Continuous Orbit.
See Also
See “Use 3D Orbit Commands” in the User’s Guide.
26 | 3DCORBIT
3DDISTANCE
Starts the interactive 3D view and makes objects appear closer or farther away
3DDISTANCE simulates the effect of moving the camera closer to the objects
or farther away. Unlike 3DZOOM, 3DDISTANCE does not exaggerate the per-
spective with which you view the objects or make them appear distorted.
3D Orbit toolbar:
and choose More ➤ Adjust Distance.
Command line: 3ddistance
3DDISTANCE changes the cursor to a line with one arrow pointing up and one
pointing down. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the top of
the screen moves the camera closer to the objects, making them appear
larger. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the
screen moves the camera away from the objects, making them appear
smaller.
See Also
See “Specify 3D Views Interactively (3D Orbit)” in the User’s Guide.
3DFACE
Creates a three-dimensional face
3DFACE creates a three- or four-sided surface anywhere in 3D space. You can
specify different Z coordinate values for each corner point of a 3D face, but
if you do, the 3D face cannot be extruded. 3DFACE differs from SOLID, which
creates a three- or four-sided surface that is parallel to the current user coor-
dinate system (UCS) and cannot use different Z coordinate values for each
corner point. Also, 3DFACE creates a surface that is not filled in; SOLID creates
a filled-in surface.
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ 3D Face
Command line: 3dface
3DDISTANCE | 27
Specify first point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (1) or enter i
First Point Defines the start point for the 3D surface. After entering
the first point, enter the remaining points in a natural
clockwise or counterclockwise order to create a normal
3D face. If you locate all four points on the same plane,
AutoCAD creates a planar face that is similar to a region
object. When you shade or render the object, planar
faces are filled.
Invisible Controls which edges of a 3D face are visible, allowing
for accurate modeling of objects with holes. Entering i
or invisible before the first point of an edge makes the
edge invisible.
The invisible specification must precede any object
snap modes, XYZ filters, or coordinate input for that
edge. You can create a 3D face in which all edges are
invisible. Such a face is a phantom; it does not appear
in wireframe presentations but can hide material in line
drawings. 3D faces do appear in shaded renderings.
You can combine 3D faces to model complex 3D surfaces.
visible edges invisible edges
Specify second point or [Invisible]: Specify a point (2) or enter i

5 Specify third point or [Invisible] <exit>: Specify a point (3), enter i, or press
6 ENTER
4 Specify fourth point or [Invisible] <create three-sided face>: Specify a point (4),
enter i, or press ENTER
3
AutoCAD repeats the Third Point and Fourth Point prompts until you press
1 ENTER . Specify points 5 and 6 at these repeating prompts. When you finish
entering points, press ENTER .
2
See Also
Commands HIDE eliminates hidden lines in a wireframe. PFACE
creates a single polygon mesh containing many faces.
28 | 3DFACE
SOLID draws a solid-filled area. PROPERTIES and EDGE
change the visibility of edges.
System Variables SPLFRAME controls the display of invisible edges in
faces.
3DMESH
Creates a free-form polygon mesh
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ 3D mesh
Command line: 3dmesh
Enter size of mesh in M direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256

N Enter size of mesh in N direction: Enter a value between 2 and 256
Note 3DMESH is designed primarily for programmers. Other users should use
M the 3D command.
AutoCAD defines a polygon mesh by a matrix, the size of which is deter-

mined by M and N size values. M × N equals the number of vertices that you
must specify.
Specify location for vertex (0, 0): Enter a 2D or 3D coordinate
AutoCAD defines the location of each vertex in the mesh by m and n, the row
and column indices of the vertex. Defining vertices begins with vertex (0,0).
You must supply the coordinate locations for each vertex in row m before
specifying vertices in row m + 1.
Vertices may be any distance from each other. The M and N orientation of a
mesh depends on the position of its vertices.
3DMESH polygon meshes are always open in both M and N directions. You
open mesh can close a mesh with PEDIT.
See Also
See “Construct Meshes for Smooth Shading” in the User’s Guide.
closed mesh
3DMESH | 29
Commands EDGESURF, REVSURF, RULESURF, and TABSURF create
polygon meshes. PEDIT opens and closes a mesh, moves
selected vertices of a mesh, or fits a smooth surface to
mesh vertices. PFACE creates a general polygon mesh
called a polyface mesh. PROPERTIES edits edge visibility.
3D creates three-dimensional polygon mesh objects.
System Variables SURFU and SURFV control the accuracy of surface

approximation in the M and N direction when you use
surface fitting. SURFTYPE controls the type of surface fit-
ted by the Smooth option of the PEDIT command.
3DORBIT
Controls the interactive viewing of objects in 3D
3DORBIT enables you to manipulate the view of 3D objects by clicking and
dragging your pointing device.
You can view your entire drawing or select one or more objects before start-
ing the command. Viewing the entire drawing may degrade the video
display.
You can display ambient, point, distant, and spot lights defined with the
LIGHT command in 3D Orbit view. To display these lights, you must set
SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded, Gouraud Shaded, Flat Shaded Edges On, or
Gouraud Shaded Edges On. The Wireframe and Hidden SHADEMODE options
do not display lights. To turn on lights, from the Tools menu, choose
Options. In the Options dialog box, choose the System tab. On the System
tab under Current 3D Graphics Display, choose Properties.
View menu: 3D Orbit
Command line: 3dorbit, 3do
3DORBIT activates a 3D view in the current viewport. If the user coordinate

system (UCS) icon is on, a shaded 3D UCS icon representing the current UCS
appears in the 3D Orbit view.
The 3D Orbit view displays an arcball, which is a circle divided into four
quadrants by smaller circles. When 3DORBIT is active, the target of the view
stays stationary and the camera location, or point of view, moves around the
target. The center of the arcball, not the center of the objects you’re
viewing, is the target point.
Note You cannot edit objects while the 3DORBIT command is active.
30 | 3DORBIT
Moving your cursor over different parts of the arcball changes the cursor
icon, indicating the direction in which the view rotates.
While the command is active, you can access additional 3DORBIT options
from a shortcut menu by right-clicking in the drawing area, or choosing
buttons on the 3D Orbit toolbar. See “3DOrbit Shortcut Menu” on page 32.
Cursor Icons
View rotation is determined by the placement and appearance of the cursor
as follows:
Sphere Encircled When you move the cursor inside the arcball, it
by Two Lines changes to a small sphere encircled by two lines. If you
click and drag in the drawing area you can move freely
around the objects. It works as if your cursor were
grabbing a sphere surrounding the objects and dragging
it around the target point. You can drag horizontally,
vertically, and diagonally using this method.
Circular Arrow When you move the cursor outside the arcball, it
becomes a circular arrow. Clicking outside the arcball
and dragging the cursor around the arcball causes the
view to move around an axis that extends through the
center of the arcball, perpendicular to the screen. This
is called a roll.
If you drag the cursor into the arcball it changes to a
sphere encircled by two lines and the view moves freely.
If you move the cursor back outside the arcball, you
revert to a roll.
Horizontal Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles
on the left or right side of the arcball, it becomes a
horizontal ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of
these points rotates the view around the vertical or Y
axis through the middle of the arcball.
Vertical Ellipse When you move the cursor over one of the small circles
on the top or bottom of the arcball, it becomes a vertical
ellipse. Clicking and dragging from either of these
points rotates the view around the horizontal or X axis
through the middle of the arcball.
3DORBIT | 31
3DOrbit Shortcut Menu
When the 3DORBIT command is active, you can change the view using one
or more of the options on the 3D Orbit shortcut menu. To access the 3D Orbit
shortcut menu, right-click in the 3D Orbit view.
Pan
Moves objects in the view horizontally and vertically. See 3DPAN.
Zoom
Simulates the effect of a camera’s zoom lens. See 3DZOOM.
Orbit
Returns the view to Orbit mode after use of the other menu commands, such
as Zoom, Pan, or Continuous Orbit.
More
Accesses one of the following view options:
Adjust Distance Simulates the effect of moving the camera closer to the
object or farther away. See 3DDISTANCE.
Swivel Camera Changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates
the effect of turning the camera. See 3DSWIVEL.
Continuous Orbit Changes the cursor to a sphere with two continuous
lines encircling it and enables you to set the objects into
continuous motion. See 3DCORBIT.
Zoom Window Changes the cursor to a window icon so you can select
a specific area that you want the zoom to focus on.
When the cursor changes, click and drag the cursor to
draw a window around the area you want to select.
When you release the pick button, the drawing is
zoomed in and focused on the area you selected.
Zoom Extents Centers the view and sizes it to display all objects.
Orbit Maintains Z Keeps the Z axis in its current orientation when
dragging horizontally within the arcball circle, or when
dragging from the small circles on the left or right side
of the arcball. When using 3D Orbit, use this option to
keep the object from tumbling end-over-end. This
option is useful for changing the view of such drawings
as buildings, cars, and maps. This setting is saved with
the user profile.
32 | 3DORBIT
Orbit Uses Keeps the target point on the objects you are viewing
AutoTarget rather than on the center of the viewport. This feature
is turned on by default.
Adjust Clipping Opens the Adjust Clipping Planes window. See 3DCLIP.
Planes
Front Clipping Turns the front clipping plane on or off. A check mark
On in front of this option indicates that the front clipping
plane is on and you can see the results of moving the
line that adjusts the front clipping plane. See 3DCLIP.
Back Clipping On Turns the back clipping plane on or off. A check mark
in front of this option indicates that the back clipping
plane is on and you can see the results of moving the
line that adjusts the back clipping plane. See 3DCLIP.
Projection
Provides the projection options. A check mark displayed in front of an option
indicates that the option is selected.
Parallel Displays objects so that two parallel lines in a drawing
never converge at a single point. The shapes in your
drawing always remain the same and do not appear
distorted when they are closer.
Perspective Displays objects in perspective so that all parallel lines
converge at one point. Objects appear to recede into the
distance, and parts of the objects appear larger and
closer to you. The shapes are somewhat distorted when
the object is very close. This view correlates more
closely to what your eye sees.
Shading Modes
Provides methods for shading objects.
Wireframe Displays the objects in the 3D Orbit view using lines
and curves to represent boundaries.
Hidden Displays the objects in the 3D Orbit view as wireframes
with the lines representing the back faces hidden.
Flat Shaded Shades the objects in the 3D Orbit view between the
polygon faces. This gives the objects a faceted, less
smooth appearance.
3DORBIT | 33
Gouraud Shaded Shades the objects in the 3D Orbit view and smooths
the edges between polygon faces. This gives the objects
a smoother, more realistic appearance.
Flat Shaded, Combines the Flat Shaded and Wireframe options. The
Edges On objects are flat shaded with the wireframe showing.
Gouraud Shaded, Combines the Gouraud Shaded and Wireframe options.
Edges On The objects are Gouraud Shaded with the wireframe
showing.
Visual Aids
Provides aids to visualizing the objects.
Compass Draws a 3D sphere within the arcball composed of three
lines representing the X, Y, and Z axes.
Grid Displays a two-dimensional array of lines similar to
graph paper. This grid is oriented along the X and Y
axes.
Before starting 3DORBIT, you can use the GRID
command to set system variables that control the grid
display. The number of major grid lines corresponds to
the value you set using the Grid Spacing option of the
GRID command, which is stored in the GRIDUNIT
system variable. Ten horizontal lines and ten vertical
lines are drawn between the major lines.
UCS Icon Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. Each axis is labeled X,
Y, or Z. The X axis is red, the Y axis is green, and the Z
axis is blue.
Reset View
Resets the view back to the view that was current when you first started
3DORBIT.
Preset Views
Displays a list of predefined views such as Top, Bottom, and SW Isometric.
Choose a view from the list to change the current view of your model.
See Also
See “Overview of 3D Orbit” in the User’s Guide.
34 | 3DORBIT
3DORBITCTR
Sets the center of rotation in 3D Orbit view
3DORBITCTR starts 3D Orbit view and uses a center of rotation that you spec-
ify with your pointing device.
If you specify a point outside the current view, 3DORBITCTR ignores the spec-
ified point and uses the default center of rotation.
3DORBITCTR overrides the AutoTarget feature of the 3DORBIT command.
Command line: 3dorbitctr
3DPAN
Starts the interactive 3D view and enables you to drag the view horizontally and vertically
3D Orbit toolbar:
and choose Pan.
Command line: 3dpan
3DPAN changes the cursor to a hand cursor. When you click and drag the
cursor, the view moves in the direction that you drag. You can drag the view
vertically, horizontally, or diagonally.
You can view your entire drawing, or select one or more objects before
entering 3DPAN. Viewing the entire drawing may degrade video performance.
See Also
See “Use 3D Orbit Commands” in the User’s Guide.
3DORBITCTR | 35
3DPOLY
Creates a polyline of line segments in 3D space
new point Draw menu: 3D Polyline
previous Command line: 3dpoly
point
Specify start point of polyline: Specify a point (1)
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Specify endpoint of line or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Endpoint of Line Draws a straight line from the previous point to the
specified new point. The prompt is repeated until you
press ENTER to end the command.
Undo Deletes the last line created. You can continue drawing
from the previous point.
closing
segment Close Draws a closing line from the endpoint back to the first
point, and then ends the command. To be closed, a 3D
polyline must contain at least two lines.
See Also
Commands PEDIT edits polylines and 3D polygon meshes. SPLINE
creates an ACIS-based quadratic or cubic spline curve.
3DSIN
Imports a 3D Studio (3DS) file
3DSIN reads 3D Studio® geometry and rendering data (3DS files), including
meshes, materials, mapping, lights, and cameras. 3DSIN cannot import 3D
Studio procedural materials or smoothing groups.
Imported objects are assigned an AutoCAD color as close as possible to the
object’s 3D Studio color.
3D Studio lights are converted to the nearest AutoCAD equivalent. Ambient
light loses its color. Omni lights become point lights. Spotlights become
AutoCAD spotlights. 3D Studio cameras become AutoCAD named views.
If the name of any 3D Studio object conflicts with a name already in the
AutoCAD drawing, the 3D Studio name is assigned a sequence number to
resolve the conflict. The name might be truncated to resolve the conflict.
Insert menu: 3D Studio
36 | 3DPOLY
Command line: 3dsin
AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio File Import dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). After you choose a file to import, AutoCAD displays the
3D Studio File Import Options dialog box.
3D Studio File Import Options Dialog Box

Lists available and selected 3D objects, saves 3D objects to layers, and han-
dles objects that use multiple materials.
Available Objects
Displays the names of all objects in the 3D Studio file. You can select up to
70 objects.
Object Name and Displays the type and assigned name of each object.
Type
Add All Adds all of the objects in the Available Objects list to
the Selected Objects list.
Add Adds the objects currently selected in the Available
Objects list to the Selected Objects list.
Selected Objects
Displays the selected 3D Studio objects to import.
Object Name Displays the type and assigned name of each object.
and Type
3DSIN | 37
Remove Removes objects selected in the Selected Objects list
and returns them to the Available Objects list.
Remove All Removes all objects from the Selected Objects list and
returns them to the Available Objects list.
Save to Layers
Controls how 3D Studio objects are assigned to layers in the AutoCAD
drawing.
By Object Creates a layer for each object in the 3D Studio file and
places the object on that layer. The name of the layer is
the same as the name of the object.
By Material Creates a layer for each material in the 3D Studio file
and places objects to which that material is attached on
that layer. The name of the layer is the same as the
name of the material.
By Object Color Creates a layer for each object color in the 3D Studio
file. AutoCAD places each 3D Studio object on the layer
corresponding to its color. The name of the layer is
COLORnn, where nn is the 3D Studio color index. If the
3D Studio file contains objects with no color, AutoCAD
places these objects on a layer called COLORNONE.
Single Layer Creates a single layer called AVLAYER and places all
objects on that layer.
Multiple Material Objects

3D Studio assigns materials by face, element, or object. AutoCAD assigns
materials by object only. When AutoCAD encounters a 3D Studio object
assigned multiple materials, AutoCAD must find a way to handle the
assignment.
Always Prompt
Displays the Material Assignment Alert dialog box for each object with mul-
tiple materials. The dialog box displays the name of the object. The options
you select determine how 3DSIN handles the assignment. The options are as
follows:
Split Object by Splits the object into multiple objects, one for each
Materials material. This preserves the material assignments that
were made in the 3D Studio file. It also increases the
complexity of the drawing geometry.
38 | 3DSIN
Assign First Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple-
Material material object to the entire object. See the 3D Studio
documentation for an explanation of how the first-
assigned material is determined.
Select a Material Assigns one of the materials that was assigned to the
object in the 3D Studio file to the entire object. Select
the material from the list below this option, or choose
NONE to revert to the AutoCAD default material.
Split by Material
Splits all objects with multiple materials into multiple objects, one for each
material. This preserves the material assignments that were made in the 3D
Studio file. It also increases the complexity of the drawing geometry.
Assign First Material
Assigns the first material assigned to each multiple-material object to the
entire object. See the 3D Studio documentation for an explanation of how
the first-assigned material is determined.
Don’t Assign a Material
Assigns no material to each multiple-material object. This option loses all
material assignment information but preserves the 3D Studio geometry. The
object reverts to the AutoCAD default material.
See Also
See “Work with Data in Other Formats”in the User’s Guide.
3DSOUT
Exports to a 3D Studio (3DS) file
You can use AutoCAD geometry and rendering data with 3D Studio by con-
verting a drawing to the 3DS file format with 3DSOUT.
3DSOUT exports only those AutoCAD objects with surface characteristics. A
line or an arc must have a nonzero thickness. A trace or a polyline must have
a nonzero width or thickness. Circles, polygon meshes, and polyface meshes
are always exported. Solids and 3D faces must have at least three unique
vertices. Geometry is tessellated on export, as necessary. AME® (Advanced
Modeling Extension® ) and AutoSurf ® objects must be converted to meshes
before you use 3DSOUT.
3DSOUT converts AutoCAD named views to 3D Studio cameras and Photo
Real or Photo Raytrace lights to the nearest 3D Studio equivalent. Point lights
become omni lights. Spotlights and distant lights become 3D Studio
spotlights.
3DSOUT | 39
If the name of any AutoCAD object conflicts with a name already in the 3D
Studio drawing, the AutoCAD name is assigned a sequence number to resolve
the conflict. The name may have to be truncated to accommodate the
sequence number.
Command line: 3dsout
AutoCAD displays the 3D Studio Output File dialog box (a standard file selec-
tion dialog box). After you enter a name for the new file, AutoCAD displays
the 3D Studio File Export Options dialog box.
3D Studio File Export Options Dialog Box

Defines the source of 3D objects, converts blocks into 3D objects, and
performs smoothing and welding during the export process.
Note 3DSOUT cannot convert a selection set containing more than 65,535
vertices. If necessary, simplify the geometry using the Auto-Welding option (see
“Welding” on page 41).
Derive 3D Studio Objects From

Specifies how to group AutoCAD objects into 3D Studio objects.
Layer Creates an object from the objects on each AutoCAD
drawing layer. The name of the new object is based on
the AutoCAD layer name.
40 | 3DSOUT
AutoCAD Color Creates an object from the objects that share an ACI
Index (ACI) number. The name of the new object is based on the
color.
AutoCAD Object Creates an object from all AutoCAD objects of the same
Type type. The name of the object is based on the AutoCAD
object type.
AutoCAD Blocks
Splits a block into its components and converts them to 3D Studio objects
according to the mode set under Derive 3D Studio Objects From.
Override (Each Overrides the current Derive setting and converts each
Block Is One block into a single 3D Studio object.
Object)
Smoothing
Assigns 3D Studio smoothing groups based on the controls set in this area.
Auto-Smoothing Creates 3D Studio smoothing groups. If this option is
cleared, AutoCAD assigns no smoothing to new 3D
Studio objects.
Degrees Specifies the threshold angle for smoothing. If the
angle between two face normals is greater than this
value, AutoCAD does not smooth the face normals.
Welding
Simplifies the geometry and improves rendering time by welding congruent
or nearby vertices into a single vertex.
Auto-Welding Welds vertices. If this option is cleared, vertices remain
unchanged upon export.
Threshold Specifies a distance in WCS coordinates of the
AutoCAD drawing. If the distance between two vertices
is less than or equal to this value, AutoCAD welds the
vertices into a single vertex. The default value is 0.001.
You can enter any positive value up to eight characters
in length. The decimal point can be in any location.
See Also
See “Work with Data in Other Formats,” especially “3D Studio Files,” in the
User’s Guide.
Commands 3DSIN imports a 3D Studio file.
3DSOUT | 41
3DSWIVEL
Starts the interactive 3D view and simulates the effect of turning the camera
3D Orbit toolbar:
and choose More ➤ Swivel Camera.
Command line: 3dswivel
3DSWIVEL changes the cursor to an arched arrow and simulates the effect of
turning a camera on a tripod. This command changes the target of the view.
For example, if you were pointing a camera at an object and then turned the
camera to the right, the object would move to the left in your viewing area.
Or, if you pointed the camera up, the objects would move down in your
viewing area. Swivel simulates this motion by using the cursor as the
camera’s viewfinder.
3DZOOM
Starts the interactive 3D view so you can zoom in and out on the view
3D Orbit toolbar:
and choose Zoom.
Command line: 3dzoom
3DZOOM simulates the effect of a camera’s zoom lens. It makes objects appear
closer and farther away but does not change the position of the camera.
Zooming in magnifies the image. This also exaggerates the perspective with
which you view the objects if you’re using perspective projection. It may
slightly distort the shape of some objects.
Zoom changes the cursor to a magnifying glass with plus (+) and minus (–)
signs. Clicking and dragging the cursor vertically toward the top of the screen
zooms in on the image, making the objects appear larger or closer. Clicking
and dragging the cursor vertically toward the bottom of the screen zooms out
and makes the object appear smaller or farther away.
42 | 3DSWIVEL
ABOUT
Displays information about AutoCAD
Help menu: About
Command line: about (or 'about for transparent use)
AutoCAD® displays copyright information and product information.

Product information includes the version number and service pack, serial
number, license type and expiration date, and the text of the license agree-
ment. You can save the product information as a text file.
ACISIN
Imports an ACIS file
ACIS (a solid modeler produced by Spatial Technology, Inc.) provides a solid
modeling file format that AutoCAD can use. AutoCAD reads the model
stored in the ACIS file format and creates a body object, solid, or region in
the AutoCAD drawing.
Insert menu: ACIS File
Command line: acisin
AutoCAD displays the Select ACIS File dialog box. Select the file to import
in the File Name list. AutoCAD imports the SAT (ASCII) ACIS file into your
AutoCAD drawing.
See Also
See “Overview of Object Linking and Embedding” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ACISOUT exports AutoCAD solid objects to an ACIS file.
AMECONVERT converts Advanced Modeling Extension
(AME) solid models to AutoCAD solid objects.
ABOUT | 43
ACISOUT
Exports AutoCAD solid objects to an ACIS file
ACIS provides a solid modeling file format that AutoCAD can use to store
solid objects. An AutoCAD solid, a body, or a region can be stored as an SAT
(ASCII) file.
Note When exchanging SAT files to earlier versions of AutoCAD, you need to
set the ACISOUTVER system variable to the ACIS version used for that release. For
example, to export SAT files to AutoCAD Release 14 set ACISOUTVER to 16.
Command line: acisout
AutoCAD ignores selected objects that are not solids or regions and displays
the Create ACIS File dialog box. Enter the name of the file you want to create.
AutoCAD exports the selected objects to an ASCII file.
See Also
See “ACIS Files” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ACISIN imports an ACIS file. AMECONVERT converts
Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) solid models to
AutoCAD solid objects. EXPORT saves objects to other
file formats.
ADCCLOSE
Closes DesignCenter
Command line: adcclose
Closes the DesignCenter™ window.
See Also
Commands ADCENTER opens DesignCenter.
44 | ACISOUT
ADCENTER
Manages and inserts content such as blocks, xrefs, and hatch patterns
Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: DesignCenter
Command line: adcenter
DesignCenter™ is displayed.
DesignCenter Window
Browses, finds, and previews content, and inserts content, which includes
blocks, hatches, and external references (xrefs).
Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter for display and
access options.
When you click the Folders tab or the Open Drawings tab, the following two
panes are displayed from which you can manage drawing content:
■ Content area (right pane)

■ Tree view (left pane)
content area
tree view
content preview
content description
ADCENTER | 45
Content Area (DesignCenter)
Displays the content of the "container" currently selected in the tree view. A
container is a network, computer, disk, folder, file, or web address (URL) con-
taining information accessible by DesignCenter. Depending on the container
selected in tree view, the content area typically displays the following:
■ Folders containing drawings or other files

■ Drawings
■ Named objects contained in drawings. Named objects include blocks,
xrefs, layouts, layers, dimension styles, and text styles
■ Images or icons representing blocks or hatch patterns
■ Web-based content
■ Custom content developed by third-party applications
From the content area, you can insert blocks, hatch patterns, or attach
external references in a drawing by dragging, by double-clicking, or by right-
clicking and choosing Insert Block, Attach Xref, or Copy. You can drag or
right-click to add other content to drawings, such as layers, dimension styles,
and layouts. You can drag blocks and hatches from DesignCenter to tool
palettes.
Note You can access relevant content area and tree view options on a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the tree view or the content area.
Load
Displays the Load dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Use Load
to navigate to files on local and network drives or on the Web, and then to
select content to load in the content area.
Back
Returns to the most recent location in the history list.
Forward
Returns to the next later location in the history list.
Up
Displays the contents of the container one level above the current container.
Stop (DC Online tab)
Stops the current transfer.
Reload (DC Online tab)
Reloads the current page.
46 | ADCENTER
Search
Displays the Search dialog box (see page 49), where you can specify search
criteria to locate drawings, blocks, and nongraphical objects within
drawings.
Search also displays custom content saved on your desktop.
Favorites
Displays the contents of the Favorites folder in the content area. The Favorites
folder contains shortcuts to items you access often. You can add items to
Favorites either by right-clicking the content area or right-clicking an item in
the tree view, and then clicking Add to Favorites. To delete an item from
Favorites, use the Organize Favorites option on the shortcut menu and then
use the Refresh option on the shortcut menu.
Note AutoCAD automatically adds the DesignCenter folder to Favorites. This

folder contains drawings with discipline-specific blocks that you can insert in
drawings.
Home
Returns DesignCenter to your home folder. On installation, the home folder
is set to ...\Sample\DesignCenter. Change the home folder using the shortcut
menu in the tree view.
Tree View Toggle
Displays and hides the tree view. Hide the tree view if you need more space
in your drawing area. When the tree view is hidden, you can use the content
area to navigate to containers and to load content.
The Tree View Toggle button is not available while you're using the History
list in the tree view.
Preview
Displays and hides a preview of the selected item in a pane below the content
area. If there is no preview image saved with the selected item, the Preview
area is empty.
Description
Displays and hides a text description of the selected item in a pane below the
content area. If a preview image is also displayed, the description is displayed
below it. If there is no description saved with the selected item, the Descrip-
tion area is empty.
ADCENTER | 47
Views
Provides different display formats for the content that is loaded in the con-
tent area. You can select a view from the Views list or click the Views button
repeatedly to cycle through the display formats. The default view varies for
the type of content currently loaded in the content area.
Large Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in large icon
format.
Small Icon Displays the names of the loaded content in small icon
format.
List View Displays the names of the loaded content in a list.
Detail View Displays additional information about the loaded
content. You can sort the items by name, size, type, and
other properties, depending on the type of content that
is loaded in the content area.
Refresh (Shortcut Menu Only)
Refreshes the display in the content area to reflect any changes you have
made. Right-click the content area background and click Refresh on the
shortcut menu.
Tree View (DesignCenter)

Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your computer and network
drives, a list of open drawings, custom content, and a history of the last loca-
tions you accessed. Select an item in the tree view to display its contents in
the content area.
Note The sample\designcenter folder contains drawings containing discipline-

specific blocks that you can insert in drawings. These drawings are called symbol
library drawings.
Use the buttons in the toolbar at the top of DesignCenter to access tree view
options.
Folders Displays the hierarchy of files and folders on your
computer and network drives, including My Computer
and Network Neighborhood.
You can use ADCNAVIGATE to navigate to a specific file
name, directory location, or network path in the
DesignCenter tree view. See ADCNAVIGATE.
Open Drawings Displays all drawings currently open in the AutoCAD
session, including drawings that are minimized.
48 | ADCENTER
History Displays a list of the files that you opened most recently
in DesignCenter. With the history displayed, right-click
a file to display information about the file or to delete
the file from the History list.
DC Online Accesses the DesignCenter Online web page. When you
establish a web connection, two panes are viewed on
the Welcome page. The left side displays folders
containing symbol libraries, manufacturer sites, and
additional content libraries. When a symbol is selected,
it displays on the right-side and can be downloaded
into your drawing.
Search Dialog Box

Searches for content such as drawings, hatch patterns, and blocks.
Look For Specifies the type of content to search for. The content
type you specify determines which tabs are displayed in
the Search dialog box and the search fields it provides.
The Date Modified and Advanced tabs are displayed
only when the Drawings option is selected in Look For.
In Specifies a search path name. To enter multiple paths,
separate them with semicolons. Use Browse to select a
path from a tree view list.
ADCENTER | 49
Browse Displays a tree view in the Browse for Folder dialog box,
in which you can specify the drives and folders to
search.
Search Subfolders Includes subfolders in the search path.
Search Now Starts the search based on criteria you specify.
Stop Stops the search and displays the accumulated results in
the Search Results panel.
New Search Clears the Search For the Name box and places the
cursor in the box.
Search Results Displays the results of the search in resizable columns.
Panel Double-click an item to load it into DesignCenter.
Search Tabs (Search Dialog Box)

Displays search fields relevant to the type of content specified in the Look For
list. The name of the tab reflects the content type. You can use wild-card
characters to extend or limit your search patterns.
Search for the Specifies the text string to look for in the field you
Word(s) specify. Use the following wild-card characters to
broaden your search:
■ * (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used
anywhere in the search string.
■ ? (Question mark): Matches any single character, for
example, ?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on.
This option is available on the Drawings tab and, when

available, the Custom Content tab.
In the Field(s) Specifies the property fields to search. To search all the
fields, select All Fields. For drawings, all fields other
than File Name are derived from the information
entered in the Drawing Properties dialog box
(DWGPROPS).
This option is available on the Drawings tab and the
Custom Content tab.
Note Custom content developed by third-party
applications may not provide fields for searches using the
Search dialog box.
50 | ADCENTER
Search for the Specifies the name of the drawing, block, layer, xref, or
Name other content type that you want to find.
This option is available on all tabs except Drawings and
Custom Content.
Date Modified Tab (Search Dialog Box)

Finds content that was created or modified during a certain time period.
All Files
Finds all the files that match the criteria you specify on other tabs, regardless
of creation date or date modified. This is the default setting.
Find All Files Created or Modified
Finds files created or modified during a specific time period. The search
locates files that match the criteria you specify on this and other tabs.
Between Searches for files created or modified between the dates
you specify.
During the Searches for files created or modified within the
Previous number of months you specify.
Month(s)
During the Searches for files created or modified within the
Previous Day(s) number of days you specify.
Advanced Tab (Search Dialog Box)

Finds content within drawings; this tab is available only when you select
Drawings in Look For.
Containing Specifies the type of text in a drawing that you want to
search for. For example, you can search for text
contained within a block attribute, such as a
manufacturer's catalog number.
Containing Text Specifies the text you want to search for.
Size Is Specifies a minimum or maximum file size. Select At
Least or At Most, and enter a value in KB.
ADCENTER | 51
See Also
See “DesignCenter” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ADCCLOSE closes DesignCenter on the command line.
ADCNAVIGATE directs the Desktop tree view in Design-
Center to the file name, directory location, or network
path you specify. BLOCK creates blocks and saves them
with preview images and text descriptions. OPTIONS
sets the INSUNITSDEFSOURCE and INSUNITSDEFTARGET
system variables.
System Variables INSUNITS specifies the Autoscale setting AutoCAD uses
when inserting blocks into drawings.
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE sets the units value for the source
content. INSUNITSDEFTARGET sets the units value for the
target drawing.
ADCNAVIGATE
Loads a specified DesignCenter drawing file, folder, or network path
Command line: adcnavigate
Enter pathname <current>:
The path or drawing file name you specify is loaded in the tree view of the
DesignCenter™ Folders tab.
At the prompt, you can enter a path in any of the following formats:
■ Folder path: c:\project files\electrical

■ Folder path and a file name: c:\project files\electrical\circuit2.dwg
■ UNC network path: \\server1\campus_project
AutoCAD automatically displays DesignCenter, switches to the Folder tab,

and loads the path or drawing file name that you specified.
ADCNAVIGATE supports remote domains or workgroups if you have the target
domain or workgroup mapped to a drive letter.
See Also
Commands ADCCLOSE closes DesignCenter. ADCENTER opens
DesignCenter.
52 | ADCNAVIGATE
ALIGN
Aligns objects with other objects in 2D and 3D
Use ALIGN to move, rotate, or scale objects into alignment with other objects.
Add source points to the objects you want to align, and add destination points
to the objects to which you want the source objects to align. You can add up
to three pairs of source and destination points to align an object.
Modify menu: 3D Operation ➤ Align
Command line: align
Select objects: Select the objects you want to align and press ENTER
ALIGN Using One Specify first source point: Specify a point (1)
Pair of Points Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2)
Specify second source point: Press ENTER
When you select only one source point and destination

point pair, the selected objects move in 2D or 3D from
the source point (1) to the destination point (2).
1
2
two points specified result
ALIGN Using Two Specify first source point: Specify a point (1)
Pairs of Points Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2)
Specify second source point: Specify a point (3)
Specify second destination point: Specify a point (4)
Specify third source point: Press ENTER
Scale objects based on alignment points [Yes/No] <No>:
Enter y or press ENTER
ALIGN | 53
1
3
2
objects selected four points specified result
When you select two point pairs, you can move, rotate,
and scale the selected objects in 2D or 3D to align with
other objects.
The first set of source and destination points defines the
base point for the alignment (1, 2). The second set of
points defines the angle of rotation (3, 4).
After you enter the second set of points, AutoCAD
prompts you to scale the object. AutoCAD uses the
distance between the first and second destination
points (2, 4) as the reference length to which the object
is scaled. Scaling is available only when you are aligning
objects using two point pairs.
Note If you use two source and destination points to
perform a 3D alignment on nonperpendicular working
planes, you get unpredictable results.
ALIGN Using Specify first source point: Specify a point (1)
Three Pairs of Specify first destination point: Specify a point (2)
Points Specify second source point: Specify a point (3)
Specify second destination point: Specify a point (4)
Specify third source point: Specify a point (5)
Specify third destination point: Specify a point (6)
54 | ALIGN
3
5 6
1
2
4
objects selected six points specified result
When you select three point pairs, you can move and
rotate the selected objects in 3D to align with other
objects.
The selected objects move from the source point (1) to
the destination point (2).
The selected object is rotated (1 and 3) so that it aligns
with the destination object (2 and 4).
The selected object is then rotated again (3 and 5) so
that it aligns with the destination object (4 and 6).
See Also
Commands MOVE displaces objects a specified distance in a speci-
fied direction. ROTATE moves objects about a base
point.
System Variables GRIPS turns on grips, with which you can manipulate
objects directly using the pointing device.
AMECONVERT
Converts AME solid models to AutoCAD solid objects
Command line: ameconvert
The objects you select must be Advanced Modeling Extension (AME) Release
2 or 2.1 regions or solids. AutoCAD ignores all other objects.
Because of increased accuracy in the new AutoCAD solid modeler, AME
models may look slightly different after conversion. This difference is notice-
able where the previous version of the AutoCAD solid modeler identified the
surfaces of two different shapes as so close as to be considered in the same
AMECONVERT | 55
plane. The new AutoCAD solid modeler’s finer tolerance may interpret these
surfaces as being slightly offset. This phenomenon is most apparent with
aligned features such as fillets, chamfers, and through-holes.
Holes might become blind holes when the new modeler, with its much finer
approximation capability, interprets what was once a through-hole as being
slightly less wide than the solid. Typically, the length of the remaining solid
material is the difference between the tolerance of the previous modeler and
that of the new modeler.
Likewise, updated fillets or chamfers can occasionally be placed slightly
below the surface, creating a hole through the solid, leaving the original
shape unaltered. Also, drawing fillets or chamfers slightly above the original
surface creates an uneven transition between the solid and the fillet or
chamfer.
APERTURE
Controls the size of the object snap target box
Command line: aperture (or 'aperture for transparent use)
Object snap target height (1–50 pixels) <current>: Enter a value (1–50) or press
ENTER
Object snap applies only to objects inside or crossing the object snap target
box. The APBOX system variable controls whether the object snap target box
is displayed. The number of pixels you enter using APERTURE controls the size
of the object snap box. The higher the number, the larger the target box. You
can also change this setting in the Options dialog box, Drafting tab.
target APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the pickbox displayed at
box the Select Objects prompt. The object selection pickbox is controlled by the
PICKBOX system variable.
See Also
target
Commands OSNAP sets running object snap modes and changes the
box
target box size. OPTIONS (the Selection tab) sets object
selection modes and changes the pickbox size.
System Variables APERTURE controls the object snap target box, not the
pickbox displayed at the Select Objects prompt. PICK-
BOX controls the object selection pickbox size.
56 | APERTURE
APPLOAD
Loads and unloads applications and defines which applications to load at startup
If you need to use applications that are not automatically loaded when you
start AutoCAD, you can use APPLOAD to load applications, unload applica-
tions, store a history list of applications you’ve loaded, and create a start-up
list of applications to be loaded each time you start AutoCAD.
You can load applications of the following file types:
■ AutoLISP® (.lsp)
■ ObjectARX™ (.arx)
■ VBA (.dvb)
■ ObjectDBX™ (.dbx)
■ Fast Load AutoLISP (.fas)
■ Visual LISP™ executables (.vlx)
Some ObjectARX applications require user interaction upon loading the

application and may not load properly with APPLOAD. Use the ARX command
to load these applications.
Tools menu: Load Application
Command line: appload
AutoCAD displays the Load/Unload Applications dialog box.
APPLOAD | 57
Load/Unload Applications Dialog Box
Loads and unloads applications and specifies applications to be loaded at
start-up.
The options at the top of this dialog box are derived from the standard file
selection dialog box (see page 621). Following are descriptions of the addi-
tional options provided by the Load/Unload Applications dialog box:
Load Loads or reloads the applications that are currently
selected in either the files list or on the History List tab.
Load is unavailable until you select a file that you can
load. AutoCAD loads ObjectARX, VBA, and DBX
applications immediately, but LSP, VLX and FAS
applications are queued and then loaded when you
close the Load/Unload Applications dialog box.
If you select a file that is already loaded, Load reloads
the application when applicable. You cannot reload
ObjectARX applications. In this case, you must first
unload the ObjectARX application, and then load it
again. The Load option is also available from a shortcut
menu by right-clicking a file on the History List tab.
58 | APPLOAD
Loaded Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of currently
Applications loaded applications. LISP routines are displayed in this
list only if you loaded them in the Load/Unload
Applications dialog box. You can drag files into this list
from the files list or from any application with dragging
capabilities, such as Microsoft® Windows® Explorer.
If you use the AutoCAD Web Browser to load an
application, the Web Browser downloads the
application to a temporary location on your machine.
This is the location from which AutoCAD loads the
application, as displayed in this list.
You can also unload certain applications from this list.
See the Unload option for details. Files that you cannot
unload are not available for selection.
History List Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of
applications that you previously loaded with Add To
History selected. You can drag files into this list from
the files list, or from any application with dragging
capabilities, such as Windows Explorer. If Add To
History is not selected when you drag files into this list,
the dragged files are loaded but not added to the history
list.
You can load and remove applications from this list, but
to unload applications, you must use the Loaded
Applications tab. See the Load, Unload, and Remove
options.
Add to History Adds any applications that you load to the history list.
You may prefer to clear this option when loading
applications with the AutoCAD Web Browser, because
these applications are unavailable once the cache for
the application’s temporary location is emptied.
Unload Unloads the selected applications. Unload is available
only when you select a file that you can unload on the
Loaded Applications tab. LISP applications cannot be
unloaded, nor can ObjectARX applications that are not
registered for unloading.
APPLOAD | 59
Remove Removes the selected applications from the history list.
Remove is available only when you select a file on the
History List tab. Note that Remove does not unload the
selected application. The Remove option is also
available from a shortcut menu by right-clicking an
application on the History List tab.
Startup Suite Contains a list of applications that AutoCAD loads each
time you start AutoCAD. You can drag application files
from the files list, or from any application with
dragging capabilities such as Windows Explorer, into
the Startup Suite area to add them to the Startup Suite.
Click the Start-up Suite icon or Contents to display the
Startup Suite dialog box. You can also add files to the
Startup Suite by right-clicking an application on the
History List tab and choosing Add to Startup Suite from
the shortcut menu.
You cannot add applications that you load with the
AutoCAD Web Browser to the Startup Suite.
Status Line Displays messages that indicate the status of loading
and unloading operations.
Startup Suite Dialog Box

Adds and removes application files from the Startup Suite. These are the
applications that AutoCAD loads each time you start AutoCAD.
List of Displays an alphabetical list (by file name) of the

Applications application files to load at startup.
60 | APPLOAD
Add Displays the Add File to Startup Suite dialog box. You
can use this dialog box to select files to add to the
startup suite.
Remove Removes selected files from the Startup Suite.
See Also
See “Use AutoLISP Applications” in the Customization Guide.
Commands ARX loads, unloads, and provides information about
ObjectARX applications.
ARC
Creates an arc
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Arc
Command line: arc
Specify start point of arc or [CEnter]: Specify a point, enter ce, or press ENTER to
start tangent to last line, arc, or polyline
Start Point
Specifies the starting point of the arc.
Note If you press ENTER without specifying a point, AutoCAD uses the end-
point of the last drawn line or arc and immediately prompts you to specify the
endpoint of the new arc. This creates an arc tangent to the last drawn line, arc,
or polyline.
Specify second point of arc or [CEnter/ENd]:
Second Point
2 Draws an arc using three specified points on the arc’s circumference. The first
3 point is the start point (1). The third point is the endpoint (3). The second
1 point (2) is a point on the circumference of the arc.
Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)
You can specify a three-point arc either clockwise or counterclockwise.
ARC | 61
Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify center point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point Using the center point (2), draws an arc

3 counterclockwise from the start point (1) to an
1
2 endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn from the
center point through the third point (3).
The arc does not necessarily pass through this third
included
point, as shown in the illustration.
angle
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1)
using a center point (2) with a specified included angle.
1 If the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc.
2
Specify included angle: Specify an angle
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the

distance of a straight line between the start point and
endpoint.
2
1 If the chord length is positive, AutoCAD draws the
length of minor arc counterclockwise from the start point. If the
chord chord length is negative, AutoCAD draws the major arc
counterclockwise.
Specify length of chord: Specify a length
End
Specifies the endpoint of the arc.
Specify end point of arc:
Specify center point of arc or [Angle/Direction/Radius]:
imaginary Center Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1)
ray to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn
2
from the center point (3) through the second point
3 1 specified (2).
center point
Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (1)
to an endpoint (2), with a specified included angle. If
the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc.
Specify included angle: Enter an angle in degrees or specify
an angle by moving the pointing device counterclockwise
62 | ARC
Direction Begins the arc tangent to a specified direction. It creates
angle any arc, major or minor, clockwise or counterclockwise,
2
2 beginning with the start point (1), and ending at an
1
direction 1 endpoint (2). AutoCAD determines the direction from
the start point.
Specify tangent direction for the start point of arc:
2
Radius Draws the minor arc counterclockwise from the start
1 point (1) to the endpoint (2). If the radius is negative,
radius AutoCAD draws the major arc.
Specify radius of arc:
Center
Specifies the center of the circle of which the arc is a part.
Specify start point of arc:
Specify end point of arc or [Angle/chord Length]:
End Point Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2)
to an endpoint that falls on an imaginary ray drawn
3 2 from the center point (1) through a specified point (3).
1
included angle Angle Draws an arc counterclockwise from the start point (2)
using a center point (1) with a specified included angle.
If the angle is negative, AutoCAD draws a clockwise arc.
Specify included angle:
1 2
Chord Length Draws either a minor or a major arc based on the
distance of a straight line between the start point and
endpoint.
1 2
If the chord length is positive, AutoCAD draws the
length minor arc counterclockwise from the start point. If the
of chord chord length is negative, AutoCAD draws the major arc
counterclockwise.
Specify length of chord:
Tangent to Last Line, Arc, or Polyline
Draws an arc tangent to the last line, arc, or polyline drawn when you press
ENTER at the first prompt.
1 Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (1)
ARC | 63
See Also
See “Draw Arcs” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ELLIPSE creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc.
AREA
Calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of defined areas
Total area and perimeter are saved in the AREA and PERIMETER system
variables.
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Area
Command line: area
Specify first corner point or [Object/Add/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter

an option
First Corner Point

Calculates the area and perimeter you define by specifying points. All points
1 5 must lie in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the current user coordinate
3 system (UCS).
2 4
defining an area Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total: Specify a point (2)
and perimeter
Continue to specify points to define a polygon and then press ENTER to
complete the definition of the perimeter.
If you do not close the polygon, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were
area defined
drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perime-
ter, AutoCAD adds in that line length.
Object
Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object. You can calculate the
area of circles, ellipses, splines, polylines, polygons, regions, and solids.
Note 2D solids (created with the SOLID command) do not have an area
reported.
64 | AREA
Select objects:
If you select an open polyline, AutoCAD calculates the area as if a line were
drawn from the last point entered to the first. When calculating the perime-
ter, however, AutoCAD ignores that line.
open polyline area defined

selected
The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area and perimeter (or
length) calculations.
Add
Turns on Add mode and keeps a running balance of the total area as you con-
tinue to define areas. The Add option calculates the individual areas and
perimeters of defined areas and objects as well as the total area of all defined
areas and objects. You can use the Subtract option to subtract specified areas
wide ployline from the total area.
Specify first corner point or [Object/Subtract]: Specify a point (1) or enter an
option
Calculates the area and perimeter you define by
First Corner Point
selecting points. All points must lie in a plane parallel
to the XY plane of the current UCS.
2
1 Specify next corner point or press ENTER for total (ADD
3
mode): Specify a point (2)
defined area to
be added Specify points to define a polygon (3). Press ENTER and
AutoCAD calculates the area and perimeter.
Furthermore, AutoCAD returns the total area of all the
areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add
mode was turned on.
If you do not close the polygon, AutoCAD calculates
new area
the area as if a line were drawn from the last point
entered to the first. When calculating the perimeter,
AutoCAD adds that line length.
AREA | 65
Object Calculates the area and perimeter of the selected object.
(ADD mode) Select objects:
AutoCAD calculates the area and perimeter.

Furthermore, AutoCAD returns the total area of all the
areas defined by selecting points or objects since Add
mode was turned on.
If you select an open polyline, AutoCAD calculates the
area as if a line were drawn from the last point entered
to the first. When calculating the perimeter, however,
AutoCAD ignores that line.
The centerline of a wide polyline is used to make area
and perimeter calculations.
Subtract Turns on Subtract mode and keeps a running balance of
the total area as you subtract specified areas.
selected area to
be subtracted Subtract
Similar to the Add option, but subtracts areas and perimeters.
See Also
remaining area See “Obtain Area Information” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BOUNDARY calculates and displays the area associated
with the selected objects. MASSPROP calculates and dis-
plays the mass of selected solids. LIST displays database
information for the selected objects.
System Variables AREA stores the sum of areas collected. PERIMETER dis-
plays the perimeter of the object last found by AREA.
ARRAY
Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern
Each object in an array can be manipulated independently. If you select mul-
tiple objects from which to construct the array, AutoCAD counts the objects
as one item to be copied and arrayed.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Array
Command line: array
66 | ARRAY
The Array dialog box is displayed. You can create rectangular or polar arrays
by choosing the appropriate option.
If you enter -array at the Command prompt, ARRAY displays prompts on the
command line (see page 72).
Array Dialog Box

Creates multiple copies of objects in a pattern. Use the Rectangular Array
option to create an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies
of the selected object. Use the Polar Array option to create an array by copy-
ing the selected objects around a center point.
Rectangular Array
Creates an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies of the
selected object.
distance
1 between rows
object selected
distance between columns
ARRAY | 67
Rows
Specifies the number of rows in the array.
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column. If you spec-
ify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD might take a
while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array ele-
ments that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by
the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for exam-
ple, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Columns
Specifies the number of columns in the array.
If you specify one column, you must specify more than one row. If you spec-
ify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD might take a
while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of array ele-
ments that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit is set by
the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000, for exam-
ple, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Offset Distance and Direction
Provides a space for you to specify the distance and direction of the array’s
offset.
Row Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between rows. To add
rows downward, specify a negative value. To specify
row spacing with the pointing device, use the Pick Both
Offsets button or the Pick Row Offset button.
Column Offset Specifies the distance (in units) between columns. To
add columns to the left, specify a negative value. To
specify column spacing with the pointing device, use
the Pick Both Offsets button or the Pick Column Offset
button.
Angle of Array Specifies the angle of rotation. This angle is normally 0,
so the rows and columns are orthogonal with respect to
the X and Y drawing axes of the current UCS. You can
change the measurement conventions for angles using
UNITS. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect
the angle of arrays.
Pick Both Offsets Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
use the pointing device to set the row and column
spacing by specifying two diagonal corners of a
rectangle.
68 | ARRAY
Pick Row Offset Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
use the pointing device to specify the distance between
rows. AutoCAD prompts you to specify two points and
uses the distance and direction between the points to
specify the value in Row Offset.
Pick Column Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
Offset use the pointing device to specify the distance between
columns. AutoCAD prompts you to specify two points
and uses the distance and direction between the points
to specify the value in Column Offset.
Pick Angle of Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
Array specify the angle of rotation by entering a value or
using the pointing device to specify two points. You can
change the measurement conventions for angles using
UNITS. The ANGBASE and ANGDIR system variables affect
the angle of arrays.
Polar Array
Creates an array by copying the selected objects around a center point.
1
1
2 2
polar array with polar array angle to

objects rotated fill=180; objects not
rotated
Center Point
Specifies the center point of the polar array. Enter coordinate values for X and
Y, or choose Pick Center Point to use the pointing device to specify the
location.
Pick Center Point
Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can use the pointing
device to specify the center point in the AutoCAD drawing area.
ARRAY | 69
Method and Values
Specifies the method and values used to position objects in the polar array.
Method Sets the method used to position objects. This setting
controls which of the Method and Value fields are
available for specifying values. For example, if the
method is Total Number of Items & Angle to Fill, the
related fields are available for specifying values; the
Angle Between Items field is not available.
Total Number of Sets the number of objects that appear in the resultant
Items array. The default value is 4.
Angle to Fill Sets the size of the array by defining the included angle
between the base points of the first and last elements in
the array. A positive value specifies counterclockwise
rotation. A negative value specifies clockwise rotation.
The default value is 360. A value of 0 is not permitted.
Angle Between Sets the included angle between the base points of the
Items arrayed objects and the center of the array. Enter a
positive value. The default direction value is 90.
Note You can choose the Pick buttons and use the
pointing device to specify the values for Angle to Fill and
Angle Between Items.
Pick Angle to Fill Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
define the included angle between the base points of
the first and last elements in the array. AutoCAD
prompts you to select a point relative to another point
in the AutoCAD drawing area.
Pick Angle Temporarily closes the Array dialog box so that you can
Between Items define the included angle between the base points of
the arrayed objects and the center of the array.
AutoCAD prompts you to select a point relative to
another point in the AutoCAD drawing area.
Rotate Items as Copied
Rotates the items in the array, as shown in the preview area.
More/Less
Turns the display of additional options in the Array dialog box on and off.
When you choose More, additional options are displayed, and the name of
this button changes to Less.
70 | ARRAY
Object Base Point
Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the selected objects that will
remain at a constant distance from the center point of the array as the objects
are arrayed. To construct a polar array, AutoCAD determines the distance
from the array’s center point to a reference (base) point on the last object
selected. The point used depends on the type of object, as shown in the
following table.
Base point settings by object
Object type Default base point
Arc, circle, ellipse Center point
Polygon, rectangle First corner
donut, line, polyline, 3D polyline, ray, spline Starting point
Block, paragraph text, single-line text Insertion point
Construction lines Midpoint
Region Grip point
Set to Object’s Uses the default base point of the object to position the
Default arrayed object. To manually set the base point, clear
this option.
Base Point Sets a new X and Y base point coordinate. Choose Pick
Base Point to temporarily close the dialog box and
specify a point. After you specify a point, the Array
dialog box is redisplayed.
Note To avoid unexpected results, set the base point
manually if you are constructing a polar array and do not
want to rotate the objects.
Select Objects
Specifies the objects used to construct the array. You can select objects before
or after the Array dialog box is displayed. To select objects when the Array
dialog box is displayed, choose Select Objects. The dialog box temporarily
closes. When you finish selecting objects, press ENTER . The Array dialog box
is redisplayed, and the number of objects selected is shown below the Select
Objects button.
ARRAY | 71
Note If you select multiple objects, the base point of the last selected object is
used to construct the array.
Preview Area
Shows a preview image of the array based on the current settings in the
dialog box. The preview image is dynamically updated when you move to
another field after changing a setting.
Preview
Closes the Array dialog box and displays the array in the current drawing.
Choose Modify to return to the Array dialog box to make changes.
ARRAY Command Line

If you enter -array at the Command prompt, ARRAY displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter the type of array [Rectangular/Polar] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Rectangular
Creates an array defined by a number of rows and columns of copies of the
selected objects.
distance
1 between rows
object selected
distance between columns
Enter the number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER
Enter the number of columns (|||) <1>: Enter a nonzero integer or press ENTER
If you specify one row, you must specify more than one column and vice
versa.
AutoCAD assumes the selected object, or cornerstone element, to be in the
lower-left corner, and generates the array up and to the right.
72 | ARRAY
The specified distance between the rows and columns includes the corre-
sponding lengths of the object to be arrayed.
Enter the distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
To add rows downward, specify a negative value for the distance between
rows. AutoCAD skips the next prompt if you specify two points for the oppo-
site corners of a rectangle.
Specify the distance between columns (|||):
To add columns to the left, specify a negative value for the distance between
columns. AutoCAD constructs rectangular arrays along a baseline defined by
the current snap rotation. This angle is normally 0, so the rows and columns
are orthogonal with respect to the X and Y drawing axes. The Rotate option
of the SNAP command changes the angle and creates a rotated array. The
SNAPANG system variable stores the snap rotation angle.
If you specify a large number of rows and columns for the array, AutoCAD
might take a while to create the copies. By default, the maximum number of
array elements that you can generate in one command is 100,000. The limit
is set by the MAXARRAY setting in the registry. To reset the limit to 200,000,
for example, enter (setenv "MaxArray" "200000") at the Command prompt.
Polar
Creates an array defined by specifying a center point or base point about
which AutoCAD replicates the selected objects.
1
1
2 2
polar array with polar array angle to

objects rotated fill=180; objects not
rotated
Specify center point of array or [Base]: Specify a point or enter b to specify a new
base point
Center Point Creates an array defined by a center point.
ARRAY | 73
Base Specifies a new reference (base) point relative to the
selected objects that will remain at a constant distance
from the center point of the array as the objects are
arrayed.
Specify the base point of objects: Specify a point
Enter the number of items in the array: Enter a positive integer or press ENTER
If you enter a value for the number of items, you must specify either the
angle to fill or the angle between items. If you press ENTER (and do not pro-
vide the number of items), you must specify both.
Specify the angle to fill (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
AutoCAD sees 0 as no response. You can enter 0 for angle to fill only if you
specify the number of items.
If you specify an angle to fill without providing the number of items, or if
you specify the number of items and enter 0 as the angle to fill or press
ENTER , AutoCAD prompts for the angle between items:
Angle between items: Specify an angle
If you specified the number of items and entered 0 as the angle to fill or
pressed ENTER , AutoCAD prompts for a positive or negative value to indicate
the direction of the array:
Angle between items (+=ccw, -=cw): Enter a positive integer for a
counterclockwise rotation or a negative integer for a clockwise rotation
AutoCAD determines the distance from the array’s center point to a reference
point on the last object selected. AutoCAD uses the center point of a circle or
arc, the insertion base point of a block or shape, the start point of text, and
one endpoint of a line or trace.
Rotate arrayed objects? <Y>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
In a polar array, AutoCAD uses the reference point of the last object in the
selection set for all objects. If you defined the selection set by using window
or crossing selection, the last object in the selection set is arbitrary. Removing
an object from the selection set and adding it back forces that object to be
the last object selected. You can also make the selection set into a block and
replicate it.
See Also
See “Create an Array of Objects” in the User’s Guide.
74 | ARRAY
Commands BLOCK creates blocks from a group of objects. SNAP
locks points entered by a pointing device into align-
ment with an imaginary rectangular grid, the rotation
and X and Y spacing of which can be changed.
System Variables SNAPANG stores the current UCS-relevant snap and grid
rotation for the current viewport.
ARX
Loads, unloads, and provides information about ObjectARX applications
ObjectARX applications can be third-party programs or internal applications
such as Render or the Multiline Text Editor.
Command line: arx
Enter an option [?/Load/Unload/Commands/Options]:
?—List Applications
Lists the currently loaded ObjectARX applications.
Load
Displays the ObjectARX/DBX File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). This option loads the specified ObjectARX application.
Unload
Unloads the specified ObjectARX application.
Enter ARX/DBX file name to unload:
Commands
Lists the AcEd-registered commands (AcEd-registered commands are
described in the ObjectARX Developer’s Guide).
Options
Presents developer-related ObjectARX application options. These options are
explained in greater detail in the ObjectARX Developer’s Guide.
Enter an option [Group/CLasses/Services]: Enter an option or press ENTER
ARX | 75
Group Causes the specified group of commands to be the first
group searched when resolving the names of AutoCAD
commands.
Classes Displays a class hierarchy of C++ classes derived from
objects registered in the system.
Services Lists the names of all registered services.
ASSIST
Opens the Active Assistance window, which provides either automatic or on-demand
context-sensitive information
Help menu: Active Assistance
Command line: assist (or 'assist for transparent use)
When you open the Active Assistance window, the Active Assistance icon is
added to your Windows system tray at the lower edge of your screen.
Active Assistance continually monitors your actions in AutoCAD and dis-
plays information directly related to the active command or dialog box in the
Active Assistance window. You can manually hide and show the Active Assis-
tance window at any time. You can also control how and when the window
is automatically opened. For example, you may prefer to open the Active
Assistance window only while you work in a dialog box.
Active Assistance options are available through the Active Assistance icon
shortcut menu and the Active Assistance window shortcut menu.
Active Assistance Icon Shortcut Menu

Provides options for closing Active Assistance and controlling when and how
Active Assistance displays information. Right-click the Active Assistance icon
in the Windows system tray, located on the Windows taskbar.
Active Assistance icon
76 | ASSIST
Show Active Displays the Active Assistance window, which contains
Assistance information relevant to the active command or dialog
box. You can also display the Active Assistance window
by double-clicking the icon in the system tray. When
you display the window using either of these methods,
the Activation option specified in the Active Assistance
Settings dialog box is ignored until you close the
window.
Settings Displays the Active Assistance Settings dialog box (see
page 78), in which you can specify when and how
Active Assistance displays information.
Exit Closes Active Assistance. Use the ASSIST command to
restart Active Assistance.
Active Assistance Window Shortcut Menu

Provides options for working in the Active Assistance window and control-
ling when and how Active Assistance displays information. Right-click inside
the Active Assistance window.
Home Displays the Active Assistance topic that describes how
to use the Active Assistance window.
Back Moves backward through the history of Help topics
that you have viewed.
Forward Moves forward through the history of Help topics that
you have viewed.
Print Prints the current Help topic.
Settings Displays the Active Assistance Settings dialog box, in
which you can specify when and how Active Assistance
displays information.
ASSIST | 77
Active Assistance Settings Dialog Box
Specifies when and how Active Assistance displays information.
Show On Start
Starts Active Assistance when AutoCAD starts. If you clear this option and
close all AutoCAD sessions, use the ASSIST command to restart Active
Assistance.
Activation
Specifies the conditions in which the Active Assistance window is automati-
cally displayed.
All Commands Automatically opens the Active Assistance window
when any command is activated.
New and Automatically opens the Active Assistance window
Enhanced when any new or enhanced commands are activated.
Commands
Dialogs Only Automatically opens the Active Assistance window
when a dialog box is displayed. You cannot close the
Active Assistance window while a dialog box is
displayed.
On Demand Suppresses automatic display of the Active Assistance
window. To open the window, double-click the Active
Assistance icon in the system tray, or right-click the
icon and choose Show Active Assistance.
See Also
Commands HELP opens the standard AutoCAD Help.
78 | ASSIST
ATTACHURL
Attaches hyperlinks to objects or areas in a drawing
Command line: attachurl
Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] <Object>: Enter a or press ENTER
Area
Creates the URLLAYER layer, draws a polyline on that layer, and attaches a
URL to the polyline.
First corner: Click in the drawing to indicate the lower-left corner of the area
Other corner: Click to indicate the upper-right corner of the area
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL
The polyline that represents the area is displayed in the color assigned to URL-
LAYER. The default color is red. When you move the cursor over the area in
the drawing, the cursor changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL
is attached to the area.
Object
Attaches a URL to the selected object.
Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER to end selection
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter a URL
When you move the cursor over the object in the drawing, the cursor
changes to a hyperlink cursor to indicate that a URL is attached to the object.
See Also
See “Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DETACHURL removes hyperlinks from drawings. HYPER-
LINK displays a dialog box to attach URLs to objects and
offers additional options.
ATTACHURL | 79
ATTDEF
Creates an attribute definition
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. An attribute defi-
nition is a template for creating an attribute; it specifies the properties of an
attribute and the prompts displayed when the block is inserted.
When you finish defining the attribute, the attribute tag that you specified
is displayed in the drawing.
When you later include the attribute tag in a block definition using the
BLOCK command, AutoCAD erases the attribute tag from the drawing if you
have selected the Delete option in the Block Definition dialog box. When
you insert the block, AutoCAD displays the attribute value at the same loca-
tion in the block, with the same text style and alignment.
Draw menu: Block ➤ Define Attributes
Command line: attdef
The Attribute Definition dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, ATTDEF displays prompts on
the command line (see page 82).
Attribute Definition Dialog Box

Defines the mode; attribute tag, prompt, and value; insertion point; and text
options for an attribute.
80 | ATTDEF
Mode
Sets options for attribute values associated with a block when you insert the
block in a drawing.
The default values are stored in the AFLAGS system variable. Changing the
AFLAGS setting affects the default mode for new attribute definitions and
does not affect existing attribute definitions.
Invisible Specifies that attribute values are not displayed or
printed when you insert the block. ATTDISP overrides
Invisible mode.
Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify Prompts you to verify that the attribute value is correct
when you insert the block.
Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a
block containing a preset attribute.
Attribute
Sets attribute data. You can enter up to 256 characters. If you need leading
blanks in the prompt or the default value, start the string with a backslash
(\). To make the first character a backslash, start the string with two
backslashes.
Tag Identifies each occurrence of an attribute in the
drawing. Enter the attribute tag using any combination
of characters except spaces. AutoCAD changes
lowercase letters to uppercase.
Prompt Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert
a block containing this attribute definition. If you do
not enter a prompt, the attribute tag is used as a
prompt. If you select Constant in the Mode area, the
Prompt option is not available.
Value Specifies the default attribute value.
Insertion Point
Specifies the location for the attribute. Enter coordinate values or choose Pick
Point and use the pointing device to specify the placement of the attribute
in relation to the objects that it will be associated with.
Text Options
Sets the justification, style, height, and rotation of the attribute text.
ATTDEF | 81
Justification Specifies the justification of the attribute text. See TEXT
for a description of the justification options.
Text Style Specifies a predefined text style for the attribute text.
Currently loaded text styles are displayed. To load or
create a text style, see STYLE.
Height Specifies the height of the attribute text. Enter a value,
or choose Height to specify a height with your pointing
device. The height is measured from the origin to the
location you specify. If you select a text style that has
fixed height (anything other than 0.0), or if you select
Align in the Justification list, the Height option is not
available.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text. Enter a
value, or choose Rotation to specify a rotation angle
with your pointing device. The rotation angle is
measured from the origin to the location you specify. If
you select Align or Fit in the Justification list, the
Rotation option is not available.
Align Below Previous Attribute Definition

Places the attribute tag directly below the previously defined attribute. If you
have not previously created an attribute definition, this option is not
available.
ATTDEF Command Line

If you enter -attdef at the Command prompt, ATTDEF displays prompts on
the command line.
Current attribute modes: Invisible=current Constant=current Verify=current
Preset=current
Enter an option to change [Invisible/Constant/Verify/Preset] <done>:
Enter attribute tag name: Enter any characters except spaces or exclamation
points
Enter attribute prompt: Enter the text for the prompt line or press ENTER (this
prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
Enter default attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this
prompt is not displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
Enter attribute value: Enter the appropriate text or press ENTER (this prompt is
only displayed if you turned on Constant mode)
82 | ATTDEF
Attribute Modes
The current value line indicates the current settings for each attribute mode
(either Y for on or N for off). Entering i, c, v, or p toggles the modes on or off.
Press ENTER when you have finished adjusting the mode settings. The
AFLAGS system variable stores the current mode settings and can be used to
set the default modes.
Invisible Specifies that attribute values are displayed when you
insert the block. ATTDISP overrides Invisible mode.
Constant Gives attributes a fixed value for block insertions.
Verify Prompts for verification that the attribute value is
correct when you insert the block.
Preset Sets the attribute to its default value when you insert a
block containing a preset attribute.
Attribute Tag Name

Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies each occurrence of an attribute in
the drawing. The tag can contain any characters except spaces or exclama-
tion marks (!). AutoCAD changes lowercase letters to uppercase.
Attribute Prompt
Specifies the prompt that is displayed when you insert a block containing
this attribute definition. If you press ENTER , AutoCAD uses the attribute tag
as the prompt. If you turn on Constant mode, this prompt does not display.
Default Attribute Value

Specifies the default attribute value. The default attribute value appears when
a block is inserted into your drawing. A default value is not required. If you
turn on Constant mode, AutoCAD skips this prompt and displays the
Attribute Value prompt instead.
ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the
attribute tag instead of requesting a text string.
Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000
Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER
For a description of each option, see TEXT.
Attribute Value
Specifies the value for a constant attribute. This prompt is displayed only if
you turn on Constant mode.
ATTDEF | 83
ATTDEF then displays the same prompts as the TEXT command, using the
attribute tag instead of requesting a text string.
Current text style: "Standard" Text height: 0.2000
Specify start point of text or [Justify / Style]: Enter an option or press ENTER
For a description of each option, see TEXT.
See Also
Commands ATTDISP globally controls the visibility of attributes.
ATTEDIT edits attributes independently of the block def-
inition with which they’re associated. ATTEXT extracts
attribute data. ATTREDEF redefines a block and updates
associated attributes.
System Variables AFLAGS stores the current mode settings for attribute
definitions. ATTDIA causes -INSERT to use dialog boxes
for the entry of attribute values. ATTMODE controls the
attribute display mode. ATTREQ determines whether
INSERT uses default attribute settings during the inser-
tion of blocks.
ATTDISP
Globally controls attribute visibility
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. ATTDISP controls
whether the attributes in your drawing are visible.
attribute
View menu: Display ➤ Attribute Display
Command line: attdisp (or 'attdisp for transparent use)
Enter attribute visibility setting [Normal/ON/OFF] <current>:
AutoCAD regenerates the drawing after you change the visibility unless
ATTDISP on
REGENAUTO, which controls automatic regeneration, is off. AutoCAD stores
the current visibility of attributes in the ATTMODE system variable.
Normal Retains the current visibility of each attribute. Visible
attributes are displayed. Invisible attributes are not
displayed.
On Makes all attributes visible.
ATTDISP off
Off Makes all attributes invisible.
84 | ATTDISP
See Also
Commands ATTDEF creates an attribute definition for text to be
associated with a block. ATTEDIT edits attributes inde-
pendently of the block definition with which they’re
associated. ATTEXT extracts attribute data. ATTREDEF
redefines a block and updates associated attributes. The
Mode option of ATTDEF determines the visibility of
newly created attribute definitions.
System Variables ATTDIA causes -INSERT to use dialog boxes for the entry
of attribute values. ATTMODE controls the attribute dis-
play mode. ATTREQ determines whether INSERT uses
default attribute settings during the insertion of blocks.
ATTEDIT
Changes attribute information
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. In the Edit
Attributes dialog box, you can edit individual, nonconstant attribute values
associated with a specific block. To change attribute properties such as posi-
tion, height, and style, use -ATTEDIT and edit attribute values and properties
individually or globally, independent of the block.
Use the following access methods to edit attribute values for a specific block:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single
Command line: attedit
Select block reference: Select a block with attributes
The Edit Attributes dialog box is displayed.

Use the following access methods to edit attribute values and properties inde-
pendent of a block:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Global
Command line: -attedit
AutoCAD displays prompts on the command line (see page 82).
ATTEDIT | 85
Edit Attributes Dialog Box
Displays the first eight attribute values contained in the block. Edit the
attribute values. If the block contains additional attributes, use Previous and
Next to navigate through the list. You cannot edit attribute values on locked
layers.
To change attribute properties such as position, height, and style, use
-ATTEDIT.
ATTEDIT Command Line

If you enter -attedit at the Command prompt, ATTEDIT displays prompts on
the command line.
Edit attributes one at a time? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or press ENTER to edit
attributes one at a time, or enter n to edit attributes globally
86 | ATTEDIT
Yes
Edits attributes one at a time. Attributes to be edited one at a time must be
visible and parallel to the current UCS.
Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER , or enter a block name or a
partial block name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to
specific blocks
Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER , or enter a tag or a partial tag
with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attributes
Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER , or specify a value or a value
name with wild-card characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute
values
Attribute values are case sensitive.

Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the current UCS
AutoCAD marks the first attribute in the selection set with an X. You can
change any properties of the attribute you select.
Enter an option [Value/Position/Height/Angle/Style/Layer/Color/Next] <N>:
Enter the property to change, or press ENTER for the next attribute
attributes selected
If the original attribute was defined with aligned or fit text, the prompt does
not include Angle. The Height option is omitted for aligned text. For each of
the options, except Next, AutoCAD prompts for a new value. The X remains
on the current attribute until you move to the next attribute.
X on first attribute Value

Changes or replaces an attribute value.
Enter type of value modification [Change/Replace]: Enter c or r or press ENTER
Change Modifies a few characters of the attribute value.

Enter string to change: Enter string to change or press
X on next attribute ENTER
Enter new string: Enter replacement string or press ENTER
Either string can be null. AutoCAD interprets the ? and

* characters literally, not as wild-card characters.
ATTEDIT | 87
Replace Substitutes a new attribute value for the entire attribute
value.
Enter new attribute value: Enter a new attribute value or
press ENTER
If you press ENTER , the attribute value is empty (null).

Position
Changes the text insertion point.
Specify new text insertion point: Specify a point or press ENTER
position changed If the attribute is aligned, AutoCAD prompts for both ends of a new text
baseline.
Height
Changes the text height.
Specify new height <current>: Enter a value, specify a point, or press ENTER
height changed When you specify a point, the height becomes the distance between the
specified point and the start point of the text.
Angle
Changes the rotation angle.
Specify new rotation angle <current>: Enter a value, specify a point, or press
ENTER
angle changed If you specify a point, the text is rotated along an imaginary line between the
specified point and the start point of the text.
Style
Changes the style setting.
Enter new text style: Enter a style name or press ENTER
style changed
Layer
Changes the layer.
Enter new layer name <current>: Enter a layer name or press ENTER
Color
Changes the color.
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or num-
ber), a true color, or a color from a color book.
Enter new color name or value [Truecolor/Colorbook]<BYLAYER>: Enter a color,
enter t, enter c, or press ENTER
88 | ATTEDIT
You can enter a color name, a color number between 1 and 255, or bylayer
or byblock.
True Color Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255
separated by commas to specify a true color
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for
the selected object.
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book
that has been installed, such as PANTONE®
If you enter a color book name, AutoCAD prompts you

to enter the color name in the color book.
Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in
the selected color book, such as PANTONE®573
Next
Moves to the next attribute in the selection set. If there are no more
attributes, ATTEDIT ends.
No
Edits more than one attribute at a time. Global editing applies to both visible
and invisible attributes.
Editing attributes globally limits you to replacing a single text string with
another text string. If you edit attributes one at a time, you can edit any or
all of the attributes.
Performing global editing of attribute values.
Edit only attributes visible on screen? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or press ENTER to
edit only visible attributes, or enter n to edit all attributes
Yes Edits only visible attributes.

Enter block name specification <*>: Press ENTER , or spec-
ify a block name or a partial block name with wild-card
characters (? or *) to narrow the selection to specific blocks
Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Press ENTER , or
specify a tag or a partial tag with wild-card characters (? or
*) to narrow the selection to specific attributes
Enter attribute value specification <*>: Press ENTER , or
specify a value or a partial value with wild-card characters
(? or *) to narrow the selection to specific attribute values
ATTEDIT | 89
Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty
(null) attributes, which normally are not visible and
cannot be selected, enter a backslash (\).
Select Attributes: Select only attributes parallel to the
current UCS
Select the attribute you want to change.

Enter string to change: Enter string to change or press
ENTER
Enter new string: Enter replacement string or press ENTER
Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters

are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters.
No Edits attributes whether they are visible or not. Changes
to attributes are not reflected immediately. AutoCAD
regenerates the drawing at the end of the command
unless REGENAUTO, which controls automatic
regeneration, is off.
Enter block name specification <*>: Enter a full block
name or a partial block name with wild-card characters (? or
*), or press ENTER to select attributes in all blocks
Enter attribute tag specification <*>: Enter a full attribute
tag name or a partial name with wild-card characters (? or
*), or press ENTER to select attributes in all attribute tags
Enter attribute value specification <*>: Enter a full
attribute value or a partial value with wild-card characters
(? or *), or press ENTER to select all attributes
Attribute values are case sensitive. To select empty

(null) attributes, which normally are not visible, enter a
backslash (\).
AutoCAD selects the attributes that match the specified
block name, attribute tag, and attribute value.
Enter string to change: Enter the attribute value you want
to change, or press ENTER to append a new value to the
existing value(s)
Enter new string: Enter the new value to replace the speci-
fied value or to append to selected values
Either string can be empty (null). The ? and * characters

are interpreted literally, not as wild-card characters.
90 | ATTEDIT
See Also
See “Modify Blocks” in the User’s Guide.
associated with a block. ATTDISP globally controls the
visibility of attributes. ATTEXT extracts attribute data.
ATTREDEF redefines a block and updates associated
attributes. DDEDIT edits text and attribute definitions.
REGENAUTO controls automatic regenerations of a
drawing.
System Variables ATTDIA causes -INSERT to use dialog boxes for entry of
attribute values. ATTMODE controls the attribute display
mode. ATTREQ determines whether INSERT uses default
attribute settings during insertion of blocks.
ATTEXT
Extracts attribute data
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. Use ATTEXT to
extract the data stored in the attribute into a file.
Command line: attext
The Attribute Extraction dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, ATTEXT displays prompts on
Attribute Extraction Dialog Box

Specifies the file format for the attribute information, the objects from which
you want to extract information, and the template and output file names for
the information.
ATTEXT | 91
File Format
Sets the format for the file into which you are extracting the attribute data.
Comma Generates a file containing one record for each block
Delimited File reference in the drawing that has at least one matching
(CDF) attribute tag in the template file. Commas separate the
fields of each record. Single quotation marks enclose
the character fields.
Space Delimited Generates a file containing one record for each block
File (SDF) reference in the drawing that has at least one matching
attribute tag in the template file. The fields of each
record have a fixed width; therefore, field separators or
character string delimiters are not appropriate.
DXF Format Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange
Extract File (DXX) File format containing only block reference, attribute,
and end-of-sequence objects. DXF™ format extraction
requires no template. The file name extension .dxx
distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.
Select Objects
Closes the dialog box so you can use the pointing device to select blocks with
attributes. When the Attribute Extraction dialog box reopens, Number Found
shows the number of objects you selected.
Template File
Specifies a template extraction file for CDF and SDF formats. Enter the file
name in the box, or choose Template File to search for existing template files
using a standard file selection dialog box. The default file extension is .txt. If
you select DXF under File Format, the Template File option is not available.
92 | ATTEXT
For information about creating a template file, see “Attach Data to Blocks
(Block Attributes)” in the User’s Guide.
Output File
Specifies the file name and location for the extracted attribute data. Enter the
path and file name for the extracted attribute data, or choose Output File to
search for existing template files using a standard file selection dialog box.
AutoCAD appends the .txt file name extension for CDF or SDF files and the
.dxx file name extension for DXF files.
ATTEXT Command Line

If you enter -attext at the Command prompt, ATTEXT displays prompts on
the command line.
Enter extraction type or enable object selection [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf/Objects] <C>:
Enter an option or press ENTER
CDF: Comma- Generates a file containing one record for each block
Delimited File reference in the drawing. Commas separate the fields of
each record. Single quotation marks enclose the
character fields.
In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name
of an existing attribute extraction template file.
In the Create Extract File dialog box, enter the name for
the output file. The extract file’s file name extension is
.txt for CDF or SDF format.
SDF: Space- Generates a file containing one record for each block
Delimited File reference in the drawing. The fields of each record have
a fixed width; therefore, field separators or character
string delimiters are not used.
In the Select Template File dialog box, enter the name
of an existing attribute extraction template file.
.txt for CDF or SDF format.
ATTEXT | 93
DXF: Drawing Produces a subset of the AutoCAD Drawing Interchange
Interchange File File format containing only block reference, attribute,
and end-of-sequence objects. DXF-format extraction
requires no template. The file name extension .dxx
distinguishes the output file from normal DXF files.
.dxx for DXF format.
Objects Selects objects whose attributes you want to extract.
Select object: Use an object selection method
Enter attribute extraction type [Cdf/Sdf/Dxf] <C>: Enter
an option or press ENTER
See Also
For information about working with attributes, see “Attach Data to Blocks
(Block Attributes)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ATTEDIT edits individual, nonconstant attribute values
associated with a specific block. -ATTEDIT edits both
attribute values and attribute properties individually or
globally, independent of a block. ATTREDEF redefines a
block and updates associated attributes. ATTDEF creates
an attribute definition for text to be associated with a
block. ATTDISP controls attribute visibility. DDEDIT edits
text and attribute definitions. EXPORT saves objects to
other file formats.
ATTREDEF
Redefines a block and updates associated attributes
Command line: attredef
Enter the name of the block you wish to redefine:

Select objects for new block:
Select objects:
Insertion base point of new block: Specify a point
94 | ATTREDEF
New attributes assigned to existing block references use their default values.
Old attributes in the new block definition retain their old values. AutoCAD
deletes any old attributes that are not included in the new block definition.
See Also
associated with a block. ATTDISP globally controls the
visibility of attributes. ATTEDIT edits attributes indepen-
dently of the block definition with which they’re
associated. ATTEXT extracts attribute data.
ATTSYNC
Updates all instances of a specified block with the current attributes defined for the block
Modify II toolbar:
Command line: attsync
Enter an option [?/Name/Select] <Select>:
You are prompted for the names of blocks you want to update with the
current attributes defined for the blocks. ATTSYNC does not change any
values assigned to attributes in existing blocks.
Entering ? displays a list of all block definitions in the drawing. Enter the
name of the block you want to update.
Pressing ENTER allows you to use your pointing device to select the block
whose attributes you want to update.
If a block you specify does not contain attributes or does not exist, an error
message is displayed, and you are prompted to specify another block.
AUDIT
Evaluates the integrity of a drawing
AUDIT is a diagnostic tool for examining the current drawing and correcting
errors. For every error detected, AutoCAD provides a description of the error
and recommends corrective action.
ATTSYNC | 95
File menu: Drawing Utilities ➤ Audit
Command line: audit
Fix any errors detected? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
For easy access, AUDIT places all objects for which it reports errors in the Pre-
vious selection set. However, editing commands affect only the objects that
belong to the current paper space or model space.
If you set the AUDITCTL system variable to 1, AUDIT creates an ASCII file
describing problems and the action taken and places this report in the same
directory as the current drawing, with the file extension .adt.
If a drawing contains errors that AUDIT cannot fix, use RECOVER to retrieve
the drawing and correct its errors.
See Also
Commands OPTIONS reconfigures AutoCAD. RECOVER fixes a dam-
aged drawing. OPEN alerts you if a drawing is damaged
and optionally uses RECOVER to attempt to fix it.
System Variables AUDITCTL controls whether AUDIT generates a report
file.
96 | AUDIT
BACKGROUND
Sets up the background for your scene
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Background
Command line: background
AutoCAD displays the Background dialog box.
Background Dialog Box

Defines the type, color, effects, and position of the background for your
drawing.
Solid
Selects a one-color background. Use the color controls to specify the color.
Gradient
Specifies a two- or three-color gradient background. Use the color controls
and Horizon, Height, and Rotation to define the gradient.
A three-color gradient is the default. To create a two-color gradient, set
Height to 0 so that Render uses only the Top and Bottom colors.
BACKGROUND | 97
Image
Uses a bitmap file for the background.
Merge
Uses the current AutoCAD® image as the background. This option is avail-
able only when Viewport is selected as Destination in the Render dialog box.
See RENDER.
Colors
Sets color for a solid or gradient background.
Top/Middle/ Sets colors. For a solid background, set the Top color;
Bottom the others are not available. For a two-color gradient,
set the Top and Bottom colors and set Height to 0. For
a three-color gradient, set the Top, Middle, and Bottom
colors. All three colors are available (by clicking the
corresponding color tiles) when you select Gradient.
None of the colors is available when you select Image.
Only Top is available when you select Solid.
Color Controls Controls whether AutoCAD uses the red, green, blue
(RGB) color system or the hue, lightness, saturation
(HLS) color system. Select RGB to adjust the individual
red, green, and blue components of the selected color.
Select HLS to adjust the individual hue, lightness, and
saturation components of the selected color.
Select Custom Displays the Select Color dialog box. To define the color
Color of the background, you can select from the 255
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and
color book colors.
AutoCAD Uses the current AutoCAD background color. Available
Background only with a solid background. This option is on by
default.
Preview
Displays a preview of the current Background settings.
Image
Specifies the image file name. You can use the following file types for back-
ground images: BMP, JPG, PCX, TGA, and TIFF.
Name Specifies the name of the image file to use. You can also
use Find File to select a file.
98 | BACKGROUND
Find File Displays a standard file selection dialog box. Use this
dialog box to select the background image file to use.
Adjust Bitmap Displays the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement
dialog box (see page 100).
Environment
Defines an environment in which you can create additional reflection and
refraction effects on objects with reflective, raytraced materials. With the
Photo Real renderer, the result is a mirrored effect; with the Photo Raytrace
renderer, the result is a raytraced environment.
Name Specifies the image file name to create the raytraced
environment.
Use Background Specifies that the selected objects in the current
drawing reflect the background you specify. If you use
an image file, the objects reflect that image rather than
the background image. You can use the following file
types for environment images: BMP, JPG, PCX, TGA,
and TIFF.
The program maps the environment onto a sphere
surrounding the scene, and the Photo Raytrace renderer
uses it in addition to the geometry to determine
reflections and refraction.
Find File Displays a standard file selection dialog box, in which
you can select the background image file to use.
Horizon
Represents the percentage of unrotated height. Use the box or scroll bar to
set the value. Only available for gradient backgrounds.
Height
Represents a percentage of the second color in a three-color gradient. Use the
box or scroll bar to set the value. The start point of the second color is deter-
mined by the Horizon setting. If the value is 0, the result is a two-color
gradient that uses the Top and Bottom colors.
Rotation
Sets an angle at which you can rotate a gradient background. Rotation is not
available with a solid or image background. Use the box or scroll bar to set
the value.
BACKGROUND | 99
Adjust Background Bitmap Placement Dialog
Box
Controls options that apply to the background image. The Offset, Scale, and
Tiling controls all work the same as they do in the Adjust Material Bitmap
Placement dialog box (see page 865), except that they apply to the back-
ground image instead of a mapped material image. Offset and Scale refer to
X,Y coordinates, not U,V coordinates.
Offset and Scale

Sets the offset and scale. Offset values can range from −1 to 1 on either axis
(X or Y). Adjust a value by using the scroll bars to the right and below the
diagram (enclosed by the outer box labeled Offset), or by entering values in
X and Y Offset.
Scale values can range from ±0.1 to ±10 on either axis (X or Y). Adjust a value
by using the scroll bars to the left and above the diagram (enclosed by the
inner box labeled Scale), or by entering values in X and Y Scale.
Maintain Aspect Ratio

Locks the X and Y coordinates together. When Maintain Aspect Ratio is
turned on, moving one scroll bar moves the other, and a value you enter in
X or Y Scale changes the other.
Fit to Screen
Fits the image to your screen. If you select Use Image Aspect Ratio, the pro-
gram fits the larger dimension to the screen while maintaining the image’s
aspect ratio.
Use Image Aspect Ratio

Uses the aspect ratio of the image file. You can still change Offset and Scale,
but the Maintain Aspect Ratio option is locked to the On setting.
Tiling
Controls how the bitmap is tiled with two radio buttons.
Tile Tiles the bitmap (the default).
Crop Does not tile the bitmap.
If you select Tile and you change the offset so the bitmap rectangle appears
outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap is not centered within the draw-
ing area when you render it. (During tiling, the offset acts as a displacement,
not an absolute position.) However, if you select Crop, the bitmap is rendered
only where you place it, as indicated by the diagram (enclosed by the inner
100 | BACKGROUND
box labeled Scale) in the Adjust Background Bitmap Placement dialog box. If
the diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap
does not appear in a rendering.
Center
Sets the Offset coordinates to 0 (centers the image).
See Also
See “Use Materials in Rendering” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX™ applications. RMAT attaches and manages
rendering materials. RENDER creates a photorealistic or
realistically shaded image of a 3D wireframe or solid
model using geometry, lighting, and materials
information.
BASE
Sets the insertion base point for the current drawing
Use BASE if you plan to insert the current drawing into, or externally refer-
ence the drawing from, other drawings and you need a base point other than
0,0,0. When you insert or externally reference the current drawing into other
drawings, ACAD uses this base point as the insertion base point.
Note The BASE command and the INSBASE system variable report values in the
current UCS units.
Draw menu: Block ➤ Base

Command line: base (or 'base for transparent use)
Enter base point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER
See Also
Commands INSERT inserts a drawing into the current drawing.
BLOCK creates a block definition from a set of points
and requires that you set BASE first. XREF links another
drawing to the current drawing by creating an external
reference.
System Variables INSBASE stores the insertion base point.
BASE | 101
BATTMAN
Edits attribute properties of a block definition
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Block Attribute Manager
Command line: battman
The Block Attribute Manager is displayed.

If the current drawing does not contain any blocks with attributes, a message
is displayed.
Block Attribute Manager

Manages the attribute definitions for blocks in the current drawing. You can
edit the attribute definitions in blocks, remove attributes from blocks, and
change the order in which you are prompted for attribute values when insert-
ing a block.
Attributes of the selected block are displayed in the attribute list. By default,
Tag, Prompt, Default, and Mode attribute properties are displayed in the
attribute list. You can specify which attribute properties you want displayed
in the list by choosing Settings.
For each selected block, a description below the attribute list identifies the
number of its instances in the current drawing and in the current layout.
Select Block Allows you to use your pointing device to select a block
from the drawing area. When you choose Select Block,
the dialog box closes until you select a block from the
drawing or cancel by pressing ESC .
If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new
block before you save the attribute changes you made,
you are prompted to save the changes before selecting
another block.
Block Lists all block definitions in the current drawing that
have attributes. Select the block whose attributes you
want to modify.
Sync Updates all instances of the selected block with the
attribute properties currently defined. This does not
affect any values assigned to attributes in each block.
102 | BATTMAN
Move Up Moves the selected attribute tag earlier in the prompt
sequence. The Move Up button is not available when a
constant attribute is selected.
Move Down Moves the selected attribute tag later in the prompt
sequence. The Move Down button is not available
when a constant attribute is selected.
Edit Opens the Edit Attribute dialog box, where you can
modify attribute properties.
Remove Removes the selected attribute from the block
definition. If Apply Changes to Existing References is
selected in the Settings dialog box before you choose
Remove, the attribute is removed from all instances of
the block in the current drawing. The Remove button is
not available for blocks with only one attribute.
Settings Opens the Settings dialog box, where you can
customize how attribute information is listed in the
Block Attribute Manager.
Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you
have made and leaves the Block Attribute Manager
open.
Edit Attribute Dialog Box

Allows you to edit attributes for a block definition.
Auto Preview Controls whether or not the drawing area is
Changes immediately updated to display any visible attribute
changes you make. If Auto Preview Changes is selected,
changes are immediately visible. If Auto Preview
Changes is cleared, changes are not immediately
visible.
Clearing Auto Preview Changes results in a small
improvement in performance. Auto Preview Changes is
not available if Apply Changes to Existing References is
not selected.
The Edit Attribute dialog box contains the following tabs:
■ Attribute
■ Text Options
■ Properties
BATTMAN | 103
Attribute Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)
Defines how a value is assigned to an attribute and whether or not the
assigned value is visible in the drawing area, and sets the string that prompts
users to enter a value. The Attribute tab also displays the tag name that iden-
tifies the attribute.
Mode
Mode options determine whether and how attribute text appears.
Invisible Displays or hides the attribute in the drawing area. If
selected, hides the attribute value in the drawing area.
If cleared, displays the attribute value.
Constant Identifies whether the attribute is set to its default
value. You cannot change this property. If a check mark
is shown in the check box, the attribute is set to its
default value and cannot be changed. If the check box
is empty, you can assign a value to the attribute.
Verify Turns value verification on and off. If selected, prompts
you to verify the values you assign to the attribute
when inserting a new instance of the block. If this
option is cleared, verification is not performed.
Preset Turns default value assignment on and off. If selected,
sets the attribute to its default value when the block is
inserted. If cleared, ignores the attribute’s default value
and prompts you to enter a value when inserting the
block.
Data
Data options set the attribute text that is displayed.
Tag Sets the identifier assigned to the attribute.
Prompt Sets the text for the prompt that is displayed when you
insert the block.
Default Sets the default value assigned to the attribute when
you insert the block.
Text Options Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)

Sets the properties that define the way an attribute’s text is displayed in the
drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.
Text Style Specifies the text style for attribute text. Default values
for this text style are assigned to the text properties
displayed in this dialog box.
104 | BATTMAN
Justification Specifies how attribute text is justified.
Height Specifies the height of the attribute text.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text.
Backwards Specifies whether or not the text is displayed
backwards.
Upside Down Specifies whether or not the text is displayed upside
down.
Width Factor Sets the character spacing for attribute text. Entering a
value less than 1.0 condenses the text. Entering a value
greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that attribute text is slanted away
from its vertical axis.
Properties Tab (Edit Attribute Dialog Box)

Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the color, lineweight, and line-
type for the attribute’s line. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a
plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab.
Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on.
Linetype Specifies the linetype of attribute text.
Color Specifies the attribute’s text color.
Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute.
If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles,
the Plot Style list is not available.
Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of attribute text.
Changes you make to this option are not displayed if
the LWDISPLAY system variable is off.
Settings Dialog Box

Controls the appearance of the attribute list in the Block Attribute Manager.
Display in List Specifies the properties to be displayed in the attribute
list. Only the selected properties are displayed in the
list.
The Tag property is always selected.
Select All Selects all properties.
BATTMAN | 105
Clear All Clears all properties.
Emphasize Turns duplicate tag emphasis on and off. If this option
Duplicate Tags is selected, duplicate attribute tags are displayed in red
type in the attribute list. If this option is cleared,
duplicate tags are not emphasized in the attribute list.
Apply Changes to Specifies whether or not to update all existing instances
Existing of the block whose attributes you are modifying. If
References selected, updates all instances of the block with the new
attribute definitions. If cleared, updates only new
instances of the block with the new attribute
definitions.
You can choose Sync in the Block Attribute Manager to
apply changes immediately to existing block instances.
This temporarily overrides the Apply Changes to
Existing References option.
BHATCH
Fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a hatch pattern or gradient fill
BHATCH first defines the boundaries of the area you want to hatch or fill,
either by computing a region or polyline boundary from a specified point
within an enclosed area, or by using selected objects as boundaries. It then
fills the boundaries with a hatch pattern, a solid color, or a gradient. BHATCH
creates an associative hatch or fill, which is updated when its boundaries are
modified, or a nonassociative hatch or fill, which is independent of its
boundaries. You can preview any hatch or fill and adjust the definition.
Due to the large number of combinations of geometry that you can hatch or
fill, editing hatched or gradient-filled geometry can produce unexpected
results. In this event, delete the object containing the hatch or fill and redo
the hatch or fill.
Note By default, AutoCAD won’t create a hatch pattern that consists of over
10,000 segments. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. To
reset the limit to 50,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "50000") at
the Command prompt. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and
10,000,000.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Hatch
106 | BHATCH
Command line: bhatch
The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -bhatch at the Command prompt, BHATCH displays prompts on
Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box

Defines the boundary, pattern type, pattern properties, and attributes for
hatch and gradient fill objects.
The Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box includes the following tabs:
Pick Points
Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen. The
objects must form an enclosed area. How AutoCAD detects objects using this
option depends on which island detection method is selected on the
Advanced tab. For example, if the island detection method is Flood,
AutoCAD detects objects within the outermost boundary as islands and
includes them in the boundary definition. The island detection style (which
you also set on the Advanced tab) then determines how to hatch the detected
islands.
When you select Pick Points, the dialog box closes temporarily, and
AutoCAD displays a prompt.
Select internal point: Specify a point within the area to be hatched or filled
Select internal point: Specify a point, enter u or undo to undo the last selection,
or press ENTER to end point specification and return to the dialog box
While specifying points, you can right-click in the drawing area at any time
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last or all point specifications,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or gradient fill.
internal point selected hatch boundary result
BHATCH | 107
Select Objects
Specifies objects for hatching or filling. The dialog box closes temporarily,
and AutoCAD prompts you to select objects.
object selected hatch boundary result
When you use the Select Objects option, AutoCAD does not detect interior
objects automatically. You must select the objects within the selected bound-
ary to hatch or fill those objects according to the current Island Detection
Style (which you set on the Advanced tab).
object selected text selected result
Each time you choose Select Objects, AutoCAD clears the previous selection
set.
While selecting objects, you can right-click at any time in the drawing area
to display a shortcut menu. You can undo the last selection or all selections,
change the selection method, change the island detection style, or preview
the hatch or gradient fill.
Remove Islands
Removes from the boundary definition any of the objects that AutoCAD
detects as islands when you use the Pick Points option. You cannot remove
the outer boundary.
108 | BHATCH
internal point selected object removed result
View Selections
Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined
boundaries with the hatch or fill settings that you last previewed. This option
is unavailable when no boundary has been defined.
Inherit Properties
Hatches or fills specified boundaries using the hatch or fill properties of one
object. After selecting the associative hatch or fill object whose properties
you want the hatch or fill to inherit, you can right-click in the drawing area
and use the shortcut menu to toggle between the Select Objects and Pick
Points options to create boundaries.
See “Pick Points” on page 107 and “Select Objects” on page 108.
Double
For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines positioned at 90 degrees
to the original lines, creating a crosshatch. AutoCAD stores this information
in the HPDOUBLE system variable. This option is available only if you set Type
to User Defined on the Hatch tab.
This option is not available for gradient fills.
Composition
Controls whether the hatch or gradient fill is associative or nonassociative.
Associative Creates a hatch or fill that is updated when you modify
its boundaries.
Nonassociative Creates a hatch or fill that is independent of its
boundaries.
Preview
Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the currently defined
boundaries with the current hatch or fill settings. This option is not available
when you have not yet specified points or selected objects to define your
boundaries.
BHATCH | 109
HatchTab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)
Defines the appearance of the hatch pattern to be applied.
Type
Sets the pattern type.
Predefined Specifies a predefined AutoCAD pattern. These patterns
are stored in the acad.pat and acadiso.pat files. You can
control the angle and scale of any predefined pattern.
For predefined ISO patterns, you can also control the
ISO pen width.
Note When you use the Solid predefined pattern, the
boundary must be closed and must not intersect itself. In
addition, if the hatch area contains more than one loop,
the loops must not intersect. These limitations do not
apply to standard hatch patterns.
User Defined Creates a pattern of lines based on the current linetype
in your drawing. You can control the angle and spacing
of the lines in your user-defined pattern.
Custom Specifies a pattern that is defined in any custom PAT file
that you have added to the AutoCAD search path. (To
use the patterns in the supplied acad.pat and acadiso.pat
files, choose Predefined.) You can control the angle and
scale of any custom pattern.
110 | BHATCH
Pattern
Lists the available predefined patterns. The six most recently used predefined
patterns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in
the HPNAME system variable. The Pattern option is available only if you set
Type to Predefined.
The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116),
in which you can view preview images for all predefined patterns at once to
help you make a selection.
Swatch
Displays a preview of the selected pattern. You can click the swatch to display
the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116). When the SOLID pattern
is selected, you can click the right arrow to display a list of colors or the Select
Color dialog box (see page 169).
Custom Pattern
Lists the available custom patterns. The six most recently used custom pat-
terns appear at the top of the list. AutoCAD stores the selected pattern in the
HPNAME system variable. The Custom Pattern option is available only if you
set Type to Custom.
The [...] button displays the Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box (see page 116),
in which you can view preview images for all custom patterns at once to help
you make a selection.
Angle
Specifies an angle for the hatch pattern relative to the X axis of the current
UCS. AutoCAD stores the angle in the HPANG system variable.
Scale
Expands or contracts a predefined or custom pattern. AutoCAD stores the
scale in the HPSCALE system variable. This option is available only if you set
Type to Predefined or Custom.
Relative to Paper Space
Scales the hatch pattern relative to paper space units. Using this option, you
can easily display hatch patterns at a scale that is appropriate for your layout.
This option is available only from a layout.
Spacing
Specifies the spacing of lines in a user-defined pattern. AutoCAD stores the
spacing in the HPSPACE system variable. This option is available only if you
set Type to User Defined.
BHATCH | 111
ISO Pen Width
Scales an ISO predefined pattern based on the selected pen width. This
option is available only if you set Type to Predefined and set Pattern to one
of the available ISO patterns.
Advanced Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)

Defines how AutoCAD creates and hatches or fills boundaries.
Island Detection Style

Specifies the method used to hatch or fill objects within the outermost
boundary. If no internal boundaries exist, specifying an island detection style
has no effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it’s often
best to use the Normal style.
112 | BHATCH
Normal Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary. If
AutoCAD encounters an internal intersection, it turns
off hatching or filling until it encounters another
intersection. Thus, areas separated from the outside of
the hatched or filled area by an odd number of
intersections are hatched or filled, and areas separated
by an even number of intersections are not. You can
also set the Normal style by adding ,N to the pattern
name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer Hatches or fills inward from the outer boundary.
AutoCAD turns hatching or filling off if it encounters
an internal intersection. Because this process starts
from both ends of each hatch or fill line, AutoCAD
hatches or fills only the outermost level of the structure
and leaves the internal structure blank. You can also set
the Outer style by adding ,O to the pattern name in the
HPNAME system variable.
.
. Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches or fills through
them. You can also set the Ignore style by adding ,I to
the pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Note Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause
hatching discrepancies.
The Normal, Outer, and Ignore options are also available from a shortcut
menu by right-clicking in the drawing area while you specify points or select
objects to define your boundaries.
Object Type
Specifies whether to retain boundaries as objects, and the object type that
AutoCAD applies to those objects.
BHATCH | 113
Retain Adds the temporary boundary objects to the drawing.
Boundaries
Object Type Controls the type of the new boundary object.
AutoCAD creates the boundary as a region or a
polyline. This option is available only if you select
Retain Boundaries.
For more information about regions, see “Create and
Combine Areas (Regions)” in the User’s Guide.
Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary from
a specified point. The selected boundary set has no effect when you use Select
Objects to define a boundary.
By default, when you use Pick Points to define a boundary, AutoCAD
analyzes all objects visible in the current viewport. By redefining the bound-
ary set, you can disregard certain objects when defining boundaries without
having to hide or remove those objects. For large drawings, redefining the
boundary set can also produce the boundary faster because AutoCAD
examines fewer objects.
Current Viewport Defines the boundary set from everything visible in the
current viewport. Selecting this option discards any
current boundary set and uses everything visible in the
current viewport.
Existing Set Defines the boundary set from the objects that you
selected with New. If you have not created a boundary
set with New, the Existing Set option is not available.
New Prompts you to select the objects that define the
boundary set. AutoCAD includes only the hatchable or
fillable objects you select when it constructs the new
boundary set. AutoCAD discards any existing boundary
set, replacing it with the new boundary set defined by
the objects you select. If you don’t select any objects,
AutoCAD retains any current set.
Until you exit BHATCH or create a new boundary set,
AutoCAD ignores objects that do not exist in the
boundary set when you define your boundaries by
using Pick Points.
Island Detection Method
Specifies whether to include objects within the outermost boundary as
boundary objects. These internal objects are known as islands.
114 | BHATCH
Flood Includes islands as boundary objects.
Ray Casting Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest
object and then traces the boundary in a
counterclockwise direction, thus excluding islands as
boundary objects.
Gradient Tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)

Defines the appearance of the gradient fill to be applied.
One Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between darker shades and
lighter tints of one color. When One Color is selected, AutoCAD displays a
color swatch with Browse button and a Shade and Tint slider. (GFCLRSTATE
system variable)
Two Color
Specifies a fill that uses a smooth transition between two colors. When Two
Color is selected, AutoCAD displays a color swatch with a Browse button for
color 1 and for color 2. (GFCLRSTATE system variable)
Color Swatch
Specifies the color for the gradient fill. Click the Browse button [...] to display
the Select Color dialog box, where you can select an AutoCAD Index color,
true color, or color book color. The default color displayed is the current color
in the drawing.
BHATCH | 115
Shade and Tint Slider
Specifies the tint (the selected color mixed with white) or shade (the selected
color mixed with black) of a color to be used for a gradient fill of one color.
(GFCLRLUM system variable)
Centered
Specifies a gradient configuration that is symmetrical. If this option is not
selected, the gradient fill is shifted up and to the left, creating the illusion of
a light source to the left of the object. (GFSHIFT system variable)
Angle
Specifies the angle of the gradient fill. The specified angle is relative to the
current UCS. This option is independent of the angle specified for hatch pat-
terns. (GFANG system variable)
Gradient Patterns
Displays nine fixed patterns for gradient fills. These patterns include linear
sweep, spherical, and parabolic. (GFNAME system variable)
Hatch Pattern Palette Dialog Box

Displays preview images for all predefined and custom patterns. The dialog
box organizes patterns on four tabs with images arranged alphabetically on
each tab. Click an image to select a pattern and click OK.
ANSI Displays all ANSI patterns shipped with AutoCAD.
116 | BHATCH
ISO Displays all ISO patterns shipped with AutoCAD.
Other Predefined Displays all patterns other than ANSI and ISO shipped
with AutoCAD.
Custom Displays all patterns defined in any custom PAT file that
you have added to the search path, which is set in the
Options dialog box, Files tab.
BHATCH Command Line

If you enter -bhatch at the Command prompt, BHATCH displays prompts on
the command line.
Specify internal point or [Properties/Select/Remove islands/Advanced]: Specify
a point or enter an option
Internal Point
Determines a boundary from existing objects visible on the screen that form
an enclosed area. If you turn on Island Detection, ACAD detects objects
within the outermost boundary as islands. Hatching applied is associative
and in the current style.
Properties
Specifies new hatch pattern properties to apply.
Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or
custom pattern name, enter s, enter u, enter ?, or press ENTER
Pattern Name— Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad.pat or

Predefined or acadiso.pat file or a custom pattern in its own PAT file.
Custom Enter the pattern name followed by an optional hatch
style code. Precede the pattern name with an asterisk (*)
to fill the area with individual lines instead of a hatch
block.
Specify a scale for the pattern <current>: Specify a scale or
press ENTER
Specify an angle for the pattern <current>: Specify an
?—List Pattern Lists and describes the hatch patterns defined in the
Names acad.pat file.
Pattern(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
BHATCH | 117
Solid Specifies a solid fill and redisplays the first BHATCH
command line prompt, where you can define a
boundary.
Note The boundary of a solid-fill hatch must be closed
and must not intersect itself. In addition, if the hatch area
contains more than one loop, the loops must not intersect.
These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns.
User Defined Specifies a user-defined pattern. Enter u, followed by an
optional hatch style code. Precede the u with an asterisk
(*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of a
hatch block.
Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>: Specify an
angle for the pattern or press ENTER
Specify spacing between the lines <current>: Specify the
distance between pattern lines or press ENTER
Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify
a second set of lines to be drawn at 90 degrees to the original
lines, or press ENTER
Select
Selects objects for hatching.
Remove Islands
Removes from the boundary set objects defined as islands by the Internal
Point option.
Select island to remove: Select an island
Advanced
Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the hatch boundary.
Enter an option [Boundary set/Retain boundary/Island detection/Style/
Associativity]: Enter an option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
Boundary Set
Defines the set of objects that AutoCAD analyzes when defining a boundary
from a specified internal point.
Specify candidate set for boundary [New/Everything] <current>: Enter an option
or press ENTER
118 | BHATCH
New Creates a boundary set from a selection set you define.
Everything Creates a boundary set from everything visible in the

current viewport. Selecting this option discards any
current boundary set and uses everything visible in the
drawing or in the current viewport.
Retain Boundary
Specifies whether to add the temporary boundary objects to the drawing
after hatching is completed.
Retain derived boundaries? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Island Detection
Specifies whether to use objects within the outermost boundary as boundary
objects.
Do you want island detection? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Specifying no island detection prompts for the ray casting method.

Enter type of ray casting [Nearest/+X/-X/+Y/-Y/Angle] <current>: Enter an
option or press ENTER
Nearest Runs a line from the point you specify to the nearest
object and then traces the boundary in a
ray casting counterclockwise direction.
direction (+X)
+X Runs a line in the positive X direction from the point
you specify to the first object encountered and then
traces the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
-X Runs a line in the negative X direction from the point
ray casting
direction (-X)
+Y Runs a line in the positive Y direction from the point
-Y Runs a line in the negative Y direction from the point
ray casting
direction (+Y)
BHATCH | 119
Angle Runs a line at the specified angle from the point you
specify to the first object encountered and then traces
the boundary in a counterclockwise direction.
Specify ray casting angle: Specify an angle
Style
Specifies the method used to hatch objects within the outermost hatch
boundary. If you have selected no internal objects, a hatching style has no
effect. Because you can define a precise set of boundaries, it’s often best to use
ray casting the Normal style.
direction (-Y)
Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.

AutoCAD stores the Ignore style code by adding, I to the
pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer Hatches inward from the outer boundary. AutoCAD
turns hatching off if it encounters an internal
intersection and doesn’t turn it back on. Because this
process starts from both ends of each hatch line,
AutoCAD hatches only the outermost level of the
structure and leaves the internal structure blank.
AutoCAD stores the Outer style code by adding ,O to
Normal Hatches inward from the outer boundary. If AutoCAD
encounters an internal intersection, it turns off
hatching until it encounters another intersection.
Thus, areas separated from the outside of the hatched
area by an odd number of intersections are hatched,
while areas separated by an even number of
intersections are not. AutoCAD stores the Normal style
code by adding ,N to the pattern name in the HPNAME
system variable.
Associativity
Specifies that the new hatch pattern is updated when its boundaries are mod-
ified. Hatching created with BHATCH is, by default, associative.
Do you want associativity? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
See Also
See “Standard Libraries” and “Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts” in the User’s
Guide. For information about the acad.pat file and creating your own hatch
patterns, see “Custom Hatch Patterns” in the Customization Guide.
120 | BHATCH
Commands CONVERT converts 2D polylines and associative hatches
created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier to an opti-
mized format. HATCH fills a specified boundary.
HATCHEDIT modifies an existing hatch block.
BOUNDARY creates a region or a polyline from an
enclosed area. EXPLODE breaks a compound object into
its component objects.
System Variables HPANG sets the hatching angle. HPBOUND specifies the
type of boundary object that BHATCH creates.
HPDOUBLE specifies whether a user-defined hatch is
double-hatched. HPNAME sets the hatch pattern name.
HPSCALE sets the hatch pattern scale. HPSPACE sets the
spacing of a user- defined hatch pattern. PICKSTYLE con-
trols group selection and associative hatch selection.
SNAPBASE specifies the start point for the hatch pattern.
FILLMODE controls the display of all hatch objects
created using AutoCAD Release 14 or later.
BLIPMODE
Controls the display of marker blips
Command line: blipmode (or 'blipmode for transparent use)
Enter mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
When Blip mode is on, a temporary mark in the shape of a plus sign (+)
appears where you specify a point. BLIPMODE is off by default.
objects drawn with objects drawn with

BLIPMODE on BLIPMODE off
To remove marker blips, use REDRAW, REGEN, ZOOM, PAN, or other

commands that redraw or regenerate the drawing.
See Also
System Variables BLIPMODE stores the Blip mode setting.
BLIPMODE | 121
BLOCK
Creates a block definition from objects you select
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Block ➤ Make
Command line: block
The Block Definition dialog box is displayed.

If you enter –block at the Command prompt, BLOCK displays prompts on the
Block Definition Dialog Box

Defines and names a block.
Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by
Microsoft® Windows® and AutoCAD for other purposes, if the system
variable EXTNAMES is set to 1.
122 | BLOCK
The block name and definition are saved in the current drawing.
Note You cannot use DIRECT, LIGHT, AVE_RENDER, RM_SDB, SH_SPOT, and
OVERHEAD as valid block names.
Base Point
Specifies an insertion base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X Specifies the X coordinate value.
Y Specifies the Y coordinate value.
Z Specifies the Z coordinate value.
Pick Insertion Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can
Base Point specify an insertion base point in the current drawing.
Objects
Specifies the objects to include in the new block and whether to retain or
delete the selected objects or convert them to a block instance after you
create the block.
Select Objects Closes the Block Definition dialog box temporarily
while you select the objects for the block. When you
finish selecting objects, press ENTER to redisplay the
Block Definition dialog box.
Quick Select Displays the Quick Select dialog box (see page 821),
which defines a selection set.
Retain Retains the selected objects as distinct objects in the
drawing after you create the block.
Convert to Block Converts the selected objects to a block instance in the
drawing after you create the block.
Delete Deletes the selected objects from the drawing after you
create the block.
Objects Selected Displays the number of selected objects.
Preview Icon
Determines whether to save a preview icon with the block definition and
specifies the source of the icon.
Do Not Include Specifies that no icon is created.
an Icon
BLOCK | 123
Create Icon from Creates a preview icon to be saved with the block
Block Geometry definition from the geometry of the objects in the
block.
Preview Image Displays an image of the preview icon you’ve specified.
Drag and Drop Units

Specifies the units to which the block is scaled when it is dragged into a draw-
ing using DesignCenter or i-drop.
Description
Specifies the text description associated with the block.
Hyperlink
Opens the Insert Hyperlink dialog box (see page 416), which you can use to
associate a hyperlink with the block definition.
BLOCK Command Line

If you enter -block at the Command prompt, BLOCK displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name or ?
Block Name
Names the block. The name can have up to 255 characters and can include
letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by
Microsoft Windows and AutoCAD for other purposes if the system variable
EXTNAMES is set to 1.
If you enter the name of an existing block, AutoCAD prompts you as follows:
Block "NAME" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press
ENTER
By redefining a block, you automatically update all references to that block.

Attributes attached to existing block references remain unchanged in the
drawing. However, new insertions of the block do not prompt for attributes
unless the attribute definitions are included in the new block definition (use
ATTREDEF to redefine blocks that contain attributes).
Specify insertion base point: Specify a point (1)

1
AutoCAD uses the point specified as the base point for subsequent insertions
of the block. Typically, a base point is the center of the block or its lower-left
corner. The base point is also the point about which you can rotate the block
124 | BLOCK
during insertion. A block with 0 rotation is oriented according to the UCS in
effect when it was created. Entering a 3D point inserts the block at a specific
elevation. Omitting the Z coordinate uses the current elevation.
AutoCAD defines a block using the objects selected, the insertion base point,
and the name provided, and then erases the selected objects from the draw-
ing. You can restore the deleted objects by entering the OOPS command
immediately after BLOCK.
objects selected
as a block The insertion base point becomes the origin of the block’s coordinate system,
which is parallel to the UCS in effect at the time that you define the block.
When you insert the block into a drawing, its coordinate system is aligned
parallel to the current UCS. Thus, you can insert a block at any orientation
in space by setting the UCS first.
?—List Previously Defined Blocks

Lists the block names in the text window.
Enter block(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
In the list, external references (xrefs) are indicated with the notation
Xref: resolved
In addition, externally dependent blocks (blocks in an xref) are indicated

with the notation
xdep: XREFNAME
where xrefname is the name of an externally referenced drawing. The follow-

ing terms are used in the list:
■ User Blocks: Number of user-defined blocks in the list.

■ External References: Number of xrefs in the list.
■ Dependent Blocks: Number of externally dependent blocks in the list.
■ Unnamed Blocks: Number of unnamed (anonymous) blocks in the
drawing.
See Also
See “Overview of Blocks” in the User’s Guide.
BLOCK | 125
Commands -WBLOCK writes selected objects to a new drawing file
using the command line. WBLOCK writes selected
objects to a drawing file. ATTDEF creates an attribute
definition for text that you can associate with a block.
ATTREDEF redefines a block and updates associated
attributes. INSERT places a previously defined block or
drawing in the current drawing. XPLODE breaks a block,
dimension, or polyline into its constituent objects.
MINSERT inserts multiple instances of a block in an
array that is a single block reference. OOPS restores
erased objects. XREF controls xrefs.
System Variables EXTNAMES sets the parameters for nongraphical names
(such as linetypes and layers) stored in symbol tables.
BLOCKICON
Generates preview images for blocks displayed in DesignCenter
File menu: Drawing Utilities ➤ Update Block Icons
Command line: blockicon
Enter block names <*>: Specify block names, or press ENTER to update all blocks
Use this command to generate icons for blocks created with an earlier release
of AutoCAD. You can enter a series of comma-delimited block names or wild-
card characters. For example, enter b1,?2, to specify that block B1 and all
two-character blocks ending with 2 should be updated.
After you enter the block names, AutoCAD displays a message describing the
process as it proceeds. Press ESC at any time to stop.
See Also
See “Overview of Blocks” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BLOCK creates a block definition from objects you
select.
126 | BLOCKICON
BMPOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in device-independent bitmap format
Command line: bmpout
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is dis-
played. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
Select objects or <all objects and viewports>: Press ENTER to select all objects
and viewports or use an object selection method and press ENTER
AutoCAD creates a bitmap file that contains the objects you select. The file
reflects what is displayed on the screen.
Note When the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0 (Off), prompts are displayed
on the command line.
BOUNDARY
Creates a region or a polyline from an enclosed area
Draw menu: Boundary
Command line: boundary
The Boundary Creation dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, BOUNDARY displays
prompts on the command line (see page 128).
Boundary Creation Dialog Box

Defines the object type, boundary set, and island detection method for defin-
ing boundaries from points you specify. The Boundary Creation dialog box
is a limited version of the Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box. To access the
other options in this dialog box, use BHATCH.
BMPOUT | 127
For information about all options in this dialog box, see Boundary Hatch and
Fill Dialog Box.
For information about all options in this dialog box, see “Boundary Hatch
and Fill Dialog Box” on page 107.
Once you set the available options, choose Pick Points to specify points in
your drawing to create the boundaries.
BOUNDARY Command Line

If you enter -boundary at the Command prompt, BOUNDARY displays
prompts on the command line.
Specify internal point or [Advanced options]: Specify a point or enter a
Internal Point
Creates a boundary from existing objects that form an enclosed area. Specify
a point inside the area.
Advanced Options
Sets the method AutoCAD uses to create the boundary.
Enter an option [Boundary set/Island detection/Object type]: Enter an option or
press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
128 | BOUNDARY
Boundary Set Defines the set of objects AutoCAD analyzes when it
creates a boundary from a specified point. For
information about defining a boundary set on the
command line, see the BHATCH command line option
“Advanced” on page 118.
Island Detection Specifies whether AutoCAD uses objects within the
outermost boundary as boundary objects. For
information about specifying island detection on the
command line, see the BHATCH command line option
“Advanced” on page 118.
Object Type Specifies the type of object AutoCAD creates as the
boundary.
Enter type of boundary object [Region/Polyline] <current>:
See Also
Commands PLINE creates 2D polylines. REGION creates a region
object from a selection set. BHATCH fills an enclosed
area or selected objects with a hatch pattern.
System Variables HPBOUND controls the object type created by BHATCH
and BOUNDARY.
BOX
Creates a three-dimensional solid box
Once you create a box, you cannot stretch it or change its size. However, you
can extrude the faces of a box with SOLIDEDIT.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Box
Command line: box
Specify corner of box or [CEnter]<0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER for
corner of box, or enter c for center
BOX | 129
Corner of Box
Defines the first corner of the box.
Specify corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
1
2
Corner Specifies the other corner of the box.
Specify height: Specify a distance
Entering a positive value draws the height along the

height positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative
value draws the height along the negative Z axis.
Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.
Specify length: Specify a distance
Entering a positive value draws the length along the

positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current UCS. Entering a
negative value draws the length along the negative X,
Y, and Z axes.
length
Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you
specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width
to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.
height Specify width: Specify a distance
length Entering a positive value draws the length, width, or

width height along the positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current
UCS. Entering a negative value draws the length, width,
or height along the negative X, Y, and Z axes.
Center
Creates the box by using a specified center point.
1
Specify center of box <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
Specify corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point or enter an option
130 | BOX
Corner Specifies a point for the corner of the box.

positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative
value draws the height along the negative Z axis.
Cube Creates a box with sides of equal length.

length positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current UCS. Entering a
negative value draws the length along the negative X,
Y, and Z axes.
Length Creates a box with length, width, and height values you
specify. The length corresponds to the X axis, the width
to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.
Specify width: Specify a distance
height
length Entering a positive value draws the length, width, or

width height along the positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current
UCS. Entering a negative value draws the length, width,
or height along the negative X, Y, and Z axes.
See Also
See “Create 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide.
Commands 3D creates three-dimensional surface objects.
BREAK
Breaks the selected object between two points
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Break
Command line: break
Select object: Use an object selection method, or specify the first break point (1)
on an object
BREAK | 131
The prompts that are displayed next depend on how you select the object. If
2
1 you select the object by using your pointing device, AutoCAD both selects
the object and treats the selection point as the first break point. At the next
before break
prompt you can continue by specifying the second point or overriding the
first point.
Specify second break point or [First point]: Specify the second break point (2) or
after break
enter f
Second Break Specifies the second point for AutoCAD to use to break
Point the object.
First Point Overrides the original first point with the new point
that you specify.
Specify first break point:
Specify second break point:
AutoCAD erases the portion of the object between the two points that you
specify. If the second point is not on the object, AutoCAD selects the nearest
point on the object; therefore, to break off one end of a line, arc, or polyline,
specify the second point beyond the end to be removed.
To split an object in two without erasing a portion, enter the same point for
both the first and second points. You can do this by entering @ to specify the
second point.
Lines, arcs, circles, polylines, ellipses, splines, donuts, and several other
object types can be split into two objects or have one end removed.
AutoCAD converts a circle to an arc by removing a piece of the circle starting
counterclockwise from the first to the second point.
2 1
1 2
See Also
See “Create Breaks” in the User’s Guide.
132 | BREAK
BROWSER
Launches the default web browser defined in your system’s registry
Web toolbar:
Command line: browser
Enter Web location (URL) <current>: Press ENTER or enter a new location; you
don’t need to enter http:// before the location
Pressing ENTER displays your web browser, which automatically connects to

the location you specify. Because BROWSER does not append “http://” to web
locations, you can specify an FTP or file location to your default web browser.
Note BROWSER requires that you have Netscape Navigator 3.0 (or later) or
Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 (or later) installed.
See Also
To specify the default Internet location launched by your browser, see
“Menu, Help, and Miscellaneous File Names” on page 635.
System Variables INETLOCATION stores default URL that is opened when
you issue the BROWSER command.
BROWSER | 133
134
CAL
Evaluates mathematical and geometric expressions
Command line: cal (or 'cal for transparent use)
CAL is an online geometry calculator that evaluates point (vector), real, or

integer expressions. The expressions can access existing geometry using the
object snap functions such as CEN, END, and INS. You can insert AutoLISP®
variables into the arithmetic expression and assign the value of the expres-
sion back to an AutoLISP variable. You can use these arithmetic and vector
expressions in any AutoCAD® command that expects points, vectors, or
numbers.
Understanding Syntax of Expressions

CAL evaluates expressions according to standard mathematical rules of
precedence:
■ Expressions in parentheses first, starting with the innermost set

■ Operators in standard order: exponents first, multiplication and division
second, and addition and subtraction last
■ Operators of equal precedence from left to right
Numeric Expressions
Numeric expressions are real integer numbers and functions combined with
the operators in the following table.
Numeric operators
Operator Operation
() Groups expressions
^ Indicates exponentiation
*,/ Multiplies, divides
+, – Adds, subtracts
CAL | 135
The following are examples of numeric expressions:
3
3 + 0.6
(5.8^2) + PI
Vector Expressions
A vector expression is a collection of points, vectors, numbers, and functions
combined with operators in the following table.
Vector operators
Operator Operation
() Groups expressions
& Determines the vector product of vectors (as a vector)

[a,b,c]&[x,y,z] = [ (b*z) – (c*y) , (c*x) – (a*z) , (a*y) – (b*x) ]
* Determines the scalar product of vectors (as a real number)

[a,b,c]*[x,y,z] = ax + by + cz
*, / Multiplies, divides a vector by a real number

a*[x,y,z] = [a*x,a*y,a*z]
+,– Adds, subtracts vectors (points)

[a,b,c] + [x,y,z] = [a+x,b+y,c+z]
The following are examples of vector expressions:

A+[1,2,3] provides the point positioned [1,2,3] units relative to point A.
The expression
[2<45<45] + [2<45<0] – [1.02, 3.5, 2]
adds two points and subtracts a third point. The first two points are in
spherical coordinates.
Formatting Feet and Inches

Enter feet and inches using the following format:
feet'-inches" or feet'inches"
The expression converts to a real number based on inches, as shown in the
following examples:
136 | CAL
2'-5" converts to 2*12+5 = 29
5" converts to 0*12+5 = 5
2' converts to 2*12+0 = 24
Formatting Angles
The default units for angles are decimal degrees. Enter angles using the
following format:
degdmin'sec"
You must enter 0 and d (0d) when entering an angle that is less than 1 degree
(minutes and seconds only). You can omit the minutes or seconds if they are
zero.
Enter a number followed by r to enter angles in radians. Enter a number fol-
lowed by g to enter angles in grads.
The following examples show ways of entering angles:
124.6r
14g
5d10'20"
0d10'20"
AutoCAD converts angles entered in any format to decimal degrees.
Pi radians is equal to 180 degrees, and 100 grads is equal to 90 degrees.
Using Points and Vectors

Both points and vectors are pairs or triples of real numbers. A point defines
a location in space, but a vector defines a direction (or translation) in space.
Some CAL functions, such as pld and plt, return a point. Other functions,
such as nor and vec, return a vector.
Formatting Points and Vectors

A point or vector is a set of three real expressions enclosed in brackets ([ ]):
[r1,r2,r3]
The notation p1, p2, and so forth designates points. The notation v1, v2, and
so forth designates vectors. In drawings, points are displayed as dots, and vec-
tors are displayed as lines with arrows.
CAL | 137
CAL supports points expressed in all AutoCAD formats.
Point formats
Coordinate system Point format
Polar [dist<angle]
Cylindrical [dist<angle,z]
Spherical [dist<angle1<angle2]
Relative Uses the @ prefix [@x,y,z]
WCS (instead of UCS) Uses the * prefix [*x,y,z]
You can omit the following components of a point or vector: coordinate

values of zero and comma(s) immediately preceding the right bracket (]).
The following are valid points:
[1,2] is the same as [1,2,0]
[,,3] is the same as [0,0,3]
[ ] is the same as [0,0,0]
In the following example, the point is entered in the relative spherical coor-
dinate system with respect to the WCS. The distance is 1+2=3; the angles are
10+20=30 degrees and 45 degrees, 20 minutes.
[@*1+2<10+20<45d20"]
The following is a valid point that contains arithmetic expressions as its
components:
[2*(1.0+3.3),0.4–1.1,2*1.4]
The following example uses the Endpoint object snap and the vector [2,0,3]
to calculate a point that is offset from a selected endpoint.
end + [2,,3]
The calculated point is offset two units in the X direction and three units in
the Z direction relative to the selected endpoint.
138 | CAL
Using AutoLISP Variables
You can use AutoLISP variables within arithmetic expressions. The variables
must be one of the following types: real, integer, or 2D or 3D point (vector).
This example defines a point positioned 5 units in the X direction and 1 unit
in the Y direction from the point stored in AutoLISP variable A.
A+[5,1]
If you enter an AutoLISP variable with a name containing a character with
special meaning in CAL, such as +, –, *, or /, enclose the variable name in
apostrophes ('), for example:
'number-of-holes'
Assigning Values to AutoLISP Variables

To assign a value to an AutoLISP variable, precede the arithmetic expression
with the variable name and the equal sign (=). Later, you can use the value of
this variable for other calculations.
This example saves the values of two expressions in AutoLISP variables P1
and R1.
Command: cal
>> Expression: P1=cen+[1,0]
>> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc
Command: cal
>> Expression: R1=dist(end,end)/3
>> Select entity for END snap: Select an object with an endpoint
This example uses the values of variables P1 and R1:

Command: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tangent radius)]: 'cal
>> Expression: P1+[0,1]
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <last>: 'cal
>> Expression: R1+0.5
Using AutoCAD System Variables

You can use the getvar AutoLISP function to read the value of an AutoCAD
system variable.
The syntax is
(getvar "variable_name")
CAL | 139
The following example uses getvar to obtain the point that is the center of
the view in the current viewport.
(setq c (getvar "viewctr"))
Converting Units of Measurement

The cvunit AutoLISP function converts either a number or a point from one
unit of measurement to another. See the Support/acad.unt file for a list of units
that you can convert. The syntax is
cvunit(value, from_unit, to_unit)
The following example converts the value 1 from inches to centimeters:
cvunit(1,inch,cm)
Using Standard Numeric Functions

CAL supports the standard numeric functions in the following table.
Numeric functions
Function Description
sin(angle) Sine of the angle
cos(angle) Cosine of the angle
tang(angle) Tangent of the angle
asin(real) Arcsine of the number; the number must be between –1 and 1
acos(real) Arccosine of the number; the number must be between –1 and 1
atan(real) Arctangent of the number
ln(real) Natural log of the number
log(real) Base-10 log of the number
exp(real) Natural exponent of the number
exp10(real) Base-10 exponent of the number
sqr(real) Square of the number
sqrt(real) Square root of the number; the number must be nonnegative
140 | CAL
Numeric functions (continued)
abs(real) Absolute value of the number
round(real) Number rounded to the nearest integer
trunc(real) Integer portion of the number
r2d(angle) Angles in radians converted to degrees; for example, r2d(pi) converts

the constant pi to 180 degrees
d2r(angle) Angles in degrees converted to radians; for example, d2r(180) converts

180 degrees to radians and returns the value of the constant pi
pi The constant pi
Calculating a Vector from Two Points

The functions vec and vec1 calculate a vector from two points.
vec(p1,p2) Provides the vector from point p1 to point p2.
vec1(p1,p2) Provides the unit vector from point p1 to point p2.
The following example uses CAL to move selected objects three units in the
direction from the center of one selected circle to the center of another
selected circle:
Command: move
Select objects
Specify base point or displacement: 'cal
>> Expression: 3*vec1(cen,cen)
Select entity for CEN snap: Specify a circle or an arc
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point or press ENTER
CAL | 141
The following examples illustrate the meaning of vector and point
calculations.
Examples of vector and point calculations
Expression Meaning
vec(a,b) Determines vector translation from point a to point b.
vec1(a,b) Determines unit vector direction from point a to point b.
L*vec1(a,b) Determines vector of length L in the direction from point a to

point b.
a+v Determines point b, which is a translation of the point a

through vector v.
a+[5<20] Determines point b positioned 5 units away from point a under

the angle of 20 degrees. Note that [5<20] is a vector in polar
coordinates.
b b a
a a
vec(a,b) vec1(a,b) L*vec1(a,b)
b
v
a
a
a+v a+[5<20]
142 | CAL
Calculating the Length of a Vector
The abs function calculates the length of a vector.
abs(v) Calculates the length of vector v, a nonnegative real
number.
In spherical coordinates (dist<ang<ang), the dist is the
length of the vector.
The following example calculates the length of the
vector [1,2,3]:
abs([1,2,3])
Obtaining a Point by Cursor

To enter a point using the pointing device, use the cur function. AutoCAD
prompts you to specify a point and uses the coordinate values of the point in
the expression. The point coordinate values are expressed in terms of the
current UCS. The cur function sets the value of the AutoCAD variable
LASTPOINT.
The following example adds the vector [3.6,2.4,0]—the result of 1.2*[3,2]—

to the point you select. This expression produces a point that is offset from
the selected point.
cur+1.2*[3,2]
Obtaining the Last-Specified Point

Use the @ character in the expression to obtain the coordinate of the last
point, as shown in the following example:
Command: line
Specify first point: 'cal
>> Expression: cen+[0,1]
>> Select entity for CEN snap: Select a circle or an arc
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: 'cal
>> Expression: @+3*vec1(cen,cen)
The first point of the line is one unit in the Y direction from the center of the
first selected circle. The second point of the line is three units away from the
first point. The direction of the line is from the center of the first selected cir-
cle to the center of the second selected circle.
CAL | 143
Using AutoCAD Snap Modes in Arithmetic
Expressions
You can use the AutoCAD Snap modes as parts of arithmetic expressions.
AutoCAD prompts you to select an object and returns the coordinate of the
appropriate snap point. Using arithmetic expressions with Snap modes
greatly simplifies entering coordinates relative to other objects.
When you use these Snap modes, enter only the three-character name. For
example, when you use the Center Snap mode, enter cen. CAL Snap modes
set the value of the LASTPOINT system variable.
CAL Snap modes
Abbreviation Snap mode
END ENDPOINT
INS INSERT
INT INTERSECTION
MID MIDPOINT
CEN CENTER
NEA NEAREST
NOD NODE
QUA QUADRANT
PER PERPENDICULAR
TAN TANGENT
The following example uses the Center and Endpoint Snap modes in a CAL
expression:
(cen+end)/2
CAL prompts for a circle or arc and an object. It then determines the mid-
point between the center of the circle or arc and the end of the selected
object.
144 | CAL
Using the Midpoint Snap mode, in the following example CAL prompts for
an object and returns a point one unit in the Y direction from the midpoint
of the selected object:
mid+[,1]
The following example uses the Endpoint Snap mode to calculate the cen-
troid of a triangle defined by three endpoints:
(end+end+end)/3
Converting Points between UCS and WCS

Normally, AutoCAD assumes all coordinates to be relative to the current
UCS. The following functions convert points between UCS and WCS.
w2u(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the WCS to the current
UCS.
u2w(p1) Converts point p1 expressed in the current UCS to the
WCS.
You can use w2u to find the WCS origin in terms of the current UCS:
w2u([0,0,0])
Filtering the X, Y, and Z Components of a Point or Vector

The following functions filter the X, Y, and Z components of a point or
vector.
Point-filter functions
xyof(p1) X and Y components of a point; Z component is set to 0.0
xzof(p1) X and Z components of a point; Y component is set to 0.0
yzof(p1) Y and Z components of a point; X component is set to 0.0
xof(p1) X component of a point; Y and Z components are set to 0.0
yof(p1) Y component of a point; X and Z components are set to 0.0
zof(p1) Z component of a point; X and Y components are set to 0.0
rxof(p1) X component of a point
CAL | 145
Point-filter functions (continued)
ryof(p1) Y component of a point
rzof(p1) Z component of a point
The following example provides the Z component of a point expressed in

spherical coordinates:
zof([2<45<45])
The following example provides a point whose X and Y coordinate values are
taken from point a and the Z coordinate value from point b:
xyof(a)+zof(b)
Calculating a Point on a Line

The plt and pld functions return a point on a given line. You can specify the
position of the point on the line either by its distance from the first point or
parametrically by a t parameter.
pld(p1,p2,dist) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1
and p2. The parameter dist defines the distance of the
point from the point p1.
plt(p1,p2,t) Calculates a point on the line passing through points p1
and p2. The parameter t defines the parametric position
of the point on the line.
The following are examples of the parameter t:
If t=0 the point is p1
If t=0.5 the point is the midpoint between p1 and p2
If t=1 the point is p2
Rotating a Point About an Axis

The rot function rotates a point about an axis and returns the resulting point.
rot(p,origin,ang) Rotates point p through angle ang about the Z axis
passing through the point origin, as shown in the
following example:
146 | CAL
ang
origin
p
rot(p,AxP1,AxP2, Rotates point p through an angle ang about the axis

ang) passing through points AxP1 and AxP2, as shown in the
following example. The axis is oriented from the first
point to the second point.
AxP2
ang
p
AxP1
Obtaining an Intersection Point

The ill and ilp functions determine intersection points.
ill(p1,p2,p3,p4) Determines the intersection point between two lines
(p1,p2) and (p3,p4). AutoCAD considers all points
three-dimensional.
ilp(p1,p2,p3,p4, Determines the intersection point between a line
p5) (p1,p2) and a plane passing through three points
(p3,p4,p5).
Calculating a Distance
dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points, p1 and p2.
This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1–p2).
dpl(p,p1,p2) Determines the shortest distance between point p and
the line passing through points p1 and p2.
CAL | 147
p1
p2
shortest distance
90×
p
dpp(p,p1,p2,p3) Determines the distance from a point p to a plane

defined by three points (p1,p2,p3).
dist(p1,p2) Determines the distance between two points p1 and p2.
This is the same as the vector expression abs(p1–p2).
p2 90×
p3
p1
The following example returns half the distance

between the centers of two selected objects:
dist(cen,cen)/2
The following example finds the distance between the

point 3,2,4 and a plane you define by selecting three
endpoints:
dpp([3,2,4],end, end, end)
148 | CAL
Obtaining a Radius
The rad function determines the radius of a selected object.
rad Determines the radius of a selected object. The object
can be a circle, an arc, or a 2D polyline arc segment.
The following example uses rad with the CIRCLE
command. The radius of the new circle is two-thirds of
the radius of the selected polyline arc segment:
Command: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P/2P/Ttr (tangent tan-

gent radius)]: cen
of Select the circle
Specify radius of circle or [Diameter] <last>: 'cal
>> Expression: 2/3*rad
>> Select circle, arc or polyline segment for RAD
function: Select the circle
arc
new circle
center
Obtaining an Angle
The ang function determines the angle between two lines. Angles are
measured counterclockwise with respect to either the X axis, in the two-
dimensional case, or to a user-specified axis, in the three-dimensional case.
ang(v) Determines the angle between the X axis and vector v.
The vector v is considered 2D, projected on the XY
plane of the current UCS.
ang(p1,p2) Determines the angle between the X axis and the line
(p1,p2), oriented from p1 to p2. The points are
considered 2D, projected on the XY plane of the current
UCS.
ang(apex,p1,p2) Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and
(apex,p2). The points are considered 2D, projected on
the XY plane of the current UCS.
CAL | 149
ang(apex,p1,p2, Determines the angle between lines (apex,p1) and
p) (apex,p2). The lines are considered 3D. The last
parameter, point p, is used to define the orientation of
the angle. The angle is measured counterclockwise with
respect to the axis going from apex to p.
The following examples show how angles are measured.
p2
v
p1
X
0,0 0,0
ang(v) ang(p1, p2)
p2 p
Y
apex p2
apex
p1
X
0,0 p1
ang(p1,p2) ang (apex,p1,p2,p)
You can determine the angle between the two sides of a triangle using the ang
function, as shown in the following example:
Command: cal
>> Expression: ang(end,end,end)
Select the apex of the angle, and then select the two opposite vertices.
Calculating a Normal Vector

The nor function calculates the unit normal vector (a vector perpendicular to
a line or plane), not a point. The vector defines the direction of the normal,
not a location in space. You can add this normal vector to a point to obtain
another point.
150 | CAL
nor Determines the three-dimensional unit normal vector
of a selected circle, arc, or polyline arc segment. This
normal vector is the Z coordinate of the object
coordinate system (OCS) of the selected object.
nor(v) Determines the two-dimensional unit normal vector to
vector v. Both vectors are considered 2D, projected on
the XY plane of the current UCS. The orientation of the
resulting normal vector points to the left of the original
vector v.
nor(p1,p2) Determines the 2D unit normal vector to line p1,p2.
The line is oriented from p1 to p2. The orientation of
the resulting normal vector points to the left from the
original line (p1,p2).
nor(p1,p2,p3) Determines the 3D unit normal vector to a plane
defined by the three points p1, p2, and p3. The
orientation of the normal vector is such that the given
points go counterclockwise with respect to the normal.
The following illustrations show how normal vectors are calculated:
nor nor(v)
p3
p2
p2
p1
p1
nor (p1,p2) nor (p1,p2,p3)
CAL | 151
The following example sets the view direction perpendicular to a selected
object. AutoCAD displays the object in plan view and does not distort the
object by the parallel projection.
Command: vpoint
Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current
Specify a view point or [Rotate] <display compass and tripod>: 'cal
>> Expression: nor
>> Select circle, arc or polyline for NOR function:
Using Shortcut Functions

The following functions are shortcuts for commonly used expressions. These
functions combine some of the previously defined functions with the End-
point Snap mode.
Shortcut functions
Function Shortcut for Description
dee dist(end,end) Distance between two endpoints
ille ill(end,end,end,end) Intersection of two lines defined by four

endpoints
mee (end+end)/2 Midpoint between two endpoints
nee nor(end,end) Unit vector in the XY plane and normal to two

endpoints
vee vec(end,end) Vector from two endpoints
vee1 vec1(end,end) Unit vector from two endpoints
See Also
See “Use the Geometry Calculator” in the User’s Guide.
152 | CAL
CAMERA
Sets a different camera and target location
Setting the camera and target locations gives you a different view of objects
in your drawing.
camera at A, target at B
camera location and target point camera at B, target at A
View toolbar:
Command line: camera
Current camera position is: current

Current camera target is: current
Specify new camera position <current>: Enter a value or specify a point
Sets the point from which you view the objects in your model.
Specify new camera target <current>: Enter a value or specify a point
Sets the point in your model that you are viewing.

To set the camera and target locations for a 3D Orbit view, enter the CAMERA
command before starting 3DORBIT.
CAMERA | 153
CHAMFER
Bevels the edges of objects
If both objects you want to chamfer are on the same layer, AutoCAD creates
the chamfer on that layer. Otherwise, AutoCAD creates the chamfer line on
the current layer. This is also true for color, linetype, and lineweight.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Chamfer
Command line: chamfer
(TRIM mode) Current chamfer Dist1 = current, Dist2 = current

Select first line or [Polyline/Distance/Angle/Trim/Method/mUltiple]:
first selected line second selected line result
Note Chamfering an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line
segments removes hatch associativity. If you defined the boundary from a
polyline, associativity is maintained.
First Line
Specifies the first of two edges required to define a two-dimensional chamfer,
or the edge of a three-dimensional solid to chamfer.
Select second line:
If the two lines you select are polyline segments, they must be adjacent to
each other or separated by no more than one segment. If they’re separated
by one line or arc segment, AutoCAD deletes the segment and replaces it with
a chamfer line.
154 | CHAMFER
If you select an edge on a 3D solid, you must indicate which one of the two
surfaces adjacent to the edge is the base surface.
Base surface selection...
Enter surface selection option [Next/OK (current)] <OK>: Enter n or o, or press
ENTER
Entering o or pressing ENTER sets the selected surface as the base surface.
Entering n selects either of the two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge.
Specify base surface chamfer distance <current>:
Specify other surface chamfer distance <current>:
After you select the base surface and the chamfer distances, select the edges
of the base surface to chamfer. You can select edges individually or all the
edges at once.
Select an edge or [Loop]: Select an edge, enter l, or press ENTER
first edge selected first base surface second base surface
Edge
Selects an individual edge to chamfer.
select edge edge selected chamfered edge
Loop
Switches to Edge Loop mode.
Select an edge loop or [Edge]: Select an edge, enter e, or press ENTER
Edge Loop Selects all edges on the base surface.
CHAMFER | 155
selecting edge loop edge selected chamfered
edge loop
Edge Switches to Edge mode.
Polyline
Chamfers an entire 2D polyline.
Select 2D polyline:
AutoCAD chamfers the intersecting line segments at each vertex of the

polyline. Chamfers become new segments of the polyline.
If the polyline includes segments that are too short to accommodate the
chamfer distance, those segments are not chamfered.
selected polyline result
Distance
Sets the distance of the chamfer from the endpoint of the selected edge.
Specify first chamfer distance <current>:
Specify second chamfer distance <current>:
equal distances unequal distances
If you set both distances to zero, AutoCAD extends or trims the two lines so
they end at the same point.
156 | CHAMFER
Angle
Sets the chamfer distances using a chamfer distance for the first line and an
angle for the second line.
Specify chamfer length on the first line <current>:
Specify chamfer angle from the first line <current>:
chamfer distance
first
selected
second angle
selected
Trim
Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the chamfer line
endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>:
Note Trim sets the TRIMMODE system variable to 1; No Trim sets TRIMMODE to
0.
If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, CHAMFER trims the intersecting

lines to the endpoints of the chamfer line. If the selected lines do not inter-
sect, AutoCAD extends or trims them so that they do. If TRIMMODE is set to
0, AutoCAD creates the chamfer without trimming the selected lines.
Method
Controls whether AutoCAD uses two distances or a distance and an angle to
create the chamfer.
Enter trim method [Distance/Angle] <current>:
Multiple
Bevels the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the main
prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press
ENTER to end the command.
CHAMFER | 157
If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the
prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed
again.
All the chamfers you created with the Multiple option are removed if you
click Undo.
See Also
See “Create Chamfers” in the User’s Guide.
Commands FILLET rounds and fillets the edges of objects.
System Variables CHAMFERA sets the first chamfer distance. CHAMFERB

sets the second chamfer distance. CHAMFERC sets the
chamfer length. CHAMFERD sets the chamfer angle.
CHAMMODE controls whether CHAMFER uses two dis-
tances or a distance and an angle to create a chamfer.
TRIMMODE controls whether selected edges are
trimmed to the endpoints of the chamfer line.
CHANGE
Changes the properties of existing objects
Command line: change
Select objects:
Except for zero-thickness lines, the objects selected must be parallel to the
current user coordinate system (UCS).
If you select lines and other changeable objects in the same selection set, you
get varying results depending upon the object selection sequence. The easiest
way to use CHANGE is to select only lines in a selection set or select only
objects other than lines in a selection set.
Specify change point or [Properties]: Specify a new point, or press ENTER to enter
new values
158 | CHANGE
Change Point or Values
Changes the selected objects. The result depends on the type of objects you
select.
Lines Moves the endpoints of the selected lines that are
closest to the change point to the new point, unless
Ortho mode is on. If Ortho mode is on, AutoCAD
modifies the selected lines so that they become parallel
to either the X or the Y axis rather than moving their
endpoints to the specified coordinate.
2 2
1 1
Ortho off Ortho on
Circles Changes the circle radius. If you selected more than one
circle, AutoCAD moves on to the next circle and repeats
the prompt.
Specify new circle radius <no change>:
Text Changes text position and other properties.

Specify new text insertion point <no change>:
Specifying a new location repositions the text. Pressing

ENTER leaves the text in its original position.
Enter new text style <current>:
If the text has a fixed height, AutoCAD skips the next

prompt.
Specify new height <current>:
Specify new rotation angle <current>:
Enter new text <current>:
AutoCAD highlights the next object and displays the

prompts relating to it.
CHANGE | 159
Attribute Changes the text and text properties of an attribute that
Definitions is not part of a block.
Specify new text insertion point:
Specifying a new location repositions the text. Pressing

ENTER leaves the text at its original position.
Enter new text style <current>:
If the text has a fixed height, AutoCAD skips the next

prompt.
Specify new height <current>:
Specify new rotation angle <current>:
Enter new text <current>:
Enter new tag <current>:
Enter new prompt <current>:
Enter new default value <current>:
Blocks Changes the location or rotation of a block.

Specify new block insertion point: Specify a point (1), or
press ENTER
Specifying a new location repositions the block.

1 Pressing ENTER leaves the block in its original position.
Specify new block rotation angle <current>:
AutoCAD rotates the block about its insertion point to

the specified angle.
Properties
Modifies properties of existing objects.
Enter property to change [Color/Elev/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/
PLotstyle]:
Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot
styles.
If you select several objects with different values for the property you want
to change, AutoCAD displays varies as the current value.
160 | CHANGE
You can change several properties at a time. The Enter Property to Change
prompt is redisplayed after each option is completed.
Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<current>: Enter a color name or a
number from 1 through 255, enter t, enter co, enter bylayer or byblock, or press
ENTER
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the
object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
Color Book Specifies a color from a loaded color book to used for
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that
has been installed such as PANTONE®

Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the
selected color book such as Pantone®573
Elev
Changes the Z-axis elevation of 2D objects.
Specify new elevation <current>:
You can change the elevation of an object only if all its points have the same
Z value.
CHANGE | 161
z z
Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.
y
y Enter new layer name <current>:
Ltype
x x
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
Elev = 0 Elev = 2
Enter new linetype name <current>:
If the new linetype is not loaded, AutoCAD tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the
linetype.
Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Specify new linetype scale <current>:
Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are pre-
defined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest
predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.
Enter new lineweight <current>:
Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Specify new thickness <current>:
Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport

object has no effect.
Plotstyle
Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of
property settings that is saved in a plot style table.
Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>: Enter a name or enter ?
Plot Style Assigns the plot style to the selected objects. When you
plot the drawing, objects are plotted with the properties
defined in the designated plot style. Plot styles assigned
to objects can be overridden by other plot style
assignments.
162 | CHANGE
?—List Plot Styles Lists all the plot style names defined in the drawing.
See Also
Commands CHPROP and PROPERTIES perform the property func-
tions of CHANGE without requiring the selected objects
to be parallel to the current UCS.
CHECKSTANDARDS
Checks the current drawing for standards violations
CAD Standards toolbar:

Tools menu: CAD Standards ➤ Check
Command line: checkstandards
The Check Standards dialog box is displayed.
Check Standards Dialog Box

Analyzes the current drawing for standards violations.
Problem Provides a description of a nonstandard object in the
current drawing. To fix a problem, select a replacement
from the Replace With list, and then click Fix.
Replace With Lists possible replacements for the current standards
violation. If a recommended fix is available, it is
preceded by a check mark. If a recommended fix is not
available, no items are highlighted in the Replace With
list.
Preview of Indicates the properties of the nonstandard AutoCAD
Changes object that will be changed if the fix currently selected
in the Replace With list is applied.
Fix Fixes the nonstandard AutoCAD object using the item
currently selected in the Replace With list, and
advances to the next nonstandard object in the current
drawing. This button is unavailable if a recommended
fix does not exist or if an item is not highlighted in the
Replace With list.
Next Problem Advances to the next nonstandard AutoCAD object in
the current drawing without applying a fix.
CHECKSTANDARDS | 163
Mark This Flags the current problem as ignored. If the Show
Problem as Ignored Problems option is turned off in the CAD
Ignored Standards Settings dialog box, problems flagged as
ignored are not displayed the next time the drawing is
checked.
Settings Displays the CAD Standards Settings dialog box, which
specifies additional settings for the Check Standards
dialog box and the Configure Standards dialog box.
Close Closes the Check Standards dialog box without
applying a fix to the standards violation currently
displayed in Problem.
CHPROP
Changes the color, layer, linetype, linetype scale factor, lineweight, thickness, and plot style
of an object
Command line: chprop
Select objects:
Enter property to change [Color/LAyer/LType/ltScale/LWeight/Thickness/
PLotstyle]:
Note The Plotstyle option is displayed only when you are using named plot
styles.
If you select several objects with different values for the property you want
to change, AutoCAD displays varies as the current value.
Color
Changes the color of the selected objects.
Enter new color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<current>: Enter a color name or a
number from 1 through 255, enter t, enter co, enter bylayer or byblock, or press
ENTER
For example, to change a color to red, enter red or 1. If you enter bylayer, the
object assumes the color of the layer on which it is located. If you enter
byblock, the object inherits the color of the block of which it is a component.
164 | CHPROP

selected color book such as PANTONE® 573
Layer
Changes the layer of the selected objects.
Enter new layer name <current>:
Ltype
Changes the linetype of the selected objects.
Enter new linetype name <current>:
If the new linetype is not loaded, AutoCAD tries to load it from the standard
linetype library file, acad.lin. If this procedure fails, use LINETYPE to load the
linetype.
Ltscale
Changes the linetype scale factor of the selected objects.
Specify new linetype scale <current>:
Lweight
Changes the lineweight of the selected objects. Lineweight values are pre-
defined values. If you enter a value that is not a predefined value, the closest
predefined lineweight is assigned to the selected objects.
Enter new lineweight <current>:
CHPROP | 165
Thickness
Changes the Z-direction thickness of 2D objects.
Specify new thickness <current>:
Changing the thickness of a 3D polyline, dimension, or layout viewport

object has no effect.
Plotstyle
Changes the plot style of the selected objects. A plot style is a collection of
property settings that is saved in a plot style table. This option is displayed
only when you are using named plot styles.
Enter Plot Style or [?] <current>: Enter a name or enter ?
Plot Style Assigns the plot style to the selected objects. When you
plot the drawing, objects are plotted with the properties
defined in the designated plot style. Plot styles assigned
to objects can be overridden by other plot style
assignments.
?—List Plot Styles Lists all the plot styles defined in the drawing.
See Also
Commands PROPERTIES displays the Properties palette, in which
you can view or modify properties of the selected
objects. CHANGE changes object properties from the
command line for objects that are parallel to the cur-
rent UCS.
CIRCLE
Creates a circle
You can create a circle by beginning with the center point or one of three
points on the circumference, or you can select objects to which the circle is
tangent.
166 | CIRCLE
Note To draw an isometric circle, use the Isocircle option of the ELLIPSE com-
mand. The Isocircle option is available for ELLIPSE only when the Style option of
Snap mode is set to Isometric (see DSETTINGS).
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Circle
Command line: circle
Specify center point for circle or [3P (Three Points)/2P (Two Points)/Ttr (tan tan
radius)]: Specify a point or enter an option
Center Point
Draws a circle based on a center point and a diameter or a radius.
1 Specify radius of circle or [Diameter]: Specify a point, enter a value, enter d, or

press ENTER
2 Radius Defines the radius of the circle. Enter a value, or specify

radius a point (2). The distance between this point and the
center point determines the radius of the circle.
Draws a circle using the center point and a specified
Diameter
1 distance for the diameter.
2 Specify diameter of circle <current>: Specify a point (2),

diameter enter a value, or press ENTER
1
3P (Three Points)
Draws a circle based on three points on the circumference.
2
Specify first point on circle: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point on circle: Specify a point (2)
3 Specify third point on circle: Specify a point (3)
3P
CIRCLE | 167
2P (Two Points)
1 Draws a circle based on two endpoints of the diameter.
Specify first endpoint of circle’s diameter: Specify a point (1)
Specify second endpoint of circle’s diameter: Specify a point (2)
2
2P
TTR (Tangent, Tangent, Radius)

Draws a circle with a specified radius tangent to two objects.
Specify point on object for first tangent of circle: Select a circle, arc, or line
Specify point on object for second tangent of circle: Select a circle, arc, or line
Specify radius of circle <current>:
Sometimes more than one circle matches the specified criteria. AutoCAD
draws the circle of the specified radius whose tangent points are closest to the
selected points.
tan, tan, radius
See Also
See “Draw Circles” in the User’s Guide.
Commands The Isocircle option of the ELLIPSE command draws an
isometric circle.
System Variables CIRCLERAD stores the default value for the circle radius.
CLOSE
Closes the current drawing
File menu: Close
Command line: close
AutoCAD closes the current drawing. If you modified the drawing since it
was last saved, AutoCAD prompts you to save or discard the changes.
168 | CLOSE
You can close a file that has been opened in Read-only mode if you have
made no changes or if you are willing to discard changes. To save changes to
a read-only file, you must use the SAVEAS command.
CLOSEALL
Closes all currently open drawings
Window menu: Close All
Command line: closeall
Closes all open drawings. A message box is displayed for each unsaved draw-
ing, in which you can save any changes to the drawing before closing it.
See Also
Commands CLOSE closes the current drawing if there have been no
changes since the drawing was last saved.
COLOR
Sets the color for new objects
Format menu: Color
Command line: color (or 'color for transparent use)
The Select Color dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -color at the Command prompt, COLOR displays prompts on the
Select Color Dialog Box

You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the color of objects by
selecting from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, True Colors, and
Color Book colors.
CLOSEALL | 169
color numbers
10–249
color numbers 1–9

color BYBLOCK or
color numbers
BYLAYER
250–255
color name current color

or number preview tile
Index Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)

Specifies color settings using the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors.
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
Specifies a color for new objects using the AutoCAD Color Index. This palette
contains colors 1 through 255. If you select an ACI color, the name or num-
ber of the color is displayed in the Color box as the current color.
Index Color
Indicates the ACI color value for the selected color.
Red, Green, Blue
Indicates the RGB color value for the selected color.
Bylayer
Specifies that new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on which
you create them. The colors being used in available layers are displayed next
to the BYLAYER button. When you click this button, the color assigned to the
object’s layer is selected.
Byblock
Specifies that new objects use the default color (white or black, depending on
your background color) until you group the objects into a block and insert
the block. When you insert the block into a drawing, the objects in the block
inherit the current Color setting. The colors being used in available blocks are
displayed next to the BYBLOCK button. Once the new object is part of a block,
the color assigned to the block is selected.
170 | COLOR
Note The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK options do not apply to the LIGHT command.
Color
Specifies a color name, the BYLAYER and BYBLOCK colors, or an ACI number
of 1 through 255. The New color swatch shows the object's current color.
Old
Displays the previously selected color of the object.
New
Displays the currently selected color of the object.
True Color Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)

Specifies color settings using true colors (24-bit color) with either the Hue,
Saturation, and Luminance (HSL) color model or the Red, Green, and Blue
(RGB) color model. Over sixteen million colors are available when using true
color functionality.
HSL Color Model
Specifies to use the HSL color model for selecting colors. The options avail-
able on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color
model is specified.
Hue, saturation, and luminance are properties of colors. By manipulating the
values of these properties, you can specify a wide range of colors.
Hue Specifies the hue of a color. Hues represent a specific
wavelength of light within the visible spectrum. To
specify a hue, move the crosshairs (from side to side)
over the color spectrum or specify a value in the Hue
box. Adjusting this value effects the RGB value. Valid
hue values are from 0 to 360 degrees.
Saturation Specifies the purity of a color. High saturation causes a
color to look more pure while low saturation causes a
color to look washed-out. To specify color saturation,
move the crosshairs (from top to bottom) over the color
spectrum or specify a value in the Saturation box.
Adjusting this value effects the RGB value. Valid
saturation values are from 0 to 100%.
COLOR | 171
Luminance Specifies the brightness of a color. To specify color
luminance, adjust the bar on the color slider or specify
a value in the Luminance box. Valid luminance values
are from 0 to 100%. A value of 0% represents the color
black, 100% represents white, and 50% represents the
optimal brightness for the color. Adjusting this value
also affects the RGB value.
RGB Color Model
Specifies to use the RGB color model for selecting colors. The options avail-
able on the True Color tab are dependent on whether the HSL or RGB color
model is specified.
Colors can be broken down into components of red, green, and blue. The val-
ues specified for each component represent the intensity of the red, green,
and blue components. The combination of these values can be manipulated
to create a wide range of colors.
Red Specifies the red component of a color. Adjust the slider
on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255 in the
Red box. If this value is adjusted, it will be reflected in
the HSL color mode values.
Green Specifies the green component of a color. Adjust the
slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255
in the Green box. If this value is adjusted, it will be
reflected in the HSL color mode values.
Blue Specifies the blue component of a color. Adjust the
slider on the color bar or specify a value from 1 to 255
in the Blue box. If this value is adjusted, it will be
reflected in the HSL color mode values.
Color
Specifies the RGB color value. This option is updated when changes are made
to HSL or RGB options. You can also edit the RGB value directly using the fol-
lowing format: 000,000,000.
True Color Stored as RGB
Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Old
New
172 | COLOR
Color Books Tab (Select Color Dialog Box)
Specifies colors using third-party color books (such as PANTONE®) or user-
defined color books. Once a color book is selected, the Color Books tab will
display the name of the selected color book.
Color Book
Specifies the color book to be used when selecting colors. You can select a
color book from the drop-down list. This list consists of all the color books
that are found in the Color Book Locations specified in the Options dialog
box.
To load a color book, use the Color Book Locations option in the Options dia-
log box, on the Files tab. The default location for color books is
\support\color. If there are no color books installed, the Color Book drop-
down list is unavailable.
When you select a color book, the colors and the assigned color names are
displayed. AutoCAD supports color books containing up to 10 colors per
page. If a color book is not paginated, AutoCAD organizes the colors into
pages containing 7 colors per page.
To navigate through color book pages, select an area on the color slider or use
the up and down arrows to browse the color book. The corresponding colors
and color names are displayed by page as you navigate through the color
book.
RGB Equivalent
Indicates the value for each RGB color component.
Color
Indicates the currently selected color book color.
Old
New
COLOR Command Line

If you enter -color at the Command prompt, COLOR displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter default object color [Truecolor/COlorbook]<BYLAYER>: Enter a color, enter
t, enter co, or press ENTER
COLOR | 173
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a color name or num-
ber), a true color, or a color from a color book.
You can enter the color number (1 through 255) or the color name (the
names for the first seven colors). For example, you can specify the color red
by entering the ACI number 1 or the ACI name red.
You can also enter bylayer or byblock. If you enter byblock, AutoCAD draws
all new objects in the default color (white or black, depending on your back-
ground color) until they are grouped into a block. When you insert the block
in a drawing, the objects in the block inherit the current setting of COLOR.
Warning! If you used a mixture of color methods to draw the objects that
make up a block, inserting that block or changing its color produces complex
results.
If you enter bylayer, new objects assume the color assigned to the layer on
which you create them. See the LAYER command for information about
assigning a color to a layer.
True Color
Specifies a true color to be used for the selected object.
Red, Green, Blue: Enter three integer values from 0 to 255 separated by commas
to specify a true color
Color Book
Specifies a color from a loaded color book to be used for the selected object.
Enter Color Book name: Enter the name of a color book that has been installed
such as Pantone
If you enter a color book name, AutoCAD prompts you to enter the color
name in the color book.
Enter color name: Enter the name of a color included in the selected color book
such as Pantone 573
See Also
See “Set the Current Color” in the User’s Guide. Also, see “Control the Prop-
erties of Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands CHANGE, CHPROP, and PROPERTIES set the color of
existing objects.
System Variables CECOLOR sets the color for new objects.
174 | COLOR
COMPILE
Compiles shape files and PostScript font files
Before you can use AutoCAD shape files as fonts or shapes in a drawing, you
must compile or convert them into SHX files. You can then use LOAD to
insert the SHX files into a drawing. Compiling PostScript font PFB files
improves the loading speed of drawings that use them.
Command line: compile
AutoCAD displays the Select Shape or Font File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). Enter the SHP or PFB file name in the dialog box.
AutoCAD compiles it into a file with this name, and automatically adds the
file name extension .shx.
See Also
For information about compiling PostScript font (PFB) files, see “Assign Text
Fonts” in the User’s Guide. Also see “Shapes and Shape Fonts” in the Custom-
ization Guide.
Commands LOAD loads symbols from a compiled shape (SHX) file.
STYLE associates a style name with a font (SHX or PFB)
file. SHAPE inserts symbols from a previously loaded
shape file.
CONE
Creates a three-dimensional solid cone
A cone is a solid primitive with a circular or elliptical base tapering symmet-
rically to a point perpendicular to its base.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Cone
Command line: cone
Current wire frame density: ISOLINES=current

1 Specify center point for base of cone or [Elliptical] <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1),
enter e, or press ENTER
COMPILE | 175
Center Point for Base
Defines the center of the circular base of the cone.
Specify radius for base of cone or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius for Base

Defines the radius of the circle.
Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a
Height Defines the height of the cone. Entering a positive

value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
height
current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height
along the negative Z axis.
Apex Specifies the apex of the cone, which defines the height
of the cone and the orientation with respect to the Z
radius
axis.
Specify apex point:
Diameter
2 Defines the diameter of the circular base of the cone.
Specify diameter for base of cone: Specify a distance

diameter current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the height
Apex Specifies the apex of the cone, which defines the height
of the cone and the orientation with respect to the Z
axis.
Specify apex point: Specify a point (2)
176 | CONE
Elliptical
Creates a cone with an elliptical base.
1
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone or [Center]: Specify a point (1)
or enter c
Axis Endpoint
Creates the elliptical base of the cone using its axes. Specify a second point
to define the diameter of one axis and a third point to specify the radius of
height the other axis.
Specify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cone: Specify a point (3)
3 2 Specify height of cone or [Apex]: Specify a distance or enter a

4 value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
Apex Specifies the apex, which defines the height and
orientation of the cone with respect to the axis.
Center
Creates the elliptical base of the cone using its center point and the radius of
each axis.
Specify center point of ellipse for base of cone <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or
press ENTER
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cone: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cone: Specify a point (3)

1 value draws the height along the positive Z axis of the
height
Apex Specifies the apex, which defines the height and
3 2
orientation of the cone with respect to the first axis
specified.
CONE | 177
See Also
4
Commands The Cone option of the 3D command creates a conical
shape that is displayed as a wireframe until you hide,
shade, or render it. CIRCLE creates a circle from which
you can produce a cone using EXTRUDE and specifying
an extrusion taper angle.
CONVERT
Optimizes 2D polylines and associative hatches created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier
Since Release 14, AutoCAD creates 2D polylines and associative hatches
using an optimized format that saves memory and disk space. Use CONVERT
to update hatches or polylines created in releases earlier than AutoCAD R14
or AutoCAD LT 97.
Command line: convert
Enter type of objects to convert [Hatch/Polyline/All] <All>: Enter h for hatches,

p for polylines, or a for both
Hatch Converts all hatches in the drawing.

Enter object selection preference [Select/All] <All>: Enter
s to select specific objects to convert or a to convert all objects
in the drawing
Polyline Converts all polylines in the drawing.

in the drawing
All Converts all polylines and hatches in the drawing.

in the drawing
AutoCAD displays one or both of the following messages:

number hatch objects converted
number 2d polyline objects converted
Hatches are not updated automatically when a drawing from a previous

release is opened in Release 14 or later. Information about the rotation of a
178 | CONVERT
hatch pattern may not be updated properly if you have changed the UCS
since creating the hatch. When updating hatches with CONVERT, it is recom-
mended that you use the Select option so that you can check your results.
In most cases, you do not need to update polylines with CONVERT. By default,
the PLINETYPE system variable specifies that polylines are updated automati-
cally when you open an older drawing. Polylines may be created in the old
format by third-party applications, and they may be contained in an older
drawing that was inserted as a block and then exploded.
Note Polylines containing curve-fit or splined segments always retain the old
format, as do polylines that store extended object data on their vertices.
AutoCAD editing commands make no distinction between the two formats.
See Also
Commands BHATCH fills an enclosed area with a hatch pattern.
HATCH fills a specified boundary with a pattern. PEDIT
edits polylines and three-dimensional polygon meshes.
PLINE creates two-dimensional polylines.
System Variables PLINETYPE specifies whether AutoCAD uses optimized

2D polylines.
CONVERTCTB
Converts a color-dependent plot style table (CTB) to a named plot style table (STB)
Command line: convertctb
Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box),
where you can select the color-dependent plot style table file you want to
convert. The Save As dialog box is then displayed. If necessary, specify a new
location or name for the converted plot style table file.
CONVERTCTB saves a copy of a color-dependent plot style table as a named
plot style table, which you can then attach to drawings that use named plot
styles. The original color-dependent plot style table is not affected by
CONVERTCTB. The default location for the new named plot style table file is
in the AutoCAD Plot Styles folder. The default name for the new named plot
style table file is the same as the color-dependent plot style table name.
CONVERTCTB creates one named plot style for each color that has unique plot
properties, one named plot style for each group of colors that are assigned the
same plot properties, and a default named plot style called NORMAL.
CONVERTCTB | 179
For example, if all the colors in a color-dependent plot style table have the
same plot properties, CONVERTCTB creates only two named plot styles in the
named plot style table: NORMAL, the default plot style, and STYLE 1, which
assumes the plot properties that were assigned to all the colors in the color-
dependent plot style table. However, suppose all the colors in a color-depen-
dent plot style table have the same plot properties except for two colors, BLUE
and GREEN. If these colors each have unique plot properties, CONVERTCTB
creates four named plot styles in the named plot style table: NORMAL, the
default plot style; STYLE 1, which assumes the plot properties of GREEN; STYLE
2, which assumes the plot properties of BLUE; and STYLE 3, which assumes the
plot properties that were assigned to all the other colors.
CONVERTCTB gives the plot styles in the new named plot style table generic
names such as STYLE 1, STYLE 2. You can modify these generic plot style
names in the the Plot Style Table Editor. Click the Edit button on the Plot
Device tab in the Page Setup dialog box. If you want to rename the plot
styles, you must do so before applying them to drawing layouts.
CONVERTPSTYLES
Converts the current drawing to either named or color-dependent plot styles
A drawing can use either named or color-dependent plot styles, but not both.
CONVERTPSTYLES converts a currently open drawing from color-dependent
plot styles to named plot styles, or from named plot styles to color-depen-
dent plot styles, depending on which plot style method the drawing is
currently using.
For example, a drawing using color-dependent plot styles assigns plot prop-
erties to objects and layers by color. In other words, all objects with the same
color have the same plot properties. CONVERTPSTYLES converts the drawing
to use named plot styles that can be applied to objects or layers independent
of color assignment. In other words, all objects with the same color can have
different plot properties.
When you convert a drawing, CONVERTPSTYLES sets the PSTYLEMODE system
variable to the appropriate setting (1 = named, 0 = color-dependent).
Command line: convertpstyles
■ Converting drawings from color-dependent plot styles to named plot

styles
■ Converting drawings from named plot styles to color-dependent plot
styles
180 | CONVERTPSTYLES
Converting Drawings from Color-Dependent to
Named Plot Styles
A dialog box advises you to convert the drawing's plot style tables before con-
verting the drawing. You can convert the color-dependent plot style tables
assigned to the drawing to named plot style tables using CONVERTCTB.
AutoCAD displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box), where you select the named plot style table file to attach to the con-
verted drawing.
CONVERTPSTYLES requires you to select a named plot style table that was con-
verted using CONVERTCTB or created from a PC2 or PCP file. Normally you
should select the named plot style table that was converted from the color-
dependent plot style table that was assigned to the same drawing.
CONVERTPSTYLES attaches the selected named plot style table to model space
and to all layouts. Drawing layers are each assigned a named plot style (from
the converted plot style table) that has the same plot properties that their
color-dependent plot style had. Drawing objects that had the same color-
dependent plot style as their layer are assigned the named plot style
BYLAYER. Drawing objects that had a color-dependent plot style that was
different from their layer are assigned a named plot style that has the same
properties that their color-dependent plot style had.
After a drawing is converted to named plot styles, you can change the named
plot style table assignment or assign other named plot styles tables to model
space or layouts. You can also assign individual plot styles to drawing objects.
Converting Drawings from Named to Color-

Dependent Plot Styles
A dialog box advises you that the named plot styles attached to objects and
named plot style tables attached to model space and layouts will be detached.
After a drawing is converted to color-dependent plot styles, you can assign a
color-dependent plot style table. Plot styles will be applied by color.
CONVERTPSTYLES | 181
COPY
Duplicates objects
Modify toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to copy, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Copy Selection.
Command line: copy
Select objects: Select objects and press ENTER

Specify base point or displacement, or [Multiple]: Specify a point for a single
copy or enter m for multiple copies
Base Point or Makes a single copy.

Displacement
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as
displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER
If you specify two points, AutoCAD uses the first point

as a base point and places a single copy relative to that
base point. The two points you specify define a
displacement to determine how far the selected objects
are moved and in what direction.
object selected If you press ENTER at the Specify Second Point of
Displacement prompt, the first point is interpreted as a
1 relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify
2,3 for the base point and press ENTER at the next
prompt, the object moves 2 units in the X direction and
3 units in the Y direction from its current position. In
this case, the first point is usually entered at the
2 keyboard.
single copy
Note The @ symbol should not be entered as part of this
displacement coordinate.
Multiple Makes multiple copies using one COPY command.
AutoCAD prompts for an insertion base point for the
selection object.
Specify base point:
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as
displacement>: Specify a point or press ENTER
If you specify a point, AutoCAD places a copy at that

point relative to the base point. The Specify Second
Point of Displacement prompt is repeated for
182 | COPY
placement of multiple copies of the object. If you press
ENTER , the command ends.
See Also
Commands ARRAY creates multiple copies of objects in a rectangular
or polar pattern. 3DARRAY creates three-dimensional
rectangular or polar arrays. MINSERT inserts copies of a
block into a rectangular array.
multiple copies
System Variables GRIPS controls the use of grips to manipulate objects.
COPYBASE
Copies objects with a specified base point
Use COPYBASE to specify a base point when copying objects. The base point
enables you to position the copied objects precisely when pasting them
within the same drawing or into another drawing.
Edit menu: Copy with Base Point
Shortcut menu: End any active commands, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Copy with Base Point.
Command line: copybase
Specify base point:

Select objects:
The selected objects are copied to the Clipboard. Use PASTECLIP to move the
copied objects from the Clipboard to a location in the same document or to
another document. When you paste an object copied with COPYBASE,
AutoCAD places it relative to the specified base point.
COPYCLIP
Copies objects to the Clipboard
Use COPYCLIP to copy objects or command line text from an AutoCAD draw-
ing to another Windows® application.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Copy
and choose Copy.
COPYBASE | 183
Command line: copyclip
Select objects:
COPYCLIP copies all objects you select to the Clipboard. You can paste the
contents of the Clipboard into a document or drawing as an OLE object.
Note You can also use CTRL+C to run COPYCLIP. If the cursor is in the drawing
area, AutoCAD copies the selected objects to the Clipboard. If the cursor is on
the command line or in the text window, AutoCAD copies the selected text to
the Clipboard.
See Also
See “Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste” in the User’s Guide. Also see “Link
and Embed Data (OLE)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands COPYLINK copies the current viewport so that you can
link it into other OLE applications. CUTCLIP copies
objects to the Clipboard and erases the objects from the
drawing. PASTECLIP inserts data from the Clipboard.
PASTESPEC inserts data from the Clipboard and controls
the format of the data.
System Variables WMFBKGND controls whether the background for the
Windows metafile format of objects placed on the Clip-
board and pasted into other applications is transparent.
COPYHIST
Copies the text in the command line history to the Clipboard
The command line history is above the command line. Use scroll bars or
open the text window to see the whole history. You can use the Display tab
in the Options dialog box to change the number of lines that are displayed
in the command line window, or you can drag the top edge of the window
to change its size.
Command line: copyhist
AutoCAD copies the text to the Clipboard.
See Also
See “Navigate and Edit Within the Command Window” in the User’s Guide.
Commands OPTIONS customizes the AutoCAD LT environment set-
tings.
184 | COPYHIST
COPYLINK
Copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE applications
Edit menu: Copy Link
Command line: copylink
COPYLINK copies the current view to the Clipboard. You can paste the con-
tents of the Clipboard into a document as an OLE object.
See Also
See “Link and Embed Data (OLE)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands COPYCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard. CUTCLIP cop-
ies objects to the Clipboard and erases the objects from
the drawing. OLELINKS edits links, updates objects, and
changes source files. PASTESPEC inserts data from the
Clipboard and controls the format of the data.
CUSTOMIZE
Customizes toolbars, buttons, and shortcut keys
Tools menu: Customize
Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize.
Command line: customize
The Customize dialog box is displayed.
Note You can use -TOOLBAR to display, close, or position a toolbar from the
command line.
Customize Dialog Box

Provides an interface for customizing toolbars, buttons, and shortcut keys.
Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Adds buttons to the default AutoCAD toolbars, removes buttons you use
infrequently, and creates toolbars.
COPYLINK | 185
Categories Displays a list of all the AutoCAD menus that you can
use to filter the Commands list. You can filter this list
by selecting a menu name.
Commands Displays a list of the commands associated with the
menu you selected under Categories. To add a
command (button) to a toolbar, drag the command
from the Commands list to a toolbar in the AutoCAD
window. To remove a command from a toolbar, drag its
button from the toolbar to the drawing area while the
Customize dialog box is displayed. To create a new
toolbar, drag a command from the Commands list to
the drawing area.
Show Image and Displays the button image and name in the Commands
Name list. When Show Image and Name is clear, only the
button images are displayed.
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Displays, creates, renames, and removes toolbars. Button size and tooltip
controls are also provided.
186 | CUSTOMIZE
Toolbars Displays or hides toolbars. A check mark next to its
name indicates that a toolbar is displayed. To hide a
toolbar, click its check box to clear its check mark.
Menu Group Displays a list of AutoCAD menu groups. The toolbars
that belong to the selected menu group are displayed in
the Toolbars list. If the toolbars you want to display,
hide, or edit belong to a menu group other than
AutoCAD, select that menu group.
Menu groups are listed in the order that they were
installed. The menu group that was installed first has
precedence regarding shortcut keys.
New Displays the New Toolbar dialog box, in which you can
create a new toolbar.
Rename Renames the toolbar selected in the Toolbars list.
Delete Removes the toolbar selected in the Toolbars list.
Large Buttons Displays buttons in a larger format at 32 by 30 pixels.
The default display size is 16 by 15 pixels.
Show Tooltips on Displays tooltips when you move the cursor over
Toolbars buttons on the toolbar.
Show Shortcut Displays shortcut keys when you move the cursor over
Keys in Tooltip buttons on the toolbar.
CUSTOMIZE | 187
Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Displays or modifies the properties of any button on a toolbar. Select a button
or flyout from a toolbar to view or modify its properties. If you select a
button, the Button Properties tab is displayed. See Button Properties Tab
(Customize Dialog Box). If you select a flyout, the Flyout Properties tab is
displayed. See Flyout Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box).
Button Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Displays or modifies the properties of any button on a toolbar. To access this
tab, select a button on a toolbar while the Properties tab of the Customize
dialog box is displayed.
Name Displays the tooltip for the selected button.

Description Displays the status bar help message for the command
associated with the selected button.
Button Image Displays an enlarged bitmap image of the selected
button.
Edit Opens the Button Editor dialog box.
Macro Associated Displays the AutoCAD menu macro that runs the
with This Button command associated with the selected button.
188 | CUSTOMIZE
List of Button Displays a scrollable list of all button images from
Images which you can select an image to replace the one for the
selected toolbar button.
Apply Applies specified changes to the button you selected
from the toolbar. This button is unavailable until you
make modifications to a toolbar button.
Reset Discards any changes you made to a toolbar button’s
properties and restores its original settings.
Flyout Properties Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Displays or modifies the properties of any flyout button on a toolbar. To
access this tab, select a flyout button on a toolbar while the Properties tab of
the Customize dialog box is displayed.
Toolbar Displays a list of available toolbars with the current

Associated with flyout toolbar selected. To substitute a different toolbar
This Flyout with the flyout, select a toolbar from the list and choose
Apply.
Toolbar Preview Displays the buttons of the currently selected toolbar.
CUSTOMIZE | 189
Apply Substitutes a new toolbar for the selected flyout. This
button is unavailable until you select a new toolbar
from the Toolbar Name list.
Reset Discards any changes you made to a flyout button and
restores its original toolbar settings.
Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Assigns keyboard shortcuts to commands.
Categories Lists all standard menus, custom menus, and toolbars.

When you select a menu or toolbar from the list, the
associated menu or toolbar items are displayed in the
Commands list.
Commands Specifies the command you want to customize. If the
selected command has a shortcut key or access key
assigned to it, the key combination is displayed under
Current Keys.
Menu Group Specifies the current menu (MNU) file. AutoCAD has a
standard menu group called AutoCAD.
190 | CUSTOMIZE
Menu groups are listed in the order that they were
installed. The menu group that was installed first has
precedence regarding shortcut keys. For example, if you
assign CTRL+B to insert blocks in the first menu file and
then assign CTRL+B to insert external references in the
second menu file, CTRL+B inserts blocks.
Current Keys Displays the key combination defined as a shortcut key
for the selected menu or toolbar item.
Press New Specifies a key combination to be used as the keyboard
Shortcut Key shortcut for the selected menu or toolbar item. To
specify a value, simultaneously press CTRL and a letter
on the keyboard. You can also simultaneously press
CTRL+SHIFT and a letter.
You cannot reassign shortcut keys that are internally

assigned to Windows, for example, F10, CTRL+F4,
CTRL+F6, or CTRL+ALT+DEL. If you use an invalid key
combination, AutoCAD does not show the
combination in the edit box. Try using another key
combination.
If the keyboard shortcut you specify is already assigned
to another AutoCAD command, the “Currently
assigned to” message is displayed.
Assign Assigns the new shortcut key to the selected command.
Remove Removes the shortcut key assignment from the selected
command.
Note AutoCAD automatically assigns many commands
to shortcut keys. You can reassign these shortcut keys to
perform different actions, but you cannot remove them.
Show All Shows shortcut key assignments for all menu groups.
The Shortcut Keys dialog box lists the command, menu
group, and category associated with each shortcut key.
CUSTOMIZE | 191
Tool Palettes Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Creates and modifies tool palettes. Imports and exports tool palette files.
Tool Palettes Lists all tool palettes in the Tool Palettes window.
Up Moves highlighted tool palette higher on the list and its
tab higher in the Tool Palettes window.
Down Moves highlighted tool palette lower on the list and its
tab lower in the Tool Palettes window.
New Creates a new tool palette.
Rename Displays the Rename Tool Palette dialog box so you can
rename the highlighted tool palette.
Delete Permanently deletes the highlighted tool palette.
Import Adds a saved tool palette file to the Tool Palettes
window.
Export Saves the highlighted tool palette to a file with an .xlt
extension.
192 | CUSTOMIZE
New Toolbar Dialog Box
Creates a new toolbar. For information about adding buttons to the toolbar,
see Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box).
Toolbar Name
Specifies a name for the new toolbar.
Save Toolbar in Menu Group

Specifies a menu group for the new toolbar.
Button Editor Dialog Box

Modifies or creates buttons.
Button Image
Displays the button at its actual size.
CUSTOMIZE | 193
Editing Tools
Provides tools for editing the button image.
Pencil Edits one pixel at a time using the current color. Click
and drag the pointing device to edit several pixels
simultaneously.
Line Creates lines using the current color. Click and drag to
set the start point and draw the line. Release to
complete the line.
Circle Creates circles using the current color. Click to set the
center and drag to set the radius. Release to complete
the circle.
Erase Sets pixels to white. Click and drag over colored pixels
to change them to white.
Color Palette
Sets the current color used by the editing tools.
More
Opens the True Color tab in the Select Color dialog box. If you select a true
color, it is displayed in the color swatch above the button.
Editing Area
Provides a close-up view of the button image for editing.
Grid
Displays a grid in the editing area. Each grid square represents a single pixel.
Clear
Clears the editing area.
Open
Opens an existing button image for editing. Button images are stored as
bitmap (BMP) files.
Undo
Undoes the last action.
Save
Saves the customized button image.
194 | CUSTOMIZE
Save As
Saves the customized button image using a different name or a different
location.
Reset
Resets the button image to its default appearance.
See Also
See “Toolbars” or “Tool Palettes”in the User’s Guide.
Commands TOOLBAR modifies toolbars. CUSTOMIZE modifies tool
palettes.
System Variables PALETTEOPAQUE turns transparency on and off for the
Tool Palettes window and the floating Command Line
window.
CUTCLIP
Copies objects to the Clipboard and removes the objects from the drawing
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Cut
and choose Cut.
Command line: cutclip
Select objects:
CUTCLIP moves the selected objects to the Clipboard, removing them from
the drawing. You can paste the contents of the Clipboard into a document or
drawing as an embedded OLE object (see PASTECLIP and PASTESPEC). CUTCLIP
does not create OLE link information.
See Also
See “Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste” in the User’s Guide. Also see “Link
and Embed Data (OLE)”in the User’s Guide.
Commands COPYCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard, retaining the
original object in the drawing. COPYLINK copies the cur-
rent view to the Clipboard for linking to other OLE
applications.
CUTCLIP | 195
CYLINDER
Creates a three-dimensional solid cylinder
A cylinder is a solid primitive similar to an extruded circle or ellipse but with-
out a taper.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Cylinder
Command line: cylinder

Specify center point for base of cylinder or [Elliptical] <0,0,0>: Specify a center
point (1), enter e, or press ENTER
Center Point
1
Defines the center of the circular base of the cylinder.
Specify radius for base of cylinder or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius
Defines the radius of the circular base of the cylinder.
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance or enter c
Height Defines the height of the cylinder. Entering a positive

current UCS. Entering a negative value draws the
cylinder along the negative Z axis.
Center of Other Defines the center point of the other end of the
End cylinder.
Specify center of other end of cylinder: Specify a point (2)
Specifying the center of the other end also specifies the

Z orientation of the cylinder.
196 | CYLINDER
2
height
radius
Diameter
Defines the diameter of the circular base of the cylinder.
Specify diameter for base of cylinder:

cylinder along the negative axis.
End cylinder.
Specifying the center of the other end also specifies the

Z orientation of the cylinder.
2
height
diameter
Elliptical
Creates a cylinder with an elliptical base.
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder or [Center]: Specify a point
(1) or enter c
CYLINDER | 197
Axis Endpoint
Defines the axes of the elliptical base of the cylinder.
1 Specify second axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cylinder: Specify a point (3)
The second point defines the diameter of one axis. A third point defines the
radius of the other axis.

End cylinder.
Specify center of other end of cylinder: Specify a distance
(4) or enter c
4
height
3 2
Center
Defines the elliptical base of the cylinder by its center point and the radius
of each axis.
Specify center point of ellipse for base of cylinder <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or
press ENTER
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse for base of cylinder: Specify a point (2)
Specify length of other axis for base of cylinder: Specify a point (3)
Specify height of cylinder or [Center of other end]: Specify a distance (4) or
enter c
1
3 2
198 | CYLINDER
End cylinder.
4
height
See Also
See “Create 3D Solids” and “Create Surfaces” in the User’s Guide.
Commands 3D creates three-dimensional surface objects. EXTRUDE
creates tapered cylinders.
CYLINDER | 199
200
DBCCLOSE
Closes the dbConnect Manager
Tools menu: Choose dbConnect when the dbConnect Manager is open.
Command line: dbcclose
DBCLOSE closes the dbConnect Manager and removes the dbConnect menu
from the menu bar.
See Also
Commands DBCONNECT opens the dbConnect Manager.
DBCONNECT
Provides an AutoCAD interface to external database tables
DBCONNECT starts the dbConnect Manager, from which you can view and
edit database tables, execute Structured Query Language (SQL) queries, and
link table records to graphical objects.
DBCONNECT replaces the ASE commands that were available in previous
releases of AutoCAD®.
Tools menu: dbConnect
Command line: dbconnect
AutoCAD displays the dbConnect Manager and adds the dbConnect menu
to the menu bar.
The four primary interfaces (the dbConnect Manager, the Data View window,
the Query Editor, and the Link Select dialog box) are described first, followed
by descriptions of each additional dialog box presented in alphabetical order.
The Column Values dialog box, a sub-dialog box of the Query Editor, is
described in the Query Editor section. The section describing each dialog box
contains a list of methods that you can use to access it.
■ dbConnect Manager (see page 202)

■ Data View window (see page 207)
■ Query Editor (see page 215)
■ Link Select dialog box (see page 222)
■ Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page 225)
■ Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225)
■ Export Links dialog box (see page 227)
■ Export Query Set dialog box (see page 228)
■ Export Template Set dialog box (see page 229)
DBCCLOSE | 201
■ Find dialog box (see page 229)
■ Format dialog box (see page 230)
■ Import Query Set dialog box (see page 230)
■ Import Template Set dialog box (see page 231)
■ Label Template dialog box (see page 231)
■ Label Template Properties dialog box (see page 233)
■ Link Conversion dialog box (see page 234)
■ Link Manager (see page 237)
■ Link Template dialog box (see page 238)
■ Link Template Properties dialog box (see page 239)
■ New Label Template dialog box (see page 240)
■ New Link Template dialog box (see page 240)
■ New Query dialog box (see page 241)
■ Replace dialog box (see page 241)
■ Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242)
■ Select a Data Object dialog box (see page 243)
■ Sort dialog box (see page 243)
■ Synchronize dialog box (see page 244)
dbConnect Manager
Provides the primary interface for the connectivity feature. By default, the
dbConnect Manager opens as a docked window on the left side of the AutoCAD
drawing area.
drawing node
link template
label template
query
data sources
node
table
data source
When you open the dbConnect Manager, a small red X is displayed in the
lower right corner of each database and data object. The X indicates that
these objects are currently unconnected. To connect to a database or data
object, double-click it in the dbConnect Manager.
202 | DBCONNECT
dbConnect Manager Buttons
Let you view and manipulate database objects.
View Table
Edit Table New Label

Template
New Link
Execute Query
Template
New Query
View Table Opens an external database table in Read-only mode.

This button is not available unless a single table, link
template, or label template is selected in the tree view.
Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode. This
button is not available unless a single table, link
template, or label template is selected in the tree view.
Execute Query Executes a query. This button is not available unless a
query is selected in the tree view.
New Query Displays the New Query dialog box (see page 241). This
button is not available unless a single table, link
template, or query is selected. If a query is selected, you
can use this button to display the Query Editor (see
page 215), in which you can edit the query.
New Link Displays the New Link Template dialog box (see page
Template 240). This button is not available unless a single table or
link template is selected. If a link template is selected,
you can use this button to display the Link Template
dialog box (see page 238), in which you can edit the
link template. Not available for link templates with
links already defined in a drawing.
New Label Displays the New Label Template dialog box (see page
Template 240). This button is not available unless a single table,
link template, or label template is selected. If a label
template is selected, you can use this button to display
the Label Template dialog box (see page 231), in which
you can edit the label template.
dbConnect Manager Tree View

Contains nodes for each drawing that’s currently open and a Data Sources
node that contains all available data sources configured on your system.
DBCONNECT | 203
Drawing Nodes Shortcut Menu
Provides options available for an open drawing. Right-click the node of an
open drawing.
Export Template Opens the Export Template Set dialog box (see page
Set 229), in which you can save all link and label templates
stored in the drawing to an external file.
Import Template Opens the Import Template Set dialog box (see page
Set 231), in which you can import a set of link and label
templates that are stored in an external file.
Export Query Set Opens the Export Query Set dialog box (see page 228),
in which you can save all queries stored in the drawing
to an external file. The exported query set is saved with
the file extension .dbq.
Import Query Set Opens the Import Query Set dialog box (see page 230),
in which you can import a set of queries stored in an
external file with the file extension .dbq.
Show Labels Turns on visibility of all labels in the selected drawing.
Hide Labels Turns off visibility of all labels in the selected drawing.
Reload Labels Refreshes the field values of the labels in the selected
drawing, updating them to reflect any changes made in
the source database table.
Database Objects Shortcut Menu

Provides options available for database objects (such as link templates, label
templates, and queries) attached to the drawing nodes. Different database
objects have different subsets of menu options available to them. For exam-
ple, the shortcut menu options that are displayed when you right-click a
query differ from the options that are available when you right-click a link
template. The following shortcut menu options are available for various
database objects.
View Table Opens an external database table in Read-only mode.
Available only for link templates.
Edit Table Opens an external database table in Edit mode.
204 | DBCONNECT
Edit Opens a dialog box in which you can edit the properties
of the selected database object. Available for link
templates, label templates, and queries. Not available
for link templates with links already defined in the
drawing.
Delete Deletes the selected database object. Available for link
templates, label templates, and queries.
Duplicate Makes a copy of the selected database object and inserts
it in the current drawing. Available for link templates,
label templates, and queries.
Rename Opens a dialog box in which you can rename the
selected database object. Available for link templates,
label templates, and queries. Not available for link
templates with links already defined in the drawing.
New Query Opens the New Query dialog box (see page 241).
Link Select Opens the Link Select dialog box (see page 222).
New Label Opens the New Label Template dialog box (see page
Template 240). Available only for link templates.
Show Labels Displays all labels that are associated with the selected
database object. Available for link templates and label
templates.
Hide Labels Hides all labels that are associated with the selected
database object. Available for link templates and label
templates.
Delete Links Deletes all links in the current drawing that use the
selected link template. Available only for link
templates.
Delete Labels Deletes all labels in the current drawing that use the
selected label template. Available only for label
templates.
Synchronize Verifies that all links in the current drawing based on
the selected link template contain valid values. Any
detected problems are reported in the Synchronize
dialog box (see page 244). Available only for link
templates.
DBCONNECT | 205
Reload Refreshes the field values of all labels associated with
the selected label template in the current drawing,
updating them to reflect any changes made in the
source database table. Available only for label
templates.
Execute Executes the selected query. Available only for queries.
Delete Links Deletes all links in the current drawing that use the
selected link template. Available only for link
templates.
Data Sources Node Shortcut Menu

Provides options available for data sources. Right-click the data sources node.
Configure Data Opens the Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page
Source 225) where you can configure a new data source or edit
an existing one.
Data Objects Shortcut Menu

Provides options available for data objects. Right-click a data object (such as
a catalog or table) in the data sources node.
Connect Establishes a connection to the selected data object.
Available for data sources, catalogs, and schemas.
Disconnect Closes the connection to the selected data object.
Available for data sources, catalogs, and schemas.
Synchronize Opens the Synchronize dialog box (see page 244).
Available only for connected data sources.
Configure Opens the Configure a Data Source dialog box (see page
225) where you can configure a new data source or edit
an existing one. Available only for disconnected data
sources.
View Table Opens the selected database table in Read-only mode.
Available only for tables.
Edit Table Opens the selected database table in Edit mode.
New Link Opens the New Link Template dialog box (see page
Template 240). Available only for tables.
206 | DBCONNECT
New Label Opens the New Label Template dialog box (see page
Template 240). Available only for tables.
New Query Opens the New Query dialog box (see page 241).
Data View Window

Provides the primary interface for viewing and editing external database
tables from within AutoCAD. You can open this dialog box using the follow-
ing methods:
View Table dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a link template, a label template, or a
table from the dbConnect Manager and choose View Table or Edit Table.
dbConnect menu: View Data ➤ View External Table, Edit External Table,
View Linked Table, or Edit Linked Table. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in
Edit Table which you can select a table to open.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a table in the dbConnect Man-
ager and choose View Table or Edit Table.
Pointing device: Double-click a table or a link template in the dbConnect
Manager. Double-clicking a link template that has no links created in the
drawing it’s associated with opens the Link Template dialog box (see page
238). The table is opened in either Edit mode or Read-only mode, depending
on the dbConnect Settings specified on the System tab of the Options dialog
box. See OPTIONS.
The Data View window displays records from the selected database table. The
Data View comprises a set of buttons, a grid window for viewing and editing
records, and a set of navigation controls for navigating through the record
set. After you open the Data View window, the Data View menu is added to
the menu bar. By default, the Data View is opened undocked with the Allow
Docking option turned off. To enable docking, right-click over one of the
Data View buttons, and then choose Allow Docking from the shortcut menu.
The appearance of the Data View window is governed by your computer’s
system settings, and it can be changed in the Windows Control Panel. Text
in the cells is displayed using the system window text color. If the table is
opened in Read-only mode, the cell background is shown using the system
3D objects button shade color (light gray by default). If it is opened in Edit
mode, the cell background is shown using the system window color (white
by default). When a cell is selected, it is shown using the system selected
items background and text colors.
DBCONNECT | 207
Link and Label Settings
Data View Buttons

Let you create links and view linked records and graphical objects.
Link
Links the currently selected table row or rows to one or more graphical
objects. AutoCAD creates the link and, if desired, the label from the currently
selected link and label templates in the Data View window. To change the
current link creation setting, choose the Link and Label Settings button.
Three distinct link methods are available:
Link Creates a link to one or more graphical objects without
creating a corresponding label. If the current drawing
has a selection set already established, a link is created
for each object in the selection set. If the current
drawing does not have a current selection set, you are
prompted to select objects to link to.
Create Creates a freestanding label that isn’t associated with a
Freestanding graphical object. You are prompted to specify an
Label insertion point for the label.
Create Attached Creates a link to one or more graphical objects and
Label creates a corresponding label. If the current drawing has
a selection set already established, a link is created for
all objects in the selection set. If the current drawing
does not have a current selection set, you are prompted
to select objects to link to.
208 | DBCONNECT
View Linked Objects in Drawing
Selects graphical objects in the current AutoCAD drawing that are linked to
the currently selected Data View row or rows.
View Linked Records in Table
Selects records in the Data View window that are linked to the current
selection set of graphical objects.
AutoView Linked Objects in Drawing
Displays linked objects automatically in the current drawing as you select
rows from the database table.
AutoView Linked Records in Table
Displays linked records automatically in the Data View window as you select
graphical objects in the current AutoCAD drawing.
Print Data View
Prints the contents of the Data View window to the current Windows®
system printer.
Data View and Query Options
Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225), in which
you can specify a number of settings that affect the interaction and display of
linked objects in the Data View window and the current AutoCAD drawing.
Query, Return to Query, and Return to Link Select
Opens either the New Query dialog box (see page 241), the Query Editor (see
page 215), or the Link Select dialog box (see page 222), depending on the
method used to open the Data View window. If the Data View window was
opened to view or edit a database table, this button’s tooltip is Query, and
choosing it opens the New Query dialog box. If the Data View window was
opened to return the results of a query, this button’s tooltip is Return to
Query, and choosing it returns you to the Query Editor. If the Data View
window was opened to return the results of a Link Select operation, this
button’s tooltip is Return to Link Select, and choosing it returns you to the
Link Select dialog box.
Link Template List
Creates a new link template, or specifies a link template from those that are
defined for the open table. The selected link template is applied when you
create new links in the current drawing. To create a new link template, select
the New Link Template option from the Link Template list, and then choose
the Link button flyout.
DBCONNECT | 209
Label Template List
Creates a new label template, or specifies a label template from those that are
defined for the currently selected table. The selected label template is applied
when you create new labels in the current drawing. To create a new label
template, select the New Label Template option from the Label Template list
and choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create Attached Label
button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the selected table in the
current drawing, the New Link Template dialog box is displayed (see page
240).
Data View Grid Window

Displays a subset of the records from a database table. You can select records
by clicking the following elements:
■ Column header: Selects all records in that column. Double-clicking a

column header sorts its records in ascending order. Double-clicking a
column header a second time sorts its records in descending order.
■ Record header: Selects an individual record. Double-clicking a record
header selects any graphical objects that the record is linked to in the
drawing area.
■ Grid cell: Selects one field of a given record. Double-clicking a cell selects
it for editing.
■ Grid header: Selects the entire table. Double-clicking the grid header com-
mits any changes made during an editing session and closes the Data View
window.
grid headers column headers

grid cells
record headers
Column Shortcut Menu

Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected
column headers.
Sort Opens the Sort dialog box (see page 243), in which you
can select a combination of up to five columns to use in
specifying a sort order for the Data View.
Hide Removes all selected columns from the Data View
display.
Unhide All Restores all hidden columns to the Data View display.
Available only if you have hidden one or more
columns.
210 | DBCONNECT
Freeze Freezes all selected columns so that they do not scroll
when you use the horizontal scroll bar. Available only if
the selected columns are contiguous.
Unfreeze All Unfreezes all frozen columns so that they scroll when
you use the horizontal scroll bar. Available only if you
have frozen one or more columns.
Align Aligns the current column. Standard right-aligns
numeric fields and left-aligns all others, Left left-aligns
the column cells, Center center-aligns the cells, and
Right right-aligns the cells.
Find Opens the Find dialog box (see page 229), which you
can use to search for a specific value. Find is limited to
the values stored in the currently selected column.
Replace Opens the Replace dialog box (see page 241), which you
can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a
replacement value that you specify. Replace is limited
to the values stored in the currently selected column.
Available only for tables that are opened in Edit mode.
Cell Shortcut Menu

Displays the following options when you right-click the selected cell.
View Linked Indicates graphical objects in the current AutoCAD
Objects drawing that are linked to the selected database record.
Link Links the current row to a graphical object. AutoCAD
creates the link and, if desired, the label from the
currently selected link and label templates in the Data
View. You can specify whether a link, a freestanding
label, or an attached label is created by changing the
settings from the Link and Label Settings cell shortcut
menu option.
Link and Label Lists the currently selected link creation mode. You
Settings can specify whether a link, a freestanding label, or an
attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu
option is chosen.
Find Opens the Find dialog box (see page 229), which you
can use to search for a specific value. The Find shortcut
menu option limits its search to records contained in
the same column as the currently selected cell.
DBCONNECT | 211
Replace Opens the Replace dialog box (see page 241), which you
can use to search for a specific value to overwrite with a
replacement value that you specify. Replace limits its
search to records contained in the same column as the
currently selected cell. Available only for tables that are
opened in Edit mode.
Edit Enables you to change the value of the currently
selected cell. Available only for tables that are opened in
Edit mode.
Cut Clears the current cell and copies its value to the
Clipboard. Available only for tables that are opened in
Edit mode.
Copy Copies the value from the current cell to the Clipboard.
Paste Inserts the value currently stored on the Clipboard into
the selected cell. Available only for tables that are
opened in Edit mode.
Clear Deletes the value in the current cell. Available only for
tables that are opened in Edit mode.
Record Shortcut Menu

Displays the following options when you right-click one or more selected
record headers.
View Linked Indicates graphical objects in the current AutoCAD
Objects drawing that are linked to the selected database records.
Link Links the selected row or rows to one or more graphical
objects. AutoCAD creates the link and, if desired, the
label from the currently selected link and label
templates in the Data View window. You can specify
whether a link, a freestanding label, or an attached label
is created by choosing the Link and Label Settings
shortcut menu option.
Link and Label Lists the currently selected link creation mode. You
Settings can specify whether a link, a freestanding label, or an
attached label is created when the Link shortcut menu
option is chosen.
Copy Copies the selected records to the Clipboard.
Delete Record Deletes the selected records. Available only for tables
that are opened in Edit mode.
212 | DBCONNECT
Add New Record Adds a new record with blank field values to the end of
the record set. Available only for tables that are opened
in Edit mode.
Clear All Marks Clears record selection marks from the selected records
in the Data View window.
Grid Header Shortcut Menu

Displays the following options when you right-click the grid header.
Commit Saves all changes made in the Data View window to the
source database table and closes the Data View window.
Available only when a table is open in Edit mode and
you have edited its values.
Restore Undoes any changes made to a database table during an
editing session and closes the Data View window.
Available only when a table is open in Edit mode and
you have edited its values.
Unhide All Restores any hidden columns to the Data View window
Columns display.
Unfreeze All Unfreezes any frozen columns so that they scroll when
Columns you use the horizontal scroll bar.
Clear All Marks Clears all record selection marks from the Data View
window.
Print Preview Opens the Print Preview window in the Data View
window, in which you can preview your printed report.
Print Prints the contents of the Data View window to the
current Windows system printer.
Format Opens the Format dialog box (see page 230), in which
you can control how data is displayed in the Data View
window.
Navigation Controls
Cycle quickly through the records in the Data View window. The following
controls are available:
First Button Selects the first record.
Previous Button Selects the previous record.
Next Button Selects the next record.
Last Button Selects the last record.
DBCONNECT | 213
First button Last button
Previous button Next button
record
number
Data View Print Preview Window

Loads into the Data View window a preview image of how the current table
appears when you print it. When the Data View window is in Preview mode,
none of the primary Data View buttons is available and the navigation
buttons are removed from the bottom of the window. You can open this
dialog box using the following methods:
Data View menu: Print Preview
Shortcut menu: Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and
choose Print Preview.
Print Opens the default system Print dialog box.

Next Page Presents a preview image of the next page of the table.
Prev Page Restores the preview image of the previous page of the
table.
Two Page Toggles the display between one and two preview
pages. If you choose Two Page, the name of the button
changes to One Page and vice versa.
Zoom In Magnifies the preview page so that you can view the
details more closely.
214 | DBCONNECT
Zoom Out Shrinks the preview page to display a larger region of
the table.
Close Closes the Data View Print Preview window and
restores the default Data View window display.
Query Editor
Consists of a series of four tabs that you can use to build and execute queries.
If you are creating a new query, the New Query dialog box (see page 241) is
displayed first. You can open the Query Editor using the following methods:
dbConnect buttons: Select a table or a link template in the dbConnect Man-
ager and choose the New Query button.
Data View buttons: Choose the Query or Return to Query button in the Data
View window.
dbConnect menu: Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table, New Query
on a Link Template, or Edit Query. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in which
you can select a database object to query.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click a table or link template in the dbConnect
Manager and choose New Query, or right-click a query and choose Edit.
Quick Query Tab (Query Editor)

Develops simple queries based on a single database field, single operator, and
single value.
Field Lists the fields from the current table, from which you
can select one to apply to the query.
DBCONNECT | 215
Operator Displays a list of available operators that can be applied
to the query. For information about operators, see
“Construct Simple Queries” in the User’s Guide.
Value Specifies a value for the field that you are using to
construct your query.
Look Up Values Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the
database table in the Column Values dialog box (see
page 222), from which you can select the value you
want.
Indicate Records Indicates records that match your search criterion in
in Data View the Data View window.
Indicate Objects Indicates linked objects that match your search
in Drawing criterion in the current AutoCAD drawing.
Execute Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box.
Close Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Store Saves the query with the current drawing.
Options Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box
(see page 225).
Range Query Tab (Query Editor)

Constructs a query that returns all records or AutoCAD objects that fall
within a given range of values.
216 | DBCONNECT
Field Lists the fields from the current table, from which you
can select one to apply to the query.
From Specifies the first value of the range. The query returns
all records or graphical objects that are greater than or
equal to this value.
Look Up Values Returns a list of all values for the specified field from the
(From, Through) database table in the Column Values dialog box (see
page 222), from which you can select the value you
want.
Through Specifies the second value of the range. The query
returns all records or graphical objects that are less than
or equal to this value.
Indicate Records Indicates records that match your search criterion in
in Data View the Data View window.
Indicate Objects Indicates linked objects that match your search
in Drawing criterion in the current AutoCAD drawing.
(see page 225).
Query Builder Tab (Query Editor)

Constructs queries based on multiple search criteria. You can also group
criteria parenthetically, select which fields to display in the returned query,
and specify a sort order for the fields.
DBCONNECT | 217
Query Builder Grid
Provides a space for you to construct queries based on multiple search
parameters.
Parenthetical Groups a series of search criteria by bracketing them
Grouping within parentheses. You can nest up to four sets of
parentheses within a single statement. To insert a
beginning parenthesis, click in the cell to the left of the
first Field cell that you want to group. To insert an end
parenthesis, click in the cell to the right of the last Value
cell that you want to group.
Field Provides a space where you can select the field or fields
to include in your query. Double-click in the Field cell
of the current row to display a list of available fields
from the current table that you can use in constructing
your query. To add an additional parameter, specify an
operator and a value for the current row and then select
the Logical cell.
Operator Provides a space where you can select an operator to
apply to the query condition of the current row.
Double-click in the Operator cell to display a list of
operators that you can use in constructing your query.
218 | DBCONNECT
Value Provides a space where you can specify a value for the
query condition of the current row. Click in the Value
cell and enter a value, or choose the [...] button to
retrieve a list of available values for the selected field in
the Column Values dialog box (see page 222).
Logical Provides either an And or an Or operator to the query
statement. Click in the Logical cell to add an And value.
To change the value to Or, click in the Logical cell
again.
Fields in Table
Displays a list of available fields from the current table, from which you can
specify the fields to display in the Data View window when the query is exe-
cuted. If you don’t specify any fields to display, the query displays all fields
from the table. Double-clicking in a field in this list or selecting a field and
choosing Add (Show Fields) adds the field to the list of those that are dis-
played in the Data View window by the returned query. You can also drag
fields to add them to the Show Fields and Sort By areas.
Show Fields
Specifies the fields that are displayed in the Data View window when the
query is executed. To remove a field from this list, drag it from the list to any
area on the Query Builder tab.
Add (Show Fields)
Adds a field to include in the Data View window display of the returned query.
To add a field, select it in the Fields in Table list window and then choose Add.
Sort By
Specifies a sort order for the returned query. The first field added to the Sort
By list is the primary sort. To change the sort order for a field, drag the field
to a new location in the Sort By list. By default, fields are added to the Sort
By list in an ascending sort order. To apply a descending sort, select a field and
choose the Ascending/Descending Sort button, or double-click in the field.
To remove a field, drag it from the list to any area on the Query Builder tab
or select the field and press DELETE .
Add (Sort By)
Adds a field to the Sort By list. To add a sort field, select it in the Fields in
Table list window and then choose Add. Repeat for additional fields that you
want to apply to the sort.
DBCONNECT | 219
Ascending/Descending Sort
Reverses the sort order for the currently selected field. If an ascending sort
order is currently applied, choosing this button reverses the sort to descend-
ing order, and vice versa.
Indicate Records in Data View
Indicates records that match your search criteria in the Data View window.
Indicate Objects in Drawing
Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria in the current
AutoCAD drawing.
Execute
Issues the finished query and closes the dialog box.
Close
Closes the dialog box without issuing the query.
Store
Saves the query with the current drawing.
Options
Opens the Data View and Query Options dialog box (see page 225).
SQL Query Tab (Query Editor)

Constructs any query statement that conforms with the SQL 92 protocol.
The SQL Query tab provides both a query editor text box where you can type
a free-form SQL statement and a set of tools to assist you in constructing
your query. As not all database management systems are fully compliant
with the SQL 92 standard, you should review your system’s documentation
to see what SQL commands are valid for your particular database.
220 | DBCONNECT
SQL Text Editor Provides a space for you to type a free-form SQL query
or add elements that you select using the various SQL
Query tools.
Table Lists all database tables that are available in the current
data source. You can add tables to the SQL text editor by
double-clicking them, by selecting them and choosing
Add in the Table area, by dragging them from the Table
list to the SQL text editor, or by entering their names
directly in the SQL text editor.
Add (Table) Adds the currently selected table to the SQL text editor.
Fields Displays a list of the fields in the selected database table.
You can add fields to the SQL text editor by double-
clicking them, by selecting them and choosing Add in
the Fields area, or by dragging them from the Fields list
to the SQL text editor.
Add (Fields) Adds the selected field to the SQL text editor.
Operator Displays a list of operators that you can apply to your
query.
Add (Operator) Adds the selected operator to the SQL text editor.
Values Specifies a value for the selected field.
Add (Values) Adds the value specified in the Values area to the SQL
text editor.
[...] Button Returns a list of available values for the specified field
from the selected database table in the Column Values
dialog box (see page 222), from which you can select a
value to apply to the query.
Indicate Records Indicates records that match your search criteria in the
in Data View Data View window.
Indicate Objects Indicates linked objects that match your search criteria
in Drawing in the current AutoCAD drawing.
Check Checks your SQL query for proper syntax without
actually executing it. This function helps you isolate
syntax errors before you issue your query.
DBCONNECT | 221
(see page 225).
Column Values Dialog Box

Lists values for the selected database column; you can select a value to apply
to the current operation.
Column Values Lists all values for the selected database column. Select
a value from the list and choose OK to apply it to the
current operation. If you are constructing a query using
the In operator, you can add additional values to the
query by pressing the CTRL or SHIFT key as you select
values.
Link Select Dialog Box

Constructs iterative selection sets of AutoCAD graphical objects and database
records. The Link Select dialog box, known as ASE Select in previous releases
of AutoCAD, is an advanced implementation of the Query Editor. You begin
a Link Select operation by creating an initial query or selection set of
graphical objects (set A), which can be operated on by an additional query or
selection set (set B). The results of the returned operation become the new
running selection set (set A), and you can apply additional queries or selec-
tion sets to further refine your running query.
In order to work with the Link Select dialog box, you must have a drawing
open that has a number of links already created. You can open this dialog box
using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Links ➤ Link Select
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager and
choose Link Select.
222 | DBCONNECT
The Link Select dialog box contains the Quick Query, Range Query, and
Query Builder tabs from the Query Editor (see page 215), and the following
additional controls.
Do
Applies a Link Select operator to the current query or selection set. The
following operators are available:
Select Creates an initial query or selection set. This selection
set can be refined through subsequent Link Select
operations.
Union Adds the results of the new query or selection set to the
running selection set. This operation returns all records
or objects that are members of set A or set B.
Intersect Returns the intersection of the existing running

selection and the results of the new query or drawing
selection. This operation returns all records or objects
that are members of set A and set B.
Subtract A - B Subtracts the results of the new query or drawing
selection from the existing running selection.
DBCONNECT | 223
Subtract B - A Subtracts the existing running selection from the
results of the new query or drawing selection.
Using
Lists available link templates that you can apply to the current selection set.
Use Query
Uses any of the available Query Editor tabs to construct a query that returns
a selection set to the Link Select operation.
Select in Drawing
Closes the Link Select dialog box when you choose the Select button so that
you can construct a selection set of graphical objects to return to the Link
Select operation.
Execute/Select
Executes the current Link Select query or temporarily dismisses the Link
Select dialog box so you can select graphical objects from the AutoCAD draw-
ing. If the Use Query option is selected, the Execute button is displayed. If
the Select in Drawing option is selected, the Select button is displayed. After
choosing the Execute or Select button, you can apply more queries or select
additional graphical objects to further refine your selection set.
Venn Diagram
Displays a diagram of the currently selected Do operation.
Reset
Clears the Link Select dialog box and discards all previous actions so that you
can begin a new Link Select operation.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box and discards all actions.
Finish
Completes the Link Select operation and closes the dialog box. Returns either
a selection set of AutoCAD graphical objects, a subset of Data View records,
or both, depending on the parameters specified in the Link Select operation.
Status Bar
Displays the current status information based on the running Link Select
operation. The current drawing and table are displayed, as well as the
number of linked objects and records that currently meet the specified Link
Select parameters.
224 | DBCONNECT
Configure a Data Source Dialog Box
Configures an external database so it can be accessed from AutoCAD. For
detailed information about configuring a particular database system, refer to
the acad_asi.hlp file in AutoCAD Help. You can open this dialog box using the
following methods:
dbConnect menu: Data Sources ➤ Configure
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Data Sources node and choose Configure
Data Source.
Data Source Specifies a name for the OLE DB data source that you
Name are configuring.
Data Sources Lists all OLE DB data sources configured for use with
AutoCAD that are present on your system.
OK Opens the Microsoft® Data Links Properties dialog box,
in which you can continue configuring your data
source.
Data View and Query Options Dialog Box

Controls a number of settings related to the display of linked records and
objects and the processing of SQL queries. You can open this dialog box using
the following methods:
Data View buttons:

Data View menu: Options. (The Data View menu is available only if you
currently have a database table open in the Data View window.)
DBCONNECT | 225
AutoPan and Zoom
Controls how linked objects are displayed in the current AutoCAD drawing
when you select their corresponding records in the Data View window.
Automatically Pans the AutoCAD drawing automatically to display
Pan Drawing objects that are associated with the current selection set
of Data View records.
Automatically Zooms the AutoCAD drawing automatically so that all
Zoom Drawing objects associated with the current record set are
displayed.
Zoom Factor Specifies a zoom factor that limits the size of the extents
of the indicated object set to a defined percentage of the
drawing area. The available range is 20 to 90 percent
with a default value of 50 percent. A value of 50 percent
means that either the height of the extents is 50 percent
of the height of the window, or the width of the extents
is 50 percent of the window, whichever value is less.
Record Indication Settings

Controls the appearance of linked records in the Data View window when
their corresponding objects are selected in the current drawing.
Show Only Displays in the Data View window only the record set
Indicated Records that is associated with the current AutoCAD selection
set. Any records not linked to the current drawing
selection set are not displayed.
Show All Records, Displays all records in the current database table. All
Select Indicated records that are linked to the current selection set are
Records selected in the Data View window.
226 | DBCONNECT
Mark Indicated Applies a marking color to linked Data View records to
Records clearly differentiate them from records without links.
Marking Color Specifies the marking color to apply to linked Data
View records. The default color is yellow.
Query Options
Specifies options for SQL query processing.
Send as Native Issues queries to database tables in the format of the
SQL source table rather than SQL 92 format. You can use this
option to issue proprietary commands in native
database format.
Automatically Automatically stores queries when they are executed
Store with the current drawing.
Accumulate Options
Controls the accumulation of selection and record sets.
Accumulate Adds additional objects to the selection set as you select
Selection Set in additional Data View records. If this option is cleared,
Drawing the current drawing indicates a new set of objects each
time you select a new set of Data View records.
Accumulate Adds additional records to the record set as you select
Record Set in additional AutoCAD graphical objects. If this option is
Data View cleared, the Data View window indicates a new set of
records each time you select a new set of graphical
objects.
Export Links Dialog Box

Exports a set of links that are associated with a selection set of AutoCAD
graphical objects. You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Links ➤ Export Links
If more than one link template exists for the set of graphical objects that you
select, the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) is displayed, in
which you can select a link template whose links you want to export.
DBCONNECT | 227
Include Fields Specifies the table fields to export. The key fields for the
selected link template are included automatically.
AutoCAD also exports the handle of the object that
each link is associated with.
File Name Specifies a name for the exported link file.
Save as Type Specifies the file format for the exported links. You can
save the file in the native database format of the current
table or as a comma-delimited or space-delimited text
file.
Link Template Displays the name of the link template whose links
Name you’re exporting.
Export Query Set Dialog Box

Exports a set of queries that are associated with the current drawing. You can
open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Queries ➤ Export Query Set
Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager, right-click the drawing node of
a drawing that contains one or more queries and choose Export Query Set.
File Name Specifies a name for the query set.

Save as Type Specifies the file format for the query set. Query sets are
always saved with the .dbq file extension.
228 | DBCONNECT
Export Template Set Dialog Box
Exports a set of link templates and label templates that are associated with
the current drawing. You can open this dialog box using the following
methods:
dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ Export Template Set
Shortcut menu: In the dbConnect Manager, right-click the drawing node of
a drawing that has one or more templates defined and choose Export
Template Set.
File Name Specifies a name for the template set.

Save as Type Specifies the file format for the template set. Template
sets are always saved with the .dbt extension.
Find Dialog Box

Searches for specified text or a numeric value in the currently loaded Data
View table. The search is limited to a single table column. It is not possible to
conduct a global search that scans all columns in the table. You can open this
Data View menu: Find. (The Data View menu is available only if you
Shortcut menu: Right-click a record header or a single cell in the Data View
window and choose Find.
Find What Specifies the value to search for.

Match Case Searches for the exact value, including case, of what
you enter in Find What. If this option is cleared,
AutoCAD searches for the value regardless of case.
Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that you’re
searching for.
Direction Toggles the direction that AutoCAD searches for the
specified value in the Data View window.
DBCONNECT | 229
Format Dialog Box
Controls how database table records are displayed in the Data View window.
You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
Data View menu: Format. (The Data View menu is available only if you
Shortcut menu: Right-click the grid header in the Data View window and
choose Format.
Font Specifies the font style that is applied to the current

Data View table.
Outline Specifies a style to apply to the current font. The
available options are Normal, Italic, Bold, Bold Italic, Not
Bold, and Not Italic.
Size Specifies the size in points that is applied to the current
font.
Effects Applies additional formatting to the Data View window
display. Strikeout draws a line through the center of all
column data. Underline applies an underline to all
column data.
Textcolor Specifies the color that is applied to the Data View table
records.
Preview Displays how the current Format option values look
when applied to the Data View window.
Import Query Set Dialog Box

Imports a set of queries into the current AutoCAD drawing. If the query set
contains a name that matches a query in the current drawing, AutoCAD dis-
plays an alert box where you can enter a different name for the query. You
can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Queries ➤ Import Query Set
Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager and
choose Import Query Set.
Look In Specifies the directory where the query set is located.
230 | DBCONNECT
File Name Specifies the name of the query set to import.
Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the query set that you’re
importing. Query sets always have the .dbq extension.
Import Template Set Dialog Box

Imports a set of link templates and label templates into the current AutoCAD
drawing. If the template set contains a link or label template with a name
that matches a template in the current drawing, AutoCAD displays an alert
box where you can enter a different name for the template. You can open this
dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ Import Template Set
Shortcut menu: Right-click a drawing node in the dbConnect Manager and
choose Import Template Set.
Look In Specifies the directory where the template set is located.

File Name Specifies the name of the template set to import.
Files of Type Specifies the file extension of the template set that
you’re importing. Template sets always have the .dbt
extension.
Label Template Dialog Box

Applies formatting to labels. The Label Template dialog box is a modified
version of the Multiline Text Editor that provides two additional tabs for
applying formatting to labels. The options on the primary Multiline Text
Editor tabs can be used to apply additional formatting to the multiline text
label objects. For more information about the Multiline Text Editor, see
MTEXT.
Before the Label Template dialog box opens, AutoCAD displays the New
Label Template dialog box (see page 240), in which you can name the label
template. You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a table, link template, or label template
in the dbConnect Manager, and choose the New Label Template button. If a
label template is selected, AutoCAD opens the Label Template dialog box
without first displaying the New Label Template dialog box.
DBCONNECT | 231
Data View buttons: Choose New Label Template from the Label Template
list, and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create
Attached Label button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the
selected table in the current drawing, the New Link Template dialog box (see
page 240) is displayed.
dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Label Template. Select a link template
in the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) and choose
Continue.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template or a table in the dbConnect Man-
ager and choose New Label Template.
Pointing device: Double-click a label template in the dbConnect Manager.
This method opens the Label Template dialog box directly without first dis-
playing the New Label Template dialog box.
Label Fields Tab (Label Template Dialog Box)

Specifies which table fields are displayed when you create labels based on this
template.
Field Displays a list of available fields from the current

database table that you can include in your label. You
may include any number of fields from the source table.
Add Adds the selected field in the Field list to the label.
Table Displays the name of the current table.
Label Offset Tab (Label Template Dialog Box)

Defines X and Y coordinate offsets for the insertion point of both your label
and, if it is an attached label, its associated leader object.
232 | DBCONNECT
Start Specifies the start point for the leader object. The point
is defined with respect to the extents of the graphical
object that the label is attached to. The Start option has
no effect on freestanding labels, as they have no
associated leader object.
Leader Offset Specifies an X and Y offset for the multiline text object
with respect to the associated leader object. By default,
the X and Y Leader Offset options are set to 1,
indicating that the label text is offset 1 unit in the X
and Y planes from the tip of the leader object. The
Leader Offset settings only apply to attached labels.
Tip Offset Specifies the leader tip or label text offset values for
attached and freestanding labels. For attached labels,
the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y offset from the value
specified in Start for the tip of the leader object. For
freestanding labels, the Tip Offset specifies the X and Y
offset from the insertion point you specified for the
label.
Label Template Properties Dialog Box

Displays the full data source path to a label template’s table. You can use this
dialog box to update a label template with new data source information.
Before the Label Template Properties dialog box opens, AutoCAD displays the
Select a Database Object dialog box, from which you can select a label
template.
DBCONNECT | 233
You can open this dialog box using the following method:
dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ Label Template Properties
Template Name Displays the name of the selected label template.

Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the
selected label template. You can select a new data
source from this list to apply to the label template.
Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the
selected label template. You can select a new catalog
from this list to apply to the label template.
Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the
selected label template. You can select a new schema
from this list to apply to the label template.
Table Displays the name of the table specified for the selected
label template. You can select a new table from this list
to apply to the label template.
Fields Displays the fields specified for the selected label
template.
Link Conversion Dialog Box

Converts links created in AutoCAD Release 12, Release 13, and Release 14 to
AutoCAD 2000 (and later) format. You can open this dialog box using the fol-
lowing methods:
dbConnect menu: Link Conversion
234 | DBCONNECT
Because legacy links are stored in formats that differ significantly from
AutoCAD 2000 and later, the link conversion process requires that you spec-
ify a mapping of the old AutoCAD SQL Extension™ (ASE) link values to the
new ones used by AutoCAD 2000 and later. For example, you must identify
the environment used by a particular link in Release 14 and specify the cor-
responding data source that you want substituted for this environment in
AutoCAD 2000 and later. Similar mappings must be established between all
old ASE link values and the new values that you want substituted for them.
Link Format
Specifies the format of the link that you are converting. Different fields are
displayed depending on whether you select R12 or R13/R14.
DBCONNECT | 235
Old Link Format (R12)
Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that you’re
converting.
DBMS Specifies the database management system used by the
link that you’re converting.
Database Specifies the database used by the link that you’re
converting.
Table Specifies the table used by the link that you’re
converting.
Old Link Format (R13/R14)

Specifies the path to the database table used by the link that you’re
converting.
Environment Specifies the environment used by the link that you’re
converting.
Catalog Specifies the catalog used by the link that you’re
converting.
Schema Specifies the schema used by the link that you’re
converting.
Table Specifies the table used by the link that you’re
converting.
Link Path Name Specifies the link path name used by the link that
you’re converting.
New Link Format

Specifies the path to the database table used by the converted link.
Data Source Lists available data sources that you can select for the
converted link.
Catalog Lists available catalogs that you can select for the
converted link.
Schema Lists available schemas that you can select for the
converted link.
Table Lists available tables that you can select for the
converted link.
Link Template Lists available link templates that you can select for the
converted link.
236 | DBCONNECT
OK
Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file and closes the
dialog box.
Apply
Writes conversion mapping information to the asi.ini file but keeps the
dialog box open so that you can specify conversions for additional links.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box without converting any links.
Link Manager
Edits the values of the key fields for a selected linked object. You can open
the Link Manager using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Links ➤ Link Manager. Select a linked graphical object.
Shortcut menu: Select and then right-click a linked graphical object, and
then choose Link ➤ Link Manager.
Link Templates Lists all link templates that are associated with the
selected graphical object. Select the link template
whose link values you want to view or edit.
Key Displays the key fields of the currently selected link
template.
DBCONNECT | 237
Value Displays all key values that are defined for the selected
link. To display a list of values for a specific field, click
a Value cell and choose [...].
Delete Deletes the currently selected link from the graphical
object it’s associated with.
Link Template Dialog Box

Specifies the key fields that are used by a link template.
Before the Link Template dialog box opens, AutoCAD displays the New Link
Template dialog box (see page 240), in which you can name the link tem-
plate. You can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a table in the dbConnect Manager and
choose the New Link Template button.
Data View buttons: Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list,
and then choose the Link button flyout.
Link dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Link Template. Navigate to and select a
table from the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) and choose
Continue.
Shortcut menu: Right-click a table in the dbConnect Manager and choose
New Link Template.
Pointing device: Double-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager.
This method opens the Link Template dialog box directly, without first
displaying the New Link Template dialog box.
238 | DBCONNECT
Template Name Displays the name of the link template.
Table Displays the current database table. The first line lists
the name of the table, and the second line lists the full
data source path to the table in the following syntax:
environment.catalog.schema.table
Key Fields Displays all fields that are available for the current
table, as well as the field type and, in the case of
character fields, the field length. You specify the link
template’s key fields by selecting the check box to the
left of the field name.
Link Template Properties Dialog Box

Displays the full data source path to a link template’s table. You can use this
dialog box to update a link template with new data source information.
Before the Link Template Properties dialog box opens, AutoCAD displays the
Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242), from which you can select
a link template.
You can open this dialog box using the following method:
dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ Link Template Properties
Template Name Displays the name of the selected link template.

Data Source Displays the name of the data source specified for the
selected link template. You can select a new data source
from this list to apply to the link template.
Catalog Displays the name of the catalog specified for the
selected link template. You can select a new catalog
Schema Displays the name of the schema specified for the
selected link template. You can select a new schema
Table Displays the name of the table specified for the selected
link template. You can select a new table from this list
to apply to the link template.
Keys Displays the key fields specified for the selected link
template.
DBCONNECT | 239
New Label Template Dialog Box
Creates a new label template.You can open this dialog box using the follow-
ing methods:
choose the New Label Template button.
Data View buttons: Choose New Label Template from the Label Template
list, and then choose either the Create Freestanding Label or the Create
Attached Label button flyout. If there is no link template defined for the
selected table in the current drawing, the New Link Template dialog box (see
page 240) is displayed.
dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Label Template. Select a link template
from the Select a Database Object dialog box (see page 242) and choose
Continue.
New Label Template.
After you enter a name for the label template and choose Continue, the Label
Template dialog box (see page 231) opens, in which you specify the fields to
display in your label and how to format them.
New Label Specifies a name for the label template.
Template Name
Start with Lists available label templates in the current drawing,
Template from which you can select one to use as a start point for
your new label template.
New Link Template Dialog Box

Creates a new link template. You can open this dialog box using the
following methods:
choose the New Link Template button.
Data View buttons: Choose New Link Template from the Link Template list,
and then choose the Link button flyout.
Link dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Link Template. Navigate to and then
select a table in the Select Data Object dialog box (see page 243) and choose
Continue.
New Link Template.
240 | DBCONNECT
After you enter a name for the link template and choose Continue, the Link
Template dialog box (see page 238) opens, in which you specify the key fields
that the link uses.
New Link Specifies a name for the link template.
Template Name
Start with Lists all available link templates from the current
Template drawing, from which you can select one to use as a
starting point for the new link template.
New Query Dialog Box

Creates a new query and opens the Query Editor. You can open this dialog
box using the following methods:
dbConnect Manager buttons: Select a link template, table, or existing query
in the dbConnect Manager and choose the New Query button.
dbConnect menu: Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table, New Query
on a Link Template. (AutoCAD displays a dialog box in which you can select
a database object to query.)
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template, table, or existing query in the
dbConnect Manager and choose New Query.
After you enter a name for the query and choose Continue, the Query Editor
(see page 215) is displayed, in which you can construct a new query.
New Query Specifies a name for the query.
Name
Existing Query Lists all available queries from the current drawing.
Names
Replace Dialog Box

Searches for specified text or a numeric value in the currently loaded Data
View table. You can specify a replacement value that overwrites the value
that you’re searching for. The search is limited to a single table column. It is
not possible to conduct a global search that scans all columns in the table.
Data View menu: Replace. (This menu is available only if you have a database
table open in the Data View window.)
DBCONNECT | 241
Shortcut menu: Right-click a single cell or column header in the Data View
window and choose Replace.
Find What Specifies the value to search for.

Replace With Specifies a replacement value for the value that you’re
searching for.
Match Case Searches for exact value, including case, of what you
enter in Find What. If this option is cleared, AutoCAD
searches for the value regardless of case.
Find Next Finds the next occurrence of the value that you’re
searching for.
Replace Replaces the next occurrence of the value that you’re
searching for with the value specified in Replace With.
Replace All Replaces all occurrences of the value that you’re
searching for with the value specified in Replace With.
Select a Database Object Dialog Box

Displays a list of the database objects, such as link templates, label templates,
or queries, that are associated with the current drawing. You can select a data-
base object from this list to apply to the current operation. You can open this
dbConnect menu: Templates ➤ New Label Template, Edit Link Template, Edit
Label Template, Delete Link Template, or Delete Label Template; Queries ➤
Execute Query, New Query on a Link Template, Edit Query, or Delete Query;
Links ➤ Delete Links; Labels ➤ Reload Labels, Show Labels, Hide Labels, or
Delete Labels; View Data ➤ View Linked Table, Edit Linked Table
Database Object Lists the available database objects that are associated
List with the current drawing, from which you must select
one to apply to the current operation.
OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a
secondary dialog box in which you can continue the
current operation. If, for example, you are creating a
new label template, the New Label Template dialog box
is displayed.
242 | DBCONNECT
Select a Data Object Dialog Box
Displays the Data Sources node of the dbConnect Manager, from which you
can navigate to and select a table that the current operation is applied to. You
can open this dialog box using the following methods:
dbConnect menu: Data Sources ➤ Connect; Templates ➤ New Link Tem-
plate; Queries ➤ New Query on an External Table; View Data ➤ View External
Table, Edit External Table
Tree View Lists the available data sources, from which you can
Window select a table to apply to the current operation.
OK/Continue Either completes the current operation or opens a
secondary dialog box or window, in which you can
continue the current operation. If, for example, you are
creating a new link template, the New Link Template
dialog box is displayed.
Sort Dialog Box

Specifies a sort order that is applied to the table records displayed in the Data
View window. You can select a combination of up to five columns to apply
to the sort order. You can open this dialog box using the following method:
Shortcut menu: Right-click a column header in the Data View window and
choose Sort.
Sort By Specifies the primary column to apply to the sort

operation. The data from this column is sorted first, and
then the data from any additional Then By columns
that are specified is sorted.
DBCONNECT | 243
Ascending Applies an ascending sort order to the selected column.
The column data is ordered with the smallest value at
the beginning of the Data View record set and the
largest value at the end of the record set.
Descending Applies a descending sort order to the selected column.
The column data is ordered with the largest value at the
beginning of the Data View record set and the smallest
value at the end of the record set.
Then By Specifies an additional column to apply to the sort
operation.
Reset Clears all columns that are specified for the current sort
order so that you can specify a new sort order.
Synchronize Dialog Box

Updates links that AutoCAD is unable to resolve. Links can become invalid
if you change the underlying structure of their source table, or if you move
the source table to a new location. In these cases, the structure specified by
the link template used to create the links is no longer valid, and link tem-
plates and any associated links must be updated.
The Synchronize dialog box provides a list of detected errors. Certain errors
(such as a resized column in the source database table) can be fixed directly
from the Synchronize dialog box. Other errors (such as links that point to
nonexistent records) must be fixed in the source database table.
dbConnect menu: Synchronize
Shortcut menu: Right-click a link template in the dbConnect Manager and
choose Synchronize.
244 | DBCONNECT
Errors Displays a list of errors detected. You can select an error
to fix.
Description Provides a brief description of the error selected in the
Errors list.
Fix Fixes the currently selected error.
Delete Deletes the invalid link template and any associated
links from the current drawing.
Close Closes the dialog box.
Indicate Drawing Indicates all objects in the current drawing that are
Objects associated with the invalid link template.
See Also
Commands DBCCLOSE closes the dbConnect Manager.
DBCONNECT | 245
DBLCLKEDIT
Controls double-click behavior
Command line: dblclkedit
Enter double-click editing mode [ON/OFF] <ON>:
If double-click editing is turned on, one of several dialog boxes may be dis-
played, depending on the object type that is double clicked.
When you double-click most objects, the Properties palette is displayed.
Double-clicking some types of objects displays specialized editors that are
more powerful, convenient, or frequently used. Objects that display
specialized editors when double-clicked include
■ Attribute: Displays the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box (DDEDIT).

■ Attribute within a block: Displays the Enhanced Attribute Editor (EATTEDIT).
■ Block: Displays the Reference Edit dialog box (REFEDIT).
■ Hatch: Displays the Hatch Edit dialog box (HATCHEDIT).
■ Leader text: Displays the Multiline Text Editor (DDEDIT).
■ Multiline: Displays the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box (MLEDIT).
■ Multiline text: Displays the Multiline Text Editor (DDEDIT).
■ Text: Displays the Edit Text dialog box (DDEDIT).
■ Xref: Displays the Reference Edit dialog box (REFEDIT).
DBLIST
Lists database information for each object in the drawing dblist
The text window displays information about each object in the current draw-
ing. AutoCAD pauses when the window fills with information. Press ENTER
to resume output, or press ESC to cancel.
246 | DBLCLKEDIT
DDEDIT
Edits text, dimension text, attribute definitions, and feature control frames
An attribute is informational text associated with a block. An attribute
definition is a template for creating an attribute. A feature control frame is a
container for the tolerance information for a single dimension.
Text toolbar:
Shortcut menu: Select a text object, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Mtext Edit or Text Edit.
Command line: ddedit
Select an annotation object or [Undo]:
Object Selection Displays one of four dialog boxes, depending on the

type of text you select:
■ Text created using TEXT or DTEXT displays the Edit

Text dialog box (see page 248).
■ Text created using MTEXT displays the Multiline Text
Editor (see page 577).
■ Attribute definitions (not part of a block definition)
display the Edit Attribute Definition dialog box (see
page 248).
■ Feature control frames display the Geometric
Tolerance dialog box (see page 1031).
DDEDIT repeats the prompt until you press ENTER to

end the command.
DDEDIT | 247
Undo Returns the text or attribute definition to its previous
value. You can use this option immediately after
editing.
Edit Text Dialog Box

Modifies text created with TEXT or DTEXT. Enter the new text and choose OK
to update the object.
Edit Attribute Definition Dialog Box

Modifies an attribute definition’s tag, prompt, and default value.
Tag Specifies the attribute tag, which identifies the attribute

in the drawing. The tag can contain any characters
except spaces or exclamation marks (!). AutoCAD
changes lowercase letters to uppercase.
Prompt Specifies the attribute prompt that displays when you
insert a block containing this attribute definition. If
you need leading blanks in the prompt, start the string
with a backslash (\). If you need a backslash as the first
character, start the string with two backslashes.
Default Specifies the default attribute value. If you need leading
blanks in the default value, start the string with a
backslash (\). If the first character must be a backslash,
start the string with two backslashes.
248 | DDEDIT
See Also
See “Change Text” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ATTEDIT edits individual, nonconstant attribute values
associated with a specific block. -ATTEDIT edits both
attributes values and attribute properties individually
or globally, independent of the block. MTEXT creates a
multiline text object that fits within a specified area.
TEXT creates text on the screen as you enter it. TOLER-
ANCE creates geometric tolerances.
DDPTYPE
Specifies the display style and size of point objects
Format menu: Point Style
Command line: ddptype (or 'ddptype for transparent use)
The Point Style dialog box is displayed.
Point Style Dialog Box

Shows the current point style and size. Change the point style by selecting
an icon.
Point Display Images

Specifies the image used to display point objects. The point style is stored in
the PDMODE system variable.
DDPTYPE | 249
Point Size
Sets the point display size. The value you enter can be relative to the screen
or in absolute units. AutoCAD stores the point display size in the PDSIZE
system variable. Subsequent point objects that you draw use the new value.
Set Size Relative Sets the point display size as a percentage of the screen
to Screen size. The point display does not change when you zoom
in or out.
Set Size in Sets the point display size as the actual units you specify
Absolute Units under Point Size. AutoCAD displays points larger or
smaller when you zoom in or out.
See Also
See “Draw Reference Points” in the User’s Guide.
Commands POINT creates point objects. DIVIDE uses points as mark-
ers in an object divided into equal parts. MEASURE
places markers on an object at specified intervals.
System Variables PDMODE sets the Point Display mode. PDSIZE sets the
point display size.
DDVPOINT
Sets the three-dimensional viewing direction
View menu: 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint Presets
Command line: ddvpoint
The Viewpoint Presets dialog box is displayed.
Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box

Defines 3D view settings.
250 | DDVPOINT
Set Viewing Angles
Sets the direction of the view relative to either the world coordinate system
(WCS) or a user coordinate system (UCS).
Absolute to WCS Sets the view direction relative to the WCS.
Relative to UCS Sets the view direction relative to the current UCS.
From
Specifies viewing angles.
X Axis Specifies the angle from the X axis.
XY Plane Specifies the angle from the XY plane.
You can also use the sample image to specify viewing angles. The black arm
indicates the new angle. The red arm indicates the current angle. Specify an
angle by selecting the inner region of the circle or half-circle. Selecting the
bounded outer regions rounds off the angle to the value displayed in that
region.
Set to Plan View

Sets the viewing angles to display the plan view (XY plane) relative to the
selected coordinate system.
DDVPOINT | 251
See Also
See “View a Parallel Projection in 3D” in the User’s Guide.
Commands VPOINT is the command line equivalent of DDVPOINT.
VIEW saves and restores named views. PLAN displays the
plan view of a specified UCS.
DELAY
Provides a timed pause within a script
Command line: delay (or 'delay for transparent use)
Enter delay time (in milliseconds): Enter a value from 0 through 32,767
milliseconds
Specifies the duration of a pause. Entering delay 1000 in your script delays
the start of execution of the next command for about one second. The long-
est delay available is 32767, which is slightly less than 33 seconds.
See Also
See “Create Command Scripts” in the Customization Guide.
DETACHURL
Removes hyperlinks in a drawing
Command line: detachurl
Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER to end selection
Hyperlinks are removed from the selected objects. If an area is selected, the
polyline is deleted. You can use PURGE to remove the URLLAYER layer.
See Also
See “Add Hyperlinks to a Drawing” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ATTACHURL attaches hyperlinks to objects and areas in
a drawings. HYPERLINK displays a dialog box to attach
and detach URLs to objects and offers additional
options.
252 | DELAY
DIM and DIM1
Accesses Dimensioning mode
DIM and DIM1 start Dimensioning mode, in which you can use the dimen-
sioning subcommands from earlier releases of AutoCAD. (DIM and DIM1 are
provided only for compatibility with previous releases.) Use DIM to remain
in Dimensioning mode after you have used a dimensioning command. Use
DIM1 to execute a dimensioning command and immediately return to the
Command prompt.
Command line: dim or dim1
Dim: Enter a Dimensioning mode command
The Dim prompt indicates that you’re in Dimensioning mode. In Dimen-

sioning mode, you can use a special set of dimensioning commands instead
of the main dimension commands. To exit Dimensioning mode, enter e or
exit, or press ESC .
Dimensioning Mode Commands

The following commands are available at the DIM prompt.
Dimensioning mode commands
Command Description
EXIT Exits Dimensioning mode and returns to the Command prompt. You
can also press ESC to exit Dimensioning mode.
REDRAW Redraws the current viewport.
STYLE Changes the current text style.
UNDO or U Erases the most recently created dimension objects and cancels any
new dimension system variable setting. When you exit Dimensioning
mode, UNDO reverses the effects of the entire dimensioning session.
DIM and DIM1 | 253

The following table shows which AutoCAD commands are equivalent to the
rest of the Dimensioning mode commands. For information about these
Dimensioning mode commands, see the equivalent AutoCAD command.
Dimensioning mode command equivalents
Dimensioning mode Equivalent

command command
ALIGNED DIMALIGNED
ANGULAR DIMANGULAR
BASELINE DIMBASELINE
CENTER DIMCENTER
CONTINUE DIMCONTINUE
DIAMETER DIMDIAMETER
HOMETEXT DIMEDIT Home
HORIZONTAL DIMLINEAR Horizontal
LEADER LEADER
NEWTEXT DIMEDIT New
OBLIQUE DIMEDIT Oblique
ORDINATE DIMORDINATE
OVERRIDE DIMOVERRIDE
RADIUS DIMRADIUS
RESTORE -DIMSTYLE Restore
ROTATED DIMLINEAR Rotated
SAVE -DIMSTYLE Save
STATUS -DIMSTYLE Status
TEDIT DIMTEDIT
TROTATE DIMEDIT Rotate
254 | DIM and DIM1

Dimensioning mode command equivalents (continued)
Dimensioning mode Equivalent

command command
UPDATE -DIMSTYLE Apply
VARIABLES -DIMSTYLE Variables
VERTICAL DIMLINEAR Vertical
DIMALIGNED
Creates an aligned linear dimension
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Aligned
Command line: dimaligned
Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point for manual
extension lines, or press ENTER for automatic extension lines
After you specify either manual or automatic extension lines, the following
prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point or enter
an option
Extension Line Origin

Specifies the first extension line origin (1). AutoCAD prompts you to specify
the second one.
Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2)
DIMALIGNED | 255
1
2
point specification dimension line
location designated
Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension
lines after you select an object.
Select object to dimension:
For polylines and other explodable objects, only the individual line and arc
segments are dimensioned. You cannot select objects in a nonuniformly
scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, its endpoints are used as the origins of the exten-
sion lines. The extension lines are offset from the endpoints by the distance
specified in Offset from Origin on the Lines and Arrows tab of the New,
Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE).
AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable.
offset from origin

(stored in DIMEXO)
object selected dimension line location

designated
If you select a circle, the endpoints of its diameter are used as the origins of
the extension line. The point used to select the circle defines the origin of the
first extension line.
256 | DIMALIGNED
Dimension Line Location
Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction
to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, the DIMALIGNED
command ends.
Mtext
Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577), which you can use to edit
the dimension text. AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measure-
ment, enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control
codes and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols.
See “Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete the angle brackets,
enter the new dimension text, and then choose OK. If alternate units are not
turned on in the dimension style, you can display them by entering square
brackets ([ ]). For more information about formatting dimension text, see
“Dimensions and Tolerances,” in the User’s Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the generated
measurements.
Text
Customizes the dimension text at the command line. AutoCAD displays the
generated dimension measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>:
Enter the dimension text, or press ENTER to accept the generated measure-
ment. To include the generated measurement, use angle brackets (< >) to
represent the generated measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
DIMALIGNED | 257
Angle
Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Specify angle of dimension text:
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45 degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line
before Angle Location prompt.
See Also
See “Create Aligned Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMSTYLE creates and manages dimension styles, which
define dimension properties. MTEXT controls how text
is displayed in multiline paragraphs.
System Variables DIMEXO stores the offset between extension lines and
origin points.
after Angle
DIMANGULAR
Creates an angular dimension
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Angular
Command line: dimangular
Select arc, circle, line, or <specify vertex>: Select an arc, circle, or line, or press
ENTER to create the angular dimension by specifying three points
After you define the angle to dimension, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension arc line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle]:
Arc Selection
Uses points on the selected arc as the defining points for a three-point angu-
lar dimension. The center of the arc is the angle vertex. The arc endpoints
become the origin points of the extension lines.
AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines.
AutoCAD draws the extension lines from the angle endpoints to the
angle vertex intersection of the dimension line.
258 | DIMANGULAR
1
Circle Selection
Uses the selection point (1) as the origin of the first extension line. The center
2 of the circle is the angle vertex.
Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (2)
angle The second angle endpoint is the origin of the second extension line and
vertex does not have to lie on the circle.
Line Selection
Defines the angle using two lines.
Select second line:
AutoCAD determines the angle by using each line as a vector for the angle
and the intersection of the lines for the angle vertex. The dimension line
spans the angle between the two lines. If the dimension line does not inter-
angle displayed sect the lines being dimensioned, AutoCAD adds extension lines as needed
depends on to extend one or both lines. The arc is always less than 180 degrees.
cursor position
Three-Point Specification
Creates a dimension based on three points you specify.
2 Specify angle vertex: Specify a point (1)
3
1 Specify first angle endpoint: Specify a point (2)
Specify second angle endpoint: Specify a point (3)
The angle vertex can be the same as one of the angle endpoints. If you need
extension lines, the endpoints are used as origin points.
AutoCAD draws the dimension line as an arc between the extension lines.
The extension lines are drawn from the angle endpoints to the intersection
of the dimension line.
Dimension Arc Line Location

Specifies the placement of the dimension line and determines the direction
to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location, DIMANGULAR
ends.
DIMANGULAR | 259
Mtext
angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the generated measurement,
enter the prefix or suffix before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes
and Unicode character strings to enter special characters or symbols. See
“Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027.
measurements.
Text
brackets ([ ]).
Angle
See Also
See “Create Angular Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.
260 | DIMANGULAR
Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles, which set
dimension format. DDEDIT controls the appearance of
single- line text.
DIMBASELINE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of the previous
dimension or a selected dimension
DIMBASELINE creates a series of related dimensions measured from the same
baseline. AutoCAD uses a baseline increment value to offset each new dimen-
sion line and to avoid overlaying the previous dimension line. The baseline
increment value is specified in Baseline Spacing on the Lines and Arrows tab
of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes (see page
290). AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMDLI system variable. Baseline
dimensioning is also called parallel dimensioning.
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Baseline
Command line: dimbaseline
If no dimension was created in the current session, AutoCAD prompts you to

select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the base-
line dimension.
Select base dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Otherwise, AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that
was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or
angular, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:

Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>:
To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC . The current dimen-
sion style determines the appearance of the text.
DIMBASELINE | 261
Second Extension Line Origin
By default, AutoCAD uses the first extension line of the base dimension as
the extension line origin for the baseline dimension. To override this default
behavior, explicitly select the base dimension; the extension line origin
becomes the extension line of the base dimension closest to the pick point
of the selection. When you select a second point, AutoCAD draws the base-
line dimension and redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin
prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To select another linear, ordinate,
or angular dimension to use as the basis for the baseline dimension, press
ENTER .
Select a base dimension, or press ESC to end the command.
angular baseline dimensioning linear baseline dimensioning
Feature Location
Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the baseline
dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select
a feature location, AutoCAD draws the baseline dimension and redisplays the
Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To select
another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for the base-
line dimension, press ENTER .
Undo
Undoes the last baseline dimension entered during this command session.
262 | DIMBASELINE
Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the
base for the baseline dimension. After you select a base dimension, AutoCAD
redisplays the Specify Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify
Feature Location prompt.
See Also
See “Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles, which set dimen-
sion format. MTEXT controls how paragraph text is
displayed.
System Variables DIMDLI specifies spacing between dimension lines of a
baseline dimension.
DIMCENTER
Creates the center mark or the centerlines of circles and arcs
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Center Mark
Command line: dimcenter
center mark
Select arc or circle: Use an object selection method
You can choose between center marks and centerlines and specify their size
when you set up the dimension style. See DIMSTYLE. You can also change
center mark settings using the DIMCEN system variable.
centerlines
See Also
See “Create Radial Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.
dimension format.
System Variables DIMCEN controls the generation of center marks or
centerlines.
DIMCENTER | 263
DIMCONTINUE
Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the second extension line of the
previous dimension or a selected dimension
DIMCONTINUE draws a series of related dimensions, such as several shorter
dimensions that add up to the total measurement. Continued dimensioning
is also known as chain dimensioning.
When you create linear continued dimensions, the first extension line is
suppressed and the placement of text and arrowheads might include a leader
line. These appear as overrides for the continued dimension (the DIMSE1
system variable is on, and the DIMTMOVE system variable is 1).
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Continue
Command line: dimcontinue
If no dimension was created in the current session, AutoCAD prompts you to

select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base for the
continued dimension.
Select continued dimension: Select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension
Otherwise, AutoCAD skips this prompt and uses the dimension object that
was last created in the current session. If the base dimension is linear or
angular, the following prompt is displayed:
Specify a second extension line origin or [Undo/Select] <Select>: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER to select a base dimension
If the base dimension is ordinate, the following prompt is displayed:

Specify feature location or [Undo/Select] <Select>:
To end the command, press ENTER twice, or press ESC . The current dimen-
sion style determines the appearance of the text.
Second Extension Line Origin

Uses the second extension line origin of the continued dimension for the
first extension line origin of the next dimension. The current dimension
style determines the appearance of the text.
264 | DIMCONTINUE
After you select a continued dimension, AutoCAD redisplays the Specify a
1 Second Extension Line Origin prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To
select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for
the continued dimension, press ENTER .
Feature Location
Uses the endpoint of the base dimension as the endpoint for the continued
dimension; you are prompted for the next feature location. When you select
a feature location, AutoCAD draws the continued dimension and redisplays
the Specify Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC . To
select another linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the basis for
the continued dimension, press ENTER .
Undo
Undoes the last continued dimension entered during the command session.
Select
Prompts you to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the
continued dimension. After you select a continued dimension, AutoCAD
redisplays the Specify a Second Extension Line Origin prompt or the Specify
Feature Location prompt. To end the command, press ESC .
See Also
See “Create Baseline and Continued Dimensions”in the User’s Guide.
dimension format.
DIMCONTINUE | 265
DIMDIAMETER
Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs
DIMDIAMETER draws different types of diameter dimensions depending on
the size of the circle or arc, the options set for the dimension style (see
DIMSTYLE), and the position of the cursor. The dimension style controls
center marks and centerlines. AutoCAD does not draw a center mark or a
centerline when a dimension line is drawn inside the arc or circle. AutoCAD
stores the setting for center marks and centerlines in the DIMCEN system
variable.
For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the diameter line is greater than
15 degrees from horizontal and is outside the circle or arc, AutoCAD draws a
hook line one arrowhead long next to the dimension text, as shown in the
first two illustrations.
Different types of diameter dimensions
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Diameter
Command line: dimdiameter
Select arc or circle:
AutoCAD measures the diameter and displays the text with a diameter
symbol (∅) in front of it. The position of the cursor determines the location
of the dimension line. As you move the cursor, the dimension moves around
or inside the circle or arc.
an option

Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line. After you specify the
location, AutoCAD draws the dimension.
266 | DIMDIAMETER
Mtext
The current dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension
text.
Text
brackets ([ ]).
Angle
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line
Location prompt.
DIMDIAMETER | 267
See Also
sion format.
System Variables DIMCEN controls the creation of center marks and
centerlines. DIMATFIT controls how text fits within the
extension lines. DIMJUST controls the horizontal justifi-
cation of dimension text. DIMTAD controls the vertical
position of text in relation to the dimension line.
DIMTIH and DIMTOH control the position of dimension
text inside and outside the extension lines. DIMTOFL
controls drawing of a dimension line between the
extension lines even when the text is placed outside the
extension lines. DIMUPT controls user-positioned text.
DIMDISASSOCIATE
Removes associativity from selected dimensions
DIMDISASSOCIATE converts selected dimensions that are associated with
geometric objects into non-associative dimensions.
Command line: dimdisassociate
Select dimensions to disassociate: Select one or more dimensions and then press
ENTER
DIMDISASSOCIATE filters the selection set to include only associative dimen-

sions that are not on locked layers, and that are not in a different space than
the current space (for example, if model space is active, associative dimen-
sions in paper space are excluded). DIMDISASSOCIATE then disassociates these
dimensions and reports the number of dimensions that are filtered out and
the number that are disassociated.
See Also
See “Associative Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMDISASSOCIATE removes the associativity from
selected dimensions. DIMREASSOCIATE associates
selected dimensions to geometric objects.
System Variables DIMASSOC controls the associativity property of
dimensions and leaders.
268 | DIMDISASSOCIATE
DIMEDIT
Edits dimensions
DIMEDIT affects dimension text and extension lines on one or more dimen-
sion objects. The Home, New, and Rotate options affect dimension text. The
Oblique option controls the angle of extension lines.
Dimension toolbar:
Command line: dimedit
Enter type of dimension editing [Home/New/Rotate/Oblique] <Home>: Enter

Home Moves rotated dimension text back to its default

position.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select
dimension objects
before Home after Home
The selected dimension text is returned to its default

position and rotation as specified in its dimension style.
New Changes dimension text using the Multiline Text Editor
(see page 577).
before New after New
AutoCAD represents the generated measurement with

angle brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the
generated measurement, enter the prefix or suffix
before or after the angle brackets. Use control codes and
DIMEDIT | 269
Unicode character strings to enter special characters or
symbols. See “Control Codes and Special Characters”
on page 1027.
To edit or replace the generated measurement, delete
the angle brackets, enter the new dimension text, and
then choose OK. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display them by entering
square brackets ([ ]). For more information about
formatting dimension text, see “Dimensions and
Tolerances,” in the User’s Guide.
Rotate Rotates dimension text. This option is similar to the
Angle option of DIMTEDIT.
Enter text angle:
Entering 0 places the text in its default orientation,

which is determined by the vertical and horizontal text
settings on the Text tab of the New, Modify, and
Override Dimension Style dialog boxes. See DIMSTYLE.
rotated text The DIMTIH and DIMTOH system variables control this
orientation.
dimension objects
Oblique Adjusts the oblique angle of the extension lines for

linear dimensions. AutoCAD creates linear dimensions
with extension lines perpendicular to the direction of
the dimension line. The Oblique option is useful when
extension lines conflict with other features of the
drawing.
dimension objects
Enter oblique angle (press ENTER for none): Enter an

270 | DIMEDIT
See Also
See “Modify Dimension Text” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMTEDIT repositions and rotates text in a dimension
without affecting other parts of the dimension.
System Variables DIMTIH and DIMTOH control the position of dimension
text inside and outside the extension lines.
DIMLINEAR
Creates linear dimensions
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Linear
Command line: dimlinear
Specify first extension line origin or <select object>: Specify a point or press
ENTER to select an object to dimension
After you specify the extension line origin points or the object to dimension,
the following prompt is displayed:
Specify dimension line location or [Mtext/Text/Angle/Horizontal/Vertical/
Rotated]: Specify a point or enter an option
DIMLINEAR | 271
First Extension Line Origin
Prompts for the origin point of the second extension line after you specify
the origin point of the first.
Specify second extension line origin: Specify a point (2)
2
point specification

Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line and determines the
direction to draw the extension lines. After you specify the location,
AutoCAD draws the dimension.
dimension line
location designated
Mtext
272 | DIMLINEAR
measurements.
Text
Customizes the dimension text on the command line. AutoCAD displays the
brackets ([ ]).
Angle
before Angle after Angle
DIMLINEAR | 273
Horizontal
Creates horizontal linear dimensions.
an option
Dimension Line Uses the point you specify to locate the dimension line.
Location After you specify the location, AutoCAD draws the
dimension.
Mtext, Text, These text editing and formatting options are identical
Angle in all dimension commands. See the option
descriptions provided earlier in this command.
Vertical
Creates vertical linear dimensions.
an option
dimension.
Mtext, Text, These text editing and formatting options are identical
Angle in all dimension commands. See the option
descriptions provided earlier in this command.
Rotated
Creates rotated linear dimensions.
Specify angle of dimension line <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
274 | DIMLINEAR
Object Selection
Automatically determines the origin points of the first and second extension
lines after you select an object.
Select object to dimension:
For polylines and other explodable objects, AutoCAD dimensions only the
individual line and arc segments. You cannot select objects in a non-
uniformly scaled block reference.
If you select a line or an arc, AutoCAD uses the line or arc endpoints as the
origins of the extension lines. The extension lines are offset from the end-
points by the distance you specify in Offset from Origin in the Lines and
Arrows tab of the New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog boxes.
See DIMSTYLE. AutoCAD stores this value in the DIMEXO system variable.
offset from origin
(DIMEXO system
variable)
object selected dimension line location

designated
If you select a circle, AutoCAD uses the diameter endpoints as the origins of
the extension line. When the point used to select the circle is close to the
north or south quadrant point, AutoCAD draws a horizontal dimension.
When the point used to select the circle is close to the east or west quadrant
point, AutoCAD draws a vertical dimension.
See Also
See “Create Linear Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.
sion format and behavior. MTEXT controls how
AutoCAD displays text in multiline paragraphs.
System Variables DIMEXO stores the offset of the extension lines from the
origin points.
DIMLINEAR | 275
DIMORDINATE
Creates ordinate point dimensions
Ordinate dimensions display the X or Y ordinate of a feature along with a
simple leader line. These dimensions are also known as datum dimensions.
AutoCAD uses the current user coordinate system (UCS) to determine the
measured X or Y ordinate and draws the leader line in a direction orthogonal
to the axes of the current UCS. The absolute value of the coordinate is used
according to the prevailing standards for ordinate dimensions.
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Ordinate
Command line: dimordinate
Specify feature location: Specify a point or snap to an object

Specify leader endpoint or [Xdatum/Ydatum/Mtext/Text/Angle]: Specify a point
or enter an option
Leader Endpoint Uses the difference between the feature location and
Specification the leader endpoint to determine whether it is an X or
a Y ordinate dimension. If the difference in the Y
ordinate is greater, the dimension measures the X
ordinate. Otherwise, it measures the Y ordinate.
Xdatum Measures the X ordinate and determines the
orientation of the leader line and dimension text.
AutoCAD displays the Leader Endpoint prompt, where
you can specify the endpoint.
Ydatum Measures the Y ordinate and determines the orientation
of the leader line and dimension text. AutoCAD
Xdatum
Ydatum displays the Leader Endpoint prompts, where you can
specify the endpoint.
276 | DIMORDINATE
Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577), which
you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD
represents the generated measurement with angle
brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the
on page 1027.
Tolerances,” in the User’s Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance
of the generated measurements. After you choose OK,
AutoCAD redisplays the Leader Endpoint prompt.
Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line.
AutoCAD displays the generated dimension
measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text,
or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement
To include the generated measurement, use angle

brackets (< >) to represent the generated measurement.
If alternate units are not turned on in the dimension
style, you can display alternate units by entering square
brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog
boxes. After you press ENTER , AutoCAD redisplays the
Leader Endpoint prompt.
DIMORDINATE | 277
Angle Changes the angle of the dimension text.
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45

degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD redisplays the
Leader Endpoint prompt.
See Also
See “Create Ordinate Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.
sion format and behavior. MTEXT controls how
AutoCAD displays text in multiline paragraphs. ORTHO
constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or verti-
cal directions or aligns movement with the current grid
rotation angle.
DIMOVERRIDE
Overrides dimensioning system variables
DIMOVERRIDE overrides dimensioning system variable settings that are asso-
ciated with a dimension object but doesn't affect the current dimension style.
You can also use the command to clear overrides from dimensions.
Dimension menu: Override
Command line: dimoverride
Enter dimension variable name to override or [Clear overrides]: Enter the name
of a dimension variable, or enter c
Dimension Overrides the value of the dimensioning system

Variable Name variable you specify.
to Override
Enter new value for dimension variable <current>: Enter a
278 | DIMOVERRIDE
If you enter a new value, AutoCAD redisplays the
Dimension Variable Name to Override prompt. If you
press ENTER , AutoCAD prompts you to select the
dimensions.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the
dimensions
AutoCAD applies the overrides to the selected

dimensions.
Clear Overrides Clears any overrides on selected dimensions.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select the
dimensions
AutoCAD clears the overrides, and the dimension

objects return to the settings defined by their
dimension style.
See Also
See “Override a Dimension Style” in the User’s Guide.
sion format and behavior.
System Variables For a list of dimension system variables, see “Dimen-
sion Variables Quick Reference.”
DIMRADIUS
Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs
A radial dimension consists of a radius dimension line with an arrowhead at
the arc or circle end. AutoCAD draws a center mark if the DIMCEN system
variable is not set to 0.
DIMRADIUS draws different types of radial dimensions depending on the size
of the circle or arc, the options in the New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes (see DIMSTYLE), and the position of the cursor. AutoCAD
stores the values of the options in the DIMUPT, DIMTOFL, DIMATFIT, DIMTIH,
DIMTOH, DIMJUST, and DIMTAD system variables.
For horizontal dimension text, if the angle of the radial dimension line is
greater than 15 degrees from horizontal, AutoCAD draws a hook line, also
called a dogleg or landing, one arrowhead long, next to the dimension text.
DIMRADIUS | 279
AutoCAD measures the radius and displays the text with the letter R in front
of it.
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Radius
Command line: dimradius
Select arc or circle:

an option
dimension.
Mtext Displays the Multiline Text Editor (see page 577), which
you can use to edit the dimension text. AutoCAD
represents the generated measurement with angle
brackets (< >). To add a prefix or a suffix to the
on page 1027.
280 | DIMRADIUS
Tolerances” in the User’s Guide.
The current dimension style determines the appearance
of the generated measurements. After you choose OK,
AutoCAD redisplays the Dimension Line Location
prompt.
Text Customizes the dimension text on the command line.
AutoCAD displays the generated dimension
measurement within angle brackets.
Enter dimension text <current>: Enter the dimension text,
or press ENTER to accept the generated measurement
To include the generated measurement, use angle

brackets (< >) to represent the generated
measurement. If alternate units are not turned on in
the dimension style, you can display alternate units
by entering square brackets ([ ]).
Dimension text properties are set on the Text tab of the
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style dialog
boxes.
After you press ENTER , the Dimension Line Location
prompt is displayed.
DIMRADIUS | 281
Enter an angle. For example, to rotate the text 45
degrees, enter 45.
After you specify the angle, AutoCAD displays the
Dimension Line Location prompt.
See Also
sion format and behavior.
System Variables DIMCEN controls the creation of center marks and
centerlines.
DIMREASSOCIATE
Associates selected dimensions to geometric objects
With DIMREASSOCIATE, a nonassociative dimension can be associated to geo-
metric objects, or the existing associations in an associative dimension can
be changed.
Dimension menu: Reassociate Dimensions
Command line: dimreassociate
Select dimensions to reassociate: Select dimension objects
Each selected dimension is highlighted in turn, and prompts for association

points appropriate for the selected dimension are displayed. A marker is
displayed for each association point prompt. If the definition point of the
current dimension is not associated to a geometric object, the marker appears
as an X; but if the definition point is associated, the marker appears as an X
inside a box.
Note The marker disappears if you pan or zoom with a wheel mouse.
Press ESC to terminate the command without losing the changes that were
already specified. Use UNDO to restore the previous state of the changed
dimensions.
The prompts for the different types of dimensions are
282 | DIMREASSOCIATE
Linear Specify first extension line origin or [Select object]
<next>: Specify an object snap location, enter s and select
a geometric object, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt
Specify second extension line origin <next>: Specify an

object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next
dimension object, if any
Aligned Specify first extension line origin or [Select object]

<next>: Specify an object snap location, enter s and select
a geometric object, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt
Specify second extension line origin <next>: Specify an

object snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next
dimension object, if any
Angular (Three Specify angle vertex or [Select arc or circle] <next>: Spec-
Point) ify an object snap location, enter s and select an arc or a
circle, or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt
Specify first angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object

snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next prompt
Specify second angle endpoint <next>: Specify an object

snap location or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension
object, if any
Angular (Two Select first line <next>: Select a line, or press ENTER to
Line) skip to the next prompt
Select second line <next>: Select another line, or press

ENTER to skip to the next dimension object, if any
Diameter Select arc or circle <next>: Select an arc or a circle, or press

Leader Specify leader association point <next>: Specify an object

snap location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension
object, if any
Ordinate Specify feature location <next>: Specify an object snap

location, or press ENTER to skip to the next dimension
object, if any
Radius Select arc or circle <next>: Select an arc or a circle, or press

DIMREASSOCIATE | 283
Note DIMREASSOCIATE does not change the setting of DIMLFAC in a dimension.
Use DIMOVERRIDE to clear dimension linear factors in legacy drawings.
See Also
See “Modify Dimension Geometry” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMREASSOCIATE associates selected dimensions to
geometric objects, DIMDISASSOCIATE removes the
associativity from selected dimensions.
System Variables DIMASSOC controlsthe associativity property of
DIMREGEN
Updates the locations of all associative dimensions
Command line: dimregen
The locations of all associative dimensions in the current drawing are

updated.
Associative dimensions need to be updated manually with DIMREGEN in
three cases:
■ After panning or zooming with a wheel mouse in a layout with model

space active, update associative dimensions created in paper space.
■ After opening a drawing that has been modified with a previous version
of AutoCAD, update associative dimensions if the dimensioned objects
have been modified.
■ After opening a drawing containing external references that are dimen-
sioned in the current drawing, update associative dimensions if the
associated external reference geometry has been modified.
See Also
See “Associative Dimensions” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMREGEN removes the associativity from selected
dimensions.
System Variables DIMASSOC controls the associativity property of
284 | DIMREGEN
DIMSTYLE
Creates and modifies dimension styles
A dimension style is a saved set of dimension settings that determines the
appearance of the dimension. By creating dimension styles, you can set all
relevant dimensioning system variables and control the layout and appear-
ance of any dimension.
Dimension styles can have multiple secondary styles with varying settings.
For example, within a dimension style, you can create a secondary style for
radius dimensions and another secondary style for angular dimensions.
AutoCAD uses the appropriate secondary style for the type of dimension you
create. If there are no differences in settings for a dimension type, the
primary dimension-style settings are used.
Styles toolbar:
Format menu: Dimension Style
Dimension menu: Style
Command line: dimstyle
The Dimension Style Manager is displayed.

If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, AutoCAD presents options
on the command line (see page 309).
Dimension Style Manager

Creates new styles, sets the current style, modifies styles, sets overrides on the
current style, and compares styles.
DIMSTYLE | 285
Current Dimstyle
Displays the current dimension style. AutoCAD assigns styles to all dimen-
sions. If you do not change the current style, AutoCAD assigns the default
STANDARD style to dimensions.
Styles
Displays all dimension styles in the drawing. The current style is highlighted.
The item selected in List controls the dimension styles displayed. To make a
style current, select it and choose Set Current.
Unless you select Don’t List Styles in Xrefs, AutoCAD displays dimension
styles in externally referenced drawings using the syntax for externally
referenced named objects. (See “Overview of External References” in the
User’s Guide.) While you cannot change, rename, or make current externally
referenced dimension styles, you can create new styles based on them.
Right-click in the Styles list to display a shortcut menu that you can use to
set the current style, rename styles, and delete styles. You cannot delete a
style that is current or in use in the current drawing.
286 | DIMSTYLE
List
Provides options that control which dimension styles are displayed.
All Styles Displays all dimension styles.
Styles in Use Displays only the dimension styles that are referenced
by dimensions in the drawing.
Don’t List Styles in Xrefs

Suppresses display of dimension styles in externally referenced drawings
under Styles.
Set Current
Sets the style selected under Styles to current.
New
Displays the Create New Dimension Style dialog box, in which you can
define new dimension styles. See “New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style Dialog Boxes” on page 288.
Modify
Displays the Modify Dimension Styles dialog box, in which you can modify
dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those in the New
Dimension Style dialog box. See “New, Modify, and Override Dimension
Style Dialog Boxes” on page 288.
Override
Displays the Override Current Style dialog box, in which you can set tempo-
rary overrides to dimension styles. Dialog box options are identical to those
in the New Dimension Style dialog box. See “New, Modify, and Override
Dimension Style Dialog Boxes” on page 288. AutoCAD displays overrides as
unsaved changes under the dimension in the Styles list.
Compare
Displays the Compare Dimension Styles dialog box (see page 308), which
compares the properties of two dimension styles or lists all the properties of
one style.
DIMSTYLE | 287
Create New Dimension Style Dialog Box
Names the new dimension style, sets the style on which to start the new one,
and indicates the dimension types to which you want the new style to apply.
New Style Name Names the new style.

Start With Sets a style to use as a basis for the new one. For the new
style, you change only the properties that differ from
the properties you start with.
Use For Creates a style that applies only to specific dimension
types. For example, suppose the text color for the
STANDARD style is black, but you want the text to be
blue only for diameter dimensions. Under Start With,
select STANDARD, and under Use For, select Diameter.
New Style Name becomes unavailable because you are
defining a substyle of STANDARD. After you change the
text color to blue in the New Dimension Style dialog
box, Diameter is displayed as a substyle under
STANDARD in the Dimension Style Manager. Whenever
you use the STANDARD style for diameter dimensions,
the text is blue. When you use STANDARD for all other
dimension types, the text is black.
Continue Displays the New Dimension Style dialog box, in which
you define the new style properties.
New, Modify, and Override Dimension Style

Dialog Boxes
Set properties for dimension styles. After you choose Continue in the Create
New Dimension Style dialog box, the New Dimension Style dialog box is
displayed. You define the properties for the new style in this dialog box. The
dialog box initially displays the properties of the dimension style that you
selected to start the new style in the Create New Dimension Style dialog box.
288 | DIMSTYLE
Choosing either Modify or Override in the Dimension Style Manager dis-
plays the Modify Dimension Style or the Override Dimension Style dialog
box. The content of these dialog boxes is identical to the New Dimension
Style dialog box, although you are modifying or overriding an existing
dimension style rather than creating a new one.
The sample image on each tab displays the effects of each option.
Lines and Arrows Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style

Dialog Boxes)
Sets the format and properties for dimension lines, extension lines, arrow-
heads, and center marks.
Dimension Lines
Sets the dimension line properties.
Color Sets the color for the dimension line. You can select
colors from the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors,
True Colors, and Color Book colors. If you click Select
Color (at the bottom of the Color list), the Select Color
dialog box is displayed (see page 169). You can also
enter the color name or number in the text box.
(DIMCLRD system variable)
DIMSTYLE | 289
Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the dimension line. (DIMLWD
system variable)
Extend Beyond Specifies a distance to extend the dimension line past
Ticks the extension line when you use oblique, architectural,
tick, integral, and no marks for arrowheads. (DIMDLE
system variable)
extension
Baseline Spacing Sets the spacing between the dimension lines of a

baseline dimension. Enter a distance. This value is
stored in the DIMDLI system variable. For information
about baseline dimensions, see DIMBASELINE.
Suppress Suppresses display of dimension lines. Dim Line 1
suppresses the first dimension line; Dim Line 2
spacing suppresses the second dimension line. (DIMSD1 and
DIMSD2 system variables)
1 2 1 2
first dimension line second dimension line

suppressed suppressed
Extension Lines
Controls the appearance of the extension lines.
Color Sets the color for the extension line. You can select
(DIMCLRE system variable.)
Lineweight Sets the lineweight of the extension line. (DIMLWE
system variable)
Extend Beyond Specifies a distance to extend the extension lines above
Dim Lines the dimension line. (DIMEXE system variable)
290 | DIMSTYLE
extension
Offset From Sets the distance to offset the extension lines from the
Origin points on the drawing that define the dimension.
(DIMEXO system variable)
offset
Suppress Suppresses the display of extension lines. Ext Line 1

suppresses the first extension line; Ext Line 2 suppresses
the second extension line. (DIMSE1 and DIMSE2 system
variables)
1 2 1 2
first extension line second extension line
suppressed suppressed
Arrowheads
Controls the appearance of the dimension arrowheads.
1st Sets the arrowhead for the first dimension line. When
you change the first arrowhead type, the second
arrowhead automatically changes to match it.
(DIMBLK1 system variable)
To specify a user-defined arrowhead block, select User
Arrow. The Select Custom Arrow Block dialog box is
displayed. Select the name of a user-defined arrowhead
block. (The block must be in the drawing.)
2nd Sets the arrowhead for the second dimension line.
(DIMBLK2 system variable)
DIMSTYLE | 291
Leader Sets the arrowhead for the leader line. (DIMLDRBLK
system variable)
Arrow Size Sets the size of arrowheads. (DIMASZ system variable)
Center Marks for Circles
Controls the appearance of center marks and centerlines for diameter and
radial dimensions. The DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and DIMRADIUS com-
mands use center marks and centerlines. For DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS,
AutoCAD draws the center mark only if you place the dimension line outside
the circle or arc.
Type Provides three center mark type options:
■ Mark: Creates a center mark. The size of the center

mark is stored as a positive value in the DIMCEN
system variable.
■ Line: Creates a centerline. The size of the centerline
is stored as a negative value in the DIMCEN system
variable.
■ None: Creates no center mark or centerline. The
value is stored as 0 in the DIMCEN system variable.
Size Sets the size of the center mark or centerline. (DIMCEN

system variable)
Text Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog

Boxes)
Sets the format, placement, and alignment of dimension text.
292 | DIMSTYLE
Text Appearance
Controls the dimension text format and size.
Text Style Displays and sets the current style for dimension text.
Select a style from the list. To create and modify styles
for dimension text, choose the [...] button next to the
list. (DIMTXSTY system variable)
Text Style Button Displays the Text Style dialog box (see page 998), in
which you can define or modify text styles.
Text Color Sets the color for the dimension text. You can select
(DIMCLRT system variable)
DIMSTYLE | 293
Text Height Sets the height of the current dimension text style. If a
fixed text height is set in the Text Style (that is, the text
style height is greater than 0), that height overrides the
text height set here. If you want to use the height set on
the Text tab, make sure the text height in the Text Style
is set to 0. (DIMTXT system variable)
Fraction Height Sets the scale of fractions relative to dimension text.
Scale This option is available only when Fractional is selected
as the Unit Format on the Primary Units tab. The value
entered here is multiplied by the text height to
determine the height of dimension fractions relative to
dimension text. (DIMTFAC system variable)
Draw Frame Draws a frame around dimension text. Selecting this
Around Text option changes the value stored in the DIMGAP system
variable to a negative value.
Text Placement
Controls the placement of dimension text.
Vertical Position Controls the vertical placement of dimension text in
relation to the dimension line. The vertical setting is
stored in the DIMTAD system variable. Vertical position
options include the following:
■ Centered: Centers the dimension text between the

two parts of the dimension line.
■ Above: Places the dimension text above the
dimension line. The distance from the dimension
line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the
current text gap. See “Offset from Dim Line” on page
296.
■ Outside: Places the dimension text on the side of the
dimension line farthest away from the first defining
point.
■ JIS: Places the dimension text to conform to a
Japanese Industrial Standards (JIS) representation.
294 | DIMSTYLE
Centered Above Outside JIS
Horizontal Controls the horizontal placement of dimension text in

Position relation to the dimension line and the extension lines.
The horizontal setting is stored in the DIMJUST system
variable. Horizontal position options include the
following:
■ Centered: Centers the dimension text along the

dimension line between the extension lines.
■ At Ext Line 1: Left-justifies the text with the first
extension line along the dimension line. The
distance between the extension line and the text is
twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See
“Arrowheads” on page 291 and “Offset from Dim
Line” on page 296.
■ At Ext Line 2: Right-justifies the text with the second
extension line along the dimension line. The
distance between the extension line and the text is
twice the arrowhead size plus the text gap value. See
“Arrowheads” on page 291 and “Offset from Dim
Line” on page 296.
1 2 1 2
centered first extension second extension
line line
■ Over Ext Line 1: Positions the text over or along the

first extension line.
■ Over Ext Line 2: Positions the text over or along the
second extension line.
DIMSTYLE | 295
1 2 1 2
text over first extension line text over second extension line
Offset from Dim Sets the current text gap, which is the distance around
Line the dimension text when the dimension line is broken
to accommodate the dimension text.
AutoCAD also uses this value as the minimum length
required for dimension line segments.
AutoCAD positions text inside the extension lines only
if the resulting segments are at least as long as the text
gap. Text above or below the dimension line is placed
inside only if the arrowheads, dimension text, and a
margin leave enough room for the text gap. (DIMGAP
system variable)
DIMGAP = 0 DIMGAP = 0.1
Text Alignment
Controls the orientation (horizontal or aligned) of dimension text whether
it is inside or outside the extension lines. (DIMTIH and DIMTOH system vari-
ables)
Horizontal Places text in a horizontal position.
Aligned With Aligns text with the dimension line.
Dimension Line
ISO Standard Aligns text with the dimension line when text is inside
the extension lines, but aligns it horizontally when text
is outside the extension lines.
Fit Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog Boxes)
Controls the placement of dimension text, arrowheads, leader lines, and the
dimension line.
296 | DIMSTYLE
Fit Options
Controls the placement of text and arrowheads based on the space available
between the extension lines.
When space is available, AutoCAD places text and arrowheads between the
extension lines. Otherwise, text and arrowheads are placed according to the
Fit options. (DIMATFIT, DIMTIX, and DIMSOXD system variables)
Either the Text Places text and arrowheads as follows:
or the Arrows,
Whichever Fits ■ When enough space is available for text and
Best arrowheads, places both between the extension
lines. Otherwise, AutoCAD moves either the text or
the arrowheads based on the best fit.
■ When enough space is available for text only, places
text between the extension lines and places
arrowheads outside the extension lines.
■ When enough space is available for arrowheads only,
places them between the extension lines and places
text outside the extension lines.
■ When space is available for neither text nor
arrowheads, places them both outside the extension
lines.
DIMSTYLE | 297
Arrows Places text and arrowheads as follows:
■ When enough space is available for text and

arrowheads, places both between the extension
lines.
■ When space is available for arrowheads only, places
them between the extension lines and places text
outside them.
■ When not enough space is available for arrowheads,
places both text and arrowheads outside the
extension lines.
Text Places text and arrowheads as follows:
■ When space is available for text and arrowheads,

places both between the extension lines.
■ When space is available for text only, places the text
between the extension lines and places arrowheads
outside them.
■ When not enough space is available for text, places
both text and arrowheads outside the extension
lines.
Both Text and When not enough space is available for text and
Arrows arrowheads, places both outside the extension lines.
Always Keep Text Always places text between extension lines. This value
Between Ext is stored in the DIMTIX system variable.
Lines
Suppress Arrows Suppresses arrowheads if not enough space is available
If They Don’t Fit inside the extension lines. DIMSOXD system variable)
Inside Extension
Lines
Text Placement
Sets the placement of dimension text when it is moved from the default posi-
tion, that is, the position defined by the dimension style. (DIMTMOVE system
variable)
Beside the Places dimension text beside the dimension line.
Dimension Line
Over the If text is moved away from the dimension line, creates
Dimension Line, a leader connecting the text to the dimension line.
with a Leader AutoCAD omits the leader when text is too close to the
dimension line.
298 | DIMSTYLE
Over the Keeps the dimension line in the same place when text
Dimension Line, is moved. Text that is moved away from the dimension
Without a Leader line is not connected to the dimension line with a
leader.
Scale for Dimension Features
Sets the overall dimension scale value or the paper space scaling.
Use Overall Scale Sets a scale for all dimension style settings that specify
Of size, distance, or spacing, including text and arrowhead
sizes. This scale does not change dimension
measurement values. This value is stored in the
DIMSCALE system variable.
Scale Dimension Determines a scale factor based on the scaling between

to Layout (Paper the current model space viewport and paper space. This
Space) value is stored as 0 in the DIMSCALE system variable.
When you work in paper space, but not in a model
space viewport, or when TILEMODE is set to 1, AutoCAD
uses the default scale factor of 1.0 for the DIMSCALE
system variable.
Fine Tuning
Sets additional fit options.
Place Text Ignores any horizontal justification settings and places
Manually When the text at the position you specify at the Dimension
Dimensioning Line Location prompt. This value is stored in the
DIMUPT system variable.
Always Draw Dim Draws dimension lines between the measured points
Line Between Ext even when AutoCAD places the arrowheads outside the
Lines measured points. This value is stored in the DIMTOFL
system variable.
Primary Units Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style

Dialog Boxes)
Sets the format and precision of primary dimension units and sets prefixes
and suffixes for dimension text.
DIMSTYLE | 299
Linear Dimensions
Sets the format and precision for linear dimensions.
Unit Format Sets the current units format for all dimension types
except Angular. This value is stored in the DIMLUNIT
system variable.
The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are
based on the DIMTFAC system variable (in the same way
that tolerance values use this system variable).
Precision Sets the number of decimal places in the dimension
text. This value is stored in the DIMDEC system variable.
Fraction Format Sets the format for fractions. This value is stored in the
DIMFRAC system variable.
Decimal Sets the separator for decimal formats. This value is

Separator stored in the DIMDSEP system variable.
Round Off Sets rounding rules for dimension measurements for all
dimension types except Angular.
If you enter a value of 0.25, all distances are rounded to
the nearest 0.25 unit. Similarly, if you enter a value of
1.0, AutoCAD rounds all dimension distances to the
300 | DIMSTYLE
nearest integer. This value is stored in the DIMRND
system variable.
The number of digits displayed after the decimal point
depends on the Precision setting.
Prefix Indicates a prefix for the dimension text. You can enter
text or use control codes to display special symbols (see
“Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027).
For example, entering the control code %%c displays
the diameter symbol. When you enter a prefix, it
overrides any default prefixes such as those used in
diameter (∅) and radius (R) dimensioning. This value is
stored in the DIMPOST system variable.
If you specify tolerances, AutoCAD adds the prefix to
the tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Suffix Indicates a suffix for the dimension text. You can enter
text or use control codes to display special symbols (see
“Control Codes and Special Characters” on page 1027).
For example, entering the text mm results in dimension
text similar to that shown in the illustration. When you
enter a suffix, it overrides any default suffixes. This
value is stored in DIMPOST.
If you specify tolerances, AutoCAD adds the suffix to
the tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Measurement Defines measurement scale options as follows:
Scale
■ Scale Factor: Sets a scale factor for linear dimension
measurements. AutoCAD multiplies the dimension
measurement by the value entered here. For
example, if you enter 2, AutoCAD displays a one-
inch dimension as two inches. The value does not
apply to angular dimensions and is not applied to
rounding values or to plus or minus tolerance
values. This value is stored in the DIMLFAC system
variable.
■ Apply to Layout Dimensions Only: Applies the linear
scale value only to dimensions created in layouts.
This sets the length scale factor to reflect the zoom
scale factor for objects in a model space viewport.
When you select this option, the length scaling
value is stored as a negative value in the DIMLFAC
system variable.
DIMSTYLE | 301
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros,
and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. Zero
suppression settings also affect real-to-string
conversions performed by the AutoLISP® rtos and
angtos functions. AutoCAD stores this value in the
DIMZIN system variable.
■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal

dimensions. For example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
■ Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal
dimensions. For example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5,
and 30.0000 becomes 30.
■ 0 Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-
inches dimension when the distance is less than one
foot. For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
■ 0 Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-
inches dimension when the distance is an integral
number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Angular Dimensions
Sets the current angle format for angular dimensions.
Units Format Sets the angular units format. This value is stored in the
DIMAUNIT system variable.
Precision Sets the number of decimal places for angular

dimensions. This value is stored in the DIMADEC system
variable.
Zero Suppression Suppresses leading and trailing zeros. This value is
stored in DIMAZIN.
■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in angular decimal

■ Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in angular decimal
Alternate Units Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style

Dialog Boxes)
Specifies display of alternate units in dimension measurements and sets their
format and precision.
302 | DIMSTYLE
Display Alternate Units
Adds alternate measurement units to dimension text. AutoCAD sets the
DIMALT system variable to 1.
Alternate Units
Sets the current alternate units format for all dimension types except
Angular.
Unit Format Sets the alternate units format. This value is stored in
the DIMALTU system variable.
The relative sizes of numbers in stacked fractions are
based on DIMTFAC (in the same way that tolerance
values use this system variable).
Precision Sets the number of decimal places in the alternate units.
This value is stored in the DIMALTD system variable.
Multiplier for Specifies a multiplier to use as the conversion factor
Alternate Units between primary and alternate units. To determine the
value of alternate units, AutoCAD multiplies all linear
distances (measured by dimensions and coordinates) by
the current linear scale value.
DIMSTYLE | 303
The length scaling value changes the generated
measurement value. The value has no effect on angular
dimensions, and AutoCAD does not apply it to the
rounding value or the plus or minus tolerance values.
This value is stored in the DIMALTF system variable.
Round Distances Sets rounding rules for alternate units for all dimension
To types except Angular.
If you enter a value of 0.25, all alternate measurements
are rounded to the nearest 0.25 unit. Similarly, if you
enter a value of 1.0, AutoCAD rounds all dimension
measurements to the nearest integer.
The number of digits displayed after the decimal point
depends on the Precision setting. The alternate
rounding value is stored in the DIMALTRND system
variable.
Prefix Indicates a prefix for the alternate dimension text. You
can enter text or use control codes to display special
symbols (see “Control Codes and Special Characters”
on page 1027). For example, entering the control code
%%c displays the diameter symbol. This value is stored
in the DIMAPOST system variable.
Suffix Includes the suffix in the alternate dimension text. You
can enter text or use control codes to display special
symbols (see “Control Codes and Special Characters”
on page 1027). For example, entering the text cm
results in dimension text similar to that shown in the
illustration. When you enter a suffix, it overrides any
default suffixes. This value is stored in the DIMAPOST
system variable.
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches
that have a value of zero. This value is stored in the DIMALTZ system variable.
Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For
example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For
example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes
30.
304 | DIMSTYLE
0 Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For
example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
0 Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is an integral number of
feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Placement
Controls the placement of alternate units. These values are stored in the
DIMAPOST system variable.
After Primary Places alternate units after the primary units.

Units
Below Primary Places alternate units below the primary units.
Units
Tolerances Tab (New, Modify, Override Dimension Style Dialog

Boxes)
Controls the display and format of dimension text tolerances.
DIMSTYLE | 305
Tolerance Format
Controls the tolerance format.
Method Sets the method for calculating the tolerance.
■ None: Does not add a tolerance. The DIMTOL system

variable is set to 0.
■ Symmetrical: Adds a plus/minus expression of
tolerance in which AutoCAD applies a single value
of variation to the dimension measurement. A ±
appears after the dimension. Enter the tolerance
value in Upper Value. The DIMTOL system variable is
set to 1. The DIMLIM system variable is set to 0.
■ Deviation: Adds a plus/minus tolerance expression.
AutoCAD applies different plus and minus values of
variation to the dimension measurement. A plus
sign (+) precedes the tolerance value entered in
Upper Value, and a minus sign (–) precedes the
tolerance value entered in Lower Value. The DIMTOL
system variable is set to 1. The DIMLIM system
variable is set to 0.
■ Limits: Creates a limit dimension in which AutoCAD
displays a maximum and a minimum value, one
over the other. The maximum value is the
dimension value plus the value entered in Upper
Value. The minimum value is the dimension value
minus the value entered in Lower Value. The
DIMTOL system variable is set to 0. The DIMLIM
system variable is set to 1.
■ Basic: Creates a basic dimension in which AutoCAD
draws a box around the full extents of the
dimension. The distance between the text and the
box is stored as a negative value in the DIMGAP
system variable.
Precision Sets the number of decimal places. This value is stored

in the DIMTDEC system variable.
Upper Value Sets the maximum or upper tolerance value. When you
select Symmetrical in Method, AutoCAD uses this value
for the tolerance. This value is stored in the DIMTP
system variable.
Lower Value Sets the minimum or lower tolerance value. This value
is stored in the DIMTM system variable.
306 | DIMSTYLE
Scaling for Height Sets the current height for the tolerance text. The ratio
of the tolerance height to the main dimension text
height is calculated and stored in the DIMTFAC system
variable.
Vertical Position Controls text justification for symmetrical and
deviation tolerances.
■ Top: Aligns the tolerance text with the top of the

main dimension text. When you select this option,
the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 2.
■ Middle: Aligns the tolerance text with the middle of
the main dimension text. When you select this
option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 1.
■ Bottom: Aligns the tolerance text with the bottom of
the main dimension text. When you select this
option, the DIMTOLJ system variable is set to 0.
Zero Suppression
Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros, and of feet and inches
that have a value of zero. Zero suppression settings also affect real-to-string
conversions performed by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions. This
value is stored in the DIMTZIN system variable.
Leading Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal dimensions. For
example, 0.5000 becomes .5000.
Trailing Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal dimensions. For
example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5, and 30.0000 becomes
30.
Feet Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is less than one foot. For
example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
Inches Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is an integral number of
feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Alternate Unit Tolerance
Sets the precision and zero suppression rules for alternate tolerance units.
Precision Sets the number of decimal places. This value is stored
in the DIMALTTD system variable.
DIMSTYLE | 307
Zero Suppression Controls the suppression of leading and trailing zeros,
and of feet and inches that have a value of zero. This
value is stored in the DIMALTTZ system variable.
■ Leading: Suppresses leading zeros in all decimal

■ Trailing: Suppresses trailing zeros in all decimal
■ Feet: Suppresses the feet portion of a feet-and-inches
dimension when the distance is less than one foot.
For example, 0'-6 1/2" becomes 6 1/2".
■ Inches: Suppresses the inches portion of a feet-and-
inches dimension when the distance is an integral
number of feet. For example, 1'-0" becomes 1'.
Compare Dimension Styles Dialog Box

Compares the properties of two dimension styles or displays all properties of
one style. You can print the results of the comparison to the Clipboard, and
then paste to other Windows applications.
Print to Clipboard
button
Compare Sets the first dimension style to compare.
308 | DIMSTYLE
With Sets the second dimension style to compare. If you set
With to <none> or to the same style as Compare,
AutoCAD displays all properties for the style.
Comparison results display automatically under the
following headings:
■ Description of the dimension style property

■ System variable that controls the property
■ System variable values of style properties that differ
for each dimension style.
Print to Clipboard Prints results of the style comparison to the Windows

button Clipboard. You can then paste the results to other
Windows applications, such as word processors and
spreadsheets.
DIMSTYLE Command Line

If you enter -dimstyle at the Command prompt, DIMSTYLE displays prompts
on the command line:
Current dimension style: <current>
Enter a dimension style option
[Save/Restore/STatus/Variables/Apply/?] <Restore>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Save
Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a dimension
style.
Enter name for new dimension style or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Name
Saves the current settings of dimensioning system variables to a new dimen-
sion style using the name you enter. The new dimension style becomes the
current one.
If you enter the name of an existing dimension style, AutoCAD prompts:
That name is already in use, redefine it? <N>: Enter y or press ENTER
If you enter y, AutoCAD regenerates associative dimensions that use the

redefined dimension style.
DIMSTYLE | 309
To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to
save and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the
Enter Name for New Dimension Style prompt. AutoCAD displays only set-
tings that differ, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting
of the compared style in the second column. After displaying the differences,
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
?—List Dimension Styles
Lists the named dimension styles in the current drawing.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name, a partial name with wild-card
characters, or press ENTER to list all dimension styles
After listing the named dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous
prompt.
Restore
Restores dimensioning system variable settings to those of a selected dimen-
sion style.
Enter dimension style name, [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name, enter ?, or
press ENTER to select a dimension
Name
Makes the dimension style you enter the current dimension style.
To display the differences between the dimension style name you want to
restore and the current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at
the Enter Dimension Style Name prompt. AutoCAD displays only settings
that differ, with the current setting in the first column, and the setting of the
compared style in the second column. After displaying the differences,
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
After listing the dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
Select Dimension
Makes the dimension style of the selected object the current dimension style.
Select dimension:
310 | DIMSTYLE
Status
Displays the current values of all dimension system variables. After listing the
variables, DIMSTYLE ends.
Variables
Lists the dimension system variable settings of a dimension style or selected
dimensions without modifying the current settings.
Enter a dimension style name, [?] or <select dimension>: Enter a name, enter ?,
or press ENTER to select dimensions
Name
Lists the settings of dimension system variables for the dimension style name
you enter. After listing the variables, DIMSTYLE ends.
To display the differences between a particular dimension style and the
current style, enter a tilde (~) followed by the style name at the Enter Dimen-
sion Style Name prompt. AutoCAD displays only settings that differ, with the
current setting in the first column, and the setting of the compared style in
the second column. After displaying the differences, AutoCAD returns to the
previous prompt.
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
After listing the dimension styles, AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt.
Select Dimension
Lists the dimension style and any dimension overrides for the dimension
object you select.
Select dimension:
Apply
Applies the current dimensioning system variable settings to selected dimen-
sion objects, permanently overriding any existing dimension styles applied
to these objects.
Select objects: Use an object selection method to select a dimension object
AutoCAD does not update the dimension line spacing between existing base-
line dimensions (see the DIMDLI system variable), nor do dimension text
variable settings update existing leader text.
DIMSTYLE | 311
Enter dimension style(s) to list <*>: Enter a name, a partial name with wild-card
characters, or press ENTER
See Also
See “Apply a New Dimension Style to Existing Dimensions” in the User’s
Guide.
System Variables DIMSTYLE stores the name of the current dimension
style. You must use the SETVAR command to access DIM-
STYLE.
DIMTEDIT
Moves and rotates dimension text
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Align Text
Command line: dimtedit
Select dimension: Select a dimension object
AutoCAD prompts you for the new location of the dimension text.
Specify new location for dimension text or [Left/Right/Center/Home/Angle]:
Specify a point or enter an option
dimension text with left dimension text dimension text

and right justification positioned by cursor positioned by angle
Location for Updates the location of the dimension text

Dimension Text dynamically as you drag it. To determine whether text
appears above, below, or in the middle of the
dimension line, use the Text tab in the New, Modify,
and Override Dimension Style dialog box.
312 | DIMTEDIT
Left Left-justifies the dimension text along the dimension
line. This option works only with linear, radial, and
diameter dimensions.
before Left after Left
Right Right-justifies the dimension text along the dimension

line. This option works only with linear, radial, and
diameter dimensions.
before Right after Right
Center Centers the dimension text on the dimension line.

Home Moves dimension text back to its default position.
before Home after Home

Enter text angle:
before Angle after Angle 90°
The center point of the text does not change. If the text
moves or the dimension is regenerated, AutoCAD keeps
the orientation set by the text angle. Entering an angle
of 0 degrees puts the text in its default orientation.
See Also
See “Modify Dimension Text” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles, which control
dimension format and behavior.
System Variables DIMSHO controls redefinition of dimensions while
dragging.
DIMTEDIT | 313
DIST
Measures the distance and angle between two points
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Distance
Command line: dist (or 'dist for transparent use)
Specify first point: Specify a point

Specify second point: Specify a point
Distance = calculated distance, Angle in XY plane = angle,
Angle from XY plane = angle
Delta X = change in X, Delta Y = change in Y, Delta Z = change in Z
AutoCAD reports the true 3D distance between points. The angle in the XY
plane is relative to the current X axis. The angle from the XY plane is relative
to the current XY plane. DIST assumes the current elevation for the first or
second point if you omit the Z coordinate value.
AutoCAD displays the distance using the current units format.
delta Z
angle from
XY plane
angle in
XY plane
delta X delta Y
See Also
See “Obtain Distances, Angles, and Point Locations” in the User’s Guide.
Commands UNITS sets drawing units.
System Variables DISTANCE stores the last distance measured by the DIST
command.
DIVIDE
Places evenly spaced point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of an object
DIVIDE marks off a specified number of equal lengths on a selected object by
placing point objects or blocks along the length or perimeter of the object.
Objects that you can divide include arcs, circles, ellipses and elliptical arcs,
polylines, and splines.
314 | DIST
Draw menu: Point ➤ Divide
Command line: divide
Select object to divide: Use an object selection method

Enter number of segments or [Block]: Enter a value from 2 through 32,767, or
enter b
Number of Segments
Places point objects at equal intervals along the selected objects.
The illustration shows a polyline divided into five parts. Point Display mode
(PDMODE) has been set such that the points can be seen.
select polyline divided into five parts
Block
Places blocks at equal intervals along the selected object.
Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block currently defined in the
drawing
Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
Yes Specifies that the X axes of the inserted blocks be

tangent to, or collinear with, the divided object at the
dividing points.
No Aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation.
Enter number of segments: Enter a value from 2 through 32,767
The illustration shows an arc divided into five equal parts using a block con-
sisting of a vertically oriented ellipse.
block not aligned block aligned
DIVIDE | 315
See Also
See “Divide an Object into Equal Segments” in the User’s Guide.
Commands POINT creates a point object.
System Variables PDMODE and PDSIZE values control the appearance of

point objects.
DONUT
Draws filled circles and rings
inside A donut is constructed of a closed polyline composed of wide arc segments.
diameter How AutoCAD fills the interior of a donut depends on the current setting of
the FILL command.
Draw menu: Donut
Command line: donut
outside
diameter Specify inside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
If you specify an inside diameter of 0, the donut is a filled circle.

1 2
Specify outside diameter of donut <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Specify center of donut or <exit>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER to end the
command
AutoCAD sets the location of the donut based on the center point. After you
specify the diameters, AutoCAD prompts you for the locations at which to
draw donuts. AutoCAD draws a donut at each point specified (2).
See Also
See “Draw Donuts” in the User’s Guide.
Commands FILL controls the filling of traces, solids, and wide
polylines.
System Variables FILLMODE stores the FILL command setting.
DRAGMODE
Controls the way AutoCAD displays dragged objects
You can draw new objects dynamically and drag them into position on the
screen. You can also drag existing objects with many editing commands.
With some computer configurations, dragging can be time consuming. Use
DRAGMODE to suppress dragging.
316 | DONUT
Command line: dragmode (or 'dragmode for transparent use)
Enter new value [ON/OFF/Auto] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
On Permits dragging, but you must enter drag where

DRAGMODE on appropriate in a drawing or editing command to
initiate dragging.
Off Ignores all dragging requests, including those
embedded in menu items.
Auto Turns on dragging for every command that supports it.
Dragging is performed whenever it is possible. Entering
DRAGMODE off drag each time is not necessary.
See Also
System Variables DRAGMODE stores the current Drag mode setting. You
must use the SETVAR command to access the
DRAGMODE system variable.
DRAWORDER
Changes the display order of images and other objects
DRAWORDER changes the drawing and plotting order of any object in the
AutoCAD drawing database. In addition to moving objects to the “front” or
“back” of the sort order, you can order objects relative to another object (that
is, above or below a selected object).
Modify II toolbar:
Tools menu: Display Order
Command line: draworder

Enter object ordering option [Above object/Under object/Front/Back] <Back>:
Above Object Moves the selected object above a specified reference

object.
Select reference object: Use an object selection method
Under Object Moves the selected object below a specified reference

object.
Select reference object: Use an object selection method
DRAWORDER | 317
Front Moves the selected object to the top of the order of
objects in the drawing.
Back Moves the selected object to the bottom of the order of
objects in the drawing.
When you select multiple objects for reordering, AutoCAD maintains the
relative display order of the objects selected. The selection method has no
impact on drawing order.
The command terminates once you reorder an object. The command does
not continue to prompt for additional objects to reorder.
Note DRAWORDER automatically turns on all Object Sort Method options on

the User Preferences tab in the Options dialog box. This can result in slower
regeneration and redrawing times. See SORTENTS.
See Also
See “Control the Display Order of Overlapping Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands OPTIONS sets object selection modes.
System Variables SORTENTS controls object sort order operations.
DSETTINGS
Specifies settings for Snap mode, grid, and polar and object snap tracking
DSETTINGS specifies the settings for a number of drafting aids to help you
draw more quickly and precisely. Settings include Snap mode, the grid, object
snaps, and polar and object snap tracking.
Tools menu: Drafting Settings
Shortcut menu: Right-click Snap, Grid, Polar, Osnap, or Otrack on the status
bar and choose Settings.
Command line: dsettings (or 'dsettings for transparent use)
The Drafting Settings dialog box is displayed.
Drafting Settings Dialog Box

Specifies drafting settings organized for drawing aids in three categories:
Snap and Grid, Polar Tracking, and Object Snap.
318 | DSETTINGS
Snap and Grid Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)
Specifies Snap and Grid settings.
Snap On
Turns Snap mode on or off. You can also turn Snap mode on or off by clicking
Snap on the status bar, by pressing F9 , or by using the SNAPMODE system
variable.
Snap
Controls an invisible grid that restricts cursor movement to specified
intervals.
Snap X Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the X direction. The value
must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system
variable)
Snap Y Spacing Specifies the snap spacing in the Y direction. The value
must be a positive real number. (SNAPUNIT system
variable)
Angle Rotates the snap grid by the angle specified. (SNAPANG
system variable)
X Base Specifies an X base coordinate point for the grid.
(SNAPBASE system variable)
DSETTINGS | 319
Y Base Specifies a Y base coordinate point for the grid.
(SNAPBASE system variable)
Polar Spacing
Controls the PolarSnap™ increment distance.
Polar Distance Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is
selected under Snap Type & Style. If this value is 0, the
PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X
Spacing. The Polar Distance setting is used in
conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap
tracking. If neither tracking feature is enabled, the Polar
Distance setting has no effect. (POLARDIST system
variable)
Grid On
Turns the grid dots on or off. You can also turn grid dots mode on or off by
clicking Grid on the status bar, by pressing F7 , or by using the GRIDMODE
system variable.
Grid
Controls the display of a dot grid that helps you visualize distances.
Note The limits of the dot grid are controlled by the LIMITS command.
Grid X Spacing Specifies the dot spacing in the X direction. If this value
is 0, the grid assumes the value set for Snap X Spacing.
(GRIDUNIT system variable)
Grid Y Spacing Specifies the dot spacing in the Y direction. If this value
is 0, the grid assumes the value set for Snap Y Spacing.
(GRIDUNIT system variable)
Snap Type & Style
Controls Snap mode settings.
Grid Snap Sets the snap type to Grid. (SNAPTYPE system variable)
■ Rectangular Snap: Sets the snap style to standard

Rectangular snap mode. When the snap type is set to
Grid snap and Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to
a rectangular snap grid. (SNAPSTYL system variable)
■ Isometric Snap: Sets the snap style to Isometric snap
mode. When the snap type is set to Grid snap and
Snap mode is on, the cursor snaps to an isometric
snap grid. (SNAPSTYL system variable)
320 | DSETTINGS
PolarSnap Sets the snap increment distance when PolarSnap is
selected under Snap Type & Style. If this value is 0, the
PolarSnap distance assumes the value for Snap X
Spacing. This value is also controlled by the POLARDIST
system variable. The Polar Distance setting is used in
conjunction with polar tracking and/or object snap
tracking. If neither tracking feature is enabled, the Polar
Distance setting has no effect.
Polar Tracking Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)

Controls the AutoTrack settings.
Polar Tracking On
Turns polar tracking on and off. You can also turn polar tracking on or off by
pressing F10 or by using the AUTOSNAP system variable.
Polar Angle Settings
Sets the angles used with polar tracking.
Increment Angle Sets the polar increment angle used to display polar
tracking alignment paths. You can enter any angle, or
select a common angle of 90, 45, 30, 22.5, 18, 15, 10,
and 5 degrees from the list. (POLARANG system variable)
DSETTINGS | 321
Additional Angles Makes any additional angles in the list available for
polar tracking. The Additional Angles check box is also
controlled by the POLARMODE system variable, and the
list of additional angles is also controlled by the
POLARADDANG system variable.
Note Additional angles are absolute, not incremental.

New Adds up to 10 additional polar tracking alignment
angles.
Note Before adding fractional angles, you must set the
AUPREC system variable to the appropriate decimal
precision to avoid undesired rounding. For example, if the
value of AUPREC is 0 (the default value), all fractional angles
you enter are rounded to the nearest whole number.
Delete Deletes selected additional angles.
Object Snap Tracking Settings
Sets options for object snap tracking.
Track Displays only orthogonal (horizontal/vertical) object
Orthogonally snap tracking paths for acquired object snap points
Only when object snap tracking is on. This setting is also
controlled by the POLARMODE system variable.
Track Using All Permits the cursor to track along any polar angle
Polar Angle tracking path for acquired osnap points when object
Settings snap tracking is on while specifying points. This setting
is also controlled by the POLARMODE system variable.
Note Clicking Polar and Otrack on the status bar also turns polar tracking and
object snap tracking on and off.
Polar Angle Measurement

Sets the basis by which polar tracking alignment angles are measured.
Absolute Bases polar tracking angles on the current user
coordinate system (UCS).
Relative to Last Bases polar tracking angles on the last segment drawn.
Segment
322 | DSETTINGS
Object Snap Tab (Drafting Settings Dialog Box)
Controls running object snap settings. With running object snap settings,
also called Osnap, you can specify a snap point at an exact location on an
object. When more than one option is selected, AutoCAD applies the
selected snap modes to return a point closest to the center of the aperture
box. Press TAB to cycle through the options.
Object Snap On
Turns running object snaps on and off. The object snaps selected under
Object Snap Modes are active while object snap is on. (OSMODE system
variable)
Object Snap Tracking On
Turns object snap tracking on and off. With object snap tracking, the cursor
can track along alignment paths based on other object snap points when
specifying points in a command. To use object snap tracking, you must turn
on one or more object snaps. (AUTOSNAP system variable)
Object Snap Modes
Specifies the running object snap modes. Select one or more options.
Endpoint Snaps to the closest endpoint of an arc, elliptical arc,
line, multiline, polyline segment, spline, region, or ray,
or to the closest corner of a trace, solid, or 3D face.
DSETTINGS | 323
selection point
snap point
Midpoint Snaps to the midpoint of an arc, ellipse, elliptical arc,

line, multiline, polyline segment, region, solid, spline,
or xline.
selection point
snap point
Center Snaps to the center of an arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical

arc.
selection point
snap point
Node Snaps to a point object, dimension definition point, or

dimension text origin.
Quadrant Snaps to a quadrant point of an arc, circle, ellipse, or

elliptical arc.
snap point
selection point
Intersection Snaps to the intersection of an arc, circle, ellipse,

elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region,
spline, or xline.
Extended Intersection snaps to the potential
intersection of two objects that would intersect if the
objects were extended along their natural paths.
324 | DSETTINGS
AutoCAD automatically turns on Extended Intersection
when you select the Intersection object snap mode.
Intersection and Extended Intersection work with edges
of regions and curves, but not with edges or corners of
3D solids.
selection point
snap point
Note You might get varying results if you have both the
Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object
snaps turned on at the same time.
Extension Causes a temporary extension line to display when you
pass the cursor over the endpoint of objects, so you can
draw objects to and from points on the extension line.
Insertion Snaps to the insertion point of an attribute, a block, a
shape, or text.
selection point
snap point
Perpendicular Snaps to a point perpendicular to an arc, circle, ellipse,

elliptical arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, region,
solid, spline, or xline. AutoCAD automatically turns on
Deferred Perpendicular snap mode when the object
you are drawing requires that you complete more than
one perpendicular snap. You can use a line, arc, circle,
polyline, ray, xline, multiline, or 3D solid edge as an
object from which to draw a perpendicular line. You can
use Deferred Perpendicular to draw perpendicular lines
between such objects. When the aperture box passes
over a Deferred Perpendicular snap point, AutoCAD
displays an AutoSnap™ tooltip and marker.
selection point
snap point
DSETTINGS | 325
Tangent Snaps to the tangent of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical
arc, or spline. AutoCAD automatically turns on
Deferred Tangent snap mode when the object you are
drawing requires that you complete more than one
tangent snap. For example, you can use Deferred
Tangent to draw a line that is tangent to two arcs,
polyline arcs, or circles. When the aperture box passes
over a Deferred Tangent snap point, AutoCAD displays
a marker and an AutoSnap tooltip.
selection point snap point
Note When you use the From option in conjunction with

the Tangent snap mode to draw objects other than lines
from arcs or circles, the first point drawn is tangent to the
arc or circle in relation to the last point selected in the
drawing area.
Nearest Snaps to the nearest point on an arc, circle, ellipse,
elliptical arc, line, multiline, point, polyline, ray, spline,
or xline.
Apparent Apparent Intersection includes two separate snap
Intersection modes: Apparent Intersection and Extended Apparent
Intersection. You can also locate Intersection and
Extended Intersection snap points while running
Apparent Intersection object snap mode is on.
Apparent Intersection snaps to the apparent

intersection of two objects (arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical
arc, line, multiline, polyline, ray, spline, or xline) that
do not intersect in 3D space but may appear to intersect
in the current view. Extended Apparent Intersection
snaps to the imaginary intersection of two objects that
would intersect if the objects were extended along their
326 | DSETTINGS
natural paths. Apparent and Extended Apparent
Intersection work with edges of regions and curves but
not with edges or corners of 3D solids.
Note You might get varying results if you have both the
Intersection and Apparent Intersection running object
snaps turned on at the same time.
Parallel Draws a vector parallel to another object whenever
AutoCAD prompts you for the second point of a
vector. After specifying the first point of a vector, if
you move the cursor over a straight line segment of
another object, AutoCAD acquires the point. When the
path of the object you create is parallel to the line
segment, AutoCAD displays an alignment path, which
you can use to create the parallel object.
Select All Turns on all object snap modes.
Clear All Turns off all object snap modes.
Options
Displays the Drafting tab in the Options dialog box (see page 633). You
cannot access the Options dialog box from the Drafting Settings dialog box
if you are running DSETTINGS transparently.
See Also
For more information, see “Restrict Cursor Movement” and “Snap to Loca-
tions on Objects (Object Snaps)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ISOPLANE selects the current isometric plane. ORTHO
constrains cursor movement to the horizontal or
vertical directions. SNAP restricts cursor movement to
specific intervals.
System Variables APBOX turns the AutoSnap aperture box on or off.
AUTOSNAP controls the display of the AutoSnap marker
and Snaptip, and turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off.
OSMODE sets object snap modes using bitcodes.
DSETTINGS | 327
DSVIEWER
Opens the Aerial View window
The Aerial View window is a navigation tool. It displays a view of the entire
drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly locate and move to a
specific area. With the Aerial View window open, you can zoom and pan
without choosing a menu option or entering a command.
In paper space, the Aerial View window shows only paper space objects,
including viewport borders. Real-time updating of the AutoCAD window
from the Aerial View window is not available in paper space.
View menu: Aerial View
Command line: dsviewer
The Aerial View window is displayed.
Aerial View Window

Displays the entire drawing; AutoCAD marks the current view with a wide
outline box.
Zoom In Global
Zoom Out
View box
View Menu (Aerial View Window)

Changes the magnification of the Aerial View by zooming in and out of the
drawing or by displaying the entire drawing in the Aerial View window.
328 | DSVIEWER
When the entire drawing is displayed in the Aerial View window, the Zoom
Out menu option and button are unavailable. When the current view nearly
fills the Aerial View window, the Zoom In menu option and button are
unavailable. If both of these conditions exist at the same time, such as after
using ZOOM Extents, both options are unavailable. All of the menu options
are also available from a shortcut menu you can access by right-clicking in
the Aerial View window.
Zoom In Increases the magnification of the drawing in the Aerial
View window by zooming in by a factor of 2, centered
on the current view box.
Zoom Out Decreases the magnification of the drawing in the

Aerial View window by zooming out by a factor of 2,
centered on the current view box.
Global Displays the entire drawing and the current view in the
Aerial View window.
DSVIEWER | 329
Options Menu (Aerial View Window)
Provides toggles for automatic viewport display and dynamic updating of the
drawing. All of the menu options are also available from a shortcut menu you
can access by right-clicking in the Aerial View window.
Auto Viewport Displays the model space view of the current viewport
automatically when multiple viewports are displayed.
When Auto Viewport is off, AutoCAD does not update
the Aerial View window to match the current viewport.
Dynamic Update Updates the Aerial View window while you edit the
drawing. When Dynamic Update is off, AutoCAD does
not update the Aerial View window until you click in
the Aerial View window.
Realtime Zoom Updates the drawing area in real time when you zoom
using the Aerial View window.
See Also
See “Pan and Zoom with the Aerial View Window” in the User’s Guide.
330 | DSVIEWER
DVIEW
Defines parallel projection or perspective views
To help you view a model from any point in space, DVIEW uses a camera-tar-
get metaphor. The line of sight, or viewing direction, is the line between the
camera and the target.
DVIEW uses objects you select or a special block named DVIEWBLOCK to dis-
play a preview image. The preview image shows the changes you make in the
view. When you end the command, AutoCAD regenerates the drawing based
on the view you set.
Transparent ZOOM, DSVIEWER, PAN, and scroll bars are not available in
DVIEW. When you define a perspective view, ZOOM, PAN, transparent ZOOM
and PAN, DSVIEWER, and scroll bars are not available while that view is
current.
target
camera
plan view 3D perspective view
Command line: dview
Select objects or <use DVIEWBLOCK>:

Enter option
[CAmera/TArget/Distance/POints/PAn/Zoom/TWist/CLip/Hide/Off/Undo]:
Specify a point with your pointing device, or enter an option
Object Selection
Specifies objects to use in the preview image as you change views. Selecting
too many objects slows image dragging and updating.
DVIEW | 331
DVIEWBLOCK
If you press ENTER at the Select Objects prompt, AutoCAD uses DVIEWBLOCK
for the preview image. You can create your own DVIEWBLOCK block in a
1×1×1-unit area, with its origin at the lower-left corner. The following illus-
tration shows an example of using the default DVIEWBLOCK to set the view
(moving the graphics cursor adjusts the view).
graphics cursor
Point Specification
Rolls the view under the camera. The point you select with your pointing
device is a start point for the dragging operation. Your viewing direction
changes about the target point as you move the pointing device.
Enter direction and magnitude angles: Enter angles between 0 degrees and 360
degrees, or specify a point with your pointing device
Enter both angles, separated by a comma. The angles must be positive. The
direction angle indicates the front of the view, and the magnitude angle
determines how far the view rolls.
332 | DVIEW
Camera
Specifies a new camera position by rotating the camera about the target
point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation.
Specify camera location, or enter angle in XY plane <from X axis>,
or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point, enter t, enter an
Camera Location Sets the camera’s position based on the specified point.
Enter Angle from Sets the camera’s position at an angle above or below
the XY Plane the XY plane. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from
above, and an angle of –90 looks up from below. A
camera angle of 0 degrees places the camera parallel to
the XY plane of the UCS.
After you toggle the angle input mode or specify the
angle from the XY plane, AutoCAD returns to the
previous prompt.
Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an
angle on the command line locks the cursor movement
so you see only the positions available for that angle.
Toggle unlocks the cursor movement for the angle, and
you can use the cursor to rotate the camera.
Enter Angle in XY Sets the camera’s position at an angle in the XY plane
Plane from X Axis relative to the X axis of the current user coordinate
system (UCS). This angle measures from –180 to 180
degrees. A rotation angle of 0 degrees looks down the X
axis of the UCS toward the origin.
DVIEW | 333
camera at A
plan view camera rotated to B
The illustration shows the camera rotating to the left

from its initial position, leaving its angle from the XY
plane unchanged.
Toggle (Angle Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an
From) angle on the command line locks the cursor movement
you can use the cursor to rotate the camera.
Target
Specifies a new position for the target by rotating it around the camera. The
effect is like turning your head to see different parts of the drawing from one
vantage point. Two angles determine the amount of rotation.
Specify camera location, or enter angle in XY plane <from X axis>,
or [Toggle (angle current)] <current>: Specify an XYZ point, enter t, enter an
334 | DVIEW
Enter Angle from Sets the target's position at an angle above or below the
the XY Plane XY plane. An angle of 90 degrees looks down from
above, and an angle of –90 looks up from below. A
target angle of 0 degrees means that the target is parallel
to the XY plane of the UCS.
After you toggle the angle input mode or specify the
angle from the XY plane, AutoCAD returns to the
previous prompt.
Toggle (Angle In) Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an
angle on the command line locks the cursor movement
you can use the cursor to rotate the target.
Enter Angle in XY Sets the target’s position at an angle in the XY plane
Plane from X Axis relative to the X axis of the current UCS. This angle
measures from –180 to 180 degrees. A rotation angle of
0 degrees means you look down the X axis of the UCS
toward the origin.
target at A
camera
plan view target at B
The illustration shows the effect of moving the target

point from left to right, leaving its angle from the XY
plane unchanged.
DVIEW | 335
Toggle (Angle Switches between two angle input modes. Entering an
From) angle on the command line locks the cursor movement
you can use the cursor to rotate the target.
Distance
Moves the camera in or out along the line of sight relative to the target. This
option turns on perspective viewing, which causes objects farther from the
camera to appear smaller than those closer to the camera. A special perspec-
tive icon replaces the coordinate system icon. AutoCAD prompts for the new
camera-to-target distance.
Specify new camera-target distance <current>: Enter a distance or press ENTER
A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x,
with 1x representing the current distance. Moving the slider bar to the right
increases the distance between camera and target. Moving it to the left
decreases that distance. To turn off perspective viewing, choose the Off
option from the main DVIEW prompt.
If the target and camera points are close together, or if you specify a long-
focal-length lens, you might see very little of your drawing when you specify
a new distance. If you see little or none of your drawing, try the maximum
scale value (16x) or enter a large distance. To magnify the drawing without
turning perspective viewing on, use the Zoom option of DVIEW (see page
338).
336 | DVIEW
camera at A
plan view camera at B
The illustration shows the effect of moving the camera along the line of sight
relative to the target, where the field of view remains constant.
Points
Locates the camera and target points using X,Y,Z coordinates. You can use
XYZ point filters. You must specify these points in a nonperspective view. If
perspective viewing is on, AutoCAD turns it off while you specify new
camera and target locations, and then redisplays the preview image in
perspective view.
Specify target point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER
To help you define a new line of sight, AutoCAD draws a rubber-band line
from the current camera position to the crosshairs. AutoCAD prompts you
for a new camera location.
Specify camera point <current>: Specify a point, enter direction and magnitude
angles, or press ENTER
DVIEW | 337
A rubber-band line connects the target point to the crosshairs to help you
place the camera relative to the target. The illustration shows the change in
view as you swap the camera and target points. Lens and distance settings are
the same in each case.
camera at A, target at B
camera location and target point
camera at B, target at A
For information about entering direction and magnitude angles, see “Point
Specification” on page 332.
Pan
Shifts the image without changing the level of magnification.
Specify displacement base point: Specify a point
Specify second point: Specify a point
Zoom
If perspective viewing is off, dynamically increases or decreases the apparent
size of objects in the current viewport.
Specify zoom scale factor <current>: Specify a scale or press ENTER
A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with
1x representing the current scale. Moving the slider bar to the right increases
the scale. Moving it to the left decreases the scale.
338 | DVIEW
If perspective viewing is on, Zoom adjusts the camera lens length, which
changes the field of view and causes more or less of the drawing to be visible
at a given camera and target distance. The default lens length is 50mm, sim-
ulating what you’d see with a 35mm camera and a 50mm lens. Increasing the
lens length is similar to switching to a telephoto lens. Decreasing the lens
length widens the field of view, as with a wide-angle lens.
Specify lens length <50.000mm>: Specify a value or press ENTER
A slider bar along the top of the drawing area is labeled from 0x to 16x, with
1x representing the current lens length. Moving the slider bar to the right
increases the lens length. Moving it to the left decreases the lens length.
lens length = 50mm
plan view lens length = 25mm
Twist
Twists or tilts the view around the line of sight. AutoCAD measures the twist
angle counterclockwise, with 0 degrees to the right.
Specify view twist angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
DVIEW | 339
Clip
Clips the view, obscuring portions of the drawing that are behind or in front
of the front clipping plane. The front and back clipping planes are invisible
walls that you can position perpendicular to the line of sight between the
camera and target.
Enter clipping option [Back/Front/Off] <Off>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Back
Obscures objects located behind the back clipping plane.
Specify distance from target or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a distance, enter an
option, or press ENTER
Distance from Positions the back clipping plane and turns on back
Target clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane
between the target and the camera. A negative distance
places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to
drag the clipping plane.
On Turns on back clipping at the current clipping distance.
Off Turns off back clipping.
Front
Obscures objects located between the camera and the front clipping plane.
Specify distance from target or [set to Eye (camera)/ON/OFF] <current>: Specify
a distance, enter e, or press ENTER
Distance from Positions the front clipping plane and turns on front
Target clipping. A positive distance places the clipping plane
between the target and the camera. A negative distance
places it beyond the target. You can use the slider bar to
drag the clipping plane.
Eye Positions the front clipping plane at the camera.
On Turns on front clipping. This option is available only
when perspective viewing is off.
Off Turns off front clipping. This option is available only
when perspective viewing is off.
340 | DVIEW
back clip
front clip
camera
position of clipping planes view resulting from
camera position
Off
Turns off front and back clipping. If perspective viewing is on, front clipping
remains on at the camera position.
Hide
Suppresses hidden lines on the selected objects to aid in visualization.
AutoCAD considers circles, solids, traces, regions, wide polyline segments,
3D faces, polygon meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero
thickness to be opaque surfaces that hide objects.This hidden line suppres-
sion is quicker than that performed by HIDE, but it can't be plotted.
Off
Turns off perspective viewing. The Distance option turns on perspective
viewing.
Undo
Reverses the effects of the last DVIEW action. You can undo multiple DVIEW
operations.
See Also
See “Overview of Specifying a 3D View” in the User’s Guide.
DVIEW | 341
Commands With 3DORBIT, you can manipulate the view of 3D
objects by clicking and dragging your pointing device.
BLOCK creates a block definition from a group of
objects. You can use it to create an alternate DVIEW-
BLOCK. HIDE regenerates a 3D model with hidden lines
removed. PAN moves the drawing display in the current
viewport. ZOOM increases or decreases the apparent size
of objects in the current viewport. DSVIEWER opens the
Aerial View window.
DWGPROPS
Sets and displays the properties of the current drawing
File menu: Drawing Properties
Command line: dwgprops
The Drawing Properties dialog box is displayed.
Drawing Properties Dialog Box

Displays read-only statistics or general information about your drawing,
assigns summary properties, and assigns names and values to custom
properties. These custom properties can help you identify your drawing.
General Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box)

Displays read-only information about the drawing file. This data is derived
from the operating system.
342 | DWGPROPS
File Name
Shows the file icon and the file name.
File Type, Location, Size
Shows the file type, the file location, and the size of the file.
MS-DOS Name, Created, Modified, Accessed
Shows MS-DOS name, when the file was created, and the date and time it was
last modified and last accessed.
Attributes
Shows system-level file attributes. These values can be modified in Windows
Explorer.
Read-Only Indicates that the file is read-only; it cannot be changed
or deleted accidentally.
Archive Indicates that this file should be archived. AutoCAD
uses this setting to determine which files should be
backed up.
DWGPROPS | 343
Hidden Indicates that the file is hidden; you cannot see or use
it unless you know its name.
System Indicates that the file is a system file. An AutoCAD
drawing cannot have the System attribute set.
Summary Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box)

Displays properties such as author, title, and subject that are predefined. For
example, you can add keywords to all your drawing files and then use
DesignCenter™ to search for all drawing files with a particular keyword.
Title Specifies the title you want to use when searching for
this drawing. The title can be different from the
drawing file name.
Subject Specifies the subject of the drawing. You can use the
subject name to group drawings that have the same
subject.
Author Specifies the author of the drawing. The author name
can only be entered or changed by the user. To change
the author, delete the existing name and enter a new
one.
344 | DWGPROPS
Keywords Specifies the keywords you want to use to locate the
drawing.
Comments Specifies the comments you want to use to locate the
drawing.
Hyperlink Base Specifies the base address that AutoCAD uses for all
relative links inserted within the drawing. You can
specify an Internet location, for example, http://
www.autodesk.com, or a path to a folder on a network
drive.
Statistics Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box)

Displays data such as the dates the drawing was created and last modified.
These file properties are automatically maintained for you and can help you
search for drawings created or modified during a specific period.
Note If AutoCAD detects that the drawing was last saved using an application
other than Autodesk® software, a warning message is displayed. This value is
stored in the DWGCHECK system variable.
Created Displays the date and time the drawing was created.
This value is stored in the TDCREATE system variable.
DWGPROPS | 345
Modified Displays the date and time the drawing was last
modified. This value is stored in the TDUPDATE system
variable.
Last Saved By Displays the name of the last person who modified the
file. The Last Saved By name is stored in the
LOGINNAME system variable.
Revision Number Displays the revision number.

Total Editing Displays the total amount of editing time in the
Time drawing. This value is stored in the TDINDWG system
variable.
Custom Tab (Drawing Properties Dialog Box)

Provides ten custom fields for assigning names and values. For example, you
could create a custom field called “Project” and assign the actual project
name as the value. To ensure that all your drawings use the same custom field
names, you could create the custom fields in your drawing templates. The
custom fields can be used in searches to help locate a drawing, such as when
you use the Find dialog box in DesignCenter. AutoCAD also provides access
to the properties data using programming interfaces, such as AutoLISP.
346 | DWGPROPS
Custom Lists names and values for custom fields for the current
Properties drawing. Enter text in the Name column. To enter a value
for a custom field, enter text in the Value column.
See Also
See “Add Identifying Information to Drawings” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ADCENTER displays DesignCenter.
DXBIN
Imports specially coded binary files
Insert menu: Drawing Exchange Binary
Command line: dxbin
The Select DXB File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the name of the file to import.
DXBIN | 347
348
EATTEDIT
Edits attributes in a block reference
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Attribute ➤ Single
Command line: eattedit
Select a block:
You are prompted to select a block in the drawing area. After you select a
block with attributes, the Enhanced Attribute Editor is displayed.
If the block you select does not contain attributes, or you select something
that is not a block, an error message is displayed, and you are prompted to
select another block.
Enhanced Attribute Editor

Lists the attributes in a selected block instance and displays the properties of
each attribute. You can change the attribute properties and values.
Select Block Allows you to use your pointing device to select a block
from the drawing area. When you choose Select Block,
the dialog box closes until you select a block from the
drawing or cancel by pressing ESC .
If you modify attributes of a block and then select a new
block before you save the attribute changes you made,
you are prompted to save the changes before selecting
another block.
Apply Updates the drawing with the attribute changes you
have made, and leaves the Enhanced Attribute Editor
open.
The Enhanced Attribute Editor contains the following tabs:
■ Attribute
■ Text Options
■ Properties
Attribute Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Displays the tag, prompt, and value assigned to each attribute. You can
change only the attribute value.
EATTEDIT | 349
Value The value assigned to the selected attribute.
Text Options Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Sets the properties that define the way an attribute’s text is displayed in the
drawing. Change the color of attribute text on the Properties tab.
Text Style Specifies the text style for the attribute text. Default
values for this text style are assigned to the text
properties displayed in this dialog box.
Justification Specifies how the attribute text is justified (left-, center-,
or right-justified).
Height Specifies the height of the attribute text.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute text.
Backwards Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed
backwards.
Upside down Specifies whether or not the attribute text is displayed
upside down.
Width Factor Sets the character spacing for the attribute text.
Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text.
Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique Angle Specifies the angle that the attribute text is slanted
away from its vertical axis.
Properties Tab (Enhanced Attribute Editor)

Defines the layer that the attribute is on and the lineweight, linetype, and
color for the attribute text. If the drawing uses plot styles, you can assign a
plot style to the attribute using the Properties tab.
Layer Specifies the layer that the attribute is on.
Linetype Specifies the linetype of the attribute.
Color Specifies the color of the attribute.
Plot Style Specifies the plot style of the attribute.
If the current drawing uses color-dependent plot styles,
the Plot Style list is not available.
Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the attribute.
Changes you make to this option are not displayed if
the LWDISPLAY system variable is off.
350 | EATTEDIT
EATTEXT
Exports block attribute information to an external file
Modify II toolbar:
Tools menu: Attribute Extraction
Command line: eattext
The Attribute Extraction wizard is displayed.
Attribute Extraction Wizard

Specifies the set of blocks from which to extract block attribute information,
the types of block attribute information you want, and the block attributes
to be extracted.
The Attribute Extraction wizard includes the following pages:
■ Select Drawing
■ Settings
■ Use Template
■ Select Attributes
■ View Output
■ Save Template
■ Export
Select Drawing Page

Allows you to select drawing files from which to extract block attribute
information.
Select Objects Makes the Select Objects button available.
Select Objects Allows you to close the wizard temporarily while you
Button select the set of blocks in the drawing area from which
you want to extract block attribute information.
Current Drawing Specifies that block attribute information is extracted
from all blocks in the current drawing.
Select Drawings Makes the [...] button available.
[...] Button Displays the Select File dialog box, where you can locate
and select drawing files from which to extract block
attribute information.
EATTEXT | 351
Drawing Files Displays the selected drawing files that contain the
block attributes you want to extract.
Next Displays the Settings page.
Settings Page
Allows you to specify whether to extract block attribute information from
external reference files and nested blocks.
Include Xrefs Specifies that block attribute information is extracted
from external references (xrefs).
Include Nested Specifies that block attribute information is extracted
Blocks from blocks nested in other blocks.
Next Displays the Use Template page.
Use Template Page

Allows you to use the block attribute settings from ones previously saved in
a template file with the .blk file name extension.
No Template Specifies that block attribute settings from a template
file are not used.
Use Template Makes the Use Template button available.
Use Template Displays the Select File dialog box, where you can locate
Button and select a block attribute template file to use.
Next Displays the Select Attributes page.
Select Attributes Page

Allows you to select blocks and attributes.
Blocks Displays the list of blocks in the selected drawings.
Select the box next to a block name to display that
block’s attributes in the Attributes for Block list. In the
Block Alias column, you can assign an alias to the block.
The Number column displays the number of instances
of the block that are present in the selected drawings.
Attributes for Displays a list of block attributes corresponding to the
Block block or blocks selected. Select the box next to an
attribute name to extract the information for that
attribute. The Value column displays the value of the
block attribute. In the Alias column, you can assign an
alias to the block attribute.
352 | EATTEXT
Check All Selects all blocks or block attributes for extraction.
Uncheck All Clears the selection of all blocks or block attributes.
Next Displays the View Output page.
View Output Page

Allows you to preview the block attributes to be extracted. The list displays
the attributes currently selected for extraction.
Two different views of the information can be displayed:
■ Attributes for each block by block name. The Block Name column displays
the names of blocks selected for attribute extraction. The Attribute
column displays the name of the attribute. The Value column displays the
value of the attribute. The Count column displays the number of
attributes in the drawing with the same name and value.
■ Values for each block attribute by block name. The Block Name column
displays the names of the blocks selected for attribute extraction; other
columns display names of attributes associated with each block. The rows
display the values for each attribute.
In exported files, Enhanced Attribute Extract renames blocks of the same

name but that have different attributes that are found in multiple drawings
or xrefs. For each instance after the first one of duplicate-named blocks with
different attributes, Enhanced Attribute Extract renames the block by
appending to the block name a tilde character (~) and the path name and file
in which the block was found. For example, a block named WND is in both
c:\drawings\offic.dwg and c:\drawings\adminoffice.dwg, but the block has dif-
ferent attributes in each file. When you use Enhanced Attribute Extract, the
instance of WND in the first file is shown with the block name WND; the
instance of WND in the second file is shown with the block name
WND~c:\drawings\adminoffice.dwg.
Alternate View Switches between the two views of the information in
the table.
Copy to Copies all or selected portions of the table to the
Clipboard Clipboard.
Next Displays the Save Template page.
EATTEXT | 353
Save Template Page
Allows you to save the attribute extraction settings you have made to a tem-
plate file with the .blk file name extension.
Save Template Displays the Save As dialog box, where you can specify
a location and name for a template file of the current
block attribute settings.
Next Displays the Export page.
Export Page
Allows you to specify the attribute extraction file name and format and
export the attribute information to the specified file.
In attribute names that will be field names in files exported to Microsoft®
Access file format, Enhanced Attribute Extract substitutes an underscore
character (_) for the characters shown in the following table.
Restricted characters in Microsoft Access fields
Character Character name
. Period
! Exclamation mark
[ Left square bracket
] Right square bracket
For example, attribute tag names that appear as column headings will be field
names in Microsoft Access, and any instance of the restricted characters will
be replaced by an underscore.
File Name Specifies the file name for the extracted block attribute
information.
[...] Button Allows you to specify the file by locating it with the
standard file dialog box.
354 | EATTEXT
File Type Specifies the format for the attribute extraction file. File
formats that are displayed in the list depend on the
applications installed on the computer. If Microsoft
Excel and Microsoft Access are installed, the XLS and
MDB file formats are available. The comma-separated
file format (CSV) and tab-separated file format (TXT)
are always available.
The delimiter used in the comma-separated file format
(.csv) is based on the locale; the list separator for the
locale separates the exported data.
Finish Extracts the block attribute information and exports it
to the file specified.
EDGE
Changes the visibility of three-dimensional face edges
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ Edge
Command line: edge
Specify edge of 3dface to toggle visibility or [Display]: Select an edge or enter d
Edge
Controls the visibility of the edges you select.
Specify edge of 3d face to toggle visibility or [Display]:
AutoCAD® repeats the prompt until you press ENTER .
If the edges of one or more 3D faces are colinear, AutoCAD alters the visibility
of each colinear edge.
EDGE | 355
Display
Selects invisible edges of 3D faces so that you can redisplay them.
Enter selection method for display of hidden edges [Select/All] <All>: Enter an
All Selects the hidden edges of all 3D faces in the drawing

and displays them.
If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible
once again, use the Edge option. You must select each
edge with your pointing device to display it.
AutoSnap™ markers and Snaptips are automatically
displayed, indicating the apparent snap locations on
each invisible edge.
This prompt continues until you press ENTER .
Select Selects hidden edges of a partially visible 3D face and
displays them.
Select objects:
If you want to make the edges of the 3D faces visible

once again, use the Edge option. You must select each
edge with your pointing device to display it. AutoSnap
markers and Snaptips are automatically displayed,
indicating the apparent snap locations on each
invisible edge.
This prompt continues until you press ENTER .
See Also
Commands 3DFACE creates a 3D triangular or quadrilateral surface.
System Variables SPLFRAME turns on or off the display of invisible edges.
356 | EDGE
EDGESURF
Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh
EDGESURF constructs a three-dimensional (3D) polygon mesh approximating
a Coons surface patch mesh from four adjoining edges. A Coons surface
patch mesh is a bicubic surface interpolated between four adjoining edges
(which can be general space curves). The Coons surface patch mesh not only
meets the corners of the defining edges, but also touches each edge, provid-
ing control over the boundaries of the generated surface patch.
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ Edge Surface
Command line: edgesurf
3 Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current SURFTAB2=current

2 Select object 1 for surface edge:
Select object 2 for surface edge:
4 Select object 3 for surface edge:
1
Select object 4 for surface edge:
You must select the four adjoining edges that define the surface patch. The
edges can be lines, arcs, splines, or open 2D or 3D polylines. The edges must
touch at their endpoints to form a topologically rectangular closed path.
You can select the four edges in any order. The first edge (SURFTAB1)
determines the M direction of the generated mesh, which extends from the
endpoint closest to the selection point to the other end. The two edges that
touch the first edge form the N edges (SURFTAB2) of the mesh.
M N
See Also
See “Overview of 3D Objects,” in the User’s Guide.
System Variables SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 control the number of divisions
along the M and N directions of a polygon mesh.
EDGESURF | 357
ELEV
Sets elevation and extrusion thickness of new objects
The current elevation is the Z value that AutoCAD uses whenever it expects
a 3D point but receives only X and Y values. AutoCAD maintains separate
current elevations in model space and paper space. Specifying an elevation
setting in one viewport makes that elevation current in all viewports regard-
less of whether viewports are set up to retain their own user coordinate
systems (UCSs). AutoCAD resets the elevation to 0.0 whenever you change
the coordinate system.
Command line: elev (or 'elev for transparent use)
Specify new default elevation <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER

Specify new default thickness <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The thickness sets the distance to which AutoCAD extrudes a 2D object

above or below its elevation. A positive value extrudes along the positive Z
axis; a negative value extrudes along the negative Z axis.
z
y
y
x x
with elevation with thickness
ELEV controls only new objects; it does not affect existing objects.
See Also
Commands UCS and UCSMAN control construction plane orienta-
tion, elevation, and extrusion direction. VPORTS creates
tiled viewports; new viewports inherit the settings of
the current viewport.
System Variables ELEVATION sets the current elevation. THICKNESS sets
the current extrusion thickness.
358 | ELEV
ELLIPSE
Creates an ellipse or an elliptical arc
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Ellipse
Command line: ellipse
Specify axis endpoint of ellipse or [Arc/Center/Isocircle]: Specify a point or enter

an option
The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of SNAP
to Isometric.
Axis Endpoint
Defines the first axis by its two endpoints. The angle of the first axis deter-
3
mines the angle of the ellipse. The first axis can define either the major or the
1 2 minor axis of the ellipse.
Specify other endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2)
ellipse by axis Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value
endpoint or locating a point (3), or enter r
Distance to Other Defines the second axis using the distance from the
Axis midpoint of the first axis to the endpoint of the second
axis (3).
Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about
Rotation
the first axis.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a point (3), or
enter an angle value between 0 and 89.4
Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and

click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the
greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines
a circular ellipse.
ELLIPSE | 359
3
Arc
Creates an elliptical arc. The angle of the first axis determines the angle of the
elliptical arc. The first axis can define either the major or the minor axis of
the elliptical arc.
ellipse by rotation
Specify axis endpoint of elliptical arc or [Center]: Specify a point or enter c
Axis Endpoint
Defines the start point of the first axis.
Specify other endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r
The descriptions of the Distance to Other Axis and Rotation options match
those of the corresponding options under Center.
Center
Creates the elliptical arc using a center point you specify.
Specify center of elliptical arc:
Specify endpoint of axis:
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance or enter r
Distance to Other Axis

Defines the second axis as the distance from the center of the elliptical arc,
or midpoint of the first axis, to the point you specify.
1 Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify a point (1), enter a value, or enter p
The descriptions of the Start Angle and Parameter options match those of the
corresponding options under Rotation.
Rotation
Defines the major to minor axis ratio of the ellipse by rotating a circle about
the first axis. The higher the value (from 0 through 89.4 degrees), the greater
the ratio of minor to major axis. Entering 0 defines a circle.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a rotation angle
Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or enter p
Start Angle Defines the first endpoint of the elliptical arc. The Start
Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle
mode. The mode you are in determines how AutoCAD
calculates the ellipse.
Specify end angle or [Parameter/Included angle]: Specify
a point (2), enter a value, or enter an option
360 | ELLIPSE
Parameter Requires the same input as Start Angle, but creates the
elliptical arc using the following parametric vector
equation:
p(u) = c + a* cos(u) + b* sin(u)
2
where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its
major and minor axes, respectively.
Specify start parameter or [Angle]: Specify a point, enter a
value, or enter a
Specify end parameter or [Angle/Included angle]: Specify
a point, enter a value, or enter an option
■ End Parameter: Defines the end angle of the elliptical

arc by using a parametric vector equation. The Start
Parameter option toggles from Angle mode to
Parameter mode. The mode you are in determines
how AutoCAD calculates the ellipse.
■ Angle: Defines the end angle of the elliptical arc. The
Angle option toggles from Parameter mode to Angle
mode. The mode you are in determines how
AutoCAD calculates the ellipse.
■ Included Angle: Defines an included angle beginning
at the start angle.
Center
3 Creates the ellipse by a center point you specify.
Specify center of ellipse: Specify a point (1)
1 2
Specify endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify distance to other axis or [Rotation]: Specify a distance by entering a value
or locating a point (3), or enter r
Distance to Other Defines the second axis as the distance from the center
Axis of the ellipse, or midpoint of the first axis, to the point
you specify.
ELLIPSE | 361
Rotation Creates the ellipse by appearing to rotate a circle about
the first axis.
Specify rotation around major axis: Specify a point, or
enter an angle value between 0 and 89.4
Specify start angle or [Parameter]: Specify an angle or
enter p
Move the crosshairs around the center of the ellipse and

click. If you enter a value, the higher the value, the
greater the eccentricity of the ellipse. Entering 0 defines
a circle.
Isocircle
Creates an isometric circle in the current isometric drawing plane.
Note The Isocircle option is available only when you set the Style option of
SNAP to Isometric.
Specify center of isocircle:

Specify radius of isocircle or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius Creates a circle using a radius you specify.

Diameter Creates a circle using a diameter you specify.
Specify diameter of isocircle: Specify a distance
See Also
See “Draw Ellipses” in the User’s Guide.
ERASE
Removes objects from a drawing
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Erase
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to erase, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Erase.
362 | ERASE
Command line: erase
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER when you finish
selecting objects
AutoCAD removes the objects from the drawing.
object selected object erased
See Also
See “Remove Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands OOPS restores previously erased objects. U reverses the
effect of the previous command. UNDO reverses the
effect of multiple commands and provides control over
the Undo feature. REDO reverses the immediately previ-
ous UNDO or U command.
ETRANSMIT
Creates a transmittal set of a drawing and related files
File Menu: eTransmit
Command line: etransmit
AutoCAD displays the Create Transmittal Dialog Box.
Create Transmittal Dialog Box

Creates a transmittal set of a drawing and related files.
General Tab (Create Transmittal Dialog Box)

Creates a transmittal set of a specific type.
ETRANSMIT | 363
Notes
Provides a space where you can enter notes related to a transmittal set. The
notes are included in the transmittal report. You can specify a template of
default notes to be included with all your transmittal sets by creating an
ASCII text file called etransmit.txt. This file must be saved to a location spec-
ified by the Support File Search Path option on the “Files Tab (Options Dialog
Box)” on page 634. See the Report tab.
Type
Specifies the type of transmittal set created.
Folder Creates a transmittal set of uncompressed files in a new
or existing folder.
Self-extracting Creates a transmittal set of files as a compressed, self-
Executable extracting executable file. Double-clicking the resulting
EXE file decompresses the transmittal set and restores
the files.
364 | ETRANSMIT
Zip Creates a transmittal set of files as a compressed ZIP file.
To restore the files, you need a decompression utility
such as the shareware application PKZIP or WinZip.
Password
Opens the Password dialog box (see page 368), where you can specify a pass-
word for your transmittal set.
Location
Specifies the location in which the transmittal set is created. Location lists
the last ten locations in which transmittal sets were created. To specify a new
location, choose Browse and navigate to the location you want.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can navigate to a
location where you create the transmittal set.
Convert Drawings To
Specifies the file format of all drawings included in a transmittal set. When
this option is selected, you can select an AutoCAD drawing format from the
drop-down list.
Preserve Directory Structure
Preserves the directory structure of all files in the transmittal set, facilitating
ease of installation on another system. If this option is cleared, all files are
installed to the target directory when the transmittal set is installed. This
option is not available if you’re saving a transmittal set to an Internet
location.
Remove Paths from Xrefs and Images
Removes paths from any cross-referenced drawings or images in the trans-
mittal set.
Send E-mail with Transmittal
Launches the default system email application when the transmittal set is
created so that you can send an email notifying others of the new transmittal
set.
Make Web Page Files
Generates a web page that includes a link to the transmittal set.
Files Tab (Create Transmittal Dialog Box)

Lists the files to be included in the transmittal set. By default, all files associ-
ated with the current drawing (such as related xrefs, plot styles, and fonts)
are listed. You can add additional files to the transmittal set or remove
existing files. Related files that are referenced by URLs are not included in the
transmittal set.
ETRANSMIT | 365
List of Files
Displays the names of all files to be included in the transmittal set. Choose
the List View and Tree View buttons to switch back and forth between these
views.
List View Toggles file display to list view.
Tree View Toggles file display to tree view. All files to be included
in the transmittal set are indicated by a check mark
next to the file name. To remove a file from the
transmittal set, click in the check box. Right-click in the
file list to display a shortcut menu, from which you can
clear all check marks or apply check marks to all files.
Add File
Opens a standard file selection dialog box, in which you can select an addi-
tional file to include in the transmittal set.
366 | ETRANSMIT
Include Fonts
Includes the current drawing’s associated font files (TXT and SHX) with the
transmittal set. Because TrueType fonts are proprietary, they are not included
with the transmittal set. If any required TrueType fonts are not present on the
computer to which the transmittal set is copied, the font specified by the
FONTALT system variable is substituted.
Report Tab (Create Transmittal Dialog Box)
Displays report information that is included with the transmittal set.

Includes any transmittal notes that you entered on the General tab and dis-
tribution notes automatically generated by AutoCAD that detail what steps
must be taken for the transmittal set to work properly. For example, if
AutoCAD detects SHX fonts in one of the transmittal drawings, you are
instructed where to copy these files so that AutoCAD can detect them on the
system the transmittal set is being installed on. If you have created a text file
of default notes, the notes are also included in the report. See Notes on the
General tab.
ETRANSMIT | 367
Save As
Opens a File Save dialog box, in which you can specify a location in which
to save a report file. Note that a report file is automatically included with all
transmittal sets that you generate; by choosing Save As, you can save an
additional copy of a report file for archival purposes.
Password Dialog Box
Password for Compressed Transmittal

Provides a space for an optional password for the transmittal set. When
others attempt to open the transmittal set, they will need to provide this
password to access the files. Password protection cannot be applied to folder
transmittal sets (see “Type” on page 364).
Password Confirmation
Provides a space to confirm the password that you entered in the Password
field. If the two passwords do not match, you are prompted to re-enter them.
EXPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects
A compound object comprises more than one AutoCAD object. For example,
a block is a compound object.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Explode
Command line: explode
368 | EXPLODE
The color, linetype, and lineweight of any exploded object might change.
Other results differ depending on the type of compound object you’re
exploding. See the following list of objects that can be exploded and the
results for each.
Note If you’re using a script or an ObjectARX™ function, you can explode only
one object at a time.
2D and Discards any associated width or tangent information.

before EXPLODE Lightweight For wide polylines, AutoCAD places the resulting lines
Polyline and arcs along the center of the polyline.
3D Polyline Explodes into line segments. Any linetype assigned to
the 3D polyline is applied to each resulting line
after EXPLODE segment.
3D Solid Explodes planar surfaces into regions. Nonplanar
surfaces explode into bodies.
Arc If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into
elliptical arcs.
Block Removes one grouping level at a time. If a block
contains a polyline or a nested block, exploding the
block exposes the polyline or nested block object,
which must then be exploded to expose its individual
objects.
Blocks with equal X, Y, and Z scales explode into their
component objects. Blocks with unequal X, Y, and Z
scales (nonuniformly scaled blocks) might explode into
unexpected objects.
When nonuniformly scaled blocks contain objects that
cannot be exploded, they are collected into an
anonymous block (named with a “*E” prefix) and
referenced with the nonuniform scaling. If all the
objects in such a block cannot be exploded, the selected
block reference will not be exploded. Body, 3D Solid,
and Region entities in a nonuniformly scaled block
cannot be exploded.
Exploding a block that contains attributes deletes the
attribute values and redisplays the attribute definitions.
Blocks inserted with MINSERT and external references
(xrefs) and their dependent blocks cannot be exploded.
EXPLODE | 369
Body Explodes into a single-surface body (nonplanar
surfaces), regions, or curves.
Circle If within a nonuniformly scaled block, explodes into
ellipses.
Leaders Explodes into lines, splines, solids (arrow heads), block
inserts (arrow heads, annotation blocks), multiline text,
or tolerance objects, depending on the leader.
Multiline text Explodes into text objects.
Multiline Explodes into lines and arcs.
Polyface Mesh Explodes one-vertex meshes into a point object. Two-
vertex meshes explode into a line. Three-vertex meshes
explode into 3D faces.
Region Explodes into lines, arcs, or splines.
See Also
See “Disassemble a Block Reference (Explode)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BLOCK creates blocks from a group of objects. LIST dis-
plays the properties of objects. XPLODE explodes objects
and controls the color, layer, linetype, and lineweight
of the component objects.
EXPORT
Saves objects to other file formats
File menu: Export
Command line: export
The Export Data dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
In Files of Type, select the format type to export objects to. In File Name,
enter the name of the file to create. AutoCAD exports the objects to the
specified file format using the specified file name.
The following output types are available:
■ WMF—Windows® Metafile (see WMFOUT)

■ SAT—ACIS solid object file (see ACISOUT)
■ STL—Solid object stereolithography file (see STLOUT)
■ DXX—Attribute extract DXF® file (see ATTEXT)
370 | EXPORT
■ BMP—Device-independent bitmap file (see BMPOUT)
■ 3DS—3D Studio® file (see 3DSOUT)
■ DWG—AutoCAD drawing file (see WBLOCK)
EXTEND
Extends an object to meet another object
Objects that you can extend include arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, open 2D and
3D polylines, and rays.
boundary selected objects to extend selected result
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Extend
Command line: extend
Select boundary edges...

Select objects: Select one or more objects and press ENTER or press ENTER to select
all objects (implied selection)
Select object to extend or shift-select to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Select an
object to extend, or hold down SHIFT and select an object to trim, or enter an option
Boundary Object Selection

Uses selected objects to define the boundary edges to which you want to
extend the object. Valid boundary objects include 2D and 3D polylines, arcs,
blocks, circles, ellipses, layout viewports, lines, rays, regions, splines, text,
and xlines.
EXTEND | 371
If you select a 2D polyline as a boundary object, AutoCAD ignores its width
and extends objects to the centerline of the polyline. You can use only the
single, crossing, fence, and implied selection options to select boundaries
that include blocks.
If you extend a tapered polyline segment, AutoCAD corrects the width of the
extended end to continue its original taper to the new endpoint. If this
causes the segment to have a negative ending width, the ending width
becomes zero.
selected boundary polylines to extend result
Extending a spline-fit polyline adds a new vertex to the control frame for the
polyline.
Object to Extend
Specifies the object to extend. AutoCAD repeats the main prompt so you can
extend multiple objects. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an object trims it to
the nearest boundary rather than extending it. Pressing ENTER ends the
command.
Project
Specifies the projection method AutoCAD uses when extending objects.
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
selected objects to
boundary extend
372 | EXTEND
None Specifies no projection. AutoCAD extends only objects
that intersect with the boundary edge in 3D space.
arc not intersecting

with boundary edge in
3D space
arc intersecting with

boundary edge in 3D
space
UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current

user coordinate system (UCS). AutoCAD extends
objects that do not intersect with the boundary objects
in 3D space.
projection of arcs onto

current UCS that intersect
with boundary edge
View Specifies projection along the current view direction.
left viewport right viewport
Edge
Extends the object to another object’s implied edge, or only to an object that
actually intersects it in 3D space.
EXTEND | 373
Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] <current>: Enter an
selected boundary
Extend Extends the boundary object along its natural path to
intersect another object or its implied edge in 3D space.
selected object to
No Extend Specifies that the object is to extend only to a boundary
extend
object that actually intersects it in 3D space.
Undo
extended Reverses the most recent changes made by EXTEND.
See Also
not extended See “Trim or Extend Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands LENGTHEN lengthens an object. TRIM trims objects at a
cutting edge you specify.
System Variables EDGEMODE determines whether to extend an object to
another object’s implied edge or only to an object that
intersects it in 3D space. PROJMODE specifies the Projec-
tion mode AutoCAD uses when extending objects.
EXTRUDE
Creates unique solid primitives by extruding existing two-dimensional objects
With EXTRUDE, you can create solids by extruding (adding thickness to)
selected objects. You can extrude an object along a path, or you can specify
a height value and a tapered angle.
Use EXTRUDE to create a solid from a common profile of an object, such as a
gear or sprocket. EXTRUDE is particularly useful for objects that contain
fillets, chamfers, and other details that might otherwise be difficult to repro-
duce except in a profile. If you create a profile using lines or arcs, use the Join
option of PEDIT to convert them to a single polyline object or make them into
a region before you use EXTRUDE.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Extrude
Command line: extrude

Select objects:
Specify height of extrusion or [Path]: Specify a distance or enter p
374 | EXTRUDE
Object Selection
Specifies the objects to extrude. You can extrude planar 3D faces, closed
polylines, polygons, circles, ellipses, closed splines, donuts, and regions. You
cannot extrude objects contained within a block or polylines that have cross-
select object
ing or self-intersecting segments.
A polyline must contain at least 3 but not more than 500 vertices. If a
selected polyline has width, AutoCAD ignores the width and extrudes from
the center of the polyline path. If a selected object has thickness, AutoCAD
ignores the thickness.
Height of Extrusion
Extrudes the objects along the positive Z axis of the object’s coordinate
height system if you enter a positive value. If you enter a negative value, AutoCAD
extrudes the objects along the negative Z axis.
Specify angle of taper for extrusion <0>: Specify an angle between –90 and +90
degrees or press ENTER
Positive angles taper in from the base object. Negative angles taper out. The
taper default angle, 0, extrudes a 2D object perpendicular to its 2D plane. AutoCAD
angle tapers all objects and loops in the selection set to the same value. Tapered
extrusions are possible only with loops that are continuous at the vertices.
Specifying a large taper angle or a long extrusion height can cause the object
or portions of the object to taper to a point before reaching the extrusion
height.
AutoCAD always extrudes individual loops of the region to the same height.
When an arc is part of a tapered extrusion, the angle of the arc remains con-
stant, and the radius of the arc changes. On a straight extrusion, each arc
path
results in a single cylindrical face. Whenever possible, EXTRUDE uses the
taper angle as the angle by which it slants faces from the Z axis.
Path
profile
Selects the extrusion path based on a specified object. AutoCAD extrudes the
profiles of the selected object along the chosen path to create solids.
Select extrusion path: Use an object selection method
Lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, or splines can be paths.
The path should not lie on the same plane as the profile, nor should it have
areas of high curvature.
EXTRUDE | 375
The extruded solid starts from the plane of the profile and ends on a plane
perpendicular to the path at the path’s endpoint. One of the endpoints of the
path should be on the plane of the profile; otherwise, AutoCAD moves the
path to the center of the profiles.
If the path is a spline, it should be perpendicular to the plane of the profile
at one of the endpoints of the path. Otherwise, AutoCAD rotates the profile
to be perpendicular to the spline path. If one of the endpoints of the spline
is on the plane of the profile, AutoCAD rotates the profile about the point;
otherwise, AutoCAD moves the spline path to the center of the profile and
rotates the profiles about its center.
If the path contains segments that are not tangent, AutoCAD extrudes the
object along each segment and then miters the joint along the plane bisect-
ing the angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the profile should
lie on the miter plane. This allows the start and end sections of the solid to
match up. If the profile is not on the miter plane, AutoCAD rotates it until it
is on the miter plane.
AutoCAD extrudes profiles with multiple loops so that all the loops appear
on the same plane at the end section of the extruded solid.
See Also
See “Extrude Faces on 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide.
376 | EXTRUDE
FILL
Controls the filling of objects such as hatches, two-dimensional solids, and wide polylines
Some displays and plotters take a long time to fill the interior of objects; turn
off Fill mode to improve performance. Objects affected by FILL include
hatches, two-dimensional solids, wide polylines, AutoCADmultilines and
traces.
Command line: fill (or 'fill for transparent use)
On Turns on Fill mode. For the filling of a 3D object to be

visible, its extrusion direction must be parallel to the
current viewing direction, and hidden lines must not be
suppressed.
Fill mode on Off Turns off Fill mode. Only the outlines of objects are
displayed and plotted. Changing Fill mode affects
existing objects after the drawing is regenerated. The
display of lineweights is not affected by the Fill mode
setting.
See Also
Fill mode off
See “Control the Display of Polylines, Hatches, Gradient Fills, Lineweights,
and Text” in the User’s Guide.
Commands OPTIONS displays the Options dialog box, in which you
can set Fill mode and other display settings.
System Variables FILLMODE stores the FILL command setting.
FILLET
Rounds and fillets the edges of objects
FILLET rounds the edges of two arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines,
rays, splines, or xlines with an arc of a specified radius. FILLET also rounds the
edges of 3D solids.
If the TRIMMODE system variable is set to 1, FILLET trims the intersecting lines
before FILLET to the endpoints of the fillet arc. If the selected lines do not intersect,
AutoCAD® extends or trims them so that they do.
If both objects you want to fillet are on the same layer, AutoCAD creates the
fillet line on that layer. Otherwise, AutoCAD creates the fillet line on the
after FILLET current layer. The same is true for the fillet color, lineweight, and linetype.
FILL | 377
You can fillet line segments of a polyline that are adjacent, nonadjacent,
intersecting, or separated by one segment. If they are nonadjacent, the
polyline segments are extended to accommodate the fillet. If they are inter-
secting, the polyline segments are trimmed to accommodate the fillet. To
create a fillet, the polyline segments must converge within the drawing limits
when limits checking is on.
The result is a single polyline that includes the fillet as an arc segment. All
the properties of this new polyline, such as its layer, color, and linetype, are
inherited from the first polyline selected.
Note Filleting an associative hatch whose boundary was defined from line seg-
ments removes hatch associativity. If the boundary was defined from a polyline,
associativity is maintained.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Fillet
Command line: fillet
Current settings: Mode = current, Radius = current

Select first object or [Polyline/Radius/Trim/mUltiple]: Use an object selection
method or enter an option
First Object
Selects the first of two objects required to define a 2D fillet or the edge of a
3D solid to fillet.
Select second object:
first selected object second selected object result
378 | FILLET
If you select lines, arcs, or polylines, AutoCAD extends them until they inter-
sect or trims them at the intersection. You can fillet two lines with different
extrusion directions only if the Z values of the endpoints of both lines are
equal in the current user coordinate system (UCS).
If the selected objects are straight line segments of a 2D polyline, they can be
adjacent or separated by one other segment. If they are separated by another
polyline segment, FILLET deletes the segment that separates them and
replaces it with the fillet.
More than one fillet can exist between arcs and circles. AutoCAD chooses the
fillet with endpoints closest to the points you select.
selection points result (with radius greater than 0)
FILLET does not trim circles; the fillet arc meets the circle smoothly.
FILLET | 379
selection points results (with radius
greater than 0)
If you select a 3D solid, you can select multiple edges, but you must select the
edges individually.
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select edge(s), enter c, or enter r
Edge
Selects a single edge. You can continue to select single edges until you press
ENTER .
selecting edges single edge fillets
If you select three or more edges that converge at a vertex to form the corner
of a box, AutoCAD computes a vertex blend that is part of a sphere if the
three incident fillets have the same radii.
380 | FILLET
Chain
Toggles from selection of single edges to selection of sequential tangent
edges.
Select edge chain or <Edge/Radius>: Select an edge chain, enter e, or enter r
Edge Chain Selects a tangential sequence of edges when you select

a single edge. For example, if you select an edge on the
top of a 3D solid box, AutoCAD also selects the other
tangential edges on the top.
Edge Switches to a single edge selection mode.
chain fillets
Radius Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Enter fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
AutoCAD displays the previous prompt:

Select an edge or [Chain/Radius]: Select one or more edges or enter c or r
Polyline
Inserts fillet arcs at each vertex of a 2D polyline where two line segments
meet.
Select 2D polyline:
If one arc segment separates two line segments that converge as they
approach the arc segment, AutoCAD removes the arc segment and replaces
it with a fillet arc.
before after
Radius
Defines the radius of the fillet arc.
Specify fillet radius <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
FILLET | 381
The value you enter becomes the current radius for subsequent FILLET
commands. Changing this value does not affect existing fillet arcs.
Trim
Controls whether AutoCAD trims the selected edges to the fillet arc
endpoints.
Enter Trim mode option [Trim/No trim] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Trim Trims the selected edges to the fillet arc endpoints.

No Trim Does not trim the selected edges.
Multiple
Rounds the edges of more than one set of objects. AutoCAD displays the
main prompt and the Select Second Object prompt repeatedly until you press
ENTER to end the command.
If you enter an option other than First Object at the main prompt, the
prompts for that option are displayed and then the main prompt is displayed
again.
All the fillets you created with the Multiple option are removed if you click
Undo.
See Also
See “Create Fillets, Chamfers, or Breaks in Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands CHAMFER bevels the edges of objects.
System Variables FILLETRAD stores the current fillet radius. TRIMMODE

controls whether selected lines are trimmed to the fillet
arc endpoints.
FILTER
Creates reusable filters for object selection
FILTER creates a list of requirements that an object must meet to be included
in a selection set.
382 | FILTER
Use FILTER to
■ Select objects before using an editing command

■ Select objects during an editing command; at any Select Objects prompt,
use FILTER transparently to select objects to use with the current command
■ Create named filters to use later at any Select Objects prompt
FILTER finds objects by property only when you have assigned those proper-
ties to the object directly. If objects assume properties from the layer on
which they reside, FILTER does not find them. You can, however, use FILTER
to find objects with properties set by layer or by block.
Command line: filter (or 'filter for transparent use)
The Object Selection Filters dialog box is displayed.
Object Selection Filters Dialog Box

Selects, edits, and names filters for object selection.
Filter Property List

Displays a list of the filter properties that compose the current filter. The
current filter is the filter that you select in Current in the Named Filters area.
Select Filter
Adds filter properties to the current filter.
FILTER | 383
Object Types and Lists object types that you can filter and logical
Logical Operators operators (AND, OR, XOR, and NOT) for grouping the
filter expressions.
If you use logical operators, such as AND, OR, XOR, and
NOT, make sure that you pair and balance them
correctly in the filter list. The number of operands you
can enclose depends on the operation.
Logical operators
Starting operator Encloses Ending operator
Begin AND One or more operands End AND
Begin OR One or more operands End OR
Begin XOR Two operands End XOR
Begin NOT One operand End NOT
For example, the following filter selects all circles

except the ones with a radii greater than or equal to 1.0:
Object=Circle
**Begin NOT
Circle Radius>= 1.00
**End NOT
X, Y, Z Define additional filter parameters depending on the

Parameters object. For example, if you select Line Start, you can
enter the X, Y, and Z coordinate values that you want to
filter.
In the filter parameters, you can use relative operators
such as < (less than) or > (greater than). For example,
the following filter selects all circles with center points
greater than or equal to 1,1,0 and radii greater than or
equal to 1:
Object=Circle
Circle CenterX >= 1.0000 Y >= 1.0000 Z >= 0.0000
Circle Radius>= 1.0000
384 | FILTER
Select Displays a dialog box listing all items of the specified
type in the drawing. Select the items to filter. For
example, if you select the object type Color, Select
displays a list of colors to choose for the filter.
Add to List Adds the current Select Filter property to the filter list.
Filter properties that you add to the unnamed filter
remain available during the current AutoCAD session
unless you manually delete them.
Substitute Replaces the filter property selected in the filter
property list with the one displayed in Select Filter.
Add Selected Adds one selected object in the drawing to the filter list.
Object
Edit Item
Moves the selected filter property into the Select Filter area for editing. To
edit a filter property, select it and choose Edit Item. Edit the filter property
and choose Substitute. The edited filter replaces the selected filter property.
Delete
Deletes a selected filter property from the current filter.
Clear List
Deletes all the listed properties from the current filter.
Named Filters
Displays, saves, and deletes filters.
Current Displays saved filters. Select a filter list to make it
current. AutoCAD loads the named filter and its list of
properties from the default file, filter.nfl.
Save As Saves a filter and its list of properties. AutoCAD saves
the filter in the filter.nfl file. Names can contain up to 18
characters.
Delete Current Deletes a filter and all its properties from the default
Filter List filter file.
FILTER | 385
Apply
Exits the dialog box and displays the Select Objects prompt, where you create
a selection set. AutoCAD uses the current filter on the objects you select.
See Also
See “Filter Selection Sets”in the User’s Guide.
Commands QSELECT quickly creates selection sets based on search
criteria. SELECT places selected objects in the Previous
selection set.
FIND
Finds, replaces, selects, or zooms to specified text
You can find, replace, select, or zoom to text contained in any loaded object
in model space and in any layout defined in the current drawing.
If you partially opened the current drawing, FIND does not consider objects
that you did not load.
Edit menu: Find
and choose Find.
Command line: find
The Find and Replace dialog box is displayed.
Find and Replace Dialog Box

Specifies the text you want to find, replace, or select and controls the scope
and results of the search.
386 | FIND
Find Text String Specifies the text string you want to find. Enter a string,
or choose one of the six most recently used strings from
the list.
Replace With Specifies the text string you want to use to replace the
found text. Enter a string, or choose one of the most
recently used strings from the list.
Search In Specifies whether to search the entire drawing or only
the current selection. If something is already selected,
Current Selection is the default value. If nothing is
selected, Entire Drawing is the default value. You can
use the Select Objects button to temporarily close the
dialog box and create or modify the selection set.
Select Objects Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select
objects in your drawing. Press ENTER to return to the
dialog box. When you select objects, Search In displays
Current Selection.
FIND | 387
Options Displays the Find and Replace Options dialog box (see
page 389), in which you can define the type of objects
and words that you want to find.
Find/Find Next Finds the text that you enter in Find Text String. If you
have not entered text in Find Text String, this option is
not available. AutoCAD displays found text in the
Context area. Once you find the first instance of the
text, the Find option becomes Find Next, which you
can use to find the next instance.
Replace Replaces found text with the text that you enter in
Replace With.
Replace All Finds all instances of the text that you enter in Find
Text String and replaces it with the text in Replace
With. AutoCAD finds and replaces either text in the
entire drawing or in the current selection, as specified
in Search In. The status area confirms the replacements
and indicates the number of replacements that were
made.
Select All Finds and selects all loaded objects containing
instances of the text that you enter in Find Text String.
This option is available only when you set Search In to
Current Selection. When you choose Select All, the
dialog box closes and AutoCAD displays a message on
the command line indicating the number of objects
that it found and selected. Note that Select All does not
replace text; AutoCAD ignores any text in Replace With.
Zoom To Displays the area in the drawing that contains the
results of a find or replace search. Although AutoCAD
searches model space and all layouts defined for the
drawing, you can only zoom to text in the current
Model or layout tab. When zooming to text found in a
multiline text object, in some cases the found text
string may not be displayed in a visible area of the
drawing.
Context Displays and highlights the currently found text string
in its surrounding context. If you choose Find Next,
AutoCAD refreshes the Context area and displays the
next found text string in its surrounding context.
Status Displays confirmation of find and replace searches.
388 | FIND
Find and Replace Options Dialog Box
Defines the type of objects and words that you want to find.
Include Specifies the type of objects you want to include in the

search. By default, all options are selected.
Match Case Includes the case of the text in Find Text String as part
of the search criteria.
Find Whole Finds only whole words that match the text in Find
Words Only Text String. For example, if you select Find Whole
Words Only and search for “Front Door,” FIND does not
locate the text string “Front Doormat.”
See Also
See “Change Multiline Text” in the User’s Guide.
FOG
Provides visual cues for the apparent distance of objects
Fog and depth cueing are actually two extremes of the same effect: a white
color is fog, and a black color is traditional depth cueing. You can use any
color in between.
Render Toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Fog
Command line: fog
AutoCAD displays the Fog/Depth Cue dialog box.
FOG | 389
Fog/Depth Cue Dialog Box
Defines the cues for distance between objects and the current viewing
direction.
Enable Fog
Turns fog on and off without affecting the other settings in the dialog box.
Fog Background
Applies fog to the background as well as to the geometry.
Color System
Controls whether AutoCAD uses the red, green, blue (RGB) color system or
the hue, lightness, saturation (HLS) color system.
Red, Green, Blue Adjusts the individual red, green, and blue components
of the selected color. Red, green, and blue are the
primary light colors shaded from black to the full
intensity of the color.
Moving one scroll box affects the mix of the three
colors. AutoCAD displays the result in the Color
Selected swatch. Moving all three scroll boxes all the
390 | FOG
way to the left produces black; moving them all the way
to the right produces white. Moving red and green to
the right and blue to the left produces yellow.
Hue, Lightness, Adjusts the individual hue, lightness, and saturation
Saturation components of the selected color. AutoCAD displays
the result in the Color Selected swatch.
Moving the Hue scroll box changes the color. Moving
the Lightness scroll box increases the luminance or
brightness of the hue by adding white. Moving the
Saturation scroll box to the right increases the purity of
the color. The higher the saturation, the less gray in the
color.
Select Custom Displays the Select Color dialog box. To define the
Color color, you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and Color Book colors.
Near/Far Distance
Define where the fog starts and ends. The values are percentages of the dis-
tance from the camera to the back clipping plane.
Near/Far Fog Percentage

Define the percentage of fog at the near and far distances, ranging from zero
fog to 100 percent fog.
See Also
See “Overview of Rendering” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX™ applications. RENDER creates a shaded
image of a 3D wireframe model.
FOG | 391
392
GOTOURL
Opens the file or Web page associated with the hyperlink attached to an object
Command line: gotourl
Select an object that has an attached hyperlink. The file or Web page (URL)
that is associated with the hyperlink opens.
See Also
Commands HYPERLINK Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modi-
fies an existing hyperlink.
GRAPHSCR
Switches from the text window to the drawing area
Command line: graphscr (or 'graphscr for transparent use)
GRAPHSCR closes the text window. You can also press F2 to open or close the
text window. This command is ignored on dual-screen systems.
See Also
Commands TEXTSCR switches from the drawing area to the text
window.
GRID
Displays a dot grid in the current viewport
The grid is for visual reference only. It is not plotted, and it is not part of the
drawing. You can turn the grid display on and off with the Grid button on
the status bar.
Command line: grid (or 'grid for transparent use)
Specify grid spacing(X) or [ON/OFF/Snap/Aspect] <current>: Specify a value or

enter an option
Grid Spacing (X) Sets the grid to the specified value. Entering x after the
value sets the grid spacing to the specified value
multiplied by the snap interval.
GOTOURL | 393
On Turns on the grid using the current spacing.
Off Turns off the grid.
Snap Sets the grid spacing to the snap interval specified by
the SNAP command.
Aspect Changes the grid spacing in the X and Y directions.
GRID turned on
Specify the horizontal spacing(X) <current>: Enter a
Specify the vertical spacing(Y) <current>: Enter a value or
press ENTER
Entering x following either value defines it as a multiple

of the snap interval rather than the drawing units.
GRID turned off
The Aspect option is not available when the current
snap style is Isometric.
See Also
See “Adjust Grid and Grid Snap” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DSETTINGS sets drawing aids, including the grid display.
SNAP specifies a minimum interval for point entry.
GRID set to Aspect
System Variables GRIDMODE turns the grid on or off in the current
viewport. GRIDUNIT sets the grid spacing in the current
viewport.
GROUP
Creates and manages saved sets of objects called groups
Command line: group
AutoCAD displays the Object Grouping dialog box.

If you enter -group at the Command prompt, GROUP displays prompts on
394 | GROUP
Object Grouping Dialog Box
Displays, identifies, names, and changes object groups.
Group Name
Displays the names of existing groups.
Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected. When the PICKSTYLE system variable is set to 0, no
groups are selectable.
Group Identification
Displays the name and description (if any) of the group selected in the Group
Name list.
Group Name Specifies the group name. Group names can be up to 31
characters long and can include letters, numbers, and
the special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and
underscore (_) but not spaces. AutoCAD converts the
name to uppercase characters.
GROUP | 395
Description Displays the description of the selected group, if there
is one.
Find Name Lists the groups to which an object belongs.
Pick a member of a group: Select one object
AutoCAD displays the Group Member List dialog box,

showing the groups to which the object belongs.
Highlight Shows the members of the selected group. AutoCAD
highlights the member objects in the drawing area.
Include Specifies whether unnamed groups are listed. When
Unnamed this option is cleared, only named groups are displayed.
Create Group
Specifies properties of new groups.
New Creates a new group from the selected objects. After you
select the objects, AutoCAD creates a group using the
name and description under Group Name and
Description.
AutoCAD displays the group name in the Group Name
desk, computer, and list.
telephone selected
Selectable Specifies that a new group is selectable.
Unnamed Indicates that a new group is unnamed. AutoCAD
assigns a default name, *An, to unnamed groups. The n
represents a number that increases with each new
group.
Change Group
Modifies existing groups.
Remove Removes objects from the selected group. To use this
option, clear the Selectable option.
Remove objects: Use an object selection method
AutoCAD removes the selected objects from the group

and redisplays the Object Grouping dialog box.
396 | GROUP
telephone selected telephone removed
from group
If you remove all the group’s objects, the group remains

defined. You can remove the group definition from the
drawing by using the Explode option.
Note When you remove objects from a group and then
later add them back during the same drawing session,
AutoCAD returns them to their previous position in the
numerical order of the group.
Add Adds objects to the selected group.
AutoCAD adds the selected objects to the group and

redisplays the Object Grouping dialog box.
chair selected chair added to group
Note AutoCAD alphabetizes the order of the group

names.
Rename Renames the selected group to the name entered in
Group Name under Group Identification.
Re-Order Displays the Order Group dialog box (see page 398), in
which you can change the numerical order of objects
within the selected group. AutoCAD numbers objects in
the order in which you select them for inclusion in the
group. Reordering is useful when creating tool paths.
For example, you can change the order in which
AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool
path pattern.
GROUP | 397
You can either change the numerical position of
individual group members or ranges of group members
or reverse the order of all members. The first object in a
group is number 0, not number 1.
Description Updates the selected group’s description to the name
that you enter in Description. AutoCAD accepts up to
64 characters for a description name.
Explode Deletes the definition of the selected group. The group’s
objects remain in the drawing.
Selectable Specifies whether the group is selectable.
Order Group Dialog Box

Reorders objects in groups.
Group Name Displays the names of all groups.

Description Displays the description of the selected group.
Remove from Specifies the current position of the object to reorder.
Position (0–n)
Replace at Specifies the position to which the object moves.
Position (0–n)
398 | GROUP
Number of Specifies the object number or range of numbers to
Objects (1–n) reorder.
Re-Order Changes the numerical order of objects as specified.
Highlight Displays the members of the selected group. AutoCAD
highlights the group members in the drawing area, one
by one, in the current group order.
Reverse Order Reverses the order of all group members.
GROUP Command Line

If you enter -group at the Command prompt, GROUP displays prompts on
the command line.
Enter a group option
[?/Order/Add/Remove/Explode/REName/Selectable/Create] <Create>: Enter
?—List Groups
Lists names and descriptions of groups defined in the drawing.
Enter group name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all groups
Order
Changes the numerical order of objects within a group. Reordering is useful
when creating tool paths. For example, you can change the order in which
AutoCAD cuts the horizontal and vertical lines of a tool path pattern.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name list or enter ? to list all groups
Enter position number of the object to reorder (0 - n) or [Reverse order]: Enter
a position number or enter r
Position Number Specifies the position number of the object to reorder.

To reorder a range of objects, specify the first object’s
position number.
Replace at position <0 - n>: Enter the position number to
which you want the object to move
Number of objects to re-order <0 - n>: Enter the number
of objects to reorder
Reverse Order Reverses the order of all members in a group.
GROUP | 399
Add
Adds objects to a group.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list all groups
Select objects to add to group...
Select objects:
Remove
Removes objects from a group.
Select objects to remove from group...
Remove objects:
If you remove all the group’s objects, the group remains defined. You can
remove the group definition from the drawing by using the Explode option.
Explode
Deletes a group definition by exploding the group into its component
objects.
Rename
Assigns a new name to an existing group.
Enter a group name to rename or [?]: Enter an existing group name or enter ? to
list all groups
Enter a new name for group or [?]: Enter a new name or enter ? to list all groups
Selectable
Specifies whether a group is selectable. When a group is selectable, selecting
one object in the group selects the whole group. Objects on locked or frozen
layers are not selected.
This group is current, do you want to change it [Yes/No]? <Y>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER
Create
Creates a group.
Enter a group name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
400 | GROUP
Group names can be up to 31 characters long and can include letters, num-
bers, and special characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_) but
not spaces. AutoCAD converts the name to uppercase characters.
Enter a group description: Enter up to 64 text characters or press ENTER
Select objects:
See Also
See “Group Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands FILTER creates lists used to select objects based on prop-
erties. With SELECT you can select groups by name at
the Select Objects prompt.
System Variables PICKSTYLE controls whether groups are selectable.
GROUP | 401
402
HATCH
Fills an area with a nonassociative hatch pattern
A nonassociative hatch is not updated when its boundaries are modified. A
hatch boundary consists of an object or objects that completely enclose an
area. If the boundary is made up of multiple objects, their endpoints must
coincide for the hatch to be created properly. You can also fill an area that
does not have a closed boundary, by defining a polyline hatch boundary
with the Direct Hatch option.
Unless you specify otherwise, HATCH combines the lines that make up the
hatch into a block.
Hatches are stored as single hatch objects, which can reduce the amount of
disk space a drawing occupies and can also reduce regeneration time.
Note By default, AutoCAD won’t create a hatch pattern that consists of over
10,000 segments. The limit is set by the MaxHatch setting in the registry. To
reset the limit to 50,000, for example, enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "50000") at
the Command prompt. The limit can be reset to any value between 100 and
10,000,000.
Command line: hatch
Enter a pattern name or [?/Solid/User defined] <current>: Enter a predefined or

custom pattern name, enter an option, or press ENTER
Use BHATCH to create hatches and fills in a dialog box and to create associa-
tive hatches.
Pattern Name—Predefined or Custom

Specifies a predefined pattern in the acad.pat or acadiso.pat file or a custom
pattern in its own PAT file. Enter the name followed by an optional hatch
style code. Precede the name with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individ-
ual lines instead of a hatch block.
Specify a scale for the pattern <current>: Specify a value or press ENTER
If the drawing is in model space and you enter a scale factor followed by xp,
scale=.5 scale=1 AutoCAD calculates a scale factor relative to paper space.
Specify an angle for pattern <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Select objects to define hatch boundary or <direct hatch>,
angle=0 angle=30 Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary
HATCH | 403
Select Objects Uses the selected objects to define the outer boundary
of the hatching area and objects internal to the
hatching boundary. Selecting part of a block for
hatching selects the entire block. Press ENTER to end
the command and create the hatch.
Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the

hatching area.
Retain polyline boundary? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to
retain the hatch boundary or n to discard it after the area is
hatched
Specify start point: Specify a start point for the polyline
define boundary boundary
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a
point, enter an option, or press ENTER
These options are also available in the PLINE command.

When you complete the polyline boundary, press
retain boundary ENTER . HATCH prompts you to create additional
polyline boundaries.
Specify start point for new boundary or <apply hatch>:
Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a hatch to the exist-
discard boundary ing hatch boundary
If you specify a point, AutoCAD prompts you for

additional points. Press ENTER to end the command
and create the hatch.
?—List Pattern Names

Lists and provides a brief description of the hatch patterns defined in the
acad.pat or acadiso.pat files.
Enter pattern(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER to list all patterns
404 | HATCH
Solid
Specifies a solid fill.
Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary
of the fill area and objects internal to the fill boundary.
Selecting part of a block for solid fill selects the entire
block. Press ENTER to end the command and create the
solid fill.
Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the fill
area.
retain the fill boundary or n to discard it after the area is
filled
boundary

ENTER . HATCH prompts you to create additional
Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a solid fill to the
existing fill boundary

and create the solid fill.
Note The boundary of a solid fill hatch must be closed
and must not intersect itself. In addition, if the hatch area
contains more than one loop, the loops must not intersect.
These limitations do not apply to standard hatch patterns.
HATCH | 405
User-Defined Pattern
Specifies a pattern of lines using the current linetype. Enter u, followed
optionally by a hatch style code (see “Hatch Style Codes” on page 407). Pre-
cede the u with an asterisk (*) to fill the area with individual lines instead of
a hatch block.
Specify angle for crosshatch lines <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Specify spacing between the lines <current>: Specify the distance between the
lines or press ENTER
Double hatch area? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y to specify a second set of lines to
be drawn at 90 degrees to the original lines
Select objects: Select objects or press ENTER to define a polyline boundary
of the hatching area and objects internal to the
hatching boundary. Selecting part of a block for
hatching selects the entire block. Press ENTER to end
the command and create the hatch.
Direct Hatch Uses specified points to define the boundary of the
hatching area.
retain the hatch boundary or n to discard it after the area is
hatched
boundary

ENTER . HATCH prompts you to create additional
Specify a point or press ENTER to apply a hatch to the exist-
ing hatch boundary

and create the hatch.
406 | HATCH
Hatch Style Codes
Hatching styles control the method that AutoCAD uses to hatch internal
boundary objects. Specify a hatch style by following the pattern name with
a comma and the hatch style code. You can list the hatch style codes by fol-
lowing the pattern name with a comma (,) and a question mark (?).
For example, to hatch only the outermost area of a structure with several
internal boundaries using the MUDST pattern, enter mudst,o at the Pattern
prompt. To opt for a user-defined pattern and use the Ignore style, enter u,i.
AutoCAD stores the style by adding the comma and code to the pattern
name in the HPNAME system variable.
n (Normal) Hatches inward from the outermost area boundary. If
AutoCAD encounters an internal boundary, it turns off
hatching until it encounters another boundary. Thus,
areas separated from the outside of the hatched area by
an odd number of boundaries are hatched, and areas
separated by an even number of boundaries are not.
o (Outer) Hatches outermost areas only. This style hatches
inward from the area boundary, but it turns off
hatching if it encounters an internal boundary and
does not turn it back on again. Because this process
starts from both ends of each hatch line, this style
hatches only the outermost area of the structure and
leaves the internal structure blank.
i (Ignore) Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.
? (List Styles) Lists hatch styles.
Note Hatching concave curves using the Outer and
Ignore styles can cause discrepancies.
See Also
See “Standard Libraries” and “Hatches, Fills, and Wipeouts” in the User’s
Guide. For information about the acad.pat file and creating your own hatch
patterns, see “Custom Hatch Patterns” in the Customization Guide.
HATCH | 407
Commands BHATCH fills an enclosed area with a hatch pattern.
CONVERT converts 2D polylines and associative hatches
to the optimized Release 14 format. PLINE creates two-
dimensional polylines.
System Variables HPANG sets the hatching angle. HPDOUBLE specifies
whether a user-defined hatch is double-hatched.
HPNAME sets the hatch pattern name. HPSCALE sets the
hatch pattern scale. HPSPACE sets the spacing of a user-
defined hatch pattern. SNAPBASE specifies the start
point of the hatch pattern. FILLMODE controls the
display of all hatch objects created using Release 14 or
later.
HATCHEDIT
Modifies an existing hatch or gradient fill
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Hatch
Shortcut menu: Select a hatch object to edit, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Hatch Edit.
Command line: hatchedit
Select associative hatch object: Use an object selection method
The Hatch Edit dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, HATCHEDIT displays
Hatch Edit Dialog Box

Modifies the characteristics of an existing hatch or gradient fill. The Hatch
Edit dialog box displays the current properties of the selected hatch or fill
object. You can modify only the available properties.
408 | HATCHEDIT
Hatch Tab Modifies the hatch pattern properties. For information
about these options, see “HatchTab (Boundary Hatch
and Fill Dialog Box)” on page 110.
Advanced Tab Modifies the island detection style. The other options
on this tab are unavailable. See “Island Detection Style”
on page 112.
Gradient Tab Modifies the gradient fill properties. For information
about these options, see “Gradient Tab (Boundary
Hatch and Fill Dialog Box)” on page 115.
Inherit Properties Applies the properties of a selected hatch or fill object
to the object you are editing.
Double For user-defined patterns, draws a second set of lines
positioned at 90 degrees to the original lines, creating a
crosshatch. AutoCAD stores this information in the
HPDOUBLE system variable. This option is available only
if you set Type to User Defined on the Hatch tab.
This option is not available for gradient fills.
Composition Controls whether the hatch is associative or
nonassociative. See “Composition” on page 109.
Preview Temporarily dismisses the dialog box and displays the
selected object with the specified properties.
HATCHEDIT | 409
HATCHEDIT Command Line
If you enter -hatchedit at the Command prompt, HATCHEDIT displays
prompts on the command line.
Select associative hatch object:
Enter hatch option [Disassociate/Style/Properties] <Properties>: Enter an option
or press ENTER
Note You may have difficulty when trying to select a solid-fill hatch pattern
because there are no visible grips or lines to click. For best results, either click the
outer edges of the hatch pattern or use a crossing window selection.
Disassociate
Removes the associative quality from an associative hatch.
Style
Changes the hatch style type. AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter hatching style [Ignore/Outer/Normal] <current>:
Note Hatching concave curves with the Outer and Ignore styles can cause
hatching discrepancies.
Ignore Ignores all internal objects and hatches through them.

AutoCAD stores the Ignore style code by adding ,I to the
pattern name in the HPNAME system variable.
Outer Hatches outermost areas only. This style hatches
inward from the area boundary, but it turns off
hatching if it encounters an internal boundary and
does not turn it back on again. Because this process
starts from both ends of each hatch line, this style
hatches only the outermost area of the structure and
leaves the internal structure blank.
AutoCAD stores the Outer style code by adding ,O to
Normal Hatches inward from the outer boundary. If AutoCAD
encounters an internal boundary, it turns off hatching
until it encounters another boundary. Thus, areas
separated from the outside of the hatched area by an
odd number of boundaries are hatched, and areas
410 | HATCHEDIT
separated by an even number of boundaries are not.
AutoCAD stores the Normal style code by adding ,N to
Properties
Specifies new hatch properties for the selected hatch. For an explanation of
setting pattern properties on the command line, see BHATCH.
See Also
See “Modify Hatches and Solid-Filled Areas” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BHATCH fills an enclosed area or selected objects with a
hatch pattern or gradient fill. CONVERT converts 2D
polylines and associative hatches to the optimized
Release 14 format. HATCH fills a specified boundary.
EXPLODE breaks a compound object into its component
objects.
System Variables HPANG sets the hatching angle. HPDOUBLE specifies
whether a user-defined hatch is double-hatched.
HPNAME sets the hatch pattern name. HPSCALE sets the
hatch pattern scale. HPSPACE sets the spacing of a user-
defined hatch pattern. SNAPBASE specifies the starting
point for the hatch pattern.
AutoCAD won’t create a hatch pattern that consists of over 10,000 segments.
The limit is set by the MAXHATCH setting in the registry. The limit can be
reset to any value between 100 and 10,000,000. For example, to reset the
limit to 8,000, enter (setenv "MaxHatch" "8000") at the Command prompt.
HELP
Displays Help
Standard toolbar:
Help menu: Help
Command line: help or ? or press F1 (or 'help for transparent use)
To display Help for a menu, open the menu, and then press F1 .
Pressing F1 or entering 'help while a command is active displays Help for that
command. Choosing the Help button in a dialog box displays Help for that
dialog box.
HELP | 411
See Also
Commands ASSIST opens a window that provides automatic or on-
demand context-sensitive Help.
HIDE
Regenerates a three-dimensional model with hidden lines suppressed
When you use VPOINT, DVIEW, or VIEW to create a 3D view of your drawing,
AutoCAD produces a wireframe display in the current viewport. All lines are
present, including those hidden by other objects. HIDE eliminates the hidden
lines from the screen.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Hide
Command line: hide
HIDE considers the following to be opaque surfaces that hide objects: circles,
solids, traces, text, regions, wide polyline segments, 3D faces, polygon
meshes, and the extruded edges of objects with nonzero thickness.
If they are extruded, AutoCAD treats circles, solids, traces, and wide polyline
segments as solid objects with top and bottom faces. You cannot use HIDE on
objects whose layers have been frozen; however, you can use HIDE on objects
whose layers have been turned off.
In order to hide text created with DTEXT, MTEXT, or TEXT, the HIDETEXT
system variable must be set to 1 or the text must be assigned a thickness
value.
When using the HIDE command, if the INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable
before HIDE
is on, face-to-face intersections of 3D surfaces are displayed as polylines.
after HIDE
412 | HIDE
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY INTERSECTIONDISPLAY
set to off set to on
If the DISPSILH system variable is on, HIDE displays 3D solid objects with
silhouette edges only. It won’t show the internal edges produced by objects
that have facets.
If the HIDETEXT system variable is off, HIDE ignores text objects when produc-
ing the hidden view. Text objects are always displayed regardless of whether
they are obscured by other objects, and objects obscured by text objects are
unaffected.
See Also
See “Hide Lines or Shade 3D Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DVIEW defines parallel projection or perspective views
on the screen as you change views. VIEW saves and
restores named views. VPOINT sets the viewing direc-
tion for a 3D visualization of the current drawing.
HLSETTINGS
Changes the display properties of hidden lines
Command line: hlsettings
The Hidden Line Settings dialog box is displayed. The settings in this dialog
box affect the display properties of hidden lines.
HLSETTINGS | 413
Hidden Line Settings Dialog Box
Sets the display properties of hidden lines. These settings are visible only
when the HIDE command or the Hidden option of the SHADEMODE
command is used.
Obscured Lines
Specifies the linetype and color of obscured lines. An obscured line is a hid-
den line that is made visible by changing its color and linetype.
Linetype Lists the available linetypes to apply to obscured lines.
Unlike regular linetypes, obscured linetypes are not
affected by zoom level.
You can also set this option by using the
OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable.
Color Lists the available colors to apply to obscured lines.

You can also change this setting by using the
OBSCUREDCOLOR system variable.
Halo Gap Percentage

Specifies the distance to shorten a haloed line. A haloed line is shortened at
the point where it will be hidden.
The distance is specified as a percentage of one inch and is not affected by
zoom level.
You can also change this setting by using the HALOGAP system variable.
414 | HLSETTINGS
Include Text in HIDE Operations
Specifies whether text objects created by the TEXT, DTEXT, or MTEXT
commands are included during a HIDE command.
You can also set this option by using the HIDETEXT system variable.
Face Intersections
Specifies the display and color of intersection polylines. An intersection
polyline displays at the face-to-face intersection of 3D surfaces.
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY INTERSECTIONDISPLAY
set to off set to on
Display Specifies the display of intersection polylines.

Intersections
You can also set this option by using the
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable.
Color Lists the available colors to apply to intersection

polylines.
You can also change this setting by using the
INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable.
Hide Precision
Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Hides can be set to either low (sin-
gle) precision or high (double) precision. You can also change this setting by
using the HIDEPRECISION system variable.
Low (single) Sets the hide precision to low (single), which uses less
memory.
HLSETTINGS | 415
High (double) Sets the hide precision to high (double), which
produces more precise hides, but also uses more
memory and can affect performance, especially when
hiding solids.
HYPERLINK
Attaches a hyperlink to an object or modifies an existing hyperlink
Insert menu: Hyperlink
Shortcut menu: To edit a hyperlink, select an object that contains a hyper-
link, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Hyperlink ➤ Edit Hyperlink.
Command line: hyperlink
AutoCAD displays one of the following dialog boxes depending on the object
you selected:
■ Insert Hyperlink dialog box (for graphical objects that do not already con-
tain hyperlinks)
■ Edit Hyperlink dialog box (see page 419) (for graphical objects that already
contain hyperlinks)
After you insert a hyperlink, the hyperlink icon is displayed when you move
the cursor over the attached object. To open the hyperlink, right-click the
selected object and choose Hyperlink. The PICKFIRST system variable must be
set to 1 to open files associated with hyperlinks.
If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt, HYPERLINK displays options
on the command line, including an option to define an area to associate with
a hyperlink (see page 420).
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box

Attaches hyperlinks to graphical objects.
Text to Display Specifies a description for the hyperlink. This is useful

when the file name or URL is not helpful in identifying
the contents of the linked file.
416 | HYPERLINK
Existing File or Web Page Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)
Creates a hyperlink to an existing file or web page.
Type the File or Specifies the file or web page to associate with the
Web Page Name hyperlink. The file can be stored locally, on a network
drive, or on an Internet or intranet location.
Recent Files Displays a list of recently linked files, from which you
can select one to link to.
Browsed Pages Displays a list of recently browsed web pages, from
which you can select one to link to.
Inserted Links Displays a list of recently inserted hyperlinks, from
which you can select one to link to.
File Opens the Browse the Web—Select Hyperlink dialog
box (a standard file selection dialog box), in which you
can navigate to the file that you want to associate with
the hyperlink.
Web Page Opens the AutoCAD browser, in which you can
navigate to a web page that you want to associate with
the hyperlink.
Target Opens the Select Place in Document dialog box (see
page 419), in which you can select a named location in
a drawing to link to.
HYPERLINK | 417
Path Displays the path to the file associated with the
hyperlink. If Use Relative Path for Hyperlink is selected,
only the file name is listed. If Use Relative Path for
Hyperlink is cleared, the full path and the file name are
listed.
Use Relative Path Sets a relative path for hyperlinks. If you select this
for Hyperlink option, the full path to the linked file is not stored with
the hyperlink. AutoCAD sets the relative path to the
value specified by the HYPERLINKBASE system variable
or, if no value is specified for HYPERLINKBASE, to the
current drawing path. If this option is cleared, the full
path to the associated file is stored with the hyperlink.
View of This Drawing Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)

Specifies a named view in the current drawing to link to.
Select a View of Displays an expandable tree view of the named views

This within the current drawing, from which you can select
one to link to.
E-mail Address Tab (Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box)

Specifies an email address to link to. When the hyperlink is executed, a new
email is created using the default system email program.
418 | HYPERLINK
E-mail Address Specifies an email address.
Subject Specifies a subject for the email.
Recently Used Lists recently used email addresses, from which you can
E-mail Addresses select one to use for the hyperlink.
Edit Hyperlink Dialog Box

Edits hyperlinks. The Edit Hyperlink dialog box is a modified version of the
Insert Hyperlink dialog box, with one additional option.
Remove Link Deletes the hyperlink from the selected objects.
Select Place in Document Dialog Box

Navigates to a view or layout within a drawing. The named location that you
select is the initial view that is restored when the hyperlink is executed.
Select an Existing Provides an expandable tree view of the named
Place in the locations within the linked drawing, from which you
Document can select a named location to link to.
HYPERLINK | 419
HYPERLINK Command Line
If you enter -hyperlink at the Command prompt, HYPERLINK displays options
on the command line. The command line version of HYPERLINK inserts
hyperlinks to areas or to selected objects and also removes hyperlinks.
Enter an option [Remove/Insert] <Insert>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Remove
Removes the hyperlink from the selected objects. If a selection set does not
exist, AutoCAD prompts you to create one.
Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing
If the selection set contains more than one hyperlink, AutoCAD presents a
numbered list on the command line of all the hyperlinks that were found.
Enter number, hyperlink, or * for all: Enter the number or name of the hyperlink,
or enter * to remove all hyperlinks in the selection set
AutoCAD displays the number of removed hyperlinks on the command line.
Insert
Attaches a hyperlink to an object or an area.
Enter hyperlink insert option [Area/Object] <Object>: Select a method for
attaching a hyperlink
Area Defines a bounding rectangle and places it on a layer

called URLLAYER. If this layer doesn’t exist in the current
drawing, AutoCAD creates it.
Note To turn off the display of hyperlink bounding
rectangles in the drawing area or in your drawing plots,
you must freeze the URLLAYER layer. See “Use Layers to
Manage Complexity” in the User’s Guide.
First corner: Specify the start point of the rectangle
Other corner: Specify the end point of the rectangle
AutoCAD prompts you to enter the path to the file you

want associated with the hyperlink.
420 | HYPERLINK
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter the full path to a
local file or the complete URL to an Internet file, or press ENTER
to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current drawing
AutoCAD prompts you to enter a named location for the

hyperlink, such as a view in an AutoCAD drawing or a
bookmark in a word processing file.
Enter named location <none>: Enter the named location, or
press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one
Enter named description <none>: Enter a description, or
Object Specifies graphical objects to attach the hyperlink to.

Select objects: Select graphical objects in the drawing
AutoCAD prompts you to enter the path to the file you

want associated with the hyperlink.
Enter hyperlink <current drawing>: Enter the full path to a
local file or the complete URL to an Internet file, or press ENTER
to create a hyperlink to a named view in the current drawing
AutoCAD prompts you to enter a named location for the

hyperlink, such as a view in an AutoCAD drawing or a
bookmark in a word processing file.
Enter named location <none>: Enter the named location, or
Enter description <none>: Enter a descriptive name for the
hyperlink, or press ENTER to create the hyperlink without one
See Also
See “Overview of Using Hyperlinks in a Drawing” in the User’s Guide.
HYPERLINKOPTIONS
Controls the display of the hyperlink cursor and tooltips
Command line: hyperlinkoptions
Display hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu? [Yes/No] <Yes>: If you enter y to
display the hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu, AutoCAD displays an additional
prompt.
Display hyperlink tooltip? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y to display hyperlink tooltips
HYPERLINKOPTIONS | 421
422
ID
Displays the coordinate of a location
Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ ID Point
Command line: id (or 'id for transparent use)
Point: Use the pointing device to specify a point
The UCS coordinate of the location is displayed on the command line.

ID lists the X, Y, and Z values of the specified point and stores the coordinate
of the specified point as the last point. You can reference the last point by
entering @ at the next prompt that requests a point.
If you snap to an object in 3D space, the Z coordinate value is the same as
that of the selected feature of the object.
See Also
System Variables LASTPOINT stores the coordinate information.
IMAGE
Manages images
In the Image Manager, you can attach or detach a raster or bit-mapped
bitonal, 8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image file to a drawing. You can
reload and unload images, as well as specify a new path for the images. You
can view image details such as pixel width, color depth, and resolution of the
selected image. IMAGE can combine images in a variety of formats (including
BMP, TIFF, RLE, JPG, PCX, and TGA) with AutoCAD drawings. You can dis-
play more than one image in any viewport. AutoCAD does not limit the
number and size of images.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Image Manager
Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Image ➤ Image Manager.
Command line: image
The Image Manager is displayed.
ID | 423
If you enter -image at the Command prompt, IMAGE displays prompts on the
Image Manager
Lists all the image files attached to the current drawing. You can view the
parameters and details for selected images. You can attach new image files
and detach, locate, reload, and unload attached images.
List of Images
Displays the names of all image files attached to the drawing. You can use F3
and F4 to toggle between list view and tree view.
List View Lists the image definitions attached to the drawing.
Each image name appears only once regardless of how
many times the image is attached (inserted). You can
sort the list of images by name, status (loaded,
unloaded, or not found), type (TIFF, for example), date,
size, or the saved path and file name. By default,
AutoCAD displays the list alphabetically by image
name.
■ To select multiple images, hold down SHIFT or CTRL

while selecting items.
■ To sort the list alphabetically or numerically by a
specific column, click that column’s heading.
424 | IMAGE
■ To change the width of the column, drag the line
between the column headings to the right or left.
AutoCAD saves and restores the settings when you
reopen the dialog box.
■ To change an image name, select it and then click it
again, or select it and then press F2 . You cannot edit
names of images that reside in external references
(xrefs). Image names can include up to 255
characters and can contain letters, digits, spaces, and
any special characters not used by
Microsoft® Windows® or AutoCAD. The image
name can be identical to the file name, but changing
the image name does not change the file name.
Tree View Displays all the image definitions and the levels of
nesting of images within xrefs. The top level of the tree
view shows images that you attached directly to the
drawing, images nested in block references, and the
names of externally referenced drawings containing
images. The names of the images attached to the
externally referenced drawings appear nested within
the drawing at the next tree level. To insert a copy of an
already attached image, select it, and then choose
Attach.
Tree view lists the image names only (not file names)
and lists the image name just once, regardless of how
many times the image is attached (insert).
You can edit an image name by selecting it and then
clicking it again, or by selecting it and then pressing F2 .
However, you cannot select more than one image at a
time.
Attach
Displays the Select Image File dialog box. See IMAGEATTACH. When you
unload and then reload an image, AutoCAD draws that image on top. For
more information about how to control where and how AutoCAD places the
image, see SORTENTS and DRAWORDER. Images remain loaded or unloaded
from one drawing session to the next.
Detach
Removes the selected image definitions from the drawing database and erases
all the associated image objects from the drawing and from the display.
IMAGE | 425
Reload
Loads the most recent version of an image or reloads an image that was
previously unloaded. Reloading does not control whether the image is
displayed, but it ensures display of the most current image.
Unload
Unloads image data from working memory without erasing the image
objects from the drawing. It is recommended that you unload images no
longer needed for editing to improve performance. An unloaded image
cannot be displayed or plotted.
You can selectively load and unload individual images from a working list of
images associated with the drawing file.
Details
Opens the Image File Details dialog box, which displays the image name,
saved path, active path, file creation date and time, file size and type, color
system, color depth, width and height in pixels, resolution, default size in
units, and a preview image.
Image Found At
Shows the path of the selected image. If you select multiple images, this field
remains blank. The path shown is the actual path where the image resides. If
AutoCAD does not find the file at the path in the Saved Path column,
AutoCAD first searches the standard AutoCAD search path for the image’s
saved path. (See “Specify Search Paths, File Names, and File Locations” in the
User’s Guide.) If AutoCAD cannot locate the drawing (for example, if you have
moved the file to a different directory than the one that was saved with the
image), it removes relative or absolute path information from the name (for
example, \images\tree.tga or c:\my project\images\tree.tga become tree.tga)
and searches the paths defined in the Project Files Search Path in the Options
426 | IMAGE
dialog box. If the drawing does not reside in the paths specified in the Project
Files search paths, AutoCAD attempts the first search path again. See “Project
Files Search Path” on page 635.
Browse
Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
The path you select appears under Image Found At. See IMAGEATTACH.
Save Path
Stores the new path information. Press ESC while editing the path to restore
the old path. If AutoCAD cannot find the referenced image in the new path,
the image’s status changes to Not Found. If you do not choose Save Path after
editing the path, AutoCAD uses the original image path the next time you
load the drawing.
IMAGE Command Line

If you enter -image at the Command prompt, IMAGE displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter image option [?/Detach/Path/Reload/Unload/Attach/] <Attach>: Enter an
?—List Images
Lists the images by name in alphabetical order, the number of times each is
attached to the drawing, and the path where the image is stored. AutoCAD
lists images in alphabetical order, regardless of the setting of the MAXSORT
system variable.
Images to list <*>: Enter * to list all images, or enter an image name
Detach
Detaches the named image from the drawing, marks it for deletion, and
erases all occurrences of the image.
Enter list of images to detach: Enter an image name, or enter * to detach all
images
IMAGE | 427
Path
Updates the path name (including file name) associated with a particular
image. This option is useful if you change the location of an image file,
rename the file, or replace an old image file with a new file; for instance, you
can update image01.pcx and save it as image02.pcx.
Enter list of images for path modification: Enter an image name, or enter * to list
all images
If you enter an asterisk (*), AutoCAD lists the current path name for each
image and prompts for the new path.
Old path: Lists the current path name for each image
Enter New path: Enter the new path name for the specified image
Reload
Reloads the selected images. AutoCAD reads image data into memory, mak-
ing that information available for display and plotting.
Enter list of images to reload: Enter an image name, or enter * to reload all images
Reloading...
Reload image <image name>: <hard-coded path name>
<image name> loaded and relinked.
Unload
Removes image data from working memory so that the images are not dis-
played, thus improving performance. All information associated with the
image remains stored with the drawing. The image frame of each attached
image remains visible.
Enter list of images to unload: Enter a loaded image name, or enter * to unload
all images
Attach
Attaches a new image or a copy of an attached image to the current drawing.
AutoCAD displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box).
428 | IMAGE
AutoCAD assigns the file name without the extension as the image name.
Image names can include up to 255 characters and contain letters, digits,
spaces, and any special characters not used by Microsoft Windows or
AutoCAD. If the file name is not a valid name for a nongraphical object, the
Substitute Image Name dialog box is displayed. AutoCAD automatically gen-
erates a valid image name from the file name and appends an underscore and
number to the name, changing the number as necessary to avoid duplicate
image names.
Image file name_1 created from file file name.bmp
If a definition with the same name and path exists in the drawing, AutoCAD
displays the following prompts and inserts the image as a copy:
Image file name has already been loaded.
Use IMAGE Reload to update its definition.
Specify insertion point <0,0>: Specify an insertion point
Base image size: Width: current width, Height: current height, current unit
Specify scale factor: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, AutoCAD displays the following

prompt instead of the dialog box:
Enter image file name to attach <last>: Enter an image name
The last image name attached to the drawing during the current session is the
default. To avoid errors when entering an image name, it is recommended
that you specify both the image name and the file name as follows:
imagename=path name\long file name.bmp
or
imagename="path name\long file name.bmp"
If you enter a valid image name without a file extension, AutoCAD searches
for the file in this order: first, an existing image definition in the drawing,
and second, an image file in the folders in order of the search path. AutoCAD
searches for all the image files with the specified name, regardless of exten-
sion, and uses the first name found. If no image name or image file is found,
AutoCAD displays the message “Image Not Found” and repeats the prompt.
IMAGE | 429
To specify a long file name that does not conform to AutoCAD naming rules,
enter the name as follows:
"imagename=filename"
You can use a dialog box to search for image files but still enter the
imagename=filename convention on the command line. Enter a tilde (~) at the
Enter Image File Name to Attach prompt. If you press ESC after the dialog box
opens, AutoCAD redisplays the Enter Image Name prompt.
See Also
Commands IMAGEADJUST controls the brightness, contrast, and
fade values of images. IMAGEATTACH attaches an image
object and definition. IMAGECLIP creates new clipping
boundaries for an image object. IMAGEFRAME controls
whether AutoCAD displays the image frame or hides it
from view. IMAGEQUALITY controls the display quality
of images. TRANSPARENCY controls whether the back-
ground of images is transparent or opaque. DRAWORDER
changes the display order of images and other objects.
IMAGEADJUST
Controls the image display of the brightness, contrast, and fade values of images
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Image ➤ Adjust
Shortcut menu: Select an image to adjust, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Image ➤ Adjust.
Command line: imageadjust
Select image(s): Select one or more images
AutoCAD displays the Image Adjust dialog box.

If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt, IMAGEADJUST displays
430 | IMAGEADJUST
Image Adjust Dialog Box
Controls how the image is displayed by adjusting the brightness, contrast
and fade settings of the selected image. Adjusting these values changes the
display of the image but does not change the image file itself.
Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of

the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The
greater the value, the brighter the image and the more
pixels that become white when you increase contrast.
Moving the slider to the left decreases the value;
moving the slider to the right increases the value.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect,
of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The
greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its
primary or secondary color. Moving the slider to the left
decreases the value; moving the slider to the right
increases the value.
Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range
from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more the
image blends with the current background color. A
value of 100 blends the image completely into the
background. Changing the screen background color
causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting,
the background color for fade is white. Moving the
slider to the left decreases the value; moving the slider
to the right increases the value.
IMAGEADJUST | 431
Image Preview Displays a preview of the selected image. The preview
image updates dynamically to reflect changes to the
brightness, contrast, and fade settings.
Reset Resets values for brightness, contrast, and fade to
default settings (50, 50, and 0, respectively).
IMAGEADJUST Command Line

If you enter -imageadjust at the Command prompt, IMAGEADJUST displays
prompts on the command line. With the command line version of
IMAGEADJUST, you can select more than one image to adjust.
Select image (s): Select one or more images

Enter image option [Contrast/Fade/Brightness] <Brightness>: Enter c or f, or
press ENTER to adjust brightness
If you selected a single image, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and
Fade are the current property settings of the image selected. If you selected
multiple images, the default values for Brightness, Contrast, and Fade are 50,
50, and 0, respectively.
Contrast Controls the contrast, and indirectly the fading effect,
of the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The
greater the value, the more each pixel is forced to its
primary or secondary color.
Enter contrast value (0-100) <50>: Enter a value
Fade Controls the fading effect of the image. Values range

from 0 through 100. The greater the value, the more the
image blends with the current background color. A
value of 100 blends the image completely into the
background. Changing the screen background color
causes the image to fade to the new color. In plotting,
the background color for fade is white.
Enter fade value (0-100) <0>: Enter a value
432 | IMAGEADJUST
Brightness Controls the brightness, and indirectly the contrast, of
the image. Values range from 0 through 100. The
greater the value, the brighter the image and the more
pixels that become white when you increase contrast.
Enter brightness value (0-100) <50>: Enter a value
See Also
Commands IMAGE attaches, detaches, reloads, unloads, changes the
path of, and shows details of images. IMAGEATTACH
attaches a new image object. IMAGECLIP creates new
clipping boundaries for an image object. IMAGEFRAME
controls whether AutoCAD displays the image frame or
hides it from view. IMAGEQUALITY controls the display
quality of images. TRANSPARENCY controls whether the
background of images is transparent or opaque.
IMAGEATTACH
Attaches a new image to the current drawing
IMAGEATTACH opens the Select Image File dialog box without displaying the
Image Manager first. You can view and attach raster or bitmapped bitonal,
8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image files to a drawing. Attaching an
image creates an image definition, loads the image into memory, and
displays the image.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Raster Image
Command line: imageattach
AutoCAD displays the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Once you select an image file, AutoCAD displays the Image
dialog box.
IMAGEATTACH | 433
Image Dialog Box
Locates, inserts, names, and defines the parameters and details of attached
images.
Name
Identifies the image you have selected to attach, either from the Select Image
File dialog box (an unattached image) or from the list of previously attached
images. To add another instance of an image file that is already attached,
select the image name from the list and choose OK.
Browse Opens the Select Image File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). If Show Preview is selected,
AutoCAD displays a preview of the selected file.
Retain Path Saves the path of the image file with the image
definition. If Retain Path is not selected, only the image
name is saved and AutoCAD searches the Project Files
Search Path stored in the PROJECTNAME system
variable. If no paths are set with PROJECTNAME,
AutoCAD searches the Support File Search Path.
You can set PROJECTNAME on the command line or on
the Files tab in the Options dialog box (see page 633).
You can set the Support File Search Path on the Files tab
in the Options dialog box. See PROJECTNAME.
434 | IMAGEATTACH
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the selected image. Specify On-Screen is the
default. The default insertion point is 0,0.
Specify Directs input to the command line or the pointing
On-Screen device. If Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the
insertion point in X, Y, and Z.
X Sets the X coordinate value.
Y Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z Sets the Z coordinate value.
Scale
Specifies the scale factor of the selected image. Specify On-Screen directs
input to the command line or the pointing device. If Specify On-Screen is
cleared, enter a value for the scale factor. The default scale factor is 1.
If INSUNITS is set to “unitless” or if the image does not contain resolution
information, the scale factor becomes the image width in AutoCAD units. If
INSUNITS has a value such as millimeters, centimeters, inches, or feet, and the
image has resolution information, the scale factor is applied after the true
width of the image in AutoCAD units is determined.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the selected image. If Specify On-Screen is
selected, you may wait until you exit the dialog box to rotate the object with
your pointing device or enter a rotation angle value on the command line. If
Specify On-Screen is cleared, enter the rotation angle value in the dialog box.
The default rotation angle is 0.
Details
Displays the Image Information section. You can view width and height in
pixels, the resolution, and the size in units (such as millimeters, centimeters,
meters, kilometers, inches, feet, yards, miles, unitless, and many others). The
default value for unitless images is unitless. The image size is automatically
converted to AutoCAD units and is displayed at the default width and height.
Image information consists of the following:
■ Image resolution in horizontal and vertical pixels per drawing unit

■ Width and height in pixels
■ Width and height in current drawing units
IMAGEATTACH | 435
See Also
Commands IMAGEADJUST controls the brightness, contrast, and
fade values of images. IMAGE inserts images in many
formats into an AutoCAD drawing file. IMAGECLIP
creates new clipping boundaries for an image object.
IMAGEFRAME controls the display of the image frame.
IMAGEQUALITY controls the display quality of images.
TRANSPARENCY controls whether the background of
images is transparent or opaque. DRAWORDER changes
the display order of images and other objects.
System Variables INSUNITS specifies image units.
IMAGECLIP
Creates new clipping boundaries for an image object
With IMAGECLIP, you can define a subregion of an image for display and
plotting.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Clip ➤ Image
Shortcut menu: Select an image to clip, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Image ➤ Clip.
Command line: imageclip
Select image to clip: Select an edge of an image

Enter image clipping option [ON/OFF/Delete/New boundary] <New>: Enter an
The boundary you specify must be in a plane parallel to the image object.
On
Turns on clipping and displays the image clipped to the previously defined
boundary.
Off
Turns off clipping and displays the entire image and frame.
If you reclip the image while clipping is turned off, AutoCAD automatically
turns clipping back on. AutoCAD prompts you to delete the old boundary
even when clipping is turned off and the clipping boundary is not visible.
436 | IMAGECLIP
Delete
Removes a predefined clipping boundary and redisplays the full original
image.
New Boundary
Specifies a new clipping boundary. The boundary can be rectangular or
polygonal, and consists only of straight line segments. When defining a
clipping boundary, specify vertices within the image boundary.
Self-intersecting vertices are valid. Rectangular is the default option. If you
use the pointing device to specify a point at the Enter Clipping Type prompt,
AutoCAD interprets the point as the first corner of a rectangle.
Enter clipping type [Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: Enter p or press
ENTER
Polygonal Uses specified points to define a polygonal boundary.

Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter u
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point, or
enter c or u
You must specify at least three points to define a

polygon.
If the image already has a clipping boundary defined,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Delete old boundary? [No/Yes] <Yes>: Enter n or press
ENTER
If you choose Yes, AutoCAD redraws the entire image

and the command continues; if you choose No, the
command ends.
Rectangular Specifies a rectangular boundary by its opposite
corners. AutoCAD always draws the rectangle parallel
to the edges of the image.
Specify first corner point: Specify a point
Specify opposite corner point: Specify a point
IMAGECLIP | 437
See Also
Commands IMAGE inserts images in many formats into an
AutoCAD drawing file. IMAGEADJUST controls the
brightness, contrast, and fade values of images. IMAGE-
ATTACH attaches a new image object and definition.
IMAGEFRAME controls the display of the image frame.
IMAGEQUALITY controls the display quality of images.
TRANSPARENCY controls whether the background of
images is transparent or opaque.
System Variables IMAGEHLT highlights the selected raster image or the
image frame.
IMAGEFRAME
Controls whether image frames are displayed or hidden from view
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Image ➤ Frame
Command line: imageframe
Enter image frame setting [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Raster images can be displayed with or without a frame. Because you select
an image by clicking its frame, setting IMAGEFRAME to Off prevents you from
accidentally selecting an image.
On Displays image frames so you can select images.
Off Hides image frames so you cannot select images.
See Also
brightness, contrast, and fade values of images. IMAGE-
ATTACH attaches a new image object and definition.
IMAGECLIP creates new clipping boundaries for an
image object. IMAGEQUALITY controls the display qual-
ity of images. TRANSPARENCY controls whether the
background of images is transparent or opaque.
System Variables IMAGEHLT highlights the selected raster image or the
image frame.
438 | IMAGEFRAME
IMAGEQUALITY
Controls the display quality of images
The quality setting affects display performance; high-quality images take
longer to display. Changing the setting updates the display immediately
without causing a regeneration of the drawing. AutoCAD always plots images
using a high-quality display.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Image ➤ Quality
Command line: imagequality
Enter image quality setting [High/Draft] <current>: Enter an option or press

ENTER
High Produces a high-quality display of the image. AutoCAD

displays the image more slowly than a draft-quality
image.
Draft Produces a lower-quality display of the image.
AutoCAD displays the image more quickly than a high-
quality image.
See Also
brightness, contrast, and fade of images. IMAGEATTACH
attaches a new image object and definition. IMAGECLIP
creates new clipping boundaries for an image object.
IMAGEFRAME controls whether AutoCAD displays the
image frame or hides it from view. TRANSPARENCY con-
trols whether the background of images is transparent
or opaque.
IMAGEQUALITY | 439
IMPORT
Imports files in various formats into AutoCAD
Insert toolbar:
Command line: import
The Import File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
In Files of Type, select the format type to import. In File Name, select the file
to import. AutoCAD imports the file into the AutoCAD drawing. The follow-
ing input types are available:
■ WMF—Windows metafile (see WMFIN)

■ SAT—ACIS solid object file (see ACISIN)
■ 3DS—3D Studio file (see 3DSIN)
For the WMF file type, choosing Options from the Tools menu in this dialog
box displays the WMF In Options dialog box (see page 1125). You can display
this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS.
If FILEDIA = 0, AutoCAD displays the following prompt on the command line:
Enter import file name: Enter path and file name
See Also
Commands EXPORT saves objects to other file formats.
INSERT
Places a drawing or named block into the current drawing
Insert toolbar:
Insert menu: Block
Command line: insert
The Insert dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, INSERT displays prompts on the
440 | IMPORT
Insert Dialog Box
Specifies the name and position of the block or drawing to insert.
The last block you insert during the current editing session becomes the
default block for subsequent uses of INSERT. The position of the inserted block
depends on the orientation of the UCS.
Name
Specifies the name of a block to insert, or the name of a file to insert as a
block.
Browse Opens the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard
file selection dialog box) where you can select a block
or drawing file to insert.
Path Specifies the path to the block.
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point for the block.
Specify Specifies the insertion point of the block using the
On-Screen pointing device.
X Sets the X coordinate value.
Y Sets the Y coordinate value.
Z Sets the Z coordinate value.
Scale
Specifies the scale for the inserted block. Specifying negative values for the X,
Y, and Z scale factors inserts a mirror image of a block.
INSERT | 441
Specify Specifies the scale of the block using the pointing
On-Screen device.
X Sets the X scale factor.
Y Sets the Y scale factor.
Z Sets the Z scale factor.
Uniform Scale Specifies a single scale value for X, Y, and Z coordinates.
A value specified for X is also reflected in the Y and Z
values.
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the inserted block in the current UCS.
Specify Specifies the rotation of the block using the pointing
On-Screen device.
Angle Sets a rotation angle for the inserted block.
Explode
Explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of the block. When
Explode is selected, you can specify a uniform scale factor only.
Component objects of a block drawn on layer 0 remain on that layer. Objects
having color BYBLOCK are white. Objects with linetype BYBLOCK have the
CONTINUOUS linetype.
INSERT Command Line

If you enter -insert at the Command prompt, INSERT displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter block name or [?] <last>: Enter a name, enter ?, enter ~, or press ENTER
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/Z/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Block Name
If you have inserted a block in the current drawing during the current editing
session, the name of the last block inserted appears as the current block in
the prompt.
Grouped objects in an inserted drawing are inserted as unnamed groups. You
can list unnamed groups by selecting Unnamed Groups in the Object Group-
ing dialog box (see page 395).
442 | INSERT
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Drawing File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).
You can control block insertion behavior in response to the Enter Block
Name prompt by following the listed examples.
■ Inserting Exploded Blocks: Preceding the name of the block with an asterisk
(*) explodes the block and inserts the individual parts of it. The block
definition is not added to the drawing.
■ Updating a Block Path: If you enter a block name without a path name,
AutoCAD first searches the current drawing data for an existing block
definition by that name. If no such block definition exists in the current
drawing, AutoCAD searches the library path for a file of the same name. If
AutoCAD finds such a file, it uses the file name for the block name upon
insertion of the block definition. AutoCAD uses the same block definition
for subsequent insertions of that block. You can replace an existing block
definition with an external file by entering the following at the Enter
Block Name prompt:
block name=file name
■ Updating a Block Definition: If you make changes to a block file that is
inserted in your drawing and you want to change the existing block
definition without creating a new block insertion, enter the following at
the Specify Insertion Point prompt (following the Enter Block Name
prompt):
block name=
If you enter = after the block name, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
Block "current" already exists. Redefine it? [Yes/No] <No>: Enter y, enter n, or
press ENTER
If you choose to redefine the block, AutoCAD replaces the existing block
definition with the new block definition. AutoCAD regenerates the draw-
ing and the new definition is applied to all existing insertions of it. Press
ESC when AutoCAD prompts you for the insertion point if you do not
want AutoCAD to insert a new block into the drawing.
?—List Block Names

Lists the blocks currently defined in the drawing.
Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the block or drawing.
Enter X scale factor, specify opposite corner, or [Corner/XYZ] <1>: Enter a value,
enter an option, or press ENTER
INSERT | 443
X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors.
Enter Y scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or
press ENTER to use the same scale factor
Specify rotation angle <0>:
All X and Y dimensions of the block or drawing are

multiplied by the X and Y scale factors. The block or
drawing is rotated by the specified angle, using the
insertion point as the center of rotation.
Corner Defines the X and Y scale factors at the same time, using
the insertion point and another point as the corners of
a box. The X and Y dimensions of the box become the
X and Y scale factors. The insertion point is the first
corner.
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point
XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.

Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Specify a nonzero
value, enter c, or press ENTER
■ X Scale Factor: Defines X, Y, and Z scale factors for the

block or drawing.
Specify Y scale factor or <use X scale factor>: Enter a
scale factor or press ENTER
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale
factor or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <0>: Specify an angle or press
ENTER
■ Corner: Defines the X and Y scales at the same time,
using the insertion point and another point as the
corners of a box, and then defines the Z scale.
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a scale
factor or press ENTER
ENTER
444 | INSERT
Scale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. The scale for the Z axis is the
absolute value of the specified scale factor.
Specify scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
Specify insertion point:
X
Sets the X scale factor.
Specify X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Y
Sets the Y scale factor.
Specify Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Z
Sets the Z scale factor.
Specify Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the block.
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under
Rotation match the descriptions of the corresponding options under
Insertion Point (see page 443).
INSERT | 445
PScale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block
as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview scale factor for XYZ axes: Enter a nonzero value
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PScale
match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion Point
(see page 443).
PX
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is
dragged into position.
Specify preview X scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PX
(see page 443).
PY
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is
Specify preview Y scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PY
(see page 443).
446 | INSERT
PZ
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is
Specify preview Z scale factor: Enter a nonzero value
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under PZ
(see page 443).
PRotate
Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
Specify preview rotation angle:
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options under
PRotate match the descriptions of the corresponding options under Insertion
Point (see page 443).
See Also
See “Insert Blocks” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BASE specifies a base insertion point in drawings that
you intend to insert as blocks into other drawings.
BLOCK creates a named set of objects that you can insert
into a drawing. EXPLODE separates the objects in a
block. MINSERT inserts multiple instances of a block, in
an array, into the current drawing. WBLOCK creates a
drawing from a block. XREF attaches a drawing to the
current drawing and reflects updates made to the
attached drawing.
System Variables INSNAME stores the current block name used by INSERT.
INSERT | 447
INSERTOBJ
Inserts a linked or embedded object
When you insert an object into an AutoCAD drawing from an application
that supports OLE, the object can maintain a connection with its source file.
A linked object remains associated with its source file. When you edit a
linked object in AutoCAD, the source file changes. When you edit the object
in the source file, the linked object in AutoCAD changes.
An embedded object is not associated with its source file. You edit the embed-
ded data in the AutoCAD drawing using the source application; the source
file does not change.
Linked or embedded objects are displayed in AutoCAD and can be printed or
plotted using Windows system drivers.
Insert toolbar:
Insert menu: OLE Object
Command line: insertobj
The Insert Object dialog box is displayed.
Insert Object Dialog Box

Inserts a linked or embedded object. Options vary, depending on whether
you select Create New or Create from File.
Create New
Opens the application that's highlighted in the Object Type list so that you
can create a new object to insert. When you return from that application to
your AutoCAD drawing, the OLE Properties dialog box is displayed.
448 | INSERTOBJ
Object Type Lists available applications that support linking and
embedding. To create an object to embed, double-click
an application to open it.
On the application’s File menu, AutoCAD replaces the
Save option with a new Update option. Choosing
Update inserts the object into the drawing or updates it.
Display as Icon Displays the source application’s icon in the AutoCAD
drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the
embedded information.
Create from File

Specifies a file to link or embed.
INSERTOBJ | 449
File Specifies the path and name of the file to be embedded
or linked.
Browse Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box), in which you select a file to link or embed.
Link Creates a link to the selected file rather than embedding
it.
drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked
or embedded information.
See Also
See “Overview of Importing OLE Objects into Drawings” in the User’s Guide.
Commands COPYLINK copies the current view of the AutoCAD
drawing to the Clipboard. OLELINKS updates, modifies,
and cancels existing links. PASTECLIP inserts data from
the Clipboard into a drawing. PASTESPEC inserts data
from the Clipboard and controls the format of the
pasted data. OLESCALE scales OLE objects.
INTERFERE
Creates a composite 3D solid from the common volume of two or more solids
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Interference
Command line: interfere
Select the first set of solids: Use an object selection method

first solid selected INTERFERE highlights 3D solids that overlap. If you define a single selection
set, AutoCAD checks all the solids in the set against one another. If you
define two selection sets, AutoCAD checks the solids in the first selection set
against those in the second selection set. If you include the same 3D solid in
both selection sets, AutoCAD considers the 3D solid part of the first selection
set and ignores it in the second selection set.
Select the second set of solids: Use an object selection method or press ENTER
450 | INTERFERE
Pressing ENTER begins the interference testing of pairs of 3D solids. AutoCAD
highlights all interfering 3D solids and displays the number of interfering 3D
solids and interfering pairs.
Create interference solids? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Entering y creates and highlights new 3D solids on the current layer that are
second solid selected the intersections of the interfering pairs of 3D solids.
If there are more than two interfering 3D solids, it may not be clear which
pairs are interfering if all the interfering 3D solids are highlighted at once.
Highlight pairs of interfering solids? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
interference solid
If there is more than one interfering pair, AutoCAD displays the following
created
prompt:
Enter an option [Next pair/eXit] <Next>: Enter x or n, or press ENTER
Entering n or pressing ENTER cycles through the interfering pairs of 3D

solids. Entering x ends the command.
See Also
Commands SUBTRACT creates a composite solid or region by sub-
tracting the area of one set of regions or two-dimen-
sional objects from another set and subtracting the vol-
ume of one set of solids from another set. UNION creates
a composite solid or region and combines the total area
of two or more existing regions or the total volume of
two or more existing solids. INTERSECT creates compos-
ite solids or regions from the intersection of two or
more solids or regions and removes the areas outside of
the intersection.
INTERSECT
Creates composite solids or regions from the intersection of two or more solids or regions
and removes the areas outside of the intersection
Solids Editing toolbar:

Modify menu: Solids Editing ➤ Intersect
Command line: intersect
INTERSECT | 451
You can select only regions and solids for use with INTERSECT.
INTERSECT calculates the overlapping area of two or more existing regions
and the common volume of two or more existing solids.
solids before INTERSECT solid after INTERSECT
The selection set can contain regions and solids that lie in any number of
arbitrary planes. AutoCAD divides the selection set into subsets and tests for
intersections within each subset. The first subset contains all the solids in the
selection set. The second subset contains the first selected region and all sub-
sequent coplanar regions. The third subset contains the next region that is
not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent coplanar regions, and
so on until all regions belong to a subset.
regions before INTERSECT region after INTERSECT
See Also
See “Create and Combine Areas (Regions)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands SUBTRACT creates a composite solid or region by sub-
tracting the area of one set of regions or two-dimen-
sional objects from another set and subtracting the vol-
ume of one set of solids from another set. UNION creates
a composite solid or region and combines the total area
of two or more existing regions or the total volume of
two or more existing solids. INTERFERE finds the inter-
ference (or overlap) of two or more 3D solids and
creates a composite 3D solid from their common
volume.
452 | INTERSECT
ISOPLANE
Specifies the current isometric plane
Command line: isoplane (or 'isoplane for transparent use)
Enter isometric plane setting [Left/Top/Right] <Top>: Enter an option or press

ENTER
The isometric plane affects the cursor movement keys only when Snap mode
is on and the snap style is Isometric. If the snap style is Isometric, Ortho
mode uses the appropriate axis pair even if Snap mode is off. The current iso-
metric plane also determines the orientation of isometric circles drawn by
ELLIPSE. You can cycle through the isometric planes by pressing CTRL + E or
F5 .
Left Selects the left-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree

and 150-degree axis pair.
Top Selects the top face of the cube, called the top plane,
defined by the 30-degree and 150-degree axis pair.
Right Selects the right-hand plane, defined by the 90-degree
and 30-degree axis pair.
See Also
Commands DSETTINGS sets drawing aids, including the current
drawing plan. SNAP sets the Isometric snap style.
System Variables SNAPISOPAIR stores the current isometric plane setting.
ISOPLANE | 453
454
JPGOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in JPEG file format
Command line: jpgout
AutoCAD creates a JPEG file that contains the objects you select. Shade Plot
options are preserved in the file when you use this command.
JUSTIFYTEXT
Changes the justification point of selected text objects without changing their locations
Text toolbar:
Modify menu: Justify Text
Modify menu: Object ➤ Text ➤ Justify
Command line: justifytext
You can choose single line text objects, multiline text objects, leader text
objects, and attribute objects.
Enter a justification option [Existing/Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/
ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]<Existing>: Specify a location to serve as the new
justification point
JPGOUT | 455
The justification point options shown above are described in the TEXT
command. The justification point options for single line text are similar to
those for multiline text except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are
equivalent to the bottom left (BL) multiline text attachment point.
See Also
See “Change Text Scale and Justification” in the User’s Guide.
Commands STYLE creates, modifies, or sets named text styles.
456 | JUSTIFYTEXT
LAYER
Manages layers and layer properties
Layers toolbar:
Format menu: Layer
Command line: layer (or 'layer for transparent use)
The Layer Properties Manager is displayed.
annotations If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, LAYER displays prompts on the
dimensions
Layer Properties Manager
objects
Makes a layer current, adds new layers, deletes layers, and renames layers.
You can assign properties to layers, turn layers on and off, freeze and thaw
sample layers layers globally or by viewport, lock and unlock layers, set plot styles for
layers, and turn plotting on and off for layers. You can filter the layer names
displayed in the Layer Properties Manager, and you can save and restore layer
states and properties settings.
LAYER | 457
Named Layer Filters
Determines which layers to display in the list of layers. You can filter layers
based on whether they’re xref-dependent, or whether they contain objects.
You can also filter layers based on name, visibility, color, linetype, lineweight,
plot style name, whether they are plotted, or whether they are frozen in the
current viewport or in new viewports.
[...] Button Displays the Named Layer Filters dialog box (see page
464).
Invert Filter Displays layers based on the opposites of the criteria in
a named layer filter. Layers that fit the inverse criteria
are displayed in the layer name list.
Apply to Layers Displays in the Layers toolbar only layers that match
Toolbar the current filter. The layer list tooltip on the Layers
toolbar displays the filter status of layers in the drawing.
(To display the layer list tooltip, position the pointing
device over the layer list on the Layers toolbar.)
458 | LAYER
New
Creates a new layer. After you choose New, the list displays a layer named
LAYER1. You can edit this layer immediately. To create multiple layers more
quickly, you can select a layer name for editing and enter multiple layer
names separated by commas.
If you create a new layer, the new layer inherits the properties of the currently
selected layer in the layer list (Color, On/Off state, and so on). To create layers
with default settings, make sure that there are no selected layers in the list or
that you select a layer with default settings before beginning layer creation.
Current
Sets the selected layer as the current layer. The CLAYER system variable stores
the layer name.
Delete
Deletes selected layers from the drawing file definition. You can delete only
unreferenced layers. Referenced layers include layers 0 and DEFPOINTS, layers
containing objects (including objects in block definitions), the current layer,
and xref-dependent layers. Layers that don’t contain objects (including
objects in block definitions), are not current, and are not xref-dependent can
be deleted by using the PURGE command.
Warning! Be careful about deleting layers if you are working on a drawing in

a shared project or one based on a set of layering standards.
Show/Hide Details
Controls whether the Details section (see page 461) is displayed in the Layer
Properties Manager.
Save State
Displays the Save Layer States dialog box (see page 466), in which you save
layer state and layer properties settings of all layers in a drawing. You can
choose which layer states and properties that you want to preserve. You save
a layer state by assigning it a name.
If one or more of these settings are cleared, the Layer Properties Manager does
not restore those settings.
Any layer states saved in a drawing that is inserted in your current drawing
as a block are also added to the current drawing.
The saved layer states of referenced drawings (xrefs) are not accessible from
the current drawing.
LAYER | 459
If you use WBLOCK to create a new drawing from the current drawing, saved
layer states are preserved only if you specify Entire Drawing as the source in
the Write Block dialog box (equivalent to -wblock /* on the command line).
These saved layer states will refer only to layers that contain objects.
State Manager
Displays the Layer States Manager (see page 467), in which you can manage
named layer states.
List of Layers
Displays layers and their properties. To modify a property, click its icon. To
quickly select all layers, right-click and use the shortcut menu.
Names Displays the names of the layers. You can select a name,
and then click and enter a new name.
On/Off Turns layers on and off. When a layer is on, it is visible
and available for plotting. When a layer is off, it is
invisible and not plotted, even if Plot is on.
Freeze/Thaw in Freezes selected layers in all viewports. You can freeze
All Viewports layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other
operations; improve object selection performance; and
reduce regeneration time for complex drawings.
AutoCAD does not display, plot, hide, render, or
regenerate objects on frozen layers.
Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long
periods. When you thaw a frozen layer, AutoCAD
regenerates and displays the objects on that layer. If you
plan to switch between visible and invisible states
frequently, use the On/Off setting. You can freeze layers
in all viewports, in the current layout viewport, or in
new layout viewports as they are created.
Lock/Unlock Locks and unlocks the layers. You cannot edit objects
on a locked layer. Locking a layer is useful if you want
to view information on a layer for reference but do not
want to edit objects on that layer.
Color Changes the color associated with the selected layers.
Clicking the color name displays the Select Color dialog
box (see page 169).
Linetype Changes the linetype associated with the selected
layers. Clicking any linetype name displays the Select
Linetype dialog box (see page 468).
460 | LAYER
Lineweight Changes the lineweight associated with the selected
layers. Clicking any lineweight name displays the
Lineweight dialog box (see page 468).
Plot Style Changes the plot style associated with the selected
layers. If you are working with color-dependent plot
styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable is set to 1), you
cannot change the plot style associated with a layer.
Clicking any plot style displays the Select Plot Style
Plot/Don’t Plot Controls whether the selected layers are plotted. If you
turn off plotting for a layer, the objects on that layer are
still displayed. Turning off plotting for a layer affects
only visible layers in the drawing (layers that are on and
thawed). If a layer is set to plot but is currently frozen
or off in the drawing, AutoCAD does not plot the layer.
Turning off plotting for layers containing reference
information such as construction lines can be useful.
Current VP Freeze Freezes selected layers in the current layout viewport.
(available only You can freeze or thaw layers in the current viewport
from a layout tab) without affecting layer visibility in other viewports.
Frozen layers are invisible; they are not regenerated or
plotted. Thawing restores the layer's visibility.
New VP Freeze Freezes selected layers in new layout viewports. For
(available only example, freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new
from a layout tab) viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that
layer in any newly created layout viewports but does
not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in already existing
viewports. If you then create a viewport that requires
dimensions, you can override the default setting by
changing the current viewport setting.
Details
Displays an extension of the Layer Properties Manager with alternative access
to properties and additional options.
LAYER | 461
Name Displays the selected layer name, which can be edited.
The name can include letters, numbers, blank spaces,
and any special character not used by Microsoft®
Windows® or AutoCAD for other purposes.
Color Displays a list of colors available to apply to the selected
layers. To assign a color other than those displayed in
the list, choose Select Color. To define the color of
layers, you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color
Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and color book colors.
Lineweight Displays a list of fixed lineweights available to apply to
the selected layers including DEFAULT. You can also
customize lineweights to plot at whatever width you
want by using the Plot Style Table Editor.
Linetype Displays linetypes available to apply to the selected
layers. To load additional linetypes, choose a linetype
in the list of layers to display the Select Linetype dialog
box (see page 468), and then choose Load.
462 | LAYER
Plot Style Displays a list of plot styles available to apply to the
selected layers. If you are working with color-
dependent plot styles (the PSTYLEPOLICY system
variable is set to 1), you cannot change the plot style
associated with a layer. The default plot style is Normal.
Off for Display Turns selected layers on or off. Turned-off layers
regenerate with the drawing but are not displayed or
plotted. You can turn layers off rather than freeze layers
if you frequently change layers from visible to invisible.
By turning layers off to make their objects invisible, you
avoid regenerating the drawing every time you restore
visibility. When you turn a layer on that has been
turned off, the objects are only redrawn on that layer.
Lock for Editing Prevents objects on selected layers from being edited.
Locking layers is useful when you want to edit objects
that are associated with particular layers but also want
to view objects on other layers. Although you cannot
edit objects on a locked layer, they are still visible if the
layer is on and thawed. You can make a locked layer
current, and you can add objects to it.
Do Not Plot Prevents the selected layers from being plotted. This
option affects only visible layers in the drawing (layers
that are on or thawed). If a layer is set to plot, but is
currently frozen or off in the drawing, the layer is not
plotted. It can be useful to turn off plotting for a layer
that contains reference information. You can view the
reference information while you work, but you can turn
off plotting for that layer to ensure that the reference
information does not appear in the plotted drawing.
Freeze in All Freezes selected layers in all viewports. You can freeze
Viewports layers to speed up ZOOM, PAN, and many other
operations; improve object selection performance; and
reduce regeneration time for complex drawings.
AutoCAD does not display, plot, hide, render, or
regenerate objects on frozen layers.
LAYER | 463
Freeze the layers you want to be invisible for long
periods. When you thaw a frozen layer, AutoCAD
regenerates and displays the objects on that layer. If you
plan to switch between visible and invisible states
frequently, use the On/Off setting. You can freeze layers
in all viewports, in the current layout viewport, or in
new layout viewports as they are created.
Freeze in Current Freezes selected layers in the current layout viewport.
Viewport You can freeze or thaw layers in the current layout
viewport without affecting layer visibility in other
viewports. Frozen layers are invisible; they are not
regenerated or plotted. This feature is useful, for
example, if you want to create an annotation layer that
is visible only in a particular viewport. Thawing restores
the layer’s visibility. This option is available only when
you are working on a layout.
Freeze in New Freezes selected layers in new layout viewports. For
Viewports example, freezing the DIMENSIONS layer in all new
viewports restricts the display of dimensions on that
layer in any newly created layout viewports but does
not affect the DIMENSIONS layer in viewports that
already exist. If you then create a viewport that requires
dimensions, you can override the default setting by
thawing the layer in that viewport. This option is
available only when you are working on a layout.
Named Layer Filters Dialog Box

Filters layers based on criteria you select. Layers that match the filter criteria
are displayed in the Layer Properties Manager.
464 | LAYER
Filter Name Specifies a name for the saved filter.
Layer Name Specifies which layers to filter.
On/Off Specifies whether filtered layers are on, off, or both.
Freeze/Thaw Specifies whether filtered layers are frozen, thawed, or
both.
Current Viewport Specifies whether filtered layers in the current viewport
are frozen, thawed, or both.
New Viewport Specifies whether filtered layers in new viewports are
frozen, thawed, or both.
Lock/Unlock Specifies whether filtered layers are locked, unlocked, or
both.
Plot Specifies whether filtered layers are set to plot, not plot,
or both.
LAYER | 465
Color Specifies the layer colors to filter.
Lineweight Specifies the layer lineweights to filter.
Linetype Specifies the layer linetypes to filter.
Plot Style Specifies the layer plot styles to filter.
Add Saves a filter and adds it to the Filter Name list.
Delete Deletes a saved filter from the Filter Name list.
Reset Resets all filters to their default values.
Save Layer States Dialog Box

Saves state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing under a specified
layer state name. When saving a layer state, you specify which layer settings
are affected when the layer state is later restored.
New Layer State Specifies a name for the new layer state to be saved.
Name
Layer States Specifies the layer states settings that are to be saved in
the layer state: On/Off, Frozen/Thawed, Locked/
Unlocked, Plot/No Plot, New VP Frozen/Thawed.
Layer Properties Specifies the layer properties settings that are to be
saved in the layer state: Color, Linetype, Lineweight,
and Plot Style.
466 | LAYER
Layer States Manager
Manages saved layer states.
Restore Restores state and properties settings of all layers in a

drawing to previously saved settings. Restores only
those layer state and properties settings that were
selected when the layer state was saved.
Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer
state. When the layer state is restored, the specified
settings are used.
Rename Changes the name of a saved layer state.
Delete Removes a saved layer state.
Import Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you
can load a previously exported layer state (LAS) file into
the current drawing. Additional layers may be created
as a result of importing a layer state file.
Export Displays a standard file selection dialog box where you
can save a selected named layer state to a layer state
(LAS) file.
LAYER | 467
Select Linetype Dialog Box
Displays linetypes available in the current drawing.
Loaded Linetypes Displays the list of linetypes loaded in the current

drawing.
Load Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (see
page 509), in which you can load selected linetypes into
the drawing and add them to the list of linetypes.
Lineweight Dialog Box

Displays fixed lineweight values available in AutoCAD. You can customize
your lineweights to plot at other values by using the Plot Style Table Editor.
See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype,” in the User’s Guide.
468 | LAYER
Lineweights Displays the available lineweights that can be applied
to a layer. Available lineweights consist of fixed values
that are most commonly used in drawings. Select a
lineweight to apply it.
Original Displays the previous lineweight assigned to the layer.
The default lineweight assigned when a layer is created
is DEFAULT (which plots to a default value of 0.01 inches
or 0.25 mm). The value of DEFAULT is controlled by the
LWDEFAULT system variable.
New Displays the new lineweight assigned to the layer.
LAYER Command Line

If you enter -layer at the Command prompt, LAYER displays prompts on the
command line.
The command line version of LAYER creates new layers; sets the current layer;
sets the color, linetype, lineweight, and plot style for designated layers; turns
layers on and off; turns plotting on and off for visible layers; locks and
unlocks layers; freezes and thaws layers; and lists defined layers.
Current layer: <"current">
Enter an option [?/Make/Set/New/ON/OFF/Color/Ltype/LWeight/Plot/PStyle/
Freeze/Thaw/LOck/Unlock/stAte]:
Note The Pstyle option is available only when you are using named plot styles.
?—List Layers
Displays a list of the currently defined layers, showing their names, states,
color numbers, linetypes, lineweights, and whether they are externally
dependent layers.
Enter layer name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list, or press ENTER to list all layers
Make
Creates a layer and makes it current. New objects are drawn on the current
layer.
Enter name for new layer (becomes the current layer) <current>: Enter a name
or press ENTER
LAYER | 469
If no layer exists for the name you enter, AutoCAD creates a new layer with
that name. The new layer is on and assumes the following properties by
default: color number 7, the CONTINUOUS linetype, and a lineweight of
DEFAULT.
If the layer exists but is turned off, AutoCAD turns it on.
Set
Specifies a new current layer but does not create the layer if it does not
already exist. If the layer exists but is turned off, AutoCAD turns it on and
makes it current. A frozen layer cannot be made current.
Enter a layer name to make current or <select object>: Enter a name or press
ENTER and select an object
New
Creates layers. You can create two or more layers by entering names separated
by commas.
Enter name list for new layer(s):
On
Makes selected layers visible and available for plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to turn On:
Off
Makes selected layers invisible and excludes them from plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to turn Off or <select objects>: Enter a name list or
press ENTER and select objects
Color
Changes the color associated with a layer.
Enter color name or number (1-255)[Truecolor/Colorbook]: Enter a color name
or a number from 1 through 255, enter t, or enter c
470 | LAYER

selected color book such as PANTONE®573
AutoCAD prompts for a list of layer names to which the color should be
applied.
Enter name list of layer(s) for color current <current>: Enter a name or a list of
names separated by commas, or press ENTER
The layers are turned on. To assign a color but turn off the layer, precede the
color with a minus sign (–).
Ltype
Changes the linetype associated with a layer.
Enter a loaded linetype name or [?] <CONTINUOUS>: Enter a currently loaded
linetype name, enter ?, or press ENTER
If you enter a linetype or press ENTER , AutoCAD prompts for a list of layer
names to which the linetype should be applied.
Enter name list of layer(s) for linetype "current" <current>: Enter a wild-card
pattern, a name, or a list of names separated by commas, or press ENTER
If you enter ? at the Enter a Loaded Linetype Name prompt, AutoCAD

prompts for the linetypes to list.
Enter linetype name(s) to list <*>: Enter a wild-card pattern, or press ENTER to
list all names in the drawing
Lweight
Changes the lineweight associated with a layer.
Enter lineweight (0.0mm - 2.11mm):
LAYER | 471
If you enter a valid lineweight, AutoCAD sets the current lineweight to the
new value. If you enter a lineweight that is not valid, AutoCAD sets the
current lineweight to the nearest fixed lineweight value. If you would like to
plot an object with a custom width not found in the list of fixed lineweight
values, you can use the Plot Style Table Editor to customize plotted line-
weights. AutoCAD prompts you for a list of layer names to which the
lineweight should be applied.
Enter name list of layers(s) for lineweight current <current>: Enter a name list or
press ENTER
Plot
Controls whether visible layers are plotted. If a layer is set to plot but is
currently frozen or turned off, the layer is not plotted.
Enter a plotting preference [Plot/No plot] <Plot>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
AutoCAD prompts you for a list of layer names to which the plotting
preference should be applied.
Enter layer name(s) for this plot preference <current>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER
Pstyle
Sets the plot style assigned to a layer. This option is not available if you are
using color-dependent plot styles in the current drawing (the PSTYLEPOLICY
system variable is set to 1). See “Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects”
in the User’s Guide.
Enter plot style or [?] <Normal>: Enter a name, enter ? to list existing plot styles,
or press ENTER
If you select a plot style other than NORMAL, AutoCAD displays the follow-
ing prompt:
Enter name list of layer(s) for plot style current <current>: Enter the names of the
layers to use this plot style, or press ENTER to apply the style to the current layer only
Freeze
Freezes layers, making them invisible and excluding them from regeneration
and plotting.
Enter name list of layer(s) to freeze or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER and select objects
472 | LAYER
Thaw
Thaws frozen layers, making them visible and available for regeneration and
plotting.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to thaw:
Lock
Locks layers, preventing editing of objects on those layers.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to lock or <select objects>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER and select objects
Unlock
Unlocks selected locked layers, permitting editing of objects on those layers.
Enter a name list of layer(s) to unlock or <select objects>: Enter a name list or
press ENTER and select objects
State
Saves and restores the state and properties settings of the layers in a drawing.
Enter an option [?/Save/Restore/Edit/Name/Delete/Import/EXport]:
Save Saves the state and properties settings of the layers in a

drawing under a specified layer state name. When
saving a layer state, you specify which layer settings are
affected when the layer state is later restored.
Enter new layer state name: Enter a name and press
ENTER
Enter states to change
[On/Frozen/Lock/Plot/Newvpfreeze/Color/lineType/
lineWeight/plotStyle]: Enter the settings that you want to
save and then press ENTER
Restore Restores the state and properties settings of all layers to

previously saved settings. Restores only those layer state
and properties settings that were selected when the
layer state was saved.
Enter name of layer state to restore or [?]: Enter the layer
state name or enter ? to see a list of saved layer state names
LAYER | 473
Edit Changes the saved layer settings for a specified layer
state. When the layer state is restored, the specified
settings are used.
Enter name of layer state to edit or [?]: Enter the layer
Enter states to change
[On/Frozen/Lock/Plot/Newvpfreeze/Color/lineType/
lineWeight/plotStyle]: Enter the settings that you want to
change and then press ENTER
Name Changes the name of a saved layer state.

Enter name of layer state to rename or [?]: Enter the layer
Enter new layer state name:
Delete Removes a saved layer state.

Enter name of layer state to delete or [?]: Enter the layer
Import Loads a previously exported layer state (LAS) file into

the current drawing. Additional layers may be created
as a result of importing a layer state file.
Enter file name to import <current>:
Export Saves a selected named layer state to a layer state (LAS)

file.
Enter name of layer state to export or [?]: Enter the layer
Export state to file name:
See Also
See “Work with Layers” in the User’s Guide.
Commands COLOR sets the color for new objects. LINETYPE creates,
loads, and sets linetypes. LWEIGHT sets the lineweight
for new objects. VPLAYER sets visibility in viewports for
new and existing layers.
System Variables CLAYER stores the name of the current layer. VISRETAIN
controls the layer properties and states of xref-depen-
dent layers in the host drawing.
474 | LAYER
LAYERP
Undoes the last change or set of changes made to layer settings
Layers toolbar:
Command line: layerp
Undoes changes you have made to layer settings such as color or linetype. If
settings are restored, AutoCAD displays the message “Restored previous layer
states.”
LAYERP (Layer Previous) does not undo the following changes:
■ Renamed layers: If you rename a layer and change its properties, Layer
Previous restores the original properties but not the original name.
■ Deleted layers: If you delete or purge a layer, using Layer Previous does not
restore it.
■ Added layers: If you add a new layer to a drawing, using Layer Previous does
not remove it.
LAYERPMODE
Turns the tracking of changes made to layer settings on and off
Command line: layerpmode
Enter LAYERP mode <ON>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
When Layer Previous mode is on, changes made to layers are tracked. When
Layer Previous mode is off, changes made to layers are no longer tracked.
LAYOUT
Creates and modifies drawing layout tabs
A layout is used to compose or lay out your drawing for plotting. A layout
may consist of a title block, one or more viewports, and annotations.
Note Many of these options are available by right-clicking a layout tab name.
Layouts toolbar:
Insert Menu: Layout
LAYERP | 475
Command line: layout
Enter layout option [Copy/Delete/New/Template/Rename/SAveas/Set/?] <set>:
Copy Copies a layout. If you do not provide a name, the new

layout assumes the name of the copied layout with an
incremental number in parentheses. The new tab is
inserted before the copied layout tab.
Enter name of layout to copy <current>:
Enter layout name for copy <default>:
Delete Deletes a layout. The most current layout is the default.

Enter name of layout to delete <current>:
The Model tab cannot be deleted. To remove all the

geometry from the Model tab, you must select all
geometry and use the ERASE command.
New Creates a new layout tab. Up to 255 layouts can be
created in a single drawing.
Enter name of new layout <Layout#>:
Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up

to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Only
the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab.
Template Creates a new layout tab based on an existing layout in
a template (DWT), drawing (DWG), or drawing
interchange (DXF) file. If the FILEDIA system variable is
set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box is displayed
for selecting a DWT, DWG, or DXF file. After you select
a file, AutoCAD displays the Insert Layouts dialog box,
which displays the layouts saved in the selected file.
After you select a layout, the layout and all objects from
the specified template or drawing file are inserted into
476 | LAYOUT
Rename Renames a layout. The last current layout is used as the
default for the layout to rename.
Enter layout to rename <current>:
Enter new layout name <current>:
Layout names must be unique. Layout names can be up

to 255 characters long and are not case sensitive. Only
the first 31 characters are displayed on the tab.
Saveas Saves a layout as a drawing template (DWT) file without
saving any unreferenced symbol table and block
definition information. You can then use the template
to create new layouts in your drawings without having
to eliminate unnecessary information. See “Create a
Layout Using a Template” in the User’s Guide.
Enter layout to save to template <current>:
The last current layout is used as the default for the

layout to save as a template. If the FILEDIA system
variable is set to 1, a standard file selection dialog box
is displayed in which you can specify the template file
in which to save the layout. The default layout template
directory is specified in the Options dialog box (see
page 633).
Set Makes a layout current.
Enter layout to make current <last>:
?—List Layouts Lists all the layouts defined in the drawing.
LAYOUTWIZARD
Creates a new layout tab and specifies page and plot settings
Insert menu: Layout ➤ Layout Wizard
Tools menu: Wizards ➤ Create Layout
Command line: layoutwizard
The Layout wizard is displayed.
LAYOUTWIZARD | 477
Layout Wizard
The Layout wizard contains a series of pages that step you through the pro-
cess of creating a new layout. You can choose to create a new layout from
scratch or use an existing layout template on which to base your new layout.
Depending on which plotting device is currently configured, you can select
a paper size from those available. You can select a predefined title block to
apply to your new layout. The Preview area displays a preview image of the
title block you select.
When you’ve finished using the wizard to specify your layout settings, you
can modify any of the settings using the PAGESETUP command from within
the new layout.
See Also
See “Use the Layout Wizard to Specify Layout Settings” in the User’s Guide.
LAYTRANS
Changes a drawing's layers to layer standards you specify

Tools menu: CAD Standards ➤ Layer Translator
Command line: laytrans
The Layer Translator is displayed.
Layer Translator
In the Layer Translator, you specify the layers in the current drawing that you
want to translate, and the layers to translate them to.
Translate From
Specifies the layers to be translated in the current drawing. You can specify
layers by selecting layers in the Translate From list or by supplying a selection
filter.
478 | LAYTRANS
The color of the icon preceding the layer name indicates whether or not the
layer is referenced in the drawing. A dark icon indicates that the layer is ref-
erenced; a white icon indicates the layer is unreferenced. Unreferenced layers
can be deleted from the drawing by right-clicking in the Translate From list
and choosing Purge Layers.
Selection Filter Specifies layers to be selected in the Translate From list,
using a naming pattern that can include wild-cards. For
a list of valid wild-cards, see the table in “Filter and Sort
the List of Layers” in the User’s Guide. The layers
identified by the selection filter are selected in addition
to any layers previously selected.
Select Selects the layers specified in Selection Filter.
Map
Maps the layers selected in Translate From to the layer selected in Translate
To.
Map Same
Maps all layers that have the same name in both lists.
Translate To
Lists the layers you can translate the current drawing’s layers to.
Load Loads layers in the Translate To list using a drawing,
drawing template, or standards file that you specify. If
the specified file contains saved layer mappings, those
mappings are applied to the layers in the Translate
From list and are displayed in Layer Translation
Mappings.
You can load layers from more than one file. If you load
a file that contains layers of the same name as layers
already loaded, the original layers are retained and the
duplicate layers are ignored. Similarly, if you load a file
containing mappings that duplicate mappings already
loaded, the original mappings are retained and the
duplicates are ignored.
New Defines a new layer to be shown in the Translate To list
for translation. If you select a Translate To layer before
choosing New, the selected layer’s properties are used as
defaults for the new layer. You cannot create a new layer
with the same name as an existing layer.
LAYTRANS | 479
Layer Translation Mappings
Lists each layer to be translated and the properties to which the layer will be
converted. You can select layers in this list and edit their properties using
Edit.
Edit Opens the Edit Layer dialog box, where you can edit the
selected translation mapping. You can change the
layer’s linetype, color, and lineweight. If all drawings
involved in translation use plot styles, you can also
change the plot style for the mapping.
Remove Removes the selected translation mapping from the
Layer Translation Mappings list.
Save Saves the current layer translation mappings to a file for
later use.
Layer mappings are saved in the DWG or DWS file
format. You can replace an existing file or create a new
file. The Layer Translator creates the referenced layers in
the file and stores the layer mappings in each layer. All
linetypes used by those layers are also copied into the
file.
Settings
Opens the Settings dialog box, where you can customize the process of layer
translation.
Translate
Starts layer translation of the layers you have mapped.
If you have not saved the current layer translation mappings, you are
prompted to save the mappings before translation begins.
Settings Dialog Box

Controls the process of layer translation.
Force Object Specifies whether or not every object translated takes
Color to BYLAYER on the color assigned to its layer. If this option is
selected, every object takes on the color of its layer. If
this option is cleared, every object retains its original
color.
480 | LAYTRANS
Force Object Specifies whether or not every object translated takes
Linetype to on the linetype assigned to its layer. If this option is
BYLAYER selected, every object takes on the linetype of its layer.
If this option is cleared, every object retains its original
linetype.
Translate Objects Specifies whether or not objects nested within blocks
in Blocks are translated. If this option is selected, nested objects
in blocks are translated. If this option is cleared, nested
objects in blocks are not translated.
Write Transaction Specifies whether or not a log file detailing the results
Log of translation is created. If this option is selected, a log
file is created in the same folder as the translated
drawing. The log file is assigned the same name as the
translated drawing, with a .log file name extension. If
the Write Transaction Log option is cleared, no log file
is created.
Show Layer Specifies which layers to display in the drawing area. If
Contents When this option is selected, only the layers selected in the
Selected Layer Translator dialog box are displayed in the
drawing area. If this option is cleared, all layers in the
drawing are displayed.
Edit/New Layer Dialog Box

Sets or modifies layer properties.
Name Specifies the layer name.
Linetype Specifies the layer linetype.
Color Specifies the layer color.
Lineweight Specifies the layer lineweight.
Plot Style Specifies the layer plot style. You can only modify the
plot style if all drawings referenced by the Layer
Translator use named plot styles.
LAYTRANS | 481
LEADER
Creates a line that connects annotation to a feature
A leader line is an object that can be composed of an arrowhead attached to
splines or straight line segments. In some cases, a short horizontal line, called
a hook line, dogleg, or landing, connects text and feature control frames to
the leader line. If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC, the
leader start point can be associated with a location on an object. If the object
is relocated, the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line
stretches, but the text or feature control frame remains in place.
You can use various dimensioning system variables to format the leader line,
such as placing the text above the hook line with DIMTAD.
LEADER creates complex leader lines that can be made up of more than two
line segments. DIMDIAMETER and DIMRADIUS create simple automatic leader
lines with two line segments for circles and arcs.
Command line: leader
Specify leader start point:

Specify next point:
AutoCAD draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to
prompt for points and options.
Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>: Specify a point,
Point Specification
Draws a leader line segment to the point specified and continues to prompt
you for points and options.
Specify next point or [Annotation/Format/Undo] <Annotation>: Specify a point,
482 | LEADER
Annotation
Inserts an annotation at the end of the leader line. The annotation can be
single or multiple lines of text, a feature control frame containing geometric
tolerances, or a block.
Enter first line of annotation text or <options>: Enter text or press ENTER
If you enter text at the Annotation prompt, AutoCAD places the text at the
end of the leader line. AutoCAD prompts you for additional lines of text until
you end the command by pressing ENTER twice.
If you press ENTER at the Annotation prompt without entering text first,
Enter an annotation option [Tolerance/Copy/Block/None/Mtext] <Mtext>:
Tolerance Creates a feature control frame containing geometric

tolerances using the Geometric Tolerance dialog boxes
(see TOLERANCE).
You can create datum indicators and basic dimension
notation in these dialog boxes. After you specify the
geometric tolerance, LEADER ends.
Copy Copies text, a multiline text object, a feature control
frame with geometric tolerances, or a block and
connects the copy to the end of the leader line. The
copy is associated with the leader line, meaning that if
the end of the leader line moves, the copied object
moves with it. The display of the hook line depends on
the object copied.
Select an object to copy:
AutoCAD places the object and ends LEADER. The value

of the current text gap (see DIMSTYLE or the DIMGAP
system variable) determines where AutoCAD inserts the
text and multiline text objects. AutoCAD attaches any
blocks or feature control frames with geometric
tolerances to the end of the leader line.
LEADER | 483
Block Inserts a block at the end of the leader line. AutoCAD
uses the same prompts as the INSERT command. The
block reference is inserted at an offset from the end of
the leader line and is associated to the leader line,
meaning that if the end of the leader line moves, the
block moves with it. No hook line is displayed.
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a block name or enter ? to
list all blocks in the drawing
None Ends the command without adding any annotation to

the leader line.
Mtext Creates text using the Multiline Text Editor (see page
577) when you specify an insertion point and a second
point for the text boundary.
Enter the characters for the text. Enclose format strings
for prefixes and suffixes in angle brackets (< >). Enclose
format strings for alternate units in square brackets ([ ]).
For more information about adding a prefix or suffix,
see “Control the Display of Dimension Units” in the
User’s Guide.
The units settings and the current text style determine
how AutoCAD displays the text. AutoCAD vertically
centers the multiline text and horizontally aligns it
according to the X axis direction of the last two vertices
of the leader line. AutoCAD offsets the multiline text
from the hook line by the distance specified under
Offset from Dim Line on the Text tab of the New,
Modify, or Override Dimension Style dialog box (see
page 288). If the offset specified is negative, AutoCAD
encloses the multiline text in a box as a basic
dimension.
After you specify the text, LEADER ends.
Format
Controls the way AutoCAD draws the leader and whether it has an
arrowhead.
Enter leader format option [Spline/STraight/Arrow/None] <Exit>: Enter an
option or press ENTER to return to the previous prompt
After each option, AutoCAD returns you to the Specify Next Point prompt.
484 | LEADER
spline leader line straight leader line sample arrowheads no arrowhead
Spline Draws the leader line as a spline. The vertices of the

leader line are the control points, each of equal unit
weight.
Straight Draws the leader line as a set of straight line segments.
Arrow Draws an arrowhead at the start point of the leader line.
None Draws a leader line with no arrowhead at the start
point.
Exit Exits the Format options.
Undo
Undoes the last vertex point on the leader line. AutoCAD then redisplays the
previous prompt.
See Also
See “Create Text with Leaders” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMSTYLE creates and modifies dimension styles.
System Variables DIMASZ controls the size of arrowheads. DIMASSOC

controls the associativity property of dimensions and
leaders. DIMBLK defines the block for arrowheads.
DIMBLK1 defines the block for the first arrowhead.
DIMCLRD controls the color of the dimension line.
DIMGAP controls the text gap. DIMSCALE controls the
overall scale of dimension objects. DIMTAD controls the
vertical position of text in relation to the dimension
line.
LEADER | 485
LENGTHEN
Changes the length of objects and the included angle of arcs
LENGTHEN does not affect closed objects. The extrusion direction of the
selected object need not be parallel to the Z axis of the current user
coordinate system (UCS).
Modify menu: Lengthen
Command line: lengthen
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object or enter an

option
Object Selection
Displays the length and, where applicable, the included angle of the object.
Current length: <current>, included angle: <current>
Select an object or [DElta/Percent/Total/DYnamic]: Select one object, enter an
option, or press ENTER to end the command
Delta
Changes the length of an object by a specified increment, measured from the
endpoint that is closest to the selection point. Delta also changes the angle
of an arc by a specified increment, measured from the endpoint that is closest
to the selection point. A positive value extends the object; a negative value
trims it.
Enter delta length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a, or press
ENTER
Delta Length
Changes the length of the object by the specified increment.
Select an object to change or [Undo]: Select one object or enter u
The prompt repeats until you press ENTER to end the command.
delta length
object selected
486 | LENGTHEN
Angle
Changes the included angle of the selected arc by the specified angle.
Enter delta angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
delta angle
object selected
Percent
Sets the length of an object by a specified percentage of its total length. Per-
cent also changes the angle of an arc by a specified percentage of the total
included angle of the arc.
Enter percentage length <current>: Enter a positive nonzero value or press
ENTER
Total
Sets the length of a selected object by specifying the total absolute length
from the fixed endpoint. Total also sets the included angle of a selected arc
by a specified total angle.
Specify total length or [Angle] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a positive
nonzero value, enter a, or press ENTER
total length
object selected
LENGTHEN | 487
Total Length
Lengthens the object to the specified value from the endpoint that is closest
to the selection point.
Angle
Sets the included angle of the selected arc.
Specify total angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
total angle
object selected
Dynamic
Turns on Dynamic Dragging mode. You change the length of a selected
object by dragging one of its endpoints. The other end remains fixed.
See Also
See “Resize or Reshape Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands EXTEND extends an object to meet another object. TRIM
trims objects at a cutting edge defined by one or more
objects. FILLET rounds and fillets the edges of objects.
CHAMFER bevels the edges of objects.
488 | LENGTHEN
LIGHT
Manages lights and lighting effects
You can use light in model space only. You can display ambient, point, dis-
tant, and spot lights in SHADEMODE and 3DORBIT. To display these lights, you
must set SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded, Gouraud Shaded, Flat Shaded Edges On,
or Gouraud Shaded Edges On. The Wireframe and Hidden SHADEMODE
options do not display lights. To turn on lights, from the Tools menu, select
Options. In the Options dialog box, select the System tab. On the System tab
under Current 3D Graphics Display, choose Properties.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Light
Command line: light
The Lights dialog box is displayed.
Note In the 3DCONFIG command, under Render Options, the Lights option
must be set to ON for lights to appear in your drawing.
Lights Dialog Box

Manages lighting and controls the location, color, and intensity of lighting
effects.
LIGHT | 489
Lights
Lists all lights in the current drawing.
Modify
Modifies the selected light.
AutoCAD displays the Modify Point Light dialog box (see page 492), Modify
Distant Light dialog box (see page 494), or Modify Spotlight dialog box (see
page 496), depending on the type of light you select.
Delete
Deletes the selected light from the drawing.
Select
Selects a light using the pointing device. AutoCAD temporarily closes the dia-
log box while you select a light. The Lights dialog box is redisplayed with the
name of the light selected in the Lights list.
New
Creates a new light in the current drawing. AutoCAD displays the New Point
Light dialog box (see page 492), New Distant Light dialog box (see page 494),
or New Spotlight dialog box (see page 496), depending on the type of light
you select.
Point Light Emits radiating light beams. You can specify no
attenuation, or attenuation that is inverse linear or
inverse square. See “Overview of Lights in Rendering”
Distant Light Emits parallel light beams in one direction. Distant
lights have no attenuation. Emitted light remains at
constant intensity no matter how far it travels.
Spotlight Emits light in a cone in a specified direction. See “Add,
Modify, and Delete Lights” in the User’s Guide.
When you create a light, AutoCAD inserts a light block in the drawing to
show the light’s type and position.
490 | LIGHT
point light block distant light block spotlight block
North Location
Displays the North Location dialog box (see page 498), in which you can set
the north direction.
Ambient Light
Controls background light that provides constant illumination of all the sur-
faces in your model. Keep ambient light low to avoid saturating or dulling
your image.
Intensity
Adjusts the intensity of ambient light from no ambient light (0) to full
brightness (1).
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of ambient light. The color swatch
shows the current color.
Color of light, you can select from the 255 AutoCAD Color
LIGHT | 491
New or Modify Point Light Dialog Box
Creates a new point light or modifies the selected point light.
Light Name
Specifies the name of the light. The name must be no more than eight
characters long.
Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. Entering 0 turns off a light.
The maximum point light intensity depends on the attenuation setting and
the extents of the drawing. If attenuation is none, maximum intensity is 1.
If attenuation is inverse linear, maximum intensity is the value of twice the
extents distance: the distance from the minimum lower-left coordinate to
the maximum upper-right coordinate. The default value for inverse linear is
half the maximum intensity.
If attenuation is inverse square, maximum intensity is twice the square of the
extents distance.
492 | LIGHT
Position
Modifies or displays the X,Y,Z coordinate location of the light and its target.
Modify Temporarily closes the dialog box so you can use the
pointing device to specify a location for the light.
Enter light location <current>: Specify a point or press
ENTER
Show Displays the Show Light Position dialog box, which

displays the X,Y,Z coordinate of the light’s location and
target. Point lights radiate light in all directions with no
target.
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the point light. The color swatch
Attenuation
Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is
from a point light, the darker the object appears.
None Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the point light are
as bright as objects close to the light.
Inverse Linear Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance
from the point light. For example, at a distance of 2
units from a point light, light is half as strong as at the
point light; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter
as strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the
maximum intensity.
Inverse Square Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the
distance from the point light. For example, at a distance
of 2 units from a point light, light is one quarter as
strong as at the point light; at a distance of 4 units, light
is one sixteenth as strong.
LIGHT | 493
Shadows
Controls shadows and shadow mapping.
Shadow On Makes the point light cast shadows. The type of shadow
depends on the current renderer type and on the
settings in the Shadow Options dialog box.
Shadow Options Displays the Shadow Options dialog box (see page 499).
New or Modify Distant Light Dialog Box

Creates a new distant light or modifies the selected distant light.
Light Name
characters long.
Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The intensity value can range
from 0 (off) to 1 (full intensity).
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the distant light. The color swatch
494 | LIGHT
Shadows
Shadow On Makes the distant light cast shadows. The type of
shadow depends on the current renderer type and on
the settings in the Shadow Options dialog box.
Sun Angle Calculator

Displays the Sun Angle Calculator dialog box (see page 500), in which you
can specify a time and place so the renderer can calculate the position of the
sun.
Azimuth
Specifies the position of the distant light by using site-based coordinates. The
Azimuth scroll bar ranges from –180 to 180. Values you enter are converted
to this range. For example, if you enter 315, the scroll bar correctly displays
this as equivalent to –45.
When you enter values or use the scroll bars to adjust the azimuth and alti-
tude, the diagrams change to represent them visually. You can also change
the values of azimuth and altitude by clicking positions in the diagrams
themselves.
Altitude
Specifies the position of the distant light by using site-based coordinates. The
Altitude scroll bar ranges from 0 to 90. You can enter values between 0 and
90.
When you enter values or use the scroll bars to adjust the azimuth and alti-
tude, the diagrams change to represent them visually. You can also change
the values of Azimuth or Altitude by clicking positions in the diagrams
themselves.
LIGHT | 495
Light Source Vector
Displays the light source vector that results from the light position you set
using Azimuth and Altitude. You can also enter values directly in X, Y, and Z.
When you use the light source vector to specify the distant light’s direction,
AutoCAD updates the Azimuth and Altitude controls to show the new
position.
pointing device to define a light source vector by
specifying two points.
New or Modify Spotlight Dialog Box

Creates a new spotlight or modifies the selected spotlight.
Light Name
characters long.
Intensity
Sets the intensity or brightness of the light. The maximum spotlight inten-
sity depends on the attenuation setting and the extents of the drawing. If
attenuation is none, maximum intensity is 1.
496 | LIGHT
If attenuation is inverse linear, maximum intensity is the value of twice the
extents distance: the distance from the minimum lower-left coordinate to
the maximum upper-right coordinate. The default value for inverse linear is
half the maximum intensity.
If attenuation is inverse square, maximum intensity is twice the square of the
extents distance.
Position
Modifies or displays the X,Y,Z coordinate location of the light and its target.
pointing device to specify a location for the light and its
target. A vector connects the spotlight location to its
current target.
Enter light target <current>: Specify a point or press
ENTER
Enter light location <current>: Specify a point or press
ENTER
Show Displays the Show Light Position dialog box, which

displays the X,Y,Z coordinates of the light’s location
and target.
Color
Uses RGB values to control the color of the spotlight. The color swatch shows
the current color.
Hotspot
Specifies the angle that defines the brightest cone of light, which is known
to lighting designers as the beam angle. This value can range from 0 to 160
degrees. The default is 44 degrees.
Falloff
Specifies the angle that defines the full cone of light, which is also known as
the field angle. This value can range from 0 to 160 degrees. The default is 45
degrees.
LIGHT | 497
Attenuation
Controls how light diminishes over distance. The farther away an object is
from a spotlight, the darker the object appears.
None Sets no attenuation. Objects far from the spotlight are
as bright as objects close to the light.
Inverse Linear Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the linear distance
from the spotlight. For example, at a distance of 2 units
from a spotlight, light is half as strong as at the
spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one quarter as
strong. The default value for inverse linear is half the
maximum intensity.
Inverse Square Sets attenuation to be the inverse of the square of the
distance from the spotlight. For example, at a distance
of 2 units from a spotlight, light is one quarter as strong
as at the spotlight; at a distance of 4 units, light is one
sixteenth as strong.
Shadows
Shadow On Makes the spotlight cast shadows. The type of shadow
depends on the current renderer type and on the
settings in the Shadow Options dialog box.
North Location Dialog Box

Sets the north direction.
498 | LIGHT
By default, north is the positive Y direction in the world coordinate system
(WCS). To change it, enter a new angle, or use the scroll bar. The Y axis is 0
degrees, the X axis is 90 degrees, and so on clockwise.
You can also specify north in a user coordinate system (UCS) if there are any
named in your drawing. Select from the Use UCS list. AutoCAD uses the Y
axis in that UCS as the north direction.
Shadow Options Dialog Box

Specifies the type of shadow.
Shadow Produces volumetric shadows (Photo Real renderer) and

Volumes/Ray raytraced shadows (Raytrace renderer) for this light.
Traced Shadows Shadow maps are not available, but the shadow map
size and softness settings are retained.
Shadow Map Size Controls the size, in pixels, of one side of the shadow
map. Select from a range of values between 64 and
4096. The larger the map size, the more accurate the
shadows, but the longer it takes to render them.
Shadow Softness Controls the softness or fuzziness of shadow-mapped
shadows. The value you enter represents the number of
pixels at the edge of the shadow that are blended into
the underlying image. The value can range from 1 to
10, but usually values from 2 to 4 give the best results.
Shadow Prompts you to modify a selection set of objects whose
Bounding bounding box is used to clip the shadow maps.
Objects
LIGHT | 499
Sun Angle Calculator Dialog Box
Specifies a time and place so that the renderer can calculate the position of
the sun.
The right side of the dialog box shows the azimuth, altitude, and solar time
resulting from the local time you select. (You cannot alter the azimuth and
altitude directly as you can in the New Distant Light or Modify Distant Light
dialog box.) You specify time on the left side of the dialog box.
Date Specifies the date. You can enter a date or use the scroll
bar. The date can range from January 1 (1/1) to
December 31 (12/31).
Clock Time Sets the local time on a 24-hour clock. You can enter a
time or use the scroll bar.
Time Zone Specifies the time zone (assuming standard hours, as
opposed to daylight savings).
Daylight Savings Specifies daylight savings for the date and time zone.
Latitude Specifies the latitude. You can enter a value or use the
scroll bar. Zero degrees indicates the equator; 90 degrees
indicates the pole in the current hemisphere—north or
south.
Longitude Specifies the longitude. You can enter a value or use the
scroll bar. Zero degrees indicates the Greenwich
meridian; 180 degrees indicates the opposite meridian
in the direction of the current hemisphere—east or
west.
500 | LIGHT
Northern or Specifies the northern or southern hemisphere.
Southern
Hemisphere
Western or Specifies the eastern or western hemisphere.
Eastern
Hemisphere
Geographic Displays the Geographic Location dialog box (see page
Location 501), in which you can specify the sun’s latitude and
longitude indirectly by naming a city or pointing to a
map.
Note The Sun Angle Calculator takes its north as the
current AutoCAD north direction. By default this is the
positive Y direction of the current coordinate system. You
can change the north direction in the North Location
Geographic Location Dialog Box

Specifies the sun’s latitude and longitude indirectly by using a city or a loca-
tion on a map. The map panel shows one of several maps. Use the list above
the map to select the map you want. Click the map to change the longitude
and latitude.
LIGHT | 501
City Lists the cities available on the current map. Select a
city from this list to display its latitude and longitude.
The currently selected city is displayed below the list. If
you select a map location while the Nearest Big City
option is cleared, no city name is displayed below the
list.
Latitude and Displays the location of the currently selected city or
Longitude your most recent map selection. You can also enter
these values directly. When you choose OK, AutoCAD
updates the Sun Angle Calculator with the new latitude
and longitude.
In this dialog box, you can specify the latitude and
longitude as less than 0, depending on which
hemisphere is current.
Current Map Specifies the current map. To change the map, select
another option from the list.
Nearest Big City Finds the city nearest the map position that you click
and makes that city current.
See Also
For more information about adding, modifying, and deleting lights, see
“Render 3D Objects for Realism” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX™applications. RENDER creates a photoreal-
istic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimen-
sional wireframe or solid model using geometry,
lighting, and materials information. SCENE creates new
scenes and modifies or deletes existing scenes in model
space only.
System Variables TARGET stores the light target location.
LIMITS
Sets and controls the limits of the drawing boundaries and grid display in the current
Model or layout tab
The drawing limits are two-dimensional points in the world coordinate
system that represent the lower-left and upper-right boundaries. You cannot
impose limits on the Z direction.
502 | LIMITS
When limits checking is turned on (controlled by the On and Off options
from the first LIMITS prompt), the drawing limits restrict the coordinates you
can enter to within the rectangular area. Drawing limits also determine the
area of the drawing that can display grid dots, the area displayed by one of
the scale options of ZOOM, and the minimum area displayed by ZOOM All.
When plotting a drawing, you can also specify the drawing limits as the area
to plot.
From a layout tab, when either the paper background or paper margins are
displayed, you cannot set the drawing limits with LIMITS. In this case, limits
are calculated and set by the layout according to the selected paper size. You
can control the display of the paper background and paper margins from the
Display tab of the Options dialog box (see page 633).
Format menu: Drawing Limits
Command line: limits (or 'limits for transparent use)
Specify lower left corner or [ON/OFF] <current>: Specify a point, enter on or off,
upper right
or press ENTER
Lower-Left Specifies the lower-left corner for the drawing limits.

Corner
Specify upper right corner <current>: Specify a point or
press ENTER
On Turns on limits checking. When limits checking is on,

lower left AutoCAD rejects attempts to enter points outside the
drawing limits. Because limits checking tests only
points that you enter, portions of objects such as circles
can extend outside the limits.
Off Turns off limits checking but maintains the current
values for the next time you turn on limits checking.
See Also
System Variables LIMCHECK turns limits checking on and off for the
current space. LIMMIN sets lower-left drawing limits for
the current space. LIMMAX sets upper-right drawing
limits for the current space.
LIMITS | 503
LINE
Creates straight line segments
You can specify the endpoints of lines using two-dimensional (2D) or three-
dimensional (3D) coordinates.
AutoCAD draws a line segment and continues to prompt for points. You can
draw a continuing series of line segments, but each line segment is a separate
object. Press ENTER to end the command.
For example, the following command sequence draws a single line segment.
2 Command: line
Specify first point: Specify a point (1)
Specify next point or [Undo]: Specify a point (2)
1 Specify next point or [Undo]: Press ENTER
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Line
Command line: line
Specify first point: Specify a point or press ENTER to continue from the last drawn
line or arc
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]:
Continue Continues a line from the endpoint of the most

recently drawn line.
before pressing ENTER after pressing ENTER
If the most recently drawn line is an arc, its endpoint

defines the starting point of the line, and the line is
drawn tangent to the arc.
504 | LINE
before pressing ENTER after pressing ENTER
Close Ends the last line segment at the beginning of the first
line segment, which forms a closed loop of line
segments. You can use Close after you have drawn a
series of two or more segments.
before entering c after entering c
Undo Erases the most recent segment of a line sequence.
before entering u after entering u
Entering u more than once backtracks through line

segments in the order you created them.
See Also
See “Draw Lines” in the User’s Guide.
Commands PLINE creates 2D polylines. 3DPOLY creates 3D
polylines. XLINE creates an infinite line. RAY creates a
semi-infinite line. MLINE creates multiple parallel lines.
LINE | 505
LINETYPE
Loads, sets, and modifies linetypes
Line characteristics consist of combinations of dashes, dots, and spaces. You
continuous can use LINETYPE to load linetype definitions from a linetype library (LIN)
file, make a linetype current, or modify linetype scales.
hidden
Format menu: Linetype
center Command line: linetype (or 'linetype for transparent use)
The Linetype Manager is displayed.

dash-dot
If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, LINETYPE displays prompts
sample complex on the command line (see page 510).
linetype
Linetype Manager
Loads linetypes and sets the current linetype.
506 | LINETYPE
Linetype Filters
Determines which linetypes to display in the linetype list. You can filter line-
types based on whether they are xref-dependent, or whether they are
referenced by objects.
Invert Filter Displays linetypes based on the opposites of the criteria
you select. Linetypes that fit the inverse filter criteria
are displayed in the linetype list.
Load
Displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box (see page 509), in which
you can load into the drawing selected linetypes from the acad.lin file and
add them to the linetype list.
Current
Sets the selected linetype to be the current linetype. Setting the current line-
type to BYLAYER means that an object assumes the linetype that is assigned
to a particular layer. Setting the linetype to BYBLOCK means that an object
assumes the CONTINUOUS linetype until it is grouped into a block. Whenever
the block is inserted, all objects inherit the block's linetype. The CELTYPE
system variable stores the linetype name.
Delete
Deletes selected linetypes from the list. You can only delete unreferenced
linetypes. Default referenced linetypes include BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and
CONTINUOUS.
Note Be careful about deleting linetypes if you are working on a drawing in a

shared project or one based on a set of layering standards. The deleted linetype
definition remains stored in the acad.lin or acadiso.lin file and can be reloaded.
Show Details or Hide Details

Controls whether the Details section (see page 508) of the Linetype Manager
is displayed.
LINETYPE | 507
List of Linetypes
Displays the loaded linetypes according to the option specified in Linetype
Filters. To quickly select all or clear all linetypes, right-click in the linetype
list to display the shortcut menu.
Linetype Displays names of loaded linetypes. To rename a
linetype, select it and then click it again and enter a
new name. BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, CONTINUOUS, and xref-
dependent linetypes cannot be renamed. The linetype
name can include up to 255 characters. Linetype names
can contain letters, digits, blank spaces, and the special
characters dollar sign ($), hyphen (–), and underscore
(_). Linetype names cannot include the special
characters comma (,), colon (:), equal sign (=), question
mark (?), asterisk (*), greater and lesser than symbols
(< >), forward and back slashes (/ \), vertical bar (|),
quote (“), or back quote (‘).
Appearance Displays a sample of selected linetypes.
Description Displays descriptions of the linetypes, which can be
edited in the Details area.
Details
Displays an extension of the dialog box with alternative access to properties
and additional settings.
508 | LINETYPE
Name Displays the selected linetype name, which can be
edited. The linetype name can include up to 255
characters. Linetype names can contain letters, digits,
blank spaces, and the special characters dollar sign ($),
hyphen (–), and underscore (_). Linetype names cannot
include the special characters comma (,), colon (:),
equal sign (=), question mark (?), asterisk (*), greater
and lesser than symbols (< >), forward and back slashes
(/ \), vertical bar (|), quote (“), or back quote (‘).
Description Displays the description of the selected linetype, which
can be edited.
Use Paper Space Scales linetypes in paper space and model space
Units for Scaling identically. Useful when working with multiple
viewports. This option is also controlled by the
PSLTSCALE system variable.
Global Scale Displays the global scale factor for all linetypes.
Factor (LTSCALE system variable)
Current Object Sets linetype scale for newly created objects. The
Scale resulting scale is the global scale factor multiplied by
the object’s scale factor. This option is also controlled
by the CELTSCALE system variable.
ISO Pen Width Sets the linetype scale to one of a list of standard ISO
values. The resulting scale is the global scale factor
multiplied by the object’s scale factor.
Load or Reload Linetypes Dialog Box

Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a linetype library (LIN) file. The
acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes.
LINETYPE | 509
File Displays the name of the current LIN file. You can enter
the name of another LIN file or choose File to select a
different file from the Select Linetype File dialog box.
Available Displays the linetypes available to load. To select or
Linetypes clear all of the linetypes on the list, right-click and
choose Select All or Clear All.
LINETYPE Command Line

If you enter -linetype at the Command prompt, LINETYPE displays prompts
Enter an option [?/Create/Load/Set]:
?—List Linetypes Displays the Select Linetype File dialog box (a standard
file selection dialog box). After you select an LIN file,
AutoCAD lists the linetypes available in a file.
Create Creates a new linetype and stores it in an LIN file.
Enter name of linetype to create:
AutoCAD displays the Create or Append Linetype File

dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box). Specify
the file to which you want the linetype added.
Descriptive text: Enter optional descriptive text
510 | LINETYPE
Enter a linetype description up to 47 characters long.
The description can be a comment or a series of
underscores, dots, dashes, and spaces to show a simple
representation of the linetype pattern.
Enter linetype pattern (on next line):
A,
Enter a pattern definition as a series of numbers

separated by commas. Enter positive values to specify
lengths of dashes and negative values to specify lengths
of spaces. Use a zero to represent a dot.
2.5 -.5 .5 -.5 the pattern is repeated
The “A” in the pattern definition prompt specifies the

pattern alignment used at the ends of individual lines,
circles, and arcs. AutoCAD supports A-type alignment
only. With A-type alignment, AutoCAD guarantees that
lines and arcs start and end with a dash. The A is
automatically included in the definition. If you use a
text editor to create a linetype, you must enter a at the
beginning of the definition.
After creating a linetype, you must load it to make it
accessible.
You cannot create complex linetypes with LINETYPE.
For more information, see “Custom Linetypes” in the
Customization Guide.
Load Loads a linetype whose definition exists in a file. The
acad.lin file contains the standard linetypes.
Enter linetype(s) to load: Enter a name or a list of names
separated by commas
AutoCAD displays the Select Linetype File dialog box.

Enter or select the file in which the linetype you want
to load is stored.
LINETYPE | 511
Set Sets the current linetype for objects that will be drawn
subsequently. You can control the linetype of objects
individually or by layer.
Specifies linetype name or [?] <current>: Enter a linetype
name, ? to list all loaded linetype names, bylayer, or
byblock, or press ENTER
The linetype you enter becomes the current linetype.

AutoCAD draws all new objects with this linetype,
regardless of the current layer. If the linetype you
request is not loaded, AutoCAD searches for its
definition in the acad.lin file. If the linetype is neither
loaded nor in acad.lin, AutoCAD displays a message and
returns you to the Command prompt.
Enter ? to list all loaded linetype names. If you enter
bylayer, new objects inherit the linetype associated
with the layer on which the object is drawn. If you
enter byblock, new objects are drawn using the
CONTINUOUS linetype until they are grouped into a
block. Whenever you insert that block, the objects
inherit the linetype of the block.
See Also
See “Work with Linetypes” in the User’s Guide.
512 | LINETYPE
Commands LTSCALE sets the linetype scale factor.
System Variables CELTSCALE sets the current object linetype scaling fac-
tor. This sets the linetype scaling for new objects rela-
tive to the LTSCALE setting. A line created with CELT-
SCALE=2 in a drawing with LTSCALE set to 0.5 would
appear the same as a line created with CELTSCALE=1 in
a drawing with LTSCALE=1. LTSCALE stores the global
linetype scale factor. PSLTSCALE controls paper space
linetype scaling.
LIST
Displays database information for selected objects
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ List
Command line: list
AutoCAD lists the object type, object layer, and X,Y,Z position relative to the
current user coordinate system (UCS) and whether the object is in model
space or paper space.
LIST reports color, linetype, and lineweight information if these items are not
set to BYLAYER. The thickness of an object is displayed if it is nonzero. Z coor-
dinate information defines the elevation. If the extrusion direction of the
entry differs from the Z axis (0,0,1) of the current UCS, LIST also reports the
extrusion direction in UCS coordinates.
LIST reports additional information related to the specific object selected.
See Also
Commands ID displays the coordinate values of a location. DIST
measures the distance and angle between two points.
AREA calculates the area and perimeter of objects or of
defined areas. MASSPROP calculates and displays the
mass properties of regions or solids.
LIST | 513
LOAD
Makes shapes available for use by the SHAPE command
You must load a shape (SHP) file the first time you need it; AutoCAD loads it
thereafter. The shape file must be available each time you edit the drawing.
Command line: load
AutoCAD displays the Select Shape File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Enter the shape file name, or select a file name from the list.
See Also
Commands SHAPE inserts a shape from a compiled shape file.
COMPILE compiles AutoCAD shape (SHP) files and Post-
Script font (PFB) files into SHX files.
LOGFILEOFF
Closes the log file opened by LOGFILEON
Command line: logfileoff
AutoCAD stops recording the text window contents and closes the log file.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. Use the Main-
tain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to
turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab to change the location of the log
file.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
See Also
Commands LOGFILEON writes to a file everything that appears in
the text window. OPTIONS changes AutoCAD environ-
ment settings.
System Variables LOGFILEMODE specifies whether the contents of the text
window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME specifies
the path for the log file.
514 | LOAD
LOGFILEON
Writes the text window contents to a file
Command line: logfileon
AutoCAD records the text window contents in the log file until you exit
AutoCAD or use the LOGFILEOFF command.
You can also control the log file with the OPTIONS command. Use the Main-
tain a Log File option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box to
turn the log file off and on. Use the Files tab to change the location of the log
file.
Each drawing saves a log file (with the extension .log) that may need periodic
deletion as the number of log files continues to grow.
See Also
Commands LOGFILEOFF closes the log file. OPTIONS changes
AutoCAD environment settings.
System Variables LOGFILEMODE specifies whether the contents of the text
window are written to a log file. LOGFILENAME specifies
the path for the log file.
LSEDIT
Edits a landscape object
A landscape object is an extended-entity object with a bitmap image mapped
onto it. You can manipulate the object directly in the drawing as well as in
the Landscape New dialog box. The geometry of the object depends on
whether you choose one or two faces for it and whether it is view aligned.
You make these choices according to your rendering requirements.
Each landscape object has grips at the base, top, and each corner. Use the base
grip to move the object, the top grips to adjust its height, and the bottom
corner grips to scale it and, if it’s not view aligned, rotate it. You can use all
standard AutoCAD grip editing modes for stretching, scaling, and rotating
landscape objects.
LOGFILEON | 515
With two related commands, LSNEW and LSLIB, you can create landscape
objects and maintain landscape object libraries.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Landscape Edit
Command line: lsedit
Select a landscape object: Use an object selection method
When you select a landscape object, AutoCAD displays the Landscape Edit
dialog box.
Landscape Edit Dialog Box

Previews landscape objects and defines the geometry and height of the
objects.
The object type is selected in the library list; if the list is unavailable, you
cannot change the object type. For a description of the available options, see
LSNEW.
516 | LSEDIT
See Also
See “Render a Model” in the User’s Guide.
Commands LSNEW creates a new landscape object. LSLIB maintains
landscape object libraries. RMAT attaches and manages
rendering materials. RENDER creates a photorealistic or
realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wire-
frame or solid model using geometry, lighting, and
materials information.
LSLIB
Maintains libraries of landscape objects
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Landscape Library
Command line: lslib
AutoCAD displays the Landscape Library dialog box.
Landscape Library Dialog Box

Defines libraries of landscape objects.
Library Contents Lists the objects in the current library. Select one to
modify or delete.
LSLIB | 517
Modify Displays the Landscape Library Edit dialog box (see
page 518). Changes the image files associated with the
selected object (or double-click the object name). All
landscape objects require both an image file and an
opacity map file to define the see-through areas of the
image.
New Displays the New Landscape Library dialog box, which
is identical to the Landscape Library Edit dialog box
except that the boxes are blank. Enter an object name,
an image file name, and an opacity map file name for
your new object.
Delete Deletes the selected object from the library. This does
not delete the files associated with the object name, but
deletes only the object definition in the library.
Open Displays a standard file selection dialog box. Locate and
select an LLI file to open a new library file. The contents
of the file appear in the Library Contents list.
Save Saves the current library file. A standard file selection
dialog box is displayed so that you can save the library
under another name if you want. If the file already
exists, the program prompts you to replace it.
Landscape Library Edit Dialog Box

Changes the image files associated with the object selected in the Landscape
Library dialog box.
518 | LSLIB
Default Geometry
Specifies the geometry and alignment of the object. The geometry of an
object depends on its number of faces and alignment. A single-face view-
aligned object appears in the drawing as a triangle. You cannot use grips to
rotate it. A single-face fixed object appears as a rectangle that you can rotate
with grips. This type of object also displays its name either forward or back-
ward to indicate its orientation to the camera, which is helpful for signs. A
crossing-face object always appears as two triangles intersecting at right
angles. When view-aligned, they face the camera at 45-degree angles and you
can’t change their rotation. When the object is fixed, you can change its
rotation.
Single Face/ Specifies a single-face object or a crossing-face object. A
Crossing Faces single-face object is faster to render but not quite as
realistic as a crossing-face object, especially for
animation and raytraced shadows.
View Aligned Makes the object always face the camera. This is
generally a good choice for trees and other nonplanar
objects.
When the View Aligned option is cleared, the object
maintains a fixed orientation. This can be effective with
planar objects like road signs that you don’t want to
view straight on.
Name
Shows the current name of the object. To change the name, edit the entry.
Image File
Specifies a file name. You can choose Find File to display a standard file
selection dialog box in which you can locate the file you want.
Opacity Map File

Specifies a file name. You can choose Find File to display a standard file
selection dialog box in which you can locate the file you want.
LSLIB | 519
See Also
ObjectARX applications. LSEDIT modifies landscape
objects. LSNEW creates new landscape objects. RMAT
attaches and manages rendering materials. RENDER
creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image
of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model using
geometry, lighting, and materials information.
LSNEW
Adds realistic landscape items, such as trees and bushes, to your drawings
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Landscape New
Command line: lsnew
AutoCAD displays the Landscape New dialog box.
Landscape New Dialog Box

Previews landscape objects, defines the geometry and height of new objects,
and inserts a landscape object into a drawing.
520 | LSNEW
A landscape object is an extended-entity object with a bitmap image mapped
onto it. You can manipulate the object directly in the drawing as well as in
the Landscape New dialog box. The geometry of the object depends on
whether you choose one or two faces for it and whether it is view aligned.
You make these choices according to your rendering requirements.
Each landscape object has grips at the base, top, and each corner. Use the base
grip to move the object, the top grips to adjust its height, and the bottom
corner grips to scale it and, if it’s not view aligned, rotate it. You can use all
standard AutoCAD grip editing modes for stretching, scaling, and rotating
landscape objects.
With two related commands, LSEDIT and LSLIB, you can modify landscape
objects and maintain landscape object libraries.
Landscape Objects
Lists landscape objects available in the current landscape library. Select the
one you want to insert in the drawing.
Geometry
Specifies the geometry and alignment of the landscape object. The geometry
of an object depends on its number of faces and alignment. A single-face
view-aligned object appears in the drawing as a triangle. You cannot use grips
to rotate it. A single-face fixed object appears as a rectangle that you can
rotate with grips. This type of object also displays its name either forward or
backward to indicate its orientation to the camera, which is helpful for signs.
A crossing-face object always appears as two triangles intersecting at right
angles. When view-aligned, they face the camera at 45-degree angles and you
can’t change their rotation. When the object is fixed, you can change its
rotation.
Single Face/ Specifies a single-face object or a crossing-face object. A
Crossing Faces single-face object is faster to render but not quite as
realistic as a crossing-face object, especially for
animation and raytraced shadows.
View Aligned Makes the object always face the camera. This is
generally a good choice for trees and other nonplanar
objects.
When the View Aligned option is cleared, the object
maintains a fixed orientation. This can be effective with
planar objects like road signs that you don’t want to
view straight on.
LSNEW | 521
Height
Specifies the height of the landscape object in current drawing units. The
default is 20, and the height is always in the positive Z direction of the
current user coordinate system (UCS). Use the scroll bar or enter a value.
Position
Uses the pointing device to specify a location in the drawing. The default
position is at the origin of the UCS.
See Also
ObjectARX applications. LSEDIT modifies landscape
objects. LSLIB maintains landscape object libraries.
RMAT attaches and manages rendering materials.
RENDER creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded
image of a three-dimensional wireframe or solid model
using geometry, lighting, and materials information.
LTSCALE
Sets the global linetype scale factor
Command line: ltscale (or 'ltscale for transparent use)
LTSCALE = 1 Enter new linetype scale factor <current>: Enter a positive real value or press
ENTER
LTSCALE = .5
Use LTSCALE to change the scale factor of linetypes for all objects in a draw-
LTSCALE = .25 ing. Changing the linetype scale factor causes the drawing to regenerate.
See Also
System Variables LTSCALE stores the current scale factor. You must use the
SETVAR command to access the LTSCALE system
variable. PSLTSCALE controls paper space linetype
scaling.
522 | LTSCALE
LWEIGHT
Sets the current lineweight, lineweight display options, and lineweight units
Use lineweights to add width to your objects. Lineweights are useful for the
graphical representation of different objects and information, but they
should not be used to represent specific object widths.
Lineweight can be applied to all graphical objects except TrueType fonts,
raster images (except the image border), points, and solid fills (2D solids).
These exceptions plot with a default lineweight of 0 (the thinnest possible
line that the printer or plotter can plot). The default lineweight value for
objects is BYLAYER; the default lineweight value for layers is set by the Default
option in the Lineweights Settings dialog box. You can also customize line-
weights to plot at whatever width you want by using the Plot Style Table
Editor of the PLOT command. See “Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype”
Wide polylines in a plan view are displayed at their width setting rather than
their lineweight setting.
Note Objects with lineweights of more than one pixel may increase regenera-
tion time. To optimize AutoCAD performance when working in the Model tab,
set the lineweight display scale to the minimum value, or turn off Display Line-
weight altogether.
Format menu: Lineweight

Shortcut menu: Right-click the Lwt button on the status bar and choose
Settings.
Command line: lweight (or 'lweight for transparent use)
The Lineweight Settings dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, LWEIGHT displays prompts on
Lineweight Settings Dialog Box

Sets the current lineweight, sets the lineweight units, controls the display
and display scale of lineweights in the Model tab, and sets the DEFAULT
lineweight value for layers. For a table of valid lineweights, see “Overview of
Lineweights” in the User’s Guide.
LWEIGHT | 523
Lineweights
Displays the available lineweight values. Lineweight values consist of stan-
dard settings including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and DEFAULT. The DEFAULT value
is set by the LWDEFAULT system variable, which has an initial value of 0.01
inches or 0.25 mm. All new layers use the default setting. The lineweight
value of 0 plots at the thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting
device and is displayed at one pixel wide in model space.
Current Lineweight
Displays the current lineweight. To set the current lineweight, select a
lineweight from the lineweight list and choose OK.
Units for Listing

Specifies whether lineweights are displayed in millimeters or inches. You can
also set Units for Listing by using the LWUNITS system variable.
Millimeters (mm) Specifies lineweight values in millimeters.
Inches (in.) Specifies lineweight values in inches.
524 | LWEIGHT
Display Lineweight
Controls whether lineweights are displayed in the current drawing. If
selected, lineweights are displayed in model space and paper space. You can
also set Display Lineweight by using the LWDISPLAY system variable.
AutoCAD regeneration time increases with lineweights that are represented
by more than one pixel. Clear Display Lineweight if AutoCAD performance
slows down when working with lineweights turned on in a drawing. This
option does not affect how objects are plotted.
Default
Controls the DEFAULT lineweight for layers. The initial DEFAULT lineweight is
0.01 inches or 0.25 mm. You can also set the DEFAULT lineweight by using
the LWDEFAULT system variable.
Adjust Display Scale

Controls the display scale of lineweights on the Model tab. On the Model tab,
lineweights are displayed in pixels. Lineweights are displayed using a pixel
width in proportion to the real-world unit value at which they plot. If you
are using a high-resolution monitor, you can adjust the lineweight display
scale to better display different lineweight widths. The Lineweight list reflects
the current display scale.
Objects with lineweights that are displayed with a width of more than one
pixel may increase AutoCAD regeneration time. If you want to optimize
AutoCAD performance when working in the Model tab, set the lineweight
display scale to the minimum value or turn off lineweight display altogether.
LWEIGHT Command Line

If you enter -lweight at the Command prompt, LWEIGHT displays prompts on
the command line.
Current lineweight: current
Enter default lineweight for new objects or [?]: Enter a valid lineweight or enter ?
The current lineweight value is displayed; if the value is not BYLAYER,

BYBLOCK or DEFAULT, the value is displayed in millimeters or inches.
LWEIGHT | 525
Default Sets the current default lineweight. Lineweight values
Lineweight consist of fixed settings, including BYLAYER, BYBLOCK,
and DEFAULT. Values are calculated in either inches or
millimeters; millimeters are the default. If you enter a
valid lineweight, AutoCAD sets the current default
lineweight to the new value. With any other value,
AutoCAD adjusts the value entered and sets the current
default lineweight to the nearest valid value.
To plot an object with a lineweight that is not found in
the list of fixed lineweight values, you can use the Plot
Style Table Editor to customize plotted lineweights. See
“Control Plotted Lineweight and Linetype,” in the
User’s Guide. The DEFAULT value is set by the LWDEFAULT
system variable and has an initial value of 0.01 inches
or 0.25 mm. The lineweight value of 0 plots at the
thinnest lineweight available on the specified plotting
device and is displayed at a value of one pixel in model
space.
?—List Displays a list of valid lineweight values in the current
Lineweights lineweight units.
Note If you save a drawing using the AutoCAD Release 14, or earlier, format,
the drawing preview displays lineweights even though the drawing saved in the
earlier format does not display lineweights.
See Also
See “Work with Linetypes” in the User’s Guide.
Commands PROPERTIES, CHANGE, or CHPROP assign a lineweight to
an object. LAYER assigns a lineweight to a layer.
MATCHPROP copies a lineweight from one object to
another.
System Variables LWDEFAULT sets the default value for the lineweight
DEFAULT. LWDISPLAY controls display of lineweights.
LWUNITS sets lineweight units in millimeters or inches.
CELWEIGHT sets the lineweight of new objects.
526 | LWEIGHT
MASSPROP
Calculates the mass properties of regions or solids
MASSPROP calculates properties of two-dimensional (2D) and three-
dimensional (3D) objects that are essential in analyzing the characteristics
of the drawn objects.
Inquiry toolbar:
Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Region/Mass Properties
Command line: massprop
If you select multiple regions, only those that are coplanar with the first
selected region are accepted.
MASSPROP displays the mass properties in the text window, and then asks if
you want to write the mass properties to a text file.
Write analysis to a file? <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you enter y, MASSPROP prompts you to enter a file name.

The properties that MASSPROP displays depends on whether the selected
objects are regions (and whether the selected regions are coplanar with the
XY plane of the current UCS) or solids. For a list of the parameters that con-
trol the MASSPROP units, see Calculations Based on the Current UCS (see page
530).
Regions
The table shows the mass properties AutoCAD displays for all regions.
Mass properties for all regions
Mass property Description
Area The surface area of solids or the enclosed area of regions.
Perimeter The total length of the inside and outside loops of a region. AutoCAD
does not calculate the perimeter of solids.
MASSPROP | 527
Mass properties for all regions (continued)
Bounding box The two coordinates that define the bounding box. For regions that are
coplanar with the XY plane of the current user coordinate system
(UCS), the bounding box is defined by the diagonally opposite corners
of a rectangle that encloses the region. For regions that are not
coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, the bounding box is
defined by the diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses
the region.
Centroid A 2D or 3D coordinate that is the center of area for regions. For regions
that are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, this coordinate
is a 2D point. For regions that are not coplanar with the XY plane of the
current UCS, this coordinate is a 3D point.
If the regions are coplanar with the XY plane of the current UCS, AutoCAD
displays the additional properties shown in the table.
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions
Moments of A value used when computing the distributed loads, such as fluid
inertia pressure on a plate, or when calculating the forces inside a bending or
twisting beam. The formula for determining area moments of inertia is
area_moments_of_inertia = area_of_interest * radius2
The area moments of inertia has units of distance to the fourth power.
Products of Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
inertia It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The
formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is
product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ
This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.
Radii of Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The

gyration formula for the radii of gyration is
gyration_radii = (moments_of_ inertia/body_mass)1/2
Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.
528 | MASSPROP
Additional mass properties for coplanar regions (continued)
Principal Calculations derived from the products of inertia and that have the
moments and same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain
X,Y,Z directions axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest
about centroid through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and also passes
through the centroid. A third value included in the results is somewhere
between the high and low values.
Solids
The table shows the mass properties AutoCAD displays for solids.
Mass properties for solids
Mass The measure of inertia of a body. Because AutoCAD uses a density of

one, mass and volume have the same value.
Volume The amount of 3D space that a solid encloses.
Bounding box The diagonally opposite corners of a 3D box that encloses the solid.
Centroid A 3D point that is the center of mass for solids. AutoCAD assumes a
solid of uniform density.
Moments of The mass moments of inertia, which is used when computing the force
inertia required to rotate an object about a given axis, such as a wheel rotating
about an axle. The formula for mass moments of inertia is
mass_moments_of_inertia = object_mass * radiusaxis2
Mass moments of inertia unit is mass (grams or slugs) times the

distance squared.
Products of Property used to determine the forces causing the motion of an object.
inertia It is always calculated with respect to two orthogonal planes. The
formula for product of inertia for the YZ plane and XZ plane is
product_of_inertiaYZ,XZ = mass * distcentroid_to_YZ * distcentroid_to_XZ
This XY value is expressed in mass units times the length squared.
MASSPROP | 529
Mass properties for solids (continued)
Radii of Another way of indicating the moments of inertia of a solid. The

gyration formula for the radii of gyration is
gyration_radii = (moments_of_inertia/body_mass)1/2
Radii of gyration are expressed in distance units.
Principal Calculations derived from the products of inertia and that have the
moments and same unit values. The moment of inertia is highest through a certain
X,Y,Z directions axis at the centroid of an object. The moment of inertia is lowest
about centroid through the second axis that is normal to the first axis and also passes
through the centroid. A third value included in the results is somewhere
between the high and low values.
Calculations Based on the Current UCS

The table shows the parameters that control the units in which mass
properties are calculated.
Parameters that control MASSPROP units
Parameter Used to calculate
DENSITY Mass of solids
LENGTH Volume of solids
LENGTH*LENGTH Area of regions and surface area of solids
LENGTH*LENGTH*LENGTH Bounding box, radii of gyration, centroid, and

perimeter
DENSITY*LENGTH*LENGTH Moments of inertia, products of inertia, and

principal moments
See Also
Commands REGION creates a region object from a selection set of
existing objects. SOLID creates solid-filled polygons.
530 | MASSPROP
MATCHPROP
Applies the properties of a selected object to other objects
Standard toolbar:
Modify menu: Match Properties
Command line: matchprop or painter (or 'matchprop for transparent use)
Select source object: Select the object whose properties you want to copy
Current active settings: Currently selected matchprop settings
Select destination object(s) or [Settings]: Enter s or select one or more objects to
copy properties to
Destination Specifies the objects to which you want to copy the

Object(s) properties of the source object. You can continue
selecting destination objects, or press ENTER to apply
the properties and end the command.
Settings Displays the Property Settings dialog box (see page
531), in which you can control which object properties
to copy to the destination objects. By default, AutoCAD
selects all object properties in the Property Settings
dialog box for copying.
Property Settings Dialog Box

Specifies properties to be copied with MATCHPROP. Select one or more of the
these settings.
Color Changes the color of the destination object to that of
the source object. Available for all objects except OLE
objects.
Layer Changes the layer of the destination object to that of
the source object. Available for all objects except OLE
objects.
Linetype Changes the linetype of the destination object to that
of the source object. Available for all objects except
attributes, hatches, multiline text, OLE objects, points,
and viewports.
MATCHPROP | 531
Linetype Scale Changes the linetype scale factor of the destination
object to that of the source object. Available for all
objects except attributes, hatches, multiline text, OLE
objects, points, and viewports.
Lineweight Changes the lineweight of the destination object to
that of the source object. Available for all objects.
Thickness Changes the thickness of the destination object to that
of the source object. Available only for arcs, attributes,
circles, lines, points, 2D polylines, regions, text, and
traces.
Plot Style Changes the plot style of the destination object to that
of the source object. If you are working in color-
dependent plot style mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1),
this option is unavailable. Available for all objects
except OLE objects.
Dimension In addition to basic object properties, changes the
dimension style of the destination object to that of the
source object. Available only for dimension, leader, and
tolerance objects.
Polyline In addition to basic object properties, changes the
width and linetype generation properties of the
destination polyline to those of the source polyline.
The fit/smooth property and the elevation of the source
polyline are not transferred to the destination polyline.
If the source polyline has variable width, the width
property is not transferred to the destination polyline.
Text In addition to basic object properties, changes the text
style of the destination object to that of the source
object. Available only for single-line and multiline text
objects.
Viewport In addition to basic object properties, changes the
following properties of the destination paper space
viewport to match those of the source viewport: on/off,
display locking, standard or custom scale, shade plot,
snap, grid, and UCS icon visibility and location. The
settings for clipping and for UCS per viewport and the
freeze/thaw state of the layer are not transferred to the
destination object.
532 | MATCHPROP
Hatch In addition to basic object properties, changes the
hatch pattern of the destination object to that of the
source object. Available only for hatch objects.
MATLIB
Imports and exports materials to and from a library of materials
You can import a predefined material from a materials library file (MLI). You
can use a material as is or modify it.
A new drawing contains only the GLOBAL material. The GLOBAL material is a
set of default material values.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Materials Library
Command line: matlib
The Materials Library dialog box is displayed.
Materials Library Dialog Box

Imports materials into and exports materials from the drawing.
MATLIB | 533
Current Drawing
Displays the materials currently in the drawing. A material can be in the
drawing but not assigned to any object. Such a material is called unattached
or unassigned.
In the Current Drawing list, you can save or purge materials. Selecting mate-
rials in the Current Library list removes selection from all items selected in
the Current Drawing list and vice versa.
Purge Deletes all unattached materials from the Current
Drawing list.
Save As Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), where you can specify the name
of the materials library (MLI) file in which AutoCAD
saves the Current Drawing list.
Current Library
Displays the materials in the currently selected library file. The default library
is render.mli.
Open Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), which lists MLI files.
Save Saves the changes to the MLI file in the current folder.
Save As Displays the Library File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), where you can specify the name
of the materials library (MLI) file in which AutoCAD
saves the Current Library list.
Preview
Displays a sample of the material selected in the Current Library list or
Current Drawing list. Use the list to specify whether the sample is applied to
a sphere or a cube. You can preview only one material at a time.
Import
Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Library list to the Current
Drawing list. If you try to import a material already in the Current Drawing
list, AutoCAD displays the Reconcile Imported Material Names dialog box
(see page 535).
534 | MATLIB
Export
Adds one or more materials selected in the Current Drawing list to the Cur-
rent Library list. If you try to export a material already in the Current Library
list, AutoCAD displays the Reconcile Exported Material Names dialog box
(see page 536).
Delete
Deletes materials selected in the Current Drawing list or the Current Library
list.
Reconcile Imported Material Names Dialog Box

Creates and modifies imported material names.
Options
Determines how AutoCAD treats the material you are reconciling and the
objects that are currently attached to that material.
Overwrite Replaces the material in the Current Drawing list with
Existing Material the selected material in the Current Library list.
If this option is cleared and you enter different names
for the materials under Old Material in List and New
Material from Library, AutoCAD adds the library
material to the Current Drawing list.
Transfer Attaches the object to the material being imported from
Attachments the library. If this option is cleared, AutoCAD keeps the
object attached to the material in the Current Drawing
list.
MATLIB | 535
Material Names
Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being imported.
Old Material in Displays the name of the material in the Current
List Drawing list. If Overwrite Existing Material is not
selected, you can edit the name of the material.
New Material Displays the name of the material in the Current
from Library Library list. You can always edit this name. If Overwrite
Existing Material is not selected, you must enter a
different name for the new material.
OK
Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box.
OK to All
Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box.
Reconcile Exported Material Names Dialog Box

Creates and modifies exported material names.
Options
Determines how AutoCAD treats the material you are reconciling and the
objects selected.
Overwrite Replaces the material in the Current Library list with
Existing Material the selected material in the Current Drawing list.
If this option is cleared and you enter different names
under Old Material in Library and New Material from
List, AutoCAD adds the material to the Current Library
list.
536 | MATLIB
Material Names
Modifies the names of the old and new materials that are being exported.
Old Material in Displays the name of the material in the Current
Library Library list. If Overwrite Existing Material is not
selected, you can edit the name of the material.
New Material Displays the name of the material in the Current
from List Drawing list. You can always edit this name. If
Overwrite Existing Material is not selected, you must
enter a different name for the new material.
OK
Reconciles only the last selected material name and closes the dialog box.
OK to All
Reconciles all materials and closes the dialog box.
See Also
See “Use Materials Libraries” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX™ applications. RMAT creates, edits,
attaches, and detaches rendering materials.
MEASURE
Places point objects or blocks at measured intervals on an object
Draw menu: Point ➤ Measure
Command line: measure
Select object to measure:

Specify length of segment or [Block]: Specify a distance or enter b
The points or blocks drawn by MEASURE are placed in the Previous selection
set, so you can choose them all by entering p at the next Select Objects
prompt. You can use the Node object snap to draw an object by snapping to
the point objects. You can then remove the points by entering erase
previous.
AutoCAD places the markers in the user coordinate system (UCS) of the
object being measured (except for 3D polylines in the current UCS). Markers
are always placed on the object, regardless of the elevation settings.
MEASURE | 537
If you use point objects for the markers, you can make the points easier to see
by changing their appearance with the PDMODE system variable.
Length of Places point objects at the specified interval along the
Segment selected object, starting at the endpoint closest to the
point you used to select the object.
Measurement of closed polylines starts at their initial
vertex (the first one drawn).
Measurement of circles starts at the angle from the
center set as the current snap rotation angle. If the snap
rotation angle is 0, then the measurement of the circle
starts to the right of center, on its circumference.
segment
length
selected object
The illustration shows how MEASURE marks 0.5-unit

distances along a polyline, with the PDMODE system
variable set to 35.
segment length
select polyline measure every 0.5 units
Block Places blocks at a specified interval along the selected

object.
Enter name of block to insert: Enter the name of a block
currently defined in the drawing
Align block with object? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or
press ENTER
538 | MEASURE
If you enter y, the block is rotated about its insertion
point so that its horizontal lines are aligned with, and
drawn tangent to, the object being measured. If you
enter n, the block is always inserted with a 0 rotation
angle.
Specify length of segment:
After you specify the segment length, AutoCAD inserts

the block at the specified interval. If the block has
variable attributes, these attributes are not included.
See Also
See “Specify Measured Intervals on Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BLOCK creates blocks of objects. DIVIDE places evenly
spaced point objects or blocks along the length or
perimeter of a selected object.
System Variables PDMODE controls the appearance of the point objects.
PDSIZE controls the size of the point objects.
MENU
Loads a menu file
A menu file is a text file containing the AutoCAD command strings and
menu syntax that define the menu labels and menu macros. A menu file can
contain a section for each of these menu areas: drop-down menus, toolbars,
shortcut menus, image tile menus, screen menus, pointing device button
menus, accelerator keys, and digitizer tablet menus.
You can create a customized menu file and use MENU to load the file for use
in AutoCAD.
Command line: menu
The Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is dis-
played. Enter or select a menu file name. When you press ENTER or choose
Open, the named file is loaded into AutoCAD.
See Also
For information about AutoCAD menus, see “The Command Window” in
the User’s Guide.
MENU | 539
For information about creating and modifying menu files, see “The Menu
File” in the Customization Guide.
Commands MENULOAD loads partial menu files. MENUUNLOAD
unloads partial menu files.
System Variables MENUNAME stores the name of the currently loaded
menu file. MENUECHO determines whether menu items
and system prompts are displayed on the command
line.
MENULOAD
Loads partial menu files
MENULOAD adds partial menu files to an existing base menu file, such as
acad.mnu. Each menu file (base and partial) has an associated menu group
name. From each menu group, you can access each drop-down menu that
resides in its associated menu file.
After you load the partial menus, you can customize the AutoCAD menu bar
by adding or deleting drop-down menus.
Tools menu: Customize ➤ Menus
Command line: menuload
The Menu Customization dialog box is displayed (see page 540).

When FILEDIA is set to 0, MENULOAD displays a prompt on the command line
(see page 543).
Menu Customization Dialog Box

Controls the view of menu groups and menu bars for the AutoCAD window.
Menu Groups Tab (Menu Customization Dialog Box)

Loads or unloads specified menus.
540 | MENULOAD
Menu Groups Lists the currently loaded menu files.
File Name Specifies the file to load when you choose Load. You
can either enter the file name or choose Browse to
display the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box).
Replace All Removes all existing menu groups from the Menu
Groups list when you load a new file menu.
Unload Unloads the menu group selected in the Menu Groups
list.
Load Loads the file specified under File Name.
Browse Displays the Select Menu File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), in which you can select a menu
file to load.
MENULOAD | 541
Menu Bar Tab (Menu Customization Dialog Box)
Adds or deletes menus from the menu bar.
Menu Group Displays a selected menu file in the Menu Group list.
Menus Lists all the menus from the menu group specified in
the Menu Group list.
Menu Bar Lists all the menus loaded in the AutoCAD window. The
menu at the top of the list corresponds to the leftmost
menu on the menu bar in the AutoCAD window. The
menu at the bottom of the list corresponds to the
rightmost drop-down menu.
Insert Inserts the menu selected in the Menus list above the
selected menu in the Menu Bar list. If no menu is
selected in the Menu Bar list, the menu selected in the
Menus list is inserted at the top of the Menu Bar list.
Remove Removes the selected menu from the Menu Bar list.
Remove All Removes all menus from the menu bar in the AutoCAD
window.
542 | MENULOAD
MENULOAD Command Line
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), MENULOAD displays the following prompt on
the command line.
Enter name of menu file to load: Enter a file name
See Also
See “The Menu File” in the Customization Guide.
Commands MENUUNLOAD unloads partial menu files.
MENUUNLOAD
Unloads partial menu files
Command line: menuunload
The Menu Customization dialog box (see page 540) is displayed, which has
the same options as MENULOAD. The only difference between the two com-
mands is in the command line prompts.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (off), MENUUNLOAD displays the following prompt
Enter the name of the MENUGROUP to unload: Enter a name
See Also
See “The Menu File” in the Customization Guide.
Commands MENULOAD loads partial menu files.
MENUUNLOAD | 543
MINSERT
Inserts multiple instances of a block in a rectangular array
Blocks inserted using MINSERT cannot be exploded.
Command line: minsert
Enter block name or [?]: Enter a name, enter ? to list the currently defined blocks
in the drawing, or enter ~ to display the Select Drawing File dialog box
Note You cannot precede the name of a block with an asterisk to explode the
block’s objects during insertion, as you can with INSERT.

Options at the insertion point preset the scale and rotation of a block before
you specify its position. Presetting is useful for dragging a block using a scale
factor and a rotation other than 1 or 0. If you enter one of the options,
respond to the AutoCAD prompts by specifying a distance for the scale
options or an angle for rotation.
Insertion Point
Specifies a location for the blocks.
X Scale Factor Sets X and Y scale factors.

The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block

inserts and also sets the angle of the entire array.
Enter number of rows (---) <1>: Enter a positive value
Enter number of columns (| | |) <1>: Enter a positive value
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays

the following prompt:
544 | MINSERT
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---):
Enter a value, or specify two points to define a box whose
width and height represent the distance between rows and
between columns
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell,

Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value
or specify a distance
Corner Sets the scale factor by using the block insertion point
and the opposite corner.


between columns

MINSERT | 545
XYZ Sets X, Y, and Z scale factors.
Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Enter a value or
If you enter c, you specify a corner point. The specified

point and the block insertion point determine the X
and Y scale factors.
value or press ENTER to use the same scale factor
Enter Z scale factor <use X scale factor>: Enter a value or


between columns

Scale
546 | MINSERT
The rotation angle sets the angle of the individual block inserts and also sets
the angle of the entire array.
If you specify more than one row, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Enter distance between rows or specify unit cell (---): Enter a value, or specify
two points to define a box whose width and height represent the distance between
rows and between columns
Specify distance between columns ( | | | ): Enter a value or specify a distance
X
If you specify more than one column and no unit cell, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
MINSERT | 547
Y
following prompt:
Z
548 | MINSERT
following prompt:
Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for both the individual blocks and the entire array.
enter an option or press ENTER
X Scale Factor Sets the X scale factor.


Enter a value or specify a distance

MINSERT | 549
Corner Sets the scale factor by the specified point and the block
insertion point.


XYZ Specify X scale factor or [Corner] <1>: Specify a nonzero

You can determine the X and Y scale factors by entering

a scale factor value or by specifying a corner point. If
you specify a corner point, the specified point and the
block insertion point determine the X and Y scale
factors for the block.


550 | MINSERT
PScale
Sets the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display of the block
as it is dragged into position.
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match those
of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 549).
PX
Sets the scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the block as it is
PY
Sets the scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the block as it is
MINSERT | 551
PZ
Sets the scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the block as it is
PRotate
Sets the rotation angle of the block as it is dragged into position.
See Also
See “Insert Blocks,” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ARRAY creates multiple copies of selected objects in a
rectangular or polar pattern. INSERT places a block or
drawing inside the current drawing.
552 | MINSERT
MIRROR
Creates a mirror image copy of objects
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Mirror
Command line: mirror
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish
Specify first point of mirror line: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point of mirror line: Specify a point (2)
objects selected
2 The two specified points become the endpoints of a line about which the
selected objects are reflected. In 3D, this line orients a mirroring plane per-
pendicular to the XY plane of the user coordinate system (UCS) containing
1 the mirror line.
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes Places the reflected image into the drawing and deletes
the original objects.
original objects No Places the reflected image into the drawing and retains
deleted the original objects.
To manage the reflection properties of text objects, use the MIRRTEXT system
variable. The default setting of MIRRTEXT is 1 (on), which causes a text object
original objects
to be mirrored just like any other object. When MIRRTEXT is off (0), text is not
retained mirrored.
before mirroring after mirroring after mirroring

(MIRRTEXT=1) (MIRRTEXT=0)
See Also
See “Mirror Objects” in the User’s Guide.
System Variables MIRRTEXT controls whether text is reflected with the
MIRROR command.
MIRROR | 553
MIRROR3D
Creates a mirror image of objects about a plane
Modify menu: 3D Operation ➤ Mirror 3D
Command line: mirror3d
Select objects: Use an object selection method and press ENTER to finish
Specify first point of mirror plane (3 points) or [Object/Last/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/
ZX/3points] <3points>: Enter an option, specify a point, or press ENTER
Object Uses the plane of a selected planar object as the

mirroring plane.
Select a circle, arc or 2D-polyline segment:
Delete source objects? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER
If you enter y, AutoCAD places the reflected object into

select object as
mirroring plane the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you
enter n or press ENTER , AutoCAD places the reflected
object into the drawing and retains the original objects.
Last Mirrors the selected objects about the last defined
mirroring plane.
press ENTER

the drawing and deletes the original objects. If you
Z Axis Defines the mirroring plane by a point on the plane and
a point normal to the plane.
Specify point on mirror plane: Specify a point (1)
Specify point on Z-axis (normal) of mirror plane: Specify
a point (2)
press ENTER
554 | MIRROR3D
2 1
View Aligns the mirroring plane with the viewing plane of
the current viewport through a point.
Specify point on view plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point or
press ENTER
press ENTER

XY/YZ/ZX Aligns the mirroring plane with one of the standard
planes (XY, YZ, or ZX) through a specified point.
Specify point on (XY, YZ, ZX) plane <0,0,0>: Specify a
point (1) or press ENTER
1 1 1
XY YZ ZX

press ENTER

3 Points Defines the mirroring plane by three points. If you
select this option by specifying a point, AutoCAD does
not display the First Point on Mirror Plane prompt.
Specify first point on mirror plane: Enter a point (1)
Specify second point on mirror plane: Enter a point (2)
Specify third point on mirror plane: Enter a point (3)
press ENTER
MIRROR3D | 555
1 object into the drawing and retains the original objects.
3
2 See Also
See “Mirror Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands
ROTATE3D rotates an object about an arbitrary 3D axis.

MIRROR creates a mirror image of objects about a mir-
roring plane perpendicular to the XY plane of the UCS
containing a specified mirror line.
MLEDIT
Edits multiple parallel lines
Multiple parallel lines are called multilines. MLEDIT controls intersections
between multilines.
Modify menu: Object ➤ Multiline
Command line: mledit
AutoCAD displays the Multiline Edit Tools dialog box.
Multiline Edit Tools Dialog Box

Creates and modifies multiline patterns. The dialog box displays sample
images in four columns. The first column governs multilines that cross, the
second governs multilines that form a tee, the third governs corner joints and
vertices, and the fourth governs multilines to be cut or joined.
556 | MLEDIT
You can click any of the image samples to display a brief description in the
lower-left corner of the dialog box.
Closed Cross
Creates a closed-cross intersection between two multilines. After you select
the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select the foreground multiline
Select second mline: Select the intersecting multiline
AutoCAD completes the closed-cross intersection and displays the following

prompt:
Select first mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u
First Mline Edits another multiline. AutoCAD displays the Select

Second Mline prompt.
first mline selected second mline selected result
Undo Undoes the closed-cross intersection. AutoCAD

displays the Select First Mline prompt.
Open Cross
Creates an open-cross intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD breaks
all elements of the first multiline and only the outside elements of the second
multiline. After you select the sample image, AutoCAD displays the follow-
ing prompt:
Select first mline: Select a multiline
AutoCAD completes the open-cross intersection and displays the following

prompt:

MLEDIT | 557
Undo Undoes the open-cross intersection. AutoCAD displays

the Select First Mline prompt.
Merged Cross
Creates a merged-cross intersection between two multilines. The order in
which you select the multilines is not important. After you select the sample
image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select a multiline
AutoCAD completes the merged-cross intersection and displays the follow-

ing prompt:

Undo Undoes the merged-cross intersection. AutoCAD

displays the Select First Mline prompt.
Closed Tee
Creates a closed-tee intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD trims or
extends the first multiline to its intersection with the second multiline. After
you select the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
558 | MLEDIT
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim
AutoCAD completes the closed-tee intersection and displays the following

prompt:
Select first mline (or Undo): Select another multiline or enter u

Undo Undoes the closed-tee intersection. AutoCAD displays

Open Tee
Creates an open-tee intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD trims or
extends the first multiline to its intersection with the second multiline. After
you select the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Select first mline: Select the multiline to trim or extend
AutoCAD completes the open-tee intersection and displays the following

prompt:

MLEDIT | 559
Undo Undoes the open-tee intersection. AutoCAD displays
Merged Tee
Creates a merged-tee intersection between two multilines. AutoCAD trims or
extends the multiline to its intersection with the other multiline. After you
select the sample image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
AutoCAD completes the merged-tee intersection and displays the following

prompt:

Undo Undoes the merged-tee intersection. AutoCAD displays

Corner Joint
Creates a corner joint between multilines. AutoCAD trims or extends the
multilines to their intersection. After you select the sample image, AutoCAD
displays the following prompt:
Select second mline: Select the second half of the corner
AutoCAD completes the corner joint and displays the following prompt:

560 | MLEDIT
Undo Undoes the corner joint. AutoCAD displays the Select

First Mline prompt.
Add Vertex
Adds a vertex to a multiline. After you select the sample image, AutoCAD
Select mline: Select a multiline
AutoCAD adds the vertex at the selected point and displays the following
prompt:
Select mline or [Undo]: Select another multiline or enter u
Mline Edits another multiline. AutoCAD displays the Select

Mline prompt again.
mline selected result
Undo Removes the added vertex. AutoCAD displays the Select

Mline prompt.
Delete Vertex
Deletes a vertex from a multiline. After you select the sample image,
MLEDIT | 561
AutoCAD deletes the vertex nearest to the selected point and displays the
following prompt:

Mline prompt again.
mline selected result
Undo Restores the deleted vertex. AutoCAD displays the

Select Mline prompt.
Cut Single
Cuts a selected element of a multiline. After you select the sample image,
AutoCAD uses the selection point on the multiline as the first cut point and
Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline
AutoCAD cuts the element and displays the following prompt:


Mline prompt again.
mline selected second point selected result
Undo Undoes the cut. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline

prompt.
562 | MLEDIT
Cut All
Cuts a multiline in two. After you select the sample image, AutoCAD displays
AutoCAD uses the selected point on the multiline as the first cut point and
Select second point: Specify the second cut point on the multiline
AutoCAD cuts all elements of the multiline and displays the following
prompt:

Mline prompt again.
Undo Undoes the cut. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline

prompt.
Weld All
Rejoins multiline segments that have been cut. After you select the sample
image, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
AutoCAD uses the selected point on the multiline as the start of the weld and
Select second point: Specify the end of the weld on the multiline
MLEDIT | 563
AutoCAD welds the multiline and displays the following prompt:

Mline prompt again.
Undo Undoes the weld. AutoCAD displays the Select Mline

prompt.
See Also
See “Modify Multilines” in the User’s Guide.
Commands MLINE creates multilines. MLSTYLE creates, loads, and
sets multiline styles.
System Variables CMLJUST stores the justification of the current multi-
line. CMLSCALE stores the scale of the current multiline.
CMLSTYLE stores the name of the current multiline
style.
MLINE
Creates multiple parallel lines
Multiple parallel lines are called multilines.
Draw menu: Multiline
Command line: mline
Current settings: Justification = current, Scale = current, Style = current

Specify start point or [Justification/Scale/STyle]: Specify a point or enter an option
564 | MLINE
Start Point
Specifies the next vertex of the multiline.
Specify next point:
If you create a multiline with two or more segments, AutoCAD displays a

prompt that includes the Close option.
Specify next point or [Close/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an option
Next Point Draws a multiline segment to the specified point using

the current multiline style and continues to prompt for
points.
Undo Undoes the last vertex point on the multiline.
AutoCAD redisplays the previous prompt.
Close Closes the multiline by joining the last segments with
the first segments.
Justification
Determines how the multiline is drawn between the points you specify.
Enter justification type [Top/Zero/Bottom] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
top Top Draws the multiline below the cursor, so that the line
with the most positive offset is at the specified points.
Zero Draws the multiline with its origin centered at the

cursor, so that the MLSTYLE Element Properties offset of
zero 0.0 is at the specified points.
Bottom Draws the multiline above the cursor, so that the line
with the most negative offset is at the specified points.
Scale
bottom Controls the overall width of the multiline. This scale does not affect line-
type scale.
Enter mline scale <current>: Enter a scale or press ENTER
MLINE | 565
The scale factor is based on the width established in the multiline style
definition. A scale factor of 2 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style
scale at 1
definition. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset line—the
smallest on top when the multiline is drawn from left to right. A negative
scale value also alters the scale by the absolute value. A scale factor of 0
collapses the multiline into a single line. For information about the multiline
scale at 2 style definition, see MLSTYLE.
Style
Specifies a style to use for the multiline. See “Draw Multiple-Line Objects” in
the User’s Guide, and see MLSTYLE.
Enter mline style name or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Style Name Specifies the name of a style that has already been
loaded or that’s defined in a multiline library (MLN) file
you’ve created.
?—List Styles Lists the loaded multiline styles.
See Also
See “Draw Multiple-Line Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands MLEDIT edits multilines. MLSTYLE creates, loads, and
sets multiline styles.
System Variables CMLJUST stores the justification of the current multi-
line. CMLSCALE stores the scale of the current multiline.
CMLSTYLE stores the name of the current multiline
style.
MLSTYLE
Defines a style for multiple parallel lines
Multilines comprise up to 16 lines called elements. The multiline style con-
trols the number of elements and the properties of each element. MLSTYLE
also controls the background color and the end caps of each multiline.
Format menu: Multiline Style
Command line: mlstyle
AutoCAD displays the Multiline Styles dialog box.
566 | MLSTYLE
Multiline Styles Dialog Box
Defines the style and properties of multilines. The Multiline Styles dialog box
displays multiline style names, makes them current, loads them from a file,
and saves, adds, and renames them. You can also create or edit a description
of a style.
Current Displays and sets the current multiline style. Select a

name from the list to make it current. If there are
multiple styles, the name of the current style is selected.
The list of multiline styles can include externally
referenced multiline styles—that is, multiline styles
that exist in an externally referenced drawing (xref).
AutoCAD displays externally referenced multiline style
names using the same syntax it uses for other externally
dependent nongraphical objects. See “Overview of
External References” in the User’s Guide.
Note You cannot edit the element and multiline
properties of the STANDARD multiline style or any
multiline style that is being used in the drawing. If you try
to edit the options in either the Element Properties dialog
box (see page 569) or the Multiline Properties dialog box
(see page 570), the options are unavailable. To edit an
existing multiline style, you must do so before you draw
any multilines in that style.
MLSTYLE | 567
Name Names a new multiline style or renames one. The
element and multiline properties are unavailable until
you enter a new name and make it current by choosing
Add.
Enter a name and choose Add, and then save the
multiline style to a multiline library (MLN) file.
AutoCAD saves the definition in the MLN file you
specify. If you specify an MLN file that already exists,
the new style definition is added to the file and existing
definitions are not erased. The default file name is
acad.mln.
To rename a style, enter a name and choose Rename.
You cannot rename, modify, or delete the default
STANDARD multiline style. To make a copy of the
current style, enter a name and then choose Save.
Multiline style names adhere to the naming
conventions for named objects.
Description Adds a description to a multiline style. Enter up to 255
characters, including spaces.
Load Displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box (see page
569), in which you can load multiline styles from a
specified MLN file.
Save Saves or copies a multiline style. Enter a name and then
choose Save.
Add Adds the multiline style in Name to the Current list.
Rename Renames a multiline style. Enter a name and then
choose Rename.
Element Displays the Element Properties dialog box (see page
Properties 569).
You cannot edit the element properties of an existing
multiline style.
Multiline Displays the Multiline Properties dialog box (see page
Properties 570).
568 | MLSTYLE
Load Multiline Styles Dialog Box
Loads a multiline style from an MLN file. The default file name is acad.mln.
If acad.mln does not exist, or if it exists but AutoCAD cannot find it, choose
File to specify another file or file location.
File Displays a standard file selection dialog box in which
you can locate and select another library file.
List Lists the multiline styles available in the current library
file. To load another multiline style, select a style from
the list and choose OK.
Element Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties, such as the number, offset, color, and linetype, of new
and existing multiline elements.
Elements Displays all the line elements in the current multiline

style. Each line element in the style is defined by its
offset from the multiline origin (0.0), color, and
linetype. The line elements are always displayed in
descending order of their offsets.
Add Adds a new line element to the multiline style. Not
available until color or linetype has been selected for a
multiline style other than STANDARD.
Delete Deletes a line element from the multiline style.
Offset Specifies the offset for line elements in the multiline
style.
MLSTYLE | 569
0.1
0.0
–0.1
–0.3
–0.45
a four-element multiline, each element offset from 0.0
Color Displays and sets the color for line elements in the
multiline style. When you choose Color or the color
swatch, AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box
(see page 169). You can use the Select Color dialog box
to define the color of objects by selecting from the 255
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, True Colors, and
Color Book colors.
Linetype Displays and sets the linetype for line elements in the
multiline style. When you choose Linetype, AutoCAD
displays the Select Linetype Properties dialog box,
which displays loaded linetypes. Select a linetype from
this dialog box. To load a new linetype, choose Load.
AutoCAD displays the Load or Reload Linetypes dialog
box (see page 509) for loading selected linetypes into
the drawing from linetype files.
Multiline Properties Dialog Box

Sets the multiline properties, such as the display of segment joints, the start
and end caps and their angle, and the background color.
570 | MLSTYLE
Display Joints
Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline segment.
A joint is also known as a miter.
Display Joints off Display Joints on
Caps
Controls the start and end caps of the multiline.
Line Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline.
without Line with Line
Outer Arc Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the

multiline.
without Outer Arc with Outer Arc
MLSTYLE | 571
Inner Arcs Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. If
there’s an odd number of elements, the center line is
unconnected. For example, if there are six elements,
inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and
4. If there are seven elements, inner arcs connect
elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element 4 is left
unconnected.
without Inner Arc with Inner Arc
Angle Specifies the angle of the end caps.
without Angle with Angle
Fill
Controls the background fill of the multiline.
On Turns background fill on.
Color Displays and sets the color of the background fill. When
you choose Color or the color swatch, AutoCAD
displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 169).
See Also
See “Modify Multilines” in the User’s Guide.
Commands MLEDIT edits multilines. MLINE creates multilines.
System Variables CMLJUST stores the justification of the current

multiline. CMLSCALE stores the scale of the current
multiline. CMLSTYLE stores the name of the current
multiline style.
572 | MLSTYLE
MODEL
Switches from a layout tab to the Model tab
Command line: model
On the Model tab, you can create drawings in model space. The Model tab
automatically sets the TILEMODE system variable to 1, and you can create
model viewports to display various views of your drawing. Once you’ve com-
pleted your drawing, you can choose a layout tab to begin designing a layout
environment from which to plot.
For possible performance gains when you switch between layout tabs or
between the Model tab and a layout tab, use the LAYOUTREGENCTL system
variable to control how the display list is updated.
Note The Model tab replaces the TILE button that appeared on the status bar
in earlier releases of AutoCAD.
See Also
See “Work in Paper Space and Model Space” in the User’s Guide.
System Variables LAYOUTREGENCTL specifies how the display list is
updated in the Model and layout tabs.
MOVE
Displaces objects a specified distance in a specified direction
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Move
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to move, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Move.
Command line: move
Specify base point or displacement: Specify a base point (1)
Specify second point of displacement or <use first point as displacement>:
Specify a point (2) or press ENTER
MODEL | 573
1
2
object selected object moved
The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates how
far the selected objects are to be moved and in what direction. If you press
ENTER at the Specify Second Point of Displacement prompt, the first point is
interpreted as relative X,Y,Z displacement. For example, if you specify 2,3 for
the base point and press ENTER at the next prompt, the object moves 2 units
in the X direction and 3 units in the Y direction from its current position.
See Also
See “Move Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands COPY duplicates objects.
MREDO
Reverses the effects of several previous UNDO or U commands
Reverses the action of multiple UNDO commands. To redo more than one
action at a time, click the arrow next to the Redo button on the Standard
toolbar, and then select the last in the sequence of actions you want to redo.
Standard toolbar:
Command line: mredo
Enter number of actions or [All/Last]: Specify an option, enter a positive number,

or press ENTER
Number of Reverses the specified number of actions.

Actions
All Reverses all previous actions.
Last Reverses only the last action.
574 | MREDO
MSLIDE
Creates a slide file of the current model viewport or the current layout
Command line: mslide
The Create Slide File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter a file name or select a slide (SLD) file from the list. A slide
file is a raster image of a viewport.
In model space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the current viewport only. In
paper space, MSLIDE makes a slide file of the paper space display, including
all viewports and their contents.
Off-screen portions of the drawing, or layers that are off or frozen, are not
included in the slide.
Use the VSLIDE command to view slides, or the SLIDELIB utility to create a
slide library.
When you view slides of images shaded with the -SHADE command in a larger
window or at a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide, black
lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. To avoid
this situation, use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when
creating slides.
See Also
See “Prepare Slides for Image Tile Menus” in the Customization Guide.
Commands VSLIDE displays slide files in the current viewport.
Utilities SLIDELIB creates slide library (SLB) files. This utility is

found in the AutoCAD Support directory.
MSPACE
Switches from paper space to a model space viewport
AutoCAD operates in either model space or paper space. You use model space
(the Model tab) to do drafting and design work and to create two-dimen-
sional drawings or three-dimensional models. You use paper space (a layout
tab) to create a finished layout of a drawing for plotting.
MSLIDE | 575
When you are in a layout, you can enter mspace on the command line to
make the last viewport in the layout current, and then work in model space
in that viewport within the layout. You can switch to model space by double-
clicking a viewport, and you can switch to paper space by double-clicking an
area of paper space.
Command line: mspace
See Also
See “Work in Paper Space and Model Space” in the User’s Guide.
Commands PSPACE switches from model space to paper space.
VPORTS creates a new viewport object and turns on
existing viewport objects. VPLAYER sets the visibility for
layers in specific viewports.
System Variables PSVPSCALE sets the default viewport scale factor applied
to newly created viewports. PSLTSCALE controls paper
space linetype scaling. VISRETAIN specifies precedence
of settings for external reference layers. MAXACTVP
specifies the maximum number of viewports to regen-
erate. DIMLFAC controls scaling for linear dimensioning
measurements.
MTEXT
Creates multiline text
MTEXT creates paragraphs that fit within a boundary that defines the width
of the paragraph and its location in the drawing. Each multiline text (mtext)
object is a single object, regardless of the number of lines it contains. The text
boundary, although not plotted, printed, or displayed, remains part of the
object’s framework.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Text ➤ Multiline Text
Command line: mtext
Current text style: current Text height: current

Specify first corner:
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]:
After you specify the point for the opposite corner, the Multiline Text Editor
is displayed.
576 | MTEXT
If you specify one of the other options, or if you enter -mtext at the Com-
mand prompt, MTEXT bypasses the Multiline Text Editor and displays
additional prompts on the command line (see page 585).
Multiline Text Editor

Creates or modifies multiline text objects and imports or pastes text from
other files.
text style stack/unstack

user set tab stop text
font text height text color
ruler
default tab stops
paragraph indent marker save changes and

first line indent marker close the editor
The Multiline Text Editor includes a Text Formatting toolbar and a shortcut
menu.
Text Formatting Toolbar

Controls the text style for the multiline text object and the character format-
ting for selected text.
Style Applies a text style to the multiline text object. The
current style is saved in the TEXTSTYLE system
variable.
Character formatting for font, height, and bold or italic
attributes is overridden if you apply a new style to an
existing multiline text object. Stacking, underlining,
and color attributes are retained in characters to which
a new style is applied.
Styles that have backward or upside-down effects are
not applied. If a style defined with a vertical effect is
applied to an SHX font, the text is displayed
horizontally in the Multiline Text Editor.
MTEXT | 577
Font Specifies a font for new text or changes the font of
selected text. TrueType® fonts are listed by font family
name. AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts are listed
by the name of the file in which the fonts are stored.
Custom fonts or third-party fonts are displayed in the
editor with Autodesk-supplied proxy fonts. A sample
drawing (truetype.dwg) showing each font is provided in
the sample directory.
Text Height Sets the character height in drawing units for new text
or changes the height of selected text. If the current text
style has no fixed height, the text height is the value
stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. A multiline text
object can contain characters of various heights.
Bold Turns on and off bold formatting for new or selected
text. This option is available only for characters using
TrueType fonts.
Italic Turns on and off italic formatting for new or selected
text. This option is available only for characters using
TrueType fonts.
Underline Turns on and off underlining for new or selected text.
Undo Undoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor, including
changes to either text content or text formatting. You
can also use CTRL + Z .
Redo Redoes actions in the Multiline Text Editor, including
changes to either text content or text formatting. You
can also use CTRL + Y .
Stack Creates stacked text, for example, fractions, if the
selected text contains stack characters. Also, unstacks
text if stacked text is selected. When the stack
characters, carat (^), forward slash (/), and pound sign
(#), are used, the text to the left of the stack character is
stacked on top of the text to the right.
By default, text that contains a carat converts to left-
justified tolerance values. Text that contains the
forward slash converts to center-justified fractional
numbers; the slash is converted to a horizontal bar the
length of the longer text string. Text that contains the
pound sign converts to a fraction separated by a
diagonal bar the height of the two text strings. The
578 | MTEXT
characters above the diagonal fraction bar are bottom-
right aligned; the characters beneath the diagonal bar
are top-left aligned.
Text Color Specifies a color for new text or changes the color of
selected text.
You can assign text the color associated with the layer
it is on (BYLAYER) or the color of the block it is
contained in (BYBLOCK). You can also select one of the
colors in the color list or click Other to open the Select
Color dialog box (see page 169).
Close Closes the Multiline Text Editor and saves any changes
that you made. You can also click in the drawing
outside the editor to save changes and exit the editor.
To close the Multiline Text Editor without saving
changes, press ESC .
Multiline Text Editor Shortcut Menu

Provides standard editing options and options specific to multiline text
(mtext). Right-click in the Multiline Text Editor to display the shortcut
menu. The options at the top of the menu are basic editing options: Undo,
Redo, Cut, Copy, and Paste. The following options are specific to the Multi-
line Text Editor.
Indents and Tabs Displays the Indents and Tabs dialog box (see page
581), where you can set indentation for the paragraph
and also set up tab stops. You can use different
indentation for the first line and the remaining lines in
the paragraph.
Set Mtext Width Displays the Set Mtext Width dialog box, in which you
can specify a width for the multiline text object in
drawing units.
Justification Sets justification and alignment for the multiline text
object. Top Left is the default setting. Spaces entered at
the end of a line are included as part of the text and
affect the justification of the line. Text is center-, left-,
or right-justified with respect to the left and right text
boundaries. Text is middle-, top-, or bottom-aligned
with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries. See
“Justify Multiline Text” in the User’s Guide for an
illustration of the nine justification options.
Find and Replace Displays the Replace dialog box (see page 582).
MTEXT | 579
Select All Selects all the text in the multiline text object.
Change Case Changes the case of selected text. Options are
Uppercase or Lowercase.
AutoCAPS Converts all newly typed and imported text to
uppercase. AutoCAPS does not affect existing text. To
change the case of existing text, select the text, right-
click, and click Change Case on the shortcut menu.
Remove Removes bold, italic, or underline formatting from the
Formatting selected text.
Combine Combines selected paragraphs into a single paragraph
Paragraphs and replaces each paragraph return with a space.
Stack/Unstack Stacks text if any of the stack characters are contained
in the selected text. Unstacks text if stacked text is
selected.
Properties Displays the Stack Properties dialog box (see page 582).
Symbol Inserts a listed symbol or nonbreaking space at the
cursor position. Symbols can also be inserted
manually. See “Unicode Strings, Control Codes, and
Special Characters” on page 589.
Click Other in the Symbols list to display the Character
Map dialog box, which contains the entire character set
for the current font. To insert a character from the
dialog box, select it and click Select. Select all the
characters you want to use and then click Copy. Right-
click in the Multiline Text Editor and click Paste on the
shortcut menu.
Note In the Multiline Text Editor, the diameter symbol is
displayed as %%c and the nonbreaking space is displayed
as a hollow rectange. Both are displayed correctly in the
drawing.
You can use the Euro symbol with SHX fonts and their
TrueType equivalent fonts shipped with AutoCAD 2000
and later releases. If your keyboard does not contain a
Euro symbol, hold down the ALT key and enter 0128 on
the numeric keypad.
Import Text Displays the Select File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). Select any file that is in ASCII or
RTF format. Imported text retains its original character
580 | MTEXT
formatting and style properties, but you can edit and
format the imported text in the Multiline Text Editor.
After you select a text file to import, you can replace
either selected text or all text, or append the inserted
text to text selected within the text boundary. The file
size for imported text is limited to 32K.
The Multiline Text Editor automatically sets the text
color to BYLAYER. When black characters are inserted
and the background color is black, the Multiline Text
Editor automatically changes to white or the current
color.
Note An Excel spreadsheet imported into an AutoCAD
drawing is truncated at 72 rows unless the spreadsheet
was created in Office 2002 with service pack 2 installed.
The same limitation applies when the drawing that
contains the OLE object is opened on a system with an
earlier version of Office installed: the spreadsheet is
truncated.
Help Displays the MTEXT topic in the Help system.
Indents and Tabs Dialog Box

Sets indentation for paragraphs and the first lines of paragraphs and sets tab
stops. You can also set indentation by moving the sliders on the ruler and set
tab stops by clicking on the ruler.
Indentation
Sets indentation in the paragraph where the cursor is located or in selected
paragraphs.
First Line Sets indentation for the first line of the current
paragraph or selected paragraphs.
Paragraph Sets indentation for the current paragraph or selected
paragraphs.
Tab Stop Position
Sets tab positions for the current paragraph or selected paragraphs. The list
below the text box shows the current tab stops.
Set
Copies the value in the Tab Stop Position box to the list below the box.
Clear
Removes the selected tab stop from the list.
MTEXT | 581
Replace Dialog Box
Searches for specified text strings and replaces them with new text.
Find What Defines the text string to search for.
Replace With Defines the text string to replace the text in Find What.
Find Button Starts a search for the text string in Find What. To
continue the search, click Find again.
Replace Button Replaces the highlighted text with the text in Replace
With.
Replace All Finds all instances of the text specified in Find What
and replaces it with the text in Replace With.
Match Whole Matches the text in the Find box only if it is a single
Word Only word. Text that is part of another word is ignored.
When this option is cleared, AutoCAD finds a match for
text strings whether they are single words or parts of
other words.
Match Case Finds text only if the case of all characters in the text
string is identical to the case of the text in Find What.
When this option is cleared, AutoCAD finds a match for
specified text strings regardless of case.
Stack Properties Dialog Box

Edits the text, stack type, alignment, and size of stacked text. To open the
Stack Properties dialog box, select the stacked text, right-click, and click
Properties on the shortcut menu.
You can edit the upper and lower text separately. The Appearance options
control the stack style, position, and text size of the stacked text.
582 | MTEXT
Text
Changes the upper and lower numbers of a stacked fraction.
Upper Edits the number in the upper part or first half of a
stacked fraction.
Lower Edits the number in the lower part or second half of a
stacked fraction.
Appearance
Edits the style, position, or text size of a stacked fraction.
Style
Specifies a style format for stacked text.
Tolerance Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of
the second number. There is no line between the
numbers.
Fraction Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of
(Horizontal) the second number separated by a horizontal line.
Fraction Stacks the selected text with the first number on top of
(Diagonal) the second number separated by a diagonal line.
Note Releases of AutoCAD earlier than AutoCAD 2000 do
not support diagonal fractions. If a multiline text object
contains diagonal fractions, the fractions are converted to
horizontal fractions when you save the drawing to pre-
AutoCAD 2000 releases. Diagonal fractions are restored
when the drawing is re-opened in AutoCAD 2000 or a
later release. If a single multiline text object contains both
horizontal and diagonal fractions, all fractions are
converted to diagonal fractions when the drawing is
reopened in AutoCAD 2000 or a later release.
Position
Specifies how fractions are aligned. Center alignment is the default. All
stacked text in an object uses the same alignment.
Top Aligns the top of the fraction with the top of the text
line.
Center Centers the fraction vertically at the center of the text
line.
Bottom Aligns the bottom of the fraction with the text baseline.
MTEXT | 583
Text Size
Controls the size of the stacked text as a percentage of the size of the current
text style (from 25 to 125 percent). Default text size is 70 percent.
Defaults
Saves the new settings as defaults or restores the previous default values to
the current stacked text.
AutoStack Button
Displays the AutoStack Properties dialog box. AutoStack only stacks numeric
characters immediately before and after the carat, slash, and pound charac-
ters. To stack nonnumeric characters, or text that includes spaces, select the
text and choose the Stack button.
AutoStack Properties Dialog Box

Turns on automatic stacking, removes leading blank spaces before stacked
text, specifies whether the slash character converts to diagonal or horizontal
fractions, and suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog box.
Enable Automatically stacks numeric characters entered

AutoStacking before and after the carat, slash, or pound character.
For example, if you type 1#3 followed by a nonnumeric
character or space, the text is automatically stacked as
a diagonal fraction.
Remove Leading Removes blanks between a whole number and a
Blank fraction. This option is available only when
AutoStacking is turned on.
Convert It to a Converts the slash character to a diagonal fraction
Diagonal Fraction when AutoStack is on.
584 | MTEXT
Convert It to a Converts the slash character to a horizontal fraction
Horizontal when AutoStack is on.
Fraction
Note Whether AutoStack is on or off, the pound
character is always converted to a diagonal fraction, and
the carat character is always converted to a tolerance
format.
Don’t Show This Suppresses display of the AutoStack Properties dialog
Dialog Again; box. The current property settings are used for all
Always Use These stacked text. When this option is cleared, the AutoStack
Settings Properties dialog box is automatically displayed if you
type two numbers separated by a slash, carat, or pound
sign followed by a space or nonnumeric character.
Note To display the AutoStack Properties dialog box when you have sup-
pressed automatic display, select stacked text, right-click, and click Properties on
the shortcut menu. In the Stack Properties dialog box, click AutoStack.
MTEXT Command Line

If you enter -mtext at the Command prompt, MTEXT bypasses the Multiline
Text Editor and displays additional prompts on the command line.
Current text style: current Text height: current
Specify opposite corner or [Height/Justify/Line spacing/Rotation/Style/Width]:
Opposite Corner
As you drag the pointing device to specify the opposite corner, a rectangle is
displayed to show the location and size of the multiline text object. Arrows
within the rectangle indicate the direction of the paragraph's text flow.
Height
Specifies the text height to use for multiline text characters.
Specify height <current>:
The default height, if nonzero, is the height of the current style; otherwise,
it is the height stored in the TEXTSIZE system variable. Character height is cal-
culated in drawing units. Changing the height updates the value stored in
TEXTSIZE.
MTEXT | 585
Justify
Determines both text justification and text flow, for new or selected text, in
relation to the text boundary. The current justification (Top Left, by default)
is applied to new text. The text is justified within the specified rectangle
based on the justification setting and one of nine justification points on the
rectangle. The justification point is based on the first point used to specify
the rectangle. Text is center-, left-, or right-justified with respect to the left
and right text boundaries. Spaces entered at the end of a line are included as
part of the text and affect the justification of the line. Text flow controls
whether text is aligned from the middle, the top, or the bottom of the para-
graph with respect to the top and bottom text boundaries.
Enter justification [TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR] <TL>:
Justify options
Option Meaning
TL Top Left
TC Top Center
TR Top Right
ML Middle Left
MC Middle Center
MR Middle Right
BL Bottom Left
BC Bottom Center
BR Bottom Right
The following illustrations show each justification option.
586 | MTEXT
top left: top center: top right:
left-justified, center-justified, right-justified,
spills down spills down spills down
middle left: middle center: middle right:

spills up and down spills up and down spills up and down
bottom left: bottom center: bottom right:

spills up spills up spills up
Line Spacing
Specifies line spacing for the multiline text object. Line spacing is the vertical
distance between the bottom (or baseline) of one line of text and the bottom
of the next line of text.
Note Exact spacing is recommended when you use MTEXT to create a table.
Use a smaller text height than the specified line spacing to ensure that text does
not overlap.
Enter line spacing type [At least/Exactly] <current>:
MTEXT | 587
At Least Adjusts lines of text automatically based on the height
of the largest character in the line. When At Least is
selected, lines of text with taller characters have added
space between lines.
Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>:
■ Spacing Factor: Sets the line spacing to a multiple of

single-line spacing.
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text
characters. You enter the spacing increment as a
number followed by x to indicate a multiple of
single spacing. For example, specify single spacing
by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering
2x.
■ Distance: Sets the line spacing to an absolute value
measured in drawing units. Valid values must be
between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x).
Exactly Forces the line spacing to be the same for all lines of text
in the multiline text object. Spacing is based on the text
height of the object or text style.
Enter line spacing factor or distance <current>:
■ Spacing Factor: Sets the line spacing to a multiple of

single-line spacing.
Single spacing is 1.66 times the height of the text
characters. You can enter a spacing factor as a
number followed by x to indicate a multiple of
single spacing. For example, specify single spacing
by entering 1x, or specify double spacing by entering
2x.
■ Distance: Sets the line spacing to an absolute value
measured in drawing units. Valid values must be
between 0.0833 (0.25x) and 1.3333 (4x).
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle of the text boundary.
Specify rotation angle <current>: Specify a point or enter a value
If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the rotation angle is deter-
mined by the angle between the X axis and the line defined by the most
recently entered point (default 0,0,0) and the specified point.
588 | MTEXT
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite
corner of the text boundary.
Style
Specifies the text style to use for multiline text.
Enter style name or [?] <current>:
Style Name Specifies a text style name. Text styles can be defined
and saved using the STYLE command.
?—List Styles Lists text style names and characteristics.
AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt until you specify the opposite
corner of the text boundary.
Width
Specifies the width of the text boundary.
Specify width: Specify a point or enter a value
If you use the pointing device to specify a point, the width is calculated as
the distance between the start point and the specified point. Words within
each line of the multiline text object wrap to fit the width of the text bound-
ary. If you specify a width of 0, word wrap is turned off and the width of the
multiline text object is as wide as the longest line of text. You can end a line
of text at a specific point by typing the text and pressing ENTER . To end the
command, press ENTER at the MTEXT prompt.
Unicode Strings, Control Codes, and Special

Characters
You can enter the following control codes and Unicode strings to create
special characters.
Unicode strings and control codes
Control Codes Unicode Strings Result
%%d \U+00B0 Degree symbol (°)
%%p \U+00B1 Tolerance symbol (±)
%%c \U+2205 Diameter symbol (∅)
MTEXT | 589
Note that the circle diameter dimensioning symbol appears as %%c in the
Multiline Text Editor but converts to the special character in your drawing.
See “Unicode.”
See Also
See “Overview of Multiline Text” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DDEDIT displays the Multiline Text Editor so you can
edit the selected multiline text object. PROPERTIES dis-
plays the Properties palette for the selected multiline
text object, where you can modify multiline text
properties. OPTIONS specifies the text editor you want
to use to create multiline text. STYLE creates text styles.
TEXT creates text on the screen as you enter it.
System Variables FONTALT specifies an alternative font that AutoCAD

uses when the specified font file cannot be found.
FONTMAP specifies the font mapping file that AutoCAD
uses when the specified font cannot be found. MTEX-
TED specifies the name of the text editor you want to
use to create multiline text.
MULTIPLE
Repeats the next command until canceled
Command line: multiple
Enter command name to repeat:
AutoCADrepeats the command you enter until you press ESC . Because
MULTIPLE repeats only the command name, any parameters must be
specified each time.
MULTIPLE does not repeat commands that display dialog boxes.
Note You cannot use MULTIPLE as an argument to the AutoLISP command

function.
590 | MULTIPLE
MVIEW
Creates and controls layout viewports
When working in a layout tab, MVIEW controls the creation and display of
layout viewports. When working in the Model tab, you can use VPORTS to
create model viewports.
View menu: Viewports ➤ 1 Viewport, 2 Viewports, 3 Viewports, 4 Viewports
Command line: mview
Specify corner of viewport or [ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/

Restore/2/3/4] <Fit>: Enter an option or specify a point
In a layout, you can create as many viewports as you want, but only up to 64
viewports can be active at one time (see MAXACTVP). Objects in model space
are visible only in active viewports. Viewports that are not active are blank.
Use the On and Off options to control whether viewports are active.
Corner of Viewport
Specifies the first corner of a rectangular viewport.
Specify opposite corner:
MVIEW | 591
On
Makes a selected viewport active. An active viewport displays objects in
model space. The MAXACTVP system variable controls the maximum number
of viewports that can be active at one time. If your drawing contains more
viewports than the number specified in MAXACTVP, you must turn one off to
make another one active.
Select objects: Select one or more viewports
Off
Makes a selected viewport inactive. Objects in model space are not displayed
in an inactive viewport.
Fit
Creates one viewport that fills the layout to the edges of the paper margins.
When the paper background and margins are turned off, the viewport fills
the display.
Shadeplot
Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted.
fit
Shade plot? [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden/Rendered] <As displayed >: Enter a
shade plot option
As Displayed Specifies that a viewport plots the same way it is

displayed.
Wireframe Specifies that a viewport plots wireframe regardless of
the current display.
Hidden Specifies that a viewport plots with hidden lines
removed regardless of the current display.
Rendered Specifies that a viewport plots rendered regardless of
the current display.
592 | MVIEW
Lock
Prevents the zoom scale factor in the selected viewport from being changed
when working in model space.
Viewport View Locking [ON/OFF]: Enter on or off
Object
Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle to convert into a
viewport. The polyline you specify must be closed and contain at least three
vertices. It can be self-intersecting, and it can contain an arc as well as line
segments.
Select object to clip viewport: Select an object
Polygonal
Creates an irregularly shaped viewport using specified points. The prompts
are similar to those displayed when you specify a polygonal clip boundary for
external references (xrefs), but you can specify arcs when you create a
polygonal viewport boundary.
Specify start point: Specify a point
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]: Specify a point or enter an
option
Arc Adds arc segments to the polygonal viewport.

[Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/
Undo/Endpoint of arc] <Endpoint>: Enter an option or
press ENTER
For a description of the options for creating arc

segments, see “Arc” on page 714.
Close Closes the boundary. If you press ENTER after specifying
at least three points, AutoCAD automatically closes the
boundary.
Length Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same
angle as the previous segment. If the previous segment
is an arc, AutoCAD draws the new line segment tangent
to that arc segment.
MVIEW | 593
Undo Removes the most recent line or arc segment added to
the polygonal viewport.
Restore
Restores viewport configurations saved with the VPORTS command.
Enter viewport configuration name or [?] <*ACTIVE>: Enter ?, enter a name, or
press ENTER
Specify first corner or [Fit] <Fit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
First Corner Positions and sizes new viewports using the window
selection method; AutoCAD fits the viewports into the
selected area.
Fit Sizes the viewports to fill the drawing area.
2
Divides the specified area horizontally or vertically into two viewports of
equal size.
Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical] <Vertical>: Enter h or press
ENTER
2/vertical
selected area.
3
Divides the specified area into three viewports.
Enter viewport arrangement
[Horizontal/Vertical/Above/Below/Left/<Right>: Enter an option or press ENTER
The Horizontal and Vertical options split the specified area into thirds. The
other options split the area into three viewports: one large viewport and two
smaller ones. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify where the
larger viewport is placed.
594 | MVIEW
selected area.
3/right 4
Divides the specified area horizontally and vertically into four viewports of
equal size.
4
selected area.
See Also
For more information about using model space and paper space, see “Create
Layout Viewports” in the User’s Guide.
Commands VPORTS creates viewports in model or paper space. HIDE
eliminates hidden lines from a three-dimensional view
of a drawing. MSPACE switches from paper space to a
model space viewport. PSPACE switches from model
space to paper space. VPLAYER sets the visibility for
layers in specific viewports.
System Variables PSVPSCALE sets the view scale factor for all newly
created viewports. PSLTSCALE controls paper space line-
type scaling. VISRETAIN specifies precedence of settings
for xref layers. MAXACTVP specifies the maximum
number of viewports to regenerate.
MVSETUP
Sets up the specifications of a drawing
Command line: mvsetup
When you enter mvsetup at the command line, the prompts displayed
depend on whether you are on the Model tab (model space) or on a layout
tab (paper space).
MVSETUP | 595
On the Model tab, you set the units type, drawing scale factor, and paper size
from the command line using MVSETUP. Using the settings you provide,
AutoCAD draws a rectangular border at the drawing limits.
On a layout tab, you can insert one of several predefined title blocks into the
drawing and create a set of layout viewports within the title block. You can
specify a global scale as the ratio between the scale of the title block in the
layout and the drawing on the Model tab. The Model tab is most useful for
plotting multiple views of a drawing within a single border.
To easily specify all layout page settings and prepare your drawing for plot-
ting, you can also use the Page Setup dialog box, which is automatically
displayed when you select a layout in a new drawing session.
Using MVSETUP on the Model Tab

When the TILEMODE system variable is on (the default), AutoCAD displays
Enable paper space? [No/Yes] <Y>: Enter n or press ENTER
Pressing ENTER turns off TILEMODE and proceeds as described in the follow-
ing section, “Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab.”
Entering n displays the following prompt:
Enter units type [Scientific/Decimal/Engineering/Architectural/Metric]: Enter an
option
AutoCAD displays a list of available units and prompts for the scale factor
and paper size.
Enter the scale factor: Enter a value
Enter the paper width: Enter a value
Enter the paper height: Enter a value
AutoCAD draws a bounding box and ends the command.
Using MVSETUP on a Layout Tab

When the TILEMODE system variable is off, or when you enter y or press
ENTER at the Enable Paper Space prompt, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
Enter an option [Align/Create/Scale viewports/Options/Title block/Undo]: Enter
an option or press ENTER to end the command
596 | MVSETUP
Align
Pans the view in a viewport so that it aligns with a base point in another
viewport. The current viewport is the viewport that the other point moves to.
Enter an option [Angled/Horizontal/Vertical alignment/Rotate view/Undo]:
Enter an option
Angled Pans the view in a viewport in a specified direction.

Specify base point: Specify a point
Specify point in viewport to be panned: Specify a point in
the viewport to be panned
The next two prompts specify the distance and angle

from the base point to the second point.
Specify the distance and angle to the new alignment point
in the current viewport where you specified the base point.
Specify distance from base point: Specify a distance
Specify angle from base point: Specify an angle
Horizontal Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns

horizontally with a base point in another viewport.
This option should be used only if the two viewports
are oriented horizontally. Otherwise, the view might be
panned outside the limits of the viewport.
Vertical Pans the view in one viewport until it aligns vertically

Alignment with a base point in another viewport. This option
should be used only if the two viewports are oriented
vertically. Otherwise, the view might be panned outside
the limits of the viewport.
MVSETUP | 597
Rotate View Rotates the view in a viewport about a base point.
Specify base point in the viewport with the view to be
rotated: Specify a point
Specify angle from base point: Specify an angle
Undo Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP

session.
Create
Creates viewports.
Enter an option [Delete objects/Create viewports/Undo] <Create>: Enter an
Delete Objects
Deletes existing viewports.
Select the objects to delete...
Select objects: Select the viewports to delete and press ENTER
Create Viewports
Displays options for creating viewports.
Available layout options:
0: None
1: Single
2: Std. Engineering
3: Array of Viewports
Enter layout number to load or [Redisplay]: Enter an option number (0–3), or

enter r to redisplay the list of viewport layout options
Layout Number Controls creation of viewports.

to Load
Entering 0 or pressing ENTER creates no viewports.
Entering 1 creates a single viewport whose size is
determined by the following prompts.
Specify first corner of bounding area for viewport(s):
Specify a point for the first corner
Opposite corner: Specify a point for the opposite corner
598 | MVSETUP
Entering 2 creates f*our viewports by dividing a
specified area into quadrants. AutoCAD prompts you
for the area to be divided and the distance between the
viewports.
Specify distance between viewports in X direction
<0.0>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.0>:
Specify a distance or press ENTER
The viewing angle for each quadrant is set as shown in

the table.
Standard engineering viewports
Quadrant View
Upper-left Top (XY plane of UCS)
Upper-right SE isometric view
Lower-left Front (XZ plane of UCS)
Lower-right Right side (YZ plane of UCS)
MVSETUP | 599
Entering 3 defines a matrix of viewports along the X
and Y axes. Specifying points at the next two prompts
defines the rectangular area of the drawing that
contains the viewport configuration. If you have
inserted a title block, the Specify First Corner prompt
also includes an option for selecting a default area.
Enter number of viewports in X direction <1>: Enter the
number of viewports to place along the X axis
Enter number of viewports in Y direction <1>: Enter the
number of viewports to place along the Y axis
If you enter more than one viewport in each direction,

AutoCAD displays the following prompts:
Specify distance between viewports in X direction
<0.0>: Specify a distance
Specify distance between viewports in Y direction <0.0>:
Specify a distance
AutoCAD inserts the array of viewports into the defined

area.
Redisplay Redisplays the list of viewport layout options.
Undo
Reverses operations performed in the current MVSETUP session.
Scale Viewports
Adjusts the zoom scale factor of the objects displayed in the viewports. The
zoom scale factor is a ratio between the scale of the border in paper space and
the scale of the drawing objects displayed in the viewports.
Select the viewports to scale...
Select objects: Select the viewports to scale
If you select only one viewport, AutoCAD skips the next prompt.
Set zoom scale factors for viewports. Interactively/<Uniform>: Enter i or press
ENTER
Enter the number of paper space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Enter the number of model space units <1.0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
600 | MVSETUP
Interactively Selects one viewport at a time and displays the
following prompts for each.
Enter the number of paper space units <1.0>: Enter a
Enter the number of model space units <1.0>: Enter a
For example, for an engineering drawing at a scale of

1:4, or quarter scale, enter 1 for paper space units and 4
for model space units.
Uniform Sets the same scale factor for all viewports.
Number of paper space units. <1.0>: Enter a value or
press ENTER
Number of model space units. <1.0>: Enter a value or
press ENTER
Options
Sets the MVSETUP preferences before you change your drawing.
Enter an option [Layer/LImits/Units/Xref] <exit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
to return to the previous prompt
Layer Specifies a layer on which to insert the title block.

Enter layer name for title block or [. (for current layer)]:
Enter an existing or a new layer name, enter a period (.) for
the current layer, or press ENTER
Limits Specifies whether to reset the limits to the drawing

extents after a title block has been inserted.
Set drawing limits? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or press ENTER
Units Specifies whether the sizes and point locations are

translated to inch or millimeter paper units.
Enter paper space units type [Feet/Inches/MEters/
Millimeters] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Xref Specifies whether the title block is inserted or externally

referenced.
Enter title block placement method [Xref attach/Insert]
<current>: Enter x, enter i, or press ENTER
MVSETUP | 601
Title Block
Prepares paper space, orients the drawing by setting the origin, and creates a
drawing border and a title block.
Enter title block option [Delete objects/Origin/Undo/Insert] <Insert>: Enter an
Delete Objects
Deletes objects from paper space.
Select the objects to delete . . .
Origin
Relocates the origin point for this sheet.
Specify new origin point for this sheet: Specify a point
Undo
Insert
Displays title block options.
Available title blocks:...
0: None
1: ISO A4 Size(mm)
2: ISO A3 Size(mm)
3: ISO A2 Size(mm)
4: ISO A1 Size(mm)
5: ISO A0 Size(mm)
6: ANSI-V Size(in)
7: ANSI-A Size(in)
8: ANSI-B Size(in)
9: ANSI-C Size(in)
10: ANSI-D Size(in)
11: ANSI-E Size(in)
12: Arch/Engineering (24 x 36in)
13: Generic D size Sheet (24 x 36in)
Enter number of title block to load or [Add/Delete/Redisplay]: Enter an option

number (0 through 13) or enter an option
602 | MVSETUP
Title Block to Inserts a border and a title block. Entering 0 or pressing
Load ENTER inserts no border. Entering 1 through 13 creates
a standard border of the appropriate size. The list
includes ANSI and DIN/ISO standard sheets.
Add Adds title block options to the list. Selecting this option
prompts you to enter the title block description to be
displayed in the list and the name of a drawing to
insert.
Enter title block description: Enter a description
Enter drawing name to insert (without extension): Enter
a file name
Define default usable area? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter n or press
ENTER
Pressing ENTER displays the following prompts:

Specify lower-left corner: Specify a point
Specify upper-right corner: Specify a point
AutoCAD adds a line similar to the following example

after the last entry in the mvsetup.dfs default file:
A/E (24 x 18in),arch-b.dwg,(1.12 0.99
0.00),(18.63 17.02 0.00),in
The last field of the line specifies whether the title block
has been created in inches or in millimeters. The units
field allows title blocks created in either unit system to
be changed by setting the unit type using the Options
option.
You can also add title blocks that have variable
attributes.
Delete Removes entries from the list.
Enter number of entry to delete from list: Enter the
number of the entry to delete
Redisplay Redisplays the list of title block options.
MVSETUP | 603
Undo
See Also
See “Edit in Layout Viewports” in the User’s Guide.
Commands MSPACE switches from paper space to a model space
viewport. VPORTS creates new viewports in model or
paper space. PSPACE switches from model space to paper
space. PAGESETUP displays the Page Setup dialog box in
which you can specify page settings.
System Variables LTSCALE stores the global linetype scale factor.
PSLTSCALE controls the linetype scale factor in paper
space. TILEMODE controls paper space access and view-
port behavior.
604 | MVSETUP
NEW
Creates a new drawing
File menu: New
Command line: new
The behavior of the NEW command is determined by the Startup setting on

the System tab of the Options dialog box.
■ Show the Startup Dialog Box: NEW displays the Create New Drawing dialog
box.
■ Do Not Show the Startup Dialog Box: NEW displays the Select Template
dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box).
If the system variable, FILEDIA, is set to 0 instead of 1, a prompt on the com-

mand line is displayed (see page 612). If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is
displayed regardless of the Startup setting.
Create New Drawing Dialog Box

Defines the settings for a new drawing. There are three main methods that
you can use to create a new drawing. (The first option, Open a Drawing, is
not available from the NEW command. To open an existing drawing, use
OPEN.) Choose one of the buttons at the top of the dialog box.
Start from Scratch

Starts an empty drawing using default imperial or metric settings. AutoCAD
stores this setting in the MEASUREINIT system variable. You can change the
measurement system for a given drawing by using the MEASUREMENT system
variable. To start a new drawing based on a customized template, see “Use a
Template” on page 606.
NEW | 605
Imperial Starts a new drawing based on the Imperial
measurement system. The default drawing boundary
(the drawing limits) is 12 × 9 inches.
Metric Starts a new drawing based on the metric measurement
system. The default drawing boundary (the drawing
limits) is 429 × 297 millimeters.
Use a Template
Starts a drawing based on a drawing template file. Template drawings store
all the settings for a drawing and may also include predefined layers,
dimension styles, and views. Template drawings are distinguished from
other drawing files by the .dwt file extension. They are normally kept in the
template directory.
Several template drawings are included with AutoCAD. You can make
additional template drawings by changing the extensions of drawing file
names to .dwt. See “Use a Template File to Start a Drawing” in the User’s
Guide.
606 | NEW
Select a Template Lists all DWT files that currently exist in the drawing
template file location, which is specified in the Options
dialog box (see page 633). Choose a file to use as a
starting point for your new drawing. A preview image of
the selected file is displayed to the right.
Browse Displays the Select Template dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box) where you can access template
files that are not available in the Select a Template list.
Use a Wizard
Sets up a drawing using a step-by-step guide. You can choose from two
wizards: Quick Setup and Advanced Setup.
NEW | 607
Quick Setup Displays the Quick Setup wizard (see page 608), in
which you can specify the units and area for your new
drawing. The Quick Setup wizard also changes settings,
such as text height and snap spacing, to an appropriate
scale.
Advanced Setup Displays the Advanced Setup wizard (see page 610), in
which you can specify the units, angle, angle measure,
angle direction, and area for your new drawing. The
Quick Setup wizard also changes settings, such as text
height and snap spacing, to an appropriate scale.
Quick Setup Wizard

Defines the units and area of your drawing.
The Quick Setup wizard has two pages: Units and Area. As you work in this
wizard, choose Back and Next to switch between pages; choose Finish on the
last page to close the wizard and create the new drawing with the settings you
specified.
608 | NEW
Units
Indicates the format in which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays
coordinates and measurements. Several formats are available in AutoCAD.
Two of them, Engineering and Architectural, have a specific base unit
(inches) assigned to them. You can select from other measurement styles that
can represent any convenient unit of measurement.
Note You control the precision (the number of decimal places displayed in all
measurements) by using the Advanced Setup wizard or the UNITS command.
The default precision used by Quick Setup is four (0.0000).
Decimal Displays measurements in decimal notation.

Engineering Displays measurements in feet and decimal inches.
Architectural Displays measurements in feet, inches, and fractional
inches.
Fractional Displays measurements in mixed-number (integer and
fractional) notation.
Scientific Displays measurements in scientific notation (numbers
expressed in the form of the product of a decimal
number between 0 and 10 and a power of 10).
Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw.
This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid
is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command,
this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectan-
gular area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and
off with the LIMITS command.
NEW | 609
Advanced Setup Wizard
Defines the units, angle, angle measure, angle direction, and area of your
new drawing.
The Advanced Setup wizard contains five pages: Units, Angle, Angle Measure,
Angle Direction, and Area. As you work in this wizard, choose Back and Next
to navigate between pages; choose Finish on the last page to close the wizard
and create the new drawing with the settings you specified.
You can later change units, angle, angle measure, and angle direction using
the UNITS command, and you can change area using the LIMITS command.
Units
Indicates the unit format and precision. The unit format is the format in
which you enter and in which AutoCAD displays coordinates and measure-
ments. The Units page of the Quick Setup wizard includes the same formats.
See “Units” on page 609 for more information.
The unit precision specifies the number of decimal places or the fractional
size for displaying linear measurements.
610 | NEW
Angle
Indicates the format in which you enter angles and in which AutoCAD
displays angles.
Decimal Degrees Displays partial degrees as decimals.
Deg/Min/Sec Displays partial degrees as minutes and seconds.
Grads Displays angles as grads.
Radians Displays angles as radians.
Surveyor Displays angles in surveyor’s units.
Angle Measure
Indicates the direction of the 0 angle for the entry of angles. When you enter
an angle value in AutoCAD, AutoCAD measures the angle either counter-
clockwise or clockwise from the compass direction that you select on this
page. You control the counterclockwise/clockwise direction on the Angle
Direction page.
East Specifies the compass direction east as the 0 angle.
North Specifies the compass direction north as the 0 angle.
West Specifies the compass direction west as the 0 angle.
South Specifies the compass direction south as the 0 angle.
Other Specifies a direction other than east, north, west, or
south. Enter a specific compass angle to treat as the 0
angle.
Angle Direction
Indicates the direction from the 0 angle in which you enter and in which
AutoCAD displays positive angle values: counterclockwise or clockwise.
Area
Indicates the width and length in full-scale units of what you plan to draw.
This setting limits the area of the drawing covered by grid dots when the grid
is turned on. When limits checking is turned on with the LIMITS command,
this setting also restricts the coordinates you can enter to within the rectan-
gular area. You can change the drawing area and turn limits checking on and
off with the LIMITS command.
NEW | 611
NEW Command Line
If you turned off the display of the Create New Drawing dialog box, or if
FILEDIA is set to 0, NEW displays the following prompt:
Enter template file name or [. (for none)] <current>: Enter a name, enter a period
(.), or press ENTER
AutoCAD automatically creates a new drawing using the measurement

system (imperial or metric) specified by the MEASUREINIT system variable.
Enter a tilde (~) at the prompt to display the Select Template dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box).
See Also
See “Start and Save a Drawing” and “Specify Units, Angles, and Scale” in the
User’s Guide.
System Variables FILEDIA controls whether the Create New Drawing
dialog box is displayed when you enter the NEW
command.
612 | NEW
OFFSET
Creates concentric circles, parallel lines, and parallel curves
OFFSET creates a new object at a specified distance from an existing object or
through a specified point.
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Offset
Command line: offset
Specify offset distance or [Through] <current>: Specify a distance, enter t, or press

ENTER
polyline polyline
with offset
Offset Distance Creates an object at a specified distance from an

existing object.
Select object to offset or <exit>: Select one object or press
ENTER to end the command
Specify point on side to offset?: Specify a point (1) on the
side of the object you want to offset
1
offset distance
object
selected side selected object offset
AutoCAD® repeats the two prompts so that you can

create multiple offset objects. To end the command,
press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt.
OFFSET | 613
Through Creates an object passing through a specified point.
Select object to offset or <exit>: Select one object or press
ENTER to end the command
Specify through point: Specify a point (1) through which
you want the offset object to pass
object
selected
through point object offset
AutoCAD repeats the two prompts so that you can

create multiple offset objects. To end the command,
press ENTER at the Select Object to Offset prompt.
See Also
See “Offset an Object” in the User’s Guide.
Commands COPY duplicates objects. MLINE creates multiple parallel
lines.
System Variables OFFSETDIST stores the current offset value.
OFFSETGAPTYPE controls how to offset polylines when a
gap is created as a result of offsetting individual
polyline segments.
OLELINKS
Updates, changes, and cancels existing OLE links
AutoCAD supports the Windows® feature called object linking and embedding
(OLE). When you use PASTESPEC to insert a linked object into an AutoCAD
drawing from an application that supports OLE, the object maintains a con-
nection with its source file.
You can set AutoCAD to update links automatically or manually when
information in the source document changes.
Edit menu: OLE Links
Command line: olelinks
The Links dialog box is displayed. If there is no existing OLE link in the draw-
ing, OLE Links is not available on the Edit menu and the Links dialog box is
614 | OLELINKS
not displayed. To specify a different source application for an embedded
object, right-click the embedded object and click Convert on the shortcut
menu to display the Convert dialog box (see page 616).
Links Dialog Box

Lists and modifies linked files and objects.
Links Lists information about linked objects. The

information listed depends on the type of link. To
change information for a linked object, select the
object.
Source Displays the path name of the source file and the type
of object.
Type Displays the format type.
Update: Updates the link automatically whenever the source
Automatic changes.
Update: Manual Prompts you to update a link when you open the
document.
Update Now Updates the selected links.
Open Source Opens the source file and highlights the portion linked
to the AutoCAD drawing.
Change Source Displays the Change Source dialog box (a standard file
tdialog box), in which you can specify a different source
file. If the source is a selection within a file (instead of
the entire file), Item Name displays a string
representing the selection.
OLELINKS | 615
Break Link Severs the link between the object and the original file.
AutoCAD changes the object in your AutoCAD drawing
into a Windows metafile, which is not affected by
future changes to the original file.
Convert Dialog Box

Specifies a different source application for an embedded object. To access this
dialog box, right-click the embedded object and choose Convert from the
shortcut menu.
Current Type Displays the type of object you are converting or

activating.
Object Type Displays a list of available object types. Use this list to
select a new type for the embedded object.
Convert To Converts the embedded object to the type specified
under Object Type.
Activate As Opens the embedded object as the type selected under
Object Type but returns the object to its current type
after editing.
drawing. Double-clicking the icon displays the linked
or embedded information.
Change Icon Displays the Change Icon dialog box. This option is
available only if you select Display as Icon.
Result Describes the result of the selected options.
616 | OLELINKS
Change Icon Dialog Box
Changes the icon that represents an embedded or linked object in an
AutoCAD drawing.
Icon
Specifies an icon to represent an embedded or linked object.
Current Specifies the currently selected icon.
Default Specifies the default icon for the source application.
From File Specifies an icon from a file (valid types include EXE,
DLL, and ICO).
Label
Specifies a caption for the icon. AutoCAD displays the file type unless you
specify otherwise.
Browse
Displays the Browse dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in
which you can select an icon from a file.
See Also
Commands COPYCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard. COPYLINK
copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to
other OLE applications. PASTECLIP inserts data from the
Clipboard into a drawing. PASTESPEC inserts data from
the Clipboard into the drawing and controls the format
of the data.
OLELINKS | 617
OLESCALE
Controls the size, scale, and other properties of a selected OLE object
Shortcut menu: Right-click an OLE object and choose Properties.
Command line: olescale
The OLE Properties dialog box is displayed.
Note You must select an OLE object before entering the OLESCALE command.
OLE Properties Dialog Box

Resizes OLE objects in drawing units or by percentage of the current size,
scales text by assigning a point size to a font contained in the OLE object, and
specifies OLE plot quality.
Note UNDO does not undo a change made in the OLE Properties dialog box.
To undo a change made in the OLE properties dialog box, right-click the OLE
object and choose Undo from the shortcut menu.
618 | OLESCALE
Size
Specifies a size for the OLE object.
Height Displays the current height of the OLE object. Enter a
number in drawing units to change the height. If Lock
Aspect Ratio is selected, the Width value changes to
maintain the ratio between the height and the width of
the object.
Width Displays the current width of the OLE object. Enter a
number in drawing units to change the width. If Lock
Aspect Ratio is selected, the Height value changes to
maintain the ratio between the width and the height of
the object.
Reset Resets the size of the OLE object to the size it was when
you first inserted it into the drawing.
Scale
Sets the scale for the OLE object.
Height Scales the height of the OLE object by a percentage of
the current height. To change the height, enter a
percent value. If Lock Aspect Ratio is selected, the
Width value changes to maintain the ratio between the
height and the width of the object.
Width Scales the width of the OLE object by a percentage of
the current width. To change the width, enter a percent
value. If Lock Aspect Ratio is selected, the Height value
changes to maintain the ratio between the height and
the width of the object.
Lock Aspect Ratio Maintains the current ratio between height and width.
If you change the height or the width when Lock
Aspect Ratio is selected, the other property changes too.
For example, if you change the height to 50 percent, the
width changes to 50 percent to maintain the ratio.
Clear the Lock Aspect Ratio option if you want to
change the height or width separately. Lock Aspect
Ratio affects both size and scale values.
OLESCALE | 619
Text Size
Changes the size of text of a selected font and point size in an OLE object.
Other text of different fonts and point sizes also changes to adjust to the
change to the selected font. If there is no text in the OLE object, this option
is unavailable.
Font Displays a list of all the fonts used by the selected OLE
object. Select the font that you want to change.
Point Size Displays a list of all the point sizes in the OLE object for
the selected font. Select the point size that you want to
change.
Text Height Specifies the font size. Enter a number in drawing units.
When you choose OK, the text in the OLE object of the
selected font and point size changes to the height you
entered. All the other text in the OLE object adjusts in
size to maintain the current size ratio with the font that
was changed.
OLE Plot Quality

Determines the quality of the plotted OLE object. Select a file type from the
list.
Display Dialog When Pasting New OLE Object

Automatically displays the OLE Properties dialog box when you insert an
OLE object in an AutoCAD drawing.
OOPS
Restores erased objects
Command line: oops
OOPS restores objects erased by the last ERASE command.
erased objects before OOPS after OOPS
620 | OOPS
You can also use OOPS after BLOCK or WBLOCK because these commands can
erase the selected objects after creating a block. You cannot use OOPS to
restore objects on a layer that has been removed with the PURGE command.
See Also
Commands U reverses the effect of the previous command. UNDO
reverses the effect of multiple commands and provides
control over the undo feature.
OPEN
Opens an existing drawing file
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Open
Command line: open
The Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is displayed.
You can open and load a portion of a drawing, including geometry on a spe-
cific view or layer. In the Select File dialog box, click the arrow next to Open
and choose Partial Open or Partial Open Read-Only to display the Partial
Open dialog box.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays a prompt on the command line
(see page 632).
Note If the drawing you open contains macros, AutoCAD displays the
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box (see page 1082).
Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes

Several AutoCAD commands display standard file selection dialog boxes, in
which you can navigate through local and network drives and through FTP
sites and Web folders to select files. While each dialog box may vary slightly,
following is a list of the possible options.
OPEN | 621
Places
list
Places List
Provides quick access to predefined file locations. Click the Look In arrow to
view the path for each icon. You can reorder the icons in the Places list by
dragging them to a new location. To add a new icon to the Places list, drag a
folder from the files list to the Places list, or right-click an existing icon and
choose Add or Add Current Folder from the shortcut menu. This shortcut
menu also provides options for removing and modifying icons, or restoring
default icons that have been removed. You cannot remove the Buzzsaw™
icon. Changes to the Places list affect all standard file selection dialog boxes.
History Displays shortcuts to the files most recently accessed
from the dialog box. It is recommended that you
periodically remove unwanted shortcuts from the
History list. Select History, then select the unwanted
shortcuts from the Files list and choose Delete. To sort
the shortcuts by date, choose Views ➤ Details, and then
click the Modified column in the Files list.
Personal/My Displays the contents of the Personal or My Documents
Documents folder for the current user profile. The name of this
location (“Personal” or “My Documents”) depends on
your operating system version.
622 | OPEN
Favorites Displays the contents of the Favorites folder for the
current user profile. This folder consists of shortcuts to
files or folders that you added to Favorites using the
Tools ➤ Add to Favorites option in the dialog box.
FTP Displays the FTP sites that are available for browsing in
the standard file selection dialog box. To add FTP
locations to this list, or to modify an existing FTP
location, choose Tools ➤ Add/Modify FTP Locations in
the dialog box.
Desktop Displays the contents of your desktop.
Buzzsaw Provides access to projects hosted by Buzzsaw—a
business-to-business marketplace for the building
design and construction industry. If you do not yet
have a project hosting account on Buzzsaw, clicking
Buzzsaw displays the Add Site option in the Buzzsaw
Folders list where you can set up a project. Also, the first
time you access Buzzsaw.com™, your default web
browser opens with the project hosting page displayed.
If you already have a project hosting account, clicking
Buzzsaw shows all of your project sites in the Files list.
Look In/Save In
Displays the current folder or drive. Click the arrow to view the hierarchy of
the folder path and to navigate up the path tree or to other drives, network
connections, FTP locations, or Web folders (either Web Folders or My Network
Places depending on the version of your operating system). You can create
Web folders in Windows Explorer. Consult your system administrator or
Windows Explorer Help for more information about Web folders.
To control whether the last used paths in each particular standard file
selection dialog box are stored across AutoCAD sessions, use the REMEMBER-
FOLDERS system variable.
Back
Returns to the previous file location.
Up One Level
Navigates one level up in the current path tree.
Search the Web
Displays the Browse the Web dialog box, from which you can access and
store AutoCAD files on the Internet.
OPEN | 623
Delete
Deletes the selected file or folder.
Create New Folder
Creates a new folder in the current path using a name that you specify.
Views
Controls the appearance of the Files list and specifies whether to show a
preview image.
List Displays the contents of the Files list in a multicolumn
format.
Details Displays the contents of the Files list in a single-column
format with file details.
Preview Displays a bitmap of the selected file. The Preview area
is blank if you do not select a file. To save a bitmap with
a drawing file, use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image
option on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog
box.
Tools
Provides the following tools:
Find Displays the Find dialog box (see page 626), in which
you can search for files using name, location, and date-
modified filters.
Locate Uses the AutoCAD search path to locate the file
specified in File Name. You set the search path on the
Files tab in the Options dialog box (see page 633).
Add/Modify FTP Displays the Add/Modify FTP Locations dialog box (see
Locations page 628), in which you can specify the FTP sites to
make available for browsing. To browse these sites,
select FTP from the Places list.
Add Current Adds an icon for the selected folder to the Places list,
Folder to Places providing quick access to that folder from all standard
file selection dialog boxes. To remove the icon, right-
click the icon and choose Remove.
Add to Favorites Creates a shortcut to the current Look In location, or to
the selected file or folder. The shortcut is placed in the
Favorites folder for the current user profile, which you
can access by choosing Favorites in the Places list.
624 | OPEN
Options Provides additional options for certain standard file
selection dialog boxes.
Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password
that are invoked when you save a file.
Files List
Displays the files and folders in the current path and of the selected file type.
Use the Views menu in the dialog box to switch between List view and
Details view.
Preview
Displays a bitmap of the selected file when you choose Views ➤ Preview in
the dialog box. The Preview area is blank if you do not select a file. To save a
bitmap with a drawing file, use the Save a Thumbnail Preview Image option
on the Open and Save tab in the Options dialog box.
File Name
Displays the name of the file you select in the Files list. If you select multiple
files, File Name displays each selected file within quotation marks. If you
enter a file name in the File Name box, AutoCAD clears any selection. You
must use quotation marks when entering multiple file names. You can use
wild-card characters to filter files displayed in the Files list.
Files of Type
Filters the list of files by file type. When you are saving files, Files of Type
specifies the format in which the file is saved.
Select Initial View
Displays the specified view when you open the drawing if the drawing
contains more than one named view.
Open/Save
Opens or saves the selected file, depending on the purpose of the specific file
selection dialog box. Certain file selection dialog boxes may also include the
following options, accessed by clicking the arrow next to the Open button:
Open Read-Only Opens a file in read-only mode. You cannot save
changes to the file using the original file name.
Partial Open Displays the Partial Open dialog box (see page 629). You
can open and load a portion of a drawing, including
geometry on a specific view or layer. You can only use
this option with drawings created in AutoCAD 2000 or
later.
Partial Open Opens the specified drawing portions in read-only
Read-Only mode.
OPEN | 625
Find Dialog Box
Searches for files using name, location, and date modified filters.
Name & Location Tab

Filters the file search based on file type, file name, and location.
Named Specifies the full or partial file names to include in the
search. When entering multiple file names, enclose
each name in quotation marks. Use the following wild-
card characters to broaden your search:
■ * (Asterisk): Matches any string and can be used
anywhere in the search string.
■ ? (Question mark): Matches any single character, for
example, ?BC matches ABC, 3BC, and so on.
The type of files to include in the search is determined

by Type, so you don’t need to enter a file extension in
Named. For example, to find house102.dwg, enter
house* and set Type to Drawing (*.dwg).
Type Specifies the type of files to include in the search.
Available file types are limited to those supported by
the specific standard file selection dialog box.
626 | OPEN
Look In Specifies the location to search. Enter a location, choose
a location from the list, or choose Browse to navigate to
a location. When entering multiple locations, enclose
each location in quotation marks.
Browse Displays the Browse for Folder dialog box, in which you
can navigate to a location for the search.
Include Searches all subfolders within the Look In location.
Subfolders
Date Modified Tab

Filters the file search based on the file’s creation or modified date.
All Files Searches without a date filter.
Find All Files Restricts the search to files created or modified within a
Created or specified time.
Modified
■ Between: Searches for files created or modified
between two dates. Enter the dates or click the
arrows to choose dates from a calendar. To navigate
the calendar, use the left and right arrows, or click
the month and year.
■ During the Previous N Months: Searches for files
created or modified within a specified number of
months.
■ During the Previous N Days: Searches for files created
or modified within a specified number of days.
Find Now
Searches for files using the criteria specified in both tabs.
Stop
Ends the search.
New Search
Clears the search results and resets the default values for all search options.
OK
When one or more files are selected in the search results, closes the Find
dialog box and enters the selected file names in the standard file selection
dialog box.
OPEN | 627
Search Results
Lists all files found by the search. To change the sort order of the files, click
a column heading. To pass a file to the standard file selection dialog box,
select a file and choose OK. When used with a standard file selection dialog
box that allows multiple file selection, you can pass multiple files from the
Search Results.
Add/Modify FTP Locations Dialog Box

Defines the FTP sites that you can browse within standard file selection
dialog boxes. To browse the sites that you add, select FTP from the Places list
in the standard file selection dialog box.
Name of FTP Site

Specifies the site name for the FTP location (for example, ftp.autodesk.com).
Log On As
Specifies whether to log on to the FTP site anonymously or with a specific
user name.
Anonymous Logs you on to the FTP site as an anonymous user. If the
FTP site does not allow anonymous logons, select User
and enter a valid user name.
628 | OPEN
User Logs you on to the FTP site using the specified user
name.
Password
Specifies the password to use to log on to the FTP site.
Add
Adds a new FTP site to the list of FTP locations available from the standard
file selection dialog box.
Modify
Modifies the selected FTP site to use the specified site name, logon name, and
password.
Remove
Removes the selected FTP site from the list of FTP locations available from the
standard file selection dialog box.
FTP Sites
Lists the FTP sites that are available from the Places list in all standard file
selection dialog boxes.
URL
Displays the URL for the selected FTP site.
Partial Open Dialog Box

Displays the drawing views and layers available for specifying what geometry
to load into the selected drawing. When working with large drawing files,
you can select the minimal amount of geometry you need to load when
opening a drawing.
When a drawing is partially open, all AutoCAD named objects, as well as the
specified geometry, are loaded into the file. AutoCAD named objects include
blocks, dimension styles, layers, layouts, linetypes, text styles, UCSs, views,
and viewport configurations.
OPEN | 629
View Geometry to Load
Displays the selected view and available views in the drawing. Only model
space views are available for loading. You can load paper space geometry by
loading the layer that the paper space geometry is drawn on.
View Name Displays the currently selected view. Geometry that is
common to both the selected view and the layers is
loaded into the drawing.
View List Displays all the model space views available in the
selected drawing file. When a view is selected,
AutoCAD loads only the geometry in the selected view.
The default view is Extents. Geometry that is common
to both the selected view and the layers is loaded into
the drawing. You can load geometry from only one
view.
You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load
additional geometry into a partially open drawing.
Note When a drawing is partially open, named objects are still loaded into the
file along with the specified geometry from the selected view. All views are still
available in the partially open drawing, but only geometry from the view
specified to load is displayed in the drawing.
630 | OPEN
Layer Geometry to Load
Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing file. The geometry on
selected layers is loaded into the drawing, including both model space and
paper space geometry. The default loads no layer geometry into the drawing,
but you can load geometry from one or more layers. If you specify to load no
layer geometry into the drawing, no geometry from the selected view is
loaded either because no layer geometry in that view or in the entire drawing
is loaded. Xref-dependent layers are displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load
list only if the selected drawing was last saved with the VISRETAIN system vari-
able set to 1. Any layers created in the xref since the xref was loaded into the
selected drawing are not displayed in the Layer Geometry to Load list.
You can use the PARTIALOAD command to load additional geometry into a
partially open drawing.
Note When a drawing is partially open, named objects are still loaded into the
file along with the specified geometry from the selected layers. All layers are still
available in the partially open drawing, but only geometry from the layers
specified to load appears in the drawing.
Layer Name Displays the layer names in the selected drawing.

Load Geometry Loads geometry from the layer when the drawing is
opened.
Load All Loads geometry from all layers when the drawing is
opened. You can right-click and use the shortcut menu
to load geometry from all layers into the drawing.
Clear All Loads no geometry from any layer when the drawing is
opened. No geometry at all is loaded, including
geometry specified to load from a view. You can right-
click and use the shortcut menu to load no geometry
into the drawing.
Index Status
Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index.
INDEXCTL controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the
drawing file.
OPEN | 631
Use Spatial Index Controls whether a spatial index is used when partially
opening a drawing. AutoCAD uses a spatial index to
locate what portion of the drawing is read; this
minimizes the time required to open the drawing. If a
drawing does not contain a spatial index, this option is
unavailable.
Spatial Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a
spatial index. A spatial index organizes objects based on
their location in space. When partially opening a
drawing, AutoCAD uses a spatial index to locate what
portion of the drawing is read; this minimizes the time
required to open the drawing.
Layer Index Displays whether the selected drawing file contains a
layer index. A layer index is a list showing the objects
that are on each layer. When partially opening a
drawing, AutoCAD uses a layer index to locate what
portion of the drawing is read; this minimizes the time
required to open the drawing.
Unload All Xrefs on Open

Loads all external references when opening the drawing. Selecting this
option enhances the opening process. If you partially open a drawing that
contains a bound xref, only the portion of the xref that is loaded (defined by
the selected view) is bound to the partially open drawing.
Open
Opens the drawing file, loading only combined geometry from the selected
view and layers.
OPEN Command Line

When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), OPEN displays the following prompt on the
command line.
Enter name of drawing to open:
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File
See Also
See “Open an Existing Drawing” in the User’s Guide.
632 | OPEN
Commands NEW creates a new drawing file. PARTIALOAD loads
additional information into a drawing file if the current
drawing is a partially opened drawing.
System Variables FULLOPEN indicates whether the current drawing is
partially opened.
OPTIONS
Customizes the AutoCAD settings
Tools menu: Options
Shortcut menu: Right-click in the command window, or (with no com-
mands active and no objects selected) right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Options.
Command line: options
The Options dialog box is displayed.
Options Dialog Box

Customizes many AutoCAD settings.
OPTIONS | 633
Current Profile Displays the name of the current profile above the tabs.
To set the current profile, create a new profile, or edit an
existing profile, use the Profiles tab. (CPROFILE system
variable)
Current Drawing Displays the name of the current drawing above the
tabs. A drawing file icon is displayed next to any option
saved with the drawing. An option saved with the
drawing affects only the current drawing. An option
saved in the registry affects all drawings in an AutoCAD
session. Options that are saved in the registry (and are
not displayed with a drawing file icon) are saved in the
current profile. (DWGNAME system variable)
Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Specifies the folders in which AutoCAD searches for support, driver, menu,
and other files. Also specifies optional, user-defined settings such as which
dictionary to use for checking spelling.
To specify a location for a folder or file, double-click its name in the list.
Choose Browse and use the Browse for Folder dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box) to locate the folder or file you want to use.
634 | OPTIONS
Support File Search Path
Specifies the folders in which AutoCAD searches for support files. In addition
to the files required to run AutoCAD, you can include files for fonts, menus,
drawings to insert, linetypes, and hatch patterns in the support file search
path. Environment variables can also be included in the support file search
path.
Working Support File Search Path
Specifies the active folders in which AutoCAD searches for support files
specific to your system. The working support file list displays valid paths
from the support file search path that exist within the current folder struc-
ture and network paths. Any valid environment variables listed in the sup-
port file search path are displayed as expanded folders in the Working Sup-
port File Search Path. Environment variables that contain other environment
variables are displayed with only the parent variable as an expanded folder.
Device Driver File Search Path
Specifies where AutoCAD looks for device drivers for the video display,
pointing devices, printers, and plotters.
Project Files Search Path
Specifies a project name for the drawing. The project name corresponds to a
search path for external reference (xref) files associated with the project. You
can create any number of project names with associated folders, but each
drawing can have only one project name. (PROJECTNAME system variable)
Menu, Help, and Miscellaneous File Names
Specifies the names and locations of various types of files.
Menu File Specifies the location of the AutoCAD menu file.
Help File Specifies the location of the AutoCAD Help file.
Default Internet Specifies the default Internet location used by both the
Location BROWSER command and the Browse the Web button on
the Web toolbar.
Configuration Specifies the location of the configuration file used to
File store hardware device driver information. This value is
read-only and can only be changed by using the /c
command line switch. See “Customize Startup” in the
User’s Guide.
OPTIONS | 635
Text Editor, Dictionary, and Font File Names
Specifies a number of optional settings.
Text Editor Specifies the text editor application to use for editing
Application multiline text objects. (MTEXTED system variable)
Main Dictionary Specifies the dictionary to use for checking spelling.
(DCTMAIN system variable)
Custom Specifies a custom dictionary to use (if you have one).
Dictionary File (DCTCUST system variable)
Alternate Font Specifies the location of the font file to use if AutoCAD
File cannot locate the original font and an alternate font is
not specified in the font mapping file. If you choose
Browse, AutoCAD displays the Alternate Font dialog
box (see page 664), from which you can choose an
available font. (FONTALT system variable)
Font Mapping Specifies the location of the file that defines how
File AutoCAD should convert fonts it cannot locate.
(FONTMAP system variable)
Print File, Spooler, and Prolog Section Names
Specifies settings related to plotting.
Plot File Name Specifies a default name for the temporary plot files
For Legacy used with plotting scripts created with AutoCAD
Plotting Scripts Release 14 or earlier. The default name is the drawing
name plus the .plt file extension. The default name used
with AutoCAD 2000 and later drawings is the drawing
name-layout name plus the .plt file name extension.
Some plotting device drivers, however, use a different
plot file extension. This option only affects the default
plot file name used for plotting scripts created with
earlier versions of AutoCAD.
Print Spool Specifies the application to use for print spooling. You
Executable can enter the executable file name as well as any
command line arguments you want to use. For
example, you can enter myspool.bat %s to spool plot
files to myspool.bat and have a unique plot file name
automatically generated. See “Use AutoSpool” in the
Driver and Peripheral Guide.
636 | OPTIONS
Printer Support File Path
Specifies search path settings for printer support files.
Print Spooler File Specifies the path for print spool files. AutoCAD writes
Location the plot to this location.
Printer Specifies the path for printer configuration files (PC3
Configuration files).
Search Path
Printer Specifies the path for files with a .pmp file extension, or
Description File printer description files.
Search Path
Plot Style Table Specifies the path for files with an .stb or .ctb extension,
Search Path or plot style table files (both named plot style tables and
color-dependent plot style tables).
Search Path for ObjectARX Applications
Specifies the path for ObjectARX™ application files. You can enter multiple
URL addresses under this option. (Multiple URLs should be separated by a semi-
colon.) AutoCAD searches the specified URLs when an associated ObjectARX
application cannot be located. Only URL addresses can be entered in this
option.
Automatic Save File Location
Specifies the path for the file created when you select Automatic Save on the
Open and Save tab. (SAVEFILEPATH system variable)
Color Book Locations
Specifies the path for color book files that can be used when specifying colors
in the Select Color dialog box. You can define multiple folders for each path
specified. This option is saved with the user profile.
Data Sources Location
Specifies the path for database source files. Changes to this setting do not
take effect until you close and restart AutoCAD.
Drawing Template File Location
Specifies the path and file name for the template files used by the setup
wizards and for the QNEW command.
Tool Palettes File Locations
Specifies the path for tool palette support files.
Log File Location
Specifies the path for the log file created when you select Maintain a Log File
on the Open and Save tab. (LOGFILEPATH system variable)
OPTIONS | 637
Temporary Drawing File Location
Specifies the location AutoCAD uses to store temporary files. AutoCAD
creates temporary files and then deletes them when you exit the program. If
you plan to run AutoCAD from a write-protected folder (for example, if you
are working on a network or opening files from a CD), specify an alternate
location for your temporary files. The folder you specify must not be write-
protected.
The TEMPPREFIX system variable (read-only) also stores the current location
of temporary drawing files.
Temporary External Reference File Location
Specifies the location of external reference (xref) files. This location is used
for the copy of the xref when you select Enabled with Copy in the Demand
Load Xrefs list on the Open and Save tab. (XLOADPATH system variable)
Texture Maps Search Path
Specifies the folders AutoCAD searches for rendering texture maps.
Browse
Displays the Browse for Folder or Select a File dialog box, depending on what
you selected in the List of Folders and Files.
Add
Adds a search path for the selected folder.
Remove
Removes the selected search path or file.
Move Up
Moves the selected search path above the preceding search path.
Move Down
Moves the selected search path below the following search path.
Set Current
Makes the selected project or spelling dictionary current.
Display Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Customizes the AutoCAD display.
638 | OPTIONS
Window Elements
Controls display settings specific to the AutoCAD drawing environment.
Display Scroll Displays scroll bars at the bottom and right sides of the
Bars in Drawing drawing area.
Window
Display Screen Displays the screen menu on the right side of the
Menu drawing area. The AutoCAD screen menu font is
controlled by the Windows system font settings. If you
use the AutoCAD screen menu, you should set the
Windows system font setting to a font and font size
that fits the screen menu size restrictions.
Text Lines in Specifies the number of lines of text you want to display
Command Line in the docked command line window. The default value
Window is 3. The valid range is 1 to 100.
Colors Displays the Color Options dialog box (see page 665).
Use this dialog box to specify colors of elements in the
AutoCAD window.
OPTIONS | 639
Fonts Displays the Command Line Window Font dialog box
(see page 667). Use this dialog box to specify the font
for the command line text.
Layout Elements
Controls options for existing and new layouts. A layout is a paper space
environment in which you can set up drawings for plotting.
Display Layout Displays the layout and Model tabs at the bottom of the
and Model Tabs drawing area.
Display Margins Displays margins in a layout. Margins appear as dashed
lines. Objects drawn outside of the margins are clipped
or omitted when the drawing is plotted.
Display Paper Displays a representation of the specified paper size in
Background a layout. The paper size and plot scale determine the
size of the paper background.
■ Display Paper Shadow: Displays a shadow around the
paper background in a layout. This option is
unavailable if the Display Paper Background option
is cleared.
Show Page Setup Displays the Page Setup dialog box (see page 678) the
Dialog for New first time you choose a layout tab. Use this dialog box
Layouts to set options related to paper and plot settings.
Create Viewport Creates a single viewport automatically when you
in New Layouts create a new layout.
Crosshair Size
Controls the size of the crosshairs. The valid range is from 1 to 100 percent
of the total screen. At 100 percent, the ends of the crosshairs are never visible.
When the size is decreased to 99 percent or below, the crosshairs have a finite
size, and the ends of the crosshairs are visible when situated at the edge of
the drawing area. The default size is 5 percent. (CURSORSIZE system variable)
Display Resolution
Controls the quality of the display of objects. If you set high values to
improve display quality, the impact on performance is significant.
Arc and Circle Controls the smoothness of circles, arcs, and ellipses. A
Smoothness higher number produces smoother objects, but
AutoCAD requires more time to regenerate, pan, and
zoom the objects. You can improve performance by
setting this option to a low value such as 100 for
drawing, and increasing the value for rendering. The
640 | OPTIONS
valid range is 1 to 20,000. The default setting is 1000.
This setting is saved in the drawing. To change the
default for new drawings, consider specifying this
setting in the template files on which you base your
new drawings.
This value is also controlled by the VIEWRES command.
Segments in a Sets the number of line segments to be generated for
Polyline Curve each polyline curve. The higher the number, the greater
the performance impact. Set this option to a low value
such as 4 to optimize performance for drawing. Values
range from –32767 to 32767. The default setting is 8.
This setting is saved in the drawing. (SPLINESEGS system
variable)
Rendered Object Controls the smoothness of shaded and rendered
Smoothness curved solids. AutoCAD multiplies the value you enter
for Rendered Object Smoothness by the value you enter
for Arc and Circle Smoothness to determine how to
display solid objects. To improve performance, set
Rendered Object Smoothness to 1 or less when
drawing. A higher number decreases display
performance and increases rendering time. The valid
range is 0.01 to 10. The default setting is 0.5. This
setting is saved in the drawing. (FACETRES system
variable)
Contour Lines per Sets the number of contour lines per surface on objects.
Surface A higher number decreases display performance and
increases rendering time. The valid range is 0 to 2047.
The default setting is 4. This setting is saved in the
drawing. (ISOLINES system variable)
Display Performance
Controls display settings that affect AutoCAD performance.
Pan and Zoom Controls the display of raster images when you use
with Raster Image Realtime PAN and ZOOM. Clear this option to optimize
performance. If dragging display is turned on and you
select Pan and Zoom with Raster Image, a copy of the
image moves with the cursor as you reposition the
original image. Dragging display controls whether an
outline of the object is displayed while you drag it. The
DRAGMODE system variable controls dragging display.
(RTDISPLAY system variable)
OPTIONS | 641
Highlight Raster Controls the display of raster images during selection. If
Image Frame this option is selected, only the frame of the raster
Only image is highlighted when selected. Select this option
to optimize performance. (IMAGEHLT system variable)
True Color Raster Controls whether raster images or renderings are
Images and displayed at optimum quality. Selecting True Color
Rendering Raster Images and Rendering enables AutoCAD to
display images in True Color or at the highest display
quality available for the system. Increasing the amount
of colors in the system display setting significantly
decreases display performance. Clearing this option or
reducing the color palette in the system display settings
optimizes performance.
Apply Solid Fill Displays solid fills in objects. Objects affected by FILL
include hatches (including solid-fill), two-dimensional
solids, wide polylines, multilines and traces. You must
regenerate the drawing by using REGEN or REGENALL for
this setting to take effect. This setting is saved in the
drawing. Clear this option to optimize performance.
(FILLMODE system variable)
Show Text Displays the frames for text objects instead of
Boundary Frame displaying the text objects. After you select or clear this
Only option, you must use REGEN to update the display. This
setting is saved in the drawing. Select this option to
optimize performance. (QTEXTMODE system variable)
Show Silhouettes Controls whether silhouette curves of 3D solid objects
in Wireframe are displayed as wireframes. This option also controls
whether mesh is drawn or suppressed when a 3D solid
object is hidden. This setting is saved in the drawing.
Clear this option to optimize performance. (DISPSILH
system variable)
Reference Fading Intensity
Specifies the fading intensity value for objects during in-place reference
editing. With in-place reference editing, you can edit a block reference or
external reference from within the current drawing. While references are
being edited in-place, objects that are not being edited are displayed at a
lesser intensity than objects that can be edited. The valid range is 0 through
90 percent. The default setting is 50 percent. (XFADECTL system variable)
642 | OPTIONS
Open and Save Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Controls options that relate to opening and saving files in AutoCAD.
File Save
Controls settings related to saving a file in AutoCAD.
Save As Displays the valid file formats used when saving a file
with SAVE, SAVEAS, and QSAVE. The file format selected
for this option is the default format that all drawings
are saved as when you use SAVE, SAVEAS, and QSAVE.
Saving an AutoCAD 2004 file to any DXF format affects
performance. Set the Save As option to AutoCAD 2004
Drawing to optimize performance while saving.
Note AutoCAD 2000 is the drawing file format used by
the AutoCAD 2000, AutoCAD 2000i, and AutoCAD 2002
releases.
Save a Thumbnail Displays an image of the drawing in the Preview area of
Preview Image the Select File dialog box. (RASTERPREVIEW system
variable)
OPTIONS | 643
Incremental Save Sets the percentage of potentially wasted space in a
Percentage drawing file. When the specified percentage is reached,
AutoCAD performs a full save instead of an incremental
save. Full saves eliminate wasted space. If you set
Incremental Save Percentage to 0, every save is a full
save.
Although incremental saves increase the size of your
drawing, do not set a very low value. Low values
degrade performance because AutoCAD performs time-
consuming full saves more often. For optimum
performance, set the value to 50. If hard disk space
becomes an issue, set the value to 25. If you set the
value to 20 or less, performance of the SAVE and SAVEAS
commands slows significantly. (ISAVEPERCENT system
variable)
File Safety Precautions
Assists in avoiding data loss and in detecting errors.
Automatic Save Saves your drawing automatically at the intervals you
specify. You can specify the location of all Autosave files
by using the SAVEFILEPATH system variable. SAVEFILE
(read-only) stores the name of the Autosave file.
■ Minutes Between Saves: Specifies how often the
drawing is saved when using Automatic Save.
(SAVETIME system variable)
Create Backup Specifies whether a backup copy of a drawing is created

Copy with Each when you save the drawing. The backup copy is created
Save in the same location as the drawing. (ISAVEBAK system
variable)
For information about using backup files, see “Recover
a Damaged File” in the User’s Guide.
Full-Time CRC Specifies whether a cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
Validation should be performed each time an object is read into
the drawing. CRC is an error-checking mechanism. If
your drawings are being corrupted and you suspect a
hardware problem or AutoCAD error, turn this option
on.
644 | OPTIONS
Maintain a Log Writes the contents of the text window to a log file. To
File specify the location and name of the log file, use the
Files tab in the Options dialog box. You can also set the
log file location by using the LOGFILEMODE system
variable. The LOGFILENAME system variable (read-only)
stores the log file name of the current drawing.
File Extension for Specifies a unique extension for the current user to
Temporary Files identify temporary files in a network environment. The
default extension is .ac$.
Security Options Provides options for a digital signature and password
that are invoked when you save a file.
Display Digital Presents digital signature information when a file with
Signature a valid digital signature is opened. (SIGWARN system
Information variable)
File Open
Controls settings that relate to recently used files and open files.
Number of Controls the number of recently used files that are
Recently Used listed in the File menu for quick access. Valid values are
Files to List 0 to 9.
Display Full Path Displays the full path of the active drawing in the
In Title drawing’s title bar, or in the AutoCAD title bar if the
drawing is maximized.
External References (Xrefs)
Controls the settings that relate to editing and loading external references.
Demand Load Controls demand loading of xrefs. Demand loading
Xrefs improves performance by loading only the parts of the
referenced drawing needed to regenerate the current
drawing. (XLOADCTL system variable)
■ Disabled: Turns off demand loading.

■ Enabled: Turns on demand loading and improves
AutoCAD performance. Select the Enabled setting to
enhance the loading process when working with
clipped xrefs that contain a spatial or layer index.
When this option is selected, other users cannot edit
the file while it is being referenced.
■ Enabled with Copy: Turns on demand loading but
uses a copy of the referenced drawing. Other users
can edit the original drawing.
OPTIONS | 645
Retain Changes Saves changes to layer properties and states for xref-
to Xref Layers dependent layers. When the drawing is reloaded, the
properties currently assigned to xref-dependent layers
are retained. This setting is saved in the drawing.
(VISRETAIN system variable)
Allow Other Users Determines whether the current drawing file can be
to Refedit Current edited in-place if it is being referenced by another
Drawing drawing or multiple drawings. This setting is saved in
the drawing. (XEDIT system variable)
ObjectARX Applications
Controls settings that relate to AutoCAD Runtime Extension applications
and proxy graphics.
Demand Load Specifies if and when AutoCAD demand-loads a third-
ObjectARX Apps party application if a drawing contains custom objects
created in that application. (DEMANDLOAD system
variable)
■ Disable Load on Demand: Turns off demand-loading.

■ Custom Object Detect: Demand-loads the source
application when you open a drawing that contains
custom objects. This setting does not demand-load
the application when you invoke one of the
application’s commands.
■ Command Invoke: Demand-loads the source
application when you invoke one of the
application’s commands. This setting does not
demand-load the application when you open a
drawing that contains custom objects.
■ Object Detect and Command Invoke: Demand-loads
the source application when you open a drawing
that contains custom objects or when you invoke
one of the application’s commands.
Proxy Images for Controls the display of custom objects in drawings.

Custom Objects (PROXYSHOW system variable)
■ Do Not Show Proxy Graphics: Specifies not to display

custom objects in drawings.
■ Show Proxy Graphics: Specifies to display custom
objects in drawings.
■ Show Proxy Bounding Box: Specifies to show a box in
place of custom objects in drawings.
646 | OPTIONS
Show Proxy Specifies whether AutoCAD displays a warning when
Information you open a drawing that contains custom objects.
Dialog Box (PROXYNOTICE system variable)
Plotting Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls options related to plotting.
Default Plot Settings For New Drawings

Controls default plotting settings for new drawings or drawings created in
AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000
or later format.
Use As Default Sets the default output device for new drawings and for
Output Device drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier that
have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later
format. The list displays any plotter configuration files
(PC3) found in the plotter configuration search path
and any system printers that are configured in the
system.
Use Last Sets the plotting settings to match those of the last
Successful Plot successful plot. This option determines default plot
Settings settings the same way that earlier releases of AutoCAD
do.
OPTIONS | 647
Add or Configure Displays the Plotter Manager (a Windows system
Plotters window) (see page 747). You can add or configure a
plotter with the Autodesk Plotter Manager.
General Plot Options
Controls options that relate to the general plotting environment including
paper size settings, system printer alert behavior, and OLE objects in an
AutoCAD drawing.
Keep the Layout Uses the paper size specified on the Layout Settings tab
Paper Size If in the Page Setup dialog box as long as the selected
Possible output device can plot to this paper size. If the selected
output device cannot plot to this paper size, AutoCAD
displays a warning message and uses the paper size
specified either in the plotter configuration file (PC3) or
in the default system settings if the output device is a
system printer. You can also select this option by setting
PAPERUPDATE to 0.
Use the Plot Uses the paper size specified either in the plotter
Device Paper Size configuration file (PC3) or in the default system settings
if the output device is a system printer. You can also set
this option by setting PAPERUPDATE to 1.
System Printer Controls whether you are alerted when the plotted
Spool Alert drawing is spooled through a system printer because of
an input or output port conflict.
■ Always Alert (And Log Errors): Alerts you and always

logs an error when the plotted drawing spools
through a system printer.
■ Alert First Time Only (And Log Errors): Alerts you once
and always logs an error when the plotted drawing
spools through a system printer.
■ Never Alert (And Log First Error): Never alerts you and
logs only the first error when the plotted drawing
spools through a system printer.
■ Never Alert (Do Not Log Errors): Never alerts you or
logs an error when the plotted drawing spools
through a system printer.
OLE Plot Quality Determines the quality of plotted OLE objects. The
values are Line Art, Text, Graphics, Photograph, and
High Quality Photograph. (OLEQUALITY system
variable)
648 | OPTIONS
Use OLE Launches the application used to create the OLE object
Application when plotting an AutoCAD drawing with OLE objects.
When Plotting You can use this option to optimize the quality of
OLE Objects plotted OLE objects. This setting is saved in the
drawing. (OLESTARTUP system variable)
Hide System Controls whether Windows system printers are
Printer displayed in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes. This
option hides standard Windows system printers only. It
does not hide Windows system printers that have been
configured using the AutoCAD Add-a-Plotter wizard.
You can control the size of the list of devices in the Plot
and Page Setup dialog boxes by moving a device’s PC3
file out of the Plotters folder and its subfolders.
Default Plot Style Behavior for New Drawings
Controls plot style options. A plot style is a collection of property settings
defined in a plot style table and applied when the drawing is plotted. Chang-
ing the default plot style setting using the Options dialog box does not affect
the current drawing. Changing the default plot style behavior using the
Options dialog box affects only new drawings or drawings created in an
earlier release of AutoCAD that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or
later format.
The default plot style setting is Use Color Dependent Plot Styles. The Plot
Style Control on the Properties toolbar is unavailable by default. The Plot
Style Control is available after you select the Use Named Plot Styles option
and open a new drawing. (PSTYLEPOLICY system variable)
Use Color Uses color-dependent plot styles in both new drawings
Dependent Plot and drawings created in AutoCAD Release 14 or earlier.
Styles Color-dependent plot styles use the numbers from the
AutoCAD color index to create a plot style table with a
.ctb file extension. Each color is defined by a name or
number ranging from 1 to 255. You can assign each
color number to a different pen on a pen plotter to
achieve different property settings in the plotted
drawing. If this option is selected, a plot style is created
for each color setting. You can also select this option by
setting the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 1.
OPTIONS | 649
This setting is saved with the drawing. Once a drawing
is saved with Use Color Dependent Plot Styles as the
default, you can convert it to Use Named Plot Styles
using the CONVERTCTB and CONVERTPSTYLES
commands.
Use Named Plot Uses named plot styles in both new drawings and
Styles drawings created in earlier versions of AutoCAD.
AutoCAD plots the drawing according to the property
settings you specify in the plot style definition. The plot
style is defined in the plot style table attached to the
layout. Named plot style tables are files with the file
extension .stb. You can also select this option by setting
the PSTYLEPOLICY system variable to 0.
This setting is saved with the drawing. Once a drawing
is saved with Use Named Plot Styles as the default, you
can convert it to Use Color Dependent Plot Styles using
the CONVERTCTB and CONVERTPSTYLES commands.
However, once you use CONVERTPSTYLES to convert a
drawing from using a named plot style table to a color
plot style table, you cannot use CONVERTPSTYLES to
convert it back to using a named plot style table.
Default Plot Style Specifies the default plot style table to attach to new
Table drawings. A plot style table is a file with a .ctb or an .stb
extension that includes and defines plot styles. If you
are using color-dependent plot styles, this option lists
all color dependent plot style tables found in the search
path as well as the value of None. If you are using
named plot styles, this option lists all named plot styles
tables.
Default Plot Style Sets the default plot style for Layer 0 for new drawings
for Layer 0 or drawings created with earlier releases of AutoCAD
that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later
format. The list displays the default style, Normal, and
any plot styles defined in the currently loaded plot style
table. (DEFLPLSTYLE system variable)
650 | OPTIONS
Default Plot Style Sets the default plot style that is assigned when you
for Objects create new objects. The list displays BYLAYER, BYBLOCK,
and Normal styles, and any plot styles defined in the
currently loaded plot style table.
You can also set this option by using the DEFPLSTYLE
system variable. DEFPLSTYLE is drawing specific and
controls the default plot style for objects in new
drawings or in drawings created in earlier releases of
AutoCAD that have never been saved in AutoCAD 2000
or later format.
Add or Edit Plot Displays the Plot Style Manager (a Windows Explorer
Style Tables window), where you can create or edit plot style tables.
System Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls AutoCAD system settings.
Current 3D Graphics Display

Controls settings that relate to system properties and configuration of the 3D
graphics display system.
Current 3D Lists the available 3D graphics display systems. The
Graphics Display default is the Heidi® 3D graphics display system
System (GSHEIDI10).
OPTIONS | 651
Properties Displays a 3D Graphics System Configuration dialog
box for the current 3D graphics display system. In the
3D Graphics System Configuration dialog box, you set
options that affect the way objects are displayed and
system resources are used in the 3D Orbit view. The
options you set also affect the way objects are shaded
with SHADEMODE.
Current Pointing Device
Controls options that relate to the pointing device.
Current Pointing Displays a list of the available pointing device drivers.
Device
■ Current System Pointing Device: Sets the system
pointing device as current.
■ Wintab Compatible Digitizer: Sets the Wintab-
compatible digitizer as current.
Accept Input Specifies whether AutoCAD accepts input from both a

From mouse and a digitizer or ignores mouse input when a
digitizer is set.
Layout Regen Options
Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model and layout tabs. For
each tab, the display list is updated either by regenerating the drawing when
you switch to that tab or by saving the display list to memory and regenerat-
ing only the modified objects when you switch to that tab. Changing these
settings can improve performance. (LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable)
Note The effectiveness of changing these settings depends on several factors.

See LAYOUTREGENCTL for more information.
Regen When Regenerates the drawing each time you switch tabs.
Switching
Layouts
Cache Model Tab For the Model tab and the last layout made current,
and Last Layout saves the display list to memory and suppresses
regenerations when you switch between the two tabs.
For all other layouts, regenerations still occur when you
switch to those tabs.
Cache Model Tab Regenerates the drawing the first time you switch to
and All Layouts each tab. For the remainder of the drawing session, the
display list is saved to memory and regenerations are
suppressed when you switch to those tabs.
652 | OPTIONS
dbConnect Options
Controls options that relate to database connectivity.
Store Links Index Stores the database index in the AutoCAD drawing file.
in Drawing File Select this option to enhance performance during Link
Select operations. Clear this option to decrease drawing
file size and to enhance the opening process for
drawings with database information.
Open Tables in Specifies whether to open database tables in Read-only
Read-Only Mode mode in the AutoCAD drawing file.
General Options
Controls general options that relate to system settings.
Single-Drawing Limits AutoCAD to one open drawing at a time. If you
Compatibility clear this option, AutoCAD can open multiple drawings
Mode at once. If multiple drawings are open, this option
cannot be turned on until the additional drawings are
closed. (SDI system variable)
Display OLE Displays the OLE Properties dialog box when inserting
Properties Dialog OLE objects into AutoCAD drawings.
Show All Warning Displays all dialog boxes that include a Don’t Display
Messages This Warning Again option. All dialog boxes with
warning options are displayed, regardless of previous
settings specific to each dialog box.
Beep on Error in Sounds an alarm beep when AutoCAD detects an
User Input invalid entry.
Load acad.lsp Specifies whether AutoCAD loads the acad.lsp file into
with Every every drawing. If this option is cleared, only the
Drawing acaddoc.lsp file is loaded into all drawing files. Clear this
option if you do not want to run certain LISP routines
in specific drawing files. (ACADLSPASDOC system
variable)
Allow Long Permits long names to be used for named objects in the
Symbol Names drawing definition table. Object names can be up to
255 characters and include letters, numbers, blank
spaces, and any special character not used by Windows
and AutoCAD for other purposes. Long names can be
used for layers, dimension styles, blocks, linetypes, text
styles, layouts, UCS names, views, and viewport
configurations. This option is saved in the drawing.
(EXTNAMES system variable)
OPTIONS | 653
Startup Controls whether the Startup dialog box or no dialog
box is displayed when starting AutoCAD or creating a
new drawing.
Live Enabler Options
Specifies whether AutoCAD checks for object enablers. Using object enablers,
you can display and use custom objects in AutoCAD drawings even when the
ObjectARX application that created them is unavailable.
Check Web for Controls whether AutoCAD checks the Autodesk
Live Enablers website for object enablers.
Maximum Specifies the number of times AutoCAD will check for
Number of object enablers if unsuccessful.
Unsuccessful
Checks
For more information about object enablers, see “Work with Custom and
Proxy Objects” in the User’s Guide.
User Preferences Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls options that optimize the way you work in AutoCAD.
654 | OPTIONS
Windows Standard Behavior
Controls keystroke and right-click behavior in AutoCAD.
Windows Follows Windows standards in interpreting keyboard
Standard accelerators (for example, CTRL + C equals COPYCLIP). If
Accelerator Keys this option is cleared, AutoCAD interprets keyboard
accelerators by using AutoCAD standards rather than
Windows standards (for example, CTRL + C equals
Cancel, CTRL + V toggles among the viewports).
Shortcut Menus Displays a shortcut menu in the drawing area when you
in Drawing Area right-click the pointing device. If this option is cleared,
AutoCAD interprets right-click as ENTER .
Right-Click Displays the Right-Click Customization dialog box (see
Customization page 667). This dialog box provides further definition
for the Shortcut Menus in Drawing Area option.
(SHORTCUTMENU system variable)
Drag and Drop Scale
Controls the default scale for dragging objects into a drawing using
DesignCenter or i-drop.
Source Content Sets the units AutoCAD uses for an object being
Units inserted into the current drawing when no insert units
are specified with the INSUNITS system variable.
If Unspecified-Unitless is selected, the object is not
scaled when inserted. (INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system
variable)
Target Drawing Sets the units AutoCAD uses in the current drawing
Units when no insert units are specified with the INSUNITS
system variable. (INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable)
OPTIONS | 655
Hyperlink
Controls settings that relate to the display properties of hyperlinks.
Display Hyperlink Displays the hyperlink cursor and shortcut menu. The
Cursor and hyperlink cursor appears alongside the crosshairs
Shortcut Menu whenever the pointing device moves over an object
that contains a hyperlink. The hyperlink shortcut
menu provides additional options when you select an
object that contains a hyperlink and then right-click in
the drawing area. If this option is cleared, the hyperlink
cursor is never displayed and the Hyperlink option on
shortcut menus is not available (if shortcut menus are
enabled).
Display Hyperlink Displays the Hyperlink tooltip when the pointing
Tooltip device moves over an object that contains a hyperlink.
If the Display Hyperlink Cursor and Shortcut Menu
option is cleared, this option is unavailable.
Priority for Coordinate Data Entry
Controls how AutoCAD responds to input of coordinate data. (OSNAPCOORD
system variable)
Running Object Specifies that running object snaps override coordinate
Snap entry at all times. You can also select this option by
setting OSNAPCOORD to 0.
Keyboard Entry Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object
snaps at all times. You can also select this option by
setting OSNAPCOORD to 1.
Keyboard Entry Specifies that coordinate entry overrides running object
Except Scripts snaps, except in scripts. You can also select this option
by setting OSNAPCOORD to 2.
Object Sorting Methods
Determines the sort order of objects.
Object Selection Controls how objects are sorted during selection. If this
option is selected, AutoCAD sorts objects available for
selection from those created first to those created last. If
two overlapping objects are chosen during object
selection, AutoCAD recognizes the newest object as the
selected object. If this option is cleared, object selection
is determined by a random sort order. This setting is
saved in the drawing. (SORTENTS system variable)
656 | OPTIONS
Object Snap Controls how objects are sorted when using Object
Snap. If this option is selected, AutoCAD sorts objects
available for selection from those created first to those
created last. If two overlapping objects are chosen when
using Object Snap, AutoCAD recognizes the newest
object as the object to snap to. If this option is cleared,
Object Snap is determined by a random sort order. This
setting is saved in the drawing. (SORTENTS system
variable)
Regens Controls how objects are sorted when using REGEN or
REGENALL. If this option is selected, AutoCAD sorts and
regenerates objects in the drawing from those created
first to those created last. If this option is cleared, the
regeneration of objects is determined by a random sort
order. This setting is saved in the drawing. (SORTENTS
system variable)
Plotting Controls how objects are sorted during plotting. If this
option is selected, AutoCAD sorts and plots objects in
the drawing from those created first to those created
last. If this option is cleared, the plotting of objects is
determined by a random sort order. This setting is saved
in the drawing. (SORTENTS system variable)
Associative Dimensioning
Controls whether associative dimension objects or legacy-style, nonassocia-
tive dimension objects are created. Associative dimensions automatically
adjust their locations, orientations, and measurement values when the
geometric objects associated with them are modified. (DIMASSOC system
variable)
Hidden Line Settings
Displays the Hidden Line Settings dialog box, where you can change the dis-
play properties of hidden lines.
Lineweight Settings
Displays the Lineweight Settings dialog box (see page 523). Use this dialog
box to set lineweight options, such as display properties and defaults, and
also to set the current lineweight.
OPTIONS | 657
Drafting Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Specifies a number of general editing options.
AutoSnap Settings
Controls settings that relate to the visual aids, called AutoSnaps, that display
when you use object snaps. AutoSnap™ settings are saved in the registry.
When the cursor, or aperture box, is on an object, you can press TAB to cycle
through all the snap points available for that object.
Marker Controls the display of the AutoSnap marker. The
marker is a geometric symbol that displays when the
crosshairs move over a snap point. (AUTOSNAP system
variable)
Magnet Turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off. The magnet is an
automatic movement of the crosshairs that locks the
crosshairs onto the nearest snap point. (AUTOSNAP
system variable)
Display AutoSnap Controls the display of the AutoSnap tooltip. The
Tooltip tooltip is a label that describes which part of the object
you are snapping to. (AUTOSNAP system variable)
658 | OPTIONS
Display AutoSnap Controls the display of the AutoSnap aperture box. The
Aperture Box aperture box is a box that appears inside the crosshairs
when you snap to an object. (APBOX system variable)
AutoSnap Marker Specifies the color of the AutoSnap marker.
Color
AutoSnap Marker Size
Sets the display size for the AutoSnap marker.
AutoTrack Settings
Controls the settings that relate to AutoTrack™ behavior, which is available
when polar tracking or object snap tracking is turned on (see DSETTINGS).
Display Polar Displays a vector along specified angles when polar
Tracking Vector tracking is on. With polar tracking, you can draw lines
along angles. Polar angles are 90-degree divisors, such
as 45, 30, and 15 degrees.
You can disable Display Polar Tracking Vector by setting
TRACKPATH to 2.
Display Controls the display of tracking vectors. Tracking

Full-Screen vectors are construction lines from which you can draw
Tracking Vector objects at specific angles or in specific relationships to
other objects. If selected, AutoCAD displays alignment
vectors as infinite lines.
You can disable Display Full-screen Tracking Vector by
setting TRACKPATH to 1.
Display Controls the display of the AutoTrack tooltip. The
AutoTrack Tooltip tooltip is a label that displays the tracking coordinates.
(AUTOSNAP system variable)
Alignment Point Acquisition
Controls the method of displaying alignment vectors in a drawing.
Automatic Displays tracking vectors automatically when the
aperture moves over an object snap.
Shift to Acquire Displays tracking vectors when pressing SHIFT and
moving the aperture over an object snap.
OPTIONS | 659
Aperture Size
Sets the display size for the AutoSnap aperture. When Display AutoSnap
Aperture Box is selected (or when APBOX is set to 1), the aperture box is
displayed in the center of the crosshairs when you snap to an object. The
aperture size determines how close to a snap point you can be before the
magnet locks the aperture box to the snap point. Values range from 1 to 50
pixels. (APERTURE system variable)
Selection Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Pickbox Size
Controls the display size of the AutoCAD pickbox. The pickbox is the object
selection tool that appears in editing commands. (PICKBOX system variable)
Selection Modes
Controls settings that relate to object selection methods.
660 | OPTIONS
Noun/Verb Allows you to select an object before starting a
Selection command. The command affects the previously
selected object or objects. (PICKFIRST system variable)
You can use many editing and inquiry commands with
noun/verb selection, including
PROPERTIES
ALIGN DVIEW
ARRAY ERASE ROTATE
BLOCK EXPLODE SCALE
CHANGE LIST STRETCH
CHPROP MIRROR WBLOCK
COPY MOVE
Use Shift to Add Adds or removes an object to the selection set when you
to Selection press SHIFT and select an object. To clear a selection set
quickly, draw a selection window in a blank area of the
drawing. (PICKADD system variable)
Press and Drag Draws a selection window by selecting a point and
dragging the pointing device to a second point. If this
option is cleared, you can draw a selection window by
selecting two separate points with the pointing device.
(PICKDRAG system variable)
Implied Initiates the drawing of a selection window when you
Windowing select a point outside an object.
Drawing the selection window from left to right selects
objects that are entirely inside the window’s
boundaries. Drawing from right to left selects objects
within and crossing the window’s boundaries.
(PICKAUTO system variable)
Object Grouping Selects all objects in a group when you select one object
in that group. With GROUP you can create and name a
set of objects for selection. You can also set this option
by setting the PICKSTYLE system variable to 1.
OPTIONS | 661
Associative Hatch Determines which objects are selected when you select
an associative hatch. If this option is selected, boundary
objects are also selected when you select an associative
hatch. You can also set this option by setting the
PICKSTYLE system variable to 2.
Grip Size
Controls the display size of AutoCAD grips. (GRIPSIZE system variable)
grip sizes
Grips
Controls the settings that relate to grips. Grips are small squares displayed on
an object after it has been selected.
unselected grips
Unselected Grip Determines the color of an unselected grip. If you
Color choose Select Color from the color list, AutoCAD
selected grip displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 169).
AutoCAD displays an unselected grip as a small, filled
square. (GRIPCOLOR system variable)
Selected Grip Determines the color of a selected grip. If you choose
Color Select Color from the color list, AutoCAD displays the
Select Color dialog box (see page 169). AutoCAD
displays a selected grip as a small, filled square.
(GRIPHOT system variable)
Hover Grip Color Determines the color a grip displays when the cursor
rolls over the grip. If you choose Select Color from the
color list, AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box
(see page 169). (GRIPHOVER system variable)
Enable Grips Displays grips on an object after you select it. You can
edit an object with grips by selecting a grip and using
the shortcut menu. Displaying grips in a drawing
significantly affects performance. Clear this option to
optimize performance. (GRIPS system variable)
Enable Grips Controls how grips are displayed on a block after you
within Blocks select it. If this option is selected, AutoCAD displays all
grips for each object in the block. If this option is
cleared, AutoCAD displays one grip located at the
insertion point of the block. You can edit an object with
grips by selecting a grip and using the shortcut menu.
(GRIPBLOCK system variable)
662 | OPTIONS
Enable Grips Within Blocks Enable Grips Within Blocks
off (GRIPBLOCK = 0) on (GRIPBLOCK = 1)
Enable Grip Tips Displays grip-specific tips when the cursor hovers over
a grip on a custom object that supports grip tips. This
option has no effect on standard AutoCAD objects.
(GRIPTIPS system variable)
Maximum Suppresses the display of grips when the initial
Number of selection set includes more than the specified number
Selected Objects of objects. The valid range is 1 to 32,767. The default
That Display setting is 20. (GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable)
Grips
Profiles Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls the use of profiles. A profile is a configuration you define.
Available Profiles Displays a list of the available profiles. To set the current
profile, select a profile and choose Set Current.
OPTIONS | 663
Set Current Makes the selected profile the current profile.
Add to List Displays the Add Profile dialog box (see page 669) to
save the selected profile under a different name.
Rename Displays the Change Profile dialog box (see page 670)
for changing the name and description of the selected
profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profile
but keep its current settings.
Delete Deletes the selected profile (unless it is the current
profile).
Export Exports a profile as a file with an .arg extension so the
file can be shared with other users. You can import the
file on the same computer or a different computer.
Import Imports a profile (a file with an .arg extension) created
by using the Export option.
Reset Resets the values in the selected profile to the system
default settings.
Alternate Font Dialog Box

Specifies the location of the font file to use if AutoCAD cannot locate the
original font and an alternate font is not specified in the font mapping file.
You can also set the location of Alternate Font File by using the FONTALT
system variable.
If you do not specify an alternate font through the Options dialog box or the
FONTALT system variable, when you open a drawing containing fonts that
AutoCAD cannot locate, a similar dialog box displays from which you specify
a font to use for each missing font.
664 | OPTIONS
Font Name Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType
fonts and all AutoCAD SHX fonts in the AutoCAD
Fonts folder. When you select a name from the list,
AutoCAD reads the file for the specified font.
Font Style Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold,
or regular. If the missing font is a Big Font, this option
changes to Big Font and lists all available Asian-
language Big Font files.
Color Options Dialog Box

Sets the display color of AutoCAD window elements.
Model Tab
Displays the current settings for AutoCAD window elements in model space.
To change the color of a Model tab window element, click the specific ele-
ment in the Model Tab area or select it from the Window Element list, and
then select a color from the Color list. The window title bar and menu bar
colors are controlled by the Windows system settings.
Layout Tabs
Displays the current settings for AutoCAD window elements in layouts. To
change the color of a layout tab window element, click the specific element
in the Layout Tabs area or select it from the Window Element list, and then
select a color from the Color list. The window title bar and menu bar colors
are controlled by the Windows system settings.
OPTIONS | 665
Window Element
Lists the AutoCAD window elements.
Model Tab Specifies the AutoCAD window color in model space.
Background
Model Tab Specifies the AutoCAD crosshairs color in model space.
Pointer
Layout Tabs Specifies the AutoCAD window color in all layouts. This
Background option is dependent on the Display Paper Background
(Paper) option on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
The paper background is a representation of the
specified paper size in a layout. If Display Paper
Background is selected, the window color surrounding
the paper background is displayed as gray. If Display
Paper Background is cleared, the entire AutoCAD
window assumes the Layout Tabs Background (Paper)
color setting.
Layout Tabs Specifies the AutoCAD crosshairs color in a layout. The
Pointer default setting is the Windows standard window text
color.
AutoTracking Specifies the color for AutoCAD AutoTracking vectors.
Vector Color Tracking vectors are construction lines that enable you
to draw objects at specific angles or in specific
relationships to other objects. The default setting is
White.
Command Line Specifies the background color of the AutoCAD
Background command line window. The default color setting is the
Windows standard window color.
Command Line Specifies the text color of the AutoCAD command line
Text window. The default setting is the Windows standard
window text color.
Color
Lists the available color settings to apply to the list of AutoCAD window
elements. You can choose one of the colors in the color list or choose Select
Color to open the Select Color dialog box. You can use the Select Color dialog
box to define the color of window elements by selecting from the AutoCAD
Color Index (ACI) colors, True Color colors, and Color Book colors.
If you select a new color for a window element, the new setting is displayed
in the Model Tab or Layout Tabs preview image.
666 | OPTIONS
Default All
Sets all AutoCAD window elements back to the default color settings.
Default One Element

Sets the selected AutoCAD window element back to the default color setting.
Command Line Window Font Dialog Box

Sets the font displayed in the AutoCAD command window. The AutoCAD
screen menu font is controlled by the Windows system font settings. (If you
use the AutoCAD screen menu, you should set the Windows system font
setting to a font and font size that fits the screen menu size restrictions.)
Font Lists the system fonts available for selection.

Font Style Lists the styles available to apply to the current font.
Size Lists the font sizes available for the current font.
Right-Click Customization Dialog Box

Controls whether right-clicking in the drawing area displays a shortcut menu
or has the same effect as pressing ENTER . If you are accustomed to using the
right-click method for ENTER while a command is active, you might prefer to
disable Command shortcut menus from this dialog box. You can also control
shortcut menus by using the SHORTCUTMENU system variable.
OPTIONS | 667
Turn on Time-Sensitive Right-Click
Controls right-click behavior. A quick click is the same as pressing ENTER . A
longer click displays a shortcut menu. You can set the duration of the longer
click in milliseconds.
Default Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when no
objects are selected and no commands are in progress.
Repeat Last Disables the Default shortcut menu. As a result, right-
Command clicking in the drawing area when no objects are
selected and no commands are in progress is the same
as pressing ENTER , which repeats the last issued
command.
Shortcut Menu Enables the Default shortcut menu.
Edit Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when
one or more objects are selected and no commands are in progress.
668 | OPTIONS
Repeat Last Disables the Edit shortcut menu. As a result, right-
Command clicking in the drawing area when one or more objects
are selected and no commands are in progress is the
same as pressing ENTER , which repeats the last issued
command.
Shortcut Menu Enables the Edit shortcut menu.
Command Mode
Determines what happens when you right-click in the drawing area when a
command is in progress.
ENTER Disables the Command shortcut menu. As a result,
right-clicking in the drawing area when a command is
in progress is the same as pressing ENTER .
Shortcut Menu: Enables the Command shortcut menu.
Always Enabled
Shortcut Menu: Enables the Command shortcut menu only when
Enabled When options are currently available on the command line.
Command On the command line, options are enclosed in square
Options Are brackets. If no options are available, right-clicking is the
Present same as pressing ENTER .
Add Profile Dialog Box

Creates a new profile from an existing one. The new profile is displayed in
the Profile list box on the Profiles tab in the Options dialog box.
Profile Name Enter a name to save the profile as. The new profile is
created and added to the profile list.
Description Enter a description for the new profile. The description
is saved with the new profile.
OPTIONS | 669
Change Profile Dialog Box
Renames an existing profile. The new profile name is displayed in the Profile
list box on the Profiles tab in the Options dialog box.
Profile Name Enter a new name for the existing profile. The new
profile name replaces the previous profile name in the
profile list.
Description Enter a description. The description is saved under the
new profile name.
See Also
See “Customize the Drawing Environment” in the User’s Guide.
ORTHO
Constrains cursor movement
In Ortho mode, cursor movement is constrained to the horizontal or vertical
directions (relative to the UCS) and with the current grid rotation angle.
Status bar: Ortho
Command line: ortho (or 'ortho for transparent use)
In the illustration, a line is drawn using Ortho mode. Point 1 is the first point
specified, and point 2 is the position of the cursor when the second point is
specified.
670 | ORTHO
2 2
1 1
Ortho off Ortho on
AutoCAD uses Ortho mode when you specify an angle or distance by means
of two points using a pointing device. In Ortho mode, cursor movement is
constrained to the horizontal or vertical directions (relative to the UCS) and
with the current grid rotation angle. AutoCAD ignores Ortho mode in
perspective views.
AutoCAD defines horizontal as being parallel to the X axis of the UCS and
vertical as being parallel to the Y axis. ORTHO adjusts to the current snap
rotation regardless of the UCS.
See Also
See “Use Orthogonal Locking (Ortho Mode)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands SNAP aligns points entered by a pointing device. UCS
manages user coordinate systems.
System Variables ORTHOMODE stores the Ortho setting.
OSNAP
Sets running object snap modes
An object snap mode specifies a snap point at an exact location on an object.
OSNAP specifies running object snap modes, which remain active until you
turn them off.
For information about how to specify an object snap mode for a single point,
see “Use Object Snaps” in the User’s Guide.
OSNAP | 671
Running object snap modes can be toggled on and off with the Osnap button
on the status bar. You can use the TAB key to cycle through available object
snaps. Running object snap settings are stored with the drawing.
Object Snap toolbar:

Tools Menu: Drafting Settings
Shortcut menu: Press SHIFT while right-clicking in the drawing area and
choose Osnap Settings.
Command line: osnap (or 'osnap for transparent use)
The Object Snaps tab of the Drafting Settings dialog box (see page 318) is
displayed.
If you enter -osnap at the Command prompt, OSNAP presents options on the
command line.
Current osnap modes: current
Enter list of object snap modes: Enter names of object snap modes separated with
commas, or enter none or off
Object Snap Modes

Specify one or more object snap modes by entering the first three characters
of the name. If you enter more than one name, separate the names with
commas.
ENDpoint CENter TANgent
MIDpoint NODe NEArest
INTersection QUAdrant PARallel
EXTension INSertion
APParent Intersection PERpendicular
For a description of each of these object snap modes, see the Object Snaps tab
of the Drafting Settings dialog box (see page 318).
The -OSNAP command also presents the following additional options:
QUIck Snaps to the first snap point found. Quick must be used
in conjunction with other object snap modes.
NONe Turns off object snap modes.
672 | OSNAP
See Also
See “Use Object Snaps” in the User’s Guide.
Commands APERTURE controls the size of the aperture box.
System Variables APBOX turns the AutoSnap aperture box on or off.

AUTOSNAP controls the display of the AutoSnap marker
and Snaptip and turns the AutoSnap magnet on or off.
OSMODE uses bitcodes to set object snap modes.
Note The index for the Command Reference is at the end of Volume II.
OSNAP | 673
674
PAGESETUP
Specifies the plotting device, paper size, and settings for each new layout
File menu: Page Setup
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and choose Page
Setup.
Command line: pagesetup
The Page Setup dialog box is displayed.
Page Setup Dialog Box

Specifies page layout and plotting device settings. The Page Setup dialog box
is displayed the first time you choose a layout tab in a drawing. The layout
settings you specify are stored with the layout.
Layout Name Displays the current layout name.
Page Setup Lists any named and saved page setups in the drawing.
Name You can choose to base the current page setup on a
named page setup or you can add a new named page
setup by choosing Add. Choosing Add displays the User
Defined Page Setups dialog box (see page 682).
Display When Displays the Page Setup dialog box when a new layout
Creating a New tab is selected. To reset this function, select Show Page
Layout Setup Dialog for New Layouts on the Display tab of the
Options dialog box.
Plot Plots the current Model tab or layout tab using the
settings you have specified.
PAGESETUP | 675
Plot Device Tab (Page Setup Dialog Box)
Specifies a currently configured plotting device to send a layout to for
plotting.
Plotter Configuration
Displays the currently configured plotting device, the port to which it’s con-
nected or its network location, and any additional user-defined comments
about the plotter. A list of the available system printers and PC3 file names is
displayed in the Name list. An icon in front of the device name identifies it
as a PC3 file or a system printer.
If a selected plotter doesn’t support the layout’s selected paper size, a warning
is displayed and the plotter’s default paper size is automatically selected. You
can set paper size on the Layout Settings tab.
676 | PAGESETUP
Properties Displays the Plotter Configuration Editor (PC3 editor)
where you can view or modify the current plotter
configuration, ports, device, and media settings.
If you make changes to the PC3 file using the Plotter
Configuration Editor, the Changes to a Printer
Configuration File dialog box (see page 682) is
displayed.
Hints Displays information about the specific plotting device.
Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments)
Sets the plot style table, edits the plot style table, or creates a new plot style
table.
Name Displays a list of the current plot style tables available
to assign to the current Model or layout tab. To modify
the definition of a plot style contained in a plot style
table, choose Edit.
Edit Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, where you can view
or modify plot styles for the currently assigned plot
style table.
New Displays the Add Plot Style Table wizard, which you can
use to create a new plot style table. The wizard that is
displayed is determined by whether the current
drawing is in color-dependent or named mode.
Display Plot Controls whether the properties of plot styles assigned
Styles to objects are displayed and plotted in the selected
layout.
Options Displays the Plotting tab in the Options dialog box,
where you can view or modify the current layout and
plot settings (see page 633).
PAGESETUP | 677
Layout Settings Tab (Page Setup Dialog Box)
Specifies layout settings such as plot area, plot scale, plot offset, drawing
orientation, and paper size.
Paper Size and Paper Units

Displays standard paper sizes available for the selected plotting device. Print-
able Area displays the actual area on the paper that is used for the plot based
on the currently configured paper size.
Actual paper sizes are indicated by the width (X axis direction) and height
(Y axis direction). If no plotter is selected, the full standard paper size list is
displayed and available for selection. A default paper size is set for the plot-
ting device when you create a PC3 file with the Add-a-Plotter wizard. The
paper size is saved with a layout and overrides the PC3 file settings.
Drawing Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support
landscape or portrait orientation. You can change the drawing orientation to
achieve a 0-, 90-, 180-, or 270-degree plot rotation by selecting Portrait, Land-
scape, or Plot Upside-Down. The paper icon represents the media orientation
of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of the
drawing on the page.
678 | PAGESETUP
Portrait Orients and plots the drawing so that the short edge of
the paper represents the top of the page.
Landscape Orients and plots the drawing so that the long edge of
Plot Upside- Orients and plots the drawing upside-down.
Down
Note The orientation of plots is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system

variable.
Plot Area
Specifies the area of the drawing to be plotted.
Layout/Limits When plotting a layout, plots everything within the
margins of the specified paper size, with the origin
calculated from 0,0 in the layout.
When plotting from the Model tab, plots the entire
drawing area defined by the drawing limits. If the
current viewport does not display a plan view, this
option has the same effect as the Extents option.
Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing
that contains objects. All geometry in the current space
is plotted. AutoCAD® may regenerate the drawing to
recalculate the extents before plotting.
Display Plots the view in the current viewport in the Model tab
or in the current paper space view in a layout tab.
View Plots a view saved previously with the VIEW command.
You can select a named view from the list provided. If
there are no saved views in the drawing, this option is
unavailable.
Window Plots the portion of the drawing you specify by a
windowed area. Choose the Window button to use the
pointing device to specify the two corners of the area to
be plotted, or enter coordinate values.
Command: Specify first corner: Specify a point
Specify other corner: Specify a point
PAGESETUP | 679
Plot Scale
Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units. The default scale
setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default setting is Scaled to Fit when
plotting the Model tab. When you select a standard scale, the scale is dis-
played in Custom.
Note If the Layout option is specified in Plot Area, AutoCAD plots the actual
size of the layout and ignores the setting specified in Scale.
Scale Defines the exact scale for the plot. The four most
recently used standard scales are displayed at the top of
the list.
Custom Defines a user-defined scale. You can create a custom
scale by entering the number of inches (or millimeters)
equal to the number of drawing units.
Scale Lineweights Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale.
Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of plotted
objects and are plotted with the linewidth size
regardless of the plot scale.
Shaded Viewport Options
Specifies how shaded and rendered viewports are plotted and determines
their resolution levels and dots per inch (dpi).
Shade Plot Specifies how views are plotted. To specify this setting
for a viewport on a layout tab, select the viewport and
then, on the Tools menu, click Properties.
From the Model tab, you can choose from the following
options:
■ As Displayed: Plots objects the way they are displayed

on the screen.
■ Wireframe: Plots objects in wireframe regardless of
the way they are displayed on the screen.
■ Hidden: Plots objects with hidden lines removed
regardless of the way they are displayed on the
screen.
■ Rendered: Plots objects as rendered regardless of the
way they are displayed on the screen.
680 | PAGESETUP
Quality Specifies the resolution at which shaded and rendered
viewports are plotted.
You can choose from the following options:
■ Draft: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to

plot as wireframe.
■ Preview: Sets rendered and shaded model space views
to plot at ¼ the current device resolution, to a
maximum of 150 dpi.
■ Normal: Sets rendered and shaded model space views
to plot at ½ the current device resolution, to a
maximum of 300 dpi.
■ Presentation: Sets rendered and shaded model space
views to plot at the current device resolution, to a
maximum of 600 dpi.
■ Maximum: Sets rendered and shaded model space
views to plot at the current device resolution with
no maximum.
■ Custom: Sets rendered and shaded model space views
to plot at the resolution setting you specify in the
DPI box, up to the current device resolution.
DPI Specifies the dots per inch for shaded and rendered
views, up to the maximum resolution of the current
plotting device. This option is available if you choose
Custom in the Quality box.
Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plotting area from the lower-left corner of the paper.
In a layout, the lower-left corner of a specified plot area is positioned at the
lower-left margin of the paper. You can offset the origin by entering a positive
or negative value. The plotter values are in inches or millimeters on the
paper.
Center the Plot Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to
center the plot on the paper.
X Specifies the plot origin in the X direction.
Y Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction.
Plot Options
Specifies options for lineweights, plot styles, shaded plots, and the order in
which objects are plotted.
PAGESETUP | 681
Plot Object Specifies whether lineweights assigned to objects and
Lineweights layers are plotted.
Plot with Plot Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and
Styles layers are plotted. When you select this option, Plot
with Lineweights is automatically selected also.
Plot Paperspace Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry
Last is usually plotted before model space geometry.
Hide Paperspace Specifies whether the Hide operation applies to objects
Objects in the paper space viewport. This option is only
available from a layout tab. The effect of this setting is
reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box

Specifies the name of the user-defined page setup you are saving. All settings
you apply to the current layout are saved to the user-defined page setup file.
New Page Setup Names the new user-defined page setup you are saving.
Name
Page Setups Lists the user-defined page setups already saved. You
can select a named page setup from the list to apply to
the current layout tab.
Rename Renames the selected user-defined page setup.
Delete Deletes the selected user-defined page setup.
Import Imports a user-defined page setup from another
drawing and applies it to the current layout.
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog

Box (Page Setup)
Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration
(PC3) file. You can cancel your changes, choose OK to overwrite the PC3 file,
or specify a new file name for the modified PC3 file.
Save Changes to Specifies the path of the PC3 file that you have
the Following File changed. To preserve the original PC3 file, specify a new
file name.
682 | PAGESETUP
PAN
Moves the view in the current viewport
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Pan ➤ Realtime
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and
choose Pan.
Command line: pan (or 'pan for transparent use)
AutoCAD displays the following prompt; you can pan the drawing display in
real time.
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display a shortcut menu.
If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN displays alternative prompts
on the command line, and you can specify a displacement to pan the draw-
ing display.
Panning in Real Time

The cursor changes to a hand cursor. By holding down the pick button on
the pointing device, you lock the cursor to its current location relative to the
hand cursor viewport coordinate system. The drawing display is moved in the same direc-
tion as the cursor.
When you reach a logical extent (edge of the drawing space), a bar is dis-
played on the hand cursor on that edge. Depending on whether the logical
extent is at the top, bottom, or side of the drawing, the bar is either horizon-
tal (top or bottom) or vertical (left or right side).
top right bottom left

extent extent extent extent
When you release the pick button, panning stops. You can release the pick
button, move the cursor to another location in the drawing, and then press
the pick button again to pan the display from that location.
To stop panning at any time, press ENTER or ESC .
PAN | 683
PAN Command Line
If you enter -pan at the Command prompt, PAN presents alternative prompts
This version of PAN works in two ways. You can specify a single point, indi-
cating the relative displacement of the drawing with respect to the current
location, or (more commonly) you can specify two points, in which case
AutoCAD computes the displacement from the first point to the second
point.
You cannot use PAN transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW, or while another
2 ZOOM, PAN, or VIEW command is in progress.
1 Specify base point or displacement: Specify a point (1)
The point you specify indicates either the amount to move the drawing or
the location in the drawing to be moved, depending on how you respond to
before PAN
the next prompt.
Specify second point: Press ENTER or specify a point (2)
If you press ENTER , AutoCAD moves the drawing by the amount you speci-
fied in the Specify Base Point or Displacement prompt. For example, if you
specify 2,2 at the first prompt and press ENTER at the second prompt,
AutoCAD moves the drawing 2 units in the X direction and 2 units in the Y
after PAN direction. If you specify a point at the Specify Second Point prompt,
AutoCAD moves the location of the first point to the location of the second
point.
Pan Shortcut Menu

When the PAN command is active, you can exit PAN or switch to ZOOM or
3DORBIT using the options on the Pan shortcut menu.
To access the Pan shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while PAN is
active.
Exit Cancels PAN or ZOOM.
Pan Switches to PAN.
Zoom Switches to ZOOM in real time.
3D Orbit Switches to 3DORBIT.
Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular
window.
684 | PAN
Zoom Original Restores the original view.
Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents.
See Also
See “Pan a View” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DVIEW creates and restores views. VIEW saves and

restores named views. VIEWRES controls Fast Zoom
mode and sets the resolution for circle, arc, and linetype
generation in the current viewport. VPOINT sets the
viewing direction for a 3D visualization of the current
drawing. ZOOM increases or decreases the apparent size
of objects in the current viewport.
PARTIALOAD
File Menu: Partial Load
Command line: partiaload
AutoCAD displays the Partial Load dialog box. PARTIALOAD can only be used
in a partially open drawing. To partially open a drawing, use OPEN and
choose Partial Open in the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Any information that is loaded into the file using PARTIALOAD
cannot be unloaded, not even with UNDO.
If you enter -partiaload at the Command prompt, PARTIALOAD displays
Partial Load Dialog Box

Displays the views and layers available for specifying additional geometry to
load into a partially open drawing. You can select and load geometry from a
view or a selected area and from layers. You cannot unload any information
that is currently loaded in the drawing. If the drawing contains attached xrefs
that were not loaded at the time that the drawing was partially opened, you
can reload the xrefs by using the Xref Manager. See XREF.
PARTIALOAD | 685
View Geometry to Load
Displays the selected view and available views in the drawing. Views
available for loading include only views defined in model space. You
can load paper space geometry by loading the layer on which the paper
space geometry is drawn.
View Name Displays the currently selected view. Geometry that is
common to both the selected view and the layers is
loaded into the drawing.
View List Displays all the model space views available in the
selected drawing file. When a view is selected,
AutoCAD loads only the geometry in the selected view.
The default view is Extents. You can only select to load
geometry from one view. Geometry that is common to
both the selected view and the layers is loaded into the
drawing. Any information currently loaded into the file
cannot be unloaded.
Pick Window Prompts you to use the pointing device to specify an
area using window selection. The selected area becomes
the view to load and is displayed in the View Geometry
to Load list as New View.
686 | PARTIALOAD
Layer Geometry to Load
Displays all the layers available in the selected drawing file. The geometry on
selected layers is loaded into the drawing, including both model space and
paper space geometry. No layers are selected to load by default. You can load
geometry from multiple layers. Geometry that is common to both the
selected view and the layers is loaded into the drawing. Any information that
is currently loaded into the file cannot be unloaded.
Layer Name Displays the layer names in the selected drawing.
Load Geometry Specifies whether geometry from a layer is loaded into
the drawing or not. If Load Geometry is selected, the
geometry from the layer is loaded into the drawing.
Any information that is currently loaded into the file
cannot be unloaded.
Load All Selects Load Geometry for all layers. You can also right-
click and choose Load All from the shortcut menu to
load geometry from all layers.
Clear All Specifies that no geometry be loaded into the drawing
(clears the Load Geometry option for all layers). It is
recommended that you load geometry from at least one
layer into the drawing. If you do not select any layers to
load, no geometry is loaded at all, including geometry
from the selected view. AutoCAD issues a warning if
you do not select any layers to load into the drawing.
You can also right-click and choose Clear All from the
shortcut menu to specify that no geometry is loaded
from any layer.
Index Status
Indicates whether the selected drawing file contains a spatial or layer index.
INDEXCTL controls whether layer and spatial indexes are saved with the
drawing file. A spatial index organizes objects based on their location in
space. A layer index is a list showing which objects are on which layers.
PARTIALOAD Command Line

When a drawing is partially open and you enter -partiaload at the Command
prompt, PARTIALOAD displays prompts on the command line.
Specify first corner or [View]: Specify a point or enter v
PARTIALOAD | 687
First Corner
Specifies the first corner of a user-defined view.
Geometry from the defined view is loaded into the partially open drawing.
Enter layers to load or [?] <none>: Enter a layer name, enter ?, or press ENTER
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from the selected layers into the current drawing, including
both model space and paper space geometry. To load geometry from multiple
layers into the drawing, use a comma between layer names. If no layer geom-
etry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer geometry into the drawing, includ-
ing geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes Does not load any external references into the drawing.
No Loads all external references into the drawing.
?—List Layers
Displays a list of layer names available in the current drawing. Enter one or
more layer names. If no layer geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer
geometry into the drawing, including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
View
Loads the geometry from the specified view into the current drawing.
Enter view to load or [?] <*Extents*>: Enter a view name, enter ?, or press ENTER
to load the Extents view
View to Load
Loads the geometry from the specified view into the partially open drawing.
688 | PARTIALOAD
Layers to Load Loads geometry from the layer or layers into the current
drawing. To load geometry from multiple layers into
the drawing, use a comma between layer names. If no
layer geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer
geometry into the drawing, including geometry
specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER
If you enter yes, AutoCAD does not load any external

references into the drawing. If you enter no, AutoCAD
loads all external references into the drawing.
?—List Layers Displays a list of layer names available in the current
drawing. Enter one or more layer names. If no layer
geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer
press ENTER

?—List Views
Displays a list of model space views available in the selected drawing. Enter
a view name.
Layers to Load Loads geometry from one or more layers into the
current drawing. To load geometry from multiple layers
into the drawing, use a comma between layer names. If
no layer geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer
press ENTER

PARTIALOAD | 689
?—List Layers AutoCAD displays a list of layer names available in the
current drawing. Enter one or more layer names. If no
layer geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer
press ENTER

See Also
See “Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load)” in the User’s Guide.
partially opened.
PARTIALOPEN partially opens a drawing file.
PARTIALOPEN
When working with a large drawing file, you can choose to work with only
a portion of the drawing by loading geometry from a specific view or layer.
When a drawing is partially open, the specified geometry as well as the
named objects are loaded into the file. AutoCAD named objects include
blocks, dimension styles, layers, layouts, linetypes, text styles, UCSs, views,
and viewport configurations.
It is recommended that you partially open a drawing by using OPEN and
choosing Partial Open in the Select File dialog box to display the Partial Open
Command line: partialopen
When you are running a script and using PARTIALOPEN, FILEDIA can be set to
0 or 1. When FILEDIA is set to 0 and you enter partialopen or -partialopen at
the Command prompt, PARTIALOPEN displays prompts on the command
line.
Enter name of drawing to open: Enter a drawing name and press ENTER
690 | PARTIALOPEN
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Select File
dialog box (see page 621). In the Select File dialog box, select a file and choose
Partial Open to display the Partial Open dialog box (see page 629). If you
enter a file name at the prompt, AutoCAD displays prompts on the command
line.
Enter view to load or [?] <*Extents*>: Enter a view name, enter ?, or press ENTER
to load the Extents view
View to Load
Opens the drawing with the geometry from the selected view loaded.
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from one or more layers into the current drawing. To load
geometry from multiple layers, use a comma between layer names. If no layer
geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer geometry into the drawing,
including geometry specified to load from a view.
Unload all Xrefs on open [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
?—List Layers
Displays a list of layers available in the selected drawing. Enter one or more
layer names. To enter multiple layers, separate the layer names with a
comma.
PARTIALOPEN | 691
?—List Views
Displays a list of model space views available in the selected drawing. Enter
a view name.
Layers to Load
Loads geometry from one or more layers into the current drawing. To load
geometry from multiple layers, use a comma between layer names. If no layer
geometry is specified, AutoCAD loads no layer geometry into the drawing,
including geometry specified to load from a view.
?—List Layers
Displays a list of layers available in the selected drawing. Enter one or more
layer names. To enter multiple layers, separate the layer names with a
comma.
See Also
See “Open Part of a Large Drawing (Partial Load)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands OPEN opens an existing drawing file. PARTIALOAD loads
additional information into a drawing file if the current
drawing is partially open.
partially opened.
692 | PARTIALOPEN
PASTEBLOCK
Pastes copied objects as a block
Edit menu: Paste as Block
and choose Paste as Block.
Command line: pasteblock
Specify insertion point: Specify a point
AutoCAD pastes the objects copied to the Clipboard into the drawing as a
block at the specified insertion point.
PASTECLIP
Inserts data from the Clipboard
You can paste AutoCAD objects, text, and files in various formats, such as
metafile, bitmap, and multimedia, into a drawing.
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Paste
and choose Paste.
Command line: pasteclip
If the Clipboard contains a graphic object, AutoCAD prompts you to specify

an insertion point. If the Clipboard contains an OLE object, the OLE
Properties dialog box (see page 618) is displayed when the object is pasted.
If the Clipboard contains ASCII text, AutoCAD inserts the text in the upper-
left corner of the drawing area using the MTEXT defaults. ASCII text becomes
a multiline text (mtext) object.
All other objects, except AutoCAD objects, are inserted as embedded or
linked objects. You can edit these embedded or linked objects by double-
clicking them in the AutoCAD drawing to open the application in which
they were created.
Note You can also use CTRL + V to run PASTECLIP. If the cursor is in the draw-
ing area, PASTECLIP behaves as described. If the cursor is on the command line,
text from the Clipboard is pasted at the current prompt.
PASTEBLOCK | 693
See Also
See “Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste” in the User’s Guide.
Commands INSERT inserts a block by using a dialog box. -INSERT
inserts a block by using the command line. MTEXT
creates multiline paragraphs. PASTESPEC inserts data
from the Clipboard and controls the format of the
pasted data.
System Variables WMFBKGND controls whether the background for the
Windows metafile format of objects placed on the Clip-
board and pasted into other applications is transparent.
PASTEORIG
Pastes a copied object in a new drawing using the coordinates from the original drawing
Edit menu: Paste to Original Coordinates
and choose Paste to Original Coordinates.
Command line: pasteorig
AutoCAD pastes the object copied to the Clipboard into the drawing at the
same coordinates used in the original drawing.
PASTEORIG functions only when the Clipboard contains AutoCAD data from
a drawing other than the current drawing.
PASTESPEC
Inserts data from the Clipboard and controls the format of the data
AutoCAD supports the Windows® object linking and embedding (OLE)
feature. When an object is inserted into an AutoCAD drawing from an
application that supports OLE, the object can maintain a connection to its
source file.
PASTESPEC inserts a linked or embedded object from the Clipboard into an
AutoCAD drawing.
Edit menu: Paste Special
Command line: pastespec
The Paste Special dialog box is displayed.
694 | PASTEORIG
Paste Special Dialog Box
Sets file formats and linking options for pasted files.
Source Displays the name of the document that contains the

information you copied. It may also show the specific
section of the document you copied.
Paste Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current
drawing as an embedded object.
Paste Link Pastes the contents of the Clipboard into the current
drawing. If the source application supports an OLE link,
AutoCAD creates a link to the original file.
As Displays applicable formats in which you can paste the
contents of the Clipboard into the current drawing.
If you select AutoCAD Entities, AutoCAD converts the
metafile graphics in the Clipboard to AutoCAD objects.
If the metafile graphics are not converted, the metafile
is displayed as an OLE object.
Display as Icon Inserts a picture of the application icon instead of the
data. To view or edit the data, double-click the icon.
See Also
See “Use Windows Cut, Copy, and Paste” in the User’s Guide.
Commands COPYCLIP copies objects to the Clipboard. COPYLINK
copies the current view to the Clipboard for linking to
other OLE applications. CUTCLIP copies selected objects
to the Clipboard and erases the objects from the draw-
ing. PASTECLIP inserts data from the Clipboard into a
drawing.
PASTESPEC | 695
PCINWIZARD
Displays a wizard to import PCP and PC2 configuration file plot settings into the Model tab
or current layout
Tools menu: Wizards ➤ Import Plot Settings
Command line: pcinwizard
PCINWIZARD displays the Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard. Informa-
tion that can be imported from PCP or PC2 files includes plot area, rotation,
plot offset, plot optimization, plot to file, paper size, plot scale, and pen
mapping.
The wizard prompts you for the name of the PCP or PC2 configuration file
from which you want to import settings. You can view and modify the plot
settings prior to importing them. The imported settings can be applied to the
current Model tab or layout tab.
PEDIT
Edits polylines and three-dimensional polygon meshes
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Polyline
Shortcut menu: Select a polyline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Polyline Edit.
Command line: pedit
Select polyline or [Multiple]: Use an object selection method or enter m
Multiple Enables selection for more than one object.

The remaining prompts depend on whether you have selected a 2D polyline
or, 3D polyline, or 3D polygon mesh.
If the selected object is a line or an arc, AutoCAD prompts:
Object selected is not a polyline.
Do you want it to turn into one? <Y>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
If you enter y, the object is converted into a single-segment 2D polyline that

you can edit. You can use this operation to join lines and arcs into a polyline.
When the PEDITACCEPT system variable is set to 1, this prompt is suppressed,
and the selected object is automatically converted to a polyline.
696 | PCINWIZARD
2D Polyline Selection
If you select a 2D polyline, AutoCAD prompts:
Enter an option [Close/Join/Width/Edit vertex/Fit/Spline/Decurve/Ltype gen/
Undo]: Enter an option or press ENTER to end the command
If the polyline you select is a closed polyline, Open replaces the Close option
in the prompt. You can edit a 2D polyline if its normal is parallel to and in
the same direction as the Z axis of the current UCS.
Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment
with the first. AutoCAD considers the polyline open unless you close it using
the Close option.
before Close
Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. AutoCAD considers the
after Close polyline closed unless you open it using the Open option.
Join
Adds lines, arcs, or polylines to the end of an open polyline and removes the
curve fitting from a curve-fit polyline. For objects to join the polyline, their
endpoints must touch unless you use the Multiple option at the first PEDIT
prompt. In this case, you can join polylines that do not touch if the fuzz
distance is set to a value large enough to include the endpoints.
If you previously selected multiple objects using the Multiple option,

Enter fuzz distance or [Jointype]<0.0000>: Enter a distance or j
Jointype
Sets the method of joining selected polylines.
Enter a vertex editing option
Enter join type [Extend/Add/Both}<Extend>: Enter e, a, or b
Extend Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming

the segments to the nearest endpoints.
Add Joins the selected polylines by adding a straight
segment between the nearest endpoints.
PEDIT | 697
Both Joins the selected polylines by extending or trimming if
possible. Otherwise joins the selected polylines by
adding a straight segment between the nearest
endpoints.
selected open polyline other objects selected polyline and objects joined
Width
Specifies a new uniform width for the entire polyline.
Specify new width for all segments:
You can use the Width option of the Edit Vertex option (see page 701) to
change the starting and ending widths of a segment.
varying width uniform width
Edit Vertex
Marks the first vertex of the polyline by drawing an X on the screen. If you
have specified a tangent direction for this vertex, an arrow is also drawn in
that direction. AutoCAD prompts:
[Next/Previous/Break/Insert/Move/Regen/Straighten/Tangent/Width/eXit]
<current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Pressing ENTER accepts the current default, which is either Next or Previous.
beginning vertex next vertex back to previous vertex
Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around
from the end to the start of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.
Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap
around from the start to the end of the polyline even if the polyline is closed.
698 | PEDIT
saved marked Break
vertex Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Go/eXit] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
next marked
If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the result is one
vertex truncated polyline. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline,
or if just one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break.
Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker
does not wrap around from the end to the start of the
polyline, even if the polyline is closed.
segment deleted Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker
does not wrap around from the start to the end of the
Go Deletes any segments and vertices between the two
vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode.

Insert
Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex.
Specify location for new vertex: Specify a point (1)
marked vertex
before Insert after Insert
Move
Moves the marked vertex.
Specify new location for marked vertex: Specify a point (1)
marked vertex
1
before Move after Move
PEDIT | 699
Regen
Regenerates the polyline.
before Regen after Regen
Straighten
Saves the location of the marked vertex while you move the X marker to any
other vertex.
If you want to remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments
of a polyline and then extend the straight segments until they intersect, use
the FILLET command with a fillet radius of 0.
ENTER
before Straighten after Straighten
Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex.

Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex.
vertices you select, replaces them with single straight
line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If you
specify only one vertex by entering go without moving
the X marker, the segment following that vertex is
straightened if it is an arc.
Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
Tangent
Attaches a tangent direction to the marked vertex for use later in curve
fitting. AutoCAD prompts:
Specify direction of vertex tangent: Specify a point or enter an angle
700 | PEDIT
Width
Changes the starting and ending widths for the segment that immediately
follows the marked vertex.
Specify starting width for next segment <current>: Specify a point, enter a value,
or press ENTER
Specify ending width for next segment <starting width>: Specify a point, enter a
value, or press ENTER
You must regenerate the polyline to display the new width.
marked vertex segment width changed
Exit
Exits Edit Vertex mode.
Fit
Creates an arc-fit polyline, a smooth curve consisting of arcs joining each
pair of vertices. The curve passes through all vertices of the polyline and uses
any tangent direction you specify.
original Fit curve
Spline
Uses the vertices of the selected polyline as the control points, or frame, of a
curve approximating a B-spline. This curve, called a spline-fit polyline, passes
through the first and last control points unless the original polyline was
closed. The curve is pulled toward the other points but does not necessarily
before Spline pass through them. The more control points you specify in a particular part
of the frame, the more pull they exert on the curve. AutoCAD can generate
quadratic and cubic spline-fit polylines.
Spline-fit polylines are very different from the curves produced by the Fit
after Spline option. Fit constructs pairs of arcs that pass through every control point.
Both of these curves are different from true B-splines produced with the
SPLINE command.
PEDIT | 701
If the original polyline included arc segments, they are straightened when
the spline's frame is formed. If the frame has width, the resulting spline
tapers smoothly from the width of the first vertex to the width of the last
vertex. All intermediate width information is ignored. Once spline-fit, the
frame, if displayed, is shown with zero width and CONTINUOUS linetype.
Tangent specifications on control point vertices have no effect on spline-
fitting.
When a spline-fit curve is fit to a polyline, the spline-fit curve's frame is
stored so that it can be recalled by a subsequent decurving. You can turn a
spline-fit curve back into its frame polyline by using the PEDIT Decurve
option. This option works on fit curves in the same manner as it does on
splines.
Spline frames are not usually displayed on the screen. If you want to see
them, set the SPLFRAME system variable to 1. Next time the drawing is regen-
erated, AutoCAD draws both the frame and the spline curve.
SPLFRAME set to 0 SPLFRAME set to 1
Most editing commands act the same when applied to spline-fit polylines or
fit curves.
■ MOVE, ERASE, COPY, MIRROR, ROTATE, and SCALE operate on both the
spline curve and its frame, whether the frame is visible or not.
■ EXTEND changes the frame by adding a new vertex where the initial or
final line of the frame intersects the boundary geometry.
■ BREAK, TRIM, and EXPLODE delete the frame and generate a polyline with
only the fit spline, which is consistent with fit curves, where the curve fit-
ting is permanent.
■ OFFSET generates a polyline with only the fit spline, which is consistent
with its behavior with fit curves.
■ DIVIDE, MEASURE, the Object option of AREA, HATCH, FILLET, and
CHAMFER see only the fit spline, not the frame.
■ STRETCH refits the spline to the stretched frame after a spline is stretched.
The Join option of PEDIT decurves the spline and discards the spline informa-
tion of the original and any added polylines. Once the Join operation is
complete, you can fit a new spline to the resulting polyline.
702 | PEDIT
The Edit Vertex options of PEDIT have the following effect:
■ The Next and Previous options move the X marker only to points on the
frame of the spline, whether visible or not.
■ The Break option discards the spline.
■ The Insert, Move, Straighten, and Width options automatically refit the
spline.
■ The Tangent option has no effect on splines.
Object snap uses only the spline-fit curve itself, not the frame. If you want to
snap to the frame control points, use PEDIT to recall the polyline frame first.
The SPLINETYPE system variable controls the type of spline curve approxi-
mated. Setting SPLINETYPE to 5 approximates a quadratic B-spline. Setting
SPLINETYPE to 6 approximates a cubic B-spline.
quadratic B-Spline cubic B-Spline
You can examine or change the fineness or coarseness of the spline approxi-
mation with the SPLINESEGS system variable, or you can use AutoLISP. The
default value is 8. If you set the value higher, a greater number of line
segments are drawn and the approximation to the ideal spline becomes more
precise. The generated spline occupies more space in the drawing file and
takes longer to generate.
If you set SPLINESEGS to a negative value, AutoCAD generates segments using
the absolute value of the setting and then applies a fit-type curve to those
segments. Fit-type curves use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs
yields a smoother generated curve when few segments are specified, but the
curve can take longer to generate.
SPLINESEGS set to 1 SPLINESEGS set to 10
To change the number of segments used to fit an existing spline, change

SPLINESEGS and respline the curve. You do not have to decurve it first.
PEDIT | 703
Decurve
Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all
segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the poly-
line vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-fit
polyline with commands such as BREAK or TRIM, you cannot use the Decurve
option.
Ltype Gen
Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern through the vertices of the
polyline. When turned off, this option generates the linetype starting and
ending with a dash at each vertex. Ltype Gen does not apply to polylines
with tapered segments.
Enter polyline linetype generation option [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off,
or press ENTER
Ltype Gen set to Off Ltype Gen set to On
Undo
Reverses operations as far back as the beginning of the PEDIT session.
3D Polyline Selection
If you select a 3D polyline, AutoCAD prompts:
Enter an option [Close/Edit vertex/Spline curve/Decurve/Undo]: Enter an option
or press ENTER
If the polyline you select is closed, Open replaces the Close option in the
prompt.
Close
Creates the closing segment of the polyline, connecting the last segment
with the first. AutoCAD considers the polyline open unless you close it with
Close.
Open
Removes the closing segment of the polyline. AutoCAD considers the poly-
line closed unless you open it with Open.
704 | PEDIT
Edit Vertex
Performs various editing tasks on one vertex of the polyline and segments
that follow it.
Enter a vertex editing option
[Next/Previous/Break/Insert/Move/Regen/Straighten/eXit <current>: Enter an
Next
Moves the X marker to the next vertex. The marker does not wrap around
from the end to the start of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.
Previous
Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker does not wrap
around from the start to the end of the polyline, even if the polyline is closed.
Break
other vertex.
ENTER

Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker
vertices you specify and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
Exit Exits Break and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
If one of the specified vertices is at an end of the polyline, the polyline is
truncated. If both specified vertices are at endpoints of the polyline, or if just
one vertex is specified and it is at an endpoint, you cannot use Break mode.
Insert
Adds a new vertex to the polyline after the marked vertex.
Specify location for new vertex: Specify a point
PEDIT | 705
Move
Moves the marked vertex.
Specify new location for marked vertex: Specify a point
Regen
Regenerates the polyline.
Straighten
other vertex.
ENTER
Next Moves the X marker to the next vertex.

Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex.
vertices you select, replaces them with single straight
line segments, and returns to Edit Vertex mode. If you
specify only one vertex by entering go without moving
the X marker, the segment following that vertex is
made straight if it is an arc.
Exit Exits Straighten and returns to Edit Vertex mode.
To remove an arc segment that connects two straight segments of a polyline
and then to extend the straight segments until they intersect, use the FILLET
command with a fillet radius of 0.
Exit
Exits Edit Vertex mode.
Spline Curve
Fits a 3D B-spline curve to its control points. The SPLFRAME system variable
controls the accuracy and display of the control points for the 3D B-spline,
whose curves can be approximated only by line segments. AutoCAD ignores
negative values for spline segments.
706 | PEDIT
original 3D polyline 3D polyline after curve-fitting
Decurve
Removes extra vertices inserted by a fit or spline curve and straightens all
segments of the polyline. Retains tangent information assigned to the
polyline vertices for use in subsequent fit curve requests. If you edit a spline-
fit polyline with commands such as BREAK or TRIM, you cannot use the
Decurve option.
Undo
3D Polygon Mesh Selection

If you select a polygon mesh, AutoCAD prompts:
Enter an option [Edit vertex/Smooth surface/Desmooth/Mclose/Nclose/Undo]:
Enter an option or press ENTER to end the command
Mclose and Nclose are replaced by Mopen and Nopen if the polygon mesh is
currently closed in the M or N direction.
Edit Vertex
Edits individual vertices of a polygon mesh that can be seen as a rectangular
M × N array, where M and N are the dimensions specified in 3DMESH. The
SURFTAB1 and SURFTAB2 system variables store M and N values for RULESURF,
TABSURF, REVSURF, and EDGESURF.
Enter an option [Next/Previous/Left/Right/Up/Down/Move/REgen/eXit

PEDIT | 707
vertex to edit
N = right/left
M = up/down repositioned in 3D space

mesh, even if the mesh is closed.
Previous Moves the X marker to the previous vertex. The marker
does not wrap around from the start to the end of the
mesh, even if the mesh is closed.
Left Moves the X marker to the previous vertex in the N
direction. The marker does not wrap around from the
start to the end of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed.
Right Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the N
end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed.
Up Moves the X marker to the next vertex in the M
end to the start of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed.
Down Moves the X marker to the previous vertex in the M
start to the end of the mesh, even if the mesh is closed.
Move Repositions the vertex and moves the editing mark.
Specify new location for marked vertex: Specify a point
Regen Regenerates the polygon mesh.

Exit Exits Edit Vertex mode.
Smooth Surface
Fits a smooth surface. The SURFTYPE system variable controls the type of sur-
face this option fits. The types of surfaces include quadratic B-spline, cubic
B-spline, and Bezier.
708 | PEDIT
original polygon quadratic B-spline cubic B-spline Bezier
Desmooth
Restores the original control-point polygon mesh.
Mclose
Closes the M-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the M
direction.
Mopen
closed M direction Opens the M-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the M
direction.
Nclose
Closes the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is open in the N
direction.
Nopen
Opens the N-direction polylines if the polygon mesh is closed in the N
closed N direction
direction.
Undo
See Also
See “Modify or Join Polylines” in the User’s Guide.
Commands 3DPOLY creates three-dimensional polylines. 3DMESH
creates three-dimensional polygon meshes. CONVERT
converts 2D polylines and associative hatches created
in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier to an optimized for-
mat. PLINE creates two-dimensional polylines.
PEDIT | 709
System Variables PLINETYPE specifies whether AutoCAD uses optimized
2D polylines. SPLFRAME, if set to 1, displays the control
polygon for spline-fit polylines, the fit surface of a poly-
gon mesh, and the invisible edges of a 3D face or
polyface mesh. SPLINESEGS stores the number of line
segments to be generated for each spline patch.
SPLINETYPE controls the type of spline curve that
AutoCAD generates. SURFTYPE controls the type of sur-
face that the Edit Vertex option fits to a 3D polygon
mesh. SURFU controls the surface density in the M
direction. SURFV controls the surface density in the N
direction.
PFACE
Creates a three-dimensional polyface mesh vertex by vertex
A polyface mesh is similar to a 3D mesh. Each mesh is constructed vertex by
vertex, so you can create irregular surface shapes. You define a polyface mesh
by specifying each vertex and then associating those vertices with faces in
the mesh. You edit a polyface mesh as a unit.
PFACE is typically used by applications rather than by direct user input. To
create a single 3D face, use the 3DFACE command. To create a 3D mesh, use
3D, 3DMESH, REVSURF, RULESURF, EDGESURF, or TABSURF.
Command line: pface
Specify location for vertex 1: Specify a point

Specify location for vertex 2 or <define faces>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify location for vertex n or <define faces>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Vertex Location
You specify all vertices used in the mesh. The vertex numbers displayed in
the prompts are the numbers used to reference each vertex. AutoCAD repeats
the prompt until you press ENTER . Pressing ENTER on a blank line causes
AutoCAD to prompt for the vertices to be assigned to each face.
710 | PFACE
Define Faces
Enter a vertex number or [Color/Layer]: Enter a vertex number or enter an option
1
face 1 Vertex Number You define each face by entering vertex numbers for all
6 the vertices of that face. Pressing ENTER after the
2
prompt causes AutoCAD to prompt for the vertex
5
numbers of the next face. AutoCAD draws the mesh
3 4 after you have defined the last face and pressed ENTER
face 2 after the prompt.
To make an edge invisible, you can enter a negative
vertex number for the beginning vertex of the edge.
The SPLFRAME system variable controls the display of
invisible edges in polyface meshes. Setting SPLFRAME to
a nonzero value displays any phantom faces and all
invisible edges of polyface meshes, which you can edit
in the same manner as fully visible polyface meshes.
You can create polygons with any number of edges.
PFACE automatically breaks them into multiple face
objects with the appropriate invisible edges. Faces with
one or two vertices behave like point or line objects
without the special properties of Point Display modes
or linetypes. You can use them to embed wireframe
images within a mesh. Use Endpoint object snap to
snap to a face composed of one or two vertices. All
object snap modes that apply to line objects work with
visible edges of polyface meshes. You cannot use PEDIT
to edit polyface meshes.
Color Faces created with PFACE adopt the current layer and
color. Unlike polyline vertices, polyface mesh faces can
be created with layer and color properties different
from their parent object.
New color [Truecolor/COlorbook] <BYLAYER>: Enter a
standard color name or a color number from 1 through 255,
enter t, enter co, or press ENTER
You can enter a color from the AutoCAD Color Index (a

color name or number), a true color, or a color from a
color book.
PFACE | 711
Layer Faces created with PFACE adopt the current layer and
color. Unlike polyline vertices, polyface mesh faces can
be created with layer and color properties different
from their parent object. Layer visibility behaves
normally on faces of a polyface mesh. However, if you
create a polyface mesh on a frozen layer, AutoCAD does
not generate any of its faces, including those on
nonfrozen layers.
Enter a layer name <0>: Enter a name or press ENTER
See Also
See “Create Surfaces” in the User’s Guide.
Commands 3D creates three-dimensional wireframe objects.
3DFACE creates a three-dimensional face. 3DMESH
creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh. EDGESURF
creates a 3D polygon mesh approximating a Coons sur-
face patch. REVSURF creates a surface of revolution by
rotating a path curve or profile around a selected axis.
RULESURF creates a polygon mesh representing the
ruled surface between two curves. TABSURF creates a
polygon mesh representing a general tabulated surface
defined by a path curve and direction vector.
System Variables SPLFRAME controls the display of invisible edges in
polyface meshes.
PLAN
Displays the plan view of a specified user coordinate system
PLAN provides a convenient means of viewing the drawing from the plan
view. You can select a plan view of the current user coordinate system, a
previously saved UCS, or the world coordinate system. PLAN affects the view
in the current viewport only. You cannot use PLAN in paper space.
PLAN changes the viewing direction and turns off perspective and clipping;
it does not change the current UCS. Any coordinates entered or displayed
subsequent to the PLAN command remain relative to the current UCS.
712 | PLAN
View menu: 3D Views ➤ Plan View
Command line: plan
Enter an option [Current ucs/Ucs/World] <Current>: Enter an option or press

ENTER
current display Current UCS Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the
drawing extents fit in the current viewport of the
current UCS.
UCS Changes to a plan view of a previously saved UCS and
regenerates the display.
current UCS Enter name of UCS or [?]: Enter a name or enter ? to list
all UCSs in the drawing
If you enter ? at the prompt, AutoCAD displays the

following prompt:
Enter UCS name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name or enter * to
list all UCSs in the drawing
UCS
World Regenerates a plan view of the display so that the
drawing extents fit on the screen of the world
coordinate system.
See Also
See “Change to a View of the XY Plane” in the User’s Guide.
System Variables UCSFOLLOW determines whether the viewport in the
World current viewport is restored to a plan view when the
UCS changes.
PLINE
Creates two-dimensional polylines
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Polyline
Command line: pline
Specify start point: Specify a point (1)

Current line-width is <current>
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Halfwidth/Length/Undo/Width]: Specify a
point (2) or enter an option
PLINE | 713
The PLINEGEN system variable controls the linetype pattern display around
and the smoothness of the vertices of a 2D polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 1
1 2
generates new polylines in a continuous pattern around the vertices of the
completed polyline. Setting PLINEGEN to 0 starts and ends the polyline with
a dash at each vertex. PLINEGEN does not apply to polylines with tapered
segments.
Next Point
PLINEGEN set to 0 Draws a line segment. AutoCAD repeats the previous prompt.
Arc
PLINEGEN set to 1 Adds arc segments to the polyline.
Specify endpoint of arc or
[Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Halfwidth/Line/Radius/Second pt/Undo/
Width]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
2
Note For the Center option of the PLINE command, enter ce; for the Center
object snap, enter cen or center.
Endpoint of Arc
Draws an arc segment. The arc segment starts at the last point tangent to the
previous segment of the polyline. AutoCAD repeats the previous prompt.
Angle
Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the start point.
Entering a positive number creates counterclockwise arc segments. Entering

a negative number creates clockwise arc segments.
angle
Specify endpoint of arc or [Center/Radius]: Specify a point or enter an option
Endpoint of Arc Specifies the endpoint and draws the arc segment.
Center Specifies the center of the arc segment.
714 | PLINE
Radius Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance
Specify direction of chord for arc <current>: Specify a
point or press ENTER
Center
3 Specifies the center of the arc segment.
2
Specify center point of arc: Specify a point (2)
Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle/Length]: Specify a point (3) or enter an option
Angle Specifies the included angle of the arc segment from the
start point.
Length Specifies the chord length of the arc segment. If the

previous segment is an arc, AutoCAD draws the new arc
segment tangent to the previous arc segment.
Specify length of chord:
Close
Closes a polyline with an arc segment.
Direction
Specifies a starting direction for the arc segment.
2
3 Specify the tangent direction from the start point of arc: Specify a point (2)
Specify endpoint of arc: Specify a point (3)
Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline segment to one of its
edges.
Specify starting half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending half-width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending
half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until
you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line
segments are at the center of the line.
PLINE | 715
Typically, the intersections of adjacent wide polyline segments are beveled.
half-width No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
or when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Line
Exits the Arc option and returns to the initial PLINE command prompts.
Radius
Specifies the radius of the arc segment.
Specify radius of arc: Specify a distance
radius Specify endpoint of arc or [Angle]: Specify a point or enter a
Angle Specifies the included angle for the arc segment.
Specify direction of chord for arc <current>: Specify
an angle or press ENTER
Second Pt
2 Specifies the second point and endpoint of a three-point arc.
3 Specify second point on arc: Specify a point (2)

Specify end point of arc: Specify a point (3)
Undo
Removes the most recent arc segment added to the polyline.
Width
Specifies the width of the next arc segment.
Specify starting width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER
width
716 | PLINE
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width
becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change
the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at
the center of the line.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments, very acute angles, or
when a dot-dash linetype is used.
Close
Draws a line segment from the current position to the starting point of the
polyline, creating a closed polyline.
Halfwidth
Specifies the width from the center of a wide polyline line segment to one of
half-width its edges.
Specify starting half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending half-width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting half-width becomes the default ending half-width. The ending
half-width becomes the uniform half-width for all subsequent segments until
you change the half-width again. The starting and ending points of wide line
segments are at the center of the line.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
PLINE | 717
Length
Draws a line segment of a specified length at the same angle as the previous
segment. If the previous segment is an arc, AutoCAD draws the new line
segment tangent to that arc segment.
Specify length of line: Specify a distance
Undo
Removes the most recent line segment added to the polyline.
Width
Specifies the width of the next line segment.
width Specify starting width <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify ending width <starting width>: Enter a value or press ENTER
The starting width becomes the default ending width. The ending width
becomes the uniform width for all subsequent segments until you change
the width again. The starting and ending points of wide line segments are at
the center of the line.
No beveling is performed for nontangent arc segments or very acute angles
See Also
See “Draw Polylines” in the User’s Guide.
Commands CONVERT converts 2D polylines and associative hatches
created in AutoCAD Release 13 or earlier to an opti-
mized format. LINE creates single or multiple line
segments that are separate objects. MLINE creates multi-
ple parallel lines. PEDIT controls linetype display for
existing polylines. SPLINE creates quadratic and cubic
spline objects.
System Variables PLINEGEN controls linetype pattern display of a 2D
polyline. PLINETYPE specifies whether AutoCAD uses
optimized 2D polylines.
718 | PLINE
PLOT
Plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Plot
Shortcut menu: Right-click the Model tab or a layout tab and choose Plot.
Command line: plot
The Plot dialog box is displayed. Choose OK to begin plotting with the
current settings and display the Plot Progress dialog box.
If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, PLOT displays prompts on the
Plot Dialog Box

Specifies device and media settings, and plots your drawing. To send more
than one layout to the plotter, choose the layout tabs for the layouts you
want to plot, and then use PLOT.
Layout Name
Displays the current layout name or displays “Selected layouts” if multiple
tabs are selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the
Layout Name shows “Model.”
Save Changes to Saves changes you make in the Plot dialog box in the
Layout layout. This option is unavailable if multiple layouts are
selected.
Page Setup Name

Displays a list of any named and saved page setups in the drawing. You can
choose to base the current page setup on a named page setup, or you can add
a new named page setup by choosing Add.
Add Displays the User Defined Page Setups dialog box (see
page 682). You can create, delete, or rename named
page setups.
Full Preview
Displays the drawing as it will appear when plotted on paper. To exit the
print preview, right-click and choose Exit.
PLOT | 719
Partial Preview
Quickly shows an accurate representation of the effective plot area relative to

the paper size and printable area. Partial preview also gives advance notice of
any warnings that you might encounter when AutoCAD plots. The final loca-
tion of the plot depends on the plotter.
Changes that modify the effective plot area include those made to the plot
origin, which you define under Plot Offset on the Plot Settings tab. If you off-
set the origin so much that the effective area extends outside the preview
area, AutoCAD displays a warning.
Paper Size Displays the currently selected paper size.
Printable Area Displays the printable area within the paper size
allowable for plotting based on the plotter
configuration.
Effective Area Displays the dimensions of the drawing within the
printable area.
Warnings Displays a list of warnings that pertain to the effective
plotting area.
Plot Device Tab (Plot Dialog Box)

Specifies the plotter to use, a plot style table, the layout or layouts to plot,
and information about plotting to a file.
720 | PLOT
Plotter Configuration
Displays the currently configured plotting device, the port to which it’s con-
nected or its network location, and any additional user-defined comments
about the plotter. A list of the available system printers and PC3 file names is
displayed in the Name list. An icon is displayed in front of the plotting device
name to identify it as a PC3 file name or a system printer.
If a selected plotter doesn't support the layout's selected paper size, a warning
is displayed and the plotter's default paper size is automatically selected. You
can set the paper size on the Layout Settings tab.
Properties Displays the Plotter Configuration Editor (PC3 Editor),
where you can modify or view the current plotter
configuration, ports, device, and media settings. For
information about PC3 files, see “Use Plotters and
Printers” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.
If you make changes to the PC3 file using the Plotter
Configuration Editor, the Changes to a Printer
Configuration File dialog box (see page 728) is
displayed.
Hints Displays information about the specific plotting device.
PLOT | 721
Plot Style Table (Pen Assignments)
Sets the plot style table, edits the plot style table, or creates a new plot style
table.
Name Displays the plot style table assigned to the current
Model tab or layout tab and a list of the currently
available plot style tables. If more than one layout tab
is selected and they have different plot style tables
assigned, the list displays “Various.”
Edit Displays the Plot Style Table Editor, where you can edit
the selected plot style table.
New Displays one of two plot style table wizards depending
on which default plot style behavior (color-dependent
or named) you selected in the Options dialog box,
Plotting tab. Use the wizard to create a new plot style
table. See “Use Plot Styles to Control Plotted Objects” in
the User’s Guide.
Plot Stamp
Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and/or logs it to a
file.
On Turns on plot stamping.
Settings Displays the Plot Stamp dialog box (see page 736),
where you can specify the information you want
applied to the plot stamp, such as drawing name, date
and time, plot scale, and so on.
What to Plot
Defines what you want to plot.
Current Tab Plots the current Model or layout tab. If multiple tabs
are selected, the tab whose drawing area is visible is
plotted.
Selected Tabs Plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs. To
select multiple tabs, hold down CTRL while selecting
the tabs. If only one tab is selected, this option is
unavailable.
All Layout Tabs Plots all layout tabs, regardless of which tab is selected.
Number of Denotes the number of copies that are plotted. If
Copies multiple layouts and copies are selected, any layouts
that are set to plot to a file or AutoSpool produce a
single plot.
722 | PLOT
Plot to File
Plots output to a file rather than to the plotter.
Plot to File Plots to a file.
File Name and Specifies the plot file name and path. The default plot
Path file name is the drawing name and the tab name (Model
or the layout tab name), separated by a hyphen, with a
.plt file extension.
[...] Displays a standard file selection dialog box.
Plot Settings Tab (Plot Dialog Box)

Specifies paper size, orientation, plot area and scale, offset, and other
options.
PLOT | 723
Paper Size and Paper Units
Displays standard paper sizes available for the selected plotting device.
Actual paper sizes are indicated by the width (X axis direction) and height
(Y axis direction). If no plotter is selected, the full standard paper size list is
displayed and available for selection. A default paper size is set for the plotting
device when you create a PC3 file with the Add-a-Plotter wizard. For more
information about the Add-a-Plotter wizard, see “Set Up Plotters and Printers”
in the Driver and Peripheral Guide. The paper size you select is saved with a lay-
out and overrides the PC3 file settings.
If you are plotting a raster image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, the size of the
plot is specified in pixels, not in inches or millimeters.
Plot Device Displays the name of the currently selected plot device.
Paper Size Displays a list of the available paper sizes. An icon next
to the paper size indicates the plot orientation of the
paper.
Printable Area Displays the actual area on the paper that is used for the
plot based on the current paper size.
Inches Specifies inches for the plotting units.
MM Specifies millimeters for the plotting units.
Drawing Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the drawing on the paper for plotters that support
landscape or portrait orientation. You can change the drawing orientation to
achieve a 0-, 90-, 180-, or 270-degree plot rotation by selecting Portrait, Land-
scape, or Plot Upside-Down. The paper icon represents the media orientation
of the selected paper. The letter icon represents the orientation of the draw-
ing on the page.
Plot Upside- Orients and plots the drawing upside down.
Down
Note Drawing orientation is also affected by the PLOTROTMODE system

variable.
724 | PLOT
Plot Area
Specifies the portion of the drawing to be plotted.
Layout/Limits When plotting a layout, plots everything within the
margins of the specified paper size, with the origin
calculated from 0,0 in the layout.
When plotting from the Model tab, plots the entire
drawing area defined by the drawing limits. If the
current viewport does not display a plan view, this
option has the same effect as the Extents option.
Extents Plots the portion of the current space of the drawing
that contains objects. All geometry in the current space
is plotted. AutoCAD may regenerate the drawing to
recalculate the extents before plotting.
Display Plots the view in the current viewport in the selected
Model tab or the current paper space view in the layout.
unavailable.
Window Plots any portion of the drawing you specify. If you
select Window, the Window button becomes available.
Choose the Window button to use the pointing device
to specify the two corners of the area to be plotted or
enter coordinate values.
Specify first corner: Specify a point
Specify other corner: Specify a point
Plot Scale
Controls the relative size of drawing units to plotted units. The default scale
setting is 1:1 when plotting a layout. The default setting is Scaled to Fit when
plotting a Model tab. When you select a standard scale, the scale is displayed
in Custom.
Note If the Layout option is specified in Plot Area, AutoCAD plots the actual
size of the layout and ignores the option specified in Scale.
Scale Defines the exact scale for the plot. The four most
recently used standard scales are displayed at the top of
the list.
PLOT | 725
Custom Creates a user-defined scale. You can create a custom
scale by entering the number of inches or millimeters
equal to the number of drawing units.
Scale Lineweights Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale.
Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed
objects and are plotted with the linewidth size
regardless of the plot scale.
Shaded Viewport Options
Specifies how shaded and rendered viewports are plotted and determines
their resolution level and dpi.
Shade Plot Specifies how views are plotted. To specify this setting
for a viewport on a layout tab, select the viewport and
then, on the Tools menu, click Properties.
From the Model tab, you can choose from the following
options:
■ As Displayed: Plots objects the way they are displayed

on the screen.
■ Wireframe: Plots objects in wireframe regardless of
the way the objects are displayed on the screen.
■ Hidden: Plots objects with hidden lines removed
regardless of the way the objects are displayed on the
screen.
■ Rendered: Plots objects as rendered regardless of the
way they are displayed on the screen.
Quality Specifies the resolution at which shaded and rendered

viewports are plotted.
You can choose from the following options:
■ Draft: Sets rendered and shaded model space views to

plot as wireframe.
■ Preview: Sets rendered and shaded model space views
to plot at ¼ the current device resolution, to a
maximum of 150 dpi.
■ Normal: Sets rendered and shaded model space views
to plot at ½ the current device resolution, to a
maximum of 300 dpi.
■ Presentation: Sets rendered and shaded model space
views to plot at the current device resolution, to a
maximum of 600 dpi.
726 | PLOT
■ Maximum: Sets rendered and shaded model space
views to plot at the current device resolution with
no maximum.
■ Custom: Sets rendered and shaded model space views
to plot at the resolution setting you specify in the
DPI box, up to the current device resolution.
DPI Specifies the dots per inch for shaded and rendered
views, up to the maximum resolution of the current
plotting device. This option is available if you select
Custom in the Quality box.
Plot Offset
Specifies an offset of the plotting area from the lower-left corner of the paper.
In a layout, the lower-left corner of a specified plot area is positioned at the
lower-left margin of the paper. You can offset the origin by entering a positive
or negative value. The plotter unit values are in inches or millimeters on the
paper.
Center the Plot Automatically calculates the X and Y offset values to
center the plot on the paper.
X Specifies the plot origin in the X direction.
Y Specifies the plot origin in the Y direction.
Plot Options
Specifies options for lineweights, plot styles, shaded plots, and the order in
which objects are plotted.
Plot Object Specifies whether lineweights assigned to objects and
Lineweights layers are plotted.
Plot with Plot Specifies whether plot styles applied to objects and
Styles layers are plotted. When you select this option, Plot
with Lineweights is automatically selected also.
Plot Paperspace Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry
Last is usually plotted before model space geometry.
Hide Paperspace Specifies whether the Hide operation applies to objects
Objects in the paper space viewport. This option is only
available from a layout tab. The effect of this setting is
reflected in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
PLOT | 727
Changes to a Printer Configuration File Dialog
Box (Plot)
Notifies you that you have made changes to an existing plotter configuration
(PC3) file. You can cancel your changes, choose OK to overwrite the PC3 file,
or specify a new file name for the modified PC3 file.
Apply Changes Uses the changes you’ve made to the PC3 file in the
for the Current current plot but does not save them in the PC3 file.
Plot Only
Save Changes to Specifies the path of the PC3 file that you have
the Following File changed. To preserve the original PC3 file, specify a new
file name.
Plot Progress Dialog Box

The Plot Progress dialog box provides information as your drawing is being
plotted. The upper progress bar displays the progress of a single page or view-
port through each major phase of plotting. The phases depend on the plotter
and plot settings you have specified. The lower progress bar displays the over-
all progress of plotted pages, copies of a single drawing, multiple layouts, or
multiple drawings plotted using the Batch Plot utility.
Choose Cancel to stop both the current drawing and any other drawings,
copies, or layouts in the batch.
If you are plotting multiple copies of a single layout on a plotter that must
receive plot information for each copy, the lower bar displays a segment for
each copy. If the plotter can make multiple copies after receiving plot infor-
mation once, the lower bar displays one segment for the entire layout.
If you plot through the Windows system spooler, the upper progress bar
reaches completion when the whole plot has been sent to the spooler.
Additional time is required for the plot to be sent from the spooler to the
plotter. This phase is not tracked in the Plot Progress dialog box. Similarly, if
you choose Cancel while the plot is being sent from the spooler to the
plotter, the process is not canceled. To monitor this stage of a spooled plot,
and to pause, delete, or change the sequence of spooled plots, use the
Windows Print Manager.
If your plot is slow, consider the following possible causes:
728 | PLOT
■ You might be using the wrong driver. In some cases you have a choice of
drivers and there can be a substantial performance difference. Try plotting
with a different driver and compare the output time.
■ If your drawing contains raster images or embedded OLE objects, you can
improve plot speed by reducing the quality of these objects. There are two
levels of control over OLE object plotting quality: an individual object
quality setting and an overall OLE object quality setting. The control for
individual object quality is available on the shortcut menu on the object.
Set the overall quality using the Plotter Configuration Editor to edit the
plotter’s PC3 file. Choose the Graphics node and select Raster Graphics.
Use the slider in the Raster Images area of the dialog box.
■ Make sure your computer has enough RAM. If the RAM is too low for the
drawing you are plotting, Windows begins “swapping” to disk, which
slows plot time dramatically.
If you are more concerned about returning to work in AutoCAD than about
plot duration, plot through the Windows system spooler. You can use the
spooler if you are using a nonsystem HDI driver and plotting to a locally con-
nected plotter. Configure a Windows system printer for the same local port.
Update PC3 File with New Printer Dialog Box

Displays the device driver name that is stored in the PC3 file. A device can be
a plotter or printer. With this dialog box, you can select a valid plotter or
printer and update the existing PC3 file; you can also save a modified copy
as a new PC3 file.
The dialog box is displayed in the PLOT or PAGESETUP command in a layout
configured for a PC3 file that contains an invalid or missing plotter or printer
name.
Device Needed Displays the device specified in the PC3 file that is
configured for the current layout.
PLOT | 729
Printer Name Lists the available plotters, printers, and PC3 files.
Select a plotter, printer, or PC3 file to be substituted for
the missing printer specified in your PC3 file. Select
None if you don’t want to make any substitution.
If you select None, the other settings for the current
layout remain unchanged. If you select a plotter or
printer that uses a different driver than the one
specified in the original PC3 file, the following
configuration information may change when the PC3
file is saved:
■ Plot quality
■ Color depth
■ Resolution
■ Media source
■ Media destination
■ Media finishing options (such as folding or binding)
■ Any custom settings of the previous device or driver
If the plotter or printer you select can’t support the

paper size specified in the layout, the default paper size
is used. A warning is displayed that allows you to cancel
this operation and return to the Plot or Page Setup
dialog box with the None device selected.
Device For each selection you make under Printer Name, the
corresponding device driver name is displayed in this
column, as follows:
■ For a selected plotter or printer, this column displays

the device driver name stored in the plotter or
printer’s PC3 file.
■ For a selected PC3 file, this column displays the
device driver name stored in the PC3 file.
■ For a selection of None, this column displays no
device name. No device will be substituted for the
missing printer specified in the PC3 file.
730 | PLOT
Status Area Displays information about the selected plotter, printer,
or PC3 file.
Update and Save Displays the name of the PC3 file that you are
PC3 File modifying for the current layout. If you click OK
without changing the name of the PC3 file, the existing
PC3 file is updated with the new printer name. If you
change the name of the PC3 file and click OK, a copy of
the PC3 file is saved with the new printer information.
PLOT Command Line

If you enter -plot at the Command prompt, the following prompt is dis-
Detailed plot configuration [Yes/No] <No>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
No
Indicates that you do not want a detailed plot configuration for this plot.
Enter a layout name or [?] <current>:
Enter a page setup name < >:
Enter an output device name or [?] <current>:
Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] <current>:
Enter file name: <dwgname-layoutname.plt>:
Save changes to layout [Yes/No] <No>:
Proceed with Plot [Yes/No] <Y>:
For information about these prompts, see the description for Yes.
Yes
Specifies detailed page settings for the Model tab or layout tab you are
plotting.
Enter a layout name or [?] <current>: Specify the name of the layout tab you want
to plot
Enter an output device name or [?] <current>: Specify the name of the output
device to which you want to plot the Model tab or layout tab you selected
If you enter a new device name without an extension, AutoCAD assumes the
device is a PC3 file (Autodesk HDI plotter configuration file). If no PC3 file is
found, AutoCAD searches for a Windows system printer with that device
name.
Enter paper size or [?] <current>: Specify the paper size to use for the plot or enter
? to view the actual list of paper sizes defined for the plotter driver
PLOT | 731
You must specify a paper size exactly as it is defined by the plotter driver.
Enter paper units [Inches/Millimeters] <current>:
The Enter Paper Units prompt is not displayed if you are plotting a raster
image, such as a BMP or TIFF file, because the size of the plot is assumed to
be in pixels.
Enter drawing orientation [Portrait/Landscape] <current>:
Plot upside down [Yes/No] <No>:
Orients and plots the drawing upside down.

Enter plot area [Display/Extents/Limits/Layout/View/Window] <current>:
Display Plots the view in the current viewport on the Model tab
or the current view in the layout, depending on which
tab you select to plot.
Extents Plots all of the objects in the current viewport, except
objects on frozen layers. From a layout tab, plots all the
geometry in paper space. AutoCAD may regenerate the
drawing to recalculate the extents before plotting.
If you plot the drawing’s extents with a perspective
view active and the camera position is within the
drawing extents, this option has the same effect as the
Display option.
Limits Plots the drawing area defined by the drawing limits.
Available only when the Model tab is selected.
Layout Plots everything within the printable area of the
specified paper size, with the origin calculated from 0,0
in the layout. Available only when a layout tab is
selected.
732 | PLOT
unavailable.
Window Plots any portion of the drawing you specify. This
option prompts you to specify the corners of the
window.
Enter lower left corner of window: Specify a point
Enter upper right corner of window: Specify a point
Enter plot scale (Plotted Inches = Drawing Units) or [Fit] <current>: Specify the
scale of the plot
Plotted Inches = Calculates the plot scale based on the inches or

Drawing Units millimeters to drawing units that you specify. You can
also enter a real number as a fraction (for example, you
can enter 1=2 or .5).
Fit Calculates the scale to fit the area on the sheet of paper.
The default scale setting is 1:1 when you are plotting a layout, unless you
modified and saved the setting. The default setting is Fit when plotting a
Model tab.
Enter plot offset (x, y) or [Center] <current>: Specify the plot offset in either the
X or Y direction, or enter c to center the plot on the paper
Plot with plot styles [Yes/No] <current>: Specify whether to plot using the plot
styles applied to objects and defined in the plot style table
If you specify Yes to plot with plot styles, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
Enter plot style table name or [?] (enter . for none) <current>: Enter a plot style
table name, ? to view plot style tables, or . (period) for none
PLOT | 733
All style definitions with different property characteristics are stored in the
current plot style table and can be attached to the geometry. This setting
replaces pen mapping in earlier versions of AutoCAD.
Plot with lineweights [Yes/No] <current>:
Scale lineweights with plot scale [Yes/No] <current>:
Note The Scale Lineweights with Plot Scale prompt is displayed only when you
plot from a layout tab. Settings for the shaded plotting type are only available
when you plot from the Model tab. To control shaded plotting settings of view-
ports in a layout tab, use the Shadeplot option of the -vports command
when you create a viewport.
Enter shade plot setting [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden/Rendered] <As

displayed >: Enter a shade plot option
Specifies how model space views are plotted.

As Displayed Specifies that a model space view plots the same way it
is displayed.
Wireframe Specifies that a model space view plots wireframe
regardless of display.
Hidden Specifies that a model space view plots with hidden
lines removed regardless of display.
Rendered Specifies that model space view plots are rendered
regardless of display.
Write the plot to a file [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y if you want to write the plotted
drawing to a file, or press ENTER to plot to an output device
If you specify Yes, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:

Enter file name: <dwgname-layoutname.plt>: Enter a file name
Save changes to page setup? Or set shade plot quality? [Yes/No/Quality] <No>:
734 | PLOT
If you enter y, the current settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved. If
you enter q, you are prompted for the shaded plotting quality and are given
the option of providing a custom dpi. Then you are prompted to save the
page setup with the added quality settings.
Enter shade plot quality [Draft/Preview/Normal/pResentation/Maximum/
Custom] <Normal>: Enter c if you want to specify a dpi, or to use a preset dpi,
specify a different quality option
Enter custom dpi <150>:
Save changes to page setup [Yes/No]? <No>:
Plot paper space first [Yes/No] <current>:
Paper space geometry is usually plotted before model space geometry. If you
enter n, the model space geometry is plotted first, and paper space geometry
is plotted last. This option is only available if you are plotting from a layout
tab.
Hide paperspace objects? [Yes/No] <No >:
Specifies whether the Hide operation applies to objects in the paper space
viewport. This option is only available from a layout tab.
Proceed with plot [Yes/No] <Y>:
PLOTSTAMP
Places a plot stamp on a specified corner of each drawing and logs it to a file
Adds the specified plot stamp information—including drawing name, layout
name, date and time, and so on—to a drawing that is plotted to any device.
Once you turn plot stamping on in the Plot dialog box, it remains active with
whatever settings have been most recently entered until you specifically turn
it off. AutoCAD creates a plot stamp at the time the drawing is being plotted;
the plot stamp is not saved with the drawing. Before you plot the drawing,
you can preview the position of the plot stamp in the Plot Stamp dialog box
(not in the AutoCAD drawing area or in the plot preview). The plot stamp
you create is justified on one of the four drawing corners and can print up to
two lines. You can choose to record the plot stamp information to a log file
instead of plotting it, or in addition to plotting it.
PLOTSTAMP | 735
Note Plot stamp will always be drawn with pen number 7 or the highest num-
bered available pen if the plotter doesn’t hold 7 pens. You must install a suitable
pen in that position. If you are using a non-pen (raster) device, color 7 is always
used for plot stamping.
Command line: plotstamp
The Plot Stamp dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, PLOTSTAMP displays
Plot Stamp Dialog Box

Specifies the information for the plot stamp.
Plot Stamp Fields

Specifies the drawing information you want applied to the plot stamp. The
selected fields are separated by commas and a space.
Drawing Name Includes the drawing name and path in the plot stamp
information.
Layout Name Includes the name of the layout in the plot stamp
information.
736 | PLOTSTAMP
Date and Time Includes the date and time in the plot stamp
information.
Note The date and time format is determined by the
Regional Settings dialog box in the Windows Control
Panel. Plot stamping uses the short date style for dates.
Login Name Includes the Windows login name in the plot stamp
information.
The windows login name is contained in the
LOGINNAME system variable.
Device Name Includes the current plotting device name in the plot
stamp information.
Paper Size Includes the paper size for the currently configured
plotting device in the plot stamp information.
Plot Scale Includes the plot scale in the plot stamp information.
Preview
Provides a visual display of the plot stamp location based on the location and
rotation values you have specified in the Advanced Options dialog box. You
cannot preview the plot stamp any other way. This is not a preview of the
plot stamp contents.
User Defined Fields

Provides text that can optionally be plotted, logged, or both plotted and
logged at plot time. The selected value in each user-defined list will be plot-
ted. For example, you might populate one list with media types or prices and
the other with job names. If the user-defined value is set to <none>, then no
user-defined information is plotted.
Add/Edit Displays the User Defined Fields dialog box (see page
738), where you can add, edit, or delete user-defined
fields.
Plot Stamp Parameter File

Stores plot stamp information in a file with a .pss extension. Multiple users
can access the same file and stamp their plots based on company standard
settings.
AutoCAD provides two PSS files—Mm.pss and Inches.pss—that are located in
the Support folder. The initial default plot stamp parameter file name is deter-
mined by the regional settings of the operating system when AutoCAD is
installed.
PLOTSTAMP | 737
Load Displays the Plotstamp Parameter File Name dialog box
(a standard file selection dialog box) in which you can
specify the location of the parameter file you want to
use.
Save As Saves the current plot stamp settings in a new
parameter file.
Advanced
Displays the Advanced Options dialog box (see page 739), in which you can
set the location, text properties, and units of the plot stamp. You can also
create a log file, and set its location.
User Defined Fields Dialog Box

User-defined fields are created and edited using the User Defined Fields
dialog box, which is displayed when you choose the Add/Edit button in the
Plot Stamp dialog box.
Add Adds an editable user-defined field to the bottom of the

list.
Edit Allows editing of the selected user-defined field.
Delete Deletes the selected user-defined field.
738 | PLOTSTAMP
Advanced Options Dialog Box
Determines the location, text properties, and units of the plot stamp. You can
also create a log file and set its location. The dialog box is displayed when you
choose the Advanced button in the Plot Stamp dialog box.
Location and Offset

Determines the plot stamp location, the orientation of the plot stamp, and
the offset you want to apply relative to either the printable area or the paper
border.
Location Indicates the area where you want to place the plot
stamp. Selections include Top Left, Bottom Left
(default), Bottom Right, and Top Right. The location is
relative to the image orientation of the drawing on the
page.
Orientation Indicates the rotation of the plot stamp in relation to
the specified page. The options are Horizontal and
Vertical for each of the locations (for example, Top Left
Horizontal and Top Left Vertical).
Stamp Upside Rotates the plot stamp upside down.
Down
PLOTSTAMP | 739
X Offset Determines the X offset value that is calculated from
either the corner of the paper or the corner of the
printable area, depending on which setting you specify.
If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset
value is calculated so that the plot stamp information
fits within the designated paper size. If the offset value
positions the plot stamp information beyond the
printable area, the plot stamp text is cut off.
Y Offset Determines the Y offset value that is calculated from
either the corner of the paper or the corner of the
printable area, depending on which setting you specify.
If you specify Offset Relative to Paper Border, the offset
value is calculated so that the plot stamp information
fits within the designated paper size. If the offset value
positions the plot stamp information beyond the
printable area, the plot stamp text is cut off.
Offset Relative to Calculates the offset values that you specify from the
Printable Area corner of the printable area of the paper (not the corner
of the paper).
Offset Relative to Calculates the offset values that you specify from the
Paper Border corner of the paper (not the corner of the printable area
of the paper).
Text Properties
Determines the font, height, and number of lines you want to apply to the
plot stamp text.
Font Specifies the TrueType font you want to apply to the
text used for the plot stamp information.
Height Specifies the text height you want to apply to the plot
stamp information.
Single Line Plot If selected, places the plot stamp information in a single
Stamp line of text. The plot stamp information can consist of
up to two lines of text, but the placement and offset
values you specify must accommodate text wrapping
and text height. If the plot stamp contains text that is
longer than the printable area, the plot stamp text will
be cut off. If this option is cleared, plot stamp text is
wrapped after the third field.
740 | PLOTSTAMP
Plot Stamp Units
Specifies the units used to measure X offset, Y offset, and height. You can
define units using inches, millimeters, or pixels.
Two sets of values for the plot stamp size and location are saved in the PSS
file: one for the dimensionless file formats and the other for dimensional file
formats. If the units you select in the dialog box are dimensional, then the
dimensional values are displayed and modified. To access the dimensionless
values, you need to select pixels as the unit of measurement. Regardless of
the units selected in the dialog box, the correct set of values is applied at plot
time. In other words, changing the unit of measurement does not cause the
values to recalculate.
Log File Location

Writes the plot stamp information to a log file instead of, or in addition to,
stamping the current plot.
Log File Writes the plot stamp information to a log file. The
default log file is plot.log, and it is located in the
AutoCAD folder. You can specify a different file name
and path. After the initial plot.log file is created, the plot
stamp information in each succeeding plotted drawing
is added to this file. Each drawing’s plot stamp
information is a single line of text. The plot stamp log
file can be placed on a network drive and shared by
multiple users. Plot stamp information from each user
is appended to the plot.log file.
Log File Name Specifies the file name for the log file you are creating.
Enter a new file name if you do not want to use the
default file name, plot.log.
Browse Lists the currently saved plot stamp log files. You can
choose to overwrite an existing plot stamp log file with
the currently specified plot stamp information, and
then to save this file.
PLOTSTAMP | 741
PLOTSTAMP Command Line
If you enter -plotstamp at the Command prompt, prompts are displayed on
the command line. The settings in the PSS file are displayed as defaults for
each prompt.
You can use -PLOTSTAMP as part of a plotting script to modify plot stamp
information for a drawing.
Enter an option [On/OFF/Fields/User fields/Log file/LOCation/Text properties/
UNits]:
On Turns on the plot stamp for the current drawing.

OFF Turns off the plot stamp for the current drawing.
Fields Specifies the plot stamp field information you want to
apply to the current plot stamp.
Stamp drawing name? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Stamp layout name? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Stamp date and time? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Stamp login name? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Stamp plot device name? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Stamp paper size? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Stamp plot scale? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
User Fields Specifies the user-defined fields you want to apply to

the current plot stamp.
Enter User field 1 <>: Enter any user-defined field
Enter User field 2 <>: Enter any user-defined field
Log File Specifies writing the current plot stamp information to

a log file rather than applying this information to the
current plotted drawing. The default log file is plot.log,
unless you specify another file path.
Write plot stamp to log file? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
Enter log file path <plot.log>:
742 | PLOTSTAMP
Location Determines the location of the plot stamp on the page
based on offset, orientation, and relationship to either
the printable area or the border of the paper.
Location selections include and are relative to the
printable area or the border of the paper, depending on
what you specify at the prompt.
Enter stamp location [TL/TR/BL/BR] <BL>:
■ TL: Top Left

■ TR: Top Right
■ BL: Bottom Left
■ BR: Bottom Right
Text orientation indicates the rotation angle of the plot

stamp in relation to the page.
Enter text orientation [Horizontal/Vertical] <Horizontal>:
■ Horizontal: Plot stamp will be horizontal relative to

the page.
■ Vertical: Plot stamp will be vertical relative to the
page.
Stamp upside-down [Yes/No] <No>:

Specify plot stamp offset <0.1000,0.1000>:
Specifying an offset relative to the paper border

calculates the offset values that you specify from the
corner of the paper. Specifying an offset relative to the
printable area calculates the offset values that you
specify from the corner of the printable area.
Specify offset relative to [paper Border/printable Area]
<printable Area>:
PLOTSTAMP | 743
Text Properties Determines the font name and text height for the
current plot stamp text. You can also specify to place
the text on one line or to wrap the text to two lines. The
placement and offset values you specify for this plot
stamp must accommodate the text wrapping and the
text height.
Enter font name <>: Enter a font name
Enter text height <0.1500>: Enter a value
Place plot stamp on single line? [Yes/No] <No >:
Units Specifies the units used to measure X offset, Y offset,

and height. You can define units using inches,
millimeters, or pixels.
Enter measurement units [Inches/Millimeters/Pixels]
<Inches>:
See Also
Commands PLOT plots a drawing to a plotting device or file.
PLOTSTYLE
Sets the current plot style for new objects or assigns a plot style to selected objects
Command line: plotstyle
To use the PLOTSTYLE command, the drawing must be configured to use

named plot styles.
■ If a drawing is in Color-Dependent mode and is an AutoCAD 2004 draw-

ing or is a pre-AutoCAD 2000 drawing saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later,
you can convert it to use named plot styles using the CONVERTPSTYLES
command.
■ To configure a new drawing, or a pre-AutoCAD 2000 drawing that was
never saved in AutoCAD 2000 or later releases, to use named plot styles,
set PSTYLEPOLICY to 0 before creating the new drawing or opening the pre-
AutoCAD 2000 drawing.
If no selection set exists, AutoCAD displays the Current Plot Style dialog box.
If a selection set exists, AutoCAD displays the Select Plot Style dialog box (see
page 746).
If you enter -plotstyle at the Command prompt, PLOTSTYLE displays a
prompt on the command line (see page 747).
744 | PLOTSTYLE
Current Plot Style Dialog Box
Specifies the plot style for new objects.
Current Plot Style Displays the current plot style.

Plot Style List Displays the available plot styles that can be assigned to
an object, including the default plot style, NORMAL. A
plot style is a collection of overrides for color, dithering,
gray scale, pen assignments, screening, linetype,
lineweight, end styles, join styles, and fill styles.
Active Plot Style Sets the plot style table attached to the current layout.
Table A plot style table is a collection of plot style definitions.
Editor Displays the Plot Style Table Editor.
Attached To Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot
style table is attached to.
PLOTSTYLE | 745
Select Plot Style Dialog Box
Specifies the plot style to be assigned.
Plot Styles Displays the available plot styles, including the default
plot style, NORMAL. A plot style is a collection of
property settings used in plotting.
Original Displays the originally assigned plot style.
New Displays the new plot style to be assigned.
Active Plot Style Sets the plot style table attached to the current drawing.
Table A plot style table defines plot styles.
Editor Displays the Plot Style Table Editor.
Attached To Displays the tab (Model tab or layout tab) that the plot
style table is attached to.
746 | PLOTSTYLE
PLOTSTYLE Command Line
If you enter -plotstyle at the Command prompt, PLOTSTYLE displays a
prompt on the command line.
Command line: -plotstyle
Current plot style is "current"

Enter an option [?/Current]:
?—List Plot Styles Lists the plot styles in the attached plot style table.
Current Specifies the plot style to use for new objects.
PLOTTERMANAGER
Displays the Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter configuration
File menu: Plotter Manager
Command line: plottermanager
AutoCAD displays the Plotter Manager where you can perform the following
tasks:
■ Double-click the Add-a-Plotter wizard to add and configure plotters and

printers.
■ Double-click a plotter configuration (PC3 file) to start the Plotter Config-
uration Editor.
Add-a-Plotter Wizard
Adds new plotters and printers. The wizard produces a PC3 file that you can
edit in the Plotter Configuration Editor. Your configurations are stored in the
AutoCAD 2004\plotters folder.
PLOTTERMANAGER | 747
Plotter Configuration Editor
Modifies a PC3 file’s plotter port connections and output settings, including
media, graphics, physical pen configuration, custom properties, initializa-
tion strings, calibration, and user-defined paper sizes. You can drag these
configuration options from one PC3 file to another.
You can start the Plotter Configuration Editor with any of the following
methods:
■ Double-click a PC3 file in Windows Explorer or right-click the PC3 file and
click Open. (By default, PC3 files are stored in the Plotters folder. To find
the location of your plotter files, on the Tools menu, click Options. In the
Options dialog box, Files tab, click the plus sign to the left of Printer Sup-
port File Path. Click the plus sign to the left of the Printer Configuration
Search Path file. Under Printer Configuration Search Path, click the path
name to view the location of your plotter files.)
■ Choose Edit Plotter Configuration from within the Add-a-Plotter wizard.
■ Choose Properties in the Page Setup dialog box.
■ Choose Properties in the Plot dialog box.
Depending on your configured plotting device, additional options may be

available on the Device and Document Settings tab. For example, when you
configure a nonsystem plotter, you can modify the pen characteristics.
748 | PLOTTERMANAGER
General Tab (Plotter Configuration Editor)
Contains basic information about the plotter configuration (PC3) file. You
can add or modify the information in the Description area. The remainder of
the tab is read-only.
Plotter Displays the file name you assigned in the Add-a-Plotter

Configuration wizard.
File Name
Description Displays information you want to include about the
plotter.
Driver Displays the following information:
Information
■ Plotter driver type (system or nonsystem), name,
model, and location
■ HDI driver file version number (AutoCAD
specialized driver files)
■ UNC name of the network server (if the plotter is
connected to a network server)
■ I/O port (if the plotter is connected locally)
■ Name of the system printer (if the configured plotter
is the system printer)
■ PMP (Plot Model Parameters) file name and location
(if a PMP file is attached to the PC3 file)
Ports Tab
Changes communication settings between the configured plotter and your
computer or network system. You can specify whether you want to plot
through a port, plot to a file, or use AutoSpool. See “Use AutoSpool” in the
Driver and Peripheral Guide.
If you plot through a parallel port, you can specify the timeout value. If you
plot through a serial port, you can change the baud rate, protocol, flow
control, and input and output timeout values.
Plot to the Sends the drawing to the plotter through the specified
Following Port port.
Plot to File Sends the drawing to the file specified in the Plot dialog
box.
AutoSpool Uses the AutoSpool utility to plot the drawing.
AutoSpool is specified on the Files tab in the Options
dialog box.
Port List Displays a list and description of available ports, both
local and network. If the port is a network port, the
name of the network printer is also displayed.
Show All Ports Shows all available ports on the computer regardless of
the ports available on the plotter.
Browse Network Displays the network choices so you can connect to
another instance of a nonsystem plotter.
Configure Port Displays either the Configure LPT Port dialog box or the
Settings for COM Port dialog box.
Device and Document Settings Tab
Controls many of the settings in the PC3 file. Click the icon for any of the
nodes to view and change the specific settings. When you change a setting,
your changes appear in angle brackets (< >) next to the setting name. A check
mark is also displayed over the icon of the node with a changed value.
Note Only the settings available for the configured device are displayed in the
tree view. In addition, you might not be able to edit some settings if the device
handles the setting through Custom Properties or doesn’t support the capability.
Media Node
Specifies a paper source, size, type, and destination. Available settings depend
on the supported features of your configured plotter. For Windows system
printers, you must configure the media settings using the Custom Properties
node. See “Custom Properties Node.”
Source and Size Specifies the paper source and size.
■ Source: Specifies the paper source, for example, sheet-
fed or roll-fed. If you specify a tray, you can select
the type of tray.
■ Width: Specifies the width of the paper roll for a roll-
fed source.
■ Automatic: Enables the printer to specify the
appropriate paper source.
■ Size: Displays a list of available paper sources and
both standard and custom paper sizes.
■ Printable Bounds: Displays the print boundaries.
Media Type Displays a list of the media types supported by the

plotter configuration.
Duplex Printing Determines double-sided printing and type of margins.
Margin options are available only for plotters that
support duplex printing.
■ None: Indicates no double-sided printing.
■ Short Side: Places the binding margin on the short
side of the paper.
■ Long Side: Places the binding margin on the long side
of the paper.
Media Displays a list of available media destinations for the
Destination configured plotter, such as collating, cutting, and
stapling. These options are available only for plotters
that support this function.
Physical Pen Configuration Node (for Pen Plotters Only)
Controls the specific pens in the pen plotter. The lower pane of the Device
and Document Settings tab displays a table used to describe the color, width,
and speed of each pen in the plotter.
Note AutoCAD cannot detect the physical pen information automatically; you
must provide this information for your pen plotter under Physical Pen
Characteristics.
Pen Specifies settings for pen plotters.
Configuration
■ Prompt for Pen Swapping: Allows you to use more than
one pen while plotting on a single pen plotter.
Under Physical Pen Characteristics, you can specify
settings for as many pens as you want. AutoCAD
prompts you when you need to change pens.
■ Area Fill Correction: Enables AutoCAD to compensate
for pen widths when plotting filled areas and wide
polylines. AutoCAD shrinks each polygon by half of
the width of the pen used to draw it. This option
prevents the plotter from oversizing the filled area
when using a wide pen and ensures precision. Use
this option if the plot must be accurate to half the
pen width, such as in printed circuit artwork.
■ Pen Optimization Level: Reduces plot time and
increases the efficiency of the pens by optimizing
the pen motion. For example, you can prevent pens
from retracing duplicate lines. If your drawing uses
many colors or widths, you can reduce the time
needed to change pens by selecting Adds Pen
Sorting. AutoCAD will plot every object that uses a
particular pen before switching to another pen. Each
method in the list includes the optimization
methods preceding it in the list (except for No
Optimization).
Physical Pen To plot your drawing correctly on a pen plotter, you
Characteristics need to provide information about the pens in your
plotter. For each pen in your plotter, specify a color and
width. To optimize pen performance, you can specify a
speed.
Note This information is required; AutoCAD cannot
detect the physical pen information automatically.
■ Color: Specifies the colors of the pens in your plotter.
AutoCAD selects the pen color that closely matches
the object’s color. You can assign colors to your pens
that correspond to each object’s color. Use the Color
list to select one of the following settings: No Pen,
Red, Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, Magenta, Black, or
Other. If you choose Other, the Select Color dialog
box is displayed, providing access to the full color
palette. Use No Pen to indicate that there is no pen
in a particular position.
■ Speed: Adjusts pen speed on a pen-by-pen basis. This
feature is useful, for example, for slowing down pens
that are skipping. Each pen manufacturer
recommends a pen speed for each type of media. For
best results, use those values. You can specify a pen
speed in millimeters or inches per second.
■ Width: Specifies the width of your pens so AutoCAD
can determine if multiple pen strokes are needed to
draw wide lines. You can specify the pen width in
inches or millimeters. Be sure to select the pen width
to match the actual width of the pen. The list
provides a set of common pen widths.
Specifying pen characteristics here doesn’t replace the

pen tables you might have imported from PCP, PC2, or
CFG files from AutoCAD Release 14, AutoCAD LT 98, or
earlier releases. For more information about importing
these settings, see “Change Plot Style Settings,” in the
User’s Guide.
Graphics Node
Specifies settings for printing vector graphics, raster graphics, and TrueType
text. Depending on the capabilities of the plotter, you can modify color
depth, resolution, and dithering. You can select either color or monochrome
output for vector drawings. When printing raster images on a plotter with
limited memory, you can improve performance by making some changes to
the quality of the printed output. If you use a nonsystem plotter that sup-
ports varying amounts of installed RAM, you can provide that information
to improve performance.
Installed Memory Provides AutoCAD with the amount of total memory
(RAM) installed on a nonsystem plotter. This option is
only available for nonWindows system printers that
accept optional memory. If your plotter has extra
memory, specify the total amount of memory.
■ Total Installed Memory: Specifies the total installed

memory in megabytes. The plotter driver uses the
memory information to determine whether banding
or image quality degradation is required to prevent
the system from running out of memory.
Vector Graphics Provides options for specifying the color depth,
resolution, and dithering of vector output. Some of the
Vector Graphics options are closely interrelated;
changing an option can affect other available options.
■ Color Depth: Displays a list for choosing color depth

for the configured plotter. The color depth options
change as you change the resolution and dithering
values. More color depth uses more memory and
takes longer to plot. You can specify either color or
monochrome output.
■ Resolution: Adjusts the DPI (dots per inch) resolution
of the configured plotter. Changing the DPI
resolution changes the options available in the
Dithering list. A higher resolution setting uses more
memory and takes longer to plot than a lower
resolution setting.
■ Dithering: Specifies a dithering choice for non-pen
based plotters. Some dithering choices cause slower
plotting.
Raster Graphics Specifies trade-offs between plotting speed and output

(Non-Pen Plotters quality when plotting raster objects. If you reduce the
Only) image quality, you increase output speed. If your system
resources are limited, reducing image quality can
reduce the chance of running out of memory while
plotting. These options are only available for raster
devices, not pen plotters.
■ Raster and Shaded/Rendered Viewports: Specifies a

position on the slider that balances output quality
with memory and plotting speed when plotting
raster images and shaded/rendered viewports.
Position the slider at None to disable raster image
printing. Degrading the image quality lets you plot
in less time. Position the slider at Best for the best
output at the expense of memory and plotting
speed.
■ OLE: Specifies a position on the slider that balances
output quality with memory use and plotting speed
when plotting OLE objects. Position the slider at
None to disable OLE object printing. Degrading the
image quality lets you plot in less time. Position the
slider at Best for the best output at the expense of
memory and plotting speed.
■ Trade-off: Specifies where to compromise quality if
you can’t output at the highest quality. Move the
slider to diminish resolution and color.
TrueType Text On Windows system printers, specifies whether to plot
TrueType text as a graphic image or as text. Plotting as
a graphic guarantees that the text prints as displayed, at
the expense of slowing down the plotter and using
more memory. Plotting as TrueType text prints faster
and uses less memory; the plotter may use a different
font for printing.
■ TrueType as Text: Plots TrueType text as text.

■ TrueType as Graphics: Plots TrueType text as graphics.
Merge Control On raster plotters, controls the appearance of lines that

cross. Merge control is not effective if your plotter is
configured to plot everything as black or if you are
using PostScript language.
■ Lines Overwrite: Uses the last plotted line to obscure
the lines under it. Only the topmost line is visible at
the intersection.
■ Lines Merge: Merges the colors of crossing lines.
Note Merge control may appear as an option for system

printers that do not actually support the feature. Please
check your printer’s documentation to determine if merge
control is supported.
Custom Properties Node
Modifies the device-specific properties for the plotter configuration. The
settings for each plotter vary. If the plotter manufacturer has not included a
Custom Properties dialog box for the device driver, the Custom Properties
option is disabled. For some drivers, such as ePlot, this is the only tree view
option that is displayed. For Windows system printers, most of the device-
specific settings are made in this dialog box. For more information about the
custom properties settings for your device, choose Help in the Custom
Properties dialog box.
Initialization Strings Node (for Non-System Plotters Only)
Sets pre-initialization, post-initialization, and termination plotter strings. If
you are plotting to an unsupported plotter in emulation mode, you can
specify ASCII text initialization strings that prepare the plotter for printing,
set device-specific options, and restore the plotter to its original state. Initial-
ization strings should be used by advanced users only.
Pre-Initialization Forces a plotter to emulate another plotter by sending a

pre-initialization string to the plotter before it is
initialized.
The text string is sent literally, except for a back slash
(\). A back slash followed by a number, for example,
\27, is interpreted and sent as a single character whose
value is 27. The number 27 is the escape character. For
example, \27%-12345X@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE =
PostScript\10 sends an HP PJL command to a dual-
language laser printer before it’s initialized and switches
the printer into postscript mode. The \27 sends an
escape character and the \10 sends a line feed character.
The remainder of the text string is sent literally.
Post-Initialization Sets a device-specific option that is not supported
elsewhere in AutoCAD. Specify a post-initialization
string that is sent to the plotter after it is initialized.
Termination Restores the printer to its original state after plotting.
Specify a termination string that is sent to the plotter
after plotting is complete.
User-Defined Paper Sizes and Calibration Node

Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file, calibrates the plotter, and adds, deletes,
revises, or filters custom paper sizes. You can also modify standard paper
sizes. This node accesses the Plotter Calibration and Custom Paper Size
wizards. If the plotter you are using has been calibrated, a Plotter Model
Parameter (PMP) file contains that calibration information. If the PMP file is
not already attached to the PC3 file you are editing, you must create that
association so you can use the PMP file. If the plotter was calibrated from
within the Add-a-Plotter wizard while creating the current PC3 file, the PMP
file is already attached. Use the PMP File Name option under User-defined
Paper Sizes & Calibration to attach a PMP file to, or detach the PMP file from,
the PC3 file you are editing.
Custom Paper Creates a customized paper size or changes the
Sizes (Nonsystem printable area of a standard or nonstandard paper size.
Printers Only) With the Custom Paper Size wizard you can create a
new paper size, or select from a list of available paper
sizes (from a PMP file) if the plotter is not a Windows
system printer. If the plotter is a Windows system
printer, use Custom Properties. You can add, delete, and
edit your paper size.
Each plotter has a maximum printable area determined
by where it grips the paper and how far the pen shuttle
can reach. If you are creating a paper size that is larger
than the paper sizes offered in the Plotter
Configuration Editor, verify that the plotter is capable
of plotting the new dimensions.
■ Add: Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard. When you

add a paper size, you can either create a new paper
size from scratch or create a new one based on the
listing of available paper sizes for the selected
configured plotter. The new paper size is a user-
defined size, not a standard size.
■ Delete: Deletes the selected custom paper size from
the list.
■ Edit: Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard, where you
can modify the selected paper size. You can change
any of the custom paper size settings.
Note For Windows system printers, you can change the

paper size settings and create custom paper sizes only in
the Custom Properties dialog box.
Modify Standard Adjusts the printable area for standard paper sizes to
Paper Sizes match the printer’s capabilities. (You can’t create
custom paper sizes for Windows system printers using
the Plotter Configuration Editor.)
■ List of Standard Paper Sizes: Displays the available set

of standard paper sizes.
■ Modify: Starts the Custom Paper Size wizard. You can
modify Printable Area and File Name. The new paper
size is a user-defined size, not a standard size.
Filter Paper Sizes Filters the list of paper sizes displayed for the plotting
device selected in the Plot and Page Setup dialog boxes.
The list of paper sizes is displayed on the Plot Settings
tab in the Plot dialog box and on the Layout Settings
tab in the Page Setup dialog box. Select the paper sizes
you want to display for this device.
■ Check All: Hides all the paper sizes for the device.
■ Uncheck All: Displays all the paper sizes for the
device.
Plotter Starts the Plotter Calibration wizard. If you need to
Calibration correct scaling discrepancies, you can adjust the plotter
calibration using the Plotter Calibration wizard. See
“Calibrate Plotters and Work with Custom Paper Sizes”
in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.
Note You should only perform a plotter calibration if your
drawings must be exactly to scale and your plotter or
printer produces inaccurate plots. Plotter Calibration
causes AutoCAD to rescale all plots sent to your plotter. If
your plotter provides a calibration utility, it is
recommended that you use it instead of the AutoCAD
utility.
PMP File Attaches a PMP file to or detaches a PMP file from the
PC3 file you are editing. Use the Detach button to break
the association between the PMP file and the PC3 file.
■ Attach: Attaches a PMP file to the PC3 file. You can

reuse calibration and custom paper size data stored
in the PMP file.
■ Save PMP: Saves a PMP file to a new file in the
AutoCAD 2004\drv folder.
■ Detach: Detaches the PMP file associated with the
PC3 file you are editing.
Import
Imports file information from earlier versions of AutoCAD. If you have a PCP
or PC2 file from an earlier version of AutoCAD, you can import some of the
information in those files into a PC3 file. PC3 files store plotter name, port
information, pen optimization level, paper size, and resolution.
Save As
Saves a PC3 File to a new file name.
Defaults
Restores the settings on the Device and Document Settings tab back to the
default settings.
Configure LPT Port Dialog Box

Specifies the time that AutoCAD waits for the plotter buffer to empty before
sending more data. You specify how much time you want to elapse before
AutoCAD prompts you to abort the plot. If your drawings are complex or
your pen speed is very slow, set the timeout value higher than the default (30
seconds). If you begin to receive numerous timeout prompts, your timeout
setting is probably too low.
Timeout
Timeout specifies an amount of time to wait before retrying.
Transmission Specifies the timeout value in milliseconds.
Retry
Settings for COM Port Dialog Box

Specifies the baud rate, protocol, flow control, and hardware handshaking
for serial ports on plotters that support these settings.
Note The settings on your plotter must match the settings in AutoCAD or you
cannot plot.
Baud Rate Specifies the baud rate. Use the fastest available baud
rate.
Protocol Displays the protocol settings available for your plotter.
Use the protocol recommended by your device
manufacturer. For more information see the
documentation for your device.
Flow Control Sets the flow control for your plotter. The default flow
control setting is XON/XOFF (software handshaking)
for compatibility with previous versions of AutoCAD. If
you select Hardware handshaking, you can specify
additional settings in the Advanced Settings for COM
Port dialog box. The following settings correspond to
different pins on the RS232 connector.
Advanced Settings for COM Port Dialog Box

Specifies additional hardware handshaking settings for serial ports.
CTS
Enables Clear To Send handshaking. This monitors pin 5 of a 25-pin serial
port or pin 8 of a 9-pin serial port. CTS is an input bit, monitored for an out-
put from the plotter or printer.
DSR
Enables Data Set Ready handshaking. This monitors pin 6 of a 25-pin serial
port, or pin 6 of a 9-pin serial port. DSR is an input bit, monitored for an out-
put from the printer or plotter.
RLSD
Enables Received Line Signal Detector handshaking. This is sometimes called
DCD or Data Carrier Detect. It is an input pin that can be monitored for an
output from the plotter. It is on pin 8 of a 25-pin serial port and on pin 1 of
a 9-pin serial port.
RTS
Controls the Request To Send output bit. This sends a signal to the printer or
plotter on pin 4 of a 25-pin serial port or on pin 7 of a 9-pin serial port.
Disabled Disables the RTS line when the device is opened.
Enabled Enables the RTS line when the device is opened.
Handshake Enables RTS handshaking. The driver raises the RTS line
when the input buffer is less than one-half full and
lowers the RTS line when the buffer is more than three-
quarters full.
Toggle Specifies that the RTS line is high if bytes are available
for transmission. After all buffered bytes have been
sent, the RTS line is low.
DTR
Controls the Data Terminal Ready output pin. This sends a signal to the
printer or plotter on pin 20 of a 25-pin serial port or on pin 4 of a 9-pin serial
port.
Disabled Disables the DTR line when the device is opened.
Enabled Enables the DTR line when the device is opened.
Handshake Enables DTR handshaking.
See Also
For information about using the Add-a-Plotter wizard, see “Use Plotters and
Printers” in the Driver and Peripheral Guide.
PNGOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in a Portable Network Graphics format
Command line: pngout
AutoCAD creates a Portable Network Graphics file that contains the objects
you select. The file reflects what is displayed on the screen.
POINT
Creates a point object
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Point
Command line: point
Specify a point:
PNGOUT | 763
Points can act as nodes to which you can snap objects. You can specify a full
three-dimensional location for a point. The current elevation is assumed if
you omit the Z coordinate value.
The PDMODE and PDSIZE system variables control the appearance of point
objects. PDMODE values 0, 2, 3, and 4 specify a figure to draw through the
point. A value of 1 specifies that nothing is displayed.
0 1 2 3 4
Specifying the value 32, 64, or 96 selects a shape to draw around the point,
in addition to the figure drawn through it:
32 33 34 35 36
64 65 66 67 68
96 97 98 99 100
PDSIZE controls the size of the point figures, except for PDMODE values 0 and
1. A setting of 0 generates the point at 5 percent of the drawing area height.
A positive PDSIZE value specifies an absolute size for the point figures. A
negative value is interpreted as a percentage of the viewport size. The size of
all points is recalculated when the drawing is regenerated.
After you change PDMODE and PDSIZE, the appearance of existing points
changes the next time AutoCAD regenerates the drawing.
See Also
Commands DDPTYPE specifies a new display mode and size for
points. REGEN regenerates the drawing and refreshes
System Variables PDMODE specifies how point objects are displayed.
PDSIZE specifies the size of point objects created by
POINT.
764 | POINT
POLYGON
Creates an equilateral closed polyline
A polygon is a polyline object. AutoCAD draws polylines with zero width and
no tangent information. You can use the PEDIT command to change these
values.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Polygon
polygons Command line: polygon
Enter number of sides <current>: Enter a value between 3 and 1024 or press
ENTER
Specify center of polygon or [Edge]: Specify a point (1) or enter e
Center of Polygon
Defines the center of the polygon.
Enter an option [Inscribed in circle/Circumscribed about circle] <current>: Enter
i or c or press ENTER
Inscribed in Circle Specifies the radius of a circle on which all vertices of

the polygon lie.
1
Specify radius of circle: Specify a point (2) or enter a value
2
Specifying the radius with your pointing device
determines the rotation and size of the polygon.
radius
Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom
edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle.
Circumscribed Specifies the distance from the center of the polygon to
about Circle the midpoints of the edges of the polygon.
1
Specify radius of circle: Specify a distance
2 Specifying the radius with your pointing device

determines the rotation and size of the polygon.
radius Specifying the radius with a value draws the bottom
edge of the polygon at the current snap rotation angle.
POLYGON | 765
Edge
Defines a polygon by specifying the endpoints of the first edge.
Specify first endpoint of edge: Specify a point (1)
Specify second endpoint of edge: Specify a point (2)
See Also
1 Commands PEDIT edits polylines. SNAP controls the current snap
rotation angle.
edge
2
System Variables POLYSIDES stores the current number of polygon sides.
PREVIEW
Shows how the drawing will look when it is plotted
PREVIEW displays a full-page preview of the current drawing. The preview is
based on the current plot configuration, as defined by the PAGESETUP
command.
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Plot Preview
Command line: preview
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click in the preview area to access the Plot
Preview shortcut menu, which offers additional preview options.
AutoCAD displays the preview, and the cursor changes to a magnifying glass
with plus (+) and minus (–) signs. Dragging the cursor towards the top of the
screen while holding down the pick button enlarges the preview image.
Dragging towards the bottom of the screen reduces the preview image.
Plot Preview Shortcut Menu

Controls Plot Preview options. To access this menu, right-click in the preview
area.
Exit Exits Plot Preview.
Plot Plots the drawing as it is displayed in the full-sheet
preview, and then exits Plot Preview.
766 | PREVIEW
Pan Displays the pan cursor, a hand cursor you can use to
pan the preview image. Hold down the pick button and
pan cursor drag the cursor in any direction. The pan cursor stays
active until you choose Zoom again from the shortcut
menu.
Zoom Displays the zoom cursor, a magnifying-glass cursor
you can use to enlarge or reduce the preview image. To
zoom cursor enlarge the image, hold down the pick button and drag
the cursor towards the top of the screen. To reduce the
image, hold down the pick button and drag the cursor
towards the bottom of the screen.
Zoom Window Zooms to display a specified window. Zoom Window
works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor.
Zoom Original Restores the initial full-sheet preview. Zoom Original
works with both the zoom cursor and the pan cursor.
See Also
See “Preview a Plot” in the User’s Guide.
Commands PLOT plots a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
PROPERTIES
Controls properties of existing objects
Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: Properties
Shortcut menu: Select the objects whose properties you want to view or
modify, right-click in the drawing area, and choose Properties. Alternatively,
you can double-click most objects to display the Properties palette.
Command line: properties
The Properties palette is displayed. The Properties palette lists properties of

the selected object or set of objects.
You can also view or modify properties of third-party application objects that
are based on AutoCAD Application Programming Interface (API) standards.
For more information about using the Properties palette, see “Display and
Change the Properties of Objects” in the User’s Guide.
PROPERTIES | 767
There are eight general properties common to all objects. (See “General Prop-
erties of Objects” on page 770.) All other object properties are specific to the
type of AutoCAD object, and are described in the following sections:
■ Properties palette with no objects selected (see page 771)
■ 3D Orbit View properties (see page 773)
■ 3D Face properties (see page 774)
■ 3D Solid properties (see page 774)
■ Arc properties (see page 775)
■ Attribute Definition properties (see page 776)
■ Block Reference properties (see page 777)
■ Body properties (see page 778)
■ Circle properties (see page 778)
■ Dimension properties (see page 779)
■ Ellipse properties (see page 779)
■ External Reference properties (see page 780)
■ Hatch properties (see page 781)
■ Image properties (see page 782)
■ Leader properties (see page 783)
■ Line properties (see page 784)
■ Multiline properties (see page 785)
■ Multiline text (mtext) properties (see page 785)
■ Multiple Insertion properties (see page 786)
■ Point properties (see page 787)
■ Polyline (2D and Lightweight) properties (see page 787)
■ Polyline (3D) properties (see page 788)
■ Polyline (3D Polygon Mesh) properties (see page 789)
■ Polyline (Polyface Mesh) properties (see page 790)
■ Ray properties (see page 790)
■ Region properties (see page 791)
■ Shape properties (see page 791)
■ Solid properties (see page 792)
■ Spline properties (see page 792)
■ Text properties (see page 793)
■ Tolerance properties (see page 794)
■ Trace properties (see page 795)
■ Viewport properties (see page 796)
■ Xline properties (see page 797)
768 | PROPERTIES
Properties Palette
list of selected objects
toggle value of PICKADD Sysvar button

Select Objects button
Quick Select button
list of object displays a Pick Point button

properties
description of
selected property
Displays the properties of the selected object or set of objects. You can specify
a new value to modify any property that can be changed.
■ When more than one object is selected, the Properties palette displays
only those properties common to all objects in the selection set.
■ When no objects are selected, the Properties palette displays only the gen-
eral properties of the current layer, the name of the plot style table
attached to the layer, the view properties, and information about the UCS.
Object Type Displays the type of object that is selected.

Quick Select Displays the Quick Select dialog box (see page 821). Use
Quick Select to create selection sets based on filtering
criteria.
Select Objects Selects desired objects using any selection method. The
properties common to the selected objects are displayed
in the Properties palette. You can then modify the
properties of the selected objects in the Properties
palette, or you can make other changes to the selected
objects by entering an editing command.
PROPERTIES | 769
Toggle Value of Turns the PICKADD system variable on (1) and off (0).
PICKADD Sysvar When PICKADD is on, each object selected, either
individually or by windowing, is added to the current
selection set. When PICKADD is off, selected objects
replace the current selection set.
The following shortcut menu options are available when you right-click the
title bar.
Move Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to
move the palette. The palette does not dock.
Size Displays a four-headed arrow cursor that you can use to
drag an edge or a corner to make the palette smaller or
larger.
Close Closes the Properties palette.
Allow Docking Controls whether the Properties palette docks when
you drag it over a docking area at the side of the
drawing.
Auto-hide Controls display of the Properties palette. When this
option is checked, only the palette title bar is displayed
when the cursor moves outside the palette. When this
option is not checked, the full palette is displayed when
the cursor moves.
Description Controls display of the description area at the bottom
of the Properties palette. When this option is checked,
descriptions are displayed. When this option is not
checked, the description area is not displayed.
General Properties of Objects

The following general properties are common to most AutoCAD objects and
custom objects (third-party application objects based on AutoCAD API
standards).
Color Specifies the color for objects. Selecting Select Color in
the color list displays the Select Color dialog box (see
COLOR).
You can use the Select Color dialog box to define the
color of objects by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD
Color Index (ACI) colors, True Colors, and Color Book
colors.
770 | PROPERTIES
Layer Specifies the current layer of the object. The list shows
all layers in current drawing (see LAYER).
Linetype Specifies the current linetype of the object. The list
shows all linetypes in the current drawing (see
LINETYPE).
Linetype Scale Specifies the linetype scale factor of the object (see
linetype samples LTSCALE).
Plot Style Lists NORMAL, BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, plus any plot styles
contained in the current plot style table (see
PLOTSTYLE).
Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the object. The list shows all
available lineweights in the current drawing (see
LWEIGHT).
Hyperlink Attaches a hyperlink to a graphical object. If a

description has been assigned to the hyperlink, the
description is displayed. If no description has been
assigned, the URL is displayed (see HYPERLINK).
Thickness Sets the current 3D solid thickness. This property does
not apply to all objects (see CHPROP).
thickness samples
Properties Palette with No Objects Selected

Displays the properties for the current viewport and the current general
properties.
Properties palette with no objects selected
Property name
(by category) Description
General
Color Specifies the color of the object. Select Color in the color list
displays the Select Color dialog box (see COLOR).
Available colors include the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
colors, true colors, and color book colors.
PROPERTIES | 771
Properties palette with no objects selected (continued)
Property name
Layer Specifies the current layer of the object. The list shows all layers in
current drawing (see LAYER).
Linetype Specifies the current linetype of the object. The list shows all
linetypes in the current drawing (see LINETYPE).
Linetype scale Specifies the linetype scale factor of the object (see LTSCALE).
Lineweight Specifies the lineweight of the object. The list shows all available
lineweights in the current drawing (see LWEIGHT).
Thickness Specifies the current thickness.
Plot style
Plot style Lists BYCOLOR, NORMAL, BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, plus any plot
styles contained in the current plot style table (see
PLOTSTYLE).
Plot style table Specifies the current plot style table.
Plot table attached to Determines the name of the space to which the current plot
style table is attached.
Plot table type Displays the type of plot style tables available.
View
Center X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the current viewport’s center

Center Y point (read-only).
Center Z
Height Specifies the height of the current viewport (read-only).
Width Specifies the width of the current viewport (read-only).
Misc
UCS icon on Determines whether the UCS icon is on or off: UCSICON

system variable.
UCS icon at origin Determines whether the user coordinate system icon is at
origin: UCSORG system variable.
UCS per viewport Determines whether the user coordinate system is saved with the
viewport: UCSVP system variable.
772 | PROPERTIES
Properties palette with no objects selected (continued)
Property name
UCS name Specifies the name of a UCS: Lists six orthographic UCSs and UCSs
named by the user.
3D Orbit View Properties

Displays the properties of the current 3D orbit view.
3D Orbit view properties
Property name
Camera
Position X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the camera position: VIEWDIR

Position Y system variable
Position Z
Target X Specify the camera target’s location in the current viewport:

Target Y TARGET system variable
Target Z
Lens length Specifies length of lens in millimeters: LENSLENGTH system

variable
Roll angle Specifies the view twist angle for the current viewport:
VIEWTWIST system variable
Clipping
Front plane Specifies distance of front clipping plane from target plane:
FRONTZ system variable
Back plane Specifies distance of back clipping plane from target plane:
BACKZ system variable
Clipping Determines whether front or back clipping plane is on or off:

VIEWMODE system variable
Shading
Shading mode Determines shading mode in current viewport: SHADEMODE

command
PROPERTIES | 773
3D Orbit view properties (continued)
Property name
Visual Aids
Compass Determines whether compass is on or off: COMPASS

command
Grid Determines whether grid is on or off: GRID command
UCS icon Determines whether UCS icon is visible or hidden: UCSICON

system variable
3D Face Properties
Displays the properties of the selected 3D face.
If the SPLFRAME system variable is set to 1 (on), all edges are visible regardless
of the visibility setting.
3D face properties
Property name
Geometry
Vertex Specifies the current vertex of the 3D face; valid values for
vertex number are 1 through 4
Vertex X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the current vertex

Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Edge 1 Determine whether Edge 1, Edge 2, Edge 3, and Edge 4 are

Edge 2 visible or hidden
Edge 3
Edge 4
3D Solid Properties
Displays only the eight general AutoCAD properties of the selected 3D solid
(such as box, cylinder, sphere, cone, torus, or wedge) because 3D solid
properties are not editable. See “General Properties of Objects” on page 770.
774 | PROPERTIES
Arc Properties
Displays the properties of the selected arc.
Arc properties
Property name
Geometry
Start X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the start point of the arc;
Start Y you cannot change the start point of an arc
Start Z
Center X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the center point of the
Center Y arc
Center Z
End X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the endpoint of the arc;
End Y you cannot change the endpoint of an arc
End Z
Radius Specifies the radius of the arc; valid values are positive,
nonzero numbers
Start angle Specifies the start angle of the arc; valid values are positive or
negative, including zero
End angle Specifies the end angle of the arc; valid values are positive or
negative, including zero
Total angle Specifies the total angle of the arc (read-only)
Arc length Specifies the arc length of the arc (read-only)
Area Specifies the area of the arc as though a straight line connects
the start point and endpoint
Normal X Reports the X,Y,Z values of the normal direction vector

Normal Y
Normal Z
PROPERTIES | 775
Attribute Definition Properties
Displays the properties of the selected attribute definition.
Attribute definition properties
Property name
Text
Tag Specifies the tag string of the attribute; tag value cannot be
null or contain spaces
Prompt Specifies the prompt to be displayed when you insert a block

containing this attribute
Value Specifies the text string of the attribute
Style Specifies the text style of the

attribute: Standard and any style defined in the drawing
Justify Specifies the justification option for the attribute text
Height Specifies the height of the attribute
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the attribute in radians
Width factor Specifies the width factor of the attribute; this property
overrides the DIMSCALE system variable
Obliquing Specifies the slant of the attribute away from its vertical axis
Text alignment X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the alignment point of
Text alignment Y the attribute; a3D WCS coordinate represents the alignment of
Text alignment Z the text object to the block
776 | PROPERTIES
Attribute definition properties (continued)
Property name
Geometry
Position X Specifies the X,Y,Z insertion point coordinate values

Position Y
Position Z
Misc
Upside down Specifies whether the text is upside down or not
Backward Specifies whether the text is backward or not
Invisible Specifies whether Invisible mode is on or off; an invisible

attribute is not displayed or plotted
Constant Specifies whether Constant mode is on or off; a constant

attribute maintains the same value at every insertion
Verify Specifies whether Verify mode is on or off; an attribute set to

Verify prompts for verification that the attribute value is correct
at insertion of the block
Preset Specifies whether Preset mode is on or off; a Preset attribute is

set to its default, or preset, value at insertion of the block
Block Reference Properties

Displays the properties of the selected block.
After you insert a block, you can change the block insertion point and the X,
Y, and Z scale. If the block is a hatch pattern, you can change the insertion
point but not the scale, rotation, rows, columns, or spacing.
PROPERTIES | 777
Block reference properties
Property name
Geometry
Position X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values for the insertion point of
Position Y the block.
Position Z
Scale X Specifies the X,Y,Z scale factors of the block. The dimensions of
Scale Y the object are multiplied by the scale factor: a scale factor
Scale Z greater than 1 enlarges the object; a scale factor between 0
and 1 reduces the object.
Misc
Name Reports the name of the block: the name or file name only, not
the path.
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the block relative to the X axis of
the WCS.
Body Properties
Displays only the eight general AutoCAD properties of the selected body
because properties for body objects are not editable. See “General Properties
of Objects” on page 770.
Circle Properties
Displays the properties of the selected circle.
Circle properties
Property name
Geometry
Center X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the center of the circle
Center Y
Center Z
Radius Specifies the radius of the circle
Diameter Specifies the diameter of the circle
778 | PROPERTIES
Circle properties (continued)
Property name
Circumference Specifies the circumference of the circle
Area Specifies the area of the circle in square drawing units
Normal X Reports the X,Y,Z values of the normal direction vector relative
Normal Y to the WCS; this property specifies a vector, not a location in
Normal Z space
Dimension Properties
Displays the properties of the selected dimension. Each dimension property
is associated with a specific dimension system variable. The dimension
system variable is shown in the description area below the properties list (see
“Dimension Variable Settings for Common Dimensioning Standards” on
page 1239).
Ellipse Properties
Displays the properties of the selected ellipse.
Ellipse properties
Property name
Geometry
Start X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the start point of the ellipse;
Start Y you cannot change the start point of an ellipse
Start Z
Center X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the center point of the ellipse
Center Y
Center Z
End X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the endpoint of the ellipse; you
End Y cannot change the endpoint of an ellipse
End Z
Major radius Specifies the major radius of the ellipse
Minor radius Specifies the minor radius of the ellipse
PROPERTIES | 779
Ellipse properties (continued)
Property name
Radius ratio Specifies the radius ratio of the ellipse; a radius ratio of 1.0
defines a circle
Start angle Specifies the start angle of the ellipse
End angle Specifies the end angle of the ellipse
Major axis vector X Specify the major axis of the ellipse; the longer axis of an
Major axis vector Y ellipse is the major axis
Major axis vector Z
Minor axis vector X Specify the minor axis of the ellipse; the shorter axis of an
Minor axis vector Y ellipse is the minor axis
Minor axis vector Z
Area Specifies the area of the ellipse
External Reference Properties

Displays the properties of the selected external reference (xref).
External reference properties

Property name
Geometry
Insertion point X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the insertion point of the block
Insertion point Y
Insertion point Z
Scale X Specify the X,Y,Z scale factors of the block

Scale Y
Scale Z
Misc
Name Specifies the name of the block
Path Specifies the path of the external reference
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the block
780 | PROPERTIES
Hatch Properties
Displays the properties of the selected hatch pattern.
Hatch properties
Property name
Pattern
Type Specifies the pattern type used for the hatch
Pattern name Specifies the hatch pattern name
Angle Specifies the pattern angle of the hatch: HPANG system

variable
Scale Specifies the pattern scale of the hatch: HPSCALE system

variable
Spacing Specifies the pattern spacing of the hatch: HPSPACE system

variable
ISO pen width Specifies the ISO pen width of an ISO hatch pattern; the first
ten values represent the pen width in hundredths of a
millimeter
Double Determines whether the hatch pattern is double or not:

HPDOUBLE system variable
Misc
Elevation Specifies the current elevation (the Z value) of the hatch
Associative Determines whether the hatch is associative or not; an

associative hatch is updated when its boundaries are modified
Island detection style Sets the style of the hatch
PROPERTIES | 781
Image Properties
Displays the properties of the selected image.
Image properties
Property name
Image Adjust
Brightness Specifies the current brightness value of the raster image; valid
range is 0 through 100. Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for
brightness. IMAGEADJUST command.
Contrast Specifies the current contrast value of the raster image; valid
range is 0 through 100. Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for
contrast. IMAGEADJUST command.
Fade Specifies the current fade value of the raster image; valid range
is 0 through 100. Bitonal images cannot be adjusted for fade.
IMAGEADJUST command.
Geometry
Position X Specify the X,Y,Z origin coordinate (lower-left corner) of the

Position Y raster image.
Position Z
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the raster image.
Width Specifies the width of the raster image.
Height Specifies the height of the raster image in current units.
Scale Specifies the scale factor for the raster image; valid range is a
real number greater than 0.0. A scale factor greater than 1
enlarges the object. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the
object.
Misc
Name Specifies the name of the image file: the file name only, not
the path.
Path Specifies the path to the image file.
Show image Determines whether image is visible or not. Other factors can
also cause an image to be invisible; for example, an image is
not displayed if its layer is turned off or frozen.
782 | PROPERTIES
Image properties (continued)
Property name
Show clipped Turns the clipping boundary on and off. Display the clipped
image using the clipping boundary, or hide the clipping
boundary and display the image with the original boundaries.
Transparency Determines whether transparency for an image is on or off.

Bitonal raster images are images that have only a foreground
and a background color.
Leader Properties
Displays the properties of the selected leader. When you select leader text
(annotation), the Properties palette displays single-line text or multiline text
properties.
Leader properties
Property name
Geometry
Vertex X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the leader start point
Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Misc
Dim style Specifies the dimension style name
Type Specifies the type of the leader
Fit
Dim scale overall Specifies the overall scale factor applied to properties that
specify sizes, distances, or offsets: DIMSCALE system variable
Lines and Arrows
Arrow Specifies the type of leader arrowhead
Arrow size Specifies the size of the leader arrowhead: DIMASZ system
variable
PROPERTIES | 783
Leader properties (continued)
Property name
Dim line LW Specifies the lineweight of the leader line: DIMLWD system
variable
Dim line color Specifies the color of the leader line; available colors include the
255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, true colors, and color
book colors
Text
Text offset Specifies the distance between the end of the leader line and
the beginning of the leader annotation
Text pos vert Specifies the vertical dimension text position relative to the
leader line
Line Properties
Displays the properties of the selected line.
Line properties
Property name
Geometry
Start X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the start point of the
Start Y line
Start Z
End X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the endpoint of the line
End Y
End Z
Delta X Reports the difference in value between the Start and End
Delta Y X,Y,Z coordinates
Delta Z
Length Reports the length of the line
Angle Reports the angle of the line; the angle measurement begins at
the X axis and proceeds counterclockwise
784 | PROPERTIES
Multiline Properties
Displays the properties of the selected multiline.
Multiline properties
Property name
Misc
Mline style Specifies the multiline style name
Multiline Text (Mtext) Properties

Displays the properties of the selected multiline, leader, or dimension text.
Multiline text (mtext) properties
Property name
Text
Contents Specifies the text string
Style Specifies the text style name
Justify Specifies the text justification within the multiline text object
Direction Specifies the horizontal or vertical orientation of the multiline

text object
Width Specifies the width of the rectangular text boundary
Height Specifies the text height; the height of the uppercase text is
measured in drawing units
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the multiline text object relative
to the current UCS X axis
Line space factor Specifies the vertical distance between the baseline of one text
line and the baseline of the next text line
Line space style Specifies the line spacing style of the multiline text object; this
property can be set to allow the spacing between different
lines of text to adjust automatically based on the height of the
largest character in a line of text
PROPERTIES | 785
Multiline text (mtext) properties (continued)
Property name
Geometry
Position X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the insertion point of

Position Y the multiline text object; the insertion point is determined by
Position Z the text justification point
Multiple Insertion Properties

Displays properties of the selected multiple block insertion.
Multiple insertion properties
Property name
Geometry
Insertion point X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate for block insertion point
Insertion point Y
Insertion point Z
Scale X Specify the X, Y, and Z block scale values

Scale Y
Scale Z
Misc
Name Specifies the name of the block object
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the block
Columns Specifies the number of columns in the block array
Column spacing Specifies the column spacing in the block array
Rows Determines the number of rows in the block array
Row spacing Specifies the row spacing in the block array
786 | PROPERTIES
Point Properties
Displays the properties of the selected point object.
Point properties
Property name
Position X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate

Position Y value of the point object;
Position Z changing this value moves the
selected point object
Polyline (2D and Lightweight) Properties

Displays the properties of the selected 2D or lightweight polyline.
Polyline (2D and lightweight) properties
Property name
Geometry
Vertex Specifies the current vertex of the lightweight polyline; enter

the number of a vertex, or click arrows to cycle through all
vertices
Vertex X Specify the X,Y coordinate of the current vertex

Vertex Y
Elevation Specifies the elevation of the polyline (Z coordinate value of

the current vertex)
Start segment width Specifies the width at the start point of the polyline
End segment width Specifies the width at the endpoint of the polyline
Global width Specifies the width for the whole polyline
Area Specifies the area of the lightweight polyline
Misc
Fit/Smooth Specifies the type of line or surface curve fitting; valid settings
are None, Quadratic, Cubic, and Curve Fit
PROPERTIES | 787
Polyline (2D and lightweight) properties (continued)
Property name
Closed Specifies closed or open polyline
Linetype generation Determines whether linetype generation is on or off for the

polyline; does not apply to polylines with tapered segments
Polyline (3D) Properties

Displays the properties of the selected 3D polyline.
Polyline (3D) properties
Property name
Geometry
Vertex Specifies the current vertex of the 3D polyline; enter the

number of a vertex, or click arrows to cycle through all vertices
Vertex X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate for the current vertex

Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Fit/Smooth Specifies the type of line or surface curve fitting; valid settings
are None, Quadratic, and Cubic
Closed Specifies closed or open polyline
788 | PROPERTIES
Polyline (3D Polygon Mesh) Properties
Displays the properties of the selected 3D polygon mesh.
Polyline (3D polygon mesh) properties
Property name
Geometry
Vertex Specifies the current vertex of the polygon mesh.
Vertex X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the current vertex.

Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Mesh
M closed Specifies mesh style for M direction, open or closed. If the

polygon mesh is closed, it is treated as continuous from the
last row to the first row.
N closed Specifies mesh style for N direction, open or closed. If the

polygon mesh is closed, it is treated as continuous from the
last column to the first column.
M density Specifies M density value of the polygon mesh. The initial

value for this property is derived from the value in the SURFU
system variable + 1; valid values are 2 through 256.
N density Specifies N density value of the polygon mesh. The initial value
for this property is derived from the value in the SURFV system
variable + 1; valid values are 2 through 256.
M vertex count Specifies M vertex count of the polygon mesh.
N vertex count Specifies N vertex count of the polygon mesh.
Misc
Fit/Smooth Specifies the type of line or surface curve fitting.
PROPERTIES | 789
Polyline (Polyface Mesh) Properties
Displays the properties of the selected polyface mesh.
Polyline (polyface mesh) properties
Property name
Geometry
Vertex Specifies the current vertex of the polyface mesh
Vertex X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the polyface mesh

Vertex Y
Vertex Z
Mesh
Number of vertices Specifies the number of vertices in the mesh
Number of faces Specifies the number of faces in the mesh
Ray Properties
Displays the properties of the selected ray.
Ray properties
Property name
Geometry
Base point X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the base point of the ray: the
Base point Y point through which the ray passes
Base point Z
Second point X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the second point of the ray
Second point Y
Second point Z
Direction vector X Specify the X,Y,Z direction vectors of the ray

Direction vector Y
Direction vector Z
790 | PROPERTIES
Region Properties
Displays the properties of the selected region.
Region properties
Property name
Area Specifies the area of the region
Perimeter Specifies the perimeter of the region in drawing units
Shape Properties
Displays the properties of the selected shape.
Shape properties
Property name
Geometry
Position X Specify the X,Y,Z coordinate of the insertion point of the shape
Position Y
Position Z
Misc
Name Specifies the name of the shape
Size Specifies the height of the shape
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the shape
Width factor Specifies the width scale factor of the shape
Obliquing Specifies the obliquing angle of the shape: the slant of the
shape away from its vertical axis
PROPERTIES | 791
Solid Properties
Displays the properties of the selected two-dimensional solid.
Solid properties
Property name
Geometry
Vertex Specifies the current vertex of the solid
Vertex X Specify the X,Y coordinate values of the vertex of the solid
Vertex Y
Elevation Specifies the Z coordinate value
Spline Properties
Displays the properties of the selected spline.
Spline properties
Property name
Data Points
Number of control Reports the number of control points of the spline

points
Control points Specifies the current control points of the spline; control points
fine-tune a spline definition by adding weight to a portion of
the spline curve
Control point X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the control point
Control point Y
Control point Z
Weight Specifies the weight vector of the spline
Number of fit points Reports the number of fit points of the spline; fit points define
the path of the spline
Fit point X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the fit point
Fit point Y
Fit point Z
792 | PROPERTIES
Spline properties (continued)
Property name
Misc
Degree Reports the degree of the spline; the order of the spline is
equal to the degree of the spline plus one (+1)
Closed Reports whether the spline is closed; a closed spline is tangent-

continuous at both ends
Planar Reports whether the spline is planar
Start tangent vector X Reports the directional vector representing the start tangent of
Start tangent vector Y the spline
Start tangent vector Z
End tangent vector X Reports the directional vector representing the end tangent of
End tangent vector Y the spline
End tangent vector Z
Fit tolerance Specifies the fit tolerance of the spline; if the fit tolerance is set
to zero, then the spline will pass through all the fit points
Area Reports the area of the spline
Text Properties
Displays the properties of a single-line text object. Changes you make to text
height, rotation, width factor, and obliquing angle affect only the selected
text object and not the text styles of the object.
Text properties
Property name
Text
Contents Specifies the text string; the maximum length is 256

characters
Style Specifies the style name of the text
Justify Specifies the alignment of the text
PROPERTIES | 793
Text properties (continued)
Property name
Height Specifies the height of the text: the height of the uppercase
text, measured in drawing units
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the text relative to the X axis
Width factor Specifies the width scale factor of the text; the width scale
factor is often referred to as the relative X scale factor
Obliquing Specifies the obliquing angle of the text
Text alignment X Reports the X,Y,Z coordinate values of the alignment point
Text alignment Y
Text alignment Z
Geometry
Position X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate of the insertion point

Position Y
Position Z
Misc
Upside down Specifies whether the text is upside down or not
Backward Specifies whether the text is backward or not
Tolerance Properties
Displays the properties of the selected tolerance object.
Tolerance properties
Property name
Lines and Arrows
Dim line color Specifies the color of the feature control frame
Geometry
Position X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values for the insertion point of
Position Y the tolerance object
Position Z
794 | PROPERTIES
Tolerance properties (continued)
Property name
Misc
Dim style Specifies the dimension style of the tolerance
Fit
Dim scale overall Specifies the overall scale factor applied to properties that
specify sizes, distances, or offsets
Text
Text color Specifies the color of the dimension text
Text height Specifies the text height in the tolerance
Text offset Specifies the distance between the end of the leader line and
the beginning of the leader annotation
Text style Specifies the text style used in the tolerance
Text override Specifies the text string in the tolerance
Trace Properties
Displays the properties of the selected trace segment. Traces are planar
objects. When you change a vertex in a trace, the result might not be
apparent if the current UCS is not parallel to the UCS of the trace.
Trace properties
Property name
Geometry
Vertex Specifies the current vertex point of the trace
Vertex X Specify the X,Y coordinate of the current vertex

Vertex Y
Elevation Specifies the Z coordinate location of the trace
PROPERTIES | 795
Viewport Properties
Displays the properties of the selected layout viewport.
Viewport properties
Property name
Geometry
Center X Specifies the X,Y,Z coordinate values for the center of the
Center Y viewport
Center Z
Width Specifies the width of the viewport; the width of a viewport is

the X axis measurement of the area within a viewport frame
Height Specifies the height of the viewport; the height of a viewport is

the Y axis measurement of the viewport frame
Misc
On Determines whether the viewport is on or off
Clipped Determines whether viewport clipping is on or off
Display locked Determines whether viewport locking is on or off
Standard scale Specifies the standard scale for the viewport
Custom scale Specifies a custom scale for the viewport
UCS per viewport Determines whether the UCS is saved with the viewport or not
Shade Plot Specifies how views are plotted
796 | PROPERTIES
Xline Properties
Displays the properties of the selected xline (also called a construction line).
Xline properties
Property name
Geometry
Base point X Specify the point through which the xline passes
Base point Y
Base point Z
Second point X Specify the second point of the xline

Second point Y
Second point Z
Direction vector X Specify the direction for the xline using a vector
Direction vector Y
Direction vector Z
See Also
Commands CHPROP changes an existing object’s color, layer, line-
type, and thickness. COLOR sets the color of new
objects. LAYER controls layer settings. LINETYPE loads,
sets, and creates linetypes. ELEV sets elevation and
extrusion thickness of new objects. STYLE creates text
styles and changes existing text style settings.
System Variables CECOLOR sets the color of new objects. CELTSCALE sets
the linetype scale factor for new objects. CELTYPE sets
the linetype for new objects. CLAYER sets the current
layer. ELEVATION stores the current 3D elevation. PAL-
ETTE-TRANSPARENCY controls the transparency of pal-
ettes. THICKNESS sets the current 3D thickness.
PROPERTIES | 797
PROPERTIESCLOSE
Closes the Properties palette
Command line: propertiesclose
AutoCAD closes the Properties palette.
See Also
Commands PROPERTIES opens the Properties palette.
PSETUPIN
Imports a user-defined page setup into a new drawing layout
Provides the ability to import a saved, named page setup from one drawing
into a new drawing. The settings that are saved in the named page setup can
be applied to layouts in the new drawing.
Command line: psetupin
AutoCAD displays the Select Page Setup From File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box) in which you can select the drawing (.dwg) file whose
page setups you want to import.
If FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero) and you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt,
PSETUPIN displays prompts on the command line (see page 799).
After you select the drawing file you want to use, the Import User Defined
Page Setups dialog box is displayed.
Import User Defined Page Setups Dialog Box

Lists the available page setups that were saved in the drawing you have
selected to import. After selecting a named page setup, you can apply that
setup to a layout in your new drawing.
798 | PROPERTIESCLOSE
PSETUPIN Command Line
If you enter -psetupin at the Command prompt, PSETUPIN displays prompts
Enter file name:
Enter user defined page setup to import or [?]:
PSPACE
Switches from a model space viewport to paper space
Command line: pspace
AutoCAD switches from model space to paper space when you are working
on a layout tab.
paper space model space
On the layout tab, use paper space to create a finished layout of a drawing for
printing. As part of designing your layout, you create layout viewports,
which are windows containing different views of the model. By switching
from paper space to model space (see MSPACE), you can edit the model and
views within the current layout viewport.
PSPACE | 799
You can make a viewport current by double-clicking inside it. You can switch
to paper space by double-clicking an area of the paper space layout that is not
within a viewport.
You can also switch between model space and paper space by choosing
Model or Paper on the status bar.
See Also
For more information about using paper space and model space, see “Work
in Paper Space and Model Space” in the User’s Guide.
viewport. MVIEW creates a new floating viewport and
turns on existing floating viewports. VPLAYER sets the
visibility for layers in specific viewports. ZOOM XP scales
each view relative to paper space units.
System Variables TILEMODE controls paper space access and viewport
type. PSLTSCALE controls paper space linetype scaling.
DIMLFAC controls scaling for linear dimensioning
measurements. VISRETAIN specifies precedence of set-
tings for xref layers. MAXACTVP specifies the maximum
number of viewports to regenerate.
PUBLISH
Creates multi-sheet drawing sets for publishing to a single multi-sheet DWF (Design Web
Format) file, a plotting device, or a plot file
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Publish
Command line: publish
The Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box is displayed. Click Publish to begin
publishing the current drawing sheets to either a DWF file or a plotting
device.
The Publishing Complete dialog box provides information about the pub-
lished drawing set. It displays a message about the status of the publishing
process ("Publish completed successfully" or "Errors and Warnings found,
save and review log file for details"). The dialog box also allows you to save
the log file that was generated during the publishing process, and it allows
you to view the DWF file.
800 | PUBLISH
If you enter -publish at the Command prompt, PUBLISH displays prompts on
the command line.
If you enter +publish on the command line, you can select an existing Draw-
ing Set Descriptions (DSD) file from a standard file selection dialog box. The
Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box automatically opens with the List of
Drawing Sheets, allowing you to republish the selected file.
Publish Drawing Sheets Dialog Box

Specifies drawing sheets you can assemble, reorder, rename, copy, and save
for publishing as a multi-sheet drawing set. You can publish the drawing set
to a DWF file, send it to the plotter for hardcopy output, or save it as a plot
file. This list of drawing sheets can be preserved by saving it to a disk file as
a DSD (Drawing Set Descriptions) file; saved drawing sets can replace or be
appended to the current list for republishing.
PUBLISH | 801
List of Drawing Sheets
Contains the list of drawing sheets to be included for publishing.
Sheet Name Combines the drawing name and the layout name with
a dash (-). You can change the name shown in Sheet
Name by clicking Rename on the shortcut menu.
Drawing sheet names must be unique within a single
DWF file.
Drawing Name Displays the name of the drawing file. Displays the full
path name only if the Display Drawing File Path Names
setting on the shortcut menu is turned on.
Note The Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box is resizable
to accommodate lengthy path names.
Layout Name Displays the selected drawing layout name. Includes
the Model tab only if the Include Model When Adding
Sheets setting on the shortcut menu is turned on.
Page Setup Displays the named page setup for the layout. You can
change the page setup by clicking Change Page Setup
on the shortcut menu. Only Model tab page setups can
be applied to Model tab sheets, and only paper space
page setups can be applied to paper space layouts.
Status Displays a message as each drawing sheet is published.
Add Sheets
Displays a standard file selection dialog box, where you can add sheets to the
list of drawing sheets. The layout names from those files are extracted, and
one sheet is added to the list of drawing sheets for each layout.
The initial drawing sheet names are constructed from the base drawing name
and the layout name, separated by a dash (-).
For example, a drawing sheet constructed for the Plan of Ejector layout in the
Single cavity mold.dwg file would be named Single cavity mold-Plan of Ejector. If
you add a sheet with a name that already exists, you must enter a new draw-
ing sheet name. New drawing sheets are always appended to the end of the
current list. You can drag selections into the list of drawing sheets.
Duplicate Sheet Allows you to rename the sheet that you want to add to
Name the list of drawing sheets if the sheet name already
exists.
802 | PUBLISH
Load List
Displays a standard file selection dialog box if the contents of the List of
Drawing Sheets is empty. You can select a DSD file or a BP3 (Batch Plot) file
to load. Displays the Replace or Append dialog box if a list of drawing sheets
is present in the Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box. You can either replace
the existing list of drawing sheets with the new sheets or append the new
sheets to the current list.
Save List
Displays the Save List dialog box, where you can save the current list of draw-
ings as a DSD (Drawing Set Descriptions) file. DSD files are used to describe
lists of drawing files and selected lists of layouts within those drawing files.
Remove
Deletes the currently selected drawing sheet from the list of sheets.
Remove All
If the current list of drawing sheets has already been saved, deletes all sheets.
If the current list of drawing sheets has not been saved, allows you to first
save the new list before all drawing sheets are removed.
Move Up
Moves the selected drawing sheet up one position in the list.
Move Down
Moves the selected drawing sheet down one position in the list.
Publish To
Defines how you want to publish the list of drawings. You can choose to pub-
lish to either a multi-sheet DWF file (an electronic drawing set) or paper plots
(a paper drawing set).
Multi-Sheet DWF File
Indicates that a single multi-sheet DWF file is generated and saved in the
selected file.
DWF File Name Allows you to name the single multi-sheet DWF file.
Browse Opens the Select DWF File dialog box, where you can
select a target folder for your DWF file.
Password or Contains the password (if any) used for this DWF file.
Phrase Used to DWF passwords are case sensitive. The password or
Protect This DWF phrase can be made up of letters, numbers,
File punctuation, or non-ASCII characters.
Note If you lose or forget the password, it cannot be
recovered. Keep a list of passwords and their
corresponding DWF file names in a safe place.
PUBLISH | 803
Confirm Provides a space to confirm the password that you
Password entered in the Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box. If the
two passwords do not match, you must click Publish
again to re-enter the correct password.
Plotters Named in Page Setups
Indicates that the output devices given for each drawing sheet in the page
setups will be used.
Output Folder Plots the drawing set to the device selected in each
Name (Used for layout's page setup or plots to a file using the selected
Plot-to-File) output folder name.
Browse Opens a Select Folder dialog box, where you can select
a target folder for the generated DWF file.
Publish
Begins the publishing operation. Creates a single-sheet DWF file or a single
multi-sheet DWF file, or plots to a device or file depending on the radio but-
ton selected in the Publish To area.
If a drawing sheet fails to plot, Design Publisher continues plotting the
remaining sheets in the drawing set. A log file is created that contains
detailed information, including any errors or warnings encountered during
the publishing process.
You can stop publishing after a sheet has finished plotting. If you stop
publishing a multi-sheet DWF file before it is complete, no output file is gen-
erated. After publishing is complete, the Status field is updated to show the
results.
Publish Drawing Sheets Shortcut Menu
Controls the contents of the list under Drawing Sheets. To access this menu,
right-click while the mouse pointer is positioned over the list.
Rename Sheet Allows in-place editing of the selected drawing sheet
name.
Change Page Opens the Change Page Setup dialog box, where you
Setup can choose a page setup from the selected drawing
orfrom another drawing template.
Copy Selected Allows single or multiple drawing sheets to be copied.
Sheets The new drawing sheet copies are added and
highlighted at the end of the sheet list. A unique name
is created by the addition of -copy(n) at the end of the
sheet name. Each time you copy the same sheet, the n
is incremented by 1.
804 | PUBLISH
Display Drawing Specifies whether the full path name or just the file
File Path Names name is included in the list of drawing sheets. A check
mark indicates the option is turned on.
Inclue Layouts Specifies whether all layouts are included when
When Adding drawing sheets are added. A check mark indicates the
Sheets option is turned on.
Include Model Specifies whether the model is included when drawing
When Adding sheets are added. A check mark indicates the option is
Sheets turned on.
Change Page Setup Dialog Box

Allows you to change the page setup settings associated with a drawing sheet
layout. All page setups that you apply to the current layout are saved to the
DWF file output.
Note Paper space geometry in a layout is fixed when the layout is created. It is
important that you change the page setup for each layout depending on your
desired output. Only Model tab page setups can be applied to Model tab sheets,
and only paper space page setups can be applied to paper space layouts.
PUBLISH | 805
Choose a Page Setup
Lists the named page setups from the chosen drawing (either the selected
drawing or from another drawing), depending on the option selected in the
From area. If a page setup from another drawing file is chosen, it will be con-
structed by including both the page setup name and the full path name to
the drawing separated by a vertical bar.
For example, a page setup named ANSI D on HP2600 and Single cavity
mold.dwg would appear as ANSI D on HP2600|C:\Projects\San Rafael\Single
cavity mold.dwg.
From
Allows you to select a page setup either from the current drawing or another
drawing or template.
Selected Drawing Selects a named page setup from the selected drawing
sheet. Double-clicking on an entry will select that entry,
apply the chosen page setup to the selected sheets, and
then close the dialog box.
Another Drawing Selects a named page setup from an alternate drawing
or Template or template file.
Browse Opens the Select Drawings dialog box so you can select
a drawing file and its associated named page setups.
Publishing Complete Dialog Box

Displayed when publishing is complete.

Save Log File Saves the log file that was created during the publishing
process.
Note The log file provides a record of what was actually
published and the sheets that may need to be corrected.
You lose these details if you close the Publishing Complete
dialog box without saving a log file.
Log files are saved as CSV (Comma Separated Values)
files that can be viewed in a spreadsheet program.They
provide descriptive information about the published
drawing set sheets. This information includes a
description of the sheet, a detailed status message, and
any warning message.
806 | PUBLISH
View DWF File Starts Autodesk Express Viewer. You can view your
generated multi-sheet DWF file. (This option is not
available if Publish to Multi-Sheet DWF output was not
selected.)
PUBLISH Command Line

Command line: -publish
If you enter -publish at the Command prompt, -PUBLISH displays prompts on

the command line.
The -publish command provides a scriptable interface for Design Publisher.
It also provides a simplified method for regenerating DWF files or plotted
output from existing DSD files.
With the FILEDIA system variable set to one (1), enter -publish at the Com-
mand prompt. The Select List of Sheets dialog box is displayed. Select the
DSD file that you want to republish.
With the FILEDIA system variable set to zero (0) (or if you are running a script
or other automation), enter -publish at the Command prompt. The following
Enter name of sheet list <path file name.dsd>: Press ENTER for the current drawing
or enter the sheet list name.
Note The bracketed text <DSD file name> contains the name of the DSD file
used when this command was last run. The bracketed text area is blank if no
previous name exists. If you enter a tilde (~) for the file name, the standard file
selection dialog box is displayed regardless of the FILEDEA setting.
The file name is validated and the list of sheets is loaded.

Once a DWF file generation starts, each drawing sheet name is listed along
with an appropriate message. Drawing sheets not found or not initialized are
indicated with an error message. Sheets plotted or not plotted are also
marked with an appropriate message.
When the final DWF file has been created, the output DWF file name is dis-
played along with an indication of any errors encountered.
PUBLISH | 807
A log file is written during DWF file generation. The log file contains the
drawing sheet name, layout name, full drawing name, path name, and status.
The log file name is derived from the name of the sheet list file with CSV
replacing the DSD file extension.
Note Any existing log file is overwritten by a new log file without any warning
message being displayed.
See Also
For more information about Design Publisher, see “Publish Drawing Sets” in
the User’s Guide.
Commands PLOT controls the device settings for plotting to a
plotter, printer, or file. PLOTTERMANAGER displays the
Plotter Manager, where you can add or edit a plotter
configuration.
System Variables FILEDIA suppresses display of the file dialog boxes.
PUBLISHTOWEB
Creates HTML pages that include images of selected drawings
File menu: Publish to Web
Command line: publishtoweb
The Publish to Web wizard is displayed.
Publish to Web Wizard

Creates a formatted HTML page. You can choose from a number of different
formatting options that control the layout of your completed HTML page.
After creating an HTML page, you can use the wizard to publish the page to
an Internet or intranet location.
You can also use the wizard to modify existing HTML pages that were created
using the PUBLISHTOWEB command.
You can customize the template you use for your web page. For more
information about customizing templates, see “Customize a Publish to Web
Template” in the Customization Guide.
See Also
For information about creating DWF files, see “Use the Publish to Web Wiz-
ard to Create Web Pages” in the User’s Guide.
808 | PUBLISHTOWEB
PURGE
Removes unused named items, such as block definitions and layers, from the drawing
File menu: Drawing Utilities ➤ Purge
Command line: purge
The Purge dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -purge at the Command prompt, PURGE displays prompts on the
Purge Dialog Box

Displays items that can be purged.
PURGE | 809
View Items You Can Purge
Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current
drawing that you can purge.
Items Not Used in Lists the named objects that are not used in the current
Drawing drawing and that can be purged. You can list the items
for any object type by clicking the plus sign or by
double-clicking the object type. You purge items by
selecting the item to purge.
Purge Nested Items removes items only when you
choose
■ All Items or Blocks in the tree view

■ The Purge All button
Confirm Each Displays the Confirm Purge dialog box when you purge
Item to Be an item.
Purged
Purge Nested Removes all unused named objects from the drawing
Items even if they are contained within or referenced by other
unused named objects. The Confirm Purge dialog box
is displayed, and you can cancel or confirm the items to
be purged.
View Items You Cannot Purge

Switches the tree view to display a summary of named objects in the current
drawing that you can’t purge.
Items Currently Lists named objects that cannot be removed from the
Used in Drawing drawing. Most of these objects are currently used in the
drawing or are default items that cannot be removed.
When you select individual named objects,
information about why you can’t purge the item is
displayed below the tree view.
810 | PURGE
PURGE Command Line
If you enter -purge at the Command prompt, -PURGE displays prompts on
the command line.
Enter type of unused objects to purge [Blocks/Dimstyles/LAyers/LTypes/
Plotstyles/SHapes/textSTyles/Mlinestyles/All]: Enter an object type or enter a to
purge all named object types
Enter name(s) to purge <*>: Enter one or more names, or press ENTER to purge
all items
Verify each name to be purged? [Yes / No]: Enter y to verify each object that is
to be purged, or enter n to purge the objects without any verification
-PURGE removes only one level of reference. Repeat -PURGE until there are no
unreferenced named objects. You can use PURGE or -PURGE at any time
during a drawing session.
PURGE | 811
812
QDIM
Quickly creates a dimension
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Quick Dimension
Command line: qdim
Use QDIM to quickly create or edit a series of dimensions. The command is

particularly useful for creating a series of baseline or continued dimensions,
or for dimensioning a series of circles and arcs.
Select geometry to dimension: Select the objects you want to dimension or the
dimensions you want to edit and press ENTER
Specify dimension line position, or [Continuous/Staggered/Baseline/Ordinate/
Radius/Diameter/datumPoint/Edit/seTtings] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
Continuous Creates a series of continued dimensions.

Staggered Creates a series of staggered dimensions.
Baseline Creates a series of baseline dimensions.
Ordinate Creates a series of ordinate dimensions.
Radius Creates a series of radius dimensions.
Diameter Creates a series of diameter dimensions.
Datum Point Sets a new datum point for baseline and ordinate
dimensions.
Select new datum point: Specify a point
AutoCAD® returns to the previous prompt.

Edit Edits a series of dimensions. AutoCAD prompts you to
add or remove points from existing dimensions.
Indicate dimension point to remove, or [Add/eXit]
<eXit>: Specify a point, enter a, or press ENTER to return
to the previous prompt
QDIM | 813
Settings Sets the default object snap for specifying extension
line origins. The following prompt is displayed:
Associative dimension priority [Endpoint/Intersection]
See Also
See “Dimensions and Tolerances” in the User’s Guide.
QLEADER
Creates a leader and leader annotation
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Leader
Command line: qleader
Use QLEADER to quickly create leaders and leader annotation. You can use the
Leader Settings dialog box (see page 816) to customize the command so that
it prompts you for the number of leader points and the annotation type
suited to your drawing needs. You can use QLEADER to
■ Specify leader annotation and annotation format

■ Set the location where leaders attach to multiline text annotation
■ Limit the number of leader points
■ Constrain the angle of the first and second leader segments
If associative dimensioning is turned on with DIMASSOC, the leader start

point can be associated with a location on an object. If the object is relocated,
the arrowhead remains attached to the object and the leader line stretches,
but the text or feature control frame remains in place.
Specify first leader point, or [Settings] <Settings>: Specify the first leader point,
or press ENTER to specify leader settings
First Leader Point

Specify next point: Specify the next leader point
Specify next point: Specify the next leader point, or press ENTER to specify the
leader annotation
814 | QLEADER
The Number of Points setting on the Leader Line & Arrow tab of the Leader
Settings dialog box determines the number of leader points AutoCAD
prompts you to specify.
The prompt that is displayed next depends on settings selected on the
Annotation tab in the Leader Settings dialog box.
If Mtext and Prompt for Width are selected on the Annotation tab, AutoCAD
displays the following prompts:
Specify the width <current>: Specify the multiline text width by creating a text
boundary or entering a value
If you set the text width value to 0.00, the width of the multiline text is
unlimited.
Enter first line of annotation text: Enter the first line of text
Press ENTER once to enter another line of text, or press ENTER again to
complete the command.
If Copy an Object is selected on the Annotation tab, AutoCAD displays the
following prompt:
Select an object to copy: Select a text object, block reference, or tolerance object
(feature control frame)
AutoCAD attaches the object to the leader.

If Tolerance is selected on the Annotation tab, AutoCAD displays the Geo-
metric Tolerance dialog box (see page 1031). Use the dialog box to create the
tolerance feature control frame. When you choose OK, AutoCAD attaches
the feature control frame to the leader.
If Block Reference is selected on the Annotation tab, AutoCAD displays the
following prompts:
Enter block name or [?]: Enter the name, or enter ? to display a list of blocks
defined in the drawing
Specify insertion point or [Scale/X/Y/X/Rotate/PScale/PX/PY/PZ/PRotate]:
Specify the block insertion point or enter an option
For a description of the insertion options, see -INSERT.

If None is selected on the Annotation tab, no annotation prompts are
displayed.
QLEADER | 815
Settings
Displays the Leader Settings dialog box.
Leader Settings Dialog Box

Customizes the QLEADER command and sets leader and annotation format.
Annotation Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)

Sets the leader annotation type, specifies multiline text options, and
indicates whether you want to reuse the annotation.
Annotation Type
Sets the leader annotation type. The type you select changes the QLEADER
leader annotation prompt.
MText Prompts you to create multiline text (mtext)
annotation.
Copy an Object Prompts you to copy a multiline text, single-line text,
tolerance, or block reference object.
Tolerance Displays the Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to
create a feature control frame to attach to the leader.
Block Reference Prompts you to insert a block reference.
None Creates a leader with no annotation.
MText Options
Sets multiline text options. The options are available only when the multi-
line text annotation type is selected.
816 | QLEADER
Prompt for Width Prompts you to specify the width of the multiline text
annotation.
Always Left Justify Left-justifies the multiline text annotation, regardless
of leader location.
Frame Text Places a frame around multiline text annotation.
Annotation Reuse
Sets options for reusing leader annotation.
None Does not reuse leader annotation.
Reuse Next Reuses the next annotation you create for all
subsequent leaders.
Reuse Current Reuses current annotation. AutoCAD automatically
selects this option when you reuse annotation after
selecting Reuse Next.
Leader Line & Arrow Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)

Sets the leader line and arrowhead format.
Leader Line
Sets the leader line format.
Straight Creates straight-line segments between the points you
specify.
Spline Creates a spline object using the leader points you
specify as control points.
QLEADER | 817
Arrowhead
Defines the leader arrowhead. Select an arrowhead from the Arrowhead list.
The arrowheads are the same ones that are available for dimension lines. See
DIMSTYLE. If you choose User Arrow, a list of blocks in the drawing is
displayed. Select one of the blocks to use it as a leader arrowhead.
Number of Points
Sets the number of leader points that QLEADER prompts you to specify before
prompting for the leader annotation. For example, if you set the points to 3,
QLEADER automatically prompts you to specify the annotation after you
specify two leader points. Set the number to one more than the number of
leader segments you want to create. If you set the option to No Limit,
QLEADER prompts for leader points until you press ENTER .
Angle Constraints
Sets angle constraints for the first and second leader lines.
First Segment Sets the angle of the first leader segment.
Second Segment Sets the angle of the second leader segment.
Attachment Tab (Leader Settings Dialog Box)

Sets the attachment location for leader lines and multiline text annotation.
This tab is available only when Mtext is selected on the Annotation tab.
Top of Top Line Attaches the leader line at the top of the top multiline
text line.
818 | QLEADER
Middle of Top Attaches the leader line at the middle of the top
Line multiline text line.
Middle of Attaches the leader line at the middle of the multiline
Multiline Text text.
Middle of Bottom Attaches the leader line at the middle of the bottom
Line multiline text line.
Bottom of Attaches the leader line at the bottom of the bottom
Bottom Line multiline text line.
Underline Underlines the bottom multiline text line.
Bottom Line
QNEW
Starts a new drawing with the option of using a default drawing template file
Standard toolbar:
Command line: qnew
QNEW starts a new drawing from the current default drawing template file
and folder path specified in the Options dialog box on the Files tab. You can
set the default drawing template file to any drawing template file or to None.
When a default drawing template file is set to None or is not specified, QNEW
displays the Select Template File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box).
The behavior of the QNEW command is determined by the Startup setting on
the System tab of the Options dialog box.
■ Show the Startup Dialog Box: Displays the Create New Drawing dialog box.
■ Do Not Show the Startup Dialog Box: Displays the Select Template dialog box
(a standard file selection dialog box) or starts the new drawing using the
default drawing template file.
If the system variable, FILEDIA, is set to 0 instead of 1, a prompt on the com-

mand line is displayed (see page 612). If you set FILEDIA to 0, this prompt is
displayed regardless of the Startup setting.
QNEW | 819
See Also
Commands NEW creates a new drawing from a selected drawing
template file or the Startup dialog box. OPTIONS con-
trols several settings including the path and file name
of the default drawing template file.
System Variables STARTUP controls whether a startup dialog box is used
or whether a drawing template file is used.
QSAVE
Saves the current drawing using the file format specified in the Options dialog box
Standard toolbar:
File menu: Save
Command line: qsave
The QSAVE command is equivalent to clicking Save on the File menu.

If the drawing is named, AutoCAD saves the drawing using the file format
specified on the Open and Save tab of the Options dialog box and does not
request a file name. If the drawing is unnamed, AutoCAD displays the Save
Drawing As dialog box (see SAVEAS) and saves the drawing with the file name
and format you specify.
If the drawing is read-only, use the SAVEAS command to save the changed file
under a different name.
See Also
Commands QUIT exits AutoCAD and prompts you to save changes
to the current drawing. SAVE saves the drawing under
the current file name or a specified name. SAVEAS saves
an unnamed drawing with a file name or renames the
current drawing.
QSELECT
Creates a selection set based on filtering criteria
QSELECT creates a selection set that either includes or excludes all objects
matching the filtering criteria you specify. QSELECT can apply to the entire
drawing or to an existing selection set. The selection set created by QSELECT
replaces or is appended to the current selection set. If you have partially
820 | QSAVE
opened the current drawing, QSELECT does not consider objects that you
have not loaded. For more advanced filtering operations, see FILTER.
Note QSELECT supports custom objects (created by another application) and

their properties. If a custom object uses properties other than AutoCAD proper-
ties, the custom object's source application must be running in order for the
properties to be available to QSELECT.
In addition to the following access methods, you can also access QSELECT by
choosing the Quick Select button in the Properties palette (see page 769).
Tools menu: Quick Select
and choose Quick Select.
Command line: qselect
The Quick Select dialog box is displayed.
Quick Select Dialog Box

Specifies the filtering criteria and how you want AutoCAD to create the
selection set from that criteria.
QSELECT | 821
Apply To Applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing or to
the current selection set (if one exists). To select a group
of objects to which you want to apply the filtering
criteria, use the Select Objects button. When you have
finished selecting objects, press ENTER to redisplay the
dialog box. AutoCAD sets Apply To to Current
Selection.
If Append to Current Selection Set is selected, AutoCAD
applies the filtering criteria to the entire drawing.
Select Objects Temporarily closes the Quick Select dialog box so that
you can select the objects to which you want to apply
the filter criteria. Press ENTER to return to the Quick
Select dialog box. AutoCAD changes the Apply To box
to show Current Selection. The Select Objects button is
available only when you select Include In New
Selection Set and clear Append to Current Selection Set.
Object Type Specifies the type of objects to include in the filtering
criteria. If the filtering criteria are being applied to the
entire drawing, the Object Type list includes all object
types, including custom. Otherwise, the list includes
only the object types of the selected objects.
If an application such as Autodesk Map was used to add
a feature classification to an object, you can select a
classification.
Properties Specifies the object property for the filter. This list
includes all searchable properties for the selected object
type. The property you select determines the options
available in Operator and Value.
If an application such as Autodesk Map was used to add
a feature classification to an object, you can select a
classification property.
822 | QSELECT
Operator Controls the range of the filter. Depending on the
selected property, options may include Equals, Not
Equal To, Greater Than, Less Than, and *Wildcard
Match. Greater Than and Less Than are not available
for some properties. *Wildcard Match is available only
for text fields that can be edited. For information about
the available wild-card characters, see the table in
“Filter and Sort the List of Layers” in the User’s Guide.
Value Specifies the property value for the filter. If known
values for the selected property are available, Value
becomes a list in which you can choose a value.
Otherwise, enter a value.
How to Apply Specifies whether you want the new selection set to
include or exclude objects that match the specified
filtering criteria. Choose Include in New Selection Set to
create a new selection set composed only of objects that
match the filtering criteria. Choose Exclude from New
Selection Set to create a new selection set composed
only of objects that do not match the filtering criteria.
Append to Specifies whether the selection set created by QSELECT
Current Selection replaces or is appended to the current selection set.
Set
Note QSELECT supports custom objects (objects created by another applica-

tion) and their properties. If a custom object uses properties other than AutoCAD
properties, the custom object’s source application must be running in order for
the properties to be available to QSELECT.
See Also
See “Customize Object Selection” in the User’s Guide.
Commands FILTER creates reusable filters to select objects based on
properties. SELECT places selected objects in the Previ-
ous selection set. PROPERTIES displays the Properties
palette where you can view or modify properties of the
selected objects.
QSELECT | 823
QTEXT
Controls the display and plotting of text and attribute objects
When QTEXT (Quick Text) is on, AutoCAD displays each text and attribute
object as a bounding box around the text object. Turning QTEXT mode on
reduces the time it takes AutoCAD to redraw and regenerate drawings that
contain many text objects.
QTEXT off
Command line: qtext (or 'qtext for transparent use)
See Also
QTEXT on
Commands OPTIONS controls Quick Text mode using a dialog box.
In the Options dialog box, choose the Display tab.
System Variables QTEXTMODE stores the Quick Text mode setting.
QUIT
Exits AutoCAD
File menu: Exit
Command line: quit
Quits AutoCAD if there have been no changes since the drawing was last
saved. If the drawing has been modified, AutoCAD prompts you to save or
discard the changes before quitting.
You can quit a file that has been opened in read-only mode if you have made
no modifications or if you are willing to discard them. To save modifications
to a read-only drawing, use the SAVEAS command to save the drawing under
another name.
See Also
See “Start and Save a Drawing,” in the User’s Guide.
Commands QSAVE saves named drawings without requesting a file
name. SAVE saves the current drawing to a file name.
SAVEAS renames the current drawing and saves it to a
file name.
824 | QTEXT
RAY
Creates a semi-infinite line
RAY creates semi-infinite lines commonly used as construction lines. A ray
has a finite starting point and extends to infinity.
Draw menu: Ray
Command line: ray
ray Specify start point: Specify a point (1)

Specify through point: Specify a point for the ray to pass through (2)
2 AutoCAD® draws a ray and continues to prompt for through points so you
can create multiple rays. The ray is extended to the edge of the display in the
1
direction defined by the starting point and the through point. Press ENTER
to end the command.
See Also
See “Draw Construction Lines (and Rays)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands PROPERTIES modifies a ray’s properties. LINE creates
straight line segments. MLINE creates multiple parallel
lines. PLINE creates two-dimensional polylines. XLINE
creates infinite lines.
RECOVER
Repairs a damaged drawing
If AutoCAD determines that a drawing you’re opening is damaged based on
the drawing’s header information, OPEN automatically repairs it.
File menu: Drawing Utilities ➤ Recover
Command line: recover
In the Select File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), enter the
drawing file name or select the damaged drawing file. AutoCAD begins
recovery and displays the results in the text window.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), RECOVER displays the following prompt on
the command line.
Enter name of drawing file to recover:
RAY | 825
Enter ~ (tilde) at the prompt to ignore FILEDIA and display the Recover
Drawing dialog box.
Note The RECOVER command performs recoveries or audit operations on DWG

files only. Performing a recover on a DXF file will only open the file.
See Also
For more information about recovering a damaged drawing and an explana-
tion of the report AutoCAD displays, see “Recover a Damaged File” in the
User’s Guide.
Commands AUDIT evaluates the integrity of a drawing manually.
OPEN opens an existing drawing file and repairs
damage, if necessary.
RECTANG
Draws a rectangular polyline
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Rectangle
Command line: rectang or rectangle
Specify first corner point or [Chamfer/Elevation/Fillet/Thickness/Width]: Enter

an option or specify a point
First Corner
2 Specifies a corner point of the rectangle.
Specify other corner point or [Dimensions]: Specify a point (2) or enter d
1
Other Corner Creates a rectangle using the specified points as
diagonally opposite corners. The sides of the rectangle
are parallel to the X and Y axis of the current UCS.
826 | RECTANG
Dimensions Creates a rectangle using length and width values. A
second specified point locates the rectangle in one of
four locations relative to the first corner point.
Specify length for rectangles <0.0000> Enter the length
of the rectangle
Specify width for rectangles <0.0000> Enter the width of
the rectangle
Specify other corner point or [Dimensions] Specify a
point; move the cursor to display one of four possible loca-
tions for the rectangle and click the one that you want
Chamfer
Sets the chamfer distances for the rectangle.
Specify first chamfer distance for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or
press ENTER
Specify second chamfer distance for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or
press ENTER
The values become the current chamfer distances for subsequent RECTANG
commands.
Elevation
Specifies the elevation of the rectangle.
Specify the elevation for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current elevation for subsequent RECTANG

commands.
Fillet
Specifies the fillet radius of the rectangle.
Specify fillet radius for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current fillet radius for subsequent RECTANG
commands.
RECTANG | 827
Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the rectangle.
Specify thickness for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current thickness for subsequent RECTANG

commands.
Width
Specifies the polyline width of the rectangle to be drawn.
Specify line width for rectangles <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
The value becomes the current polyline width for subsequent RECTANG
commands.
REDEFINE
Restores AutoCAD internal commands overridden by UNDEFINE
Command line: redefine
Enter command name: Enter the name of an AutoCAD command turned off by
the UNDEFINE command
If a command has been undefined, you can still use it if you precede the
command name with a period.
See Also
See “Redefining AutoCAD Commands” in the Visual LISP Developer’s Guide.
REDO
Reverses the effects of previous UNDO or U commands
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Redo
Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, right-
click in the drawing area and choose Redo.
Command line: redo
828 | REDEFINE
REDO reverses the effects of a single UNDO or U command. REDO must
immediately follow the U or UNDO command.
See Also
Commands U reverses the effect of the previous command. UNDO
reverses the effect of multiple commands and provides
control over the undo feature.
REDRAW
Refreshes the display in the current viewport
Command line: redraw (or 'redraw for transparent use)
AutoCAD redraws the current viewport, removing marker blips and display
artifacts (stray pixels) left by editing commands.
before REDRAW after REDRAW
See Also
Commands REDRAWALL refreshes multiple viewports. REGEN regen-
erates the drawing and refreshes the current viewport.
REGENALL regenerates the drawing and refreshes all
viewports. REGENAUTO controls automatic
regeneration of a drawing.
System Variables SORTENTS controls object sort order operations.
REDRAW | 829
REDRAWALL
Refreshes the display in all viewports
View menu: Redraw
Command line: redrawall (or 'redrawall for transparent use)
AutoCAD redraws all viewports, removing marker blips and display artifacts
(stray pixels) left by editing commands.
before REDRAWALL after REDRAWALL
See Also
Commands REDRAW refreshes the display in the current viewport.
REGEN regenerates the drawing and refreshes the cur-
rent viewport. REGENALL regenerates the drawing and
refreshes all viewports. REGENAUTO controls automatic
regeneration of a drawing.
REFCLOSE
Saves back or discards changes made during in-place editing of a reference (an xref or a
block)
REFCLOSE prompts you to save back or discard changes made to objects in an
external reference or block reference from within the current drawing. When
you save back changes, changes made to the objects in the reference are
saved without actually opening the reference drawing or re-creating the
block. You can also save and discard edits by using the options on the Modify
menu or the Refedit toolbar. The Refedit toolbar is activated after a reference
is selected for editing; the toolbar is dismissed after changes to the reference
are saved or discarded.
830 | REDRAWALL
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit ➤ Save Reference Edits, or
In-place Xref and Block Edit ➤ Discard Reference Edits
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected during in-place reference editing,
right-click in the drawing area and choose Close Refedit Session.
Command line: refclose
Enter option [Save/Discard reference changes] <Save>:
Save Saves back to the xref source drawing or to the block

definition in the current drawing all changes made to
objects in the working set. If you remove an object from
the working set and save changes, the object is deleted
from the reference and added to the current drawing.
The Save Back Changes to Reference button on the
Refedit toolbar automatically saves reference editing
changes.
Discards the working set; the source drawing or block
Discard
definition is returned to its original state. Any changes
Reference
you make to objects in the current drawing (not in the
Changes
xref or block) are not discarded. If you delete any object
that is not in the working set, the object is not restored
even if you choose to discard changes. The Discard
Changes to Reference button on the Refedit toolbar
automatically discards reference editing changes
without using REFCLOSE.
If you save or discard changes with REFCLOSE, you can still use the UNDO
command to return to the reference editing session. If you have made
unwanted changes to an xref and already saved back the changes, use UNDO
to undo the unwanted changes; then use REFCLOSE to save back changes and
restore the xref to its original state.
Note When you edit and save xrefs in place in a drawing, the preview image
for the original reference drawing is no longer available unless you open and
save the drawing again.
See Also
Commands REFEDIT edits a reference in place. REFSET adds or
removes objects from a working set.
REFCLOSE | 831
REFEDIT
Selects a reference for editing
REFEDIT prompts you to select an external reference or block reference to edit
from within the current drawing. You can make minor changes to xrefs and
blocks without having to open the reference drawing or explode and redefine
the block.
Refedit toolbar:
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit ➤ Edit Reference
Command line: refedit
Select reference: Select an xref or a block in the current drawing
AutoCAD displays the Reference Edit dialog box.

If you enter -refedit at the Command prompt, REFEDIT displays prompts on
Reference Edit Dialog Box

Specifies the reference to edit. To select a reference to edit, select an object in
the reference. If you select an object that is part of one or more nested
references, the nested references are displayed in the dialog box.
Identify Reference Tab (Reference Edit Dialog Box)

Provides visual aids for identifying the reference to edit and controls how the
reference is selected.
832 | REFEDIT
Reference Name Displays the reference selected for in-place editing and
any references nested within the selected reference.
Nested references are displayed only if the selected
object is part of a nested reference. If multiple
references are displayed, choose a specific xref or block
to modify. Only one reference can be edited in place at
a time. References that are inserted into a drawing using
MINSERT cannot be selected for in-place reference
editing.
Preview Displays a preview image of the currently selected
reference.
The preview image displays the reference as it was last
saved in the drawing. The reference preview image is
not updated when changes are saved back to the
reference.
REFEDIT | 833
Path Displays the file location of the selected reference. If the
selected reference is a block, no path is displayed.
Automatically Controls whether nested objects are included
Select All Nested automatically in the reference editing session.
Objects
If this option is checked, all the objects in the selected
reference will be automatically included in the
reference editing session.
Prompt to Select Controls whether nested objects must be selected
Nested Objects individually in the reference editing session.
If this option is checked, after you close the Reference
Edit dialog box and enter the reference edit state,
AutoCAD prompts you to select the specific objects in
the reference that you want to edit.
Select nested objects: Select objects within the reference that
you want to edit
Settings Tab (Reference Edit Dialog Box)

Provides options for editing references.
Create Unique Controls whether layers and other named objects

Layer, Style, and extracted from the reference are uniquely altered.
Block Names
If selected, named objects in xrefs are altered (names are
prefixed with $#$), similar to the way they are altered
when you bind xrefs. If cleared, the names of layers and
other named objects remain the same as in the
reference drawing. Named objects that are not altered
to make them unique assume the properties of those in
the current host drawing that share the same name.
Display Attribute Controls whether all variable attribute definitions in
Definitions for block references are extracted and displayed during
Editing reference editing.
If Display Attribute Definitions for Editing is selected,
the attributes (except constant attributes) are made
invisible, and the attribute definitions are available for
editing along with the selected reference geometry.
When changes are saved back to the block reference,
the attributes of the original reference remain
unchanged. The new or altered attribute definitions
834 | REFEDIT
affect only subsequent insertions of the block; the
attributes in existing block instances are not affected.
Xrefs and block references without definitions are not
affected by this option.
Lock Objects Not Locks all objects not in the working set. This prevents
in Working Set you from accidentally selecting and editing objects in
the host drawing while in a reference editing state.
The behavior of locked objects is similar to objects on a
locked layer. If you try to edit locked objects, they are
filtered from the selection set.
REFEDIT Command Line

If you enter -refedit at the Command prompt, REFEDIT displays prompts on
the command line.
Select reference: Select an xref or block in the current drawing
Select nesting level [OK/Next] <Next>: Enter an option or press ENTER
OK Accepts the currently highlighted reference for in-place

reference editing. References that are inserted into a
drawing using MINSERT cannot be selected for in-place
reference editing.
Enter object selection method [All/Nested]<All>: Enter a,
enter n, or press ENTER .
If you enter a, all the objects in the selected reference
will be automatically included in the reference editing
session. If you enter n, after you close the Reference Edit
dialog box and enter the reference edit state, AutoCAD
prompts you to select the specific objects in the
reference that you want to edit.
Select nested objects: Select objects within the reference
that you want to edit
Display attribute definitions [Yes/No] <No>: Enter y, enter
n, or press ENTER when editing a block reference
Use REFCLOSE or the Refedit toolbar to end reference
editing session.
REFEDIT | 835
If you are editing a block reference with attributes, you
can enter y to display the attribute definitions and
make them available for editing. The attributes are
made invisible, and the attribute definitions are
available for editing along with the selected reference
geometry. When changes are saved back to the block
reference, the attributes of the original reference remain
unchanged. The new or altered attribute definitions
affect only subsequent insertions of the block; the
attributes in existing block instances are not affected.
Next Advances through the reference and nested references
available for selection. The currently selected reference
is highlighted.
AutoCAD forms a working set with the objects you have selected for editing.
The working set includes objects that can be saved back to update the xref or
block definition. When you save back changes, changes made to the objects
in the reference file are saved without actually opening the reference drawing
or recreating the block. The working set is visually distinct from the rest of
the current drawing: all objects in the current drawing, except objects in the
working set, appear faded. The XFADECTL system variable controls the fading
of objects while you edit a reference in place.
You can select objects in xrefs for editing even if they are on a locked layer in
the reference file. When a reference object is part of the working set, you can
unlock the object’s layer and make changes to the object. Only the changes
made to the object are saved back to the reference file; the xref layer remains
locked in the reference file.
Note Objects outside of the working set are not faded unless SHADEMODE is set
to a value of 2D Wireframe during in-place reference editing.
See Also
See “Edit Selected Objects in Xrefs and Blocks” in the User’s Guide.
Commands REFSET adds or removes objects from a working set.
REFCLOSE saves back or discards your changes to the
reference and ends the reference editing session.
836 | REFEDIT
System Variables The REFEDITNAME (read-only) system variable displays
the name of the reference being edited. The XEDIT sys-
tem variable controls whether the current drawing can
be edited in place when referenced by another drawing.
The BINDTYPE system variable controls how reference
names are handled when the xref bound to the current
drawing. The XFADECTL system variable controls how
objects are displayed while a reference is edited in place.
REFSET
Adds or removes objects from a working set during in-place editing of a reference (an xref
or a block)
REFSET prompts you to add or remove objects to and from a working set while
editing an xref or a block definition in place. The working set is a set of
objects extracted from a reference that can be modified and then saved back
to update the xref or block definition from within the current drawing.
Saving back changes saves changes made to the objects without actually
opening the reference drawing or re-creating the block. You can also add and
remove objects by using the options on the Modify menu or the Refedit tool-
bar. The Refedit toolbar is activated after a reference is selected for editing;
the toolbar is dismissed after changes to the reference are saved or discarded.
Modify menu: In-place Xref and Block Edit ➤ Add to Working Set, or In-place
Xref and Block Edit ➤ Remove from Working Set
Command line: refset
Transfer objects between the Refedit working set and host drawing...
Enter an option [Add/Remove] <Add>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Objects that are part of the working set are visually distinct from other
objects in the current drawing. All objects in the current drawing, except
objects in the working set, appear faded.
Add Adds objects to the working set.
Select objects: Select the objects you want to add
An object that is part of the working set is added to the

reference when changes are saved back, and the object
is removed from the current drawing. The Add to
Workset button on the Refedit toolbar prompts you to
add objects to the working set without using REFCLOSE.
REFSET | 837
Remove Removes objects from the working set.
Select objects: Select the objects you want to remove
An object that is removed from the working set is

removed from the reference when changes are saved
back; the object is also removed from the current
drawing. The Remove from Workset button on the
Refedit toolbar prompts you to remove objects from the
working set without using REFCLOSE.
See Also
Commands REFEDIT edits a reference in place. REFCLOSE saves back
or discards your changes to the reference and ends the
reference editing session.
REGEN
Regenerates the entire drawing from the current viewport
View menu: Regen
Command line: regen
REGEN regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates
for all objects in the current viewport. It also reindexes the drawing database
for optimum display and object selection performance.
before REGEN after REGEN
838 | REGEN
See Also
REDRAWALL refreshes multiple viewports. REGENALL
regenerates the drawing and refreshes all viewports.
REGENAUTO controls automatic regeneration of a
drawing. VIEWRES sets the resolution for object
generation in the current viewport.
REGENALL
Regenerates the drawing and refreshes all viewports
View menu: Regen All
Command line: regenall
REGENALL regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen

coordinates for all objects in all viewports. It also reindexes the drawing
database for optimum display and object selection performance.
before REGENALL after REGENALL
See Also
REDRAWALL refreshes multiple viewports. REGEN
regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current view-
port. REGENAUTO controls automatic regeneration of a
drawing. VIEWRES sets the resolution for object
generation in the current viewport.
REGENALL | 839
REGENAUTO
Controls automatic regeneration of a drawing
AutoCAD drawings regenerate automatically when REGENAUTO, a toggle, is
set to On. If you are working on a large drawing, you may want to set
REGENAUTO to off to save time. The current setting is stored by the
REGENMODE system variable.
Regardless of the REGENAUTO setting, you cannot execute transparent

commands that require regeneration.
Command line: regenauto (or 'regenauto for transparent use)
On Regenerates the drawing immediately if any suppressed

regenerations exist in the queue and continues to
regenerate automatically whenever you perform an
action that requires regeneration.
Off Inhibits regeneration of the drawing until you use the
REGEN or REGENALL command, or set REGENAUTO to
on.
If you perform an action that requires a regeneration
and that action is irrevocable (such as thawing layers),
AutoCAD displays Regen queued on the command line.
If you perform an action that requires a regeneration
and that action is revocable, AutoCAD displays the
following message:
About to regen—proceed?
If you choose OK, AutoCAD regenerates the drawing. If

you choose Cancel, AutoCAD cancels the last action
that you performed and does not regenerate the
drawing.
See Also
840 | REGENAUTO
REDRAWALL refreshes multiple viewports. REGEN
regenerates the drawing and refreshes the current view-
port. REGENALL regenerates the drawing and refreshes
all viewports.
System Variables REGENMODE stores the current setting of REGENAUTO.
REGION
Converts an object that encloses an area into a region object
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Region
Command line: region
Regions are two-dimensional areas you create from closed shapes or loops.
Closed polylines, lines, and curves are valid selections. Curves include
circular arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, ellipses, and splines.
AutoCAD converts closed 2D and exploded planar 3D polylines in the
selection set to separate regions and then converts polylines, lines, and
curves to form closed planar loops (outer boundaries and holes of a region).
If more than two curves share an endpoint, the resulting region might be
arbitrary.
The boundary of the region consists of end-connected curves where each
point shares only two edges. AutoCAD rejects all intersections and self-
intersecting curves.
If a selected polyline has been smoothed by either the Spline or Fit options
of PEDIT, the resulting region contains the line or arc geometry of the
smoothed polyline. The polyline is not converted to a spline object.
AutoCAD deletes the original objects after converting them to regions unless
the system variable DELOBJ is set to 0. If the original objects were hatched,
hatch associativity is lost. To restore associativity, rehatch the region.
REGION | 841
See Also
Commands EXPLODE converts the individual loops of the regions to
lines, circular or elliptical arcs, or NURBS-curve objects.
INTERSECT creates composite solids or regions from the
intersection of several objects. SUBTRACT creates a com-
posite region or solid by subtracting the area of one set
of regions from another and subtracting the volume of
one set of solids from another. UNION creates a compos-
ite region or solid.
REINIT
Reinitializes the digitizer, digitizer input/output port, and program parameters file
For AutoCAD to run properly, the input/output ports, digitizer, display, and
AutoCAD program parameters file (acad.pgp) must be initialized. If you
change the settings, you must use REINIT to reinitialize before resuming the
AutoCAD session.
The program parameters file is an ASCII text file that stores command
definitions and shortcuts. AutoCAD reloads acad.pgp each time a new or
existing drawing is opened. REINIT reloadsacad.pgp during an editing session.
Command line: reinit
The Re-initialization dialog box is displayed.
Re-initialization Dialog Box

Defines the I/O port and the device file for reinitialization.
I/O Port Reinitializes the I/O port for the digitizer.

Initialization
Device File Reinitializes the digitizer and the acad.pgp file.
Initialization
842 | REINIT
See Also
System Variables RE-INIT reinitializes digitizer, digitizer I/O port, and
acad.pgp file.
RENAME
Changes the names of objects
Blocks, layers, linetypes, and other special objects are stored by name and are
called named objects. Use RENAME to change the names of these objects. You
can also use RENAME to view a list of all blocks and definition table entries in
You can use the wild-card characters * and ? to rename groups of objects. You
can't rename some standard objects, such as layer 0 and the CONTINUOUS
linetype.
Format menu: Rename
Command line: rename
The Rename dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -rename at the Command prompt, RENAME displays prompts on
Rename Dialog Box

Renames named objects.
RENAME | 843
Named Objects Lists named objects in a drawing by category: blocks,
dimension styles, layers, linetypes, plot styles, text
styles, UCSs, views, and model viewport configurations.
Select the objects you want to rename.
Items Displays named objects of the type specified in Named
Objects. Select the name you want to change.
Old Name Specifies the named object to be renamed. Enter a name
or select a name from the Items list.
Rename To Specifies the new name you want to assign to the
object. Enter a name and choose Rename To to apply
the name change.
RENAME Command Line

If you enter -rename at the Command prompt, RENAME displays prompts on
the command line.
Enter object type to rename [Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Plotstyle/textStyle/
Ucs/VIew/VPort]: Enter a named object type to rename an object
Enter old object name: Enter the old name
Enter new object name: Enter the new name
RENDER
Creates a photorealistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional wireframe or
solid model
RENDER produces an image using information from a scene, the current
selection set, or the current view.
A scene is a combination of a named view and one or more lights. If a scene
is specified, RENDER uses the scene’s view and light information. If no scene
or selection set is specified, RENDER uses the current view and all the lights in
the drawing. If there are no lights, RENDER assumes a default “over-the-
shoulder” distant light source with an intensity of 1.
If the PICKFIRST system variable is on, and the Query for Selection option is
selected, RENDER uses only the current selection set.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Render
Command line: render
844 | RENDER
AutoCAD displays the Render dialog box, and then opens and minimizes the
Render window (see page 847).
Render Dialog Box

Defines the scene, procedure, options, destination, sampling, and other
settings for rendering.
Rendering Type
Lists Render, Photo Real, Photo Raytrace.
Scene to Render
Lists scenes, including the current view, that you can select for rendering.
Rendering Procedure
Controls how RENDER behaves by default.
Query for Displays a prompt to select objects to render.
Selections
Crop Window Creates a render area at render time. When you choose
Render, AutoCAD prompts you to select an area on the
screen before rendering proceeds. This option is
available only when Viewport is selected under
Destination.
RENDER | 845
Skip Render Renders the current view without displaying the Render
Dialog dialog box for subsequent renderings. You can use the
Render Preferences dialog box to display the Render
dialog box. See RPREF.
Light Icon Scale

Controls the size of the light blocks in the drawing. The value is the current
scale factor (in drawing units) of rendering blocks in the drawing. Enter a real
number to rescale the blocks.
The scale factor affects the following blocks: OVERHEAD, DIRECT, and
SH_SPOT.
Smoothing Angle
Sets the angle at which AutoCAD interprets an edge. The default is 45
degrees. Angles greater than 45 degrees are considered edges. Angles less than
45 degrees are smoothed. To define an edge as less than 45 degrees, reduce
the smoothing angle.
Rendering Options
Controls rendering display.
Smooth Shade Smooths out the rough-edged appearance of a
multifaceted surface. AutoCAD calculates the surface
normal and blends the colors across two or more
adjacent faces.
Apply Materials Applies the surface materials you define and attach to
an object or AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) in the
drawing. If Apply Materials is not selected, all objects in
the drawing assume the color, ambient, diffuse,
reflection, roughness, transparency, refraction, and
bump map attribute values defined for the GLOBAL
material. For more information, see RMAT.
Shadows Generates shadows. This option applies only to Photo
Real and Photo Raytrace rendering.
Render Cache Specifies that rendering information be written to a
cache file on the hard disk. A display list of renderable
objects is cached in a temporary file during the first
rendering. The cached file is used for subsequent
renderings, significantly improving rendering time.
846 | RENDER
More Options Displays a dialog box that varies depending on whether
you have selected Render, Photo Real, or Photo
Raytrace.
Destination
Controls the setting for image output that the display driver uses for the
rendering.
Viewport Renders to a viewport.
Render Window Renders to the Render window.
File Renders to a file. For information about how to use
RFILEOPT to create a script to render to a file, see the
render function in appendix A, “Externally Defined
Commands,” in the AutoLISP Reference.
More Options When File is selected, displays the File Output
Configuration dialog box (see page 891).
Sub Sampling
Reduces rendering time and image quality without dropping effects such as
shadows by rendering a fraction of all pixels. From the list, select one of the
ratios, from 1:1 (best quality) to 8:1 (fastest).
Background
Displays the Background dialog box (see BACKGROUND).
Fog/Depth Cue
Displays the Fog/Depth Cue dialog box (see FOG).
Render Window
Renders objects. Rendered images can be saved, printed, and copied. Using
the Windows Render Options, you can modify the bitmap information and
color screen resolution.
RENDER | 847
File Menu
Opens, saves, and prints rendered images.
Open Opens a saved rendered bitmap (BMP) file.
Displays the Open File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). Select Preview if you want a
preview image of the file to be displayed every time you
select a file. Clearing the Preview option speeds file
loading.
Save Saves an image to a bitmap file. For more information,
see “Save and Redisplay a Rendered Image” in the User’s
Guide.
You cannot use the SAVEIMG command when rendering
to the Render window. This command applies only
when you are rendering to a viewport.
Print Prints to the device currently configured in the
Windows® Control Panel. Choosing Print displays the
Print dialog box, in which you can adjust the location
and the size of the image on the page and select the
number of pages to print. You can also tile the image to
print across several pages. See “Print Rendered Images”
848 | RENDER
Options Displays the Windows Render Options dialog box (see
page 849), in which you can select the bitmap size,
color depth, and resolution for bitmap images.
Edit Menu
Copies rendered images.
Copy Copies an image from the active Render window to the
Clipboard. See “Copy Rendered Images to the
Clipboard” in the User’s Guide.
Window Menu
Provides the standard Windows application window menu. Tile, Cascade,
and Arrange are described in the Windows documentation. The Reuse
Window option is specific to the AutoCAD rendering feature.
Reuse Window Reuses the current image window instead of creating a
new image window for each new rendering.
Windows Render Options Dialog Box

Controls resolution information, such as the color depth (8-bit or 24-bit
color screen resolution), screen size (in pixels), and whether the render image
fits in the display window.
Other than Fit In Window, these options do not affect the image currently
displayed. They take effect the next time you render.
RENDER | 849
Size in Pixels
Specifies the size of the image in pixels. There are three preset sizes from
which you can choose. You can also enter values to set the horizontal and
vertical resolution of the image in pixels.
640 × 480 Sets the number of pixels to that of a standard VGA
screen.
1024 × 768 Sets the number of pixels to that of a high-resolution
screen.
Viewport Size Sets image size to the size of the viewport in pixels.
User Sets a user-defined size up to a maximum of 4096 ×
4096 pixels.
Horizontal Specifies the horizontal resolution (in pixels). Available
only when User is selected.
Vertical Specifies the vertical resolution (in pixels). Available
only when User is selected.
Color Depth
Renders to 8-bit or 24-bit image format.
8-bit Sets the 8-bits-per-pixel color option, 256 colors total.
24-bit Sets the 24-bits-per-pixel color option, 16 million colors
(that is, 8 bits for each of the three primary RGB
colors—red, green, and blue—that make up each pixel).
If your system is capable of displaying only 8-bit color, you can still save an
image with 24-bit color information. If you then display the image on a
system capable of displaying 24-bit color, you get the full 24-bit color image.
Fit in Window
Scales the bitmap image to fit the size of the display window while maintain-
ing the aspect ratio of the model. When this option is selected, the Size in
Pixels bitmap options are available.
Fit In Window resizes already-rendered images in all open Render display
windows. When you clear Fit In Window, images return to the size set by the
Size in Pixels bitmap options.
850 | RENDER
See Also
See “Render 3D Objects for Realism” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX™ applications. 3DSIN imports a 3D Studio®
file. 3DSOUT exports a 3D Studio file. LIGHT controls
lights and lighting effects in a drawing. MATLIB imports
and exports materials to and from a library of materials.
REPLAY displays saved render files. RMAT creates, edits,
attaches, and detaches rendering materials. RPREF con-
trols the speed and quality of rendering, rendering
options, whether the whole scene or a selected set is
rendered, the colors in the rendering, and information
about the current configuration. SAVEIMG creates a file
from a rendered image. SCENE creates, modifies, and
deletes scenes. STATS displays information about the
most recently rendered image.
System Variables PICKFIRST determines whether RENDER uses the current
selection set.
RENDSCR
Redisplays the last rendering created with the RENDER command
Command line: rendscr
Use the RENDSCR command on systems with a nonwindowing single

monitor display that is configured for full-screen rendering.
The image fills the whole screen. To return to the drawing area or text
window, press F2 .
See Also
See “Render a Model” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX applications. RENDER creates a photorealis-
tic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional
wireframe or solid model using geometry, lighting, and
materials information.
RENDSCR | 851
REPLAY
Displays a BMP, TGA, or TIFF image
Tools menu: Display Image ➤ View
Command line: replay
AutoCAD displays the Replay dialog box (a standard file selection dialog
box). Enter a file name. Valid file names must have one of the following
extensions:
■ .bmp: Indicates a device-independent bitmap file.

■ .tga: Indicates a compressed 32-bit RGBA image format used by the
SAVEIMG command.
■ .tif: Indicates a compressed 32-bit RGBA tagged image file format for
special effects such as transparency creation. Texture maps typically come
from TIFF files.
Choosing Open in the Replay dialog box opens the Image Specifications
dialog box.
Image Specifications Dialog Box

Defines the offset and size of the image and screen.
Image Displays a preview image. Select the area to be

displayed. The size of the image is noted in pixels.
852 | REPLAY
Image Offset Defines the X and Y coordinate of the image’s lower-left
corner position. Use positive values not exceeding the
screen size.
Image Size Defines the size of the image area in pixels.
Screen Displays the size of the screen or viewport and a
preview image. Adjust the offset location of the
selected, sized image in relation to your screen.
Screen Offset Defines the X and Y coordinate of the image’s lower-left
corner position in the display.
Screen Size Defines the maximum size, in pixels, of the image that
can be displayed on the screen.
Reset Cancels, changes, or restores size and offset to the
original values.
See Also
See “Redisplay a Rendered Image” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX applications. LIGHT controls lights and
lighting effects in a drawing. RENDER creates a photore-
alistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimen-
lighting, and materials information. RMAT creates,
edits, attaches, and detaches rendering materials. RPREF
controls the speed and quality of rendering, rendering
options, whether the whole scene or selected set is
rendered, the colors in the rendering, and information
about the current configuration. SAVEIMG creates a file
REPLAY | 853
RESUME
Continues an interrupted script
Command line: resume (or 'resume for transparent use)
You can interrupt a macro script that is running by pressing ESC or

BACKSPACE . Any error encountered while processing input from a script file
causes the script to be suspended. If a script is suspended while AutoCAD is
active, you can use RESUME to continue the script.
See Also
Commands SCRIPT executes a sequence of AutoCAD commands
from a script file (SCR).
REVCLOUD
Creates a polyline of sequential arcs to form a cloud shape
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Revision Cloud
Command line: revcloud
Minimum arc length: 0.5000 Maximum arc length: 0.5000

Specify start point or [Arc length/Object] <Object>: Drag to draw the revision
cloud, enter an option, or press ENTER
Guide crosshairs along cloud path...
When the start and end lines meet, the following message is displayed on the
command line.
Revision cloud finished
The resulting object is a polyline.
854 | RESUME
Note REVCLOUD stores the last used arc length in the system registry. This value
is multiplied by DIMSCALE to provide consistency when the program is used with
drawings that have different scale factors.
Arc Length
Specifies the length of the arcs in a revision cloud.
Specify minimum length of arc <0.5000>: Specify a minimum arc length
Specify maximum length of arc <0.5000>: Specify a maximum arc length
Guide crosshairs along cloud path...
The maximum arc length cannot be set to more than three times the
minimum arc length.
Object
Specifies a closed object to be converted to a revision cloud.
Select object: Select the closed object to convert to a revision cloud
Reverse direction [Yes/No]: Enter y to reverse the direction of the arcs in the
revision cloud, or press ENTER to leave the arcs as is
REVCLOUD | 855
REVOLVE
Creates solids by revolving two-dimensional objects about an axis
You can revolve closed polylines, polygons, circles, ellipses, closed splines,
donuts, and regions. You cannot revolve objects contained within a block.
Polylines that have crossing or self-intersecting segments cannot be revolved.
You can revolve only one object at a time.
The right-hand rule determines the positive direction of rotation. See “Use
World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D” in the User’s Guide.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Revolve
Command line: revolve

REVOLVE ignores the width of a polyline and revolves from the center of the
path of the polyline.
Specify start point for axis of revolution or define axis by [Object/X (axis)/
Y (axis)]: Specify a point or enter an option
Start Point of Axis Specifies the first and second points of the axis of
revolution. The positive axis direction is from the first
to the second point.
Specify endpoint of axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify angle of revolution <360>: Specify an angle or
press ENTER
AutoCAD revolves individual loops of the region to the

specified angle.
1
2
selected axis points full circle specified angle
856 | REVOLVE
Object Selects an existing line or single segment of a polyline
that defines the axis about which to revolve the object.
The positive axis direction is from the closest to the
farthest endpoint of this line.
Select an object: Use an object selection method
press ENTER
selected axis full circle specified angle
X Uses the positive X axis of the current UCS as the

positive axis direction.
press ENTER
X axis full circle specified angle
Y Uses the positive Y axis of the current UCS as the

positive axis direction.
press ENTER
Y axis full circle specified angle
REVOLVE | 857
See Also
Commands EXTRUDE creates unique solid primitives by extruding
existing AutoCAD two-dimensional objects.
System Variables DELOBJ controls whether objects used to create other
objects are retained or deleted from the drawing
database.
REVSURF
Creates a revolved surface about a selected axis
REVSURF constructs a polygon mesh approximating a surface of revolution by
rotating a path curve or profile (lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs,
polylines, or splines, closed polylines, polygons, closed splines, or donuts)
about a specified axis.
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ Revolved Surface
Command line: revsurf
Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current : SURFTAB2=current

Select object to revolve: Select a line, arc, circle, or 2D or 3D polyline
Select object that defines axis of revolution: Select a line or open 2D or 3D
polyline
axis of revolution The path curve is swept about the selected axis to define the surface. The path
curve defines the N direction of the surface mesh. Selecting a circle or a closed
polyline as the path curve closes the mesh in the N direction.
The vector from a polyline’s first vertex to its last vertex determines the
rotation axis. Any intermediate vertices are ignored. The axis of revolution
path curve
determines the M direction of the mesh.
Specify start angle <0>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Specify included angle (+=ccw, -=cw) <360>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Start Angle If set to a nonzero value, begins the surface of

revolution at an offset from the generating path curve.
Included Angle Specifies how far about the axis of revolution the
surface extends.
858 | REVSURF
Specifying a start angle begins the surface of revolution at an offset from the
generating path curve. The included angle is the distance through which the
path curve is swept.
Entering an included angle that is less than a full circle prevents the circle
from closing.
selection point
selection point
direction of direction of
generation generation
The point you use to select the axis of revolution affects the direction of
revolution. Each of the surfaces in the examples below was created by
specifying a start angle of 0 degrees and an included angle of 90 degrees.
The density of the generated mesh is controlled by the SURFTAB1 and
SURFTAB2 system variables. SURFTAB1 specifies the number of tabulation lines
that are drawn in the direction of revolution. If the path curve is a line, arc,
circle, or spline-fit polyline, SURFTAB2 specifies the number of tabulation
lines that are drawn to divide it into equal-sized intervals. If the path curve
circle path curve
is a polyline that has not been spline fit, tabulation lines are drawn at the
divided into equally
sized intervals ends of straight segments, and each arc segment is divided into the number
of intervals specified by SURFTAB2.
tabulation lines
drawn at intervals of
arc segment
polyline path
tabulation lines drawn at the
curve
ends of straight segments
See Also
System Variables SURFTAB1 determines the mesh density in the M
direction. SURFTAB2 determines the mesh density in the
N direction.
REVSURF | 859
RMAT
Manages rendering materials
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Materials
Command line: rmat
AutoCAD displays the Materials dialog box.
Materials Dialog Box

Manages the materials used for rendering.
Materials Lists the available materials. Use MATLIB to add other

materials. The default for objects with no other material
attached is GLOBAL.
Preview Displays the selected material as either a sphere or a
cube.
Materials Library Displays the Materials Library dialog box, in which you
select a material. See MATLIB.
Select Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select
an object with the pointing device and display the
attached material. After you select the object, the
Materials dialog box is redisplayed with the method of
attachment specified at the bottom of the dialog box.
860 | RMAT
Modify Displays one of four dialog boxes, depending on which
material type is selected in the list under the New
button: Standard, Marble, Granite, or Wood (see page
861). Use the dialog box to edit an existing material.
Duplicate Duplicates a material and displays one of four dialog
boxes, depending on which material type is selected in
the list under the New button: Standard, Marble,
Granite, or Wood (see page 861). Use the dialog box to
name the new material and define attributes.
New Displays one of four dialog boxes, depending on which
material type is selected in the list under the New
button:
■ New or Modify Standard Material dialog box (see

page 862)
■ New or Modify Granite Material dialog box (see page
868)
■ New or Modify Marble Material dialog box (see page
869)
■ New or Modify Wood Material dialog box (see page
871)
Use the dialog box to create a new material. The

Attribute options in each dialog box are specific to the
material type. All other options are the same in each
dialog box and are described in “New or Modify
Standard Material Dialog Box” on page 862.
Attach Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select
an object and attach the current material to it. This
option is not available when GLOBAL is the selected
material.
Detach Closes the dialog box temporarily so that you can select
an object and detach the material from it.
By ACI Displays the Attach by AutoCAD Color Index dialog
box (see page 873), in which you can select an ACI to
attach a material to.
By Layer Displays the Attach by Layer dialog box (see page 874),
in which you can select a layer to attach a material to.
RMAT | 861
New or Modify Standard Material Dialog Box
Creates a new material or modifies an existing material.
Material Name
Names or renames the material. The material name you enter must be unique
to the drawing.
Attributes
Specifies the material attribute to change. The Value and Color settings affect
the selected attribute. If a setting does not apply to an attribute, it is not
available while that attribute is selected.
Color/Pattern Adjusts the main (diffuse) color of the material. You can
adjust the color using Value and the controls in the
Color area.
Ambient Adjusts the material’s ambient (shadow) color. You can
adjust the color using Value and the controls in the
Color area. The color swatch displays the color.
Reflection Adjusts the material’s reflective (highlight or specular)
color. You can adjust the color using Value and the
controls in the Color area. The color swatch displays
the color.
862 | RMAT
Roughness Adjusts the roughness or shininess of the material.
Adjusting Roughness changes the size of the material’s
reflective highlight. The lower the level of roughness,
the smaller the highlight.
Transparency Adjusts the transparency of the object. You can use
Value to specify how transparent the object is. To use an
opacity map with this material, enter a file name in
Bitmap Blend.
Note With the Photo Real and Photo Raytrace renderers,
transparency tends to fall off as you near the edges of
closed objects or when the surface normal is perpendicular
to the line of sight. The effect is that you see less
background through the edges of a hollow object than
through its center. You can turn off this effect by setting
transparency to 1.0. This is especially important when you
apply opacity or texture maps in decal mode when the
intention is to completely remove any suggestion of a
surface where transparency falls to 0.
Refraction Adjusts refraction of the object. Applies to Photo
Raytrace rendering only. You can use Value to adjust
how refractive the material is. Refraction also affects the
transparency of a material.
Bump Map Makes the Bitmap Blend area available to specify the file
name of a bump map.
Value
Changes the selected attribute. You can enter a value or use the scroll bar.
Color
Adjusts the material’s three color attributes—main, ambient, and reflective.
The current color is shown in a color swatch at the bottom of the Color area,
as well as in the swatch next to the button that shows which color you’re
adjusting.
By ACI Matches the object’s material color with the object’s
AutoCAD Color Index color. This option is available for
the color attribute only. It is available for the ambient
and reflection attributes only if they are not locked.
Lock Locks the attribute’s color to the main color. This
setting is available for the ambient and reflection
attributes only.
RMAT | 863
Mirror Creates mirrored reflections when you render the
material with the Photo Real renderer or raytraced
reflections when you render with the Photo Raytrace
renderer. This setting is available only for the reflection
attribute. If there is an image file specified for the
reflection map, the resulting reflection is a blend of the
background and the reflection map.
Red, Green, Blue Adjust the color’s RGB components directly. You can
enter values or use the scroll bars.
Hue, Lightness, Adjusts the color’s HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation)
Saturation components directly. You can enter values or use the
scroll bars. Adjusting Hue changes the shade of the color.
Increasing Lightness increases the luminance or
brightness of the color by adding white. Increasing
Saturation increases the purity of the color. The higher
the saturation, the less gray in the color.
Color System Specifies the color system to use. You can specify RGB
(Red, Green, Blue) or HLS (Hue, Lightness, Saturation).
Color Swatch Displays the Windows Color dialog box, in which you
can adjust a color by HLS or RGB components.
Bitmap Blend
Affects the degree to which a bitmap is used in rendering. A material can
have four different bitmaps specified for it: one each for the Color/Pattern,
Reflectivity, Transparency, and Bump Map rendering attributes.
For pattern and texture maps, the bitmap is blended with the material’s main
(diffuse) and ambient colors. Blend affects the amount of reflection or trans-
parency for those attributes and the degree of bumpiness for bump maps.
The Bitmap Blend value can range from 0 to 1.0. The default value is 0.0
when no bitmap is specified, 1.0 when a bitmap is specified.
If the bitmap is not tiled, fixed-scale materials lock all bitmap placement
settings together for Pattern, Transparency, and Bump Map. The bitmap
placement setting for Pattern takes precedence if it is available. If no pattern
map is present, the settings for Transparency are used. If neither Pattern nor
Transparency is present, the settings for Bump Map are used.
Note The blend of an opacity map takes precedence over the value chosen for
Transparency.
864 | RMAT
File Name
Specifies a bitmap.
Preview
Displays the selected material as either a sphere or a cube.
Adjust Bitmap
Displays the Adjust Material Bitmap Placement dialog box (see page 865), in
which you can specify the bitmap’s offset and scaling, or placement values.
Find File
Displays the Bitmap File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box), in
which you can select a bitmap file.
Note When a material includes one or more bitmaps, you should set the
mapping coordinates for objects to which the material is attached. See SETUV.
The Photo Real and Photo Raytrace renderers provide default mapping, but this
doesn’t always give the results you want.
Adjust Material Bitmap Placement Dialog Box

Adjusts how the material bitmap is placed on the objects.
In the upper-left corner of the dialog box is a diagram that changes as you
change the bitmap placement values. The diagram shows a projection
RMAT | 865
rectangle in red. The projection rectangle represents the extents of an object.
The diagram also shows the bitmap as another rectangle: its top and left
edges are drawn in white, and its right and bottom edges are drawn in
magenta. When you first see this dialog box, the two squares are the same
size. As this implies, the default mapping scale is 1:1.
Note The bitmap adjustment—scaling and offset, and tiling switch—can differ
for each individual bitmap specified for a material. Also, the bitmap adjustments
that are specified for a material interact with the bitmap adjustment specified in
mapping.
Offset
Changes the origin of the bitmap relative to the origin of the UV projection
coordinates. Offset values can range from –1 to 1 in either dimension (U or
V). Adjust the offset by using the two scroll bars to the right and below the
diagram (enclosed by the outer box, labeled Offset) or by entering a value in
Offset U and Offset V. The bitmap rectangle moves to reflect the new offset.
If Tile is selected and you change the offset so that the bitmap rectangle
appears outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap is still applied to the
object when you render it. (During tiling, the offset acts as a displacement,
not an absolute position.) However, if Crop is selected, the bitmap is
rendered only where you place it, as indicated by the diagram; so if the
diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap does
not appear in a rendering.
Scale
Specifies the number of times the bitmap fits onto the object in the U or V
direction. Adjust the bitmap scaling by using the two scroll bars to the left
and above the diagram (enclosed by the inner box, labeled Scale), or by
entering a value in Scale U or Scale V. The dimensions of the bitmap rectangle
change to reflect the new scaling.

Locks the U and V scaling dimensions together. Moving one scroll bar moves
the other, and a value you enter in Scale U or Scale V changes the other.
Object Size
Adjusts the size of the preview cube. You can use this option to preview the
number of times the pattern tiles across the render objects. The larger the
cube, the more material tiles are displayed.
866 | RMAT
Tiling
Controls how the bitmap is tiled.
Tile Tiles the bitmap.
Crop Does not tile the bitmap. Outside the bitmap area, the
object or objects are rendered with the material colors.
The upper-left corner pixel of a bitmap defines the bitmap key color. This
color behaves as if it were transparent when you render in cropped mode: all
pixels that have the same color as the upper-left pixel are rendered with the
underlying color of the object material.
If you want to render a cropped pattern that is completely opaque, edit the
bitmap so that the upper-left corner pixel has a color used nowhere else in
the bitmap. Or, if the odd corner-pixel color shows in rendering, surround
the bitmap with a border one pixel wide, using the unique color.
With cropping turned on, a pixel in a bitmap renders either as transparent or
in its original color. To get a soft matte or “feathered” effect at the edge of a
decal, you first need to create a soft edge in the decal bitmap itself (against
the key color) and then set the material main (diffuse) and ambient colors to
match the bitmap key color.
Map Style
Specifies a scale.
Fixed Scale Specifies a fixed scale for rendering materials built from
images containing multiple, repeated patterns, such as
bricks, stonework, tile, and wallpaper. The Scale U and
Scale V values control the scale at which the material is
tiled onto drawing objects during rendering.
Fixed Scale applies only to tiled bitmaps.
Fit to Object Specifies a fit to the object for rendering landscapes or
objects whose material is based on a single image, such
as a billboard or a wall painting. Bitmap placement
offset and scale values must be adjusted manually.
Use Auto Axis

Maps materials on XY-, YZ-, and XZ-oriented surfaces. If this option is not
selected, only XY-oriented surfaces are mapped for fixed scale mapping.
RMAT | 867
Auto axis does not use polygon normals when calculating material orienta-
tions. Instead, polygons facing in positive XYZ directions are considered
front faces, and polygons facing in negative XYZ directions are considered
back faces. Therefore, some materials might appear backward on some faces,
particularly materials that have an obvious front and back, such as those
containing text. To prevent this inverse mapping, duplicate the material
without using auto axis, assign this new material explicitly to the polygon,
and then apply an entity mapper correcting the projection. You must
explode complex surfaces before mapping a specific polygon.
New or Modify Granite Material Dialog Box

Creates or modifies a material that simulates granite. The dialog box provides
attribute options that are specific to the GRANITE material type. All other
options in this dialog box are the same ones found in the New or Modify
Standard Material dialog box (see page 862).
Granite Attributes
868 | RMAT
First, Second, Adjusts the four colors that can be present. The options
Third, Fourth in the Color area are the same as for standard materials,
Color except that Lock is not present. By ACI is available only
when Reflection is selected. To use fewer than four
colors, set a color value equal to one of the other colors,
or set its value to zero. Value specifies the relative
amount of each color in the granite pattern.
options in the Color area. The color swatch displays the
color.
Sharpness Defines the sharpness of the stone. Set Sharpness by
specifying a value. A sharpness of 0 is completely
blurred; that is, the four colors are averaged. With a
sharpness of 1.0, the four colors are discrete.
Scale Defines the scale of the material relative to objects you
attach it to. Set Scale by specifying a value. Smaller Scale
values result in a finer texture and less graininess.
name of a bump map.
New or Modify Marble Material Dialog Box

Creates or modifies a material that simulates marble. The dialog box provides
attribute options that are specific to the MARBLE material type. All other
options in this dialog box are the same ones found in the New or Modify
Standard Material dialog box (see page 862).
RMAT | 869
Marble Attributes
Stone Color, Vein Adjusts the marble matrix and vein colors. The options
Color in the Color area are the same as for standard materials,
except that Value doesn’t scale the color attributes, and
Lock is not present. By ACI is available only when
Reflection is selected.
color.
Turbulence Defines the degree of the vein’s turbulence. Set
Turbulence by specifying a value. High values result in
more of the vein color, with more swirling. High values
take longer to render; values in the range 1–10 are
recommended.
870 | RMAT
Sharpness Defines the sharpness of the veins, that is, the blending
of color at the edges of the veins. Set Sharpness by
specifying a value.
Scale Defines the scale of the material relative to objects you
attach it to. Set Scale by specifying a value. Larger Scale
values result in more veins.
name of a bump map.
New or Modify Wood Material Dialog Box

Creates or modifies material that simulates grained wood. The dialog box
provides attribute options that are specific to the WOOD material type. All
other options in this dialog box are the same ones found in the New or
Modify Standard Material dialog box (see page 862).
Wood Attributes
the selected attribute. If a setting does not apply to an attribute, it is not avail-
able while that attribute is selected.
Light Color, Adjusts the two colors of the wood grain. The options
Dark Color in the Color area are the same as for standard materials,
except that Value doesn’t scale the color attributes, and
Lock is not present. By ACI is available only when
Reflection is selected.
RMAT | 871
color.
Light/Dark Controls the proportion of light to dark rings in the
wood. Set Light/Dark by specifying a value. A ratio of 0
is almost completely dark; a ratio of 1.0 is almost
completely light.
Ring Density Specifies the number of rings in the wood relative to
objects you attach the material to. Set Ring Density by
specifying a value. Larger values result in a finer texture
and less graininess.
Ring Width Controls how much the width of the rings varies. Set
Ring Width by specifying a value. A ring width of 0
gives completely uniform rings; a width of 1.0 gives the
greatest variation.
Ring Shape Controls how irregular the shape of the rings is. Set
Ring Shape by specifying a value. A ring shape of 0 gives
completely circular rings; a shape of 1.0 gives the most
irregular rings.
Scale Defines the scale of the wood grain relative to objects
you attach it to. Set Scale by specifying a value. Larger
Scale values result in finer grain.
name of a bump map.
872 | RMAT
Attach by AutoCAD Color Index Dialog Box
Associates materials with ACI values.
Select a Material Specifies the material to be attached or detached.

Select ACI Selects an ACI color by choosing Attach or Detach.
cube.
Attach Attaches the currently selected material to the selected
ACI. Any material previously attached to this ACI is
detached.
Detach Detaches the material attached to the selected ACI.
RMAT | 873
Attach by Layer Dialog Box
Associates materials with layers. All new objects on the layer have the
specified material attached.
Select a Material Specifies the material AutoCAD attaches to the selected

layer.
Select Layer Specifies the layer to which AutoCAD attaches the
selected material.
cube.
Attach Attaches the currently selected material to the selected
layer. Any material previously attached to this layer is
detached.
Detach Detaches the material attached to the selected layer.
See Also
See “Define and Modify Materials” in the User’s Guide.
lighting effects in a drawing. SCENE creates, modifies,
and deletes scenes. STATS displays information on the
most recently rendered image. RENDER creates a photo-
realistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimen-
lighting, and materials information. REPLAY displays
874 | RMAT
saved render files. RPREF controls the speed and quality
of rendering, rendering options, whether the whole
scene or selected set is rendered, the colors in the
rendering, and information about the current configu-
ration. SAVEIMG creates a file from a rendered image.
RMLIN
Inserts markups from an RML file into a drawing
Insert menu: Markup
Command line: rmlin
The Insert Markup dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed.
If you enter -rmlin at the Command prompt, RMLIN displays prompts on the
You insert redline markup language (RML) in drawings to see comments, cor-
rections, and other changes made by design team members. These markups
range from notes and hyperlinks to simple boxes and circles. They are created
and saved in RML files using a markup tool such as Volo® View. Inserted
markups are added to a new layer, the _MARKUP_ layer, which is created auto-
matically. You can insert markups from multiple RML files into a single draw-
ing. After the first insertion, new markups are added to the existing
_MARKUP_ layer.
After you choose an RML file in the Insert Markup dialog box, the Map
Markup dialog box is displayed. With the Map Markup dialog box, you can
match markup layouts in the RML file to model space or to specific layouts
in your drawing.
See Also
See “Overview of the Electronic Markup Feature” in the User’s Guide.
Map Markup Dialog Box

Matches the markup layouts in the markup (RML) file with available layouts
in your drawing.
Markup to Drawing Mappings

Lists mappings of markup layouts to drawing layouts.
RMLIN | 875
Remove
Removes a mapping of a markup layout to a drawing layout in the Markup
to Drawing Mappings list.
Remove All
Removes all the mappings of markup layouts to drawing layouts in the
Markup to Drawing Mappings list.
Markup Layouts
Lists unmapped markup layouts from the RML file that you can map to draw-
ing layouts. To map one or more markup layouts to a drawing layout, select
the markup layouts, select a drawing layout, and then click Map. If there are
no layouts in the RML file, as in the case of markups made to a DWF file, the
layout name DEFAULT is substituted.
Drawing Layouts
Lists the layouts in the current drawing, including model space, to which you
can map markup layouts.
Map
Maps the layout or layouts selected in the Markup Layouts list to the layout
selected in the Drawing Layouts list. After you click Map, the mapping is
displayed in the Markup to Drawing Mappings list.
RMLIN Command Line

If you enter -rmlin at the Command prompt, the following prompt is dis-
Enter name of RML file: Enter the file name and press ENTER
Enter an option [Single/Multiple/SamesAme] <Single>: Enter an option and press
ENTER
Single
Provides prompts for a single mapping of a markup layout to a drawing lay-
out. You are prompted to enter the markup layout you want to map, and
then you are prompted to enter a drawing layout as the destination for the
markup from the markup layout. You can use the ? option to list the markup
layouts in the RML file.
876 | RMLIN
Multiple
Provides prompts for multiple mappings of markup layouts to drawing lay-
outs. You are prompted to enter the markup layout you want to map, and
then you are prompted to enter a drawing layout as the destination for the
markups from the markup layout. You can use the ? option to list the markup
layouts in the RML file.
Same
Maps layouts in the markup file to identically named layouts in the drawing
file.
ROTATE
Moves objects about a base point
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Rotate
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to rotate, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Rotate.
Command line: rotate
Current positive angle in UCS: ANGDIR=current ANGBASE=current

Specify base point: Specify a point (1)
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle, specify a point, or enter r
selected objects rotation angle rotated object
Rotation Angle Determines how far an object rotates around the base
point.
The axis of rotation passes through the specified base
point and is parallel to the Z axis of the current UCS.
ROTATE | 877
Reference Specifies the absolute current rotation angle and
desired new rotation angle. The Reference option is
used to align an object with the X and Y axes of the UCS
or with geometric features in a drawing.
Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify an angle by
entering a value or by specifying two points
Specify the new angle: Specify the new absolute angle
When you rotate a viewport object, the borders of the viewport remain
parallel to the edges of the drawing area.
See Also
See “Rotate Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands UCS manages user coordinate systems.
ROTATE3D
Moves objects about a three-dimensional axis
Modify menu: 3D Operation ➤ Rotate 3D
Command line: rotate3d
Specify first point on axis or define axis by [Object/Last/View/Xaxis/Yaxis/Zaxis/
2points]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Object
Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object.
Select a line, circle, arc or 2D-polyline segment:
Line
Aligns the axis of rotation with the line selected.
Rotation Angle Rotates the object about the selected axis the specified
amount from the current orientation.
Reference Specifies the reference angle and the new angle.
Specify the reference angle <0>: Specify the starting angle
Specify the new angle: Specify the ending angle
The difference between the starting angle and the

ending angle is the computed rotation angle.
878 | ROTATE3D
Circle
Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the circle (perpendicular to the
plane of the circle and passing through the center of the circle).
object selected

Arc
Aligns the axis of rotation with the 3D axis of the arc (perpendicular to the
plane of the arc and passing through the center of the arc).
2D Polyline Segment
Aligns the axis of rotation with a segment of the polyline. Treats a straight
segment as a line segment. Treats an arc segment as an arc.
Specify rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r

ROTATE3D | 879
Last
Uses the last axis of rotation.

View
Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction of the current viewport
that passes through the selected point.
Specify a point on the view direction axis <0,0,0>:

X Axis, Y Axis, Z Axis

Aligns the axis of rotation with one of the axes (X, Y, or Z) that pass through
the selected point.
Specify a point on the (X, Y, or Z) axis <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1)
880 | ROTATE3D

1 1 1
X axis Y axis Z axis
2 Points
2 Uses two points to define the axis of rotation. Pressing ENTER at the main
ROTATE3D prompt displays the following prompts. Specifying a point at the
main prompt skips the prompt for the first point.
Specify first point on axis: Specify a point (1)
Specify second point on axis: Specify a point (2)
1

See Also
See “Rotate Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands ROTATE changes the orientation of objects about a
specified base point. MIRROR3D reflects objects about a
specified plane. UCS manages user coordinate systems.
ROTATE3D | 881
RPREF
Sets rendering preferences
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Preferences
Command line: rpref
AutoCAD displays the Rendering Preferences dialog box.
Rendering Preferences Dialog Box

Defines preferred settings for rendering.
Rendering Type
Lists AutoCAD Render, Photo Real, Photo Raytrace.
Scene to Render
Lists scenes, including the current view, that you can select for rendering.
Rendering Procedure
Controls how RENDER behaves by default.
Query for Displays a prompt to select objects to render.
Selections
882 | RPREF
Crop Window Creates a render area at render time. When you choose
the Render button with Crop Window selected,
AutoCAD prompts you to specify an area in the
drawing. When you’ve done so, the rendering proceeds.
Skip Render Renders the current view without displaying the Render
Dialog dialog box.
Light Icon Scale

Controls the size of the light blocks in the drawing. The value is the current
scale factor (in drawing units) of rendering blocks in the drawing. Enter a real
number to rescale the blocks.
The scale factor affects the following blocks: OVERHEAD, DIRECT, and
SH_SPOT.
Smoothing Angle
Sets the angle at which AutoCAD interprets an edge. The default is 45
degrees. Angles greater than 45 degrees are considered edges.
smoothing
angle
Angles less than 45 degrees are smoothed. To define an edge as less than 45
degrees, reduce the smoothing angle.
Rendering Options
Controls rendering display.
Smooth Shade Smooths out the rough-edged appearance of a
multifaceted surface. AutoCAD calculates the surface
normal and blends the colors across two or more
adjacent faces.
RPREF | 883
Smooth Shading off Smooth Shading on
Apply Materials Applies the surface materials that you define and attach
to an object or ACI in the drawing. If Apply Materials is
not selected, all objects in the drawing assume the
color, ambient, diffuse, reflection, roughness,
transparency, refraction, and bump map attribute
values defined for the GLOBAL material. For more
information, see RMAT.
Shadows Generates shadows. Applies only to Photo Real and
Photo Raytrace rendering.
Render Cache Specifies that rendering information be written to a
cache file. As long as the drawing geometry or view is
unchanged, the cached file is used for subsequent
renderings, eliminating the need for AutoCAD to
retessellate. This saves time, especially when rendering
solids.
More Options Depending on the Rendering Type you select, displays
either the Render Options dialog box (see page 885),
Photo Real Render Options dialog box (see page 886),
or Photo Raytrace Render Options dialog box (see page
888), which provides additional rendering options.
Destination
Controls the setting for image output that the display driver uses for the
rendering.
Viewport Renders to a viewport.
Render Window Renders to the Render window (see page 847).
File Renders to a file.
More Options When File is selected, displays the File Output
Configuration dialog box (see page 891).
884 | RPREF
Sub Sampling
Reduces rendering time and image quality without dropping effects such as
shadows by rendering a fraction of all pixels. From the list, select one of the
ratios: from 1:1 (best quality) to 8:1 (fastest).
Background
Displays the Background dialog box (see BACKGROUND).
Fog/Depth Cue
Displays the Fog/Depth Cue dialog box (see FOG).
Render Options Dialog Box

Controls rendering options. This dialog box is displayed when Render is
selected as the Rendering Type and you choose More Options under
Rendering Options in the Rendering Preferences dialog box.
Render Quality
Controls the type of shading used when you select Smooth Shade in the
Rendering Preferences dialog box.
Gouraud Calculates light intensity at each vertex and
interpolates intermediate intensities.
Phong Uses more sophisticated interpolation than Gouraud to
generate shading with more realistic highlights. Phong
calculates light intensity at each pixel.
Face Controls
Controls how RENDER treats the faces of 3D solid objects.
Discard Back Prevents AutoCAD from reading the back faces of a 3D
Faces solid object when performing calculations for a
rendering (for hidden faces only). This setting does not
eliminate back faces; it only makes them invisible and
speeds up the rendering process.
RPREF | 885
Back Face Normal Controls which faces AutoCAD considers back faces in
Is Negative a drawing. In a right-hand coordinate system like
AutoCAD, when you draw a 3D face and enter the
vertices in a counterclockwise direction, a positive
normal vector points outward toward the viewer and
identifies the face as a front face. The back face is
identified by a negative normal vector that points away
from the viewer.
Clearing this option reverses which faces AutoCAD
considers back faces. If Discard Back Faces is selected,
AutoCAD recognizes the faces with negative normal
vectors as back faces and discards them.
Photo Real Render Options Dialog Box

Controls rendering options. This dialog box is available when Photo Real is
selected as the Rendering Type and you choose More Options under
Anti-Aliasing
Controls the level of anti-aliasing used in rendering.
Minimal Renders with analytical horizontal anti-aliasing only.
886 | RPREF
Low Renders with analytical horizontal anti-aliasing and
four multiple shading samples per pixel. The more
samples per pixel, the more time it takes to render the
image.
Medium Renders with analytical horizontal anti-aliasing and
nine multiple shading samples per pixel. The more
image.
High Renders with analytical horizontal anti-aliasing and 16
multiple shading samples per pixel. The more samples
per pixel, the more time it takes to render the image.
Face Controls
from the viewer.
Depth Map Shadow Controls

Adjusts the shadow map bias, which moves a shadow relative to the shadow-
casting object to prevent self-shadowing or detached shadows.
Minimum Bias Sets the lowest value in the range. The default is 2.0.
The valid range of values depends on the scene to
render, but it should usually be between 2.0 and 20.0.
RPREF | 887
Maximum Bias Sets the highest value in the range. The default is 4.0.
This value should be no more than 10.0 greater than
the minimum bias value.
Texture Map Sampling

Sets the method of sampling a texture map when it’s projected onto an object
smaller than itself.
Point Sample Selects the nearest pixel within the bitmap.
Linear Sample Averages the four pixels nearest to the sample point
within the bitmap.
Mip Map Sample Averages bitmap pixels using the mip method—a
pyramidal average based on square sample areas.
Photo Raytrace Render Options Dialog Box

Controls rendering options. This dialog box is available when Photo Raytrace
is selected as the Rendering Type and you choose More Options under
Anti-Aliasing
Controls the level of anti-aliasing used in rendering.
Minimal Renders with analytical horizontal anti-aliasing only.
888 | RPREF
Low Renders with analytical horizontal anti-aliasing and
four multiple shading samples per pixel. The more
image.
Medium Renders with analytical horizontal anti-aliasing and
nine multiple shading samples per pixel. The more
image.
High Renders with analytical horizontal anti-aliasing and 16
multiple shading samples per pixel. The more samples
per pixel, the more time it takes to render the image.
Adaptive Sampling
Accelerates the anti-aliasing process within the bounds of the sample matrix
size. Given a contrast threshold that you supply, AutoCAD judges whether it
can process fewer samples than specified for the matrix and still get adequate
results.
Enable Turns on adaptive sampling.
Contrast Sets the sensitivity of adaptive sampling. With a low
Threshold threshold, small differences between the initial sample
values force more samples to be taken. At a higher
threshold, the sample value differences must be greater
to force more sampling. This increases rendering speed
at the expense of image quality. You can specify a value
between 0.0 and 1.0.
Ray Tree Depth

Controls the ray tree.
Maximum Depth Defines the depth of the tree used by the Photo
Raytrace renderer to track reflected and refracted
(transmitted) rays. The default value is 3. Greater values
give more accuracy but increase rendering time—it is
recommended that you not use a maximum depth
greater than 10.
RPREF | 889
Cutoff Threshold Defines a threshold for how much a further ray trace
must contribute to the final pixel value to continue. For
example, a value of 0.03 means that the next bounce
must contribute at least 3 percent to the final pixel or
the ray tree will be pruned at this point. Values between
0.0 and 1.0 are valid. With this feature, you can refine
the trade-off between speed and image quality.
Face Controls
from the viewer.
Depth Map Shadow Controls

Adjusts the shadow map bias, which moves a shadow relative to the shadow-
casting object to prevent self-shadowing or detached shadows.
Minimum Bias Sets the lowest value in the range. The default is 2.0.
The valid range of values depends on the scene to
render, but it should usually be between 2.0 and 20.0.
Maximum Bias Sets the highest value in the range. The default is 4.0.
This value should be no more than 10.0 greater than
the minimum bias value.
890 | RPREF
Texture Map Sampling
Sets the method of sampling a texture map when it’s projected onto an object
smaller than itself.
Point Sample Selects the nearest pixel within the bitmap.
Linear Sample Averages the four pixels nearest to the sample point
within the bitmap.
Mip Map Sample Averages bitmap pixels using the mip method—a
pyramidal average based on square sample areas.
File Output Configuration Dialog Box

Controls the saved file type and color screen resolution information. The File
Output Configuration dialog box is displayed when you choose More
Options under Destination in the Rendering Preferences dialog boxs (see
page 882).
File Type
Specifies the output file type and rendering resolution. AutoCAD supports
BMP, TGA, PCX, SUN, FITS, PostScript, TIFF, FAX G III, and IFF file formats.
Screen resolution is a function of the number of pixels displayed. The resolu-
tion is inversely related to the displayed pixel size; that is, the greater the
screen resolution, the smaller the pixels, given the same screen size. You can
select a resolution from the list or enter values in X and Y.
RPREF | 891
Aspect Ratio Sets the aspect (width to height) ratio in the output file.
This option is available only when User Defined
resolution is selected.
Colors
Sets colors in the output file.
TGA Options
Controls the file compression, scan line direction, and interlacing.
Compressed Turns on compression for the file types that support it.
Bottom Up Sets the scan line start point to bottom left instead of
top left.
Interlace Controls line interlacing. None turns off line
interlacing; 2 to 1 and 4 to 1 turn on line interlacing.
PostScript Options
Controls options for PostScript files.
Landscape, Specifies the orientation of the file.
Portrait
Auto Automatically scales the image.
Image Size Uses the explicit image size.
Custom Sets the image size in pixels.
See Also
See “Render 3D Objects for Realism” in the User’s Guide.
lighting effects in a drawing. RENDER creates a photore-
alistic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimen-
lighting, and materials information. REPLAY displays
saved render files. RMAT creates, edits, attaches, and
detaches rendering materials. SAVEIMG creates a file
892 | RPREF
RSCRIPT
Repeats a script file
RSCRIPT is useful for demonstrations that repeat a script; for example, a script
that must run over and over during a trade show or in a showroom.
If RSCRIPT is the last line in a script file, the file runs continuously until
interrupted by ESC .
Note Consider turning off UNDO and any log files if you anticipate running the
script over a long period; otherwise, these log files continue to grow and take up
increasing amounts of disk space.
See Also
Commands UNDO reverses the effect of commands. LOGFILEON
writes the text window to a file. LOGFILEOFF closes the
file opened by LOGFILEON. SCRIPT executes a sequence
of commands from a script file.
RULESURF
Creates a ruled surface between two curves
RULESURF constructs a polygon mesh representing the ruled surface between
two curves.
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ Ruled Surface
Command line: rulesurf
Current wire frame density: SURFTAB1=current

Select first defining curve:
Select second defining curve:
The objects you select define the edges of the ruled surface. The objects can
be points, lines, splines, circles, arcs, or polylines. If one of the boundaries is
closed, then the other boundary must also be closed. You can use a point as
the other boundary for either an open or a closed curve, but only one of the
boundary curves can be a point. The 0,0 vertex is the endpoint of each curve
nearest the point you used to select that curve.
RSCRIPT | 893
For closed curves, the selection does not matter. If the curve is a circle, the
ruled surface begins at the 0-degree quadrant point, as determined by the cur-
rent X axis plus the current value of the SNAPANG system variable. For closed
polylines, the ruled surface starts at the last vertex and proceeds backward
along the segments of the polyline. Creating a ruled surface between a circle
and a closed polyline can be confusing. Substituting a closed semicircular
polyline for the circle might be preferable.
The ruled surface is constructed as a 2 × N polygon mesh. RULESURF places
half the mesh vertices at equal intervals along one defining curve, and the
other half at equal intervals along the other curve. The number of intervals
is specified by the SURFTAB1 system variable. It is the same for each curve;
therefore, the distance between the vertices along the two curves differs if the
curves are of different lengths.
The N direction of the mesh is along the boundary curves. If both boundaries
examples of
ruled surfaces are closed, or if one is closed and the other is a point, the resulting polygon
mesh is closed in the N direction and N equals SURFTAB1. If both boundaries
are open, N equals SURFTAB1 + 1, because division of a curve into n parts
requires n + 1 tabulations.
Selecting objects at the same ends creates a polygon mesh.
Selecting objects at opposite ends creates a self-intersecting polygon mesh.
894 | RULESURF
See Also
Commands 3DMESH creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh.
EDGESURF creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh
that approximates a Coons surface patch. PFACE creates
a three-dimensional polyface mesh, vertex by vertex.
REVSURF creates a surface of revolution by rotating a
path curve or profile around a selected axis. TABSURF
creates a tabulated polygon mesh from a path curve and
direction vector.
System Variables SNAPANG stores the snap or grid rotation angle, relative
to UCS, for the current viewport. SURFTAB1 controls the
number of divisions along the N direction of a polygon
mesh.
RULESURF | 895
896
SAVE
Saves the drawing under the current file name or a specified name
Command line: save
The Save Drawing As dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Save the drawing under the current file name, or enter a different
file name to save a copy of the drawing under that name.
See “Standard File Selection Dialog Boxes” on page 621 for a description of
the options in this dialog box.
SAVE is available only from the command line. The Save option on the File
menu or on the Standard toolbar is QSAVE. If the drawing is named, QSAVE
saves the drawing without displaying the Save Drawing As dialog box. If the
drawing is unnamed, AutoCAD® displays the Save Drawing As dialog box.
Enter a file name to both name and save the drawing.
See Also
Commands QSAVE saves the current drawing. QUIT exits AutoCAD
and prompts you to save changes to the current
drawing. SAVEAS renames the current drawing to the
name specified.
System Variables ISAVEBAK improves the speed of incremental saves,
especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT determines
the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing.
SAVETIME sets the automatic save interval (in minutes).
SAVEAS
Saves a copy of the current drawing under a new file name
File menu: Save As
Command line: saveas
The Save Drawing As standard file selection dialog box is displayed (see page
621). Enter a file name and type. Saving an AutoCAD 2004 file to any DXF
format affects performance. Set the Save As option to AutoCAD 2004
Drawing to optimize performance while saving.
Note AutoCAD 2000 is the drawing file format used by the AutoCAD 2000,
AutoCAD 2000i, and AutoCAD 2002 releases.
SAVE | 897
See “Save to Earlier Versions” on page 898 for a description of the limitations
that result from saving to an earlier version.
In the Save Drawing As dialog box, Tools ➤ Options displays the Saveas
Options dialog box (see page 899), which controls various DWG and DXF
settings.
AutoCAD saves the file under the specified file name. If the drawing is
already named, AutoCAD saves the drawing to the new file name. If you save
the file as a drawing template, AutoCAD displays the Template Description
dialog box (see page 899), where you can provide a description for the
template and set the units of measurement.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SAVEAS displays prompts on the command
line (see page 901).
Save to Earlier Versions

Saving a drawing in Release 2000/LT 2000 format is subject to the following
limitations:
■ File size can increase.

■ Encryption and digital signatures are not preserved.
Saving a drawing in Release 12/LT 2 DXF format is subject to the following

limitations:
■ Lightweight polylines and hatch patterns are converted to Release 12

polylines and hatch patterns.
■ All solids, bodies, regions, ellipses, leaders, multilines, rays, tolerances,
and xlines are converted to lines, arcs, and circles as appropriate.
■ Groups, complex linetypes, OLE objects, and preview images are not
displayed.
■ Many objects are lost if you save a drawing as Release 12 and open it later
in AutoCAD 2000 or later.
■ Multiple layouts and layout names are lost. Only the Model tab and the
current layout tab are saved.
■ Spaces in the names of layers and other objects are converted to
underscores and their maximum length is 32 characters.
■ The status of external references as unloaded is lost.
898 | SAVEAS
Template Description Dialog Box
Sets drawing template options.
Description Specifies a description for the drawing template. This
description is displayed when you choose the template
in the Startup dialog box or in the Create New Drawing
Measurement Specifies whether the drawing template uses English or
metric units.
Saveas Options Dialog Box

Sets options for DWG files and for drawing interchange file output.
DWG Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box)

Controls the drawing index and display of custom objects and specifies the
default file format for saving drawings.
Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects

If you save to an earlier drawing file type, or the drawing contains custom
objects from another application, you can select Save Proxy Images of Cus-
tom Objects. AutoCAD saves images of the custom objects in the drawing
file. If you do not choose this option, AutoCAD saves a frame for each custom
object in the drawing file.
The Save Proxy Images option sets the PROXYGRAPHICS system variable.
SAVEAS | 899
Index Type
Determines whether AutoCAD creates layer or spatial indexes when you save
a drawing. AutoCAD uses the indexes to improve performance during
demand loading. Using indexes may slightly increase the time required to
save a drawing. If a partially open drawing does not already contain spatial
and layer indexes, this option is not available.
None Creates neither layer nor spatial indexes when you save
a drawing.
Layer Loads only layers that are on and thawed.
Spatial Loads only the portion of the drawing within a clipped
boundary.
Layer & Spatial Optimizes performance by specifying that AutoCAD
loads only layers that are on, thawed, and within a
clipped boundary area.
Save All Drawings As
Specifies the default file format that drawings are saved to. If you change the
specified value, all subsequent uses of SAVE and QSAVE save the drawing to
the new file format. You can also set this option on the Open and Save tab in
the Options dialog box (see OPTIONS). Set the Save As option to AutoCAD
2004 Drawing to optimize performance while saving.
DXF Options Tab (Saveas Options Dialog Box)

Sets drawing interchange file output options.
900 | SAVEAS
Format Specifies whether AutoCAD creates an ASCII or binary
DXF file. ASCII-format DXF files can be read with a text
editor and are compatible with a wider range of
applications. Binary-format DXF files contain all of the
information of an ASCII DXF file but in a more compact
form. You can read and write to binary-format files
faster than to ASCII-format files.
For more information about DXF files, see the DXF
Reference in the Help system.
Select Objects Controls whether the DXF file consists of selected
objects or the entire drawing. When you select this
option, the output file includes only selected objects
and the block reference portions of any included
blocks. The output file does not include the block
definition tables.
Save Thumbnail Specifies whether an image of the drawing is displayed
Preview Image in the Preview area of the Select File dialog box. Save
Thumbnail Preview Image is also controlled by the
RASTERPREVIEW system variable.
Decimal Places of Saves the file using the specified number of bits of
Accuracy precision.
The default precision is adequate in most cases;
however, you might need to increase this value for
certain drawings and for certain applications. If you
encounter problems loading a DXF file you create, try
increasing the precision. The only disadvantage of
higher precision is increased file size. Lower precision is
useful for specialized purposes but is not recommended
in general.
SAVEAS Command Line

When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SAVEAS displays the following prompts on the
command line.
Current file format: current
Enter file format [2000(LT2000)/2004/Standards/DXF/Template] <2004>:
Save drawing as <current>: Enter a name or press ENTER
SAVEAS | 901
See Also
See “Save a Drawing” in the User’s Guide.
Commands QSAVE saves the current drawing. QUIT exits AutoCAD
and prompts you to save changes to the current draw-
ing. SAVE saves the drawing under the current file name
or a specified name.
System Variables ISAVEBAK improves the speed of incremental saves,
especially for large drawings. ISAVEPERCENT determines
the amount of wasted space tolerated in a drawing.
PROXYGRAPHICS stores the Save Proxy Images of Cus-
tom Objects setting. SAVETIME sets the automatic save
interval (in minutes).
SAVEIMG
Saves a rendered image to a file
SAVEIMG is not available if the current rendering device does not support
scan-line images.
Tools menu: Display Image ➤ Save
Command line: saveimg
AutoCAD displays the Save Image dialog box.
Save Image Dialog Box

Defines the format and position of a rendered image.
902 | SAVEIMG
Format
Specifies the file format of the rendered image.
BMP Saves in device-independent bitmap format. Image files
are saved as either 8 or 32 bits per pixel (bpp) depending
on the operating system (OS) video color depth setting.
TGA Saves in compressed or uncompressed 32-bit RGBA
TrueVision v2.0 format. TGA is also known as Targa
format. Image files are saved as either 8 or 32 bits per
pixel (bpp) depending on the operating system (OS)
video color depth setting.
TIFF Saves in compressed and uncompressed 32-bit RGBA
tagged image file format. Image files are saved as either
8 or 32 bits per pixel (bpp) depending on the operating
system (OS) video color depth setting.
Options Displays the TGA Options dialog box (see page 904) if
TGA format is selected. Displays the TIFF Options
dialog box (see page 904) if TIFF format is selected.
Portion
Specifies the portion of the image to be rendered.
Specify lower-left and upper-right points to define the image selection area.
If you use the pointing device, the selection is reflected in X and Y under
Offset and Size.
default XY size
XY size measured (in pixels)

from the offset position
nonzero offset position image selection area
full display area

0,0 default offset position
Offset and Size

Specifies a partial image in pixels.
Only positive values are allowed. The lower-left corner of the image is 0
pixels in X and Y. The upper-right corner of the image is the maximum
number of pixels in X and Y, which depends upon the resolution of the
display area.
SAVEIMG | 903
If you specify size before offset, you can get results that you don’t expect. The
most predictable way to define size and offset is to specify offset first.
Offset Defines the lower-left XY position of the image
selection area. The default is 0,0.
When you specify a nonzero offset, the number of
pixels in Size can change to reflect the remaining
number of pixels to the upper-right corner of the
display area.
Size Defines the upper-right XY position of the image
selection area. The default is the upper-right corner of
the display area.
default XY size
XY size measured (in pixels)

from the offset position
nonzero offset position image selection area
0,0 default offset position full display area
Reset
Resets the Offset and Size values to the full screen defaults. When configured
for rendering to a viewport, resets the Offset and Size values to the size that
corresponds to the option selected under Portion.
TGA Options Dialog Box

Specifies one of the following TGA image compression options.
None Uses no image compression.
RLE Uses run-length-encoded image compression.
TIFF Options Dialog Box

Specifies one of the following TIFF image compression options.
None Uses no image compression.
PACK Uses Macintosh packbits, run-length-encoded image
compression.
904 | SAVEIMG
See Also
See “Save a Rendered Image” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX™ applications. REPLAY displays a BMP,
TGA, or TIFF image. RPREF sets rendering preferences.
SCALE
Enlarges or reduces selected objects proportionally in the X, Y, and Z directions
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Scale
Shortcut menu: Select the objects to scale, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Scale.
Command line: scale
Specify base point: Specify a point (1)
The base point you specify identifies the point that remains in the same
location as the selected objects change size (and thus move away from the
stationary base point). Drag the cursor to make the image larger or smaller.
1
object selected
Specify scale factor or [Reference]: Specify a scale or enter r
Scale Factor Multiplies the dimensions of the selected objects by the

specified scale. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the
objects. A scale factor between 0 and 1 shrinks the
objects.
scale factor = .5 scale factor = 2
SCALE | 905
Reference Scales the selected objects based on a reference length
and a specified new length.
Specify reference length <1>: Specify a distance or press
ENTER
Specify new length: Specify a distance
If the new length is longer than the reference length,

the objects are enlarged.
2
1 3
reference length new length result
See Also
Commands LENGTHEN lengthens an object. STRETCH moves or
stretches an object.
SCALETEXT
Enlarges or reduces selected text objects without changing their locations
Text toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Text ➤ Scale
Command line: scaletext
Select objects: Use an object selection method, and press ENTER when you finish
Enter a base point option for scaling [Existing/Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/
TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/BR]<Existing>: Specify a location to serve as a base
point for scaling
With the base point prompt, you choose one of several locations to serve as
base points for scaling, which is used individually for each selected text
object. The base point for scaling is established on one of several insertion
point locations for text options, but even though the options are the same as
when you choose an insertion point, the justification of the text objects is
not affected.
906 | SCALETEXT
The base point options shown above are decribed in the TEXT command. The
base point options for single line text are similar to those for multiline text
except that the Align, Fit, and Left text options are equivalent to the bottom
left (BL) multiline text attachment point.
Specify text height or [Match Object/Scale Factor]<0.5000>: Specify a text
height or enter an option
Match Object
Scales the text objects that you originally selected to match the the size of a
selected text object.
Select a text object with the desired height: Select a text object to match
Scale Factor
Scales the selected text objects based on a reference length and a specified
new length.
Specify scale factor or [Reference]: Specify a scale factor or enter r
Scale Factor Scales the selected text objects using the numeric scale
factor that you enter
Reference Scales the selected text objects relative to a reference
length and a new length.
Specify reference length <1>: Enter a length to serve as a
reference distance
Specify new length: Enter another length in comparison to
the reference length
The selected text is scaled by a ratio of the values that

you entered for the new length and the reference
length. If the new length is less than the reference
length, the selected text objects are reduced in size.
See Also
See “Change Text Scale and Justification” in the User’s Guide.
Commands SCALE enlarges or reduces selected objects proportion-
ally in the X, Y, and Z directions. STYLE creates,
modifies, or sets named text styles.
SCALETEXT | 907
SCENE
Manages scenes in model space
A scene represents a particular view of all or any portion of the drawing, with
or without lights. A drawing can have an unlimited number of scenes.
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Scene
Command line: scene
AutoCAD displays the Scenes dialog box.
Scenes Dialog Box

Controls the scenes in model space.
Scenes Lists all the scenes in the current drawing.

NONE is the default and includes the current view in the
active viewport and all lights in the drawing. If there are
no lights in the drawing and NONE is selected,
AutoCAD assumes a default “over-the-shoulder” distant
light source with an intensity of 1 and an ambient light
intensity of 0.
New Displays the New Scene dialog box.
Modify Displays the Modify Scene dialog box (see page 910).
Delete Deletes the selected scene from the drawing.
908 | SCENE
New Scene Dialog Box
Adds a new scene to the current drawing.
Scene Name Specifies the name of the new scene.

Views Lists model space views in the drawing. The current
view is highlighted. Selecting another view makes it the
new view of the scene. You can have only one view in a
scene.
Lights Lists lights in the drawing. You can select one or more
lights.
Selecting a light that is not already selected adds that
light to the scene (use the CTRL key to select multiple
lights). Selecting a light that is already selected removes
that light from the scene. If you remove all lights from
a scene, AutoCAD assumes a default “over-the-
shoulder” distant light. Removing a light from a scene
does not delete it from the drawing.
SCENE | 909
Modify Scene Dialog Box
Changes the scene name and view and adds or deletes lights in the scene.
Scene Name Changes the name of the scene.

Views Lists model space views in the drawing. The view in the
current scene is highlighted. Selecting another view
makes it the new view of the scene. You can have only
one view in a scene.
Lights Lists lights in the drawing. You can select one or more
lights.
Selecting a light that is not already selected adds that
light to the scene (use the CTRL key to select multiple
lights). Selecting a light that is already selected removes
that light from the scene. If you remove all lights from
a scene, AutoCAD assumes a default “over-the-
shoulder” distant light. Removing a light from a scene
does not delete it from the drawing.
See Also
ObjectARX applications. VIEW creates and restores
views. LIGHT adds, modifies, and deletes lights and
lighting effects in a drawing.
910 | SCENE
SCRIPT
Executes a sequence of commands from a script file
Tools menu: Run Script
Command line: script (or 'script for transparent use)
AutoCAD displays the Select Script File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box). Enter the file name of a script to run that script.
When FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero), SCRIPT displays the following prompt on the
command line.
Enter script file name <current>:
See Also
See “Overview of Command Scripts” in the Customization Guide.
Commands DELAY provides a timed pause in scripts. RSCRIPT replays
a script nonstop.
SECTION
Uses the intersection of a plane and solids to create a region
AutoCAD creates regions on the current layer and inserts them at the
location of the cross section. Selecting several solids creates separate regions
for each solid.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Section
Command line: section
Specify first point on Section plane by [Object/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/ZX]
<3points>: Specify a point or enter an option
First Point, Uses three points to define the sectioning plane. After
3 Points you specify the first point, AutoCAD displays the
following prompts:
Specify second point on plane: Specify a point (2)
Specify third point on plane: Specify a point (3)
SCRIPT | 911
3
2
1
Object Aligns the sectioning plane with a circle, ellipse,

circular or elliptical arc, 2D spline, or 2D polyline
segment.
Select a circle, ellipse, arc, 2D-spline, or 2D-polyline:
select
object
Z Axis Defines the sectioning plane by specifying a point on

the sectioning plane and another point on the plane’s
Z axis, or normal.
Specify a point on the section plane: Specify a point (1)
Specify a point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane:
Specify a point (2)
1
normal 1
2 2
cutting
plane
side view
View Aligns the sectioning plane with the current viewport’s

viewing plane. Specifying a point defines the location
of the sectioning plane.
Specify a point on the current view plane <0,0,0>:
Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
912 | SECTION
1
XY Aligns the sectioning plane with the XY plane of the

current UCS. Specifying a point defines the location of
the sectioning plane.
Specify a point on the XY-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point
(1) or press ENTER
YZ Aligns the sectioning plane with the YZ plane of the

Specify a point on the YZ-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point
(1) or press ENTER
ZX Aligns the sectioning plane with the ZX plane of the

Specify a point on the ZX-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point
(1) or press ENTER
SECTION | 913
SECURITYOPTIONS
Controls security settings using the Security Options dialog box
Command line: securityoptions
The Security Options dialog box is displayed. You can add security settings
that are applied when you save the drawing.
Security Options Dialog Box

Specifies security settings to be used when your drawing is saved.
Password Tab (Security Options Dialog Box)
Adds a password to a drawing when the drawing is saved.
Password or Adds, changes, or removes a password the next time the

Phrase to Open drawing is saved. If you add or change the password,
This Drawing the Confirm Password dialog box is displayed. If you
lose the password, it is not recoverable. Before you add
a password, you should create a backup that is not
protected with a password.
914 | SECURITYOPTIONS
Encrypt Drawing Encrypts drawing properties, so a password is required
Properties to view them. Drawing properties are details that help
you identify the drawing, including title, author,
subject, keywords that identify the model, or other
important information.
Current Specifies the default encryption level supplied by your
Encryption Type operating system, unless you choose an advanced level
by clicking the Advanced Options button.
Advanced Opens the Advanced Options dialog box, where you
Options can choose an encryption provider and key length.
Digital Signature Tab (Security Options Dialog Box)
Adds a digital signature to a drawing when the drawing is saved.
Attach Digital Attaches a digital signature to a drawing when the

Signatures After drawing is saved.
Saving Drawing
SECURITYOPTIONS | 915
Select a Digital ID Displays a list of digital IDs that you can use to sign
(Certificate) files. Includes information about the organization or
individual to whom the digital ID was issued, the digital
ID vendor who issued the digital ID, and when the
digital ID expires.
Signature Provides a list of time services you can use to add a time
Information stamp to your digital signature, the status of the time
server connection, and a Comments area (to include
information relevant to the digital signature or to the
files you are signing).
Get Time Stamp Provides a list of time servers you can use to time stamp
From your digital signature.
Time Service Displays the connection status (Successfully Contacted
Status Time Server or Could Not Contact Time Server) of the
time service.
Comment Provides a place for comments about the digital
signature or the files you are signing.
Confirm Password Dialog Box

Confirms the password entered in the Security Options dialog box that is
added or changed the next time the drawing is saved.
Warning! If you lose the password, it is not recoverable. Before you add a
password, you should create a backup that is not protected with a password.
Advanced Options Dialog Box

Selects an encryption provider and key length for drawings that you protect
with a password.
Choose an Sets a level of encryption for a drawing. You can choose
Encryption from encryption providers supplied by your operating
Provider system.
Choose a Key Sets a key length. The higher the key length, the higher
Length the level of protection for your drawing.
916 | SECURITYOPTIONS
SELECT
Places selected objects in the Previous selection set
Command line: select
object selection Select objects: Use an object selection method

target
A small box, called the object selection target, replaces the crosshairs on the
graphics cursor.
AutoCAD requires that objects be selected in order to be processed. The Select
Objects prompt occurs after many commands, including the SELECT
command itself.
You can select objects individually with the pointing device, by drawing a
selection window around them, by entering coordinates, or by using one of
the selection methods listed below. These methods can be used to select
objects regardless of the command that initiated the Select Objects prompt.
To view all options, enter ? on the command line.
Expects a point or
Window/Last/Crossing/BOX/ALL/Fence/WPolygon/CPolygon/Group/Add/
Remove/Multiple/Previous/Undo/AUto/SIngle
Select objects: Specify a point or enter an option
2 Window Selects all objects completely inside a rectangle defined

by two points. Specifying the corners from left to right
creates a window selection. (Specifying the corners
from right to left creates a crossing selection.)
1 Specify first corner: Specify a point (1)
window selection Specify opposite corner: Specify a point (2)
Last Selects the most recently created visible object.
SELECT | 917
Crossing Selects objects within and crossing an area defined by
1 two points. A crossing selection is displayed as dashed
or otherwise highlighted to differentiate it from
window selection. Specifying the corners from right to
left creates a crossing selection. (Specifying the corners
from left to right creates a window selection.)
2
First corner: Specify a point (1)
crossing selection
Other corner: Specify a point (2)
Box Selects all objects inside or crossing a rectangle specified

by two points. If the rectangle’s points are specified
from right to left, Box is equivalent to Crossing.
Otherwise, Box is equivalent to Window.
select all Specify first corner: Specify a point

All Selects all objects on thawed layers.

Fence Selects all objects crossing a selection fence. The Fence
method is similar to CPolygon except that AutoCAD
does not close the fence, and a fence can cross itself.
Fence is not affected by the PICKADD system variable.
fence selection
First fence point: Specify a point
Specify endpoint of line or [Undo]: Specify a point or enter
u to undo the last point
WPolygon Selects objects completely inside a polygon defined by

points. The polygon can be any shape but cannot cross
or touch itself. AutoCAD draws the last segment of the
polygon so that it is closed at all times. WPolygon is not
affected by the PICKADD system variable.
WPolygon selection
First polygon point: Specify a point
CPolygon Selects objects within and crossing a polygon defined

by specifying points. The polygon can be any shape but
cannot cross or touch itself. AutoCAD draws the last
segment of the polygon so that it is closed at all times.
CPolygon is not affected by the PICKADD system
variable.
918 | SELECT
First polygon point: Specify a point
Group Selects all objects within a specified group.

Enter group name: Enter a name list
CPolygon selection Add Switches to the Add method: selected objects can be
added to the selection set by using any of the object
selected object selection methods. Auto and Add are the default
to add
methods.
Remove Switches to the Remove method: objects can be
removed from the current selection set using any object
selection method. An alternative to Remove mode is to
hold down SHIFT while selecting single objects or use
the Automatic option.
Multiple Specifies multiple points without highlighting the
objects, thus speeding up the selection process for
complex objects. The Multiple method also selects two
intersecting objects if the intersection point is specified
twice.
Previous Selects the most recent selection set. The Previous
selection set is cleared by operations that delete objects
from the drawing.
AutoCAD keeps track of whether each selection set was
specified in model space or paper space. The Previous
selection set is ignored if you switch spaces.
Undo Cancels the selection of the object most recently added
to the selection set.
Auto Switches to automatic selection: pointing to an object
selects the object. Pointing to a blank area inside or
outside an object forms the first corner of a box defined
by the Box method. Auto and Add are the default
methods.
Single Switches to the Single method: selects the first object or
set of objects designated rather than continuing to
prompt for further selections.
SELECT | 919
See Also
See “Select Objects” in the User’s Guide.
System Variables PICKADD controls whether subsequent selections
replace the current selection set or add to it.
SETIDROPHANDLER
Specifies the default type of i-drop content for the current Autodesk application
Command line: setidrophandler
The SETIDROPHANDLER command displays the Set Default i-drop Content

Type dialog box, where you set the default type of i-drop content for the
Autodesk application you are currently working in. This setting determines
the type of content that is inserted into your drawing when you drag a rep-
resentative i-drop content image from the Web into your drawing.
Set Default i-drop Content Type Dialog Box

With the Set Default i-drop Content Type dialog box, you can specify the
default type of i-drop content from a list of available content types for
installed Autodesk products that provide this i-drop functionality. The
default content type determines the type of content that is inserted in your
drawing.
For example, if you select Block, when you drag a representative i-drop
content image from a web page, the inserted content is an AutoCAD block.
SETUV
Maps materials onto objects
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Mapping
Command line: setuv
Select objects: Select the objects to which you want to assign mapping coordinates
AutoCAD displays the Mapping dialog box.
Mapping Dialog Box

Defines how materials are mapped onto objects.
920 | SETIDROPHANDLER
The mapping coordinates that you assign in the Mapping dialog box apply
to the entire selection set and remain with it. When you move the geometry,
the mapping coordinates and other mapping attributes (such as bitmap
scaling) move with it.
Note An object with assigned mapping coordinates attempts to maintain the

orientation of the material that is attached to it when you modify the object
using MOVE, MIRROR, ROTATE, SCALE, or other editing commands. Therefore, it is
recommended that you assign mapping coordinates even if the default coordi-
nates do not alter the bitmap placement. Use mapping coordinates even when
the Fit to Object option is selected in the Adjust Material Bitmap Placement
dialog box in RMAT (see page 865).
To delete mapping coordinates assigned to an object, use the AutoLISP

version of the Render mapping option, as shown in the following example:
Command: (c:setuv "D" (ssget))
Select objects: Select the objects whose mapping you want to delete
Projection Specifies the type of projection: planar, cylindrical,

spherical, or solid. If the Fixed Scale option is selected
in the Adjust Material Bitmap Placement dialog box
(see page 865), you can only use planar projection. If
you select any other projection type, the material
reverts to the default Fit to Object bitmap placement
setting. Enter new values for the bitmap placement
offset and scale values in the Adjust Object Bitmap
Placement dialog box (see page 928).
SETUV | 921
Adjust Displays one of several dialog boxes used to adjust
Coordinates projection coordinates relative to the object. Which
dialog box is displayed depends on the projection
selected: planar, cylindrical, spherical, or solid. See
“Adjust Planar Coordinates Dialog Box” on page 922,
“Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates Dialog Box” on page
924, “Adjust Spherical Coordinates Dialog Box” on
page 926, and “Adjust UVW Coordinates Dialog Box”
on page 927.
Note If the Tile option is selected in the Adjust Object
Bitmap Placement dialog box (see page 928), the extents
of the projection geometry have no effect on projection.
This is true even though the Adjust Planar, Cylindrical, and
Spherical Coordinates dialog boxes represent the
projection systems by geometry—based either on the
extents of the current selection set or on points you specify
in the drawing area. They do not limit where the bitmap is
rendered, unless you select Crop in the Adjust Object
Bitmap Placement dialog box (see page 928).
Acquire From Temporarily closes the Mapping dialog box so that you
can select a single object in the AutoCAD drawing area.
The object already has mapping coordinates assigned to
it—these become the current mapping settings. After
you make the selection, AutoCAD displays the Mapping
dialog box again. You can choose OK immediately to
accept the acquired mapping coordinates as is or use
Adjust Coordinates to modify them further.
Copy To Temporarily closes the Mapping dialog box so that you
can select any number of objects. When you finish
making the selection, AutoCAD displays the Mapping
dialog box. When you choose OK, the current mapping
coordinate settings are applied to the objects you
selected.
Preview Displays a bitmap image of the selected material and its
mapping coordinate. The Preview area displays a gray
image if a material is not attached.
Adjust Planar Coordinates Dialog Box

Specifies the plane used for projecting the bitmap onto the object.
922 | SETUV
Parallel Plane Specifies one of the three perpendicular reference
planes of the world coordinate system (WCS) or a plane
you specify by choosing Pick Points. If you select Picked
Plane and then choose OK without choosing Pick
Points, the XY plane of the WCS is used by default.
You must set the appropriate WCS plane when using
fixed-scale materials on objects using object mapping
coordinates to ensure that the bitmap placement scale,
offset, and rotation work in the correct plane regardless
of the UCS.
Note If you choose Pick Points, and the points you select
correspond to one of the WCS planes, AutoCAD saves this
as the WCS plane. The next time you display the Adjust
Planar Coordinates dialog box, the option indicates the
WCS XY, XZ, or YZ plane (or axis) is selected instead of
Picked Plane (Picked Axis).
Center Position Shows a parallel projection of the object’s mesh onto
the current parallel plane. It also shows the current
projection square in blue (the top of the projection
square is indicated by a small blue tick mark, and the
square’s left edge is shown in green). You can move the
projection square by moving the scroll bars.
By default, the projection square is the smallest square
that can be drawn around the parallel projection of the
object’s bounding box (its extents).
SETUV | 923
Adjust Bitmap Displays the Adjust Object Bitmap Placement dialog box
(see page 928), in which you can adjust the bitmap’s
offset and scaling.
Pick Points Temporarily closes the Adjust Planar Coordinates dialog
box so that you can specify a projection plane by
specifying points in the AutoCAD drawing area.
AutoCAD prompts you to specify three points: the lower-
left, lower-right, and upper-left corners of the plane.
After you specify these points, the Adjust Planar
Coordinates dialog box is redisplayed.
Offsets and Changes the X and Y offsets of the map. You can change
Rotations the rotation by using the scroll bar or entering a new
value.
Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates Dialog Box

Defines the axis of the cylindrical coordinate system and the wrap line for
the bitmap projection.
Parallel Axis Specifies one of the three perpendicular axes of the WCS
or an axis you specify by choosing Pick Points. If you
924 | SETUV
select Picked Axis and then choose OK without choosing
Pick Points, the Z axis of the WCS is used by default.
Note If you use Pick Points, and the points you select
correspond to one of the WCS axes, the next time you
display the Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates dialog box, the
option indicates the WCS Z, Y, or X axis (or plane) instead of
Picked Axis (Picked Plane).
Central Axis Shows a parallel projection of the selected objects’
Position meshes on a plane perpendicular to the current axis. It
also shows the projection axis with a blue circle (the
center of the circle is the projection axis). A green radius
shows the wrap line. You can move the axis by using the
scroll bars.
By default, the axis is placed at the center of the selection
set’s extents in both directions, with the base of the
cylinder at the minimum vertical extent and its top at
the maximum vertical extent. The wrap line is placed
toward minimum Z—or minimum Y when the Z axis is
parallel to the cylindrical coordinate system axis. (When
you select the points for the cylinder, its dimensions
aren’t based on the extents.)
Adjust Bitmap Displays the Adjust Object Bitmap Placement dialog box
(see page 928) for adjusting the bitmap’s offset and
scaling.
Pick Points Temporarily closes the Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates
dialog box so that you can specify a projection cylinder
by specifying points in the AutoCAD drawing area.
AutoCAD prompts you to specify three points: the center
bottom of the mapping cylinder, the center top of the
cylinder, and the direction toward the seam (wrap line).
After you specify these points, the Adjust Cylindrical
Offsets and Changes the X and Y offsets of the map. Changing the
Rotations rotation adjusts the position of the wrap line; you can
use the scroll bar or enter a value.
SETUV | 925
Adjust Spherical Coordinates Dialog Box
Defines the polar axis of the spherical coordinate system and the wrap line
for the bitmap projection.
Parallel Axis Specifies one of the three perpendicular axes of the

WCS or an axis you specify by choosing Pick Points. If
you select Picked Axis and then choose OK without
choosing Pick Points, the Z axis of the WCS is used by
default.
Note If you use Pick Points, but the points you select
correspond to one of the WCS axes, AutoCAD saves this as
the WCS axis. The next time you display the Adjust
Spherical Coordinates dialog box, the option indicates the
WCS Z, Y, or X axis (or plane) instead of Picked Axis (Picked
Plane).
Polar Axis Shows a parallel projection of the object’s mesh onto a
Position plane perpendicular to the current axis. It also shows
the projection axis with a blue circle (the center of the
circle is the projection axis). A green radius shows the
wrap line. You can move the axis by using the scroll
bars.
By default, the axis is placed at the center of the extents
in all three directions, and the wrap line is placed
toward minimum Z—or minimum Y when the Z axis is
926 | SETUV
parallel to the spherical coordinate system axis. (When
you specify the points for the sphere, its dimensions
aren’t based on the extents.)
Adjust Bitmap Displays the Adjust Object Bitmap Placement dialog
box (see page 928) for adjusting the bitmap’s offset and
scaling.
Pick Points Temporarily closes the Adjust Spherical Coordinates
dialog box so that you can specify a projection sphere
by specifying points in the AutoCAD drawing area.
AutoCAD prompts you to select three points: the center
of the mapping sphere, the radius of the sphere in the
direction of the sphere’s north pole, and the direction
toward the seam (wrap line). After you specify these
points, the Adjust Spherical Coordinates dialog box is
redisplayed.
Offsets and Changes the X and Y offsets of the map. You can change
Rotations the rotation by entering a new value or by using the
scroll bar.
Adjust UVW Coordinates Dialog Box

Adjusts the three coordinate values to shift a solid, 3D material: marble,
granite, or wood.
Unlike the other Adjust Coordinates dialog boxes, this dialog box doesn’t
show a map position. Choose Preview to see the effect of shifting a 3D
material.
SETUV | 927
U, V, W Scales Sets the 3D projection coordinates.
Pick Points Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can
specify the 3D projection by specifying points in the
AutoCAD drawing area. AutoCAD prompts you to
specify four points: the origin and the three axes (U, V,
and W). After you specify these points, the Adjust UVW
Maintain Aspect Maintains the aspect ratio of the solid material by
Ratio locking the three axis values together. When you
change one axis, the other two change accordingly.
When this option is cleared, you can skew the solid
material by entering disparate values for the axes. The
effect is most noticeable on materials with veins or
grain, such as marble or wood.
Adjust Object Bitmap Placement Dialog Box

Adjusts the placement of materials on the objects.
In the upper-left part of the dialog box is a diagram that changes as you
change the bitmap placement values. The diagram shows a projection rect-
angle in red. By default, the projection rectangle represents the extents of an
object or selection set of objects; however, if you’ve specified points to define
the mapping geometry, the projection rectangle is based on your points and
not on the selected objects’ extents. The diagram also shows the bitmap as
another rectangle: its top and left edges are drawn in white, and its right and
bottom edges are drawn in magenta. When this dialog box is first displayed,
the two squares are the same size. As this implies, the default mapping scale
is 1:1.
The bitmap adjustments you make in this dialog box are combined with the
bitmap adjustments for the material itself. The offset is added, and the scale
is multiplied. For example, if you set the U scale to 2 for the material and to
3 in this dialog box, the rendering is scaled 6:1 in the U dimension.
928 | SETUV
Offset and Scale
Changes the origin of the bitmap relative to the origin of the UV projection
coordinates. Offset values can range from –1 to 1 in either dimension (U or
V). Adjust the offset by using the two scroll bars to the right and below the
diagram (enclosed by the outer box, labeled Offset) or by entering a value in
Offset U and Offset V. The bitmap rectangle moves to reflect the new offset.
If Tile is selected and you change the offset so that the bitmap rectangle
appears outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap is still applied to the
object when you render it. (During tiling, the offset acts as a displacement,
not an absolute position.) However, if Crop is selected, the bitmap is
rendered only where you place it, as indicated by the diagram; so if the
diagram shows the bitmap outside the projection rectangle, the bitmap does
not appear in a rendering.
The bitmap scale is the number of times the bitmap fits onto the object in
the U or V direction. Adjust the bitmap scaling by using the two scroll bars
to the left and above the diagram (enclosed by the inner box, labeled Scale)
or by entering a value in the Scale U and Scale V boxes. The dimensions of
the bitmap rectangle change to reflect the new scaling.

Maintain Aspect Ratio locks the U and V scaling dimensions together. When
Maintain Aspect Ratio is turned on, moving one scroll bar moves the other,
and a value you enter in the Scale U or Scale V box changes the other.
SETUV | 929
Tiling
With the following options, you can control how the bitmap is tiled:
Default The default tiling is the tiling set for the material as a
whole—either Tile or Crop.
Tile When this option is selected (the default), the bitmap is
tiled.
Crop Does not tile the bitmap. Outside the bitmap area, the
object or objects are rendered with the material colors.
The upper-left corner pixel of a bitmap defines the
bitmap key color. This color behaves as if it were
transparent when you render in cropped mode: all
pixels that have the same color as the upper-left pixel
are rendered with the underlying color of the object
material.
If you want to render a cropped pattern that is
completely opaque, edit the bitmap so that the upper-
left corner pixel has a color used nowhere else in the
bitmap—or, if the odd corner-pixel color shows in
rendering, surround the bitmap with a border one pixel
wide, using the unique color.
With cropping turned on, a pixel in a bitmap renders
either as transparent or in its original color. To get a soft
matte, or “feathered,” effect at the edge of a decal, you
first need to create a soft edge in the decal bitmap itself
(against the key color), and then set the material main
(diffuse) and ambient colors to match the bitmap key
color.
See Also
See “Project a 2D Image onto a Rendered Solid” in the User’s Guide.
ObjectARX applications. RENDER creates a shaded
image of a 3D wireframe model.
System Variables SHADEDGE determines the shading method used.
SHADEDIF controls diffuse reflection.
930 | SETUV
SETVAR
Lists or changes the values of system variables
Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Set Variable
Command line: setvar (or 'setvar for transparent use)
Enter variable name or [?] <current>: Enter a variable name, enter ?, or press
ENTER
Variable Name Specifies the name of the system variable you want to
set.
Enter new value for variable_name <current>: Enter a new
You can also change the value of system variables at the

Command prompt by entering the name of the variable
and its new value.
?—List Variables Lists all system variables in the drawing and their
current settings.
Enter variable(s) to list <*>: Enter a wild-card pattern or
press ENTER
SHADEMODE
Controls the display of solid object shading in the current viewport
SHADEMODE provides shading and wireframe options for the objects in the
current viewport. You can edit shaded objects without regenerating the
drawing.
You can display ambient, point, distant, and spot lights defined with the
LIGHT command in SHADEMODE. To display these lights, you must set
SHADEMODE to Flat Shaded, Gouraud Shaded, Flat Shaded Edges On, or
Gouraud Shaded Edges On. The 2D Wireframe, 3D Wireframe, and Hidden
SHADEMODE options do not display lights. To turn on lights, use the enable
Lights option in the 3D Graphics System Configuration dialog box (see page
813).
View menu: Shade
Command line: shademode
Enter option [2D wireframe/3D wireframe/Hidden/Flat/Gouraud/fLat+edges/

gOuraud+edges] <current>: Enter an option
SETVAR | 931
2D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent
the boundaries. Raster and OLE objects, linetypes, and
lineweights are visible. Even if the value for the
COMPASS system variable is set to 1, it does not appear
in the 2D Wireframe view.
3D Wireframe Displays the objects using lines and curves to represent
the boundaries. Displays a shaded 3D UCS icon. Raster
and OLE objects, linetypes, and lineweights are not
visible. You can set the COMPASS system variable to 1 to
view the compass. Material colors that you have applied
to the objects are shown.
Hidden Displays the objects using 3D wireframe representation
and hides lines representing back faces.
Flat Shaded Shades the objects between the polygon faces. The
objects appear flatter and less smooth than Gouraud-
shaded objects. Materials that you have applied to the
objects show when the objects are flat shaded.
Gouraud Shaded Shades the objects and smooths the edges between
polygon faces. This gives the objects a smooth, realistic
appearance. Materials that you have applied to the
objects show when the objects are Gouraud shaded.
Flat Shaded, Combines the Flat Shaded and Wireframe options. The
Edges On objects are flat shaded with the wireframe showing
through.
Gouraud Shaded, Combines the Gouraud Shaded and Wireframe options.
Edges On The objects are Gouraud shaded with the wireframe
showing through.
See Also
See “Add Simple Shading to 3D Objects” in the User’s Guide.
932 | SHADEMODE
SHAPE
Inserts a shape
Before inserting a shape, you must load the file containing the shape you
want using the LOAD command.
Command line: shape
Enter shape name or [?]: Enter a name, or enter ?
Shape Name Loads the shape.

Specify height <current>: Specify a height or press ENTER
ENTER
If a shape belongs to an external reference (xref)

attached to the current drawing, AutoCAD identifies
the shape file as externally dependent. Externally
dependent shapes cannot be used in the current
drawing unless they are reloaded.
?—List Shapes Lists shapes and the files in which the shapes are
defined. If you enter a question mark (?), AutoCAD
prompts:
Enter shape name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER
If you enter a name, AutoCAD lists the name of the file

in which the shape definition exists and ends SHAPE. If
you enter an asterisk (*), AutoCAD lists shape names
and ends SHAPE.
See Also
For more information about creating and modifying shapes, see “Overview
of Shape Files” in the Customization Guide.
Commands LOAD makes shapes available for placement in a
drawing.
SHAPE | 933
SHELL
Accesses operating system commands
Command line: shell
OS command: Enter an operating system command or press ENTER
With SHELL, you can execute operating system commands while remaining
in AutoCAD. When SHELL prompts you for an OS command, you can enter
most valid commands for your OS. When the command has been executed,
SHELL returns you to the AutoCAD prompt.
Pressing ENTER at the OS Command prompt displays the system prompt

with an extra close angle bracket (>). You can enter operating system com-
mands as if you were at the normal system prompt. Enter exit to return to
AutoCAD.
Warning! Do not use the SHELL command to delete lock files (file name
extension .??k) or temporary files (file name extensions .ac$ or .$a). Do not use
SHELL to run chkdsk, reset the serial I/O ports, or run external programs that
require disk swapping while editing a drawing stored on a floppy disk. Load
Terminate-and-Stay-Resident programs into memory before starting AutoCAD.
SHOWMAT
Lists the material type and attachment method for a selected object
Command line: showmat
Select object: Use an object selection method to select a single object
Depending on the method used to attach a material to an object, SHOWMAT

reports with one of the following:
Material material name is explicitly attached to the object.
Material material name is attached by ACI to ACI color number.
Material material name is attached by layer to layer layer name.
Material *GLOBAL* is attached by default or by block.
Explicit attachment takes precedence over all other methods, and

attachment by ACI takes precedence over attachment by layer.
See Also
See “Define and Modify Materials” in the User’s Guide.
934 | SHELL
ObjectARX applications. RMAT attaches and manages
rendering materials.
SIGVALIDATE
Displays information about the digital signature attached to a file
Command line: sigvalidate
The Validate Digital Signatures dialog box is displayed. Review the informa-
tion displayed in the dialog box, and click Close to view the signed file.
See Also
See “Overview of Digital Signatures” in the User’s Guide.
Validate Digital Signatures Dialog Box

Displays information about a digital signature. You can determine if a digital
signature is valid and if the signed file has been modified since it was signed.
Name
Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being
viewed.
Digital Signature Status
Displays the status of the digital signature.
File Status
Displays the status of the signed file.
SIGVALIDATE | 935
View Base Signature
Displays the Digital Signature Contents dialog box. This option is available
only if the digital signature is valid and the file has not been modified since
it was signed.
Xref Drawings
Contains detailed information about any xrefs in the signed file.
View Xref Drawings
Displays the xref drawings contained in a file’s base drawing.
View Xref List
Contains a list of the xref drawings in a signed file. Displays the name, folder,
and status of the xref. This list is available only if the current file contains
xrefs and View Xref Drawings is selected.
View Xref Signature
Displays the Digital Signatures Contents dialog box for the selected xref. This
button is enabled only if the xref has a valid digital signature attached.
Digital Signature Contents Dialog Box

Displays information about a digital signature. You can determine if a digital
signature is valid and if the signed file has been modified since it was signed.
Name
Displays the location and name of the file whose digital signature is being
viewed.
Digital Signature Status
Displays the status of the digital signature.
File Status
Displays the status of the signed file.
Signed By
Displays the name of the organization or individual who attached a digital
signature to the current file.
Other Fields
Contains detailed information about the digital signature. You can choose to
display the following information in the Values box.
Subject Displays information about the organization or
individual who owns the digital ID and attached the
digital signature.
936 | SIGVALIDATE
Issuer Displays the name of the certificate authority that
originally issued the digital ID.
Valid From Displays the day, month, year, and exact time from
which the digital ID can be first used and is considered
valid.
Valid To Displays the day, month, year, and exact time to which
the digital ID ceases to be valid.
Serial Number Displays the serial number assigned to the digital ID.
Values
Displays information about a digital signature based on the item you select
in the Other Fields list.
Comment
Displays any comments about the digital signature that is attached to the
current file.
Signature Date and Time
Displays the date and time that the digital signature was attached to the
current file. The date and time are based on the time service used when the
signature was attached.
Time Service Used
Displays the time service used to add the time stamp to the current file.
Skip Xref Warnings
Determines if the Digital Signature Contents dialog box is displayed for
signed xrefs. This check box appears only in the Digital Signature Contents
dialog box when a signed drawing is opened.
SKETCH
Creates a series of freehand line segments
Drawing with the SKETCH command controls a screen-based pen with a
pointing device. SKETCH is useful for entering map outlines, signatures, or
other freehand drawings. Sketched lines are not added to the drawing until
they are recorded. The standard digitizer tablet button menu is not available
while SKETCH is in progress. The following information is based on the
assumption that Tablet mode is on.
Command line: sketch
Record increment <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
SKETCH | 937
The record increment value defines the length of the line segments. The
pointing device must be moved a distance greater than the increment value
to generate a line.
larger record AutoCAD captures sketching as a series of independent lines. Setting the
increment SKPOLY system variable to a nonzero value produces a polyline for each
contiguous sequence of sketched lines rather than multiple line objects.
Sketch. Pen eXit Quit Record Erase Connect. Enter an option or press a
pointer button
Pen (Pick Button) Raises and lowers the sketching pen. The pen must be
smaller record raised before you can select menu items with the
increment pointing device.
Exit—ENTER Records and reports the number of temporary lines
(button 3) sketched and ends the command.
Quit (button 4) Discards all temporary lines sketched since the start of
SKETCH or the last use of the Record option, and ends
the command.
Record (button 2) Records temporary lines as permanent and does not
change the pen’s position. Reports the number of lines
using the following prompt:
nnn lines recorded.
Erase (button 5) Erases any portion of a temporary line and raises the
pen if it is down.
Select end of delete.
Connect Lowers the pen to continue a sketch sequence from the

(button 6) endpoint of the last sketched line or last Erase.
Connect: Move to endpoint of line.
. (Period) Lowers the pen, draws a straight line from the endpoint
(button 1) of the last sketched line to the pen’s current location,
and returns the pen to the up position.
See Also
See “Draw Freehand Sketches” in the User’s Guide.
System Variables SKETCHINC stores the current SKETCH record increment.
SKPOLY controls whether SKETCH draws lines as
individual line objects or as polylines.
938 | SKETCH
SLICE
Slices a set of solids with a plane
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Slice
Command line: slice
AutoCAD ignores regions in the current selection set.

Specify first point on slicing plane by [Object/Zaxis/View/XY/YZ/ZX/3points]
<3points>: Specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
Object
Aligns the cutting plane with a circle, ellipse, circular or elliptical arc, 2D
spline, or 2D polyline segment.
Select a circle, ellipse, arc, 2D-spline, or 2D-polyline:
object cutting plane sliced object
You can retain both halves of the sliced solids or just the half you specify. The
sliced solids retain the layer and color properties of the original solids.
Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
point (1) or enter b
The descriptions of the Point on the Desired Side of the Plane and Keep Both
Sides options match the descriptions of the corresponding options under 3
Points (see page 942).
SLICE | 939
Z Axis
Defines the cutting plane by specifying a point on the plane and another
point on the Z axis (normal) of the plane.
Specify a point on the section plane: Specify a point (1)
Specify a point on the Z-axis (normal) of the plane: Specify a point (2)
normal 1 1
2
cutting 2
plane
side view Z axis cutting plane sliced object
View
Aligns the cutting plane with the current viewport’s viewing plane.
Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane.
Specify a point on the current view plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press
ENTER
view cutting plane sliced object
940 | SLICE
XY
Aligns the cutting plane with the XY plane of the current user coordinate
system (UCS). Specifying a point defines the location of the cutting plane.
Specify a point on the XY-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
XY cutting plane sliced object
YZ
Aligns the cutting plane with the YZ plane of the current UCS. Specifying a
point defines the location of the cutting plane.
Specify a point on the YZ-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
1
YZ cutting plane sliced object
SLICE | 941
ZX
Aligns the cutting plane with the ZX plane of the current UCS. Specifying a
point defines the location of the cutting plane.
Specify a point on the ZX-plane <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
point or enter b
If AutoCAD slices a single solid into more than two objects, one solid is
created from the objects on one side of the plane and another solid is created
from the objects on the other side.
ZX cutting plane sliced object
1 Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
3 Points
Defines the cutting plane using three points.
Specify second point on plane: Specify a point (2)
Specify third point on plane: Specify a point (3)
942 | SLICE
3
2
1
3-point cutting plane sliced object
1 Specify a point on the desired side of the plane or [keep Both sides]: Specify a
Point on the Uses a point to determine which side of the sliced solids
Desired Side of your drawing retains. The point cannot lie on the
the Plane cutting plane.
Keep Both Sides Retains both sides of the sliced solids. Slicing a single
solid into two pieces creates two solids from the pieces
on either side of the plane. SLICE never creates more
than two new composite solids for each selected solid.
See Also
See “Section and Slice 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide.
Commands SECTION creates the intersection of a plane and
specified solids as one or more regions.
SNAP
Restricts cursor movement to specified intervals
The points you enter with a pointing device can be locked into regular
intervals on an invisible rectangular snap grid. You can rotate the snap grid,
set differing X and Y spacing, or choose an isometric format for the snap grid.
You can toggle Snap mode on and off with the Snap button on the status bar.
A change in the snap grid affects the cursor location when you specify a point
location using the pointing device.
The snap grid is invisible. Use SNAP with GRID to display a separate visible
grid of dots. Set the spacing of the two grids to equal or related values.
AutoCAD ignores Snap mode in perspective views.
SNAP | 943
Command line: snap (or 'snap for transparent use)
Specify snap spacing or [ON/OFF/Aspect/Rotate/Style/Type] <current>: Specify

a distance, enter an option, or press ENTER
Snap Spacing
Activates Snap mode with the value you specify.
On
Activates Snap mode using the current resolution, rotation, and style of the
snap grid.
Off
Turns off Snap mode but retains the current settings.
Aspect
Specifies different spacing in the X and Y directions. This option is not
available if the current snap style is Isometric.
Specify horizontal spacing <current>: Specify a distance, or press ENTER
Specify vertical spacing <current>: Specify a distance, or press ENTER
Rotate
Sets the origin and rotation of the snap grid. The rotation angle is measured
relative to the current UCS. You can specify a rotation angle between –90 and
90 degrees. A positive angle rotates the grid counterclockwise about its base
point. A negative angle rotates the grid clockwise.
Specify base point <current>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify rotation angle <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
Style
Specifies the format of the snap grid, which is Standard or Isometric.
Enter snap grid type [Standard/Isometric] <current>: Enter s, enter i, or press
ENTER
944 | SNAP
Standard
Displays a rectangular grid that is parallel to the XY plane of the current UCS.
X and Y spacing may differ.
Specify snap spacing or [Aspect] <current>: Specify a distance, enter a, or press
ENTER
Spacing Specifies the overall spacing of the snap grid.

Aspect Specifies the horizontal and vertical spacing of the snap
grid separately.
Specify horizontal spacing <current>: Specify a distance
or press ENTER
Specify vertical spacing <current>: Specify a distance or
press ENTER
Isometric
Sets an isometric grid, in which the grid points are initially at 30-degree and
150-degree angles. Isometric snap can be rotated but cannot have different
Aspect values.
Specify vertical spacing <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
left isoplane top isoplane right isoplane
ISOPLANE determines whether the crosshairs lie in the top isometric plane
(30- and 150-degree angles), the left isoplane (90- and 150-degree angles), or
the right isoplane (30- and 90-degree angles).
SNAP | 945
Type
Specifies the snap type.
Polar Sets the snap to polar tracking angles that are set in the
POLARANG system variable.
Grid Sets the snap to grid.
See Also
Commands DSETTINGS sets drawing aids, including snap settings.
GRID displays a dot grid at the specified spacing and
angle.
SOLDRAW
Generates profiles and sections in viewports created with SOLVIEW
SOLDRAW can only be used in viewports that have been created with
SOLVIEW.
Visible and hidden lines representing the silhouette and edges of solids in the
viewport are created and then projected to a plane perpendicular to the view-
ing direction. Silhouettes and edges are generated for all solids and portions
of solids behind the cutting plane. For sectional views, cross-hatching is
created using the current values of the HPNAME, HPSCALE, and HPANG system
variables.
Any existing profiles and sections in the selected viewport are deleted, and
new ones are generated. All layers, except those required to display the
profile or section, are frozen in each viewport.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Setup ➤ Drawing
Command line: soldraw
Select viewports to draw ...

Select objects: Select the viewports to be drawn
AutoCAD Release 12 drawings that contain views created with SOLVIEW can
be redrawn with SOLDRAW only after you use AMECONVERT to update the
solids in the views.
946 | SOLDRAW
Warning! Do not place permanent drawing information on the view name-
VIS, view name-HID, and view name-HAT layers. The information stored on these
layers is deleted and updated when SOLDRAW is run.
To undo a viewport drawn by SOLDRAW, you must use the Back option of
UNDO.
Note SOLDRAW is defined by the acsolids.arx application and is intended to be

used only interactively. For information about using this command from an
application, see “Externally Defined Commands” in the AutoLISP Reference.
See Also
Commands AMECONVERT converts AME solid models to AutoCAD
three-dimensional solid objects. SOLPROF creates profile
images of 3D solid and body objects, and SOLVIEW
creates floating viewports using orthographic projec-
tion to lay out multi- and sectional view drawings of 3D
solid and body objects.
SOLID
Creates solid-filled triangles and quadrilaterals
Surfaces toolbar:
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ 2D Solid
Command line: solid
Specify first point: Specify a point (1)

1
Specify second point: Specify a point (2)
2
3 The first two points define one edge of the polygon.
4 Specify third point: Specify a point (3) diagonally opposite the second
Specify fourth point or <exit>: Specify a point (4) or press ENTER
Pressing ENTER at the Fourth Point prompt creates a filled triangle. Specifying
a point (5) creates a quadrilateral area.
The last two points form the first edge of the next filled area. AutoCAD
repeats the Third Point and Fourth Point prompts. Specifying successive
third and fourth points creates further connected triangles and four-sided
polygons in a single solid object. Pressing ENTER ends SOLID.
SOLID | 947
6 7 2D solids are filled only when the FILLMODE system variable is on and the
viewing direction is orthogonal to the 2D solid.
2 4 5 See Also
See “Create Solid-Filled Areas” in the User’s Guide.
1 3 Commands FILL controls Fill mode.
System Variables FILLMODE stores the current setting for Fill mode.
SOLIDEDIT
Edits faces and edges of 3D solid objects
With SOLIDEDIT, you can edit solid objects by extruding, moving, rotating,
offsetting, tapering, copying, coloring, separating, shelling, cleaning,
checking, or deleting faces and edges.
You select solid objects by using one of the following selection methods:
boundary sets (selecting an internal point on a face of a solid selects the face),
crossing polygons, crossing windows, fences, and individual selection of faces
or edges. See “Select Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Modify menu: Solids Editing
Command line: solidedit
Solids editing automatic checking: SOLIDCHECK=current

Enter a solids editing option
[Face/Edge/Body/Undo/ExiteXit] <eXit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Face
Edits 3D solid faces by extruding, moving, rotating, offsetting, tapering,
deleting, copying, or changing the color of the selected faces.
Enter a face editing option [Extrude/Move/Rotate/Offset/Taper/Delete/Copy/
coLor/Undo/eXit] <eXit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Extrude
Extrudes selected planar faces of a 3D solid object to a specified height or
along a path. You can select multiple faces at one time.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
948 | SOLIDEDIT
Undo
Cancels the selection of the faces you added most recently to the selection
set. AutoCAD then displays the previous prompt. If all faces have been
removed, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Face selection has been completely undone
Remove
Removes previously selected faces from the selection set. AutoCAD then
displays the following prompt.
Remove faces or [Undo/Add/ALL]: Select one or more faces (1), enter an option,
or press ENTER
Undo Cancels the selection of the faces you removed most

recently from the selection set. AutoCAD then displays
the previous prompt. If no faces are currently selected,
AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Face selection has been completely undone
face selected face removed from selection set
Add Adds faces to the selection set.

Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more
faces (1) or select an option
selection set face added to selection set
SOLIDEDIT | 949
■ Undo: Cancels selection of the faces you added most
recently to the selection set. AutoCAD then displays
the previous prompt.
■ Remove: Removes previously selected faces.
AutoCAD then displays the previous prompt.
■ All: Selects all faces and adds them to the selection
set. AutoCAD then displays the previous prompt.
All Selects all faces and adds them to the selection set.
All
Selects all faces and adds them to the selection set.
After you select faces or choose an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces (1), enter an option,
or press ENTER
selection set all faces added to selection set
Specify height of extrusion or [Path]: Specify a distance or enter p
face selected face extruded
Height of Sets the direction and height of the extrusion. Entering

Extrusion a positive value extrudes the face in the direction of its
950 | SOLIDEDIT
normal. Entering a negative value extrudes the face in
the direction opposite to its normal.
Specify angle of taper for extrusion <0>: Specify an angle
between –90 and +90 degrees or press ENTER
face selected positive angle negative angle

extruded face extruded face
Tapering the selected face with a positive angle tapers

the face in, and a negative angle tapers the face out. The
default angle, 0, extrudes the face perpendicular to its
plane. All selected faces in the selection set are tapered
to the same value. If you specify a large taper angle or
height, you can cause the face to taper to a point before
it reaches the extrusion height.
Path Sets a path for the extrusion path based on a specified
line or curve. All the profiles of the selected face are
extruded along the chosen path to create the extrusion.
Select extrusion path: Use an object selection method
face selected path selected face extruded
SOLIDEDIT | 951
Lines, circles, arcs, ellipses, elliptical arcs, polylines, or
splines can be paths. The path should not lie on the
same plane as the face, nor should it have areas of high
curvature.
The extruded face starts from the plane of the profile
and ends on a plane perpendicular to the path at the
path’s endpoint. One of the endpoints of the path
should be on the plane of the profile; if not, AutoCAD
moves the path to the center of the profile.
If the path is a spline, the path should be perpendicular
to the plane of the profile and at one of the endpoints
of the path. If not, AutoCAD rotates the profile to be
perpendicular to the spline path. If one of the
endpoints of the spline is on the plane of the face,
AutoCAD rotates the face about the point; otherwise,
AutoCAD moves the spline path to the center of the
profile and rotates the profiles about its center.
If the path contains segments that are not tangent,
AutoCAD extrudes the object along each segment and
then miters the joint along the plane, bisecting the
angle formed by the segments. If the path is closed, the
profile lies on the miter plane. This allows the start and
end sections of the solid to match up. If the profile is
not on the miter plane, AutoCAD rotates the path until
it is on the miter plane.
Move
Moves the selected face on a 3D solid object to a specified height or distance.
You can select multiple faces at one time.
The descriptions of the Undo, Remove, Add, and All options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Extrude (see page 948).
After you select faces or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:
or press ENTER
Specify a base point or displacement: Specify a base point (2)
Specify a second point of displacement: Specify a point (3) or press ENTER
952 | SOLIDEDIT
1 2
3
face selected base point and second face moved

point selected
The two points you specify define a displacement vector that indicates how
far AutoCAD moves the selected face and in what direction. AutoCAD uses
the first point as a base point and places a single copy relative to the base
point. If you specify a single point, usually entered as a coordinate, and then
press ENTER , AutoCAD uses the coordinate as the new location.
Rotate
Rotates one or more faces or a collection of features on a solid about a
specified axis.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove/ALL]: Select one or more faces, enter an option, or
press ENTER
Specify an axis point or [Axis by object/View/Xaxis/Yaxis/Zaxis] <2points>:
Enter an option, specify a point, or press ENTER
Axis Point, 2 Points

Use two points to define the axis of rotation. Pressing ENTER at the main
Rotate prompt displays the following prompts. Specifying a point at the
main prompt skips the prompt for the first point.
Specify the first point on the rotation axis: Specify a point (1)
Specify the second point on the rotation axis: Specify a point (2)
Specify a rotation angle or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
SOLIDEDIT | 953
1
face selected rotation point selected face rotated about Z axis 35°
Specify the reference (starting) angle <0>: Specify the
starting angle
Specify the ending angle: Specify the ending angle

Axis by Object
Aligns the axis of rotation with an existing object. You can select the
following objects:
■ Line: Aligns the axis with the selected line.

■ Circle: Aligns with the 3D axis of the circle (perpendicular to the plane of
the circle and passing through the center of the circle).
■ Arc: Aligns with the 3D axis of the arc (perpendicular to the plane of the
arc and passing through the center of the arc).
■ Ellipse: Aligns with the 3D axis of the ellipse (perpendicular to the plane
of the ellipse and passing through the center of the ellipse).
■ 2D polyline: Aligns with the 3D axis formed by the polyline’s start points
and endpoints.
■ 3D polyline: Aligns with the 3D axis formed by the polyline’s start points
and endpoints.
■ LW polyline: Aligns with the 3D axis formed by the polyline’s start points
and endpoints.
■ Spline: Aligns with the 3D axis formed by the spline’s start points and
endpoints.
Select a curve to be used for the axis: Use an object selection method
954 | SOLIDEDIT
starting angle

View
Aligns the axis of rotation with the viewing direction of the current viewport
that passes through the selected point.
Specify the origin of the rotation <0, 0, 0>: Specify a point
starting angle

X Axis, Y Axis, Z Axis
Align the axis of rotation with the axis (X, Y, or Z) that passes through the
selected point.
Specify the origin of the rotation <0, 0, 0>: Specify a point
starting angle
SOLIDEDIT | 955
Offset
Offsets faces equally by a specified distance or through a specified point. A
positive value increases the size or volume of the solid, a negative value
decreases the size or volume of the solid.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces or enter an option (1)
press ENTER
Specify the offset distance: Specify a distance
face selected face offset = 1 face offset = –1
Specify a positive value to increase the size of the solid or a negative value to
decrease the size of the solid.
Note Holes inside a solid object offset smaller as the volume of the solid gets
larger.
Taper
Tapers faces with an angle. The rotation of the taper angle is determined by
the selection sequence of the base point and second point along the selected
vector.
956 | SOLIDEDIT
or press ENTER
Specify the base point: Specify a base point (2)
Specify another point along the axis of tapering: Specify a point (3)
Specify the taper angle: Specify an angle between –90 and +90 degrees
1
3
face selected base point and second face tapered 10°

point selected
Tapering the selected face with a positive angle tapers the face in, and a
negative angle tapers the face out. The default angle, 0, extrudes the face
perpendicular to its plane. All selected faces in the selection set are tapered
to the same value.
Delete
Deletes or removes faces, including fillets and chamfers.
Select faces or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more faces
or press ENTER
Solid validation started.
Solid validation completed.
SOLIDEDIT | 957
1
face selected face deleted
Copy
Copies faces as a region or a body. If you specify two points, AutoCAD uses
the first point as a base point and places a single copy relative to the base
point. If you specify a single point (usually entered as a coordinate) and then
press ENTER , AutoCAD uses the coordinate as the new location.
or press ENTER
Specify a base point or displacement: Specify a base point (2)
Specify a second point of displacement: Specify a point (3)
face selected base point and second face copied

point selected
Color
Changes the color of faces.
958 | SOLIDEDIT
press ENTER
AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog box (see page 169).
Undo
Reverses actions as far back as the beginning of the SOLIDEDIT session.
Exit
Exits the face-editing options and displays the Enter a Solids Editing Option
prompt.
Edge
Edits 3D solid objects by changing the color of or copying individual edges.
Enter an edge editing option [Copy/coLor/Undo/eXit] <eXit>: Enter an option
or press ENTER
Copy
Copies 3D edges. All 3D solid edges are copied as a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or
spline.
Select edges or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more edges or enter an option
After you select edges or enter an option, AutoCAD prompts as follows:

Select edges or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more edges (1) or press ENTER
Specify a base point of displacement: Specify a base point (2)
Specify a second point of displacement: Specify a point (3)
2
1
3
edge selected base point and second edge copied

point selected
SOLIDEDIT | 959
Undo
Cancels selection of the edges you added most recently to the selection set.
AutoCAD then displays the previous prompt. If all edges have been removed,
Edge selection has been completely undone
Remove
Removes previously selected edges from the selection set. AutoCAD then
displays the previous prompt.
Remove edges or [Undo/Add]: Select one or more edges, enter an option, or press
ENTER
Undo Cancels selection of the edges you added most recently

to the selection set. AutoCAD then displays the
previous prompt. If no edges are currently selected,
Edge selection has been completely undone
Add Adds edges to the selection set.

Select edges or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more edges
or enter an option
■ Undo: Cancels selection of the edges you added most

recently to the selection set. AutoCAD then displays
the previous prompt.
■ Remove: Removes previously selected edges.
AutoCAD then displays the previous prompt.
Color
Changes the color of edges.
Select edges or [Undo/Remove]: Select one or more edges or enter an option
descriptions of the corresponding options under Copy (see page 959). After
you select edges or enter an option, AutoCAD displays the Select Color dialog
box (see page 169).
Undo
Reverses actions as far back as the beginning of the SOLIDEDIT session.
960 | SOLIDEDIT
Exit
prompt.
Body
Edits the entire solid object by imprinting other geometry on the solid, sep-
arating the solid into individual solid objects, shelling, cleaning, or checking
the selected solid.
Enter a body editing option [Imprint/seParate solids/Shell/cLean/Check/Undo/
eXit] <eXit>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Imprint
Imprints an object on the selected solid. The object to be imprinted must
intersect one or more faces on the selected solid in order for imprinting to be
successful. Imprinting is limited to the following objects: arcs, circles, lines,
2D and 3D polylines, ellipses, splines, regions, bodies, and 3D solids.
Select a 3D solid: Select an object (1)
Select an object to imprint: Select an object (2)
Delete the source object <N>: Enter y or press ENTER
Select an object to imprint: Select an object or press ENTER
solid selected object selected object imprinted

on solid
Separate Solids
Separates 3D solid objects with disjointed volumes into independent 3D
solid objects.
Select a 3D solid: Select an object
Note Separating solids does not separate Boolean objects that form a single
volume.
SOLIDEDIT | 961
Shell
Shelling creates a hollow, thin wall with a specified thickness. You can specify
a constant wall thickness for all the faces. You can also exclude faces from the
shell by selecting them. A 3D solid can have only one shell. AutoCAD creates
new faces by offsetting existing ones outside their original positions.
Remove faces or [Undo/Add]: Select one or more faces or enter an option
Remove faces or [Undo/Add/ALL]: Select a face (1), enter an option, or press
ENTER
Enter the shell offset distance: Specify a distance
face selected shell offset=0.5 shell offset=–0.5
Specifying a positive value creates a shell to the inside perimeter of the solid;
specifying a negative value creates a shell to the outside perimeter of the
solid.
Clean
Removes shared edges or vertices having the same surface or curve definition
on either side of the edge or vertex. Removes all redundant edges and
vertices, imprinted as well as unused geometry.
Select a 3D solid: Select an object (1)
962 | SOLIDEDIT
1
solid selected solid cleaned
Check
Validates the 3D solid object as a valid ShapeManager solid, independent of
the SOLIDCHECK setting.
This object is a valid ShapeManager solid.
Undo
Undoes the editing action.
Exit
prompt.
Undo
Undoes the editing action.
Exit
Exits the SOLIDEDIT command.
See Also
See “Modify Faces of 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide.
System Variables SOLIDCHECK turns the solid validation on and off for
the current AutoCAD session. By default, SOLIDCHECK
is on and validates the solid.
SOLIDEDIT | 963
SOLPROF
Creates profile images of three-dimensional solids
A profile image displays only the edges and silhouettes of curved surfaces of
the solid for the current view.
SOLPROF can only be used while you are working in a layout tab. If your
drawing does not contain layout viewports, use VPORTS in the layout tab to
create one.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Setup ➤ Profile
Command line: solprof

Display hidden profile lines on separate layer? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER
Yes Generates only two blocks: one for the visible lines and
one for the hidden lines of the entire selection set.
When you generate hidden lines, solids can partially or
completely hide other solids. The visible profile block is
drawn in the BYLAYER linetype, and the hidden profile
block is drawn in the HIDDEN linetype (if loaded). The
visible and hidden profile blocks are placed on uniquely
named layers using the following naming conventions:
PV-viewport handle for the visible profile layer
PH-viewport handle for the hidden profile layer
For example, if you create a profile in a viewport whose
handle is 4B, the blocks containing the visible lines are
inserted on layer PV-4B, and the block containing the
hidden lines (if requested) is inserted on layer PH-4B. If
these layers do not exist, the command creates them. If
the layers do exist, the blocks are added to the
information already on the layers.
Note To determine the handle of a viewport, select the
viewport while in paper space and use the LIST command.
Choose a layout tab to move from model space to paper
space.
964 | SOLPROF
V does not change the display of layers; if you want to
view only the profile lines you’ve created, turn off the
layer containing the original solid (usually the current
layer).
No Treats all profile lines as visible lines and creates a block
for the profile lines of each selected solid. All profile
lines for each solid in the selection set are generated,
even if a solid is partially or completely obscured by
another solid. The visible profile blocks are drawn in
the same linetype as the original solid and placed on a
uniquely named layer using the naming convention
described under the Yes option (see page 964).
profile with hidden lines profile with hidden lines

removed displayed
Note Solids that overlap each other (share some common volume) produce
dangling edges if you request hidden-line removal. This happens because the
edges must be broken at the point where they enter another solid to separate
them into visible and hidden portions. You can eliminate dangling edges by
combining the overlapping solids (using UNION) before generating a profile.
The next prompt determines whether 2D or 3D objects are used to represent

the visible and hidden lines of the profile.
Project profile lines onto a plane? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Yes Creates the profile lines with 2D objects. AutoCAD

projects the 3D profile onto a plane normal to the
viewing direction and passing through the origin of the
UCS. AutoCAD cleans up the 2D profile by eliminating
lines that are parallel to the viewing direction and by
converting arcs and circles that are viewed on edge into
lines.
No Creates the profile lines with 3D objects.
SOLPROF | 965
The next prompt determines whether tangential edges are displayed. A
tangential edge is the transition line between two tangent faces. It’s the
imaginary edge at which two faces meet and are tangent. For example, if you
fillet the edge of a box, tangential edges are created where the cylindrical face
of the fillet blends into the planar faces of the box. Tangential edges are not
shown for most drafting applications.
Delete tangential edges? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
profile with tangential profile with tangential

edges deleted edges retained
See Also
The SOLPROF command is defined by the solids.arx application. For informa-
tion about using this command from an application, see “Externally Defined
Commands” in the AutoLISP Reference.
three-dimensional solid objects. SOLDRAW generates
profiles and sections in viewports created with
SOLVIEW, and SOLVIEW creates floating viewports using
orthographic projection to lay out multi- and sectional
view drawings of 3D solid and body objects.
SOLVIEW
Creates floating viewports using orthographic projection to lay out multi- and sectional
view drawings of 3D solid and body objects while in a layout
SOLVIEW calculates the projection as it guides you through the process of
creating orthographic, auxiliary, and sectional views. View-specific
information is saved with each viewport you create. This information is used
by SOLDRAW, which does the final generation of the drawing view. SOLVIEW
uses the AutoCAD paper space and viewport-specific layer visibility to set up
drawing views.
966 | SOLVIEW
SOLVIEW creates layers that SOLDRAW uses to place the visible lines and
hidden lines for each view. Additionally, SOLVIEW creates layers where you
can place dimensions that are visible in individual viewports. SOLVIEW places
the visible lines, hidden lines, dimensions, and section hatching for each
view on a separate layer using the following naming conventions (view name
is the name given to the view when you created it).
Layers created by SOLVIEW
Layer name Object type
View name-VIS Visible lines
View name-HID Hidden lines
View name-DIM Dimensions
View name-HAT Hatch patterns (for sections)
Warning! The information stored on these layers is deleted and updated

when you run SOLDRAW. Do not place permanent drawing information on these
layers.
SOLVIEW places the viewport objects on the VPORTS layer. SOLVIEW creates
this layer if it does not already exist.
SOLVIEW | 967
SOLVIEW must be run in a layout tab. If the Model tab is current, the last
active layout tab is made current.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Setup ➤ View
Command line: solview
Enter an option [Ucs/Ortho/Auxiliary/Section]: Enter an option or press ENTER

to exit the command
UCS
Creates a profile view relative to a user coordinate system. If no viewports
exist in your drawing, the UCS option is a good way to create an initial view-
port from which other views can be created. All other SOLVIEW options
require an existing viewport.
You have the option of using the current UCS or a previously saved one as
the profile plane. The viewport projection is created parallel to the XY plane
of the UCS with the X axis facing right and the Y axis upward.
Enter an option [Named/World/?/Current] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
clip first corner

view center
clip second corner
Named Uses the XY plane of a named UCS to create a profile

view.
Enter name of UCS to restore: Enter the name of an
existing UCS
Enter view scale <1.0>: Enter a number or press ENTER
968 | SOLVIEW
Enter the name of the UCS you want to use and the
scale of your view. Entering a scale is equivalent to
zooming your viewport by a factor relative to paper
space. The default value is 1:1.
Specify view center: Specify a point and press ENTER
when done
The center is based on the current model space extents.

You can try several points until you are satisfied with
the view’s location.
At the next prompt, specify the opposite corners of the
viewport.
Specify the first corner of viewport: Specify a point
Specify the other corner of viewport: Specify a point
Enter view name: Enter a name for the view
AutoCAD returns to the initial prompt.

World Uses the XY plane of the WCS to create a profile view.
when done

viewport.
Specify the first corner of viewport:
Specify the other corner of viewport:
SOLVIEW | 969
?—List Named Lists the names of existing user coordinate systems. The
UCSs list is filtered using the wild-card combinations you
enter (wild-card characters accepted by the UCS
command are valid).
Enter UCS names to list <*>: Enter a name or press ENTER
to list all UCSs
After the list is displayed, press any key to return to the

first prompt.
Current Uses the XY plane of the current UCS to create a profile
view.
when done

viewport.
Specify the first corner of viewport:
Specify the other corner of viewport:
970 | SOLVIEW
Ortho
Creates a folded orthographic view from an existing view.
clip first corner
side to fold
view center clip second corner
Once you select the side of the viewport you want to use for projecting the
new view, a rubber-band line perpendicular to the side of the viewport helps
you locate the center of the new view. You can try several points until you
are satisfied with the view’s location.
Specify side of viewport to project: Select the edge of a viewport
At the next prompt, specify the opposite corners of the viewport.

Specify first corner of viewport:
Specify opposite corner of viewport:
Auxiliary
Creates an auxiliary view from an existing view. An auxiliary view is one that
is projected onto a plane perpendicular to one of the orthographic views and
inclined in the adjacent view.
SOLVIEW | 971
clip first corner
view center
side to view from
inclined plane’s 1st point
clip second corner
inclined plane’s 2nd point
Two points define the inclined plane used for the auxiliary projection. Both
points must be located in the same viewport.
Specify first point of inclined plane:
Specify second point of inclined plane:
The next point determines the side from which you view the plane.
Specify side to view from: Specify a point
A rubber-band line perpendicular to the inclined plane helps you select the
center of the new viewport. You can try several points until you are satisfied
with the view’s location.

972 | SOLVIEW
Section
Creates a drafting sectional view of solids, complete with cross-hatching.
When you use SOLDRAW on a sectional view created with this option, it
creates a temporary copy of the solids and uses SLICE to perform the
operation at the cutting plane that you define. SOLDRAW then generates a
profile of the visible half of the solids and discards the original copy. Finally
SOLDRAW sections the solids. Solids not crossing the cutting plane are
generated as full profiles. Because drafting standards recommend not draw-
ing hidden lines in sectional views, SOLVIEW freezes the View Name-HID layer.
clip first corner

side of cutting plane
to view from
cutting plane
1st point
view center clip

cutting plane 2nd point second
corner
In the original viewport, specify two points to define the sectioning plane.
Specify first point of cutting plane:
Specify second point of cutting plane:
Define the viewing side by specifying a point on one side of the cutting
plane.
Specify side to view from: Specify a point
Enter the scale of the new view. Entering a scale is equivalent to zooming
your viewport by a factor relative to paper space. The default value is a 1:1
scale, which is equivalent to zoom 1.0xp.
Enter view scale <current>: Enter a positive number
SOLVIEW | 973
At the next prompt, specify the center of the new viewport. If you accepted
the default scale (by pressing ENTER ), a rubber-band line perpendicular to the
sectioning plane helps you locate the center of the new view. Otherwise, you
can place the view anywhere. You can try several points until you are satisfied
with the view’s location.

Note SOLVIEW is defined by the solids.arx application and is intended to be

used only interactively.
See Also
For information about using this command from an application, see
“Externally Defined Commands” in the AutoLISP Reference.
three-dimensional solid objects. SOLDRAW generates
profiles and sections in viewports created with
SOLVIEW, and SOLPROF creates profile images of 3D solid
and body objects.
SPACETRANS
Converts length values between model space and paper space
Text toolbar:
Command line: spacetrans
In model space, the prompt is displayed as follows:

Specify paper space distance <1.000>: Enter a length in paper space to convert
to the equivalent length in model space
In a paper space layout, the prompt is displayed as follows:

Select a viewport: Pick a layout viewport object
Specify model space distance <1.000>: Enter a length in model space to convert
to the equivalent length in paper space
974 | SPACETRANS
SPACETRANS converts lengths, typically text heights, from either model space
or paper space to its equivalent length in the other space. It is intended to be
invoked transparently at a prompt for text height or other length value.
When used at the Command prompt, SPACETRANS displays the computed
length equivalent in the Command window.
See Also
See “Set Text Height” in the User’s Guide.
SPELL
Checks spelling in a drawing
The SPELL command corrects the spelling of text objects created with the
LEADER, TEXT, MTEXT (multiline or paragraph text), and ATTDEF commands.
Tools menu: Spelling

Command line: spell (or 'spell for transparent use)
If you enter all at the Select Objects prompt, the spelling in all text objects in
the Model tab and all layout tabs is checked.
The Check Spelling dialog box is displayed if AutoCAD finds an unknown
word in the selected text.
Check Spelling Dialog Box

Corrects the spelling in text objects created with TEXT, MTEXT, LEADER, and
ATTDEF. The Check Spelling dialog box is displayed only if AutoCAD finds a
misspelled or unknown word in the specified text.
Spell checking in attributes is limited to attribute values only. The spelling in
text objects within block references and nested block references is checked,
but spell checking in block definitions is performed only if the associated
block reference has been selected.
SPELL | 975
Current Displays the name of the current dictionary.
Dictionary
Current Word Displays the name of the word being checked.
Suggestions Displays a list of suggested replacement words from the
current dictionary. Select a replacement or enter a
replacement word in the box.
Ignore Skips the current word.
Ignore All Skips all remaining words that match the current word.
Change Replaces the current word with the word in the
Suggestions box.
Change All Replaces the current word in all selected text objects.
Add Adds the current word to the current custom
dictionary. The maximum word length is 63 characters.
Lookup Lists words similar to the word selected in Suggestions.
Change Displays the Change Dictionaries dialog box.
Dictionaries
Context Displays the phrase in which AutoCAD located the
current word.
976 | SPELL
Change Dictionaries Dialog Box
Changes to another dictionary. During the spelling check, AutoCAD matches
the words in the drawing to the words in the current main dictionary. Any
spelling exceptions that you identify with the Add option are stored in the
custom dictionary you are using at the time of the spelling check.
If you want to check spelling in another language, you can change to a
different main dictionary. You can also create any number of custom
dictionaries and switch to them as needed.
Main Dictionary
Displays a list of language-specific dictionaries from which you can choose a
different main dictionary. This dictionary is used in conjunction with the
custom dictionary.
Custom Dictionary
Displays the name of the current custom dictionary. To create a new custom
dictionary, enter a name and choose OK.
Browse Displays the Select Custom Dictionary dialog box (a
standard file selection dialog box), in which you can
select a custom dictionary file to use. The selected
dictionary file is used by AutoCAD until another file is
selected.
SPELL | 977
Custom Dictionary Words
Displays a list of the words that currently exist in the specified custom
dictionary. You can add words to or delete words from this list.
Add Adds the word that you enter in the box to the current
custom dictionary. The maximum length is 63
characters.
Delete Deletes the word you enter in the box or select from the
custom dictionary.
See Also
See “Check Spelling” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DDEDIT edits text and attribute definitions. TEXT creates
text on the screen as you enter it. MTEXT creates a para-
graph that fits within a specified area. STYLE creates text
styles.
System Variables DCTCUST displays the path and file name of the current
custom spelling dictionary. DCTMAIN displays the file
name of the current main spelling dictionary.
SPHERE
Creates a three-dimensional solid sphere
The sphere is positioned so that its central axis is parallel to the Z axis of the
current user coordinate system (UCS). Latitudinal lines are parallel to the XY
plane.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Sphere
Command line: sphere

Specify center of sphere <0,0,0>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify radius of sphere or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius Defines the radius of the sphere.

Diameter Defines the diameter of the sphere.
Specify diameter: Specify a distance
978 | SPHERE
center
radius diameter
See Also
See “Create 3D Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands The Sphere option of the 3D command creates a
meshed sphere.
SPLINE
Creates a nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS) curve
SPLINE fits a smooth curve to a sequence of points within a specified
tolerance. AutoCAD uses NURBS (nonuniform rational B-splines)
mathematics, which stores and defines a class of curve and surface data.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Spline
Command line: spline
Specify first point or [Object]: Specify a point or enter o
First Point
Creates a spline using points you specify.
Specify next point: Specify a point
Enter points until you have defined the spline curve. After you enter two
points, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
SPLINE | 979
2 6 Specify next point or [Close/Fit Tolerance] <Start tangent>: Specify a point, enter
an option, or press ENTER
4
Next Point Continuing to enter points adds additional spline curve
segments until you press ENTER . Enter undo to remove
3
1 5 7 the last point specified. Once you press ENTER ,
AutoCAD prompts you to specify the start tangent for
the spline curve. See “Start Tangent” on page 980.
Close Closes the spline curve by defining the last point as
coincident with the first and making it tangent to the
joint.
Specify tangent: Specify a point or press ENTER
Specify a point to define the tangent vector or use the

tangent Tangent and Perpendicular object snap modes to make
closed spline the spline tangent or perpendicular to existing objects.
Fit Tolerance Changes the tolerance for fitting of the current spline
curve. The spline curve is redefined such that it fits
through the existing points according to the new
tolerance. You can repeatedly change the fit tolerance,
but doing so changes the fit tolerance for all the control
points regardless of the control point that is selected.
zero tolerance
Specify fit tolerance <current>: Enter a value or press
ENTER
If you set the tolerance to 0, the spline curve passes

through the fit points. Entering a tolerance greater than
0 allows the spline curve to pass through the fit points
positive tolerance
within the specified tolerance.
Start Tangent Defines the tangency for the first and last points of the
spline curve.
Specify start tangent: Specify a point or press ENTER
The Specify Start Tangent prompt specifies the

first tangent point tangency of the spline curve at the first point.
Specify end tangent: Specify a point or press ENTER
The Specify End Tangent prompt specifies the tangency

of the spline curve at the last point.
980 | SPLINE
If you specify tangency at both endpoints of the spline,
you can enter a point or use the Tangent and
Perpendicular object snap modes to make the spline
tangent or perpendicular to existing objects. If you
press ENTER , AutoCAD calculates default tangents.
last tangent point Object

Converts 2D or 3D quadratic or cubic spline-fit polylines to equivalent
splines and (depending on the setting of the DELOBJ system variable) deletes
the polylines.
Select objects to convert to splines...
Select objects: Select 2D or 3D spline-fit polylines and press ENTER when you
finish
See Also
See “Draw Splines” in the User’s Guide.
Commands SPLINEDIT edits a spline object. PEDIT creates spline-fit
polylines.
System Variables The order of a spline-fit polyline depends on the
SPLINETYPE system variable.
SPLINEDIT
Edits a spline or spline-fit polyline
Modify II toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Spline
Shortcut menu: Select a spline to edit, right-click in the drawing area, and
choose Spline Edit.
Command line: splinedit
Select spline:
Enter an option [Fit data/Close/Move vertex/Refine/rEverse/Undo]:
When you select a spline object or spline-fit polyline, grips appear at the
control points.
If the selected spline is closed, the Close option changes to Open. If the
selected spline has no fit data, the Fit Data option is not available. Fit data
consists of all fit points, the fit tolerance, and tangents associated with
splines created with the SPLINE command.
SPLINEDIT | 981
A spline can lose its fit data if you
■ Use the Purge option while editing fit data

■ Refine the spline by elevating the order, adding a control point, or
changing the weight of a control point
■ Change the fit tolerance
■ Move a control point
■ Trim, break, stretch, or lengthen the spline
Note SPLINEDIT automatically converts splined polylines to spline objects. A

splined polyline is converted even if you select it and immediately exit
SPLINEDIT.
Fit Data
Edits fit data using the following options:
Enter a fit data option
[Add/Close/Delete/Move/Purge/Tangents/toLerance/eXit] <eXit>: Enter an
Note If the selected spline is closed, AutoCAD replaces the Close option with
the Open option.
Add
Adds fit points to a spline.
Specify control point <exit>: Specify a control point or press ENTER
Specify new point <exit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
When you select a point, AutoCAD highlights it and the next point and
interprets the new point to go between the highlighted points. Use the Undo
option to remove the last point added. Selecting the last point on an open
spline highlights only that point, and AutoCAD adds the new point after the
last. If you select the first point on an open spline, you have the option of
placing the new point before or after the first point.
Specify new point or [After/Before] <exit>: Specify a point, enter an option, or
press ENTER
AutoCAD adds the point and refits the spline through the new set of points.
982 | SPLINEDIT
new point
selected
point
result
Close/Open
If the selected spline is closed, AutoCAD replaces the Close option with the
Open option.
Close Closes an open spline and makes it tangent continuous
(smooth) at its endpoints. If the spline’s start point and
endpoint are the same, this option makes the spline
tangent continuous at both points.
tangent
continuity
open spline closed spline
Open Opens a closed spline. If the spline’s start point and

endpoint were the same before you used the Close
option to make it tangent continuous at both points,
the Open option returns the spline to its original state.
The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose
their tangent continuity (smoothness).
If the spline was open (its start point and endpoint were
not the same) before you used the Close option to make
it tangent continuous where the start point and
endpoint meet, this option returns the spline to its
original open state and removes tangent continuity.
no tangent
continuity
closed spline open spline
SPLINEDIT | 983
Delete
Removes fit points from a spline and refits the spline through the remaining
points.
Specify control point <exit>: Specify a control point or press ENTER
Move
Moves fit points to a new location.
Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select Point/eXit] <N>: Specify a point,
New Location Moves the selected point to the new location you
specify. AutoCAD repeats the previous prompt.
new point
result
Next Moves selection to the next point.

Previous Moves selection to the previous point.
Select Point Selects a point from the set of fit points.
Specify fit point <exit>: Specify a fit point or press ENTER
Exit Returns to the Enter a Fit Data Option prompt.
Purge
Removes a spline’s fit data from the drawing database. After purging the
spline’s fit data, AutoCAD redisplays the main SPLINEDIT prompt without the
Fit Data option.
Tangents
Edits the start and end tangents of a spline.
Specify start tangent or [System default]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press
ENTER
Specify end tangent or [System default]: Specify a point, enter an option, or press
ENTER
984 | SPLINEDIT
If the spline is closed, the prompt becomes Specify Tangent or [System
Default].
The System Default option calculates the default tangents at the ends.
You can specify a point or use the Tangent or Perpendicular object snap mode
to make the spline tangential or perpendicular to existing objects.
Tolerance
Refits the spline to the existing points with new tolerance values.
Enter fit tolerance <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
Exit
zero tolerance Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt.
Close/Open
If the selected spline is closed, the Close option changes to Open.
Close Closes an open spline and makes it tangent continuous
positive tolerance (smooth) at its endpoints. If the spline’s start point and
endpoint are the same, this option makes the spline
tangent continuous at both points.
Open Opens a closed spline. If the spline’s start point and
endpoint were the same before you used the Close
option to make it tangent continuous at both points,
the Open option returns the spline to its original state.
The start point and endpoint remain the same but lose
their tangent continuity (smoothness).
If the spline was open (its start point and endpoint were
not the same) before you used the Close option to make
it tangent continuous where the start point and
endpoint meet, this option returns the spline to its
original open state and removes tangent continuity.
Move Vertex
Relocates a spline’s control vertices and purges the fit points.
Specify new location or [Next/Previous/Select Point/eXit] <N>: Specify a point,
SPLINEDIT | 985
New Location Moves the selected point to the new location you
specify.
After you specify a new location for the selected point,
AutoCAD recalculates and displays the spline with a
new set of control points.
Next Moves selection to the next point. The point marker
spline, even if the spline is closed.
Previous Moves selection to the previous point. The point
marker does not wrap around from the start to the end
of the spline, even if the spline is closed.
Select Point Selects a point from the set of control points.
Specify fit point <exit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Exit Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt.
Refine
Fine-tunes a spline definition.
Enter a refine option [Add control point/Elevate order/Weight/eXit] <eXit>:
Add Control Point

Increases the number of control points that control a portion of a spline.
Specify a point on the spline <exit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
AutoCAD adds a new control point close to the point you select, between the
two control points affecting that portion of the spline.
selected
new point
point
986 | SPLINEDIT
Elevate Order
Increases the number of control points on the spline.
Enter new order <current>: Enter an integer or press ENTER
Entering a value greater than the current value increases the number of
control points uniformly across the spline for more localized control. The
maximum value for order is 26.
Weight
Changes the weight at various spline control points. A larger weight value
pulls the spline closer to the control point.
Enter new weight (current = current) or [Next/Previous/Select point/eXit] <N>:
Enter a value, enter an option, or press ENTER
New Weight Recalculates the spline based on the new weight value
at the selected control point. The larger the integer
value, the more the spline is pulled toward the control
point.
Next Moves selection to the next point. The point marker
spline, even if the spline is closed.
Previous Moves selection to the previous point. The point
marker does not wrap around from the start to the end
of the spline, even if the spline is closed.
Select Point Selects a point from the set of control points.
Specify fit point <exit>: Specify a point or press ENTER
Exit Returns to the main Refine prompt.
Exit
Returns to the main SPLINEDIT prompt.
Reverse
Reverses the spline’s direction. This option is intended primarily for third-
party applications.
SPLINEDIT | 987
Undo
Cancels the last editing action.
See Also
See “Modify Splines” in the User’s Guide.
Commands PEDIT edits spline-fit polylines. SPLINE creates an ACIS-
based quadratic or cubic spline (NURBS) curve.
STANDARDS
Manages the association of standards files with AutoCAD drawings.

Tools menu: CAD Standards ➤ Configure
Command line: standards
The Configure Standards dialog box is displayed.
Configure Standards Dialog Box

Associates the current drawing with a standards file and lists plug-ins used to
check standards.
Check Standards Opens the Check Standards dialog box.
Settings Displays the CAD Standards Settings dialog box, which
specifies additional settings for the Configure Standards
and Check Standards dialog boxes.
The Configure Standards dialog box contains the following tabs:
■ Standards
■ Plug-ins
Standards Tab
Displays information about the standards files that are associated with the
current drawing.
988 | STANDARDS
Standards Files Associated with the Current Drawing
Lists all standards (DWS) files that are associated with the current drawing.
To add a standards file, click Add Standards File. To remove a standards file,
click Remove Standards File. If conflicts arise between multiple standards in
this list (for example, if two standards specify layers of the same name but
with different properties), the standards file that is shown first in the list
takes precedence. To change the position of a standards file in the list, select
it and click Move Up or Move Down.
You can use the shortcut menu to add, remove, or reorder files.
Add Standards Associates a standards (DWS) file with the current
File drawing.
Remove Removes a standards file from the list. (Removing a
Standards File standards file does not delete it but simply dissociates it
from the current drawing.)
Move Up Moves a standards file up one position in the list.
Move Down Moves a standards file down one position in the list.
Description Provides summary information about the standards file
currently selected in the list.
Plug-ins Tab
Lists and describes the standards plug-ins that are installed on the current
system. A standards plug-in is installed for each of the named objects for
which standards can be defined (layers, dimension styles, linetypes, and text
styles). In the future, it is expected that third-party applications will be able
to install additional plug-ins.
Plug-ins Used Lists the standards plug-ins on the current system. You
When Checking can specify which plug-ins to use when auditing a
Standards drawing by selecting plug-ins from this list.
Description Provides summary information about the standards
plug-in currently selected in the list.
STANDARDS | 989
CAD Standards Settings Dialog Box

Tools menu: CAD Standards ➤ Configure
Command line: standards or checkstandards
Specifies additional settings for the Configure Standards dialog box and the
Check Standards dialog box.
Notification Sets an option for notification about standards
Settings violations.
Disable Turns off notifications for standards violations and for
Standards missing standards files.
Notifications
Display Alert Turns on notification for standards violations in the
upon Standards current drawing. An alert is displayed when you
Violation commit a standards violation. The alert informs you of
how many nonstandard objects you created or edited
while making changes to the drawing. Once the alert is
displayed, you can choose to fix or not fix the standards
violation. For drawings that use scripts and LISP
routines, the alert is not displayed until the script or
routine has been completed. (STANDARDSVIOLATION
system variable)
Display Standards Displays an icon in the status bar when you open a file
Status Bar Icon associated with a standards file and when you create or
modify non-standard objects. (STANDARDSVIOLATION
system variable)
Check Standards Sets options for fixing violations and ignoring flagged
Settings problems.
990 | STANDARDS
Automatically Fix Switches between automatically fixing or not fixing
Non-standard nonstandard AutoCAD objects if a recommended fix is
Properties available. Recommended fixes are available only when
a nonstandard object has a name that matches a
standard object, but different properties. In this case,
the properties of the standard object are applied to the
nonstandard object. The Checking Complete alert
summarizes the number of automatically fixed
violations that occur after an audit.
This option is set for each system and applies to all
drawings checked on a system.
Show Ignored Switches between displaying or not displaying
Problems problems that have been flagged as ignored. If this
option is checked, standards violations that have been
flagged as ignored are displayed when an audit is
performed on the current drawing.
Preferred Provides a list of standards files that control the default
Standards File to selection in the Replace With list in the Check
Use for Standards dialog box.
Replacements
Regardless of this setting, if a recommended
replacement is found (this is the replacement preceded
by a check mark), it is always the default selection. If no
recommended replacement is found when a standards
file (DWS) is selected in the CAD Standards Settings
dialog box, the default selection in the Replace With list
is the first replacement item from the selected standards
file. If this setting is set to None, and no recommended
replacement is found, no items will be selected in the
Replace With list.
STATS
Displays rendering statistics
Render toolbar:
View menu: Render ➤ Statistics
Command line: stats
AutoCAD displays the Statistics dialog box.
STATS | 991
Statistics Dialog Box
Provides rendering information, such as rendering type, scene name, and
rendering time. The values cannot be altered, but they can be saved to a file.
Statistics not listed are displayed according to their current settings in the
Render dialog box.
Rendering Type Lists the last rendering type used.

Scene Name Lists the name of the current scene or NONE.
Total Time Displays time for initialization, rendering, traversal,
display, and cleanup.
Initialization Time Displays time for initializing rendering buffers,
callbacks, lights, and materials.
Traversal and Displays time for geometry and rendering.
Render Time
Display Time Displays time for displaying the rendering.
Cleanup Time Displays time for cleaning up rendering buffers.
Rendering Time Displays the time used to generate the last rendering.
Total Faces Displays the number of faces processed during the last
rendering.
Total Triangles Displays the number of triangles processed during the
last rendering.
Save Statistics to Saves the information in the Statistics dialog box to an
File ASCII file. Enter a file name. If the file already exists,
AutoCAD appends the information to that file.
992 | STATS
See Also
ObjectARX applications. RENDER creates a photorealis-
tic or realistically shaded image of a three-dimensional
wireframe model using geometry, lighting, and surface
finish information.
STATUS
Displays drawing statistics, modes, and extents
Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Status
Command line: status (or 'status for transparent use)
All coordinates and distances are displayed by STATUS in the format specified
by UNITS.
STATUS reports the number of objects in the current drawing. This includes
graphical objects such as arcs and polylines, and nongraphical objects such
as layers and linetypes, and block definitions. When used at the DIM prompt,
STATUS reports the values and descriptions of all dimensioning system
variables.
In addition, STATUS displays the following information.
Model or Paper Displays the drawing limits defined by LIMITS. The first
Space Limits Are line shows the XY coordinate of the limit’s lower-left
corner, stored in the LIMMIN system variable. The
second line shows the XY coordinate of the limit’s
upper-right corner, stored in the LIMMAX system
variable. The notation Off to the right of the Y
coordinate value indicates that limits checking is set to
0.
Model or Paper Displays the drawing extents, which includes all objects
Space Uses in the database and can exceed the drawing limits. The
first line shows the XY coordinate of the lower-left
corner of the extents. The second line shows the XY
coordinate of the upper-right corner. The notation Over
to the right of the Y coordinate value indicates that the
drawing extends outside the drawing limits.
STATUS | 993
Display Shows Lists the portion of the drawing extents visible in the
current viewport. The first line shows the XY
coordinate of the display’s lower-left corner. The second
line shows the XY coordinate of the upper-right corner.
Insertion Base Is Displays the insertion point of the drawing, stored in
the INSBASE system variable and expressed as an X,Y,Z
coordinate.
Snap Resolution Displays the snap spacing in the X and Y directions,
Is stored in the SNAPUNIT system variable.
Grid Spacing Is Displays the grid spacing in the X and Y directions,
stored in the GRIDUNIT system variable.
Current Space Shows whether model space or paper space is active.
Current Layer Lists the current layer of the drawing, stored by the
CLAYER system variable.
Current Color Lists the current color, stored by the CECOLOR system
variable.
Current Linetype Lists the current linetype, stored by the CELTYPE system
variable.
Current Lists the current lineweight, stored by the CELWEIGHT
Lineweight system variable.
Current Plot Style Lists the current plot style, stored by the CPLOTSTYLE
system variable.
Current Elevation Lists the current elevation of the drawing, stored in the
ELEVATION system variable.
Thickness Lists the current thickness, stored in the THICKNESS

system variable.
Fill, Grid, Ortho, Shows whether these modes are on or off.
Qtext, Snap,
Tablet
Object Snap Lists the running object snap modes specified by
Modes OSNAP.
Free Dwg Disk Lists the amount of disk space available on the drive
Space specified for AutoCAD temporary files.
994 | STATUS
Free Physical Lists the amount of installed memory free on your
Memory system.
Free Swap File Lists the amount of free space in your swap file.
Space
See Also
Commands OSNAP controls running object snap modes. UNITS
controls coordinate and angle display formats and
determines precision. ELEV sets the elevation and extru-
sion thickness of objects. FILL controls the filling of
traces, solids, and wide polylines. GRID displays a dot
grid at the specified spacing. ORTHO constrains cursor
movement to horizontal or vertical or aligns movement
with the current grid rotation angle. QTEXT controls the
display and plotting of text and attribute objects. SNAP
restricts cursor movement to specified intervals. TABLET
turns Tablet mode on and off.
System Variables CECOLOR sets the color for new objects. CELTYPE sets
the linetype for new objects. CLAYER sets the current
layer. ELEVATION stores the current elevation. GRIDUNIT
stores the grid spacing for the current viewport. INSBASE
stores the insertion base point set by BASE. LIMMAX
stores the upper-right drawing limits for the current
space. LIMMIN stores the lower-left drawing limits of the
current drawing space. SNAPUNIT stores the snap
spacing for the current viewport.
STLOUT
Stores a solid in an ASCII or binary file
Command line: stlout
Select a single solid for STL output...

Create a binary STL file? [Yes/No] <Yes>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Enter y or press ENTER to create a binary file. Enter n to create an ASCII file.
AutoCAD displays the Create STL File dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box).
STLOUT | 995
AutoCAD creates the file and adds the .stl file name extension. The STL file
format is compatible with stereolithography apparatus (SLA). The solid data
is transferred to the SLA as a faceted representation of the model. The facets
consist of a set of triangles (with outward pointing normals) that approxi-
mate the faces of the model. From the faceted data, the SLA workstation
produces a set of contours that defines a series of layers representing the part
to be built.
The FACETRES system variable determines how AutoCAD triangulates the
solid. Setting FACETRES to a higher value creates a finer mesh that more
accurately represents the model and also creates a much larger file. The
model must lie in the positive XYZ octant of the WCS.
See Also
See “Stereolithograph Files” in the User’s Guide.
Commands EXPORT saves objects to other file formats.
System Variables FACETRES sets the fineness or coarseness of a mesh.
STRETCH
Moves or stretches objects
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Stretch
Command line: stretch
Select objects to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon...

1 Select objects: Use the cpolygon or crossing object selection method (1 and 2) and
press ENTER when you finish
2 AutoCAD stretches arcs, elliptical arcs, lines, polyline segments, 2D solids,

rays, traces, and splines that cross the selection window. STRETCH moves the
endpoints that lie inside the window, leaving those outside the window
unchanged. STRETCH also moves vertices of traces and 2D solids that lie
inside the window and leaves those outside unchanged. Polylines are
handled segment by segment, as if they were primitive lines or arcs. STRETCH
does not modify 3D solids, polyline width, tangent, or curve-fitting
information.
996 | STRETCH
AutoCAD moves any objects entirely within the window or polygon, as if
you were using MOVE.
Specify base point or displacement: Specify a point (3) or press ENTER
Specify second point of displacement: Specify a point (4) or press ENTER
4
If you enter a second point, the objects are stretched the vector distance from
the base point to the second point. If you press ENTER at the Second Point of
3 Displacement prompt, STRETCH treats the first point as the X,Y displacement
value.
See Also
Commands EXTEND extends a line, arc, or polyline to meet another
object. LENGTHEN lengthens an object. MOVE displaces
objects a specified distance in a specified direction.
TRIM trims selected objects precisely at a defined
cutting edge.
STYLE
Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles
AutoCAD provides one standard text style. If you want to create a new style
or modify an existing style, use STYLE. STYLE also sets the current style used
when you create text with TEXT and MTEXT.
If you change the orientation or font file of an existing text style, all text
objects with that style use the new values when the drawing is regenerated.
If REGENAUTO is on, the change causes an automatic regeneration.
You can use RENAME to change the name of an existing text style. If any
existing text object uses the old style name, the text object takes the new
name automatically.
Text toolbar:
Format menu: Text Style
STYLE | 997
Command line: style (or 'style for transparent use)
The Text Style dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -style at the Command prompt, STYLE displays prompts on the
Text Style Dialog Box

Creates, modifies, or sets named text styles.
Style Name
Displays text style names, adds new styles, and renames and deletes existing
styles. The list contains defined style names and displays the current style by
default. To change the current style, select another style from the list, or
choose New to create a new style.
Style names can be up to 255 characters long. They can contain letters,
numbers, and the special characters dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and
hyphen (-).
New Displays the New Text Style dialog box and
automatically supplies the name “stylen” (where n is
the number of the supplied style) for the current
settings. You can accept the default or enter a name and
choose OK to apply the current style settings to the new
style name.
998 | STYLE
Rename Displays the Rename Text Style dialog box. The text
style listed is renamed when you enter a new name and
choose OK.
You can also use RENAME to change the name of an
existing text style. If any existing text object uses the
old style name, the text object takes the new name
automatically.
Delete Deletes a text style. Select a name from the list to make
it current, and then choose Delete.
Font
Changes the style’s font.
Font Name Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType
fonts and all AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts in
the AutoCAD Fonts folder. When you select a name
from the list, AutoCAD reads the file for the specified
font. The file’s character definitions are loaded
automatically unless the file is already in use by another
text style. You can define several styles that use the
same font.
Font Style Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold,
or regular. When Use Big Font is selected, this option
changes to Big Font Name and is used to select a Big
Font file name.
Height Sets the text height based on the value you enter. If you
enter 0.0, AutoCAD prompts for the text height each
time you enter text using this style. Entering a height
greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style.
TrueType fonts can be displayed at a smaller height
than SHX fonts with the same height setting.
Note The text height you specify may not be accurately
represented by uppercase letters in TrueType fonts
supplied with AutoCAD. See “Work with Text Styles” in the
User’s Guide.
Use Big Font Specifies an Asian-language Big Font file. Use Big Font
is available only if you specify an SHX file under Font
Name. Only SHX files are valid file types for creating Big
Fonts.
STYLE | 999
Effects
Modifies characteristics of the font, such as its height, width factor, and
obliquing angle and whether it is displayed upside down, backwards, or
vertically aligned.
Upside Down Displays the characters upside down.
Backwards Displays the characters backwards.
Vertical Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is
available only if the selected font supports dual
orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for
TrueType fonts.
See “Assign Text Fonts” and “Set Text Height” in the
User’s Guide.
Width Factor Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0
condenses the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0
expands it.
Oblique Angle Sets the obliquing angle of the text. Entering a value
between –85 and 85 italicizes the text.
Note TrueType fonts using the effects described in this section might appear
bold on the screen. Onscreen appearance has no effect on plotted output. Fonts
are plotted as specified by applied character formatting.
Preview
Displays sample text that changes dynamically as you change fonts and
modify the effects. To change the sample text, enter characters in the box
below the character preview image.
Preview Button Updates the sample text in the character preview image
according to any changes you’ve made in the dialog
box.
Note The preview image does not reflect the text height.
1000 | STYLE
Apply
Applies style changes made in the dialog box to the text of the current style
in the drawing.
Close
Applies changes to the current style. Cancel changes to Close whenever a
change is made to any of the options under Style Name. Changing, renam-
ing, or deleting the current style and creating a new style are actions that take
place immediately and cannot be canceled.
Cancel
Cancel changes to Close whenever a change is made to any of the options
under Style Name.
STYLE Command Line

If you enter -style at the Command prompt, STYLE displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter name of text style or [?] <current>: Enter a style name, enter ?, or press
ENTER
Text Style Name Specifies the text style name. Names can have up to 255
characters and can include letters, numbers, spaces, and
any special character not used by Microsoft Windows or
AutoCAD for other purposes. To define a style that uses
Big Fonts, you can use long file names that do not
contain commas. Commas are used to separate SHX
files and Big Font files for defining a Big Font file.
Pressing ENTER displays the following prompt (full font
names are displayed only if the current font is a
TrueType font):
Existing style. Full font name = current:
Specify full font name or font file name <TTF or SHX>:
Enter a TrueType font family name or an SHX font file

name. If you do not enter a file name extension,
AutoCAD searches for an SHX file. If the file is not
located, Windows substitutes the first located registered
TrueType font.
STYLE | 1001
All long file names except those containing commas are
accepted at the prompt. The comma is reserved for the
Big Font naming convention: an SHX file followed by a
comma (,), followed by the Big Font file name. A space
is interpreted as part of the font name, not as a carriage
return.
Entering a tilde (~) displays the Select Font File dialog
box.
In the Select Font File dialog box, valid types include
SHX and TTF. AutoCAD reads the specified font file.
The file’s character definitions are loaded automatically
unless the file is already in use by another text style.
You can define several styles that use the same font file.
Specify height of text <current>: Specify a distance or
press ENTER
If you enter a height of 0.0, AutoCAD prompts you for

the text height each time you enter text using this style.
Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the text height
for this style.
Specify width factor <current>: Specify a distance or press
ENTER
Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses the text.

Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Specify obliquing angle <current>: Specify an angle or
press ENTER
Entering a value between –85 and 85 obliques the text.

Display text backwards? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER
Display text upside-down? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n, or
press ENTER
Vertical? <N>: Enter y or n, or press ENTER
Vertical is available only if the selected font supports

dual orientation.
1002 | STYLE
?—List Text Styles Lists the text styles available in the drawing.
Enter text style(s) to list <*>: Enter the name of a style or
press ENTER
At the Enter Text Style(s) to List prompt, entering the

name of a style displays the name, font file, height,
width factor, obliquing angle, and generation of the
style and exits the command. Entering an asterisk (*) or
pressing ENTER displays the height, width factor,
obliquing angle, and generation (whether text is drawn
backwards, upside-down, vertically, or normally) of
each style, and then exits the command.
See Also
See “Overview of Text Styles” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DDEDIT edits text and attribute definitions. RENAME
changes the names of objects. TEXT creates text in the
drawing as you enter the text. MTEXT creates a para-
graph that fits within a specified area. REGENAUTO con-
trols automatic regeneration of a drawing.
System Variables TEXTFILL controls the filling of TrueType fonts. TEX-
TQLTY sets the resolution of TrueType fonts. TEXTSIZE
sets the default height for new text objects drawn with
the current text style. TEXTSTYLE stores the name of the
current text style.
STYLESMANAGER
Displays the Plot Style Manager
File menu: Plot Style Manager
Command line: stylesmanager
The Plot Style Manager is displayed.

In the Plot Style Manager, you can double-click the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table
wizard to add plot style tables. Double-click a plot style table (STB or CTB file)
to start the Plot Style Table Editor.
STYLESMANAGER | 1003
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table Wizard
Adds new plot style tables. Plot style tables contain and define plot styles,
which can be assigned to objects. When complete, the wizard produces an
STB or CTB file depending on the type of table you are creating. You can edit
these files in the Plot Style Table Editor. To use your new plot style table, the
selected options on the Plotting tab of the Options dialog box must be
appropriate for the type of table (named or color-dependent) you created.
You can create a plot style table from scratch, use an existing plot style table
as a starting point, use settings from your AutoCAD Release 14 CFG file, or
use settings from a PCP or PC2 file.
You can create either a named plot style table or a color-dependent plot style
table. With a named plot style table, you can add and define plot styles as
you like; the file name has the extension .stb. A color-dependent plot style
table creates 255 plot styles based on color; the file name has the extension
.ctb. You can specify whether you want to use a plot style table for new
drawings or for pre-AutoCAD 2000 drawings when they are saved in a later
format.
Plot Style Table Editor

Modifies the plot styles in a plot style table. If the plot style table is attached
to a layout or the Model tab, and you change a plot style, any objects that
use that plot style are affected. If the plot style table is color-dependent, the
file extension is CTB. If the plot style table is named, the file extension is STB.
For information about plot style tables, see “Use Plot Styles to Control Plot-
ted Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Open the Plot Style Table Editor with any of the following methods:
■ Double-click a CTB or STB file in the Plot Style Manager.

■ Right-click a CTB or STB file in the Plot Style Manager, and then choose
Open from the shortcut menu.
■ Choose Plot Style Table Editor from the Finish screen in the Add Plot Style
Table wizard.
■ In the Page Setup dialog box, select the Plot Device tab. Under Plot Style
Table (Pen Assignments), choose Edit to edit the currently attached plot
style table.
■ In the Current Plot Style and Select Plot Style dialog boxes, choose Editor.
■ In the Options dialog box, choose Add or Edit Style Sheets.
1004 | STYLESMANAGER
General Tab (Plot Style Table Editor)
Lists the plot style table file name, description, version number, location
(path name), and table type. You can modify the description, and you can
apply scaling to non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns.
Plot Style Table Displays the name of the plot style table file you are
Name editing.
Description Provides a description area for a plot style table.
File Displays information about the plot style table you are
Information editing: number of plot styles, path, and version number
of the Plot Style Table Editor.
Apply Global Scales all the non-ISO linetypes and fill patterns in the
Scale Factor to plot styles of objects controlled by this plot style table.
Non-ISO
Linetypes and
Fill Patterns
Scale Factor Specifies the amount to scale non-ISO linetypes and fill
patterns.
Delete R14 Named plot style tables that you create using acadr14.cfg,
Color Mapping PCP, or PC2 files contain plot styles that are created from
Table your AutoCAD Release 14 pen mappings. Color-
dependent plot style tables also have color mapping
tables. AutoCAD uses color mapping tables to map plot
styles to colors and thus to objects of each color when
opening pre-AutoCAD 2000 drawings. While the color
mapping table exists, you cannot add, delete, or rename
plot styles in that plot style table.
If you delete a color mapping table, AutoCAD cannot
automatically assign plot styles to objects when pre-
AutoCAD 2000 drawings are opened for the first time.
If you delete the mapping table, the plot style table
becomes an ordinary plot style table and is no longer
useful for applying plot styles to old drawings. It
continues to be useful for new drawings.
Table View and Form View Tabs (Plot Style Table Editor)
Lists all of the plot styles in the plot style table and their settings. Plot styles
are style overrides for your drawings that occur during plotting. You can
modify plot style color, screening, linetype, lineweight, and other settings.
Plot styles are displayed in columns from left to right. You can use either the
Table View tab or the Form View tab to adjust plot style settings. In general,
the Table View tab is convenient if you have a small number of plot styles. If
you have a large number of plot styles, the Form view is more convenient
because the plot style names are listed at the left and the properties of the
selected style are displayed to the right. You don’t have to scroll horizontally
to view the style and its properties. The first plot style in a named plot style
table is NORMAL and represents an object’s default properties (no plot style
applied). You cannot modify or delete the NORMAL style.
Name Displays the names of plot styles in named plot style
tables. Plot styles in named plot style tables can be
changed. Plot style names in color-dependent plot style
tables are tied to object color and cannot be changed.
AutoCAD accepts up to 255 characters for style names.
You cannot have duplicate names within the same plot
style table.
Description Provides a description for each plot style.
Color Specifies the plotted color for an object. The default
setting for plot style color is Use Object Color. If you
assign a plot style color, the color overrides the object’s
color at plot time.
You can choose Select Color to display the Select Color
dialog box (see page 169) and select one of the 255
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, a true color, or a color
from a color book. The color you specify is displayed in
the plot style color list as Custom Color. If the plot device
does not support the color you specify, it plots the nearest
available color or, in the case of monochrome devices,
black.
Enable Enables dithering. A plotter uses dithering to approximate
Dithering colors with dot patterns, giving the impression of plotting
more colors than available in the AutoCAD Color Index
(ACI). If the plotter does not support dithering, the
dithering setting is ignored.
Dithering is usually turned off in order to avoid false line
typing that results from dithering of thin vectors. Turning
off dithering also makes dim colors more visible. When
you turn off dithering, AutoCAD maps colors to the
nearest color, resulting in a smaller range of colors when
plotting. Dithering is available whether you use the
object’s color or assign a plot style color.
Convert to Converts the object’s colors to grayscale if the plotter
Grayscale supports grayscale. If you clear Convert to Grayscale,
AutoCAD uses the RGB values for object colors. Dithering
is available whether you use the object’s color or assign a
plot style color.
Use Assigned Specifies a pen to use when plotting objects that use this
Pen Number plot style. Available pens range from 1 to 32. If plot style
(Pen Plotters color is set to Use Object Color, or you are editing a plot
Only) style in a color-dependent plot style table, you cannot
change the assigned pen number; the value is set to
Automatic.
If you specify 0, the field updates to read Automatic.
AutoCAD determines the pen of the closest color to the
object you are plotting using the information you
provided under Physical Pen Characteristics in the Plotter
Configuration Editor.
Virtual Pen Specifies a virtual pen number between 1 and 255. Many
Number non-pen plotters can simulate pen plotters using virtual
pens. For many devices, you can program the pen’s width,
fill pattern, end style, join style, and color/screening from
the front panel on the plotter.
Enter 0 or Automatic to specify that AutoCAD should
make the virtual pen assignment from the AutoCAD
Color Index.
The virtual pen setting in a plot style is used only by non-
pen plotters and only if they are configured for virtual
pens. If this is the case, all the other style settings are
ignored and only the virtual pen is used. If a non-pen
plotter is not configured for virtual pens, then the virtual
and physical pen information in the plot style is ignored
and all the other settings are used.
You can configure your non-pen plotter for virtual pens
under Vector Graphics on the Device and Document
Settings tab in the PC3 Editor. Under Color Depth, select
255 Virtual Pens.
Screening Specifies a color intensity setting that determines the
amount of ink AutoCAD places on the paper while
plotting. The valid range is 0 through 100. Selecting 0
reduces the color to white. Selecting 100 displays the color
at its full intensity. In order for screening to work, the
Enable Dithering option must be selected.
Linetype Displays a list with a sample and a description of each
linetype. The default setting for plot style linetype is Use
Object Linetype. If you assign a plot style linetype, the
linetype overrides the object’s linetype at plot time.
Adaptive Adjusts the scale of the linetype to complete the linetype
Adjustment pattern. If you don’t select Adaptive Adjustment, the line
might end in the middle of a pattern. Turn off Adaptive
Adjustment if linetype scale is important. Turn on
Adaptive Adjustment if complete linetype patterns are
more important than correct linetype scaling.
Lineweight Displays a sample of the lineweight as well as its numeric
value. You can specify the numeric value of each
lineweight in millimeters. The default setting for plot style
lineweight is Use Object Lineweight. If you assign a plot
style lineweight, the lineweight overrides the object’s
lineweight at plot time.
Line End Style Provides the following line end styles: Butt, Square,
Round, and Diamond. The default setting for Line End
Style is Use Object End Style. If you assign a line end style,
the line end style overrides the object’s line end style at
plot time.
Line Join Style Provides the following line join styles: Miter, Bevel,
Round, and Diamond. The default setting for Line Join
Style is Use Object Join Style. If you assign a line join style,
the line join style overrides the object’s line join style at
plot time.
Fill Style Provides the following fill styles: Solid, Checkerboard,
Crosshatch, Diamonds, Horizontal Bars, Slant Left, Slant
Right, Square Dots, and Vertical Bar. The default setting
for Fill Style is Use Object Fill Style. If you assign a fill
style, the fill style overrides the object’s fill style at plot
time.
Add Style
Adds a new plot style to a named plot style table. The plot style is based on
Normal, which uses an object’s properties and doesn’t apply any overrides by
default. You must specify the overrides you want to apply after you create the
new plot style. You cannot add a new plot style to a color-dependent plot
style table; a color-dependent plot style table has 255 plot styles mapped to
color. You also cannot add a plot style to a named plot style table that has a
translation table.
Delete Style
Deletes the selected style from the plot style table. Objects assigned this plot
style retain the plot style assignment but plot as Normal because the plot
style is no longer defined in the plot style table. You cannot delete a plot style
from a named plot style table that has a translation table, or from a color-
dependent plot style table.
Edit Lineweights
Displays the Edit Lineweights dialog box. There are 28 lineweights available
to apply to plot styles in plot style tables. If the lineweight you need doesn’t
exist in the list of lineweights stored in the plot style table, you can edit an
existing lineweight. You can’t add or delete lineweights from the list in the
plot style table.
Save As
Displays the Save As dialog box and saves the plot style table to a new name.
Edit Lineweights Dialog Box

Modifies the values of existing lineweights.
Lineweights Lists the lineweights in the plot style table. There are a
total of 28 lineweights including Use Object Lineweight.
You can modify existing lineweights, but you can’t add or
delete them. If you change a lineweight value, other plot
styles that use the lineweight also change.
When you edit a lineweight value, it is rounded and
displayed with a precision of four places past the decimal
point. Lineweight values must be zero or a positive
number. If you create a lineweight with a zero width, the
line is plotted as thin as the plotter can create it. The
maximum possible lineweight value is 100 millimeters
(approximately four inches).
Units for Specifies the units in which to display the list of
Listing lineweights. You can display the list of lineweights in
inches or millimeters.
Edit Makes the selected lineweight available for editing.
Lineweight
Sort Sorts the list of lineweights by value. If you change
Lineweights lineweight values, choose Sort Lineweights to resort the
list.
See Also
For information about using the Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, see “Use Plot
Styles to Control Plotted Objects” in the User’s Guide.
SUBTRACT
Combines selected regions or solids by subtraction

Modify menu: Solids Editing ➤ Subtract
Command line: subtract
Select solids and regions to subtract from...

Select solids and regions to subtract...

AutoCAD subtracts objects in the second selection set from objects in the
first selection set. A single new solid or region is created.
solid to be subtracted solid to subtract solid after SUBTRACT

from
region to be subtracted region to subtract region after SUBTRACT

from
1012 | SUBTRACT
You can only subtract regions from other regions that are on the same plane.
However, you can perform simultaneous SUBTRACT actions by selecting sets
of regions on different planes. AutoCAD then produces separate subtracted
regions on each plane. AutoCAD rejects regions for which there are no other
selected coplanar regions.
See Also
Commands INTERSECT creates composite solids or regions from the
intersection of several objects. UNION creates a composite
region or solid.
SYSWINDOWS
Arranges windows and icons
SYSWINDOWS is equivalent to the standard Window menu options in
Windows applications. It is intended for use with external applications that
share the AutoCAD window.
Command line: syswindows
Enter an option [Cascade/tile Horizontal/tile Vertical/Arrange icons]: Enter an

option
Cascade Overlaps windows, leaving title bars visible.

Tile Horizontal Arranges windows in horizontal, nonoverlapping tiles.
Tile Vertical Arranges windows in vertical, nonoverlapping tiles.
Arrange Icons Arranges the window icons.
SYSWINDOWS | 1013
1014
TABLET
Calibrates, configures, and turns on and off an attached digitizing tablet
TABLET controls tablet calibration, turns Tablet mode on and off, and
designates which menu areas are used for screen pointing.
Tools menu: Tablet
Command line: tablet
Enter an option [ON/OFF/CAL/CFG]:
On
Turns on Tablet mode. Setting the TABMODE system variable to 1 also turns
on Tablet mode. Pressing CTRL + T on some systems turns Tablet mode on and
off.
Off
Turns off Tablet mode. Setting the TABMODE system variable to 0 also turns
off Tablet mode. Pressing CTRL + T on some systems turns Tablet mode on
and off.
Cal
Calibrates the digitizer with a paper drawing or photograph, creating the
tablet transformation, which is the mapping of points from the tablet to the
coordinate drawing system. Calibration is digitizing points on the drawing
and mapping them to their real coordinates.
Calibration can be performed in model space or paper space. The Cal option
turns on Tablet mode in the space in which the tablet is calibrated. When the
space is changed, the Cal option turns off Tablet mode.
The paper should be flat (with no bumps or wrinkles) and securely fastened
to the digitizing tablet. The paper can be oriented at any angle.
Digitize point #1: Digitize a point on the paper drawing
Enter coordinates for point #1: Specify an X,Y coordinate at the digitized point
Digitize point #2: Digitize a point on the paper drawing
Enter coordinates for point #2: Specify an X,Y coordinate at the digitized point
Digitize point #3 (or ENTER to end): Digitize a point on the tablet or press ENTER
Enter coordinates for point #3: Specify an X,Y coordinate in the drawing
TABLET | 1015
The points you enter cannot be duplicates. The points need not be the origin
on either axis, and you can enter as many points as you like. The more points
you enter, the more accurate the drawing will be.
If you enter only two points, the program automatically computes an
orthogonal transformation. If it is successful, the command ends.
If you enter three or more points, the program computes the transformation
in each of the three transformation types (Orthogonal, Affine, and
Projective) to determine which best fits the calibration points. If you enter
more than four points, computing the best-fitting projective transformation
can take a long time. You can cancel the process by pressing ESC .
When the computations are complete, the program displays a table with the
number of calibration points and a column for each transformation type. For
a description of the information contained in the table, see “Transformation
Table” on page 1017.
If there have been no failures of projection transformation, the program
prompts you to choose a transformation type.
Enter transformation type [Orthogonal/Affine/Projective/Repeat table] <Repeat>:
Only transformation types for which the outcome was Success, Exact, or
Canceled are included in this prompt. A projective transformation can be
specified even if it was canceled. The program uses the result computed at the
time you canceled.
Orthogonal Specifies translation, uniform scaling, and rotation
with two calibration points.
Use Orthogonal for dimensionally accurate paper
drawings and paper drawings in which the portion to
be digitized is long and narrow, with most points
confined to single lines.
Note You must specify the lower-left point location
before specifying the upper-right point location.
Affine Specifies arbitrary linear transformation in two
dimensions consisting of translation, independent X-
and Y-scaling, rotation, and skewing with three
calibration points.
1016 | TABLET
Use Affine when horizontal dimensions in a paper
drawing are stretched with respect to vertical
dimensions, and lines that are supposed to be parallel
actually are parallel.
The RMS (root mean square) error reported after
calibration measures how close the program has come
to making a perfect fit. Affine should be used if the RMS
is small.
Projective Specifies a transformation equivalent to a perspective
projection of one plane in space onto another plane
with four calibration points. A projective
transformation provides a limited form of what
cartographers call rubber sheeting, in which different
portions of the tablet surface are stretched by varying
amounts. Straight lines map into straight lines. Parallel
lines do not necessarily stay parallel.
Projective transformation corrects parallel lines that
appear to converge.
Repeat Table Redisplays the computed table, which rates the
transformation types.
Transformation Table
Reports the number of calibration points and provides information about
each transformation type.
Outcome of Fit
Reports the outcome of fit for each of the transformation types. If the out-
come of fit is not Success or Exact for any of the transformation types, the
program reports failure of the entire calibration process and ends the
command. The remaining entries in each column are blank unless Outcome
of Fit is Success.
Exact Indicates the correct number of points for a valid
transformation.
Success Indicates more than enough points. The program
succeeded in fitting a transformation to the data.
Impossible Indicates not enough points.
TABLET | 1017
Failure Indicates enough points, but the program was unable to
fit a transformation to the points, usually because some
points were colinear or coincident.
Canceled Indicates that the fit process was canceled. This
outcome occurs only with the projective
transformation.
RMS Error
Reports the RMS (root mean square) error, which measures how close the
program has come to finding a perfect fit. The goal is the smallest RMS error.
Standard Deviation
Reports the standard deviation of the residuals. If it is near zero, the residual
at each calibration point is about the same.
Largest Residual/At Point
Reports the point at which the mapping is least accurate. The residual is the
distance between where the point was mapped during transformation and
where it would be mapped if the fit were perfect. The distance is given in the
current linear units.
Second-Largest Residual/At Point
Reports the point at which the mapping is second-least accurate. The residual
is the distance between where the point was mapped during transformation
and where it would be mapped if the fit were perfect. The distance is given
in the current linear units.
Cfg
Designates or realigns the tablet menu areas or designates a small portion of
a large tablet as a screen pointing area.
Enter number of tablet menus desired (0–4) <current>: Enter a value or
press ENTER
If tablet menus are in use and the same number of menus is selected, the
following prompts are displayed:
Do you want to realign tablet menus? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
1
Digitize upper-left corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (1)
2 3 Digitize lower-left corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (2)
Digitize lower-right corner of menu area n: Digitize a point (3)
In the prompt, n is the menu number (1–4).
1018 | TABLET
The printed menu form must be affixed to the tablet surface, and the
requested points must be digitized. The set of three points must form a
90-degree angle. Tablet menu areas can be skewed at any angle.
Enter the number of columns for menu area n: Enter a positive value
Enter the number of rows for menu area n: Enter a positive value
After all interaction concerning tablet menus is complete, the following

Do you want to respecify the screen pointing area? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter y or n
or press ENTER
If you enter y, the following prompts are displayed:

Digitize lower-left corner of the pointing area: Digitize a point
Digitize upper-right corner of the pointing area: Digitize a point
A small portion of the tablet’s surface is designated as the fixed screen

pointing area. The following prompt is displayed:
Do you want to specify the Floating Screen Pointing area? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter
y or n or press ENTER
If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompt:

Do you want the Floating Screen Area to be the same size as the Fixed Screen
Pointing Area? [Yes/No] <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
If you responded n to the previous prompt, respond to the following

prompts:
Digitize lower-left corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: Digitize a point
Digitize upper-right corner of the Floating Screen pointing area: Digitize a point
Respond to the following prompt:

The F12 Key will toggle the Floating Screen Area ON and OFF. Would you also
like to specify a button to toggle the Floating Screen Area? [Yes/No] <N>: Enter
y or n or press ENTER
If you responded y to the previous prompt, respond to the following prompt:

Press any non-pick button on the digitizer puck that you wish to designate as the
toggle for the Floating Screen Area
See Also
System Variables TABMODE turns Tablet mode on and off.
TABLET | 1019
TABSURF
Creates a tabulated surface from a path curve and a direction vector
TABSURF constructs a polygon mesh representing a general tabulated surface
direction defined by a path curve and a direction vector.
vector
selection Surfaces toolbar:
point path curve
Draw menu: Surfaces ➤ Tabulated Surface
Command line: tabsurf
Select object for path curve:
The path curve defines the surface of the polygon mesh. It can be a line, arc,
extrusion circle, ellipse, or 2D or 3D polyline. AutoCAD® draws the surface starting at
upward the point on the path curve closest to the selection point.
Select object for direction vector: Select a line or open polyline
direction
vector AutoCAD considers only the first and last points on a polyline, ignoring
selection intermediate vertices. The direction vector indicates the direction and length
point
of the shape to be extruded. The end selected on the polyline or line deter-
path curve
mines the direction of the extrusion. The original path curve is drawn with
wide lines to help you visualize how the direction vector dictates the con-
struction of a tabulated surface.
TABSURF constructs a 2 × n polygon mesh, where n is determined by the
SURFTAB1 system variable. The M direction of the mesh is always 2 and lies
along the direction vector. The N direction lies along the path curve. If the
path curve is a line, arc, circle, ellipse, or spline-fit polyline, AutoCAD draws
extrusion tabulation lines that divide the path curve into intervals of equal size set by
downward SURFTAB1. If the path curve is a polyline that has not been spline fit, AutoCAD
draws tabulation lines at the ends of straight segments, and each arc segment
is divided into intervals set by SURFTAB1.
polyline spline fit polyline not spline fit
1020 | TABSURF
See Also
Commands RULESURF creates a polygon mesh representing the
ruled surface between two curves. REVSURF creates a
surface of revolution by rotating a path curve or profile
around a selected axis. EDGESURF creates a 3D polygon
mesh.
System Variables SURFTAB1 controls the number of divisions along the N
direction of a polygon mesh.
TEXT
Creates a single-line text object
You can use TEXT to enter several lines of text that you can rotate, justify, and
resize. As you type at the Enter Text prompt, the text you are typing is
displayed on the screen. Each line of text is a separate object. To end a line
and begin another, press ENTER after entering characters at the Enter Text
prompt. To end TEXT, press ENTER without entering any characters at the
Enter Text prompt.
By applying a style to the text, you can use a variety of character patterns or
fonts that you can stretch, compress, make oblique, mirror, or align in a
vertical column.
Draw menu: Text ➤ Single Line Text
Command line: text
Current text style: current Current text height: current

Specify start point of text or [Justify/Style]: Specify a point or enter an option
If TEXT was the last command entered, pressing ENTER at the Specify Start
Point of Text prompt skips the prompts for height and rotation angle and
immediately displays the Enter Text prompt. The text is placed directly
beneath the previous line of text. The point specified at the prompt is also
stored as the insertion point of the text.
You can enter special characters and format text by entering Unicode strings
and control codes.
Use -TEXT to honor the TEXTEVAL system variable (see page 1028).
TEXT | 1021
Start Point
Specifies a start point for the text object.
Specify height <current>: Specify a point (1), enter a value, or press ENTER
height
The Specify Height prompt is displayed only if the current text style does not
have a fixed height.
rotation Specify rotation angle of text <current>: Specify an angle or press ENTER
1
angle Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the command
Justify
Controls justification of the text.
Enter an option [Align/Fit/Center/Middle/Right/TL/TC/TR/ML/MC/MR/BL/BC/
BR]:
You can also enter any of these options at the Specify Start Point of Text
prompt.
Align Specifies both text height and text orientation by
1 2
designating the endpoints of the baseline.
Specify first endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point (1)
Specify second endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point
(2)
Enter text: Enter text and press ENTER to exit the
command
The size of the characters adjusts in proportion to their

height. The longer the text string, the shorter the
characters.
Specifies that text fits within an area and at an
Fit
2 orientation defined with two points and a height.
1
Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify first endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point (1)
Specify second endpoint of text baseline: Specify a
point (2)
command
1022 | TEXT
The height is the distance in drawing units that the
uppercase letters extend from the baseline. Designated
text height is the distance between the start point and
a point you specify. The longer the text string, the
narrower the characters. The height of the characters
remains constant.
Center Aligns text from the horizontal center of the baseline,
which you specify with a point.
1
Specify center point of text: Specify a point (1)
Specify rotation angle of text <current>:
command
The rotation angle specifies the orientation of the text

baseline with respect to the center point. You can
designate the angle by specifying a point. The text
baseline runs from the start point toward the specified
point. If you specify a point to the left of the center
point, the text is drawn upside down.
Middle Aligns text at the horizontal center of the baseline and
1 the vertical center of the height you specify. Middle-
aligned text does not rest on the baseline.
Specify middle point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
The Middle option differs from the MC option in that

it uses the midpoint of all text, including descenders.
The MC option uses the midpoint of the height of
uppercase letters.
TEXT | 1023
Right Right-justifies the text at the baseline, which you
1
specify with a point.
Specify right endpoint of text baseline: Specify a point (1)
command
1 TL (Top Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the
text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify top-left point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
1 TC (Top Center) Centers text at a point specified for the top of the text.
Specify top-center point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
1 TR (Top Right) Right-justifies text at a point specified for the top of the
text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify top-right point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
1024 | TEXT
1 ML (Middle Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of
the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify middle-left point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
1 MC (Middle Centers the text both horizontally and vertically at the

Center) middle of the text. Available for horizontally oriented
text only.
Specify middle-center point of text: Specify a point (1)
Specify height of text <current>:
command
The MC option differs from the Middle option in that

it uses the midpoint of the height of uppercase letters.
The Middle option uses the midpoint of all text,
including descenders.
1 MR (Middle Right-justifies text at a point specified for the middle of

Right) the text. Available for horizontally oriented text only.
Specify middle-right point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
TEXT | 1025
BL (Bottom Left) Left-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline.
1
Specify bottom-left point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
BC (Bottom Centers text at a point specified for the baseline.

Center) Available for horizontally oriented text only.
1
Specify bottom-center point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
Right-justifies text at a point specified for the baseline.
BR (Bottom
1
Right)
Specify bottom-right point of text: Specify a point (1)
command
Style
Specifies the text style, which determines the appearance of the text
characters. Text you create uses the current text style.
Enter style name or [?] <current>: Enter a text style name or enter ? to list all text
styles
various styles Entering ? lists the current text styles, associated font files, height, and other
parameters.
1026 | TEXT
Special Unicode Characters
When entering text, you can create special characters, including the degree
symbol, plus/minus tolerance symbol, and the diameter symbol, by entering
the following Unicode character strings:
\U+00B0 Degrees symbol (°)
\U+00B1 Tolerance symbol (±)
\U+2205 Diameter symbol (∅)
See “Unicode Font Descriptions” in the Customization Guide.
Control Codes and Special Characters

Besides using Unicode characters for entering special characters, you can also
overscore text, underscore text, or insert a special character by including
control information in the text string. Use a pair of percent signs to introduce
each control sequence.
You can use this control code with standard AutoCAD text fonts and
PostScript fonts:
%%nnn Draws character number nnn.
You can use these control codes with standard AutoCAD text fonts only:
%%o Toggles overscoring on and off.
Toggles underscoring on and off.
%%u
%%d Draws degrees symbol (°).
%%p Draws plus/minus tolerance symbol (±).
%%c Draws circle diameter dimensioning symbol (∅).
%%% Draws a single percent sign (%).
Overscoring and underscoring can be in effect at the same time. Both turn
off automatically at the end of the text string.
You can use the %%nnn control sequence to display special characters using
the PostScript fonts.
A sample drawing (truetype.dwg) showing the character map for each font is
provided in the AutoCAD 2004/sample folder.
TEXT | 1027
The Euro Symbol
You can use the Euro symbol with .shx fonts and their TrueType equivalent
fonts shipped with AutoCAD 2000 and later releases. If your keyboard does
not contain a Euro symbol, hold down the ALT key and enter 0128 on the
numeric keypad.
TEXT and the TEXTEVAL System Variable

Entering -text at the Command prompt displays the same prompts as the
TEXT command. Unlike the TEXT command, -TEXT honors the setting of the
TEXTEVAL system variable. When the TEXTEVAL system variable is set to 2,
AutoCAD evaluates AutoLISP expressions when the -TEXT command ends.
AutoLISP expressions that are entered using this method must begin with an
exclamation point or left parenthesis.
The TEXT command honors the TEXTEVAL system variable setting only if used
in a script or AutoLISP expression and all the TEXT command prompts are
included within the script or AutoLISP expression.
See Also
See “Create Single-Line Text” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DDEDIT edits text content. STYLE creates text styles.
MTEXT creates a multiline text object that fits within a
specified area. SPELL checks the spelling of text.
TEXTSCR
Opens the text window
View menu: Display ➤ Text Window
Command line: textscr (or 'textscr for transparent use)
TEXTSCR displays the command line in a separate window. You can press F2
to toggle between the drawing area and the text window. This command is
ignored on dual-screen systems.
See Also
Commands GRAPHSCR switches from the text window to the
drawing area.
1028 | TEXTSCR
TIFOUT
Saves selected objects to a file in TIFF file format
Command line: tifout
The Create Raster File dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter the file name in the dialog box.
AutoCAD creates a TIFF file that contains the objects you select. The file
reflects what is displayed on the screen.
TIME
Displays the date and time statistics of a drawing
Tools menu: Inquiry ➤ Time
Command line: time (or 'time for transparent use)
TIME displays the following information:
Current time: Wednesday, September 03, 1997 at 9:54:51:406 AM

Times for this drawing:
Created: Friday, July 25, 1994 at 1:21:36:203 AM
Last Updated:Wednesday, September 03, 1997 at 9:49:19:208 AM
Total Editing Time: 0 days 06:44:10.520
Elapsed Timer (on):0 days 00:07:05.312
Next Automatic Save In:0 days 01:59:15.570
Enter option [Display/On/OFF/Reset]: Enter an option or press ENTER
Current Time Displays current date and time. AutoCAD displays all
times to the nearest millisecond using a 24-hour clock.
Created Displays date and time the current drawing was created.
Last Updated Displays the date and time of the latest update of the
current drawing. This date and time is initially the
drawing creation time. AutoCAD revises it with each
use of END or SAVE and applies the default file name.
TIFOUT | 1029
Total Editing Displays time spent editing the current drawing. This
Time timer is updated by AutoCAD and cannot be reset or
stopped. Plotting time is not included in the total
editing time. If you quit the editing session without
saving the drawing, the time you spent in the editing
session is not added to the accumulated editing time.
Elapsed Timer Runs as another timer while AutoCAD is running. You
can turn it on and off or reset it whenever you like.
Next Automatic Indicates time remaining until the next automatic save.
Save In You can set the time interval using OPTIONS or the
SAVETIME system variable.
Display Repeats the display with updated times.

On Starts the user elapsed timer if it was off.
Off Stops the user elapsed timer.
Reset Resets the user elapsed timer to 0 days 00:00:00.000.
See Also
Commands OPTIONS sets the time interval for automatic saves.
System Variables SAVETIME sets the time interval for automatic saves.
CDATE stores the current date. TDCREATE sets the time
and date of the drawing creation. TDINDWG calculates
the total editing time. TDUPDATE sets the time and date
of the last update. TDUSRTIMER calculates the user
elapsed timer.
TOLERANCE
Creates geometric tolerances
Geometric tolerances define the maximum allowable variations of form or
profile, orientation, location, and runout from the exact geometry in a
drawing. They specify the required accuracy for proper function and fit of the
objects you draw in AutoCAD.
1030 | TOLERANCE
AutoCAD adds geometric tolerances to a drawing in feature control frames.
These are frames divided into compartments that contain the geometric
characteristic symbols followed by one or more tolerance values. Where
applicable, the tolerance is preceded by the diameter symbol and followed by
datums and symbols for their material conditions.
Dimension toolbar:
Dimension menu: Tolerance
Command line: tolerance
The Geometric Tolerance dialog box is displayed.
Geometric Tolerance Dialog Box

Specifies the symbols and values for a feature control frame.
After you select geometric characteristic symbols, the Geometric Tolerance

dialog box closes and AutoCAD displays this prompt:
Enter tolerance location: Specify a location
AutoCAD places the feature control frame at the specified location.
Sym
Displays the geometric characteristic symbol, which you select from the
Symbol dialog box (see page 1033). The dialog box is displayed when you
select one of the Sym boxes.
Tolerance 1
Creates the first tolerance value in the feature control frame. The tolerance
value indicates the amount by which the geometric characteristic can deviate
from a perfect form. You can insert a diameter symbol before the tolerance
value and a material condition symbol after it.
TOLERANCE | 1031
First Box Inserts a diameter symbol (∅) in front of the tolerance
value. Click the box to insert the diameter symbol.
Second Box Creates the tolerance value. Enter a value in the box.
Third Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box (see page
1035), in which you select a modifying symbol. These
symbols act as modifiers to the geometric characteristic
and the tolerance value of features that can vary in size.
Select the symbol you want to use. AutoCAD closes the
Material Condition dialog box and inserts the symbol
into the MC box for the first tolerance value in the
Geometric Tolerance dialog box.
Tolerance 2
Creates the second tolerance value in the feature control frame. Specify the
second tolerance value in the same way as the first.
Datum 1
Creates the primary datum reference in the feature control frame. The datum
reference can consist of a value and a modifying symbol. A datum is a
theoretically exact geometric reference used to establish the tolerance zone
for a feature.
First Box Creates the datum reference value. Enter a value in the
box.
Second Box Displays the Material Condition dialog box (see page
1035), in which you select a modifying symbol. These
symbols act as modifiers to the datum reference.
Select the symbol you want to use. AutoCAD closes the
Material Condition dialog box and inserts the symbol
into the MC box for the primary datum reference in the
Geometric Tolerance dialog box.
1032 | TOLERANCE
Datum 2
Creates the secondary datum reference in the feature control frame in the
same way as the primary datum reference.
Datum 3
Creates the tertiary datum reference in the feature control frame in the same
way as the primary datum reference.
Height
Creates a projected tolerance zone value in the feature control frame. A
projected tolerance zone controls the variation in height of the extended
portion of a fixed perpendicular part and refines the tolerance to that
specified by positional tolerances. Enter a value in the box.
Projected Tolerance Zone

Inserts a projected tolerance zone symbol, , after the projected tolerance
zone value.
Datum Identifier
Creates a datum-identifying symbol consisting of a reference letter. A datum
is a theoretically exact geometric reference from which you can establish the
location and tolerance zones of other features. A point, line, plane, cylinder,
or other geometry can serve as a datum. Enter the letter in the box.
Symbol Dialog Box

Displays the geometric characteristic symbols for location, orientation, form,
profile, and runout.
tolerance value
material condition symbol

geometric characteristic
symbol datum reference letter
diameter symbol
TOLERANCE | 1033
Select the symbol you want to use. AutoCAD closes the dialog box and inserts
the symbol into the Sym text box in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box. The
following table describes the symbols.
Geometric characteristic symbols
Symbol Characteristic Type
Position Location
Concentricity or coaxiality Location
Symmetry Location
Parallelism Orientation
Perpendicularity Orientation
Angularity Orientation
Cylindricity Form
Flatness Form
Circularity or roundness Form
Straightness Form
Profile of a surface Profile
Profile of a line Profile
Circular runout Runout
Total runout Runout
1034 | TOLERANCE
Material Condition Dialog Box
Specifies a modifying symbol. These symbols act as modifiers to the
geometric characteristic and the tolerance value of features that can vary in
size.
regardless of
feature size
at least material
condition
at maximum
material condition
Select the symbol you want to use. AutoCAD closes the Material Condition
dialog box and inserts the symbol into the MC box for the first or second
tolerance value in the Geometric Tolerance dialog box (see page 1031).
See Also
See “Overview of Geometric Tolerances” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DIMSTYLE controls dimension styles and settings such
as lateral and limits tolerancing for dimensions.
QLEADER creates leader lines to which you can attach
geometric tolerances.
System Variables DIMCLRD controls the color of the feature control
frame. DIMCLRT controls the color of the tolerance text.
DIMGAP controls the gap between the feature control
frame and the text. DIMTXT controls the size of the
tolerance text. DIMTXSTY controls the style of the
tolerance text.
TOOLBAR
Displays, hides, and customizes toolbars
View menu: Toolbars
Shortcut menu: Right-click any toolbar and choose Customize.
Command line: toolbar
AutoCAD displays the Customize dialog box (see CUSTOMIZE).

If you enter -toolbar at the Command prompt, TOOLBAR displays prompts on
TOOLBAR | 1035
TOOLBAR Command Line
If you enter -toolbar at the Command prompt, TOOLBAR displays prompts on
the command line.
Enter toolbar name or [ALL]: Enter a name or enter all
Toolbar Name
Specifies a toolbar to display, close, or position.
Enter a valid toolbar name. If the default menu is loaded, the following
names are available:
3d_orbit layouts render text

cad_standards modify shade ucs
dimension modify_ii solids ucs_ii
draw object_snap solids_editing view
inquiry properties standard_toolbar viewports
insert refedit styles web
layers reference surfaces zoom
Enter an option [Show/Hide/Left/Right/Top/Bottom/Float] <Show>: Enter an

Show Displays the specified toolbar.

Hide Closes the specified toolbar.
Left Docks the specified toolbar at the left side of the screen.
Enter new position (horizontal, vertical) <0,0>: Specify a
position or press ENTER
The Enter New Position prompt sets the position of the

toolbar in columns and rows relative to a toolbar dock.
The first value is horizontal. The second value is
vertical.
1036 | TOOLBAR
Right Docks the specified toolbar at the right side of the
screen.

vertical.
Top Docks the specified toolbar at the top of the screen.

vertical.
Bottom Docks the specified toolbar at the bottom of the screen.

vertical.
Float Changes the toolbar from docked to floating.
Enter new position (screen coordinates) <0,0>: Specify a
Enter number of rows for toolbar <1>: Enter a value
The Enter New Position prompt specifies the location of

the floating toolbar in screen coordinate values. The
Enter Number of Rows for Toolbar prompt specifies the
number of rows in the floating toolbar.
TOOLBAR | 1037
All
Displays or closes all toolbars.
Enter an option [Show/Hide]: Enter s or h
Show Displays all toolbars.

Hide Closes all toolbars.
See Also
See “Toolbars” in the User’s Guide and “Create Custom Toolbars” and “Cus-
tomize Toolbars” in the Customization Guide.
Commands CUSTOMIZE customizes toolbars, buttons, and shortcut
keys.
System Variables TOOLTIPS turns tooltips text on or off.
TOOLPALETTES
Opens the Tool Palettes window
Standard toolbar:
Tools menu: Tool Palettes Window
Command line: toolpalettes
The Tool Palettes window opens. You can click the Properties button or right-
click the title bar, the current tool palette, the tab on a tool palette, or a tool
to display a shortcut menu. The options displayed on each shortcut menu are
appropriate to the cursor location. All the options on these shortcut menus
are listed alphabetically and described below.
Allow Docking Controls whether the tool palette docks when you drag
it over a docking area at the side of the drawing. Clear
this option to undock a docked tool palette.
Auto-hide Controls display of the tool palette. When this option
is checked, only the tool palette title bar is displayed
when the cursor moves outside the tool palette. When
this option is not checked, the full tool palette is
displayed when the cursor moves.
1038 | TOOLPALETTES
Close Closes the tool palette window.
Copy Copies the selected tool to the Clipboard.
Customize Displays the Tool Palettes tab in the Customize dialog
box.
Cut Removes the selected tool from the tool palette and
places it on the Clipboard.
Delete Tool Removes the selected tool from the tool palette.
Delete Tool Removes the current tool palette.
Palette
Move Changes the cursor to a four-direction arrow.
Move Up Moves the selected tool palette up one position.
Move Down Moves the selected tool palette down one position.
New Tool Palette Creates a new tool palette. Enter a name or press ENTER
to use the default name.
Paste Pastes a tool from the Clipboard to the current tab.
Properties Displays the Tool Properties dialog box, where you can
change the properties of the selected tool.
Rename Renames the selected tool.
Rename Tool Renames the current tool palette.
Palette
Size Changes the cursor to a four-direction arrow. Drag the
right edge or the bottom edge of the tool palette to
change its size.
Transparency Displays the Transparency dialog box.
View Options Displays the View Options dialog box, where you can
control how tools are displayed.
View Options Dialog Box

Controls the display of tools in the current tool palette or in all tool palettes.
Image Size
Controls the display size of the selected tool palette icon.
TOOLPALETTES | 1039
View Style
Controls the text displayed with a tool palette icon.
Icon Only Displays the tool icon only.
Icon with Text Displays the tool icon with the tool name below.
List View Displays the tool icon with the tool name to the right.
Apply To
Controls whether the view options are applied to the current tool palette or
to all tool palettes in the Tool Palettes window.
Tool Properties Dialog Box

Controls the properties associated with the selected tool.
Name
Displays the name of the selected block or hatch pattern tool.
Description
Displays a description of the selected block or hatch pattern tool.
Insert (for block tools)
Displays the properties specific to block tools.
Name Specifies the name of the block.
Source File Specifies the file name for the block definition.
Scale Specifies the XYZ scale factor of the block
Rotation Specifies the rotation angle of the block.
Explode Determines whether or not the block is exploded when
inserted. If the block is exploded, the individual parts of
the block are inserted instead of the block.
Pattern (for hatch tools)
Type Specifies the pattern type of the hatch.
Pattern Name Specifies the pattern name of hatch.
Angle Specifies the pattern angle of hatch.
Scale Specifies the pattern scale of hatch.
1040 | TOOLPALETTES
Spacing Specifies the pattern spacing of hatch.
ISO Pen Width Specifies the ISO pen width of an ISO hatch pattern.
Double Determines whether the hatch pattern is double or not.
General
Color Specifies the color override for the selected tool.
Layer Specifies the layer override for the selected tool.
Linetype Specifies the linetype override for the selected tool.
Plot Style Specifies the plot style override for the selected tool.
Lineweight Specifies the lineweight override for the selected tool.
See Also
See “Tool Palettes” in the User’s Guide.
keys. TOOLPALETTES opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE
Closes the Tool Palettes window
Tools menu: Tool Palettes Window
Command line: toolpalettesclose
Closes the Tool Palettes window.
See Also
See “Tool Palettes” in the User’s Guide.
keys. TOOLPALETTES opens the Tool Palettes window.
TOOLPALETTESCLOSE | 1041
TORUS
Creates a donut-shaped solid
A torus is defined by two radius values, one for the tube and the other for the
distance from the center of the torus to the center of the tube.
You can also create self-intersecting tori. A self-intersecting torus has no
center hole: the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus. If
both radii are positive and the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of
the torus, the result looks like a sphere with a depression at each pole. If the
radius of the torus is negative and the radius of the tube has a greater positive
magnitude than the radius of the torus, the result looks like a sphere with
pointed poles.
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Torus
Command line: torus

Specify center of torus <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
1
Specify radius of torus or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d
Radius
Defines the radius of the torus: the distance from the center of the torus to
the center of the tube. A negative radius creates a solid shaped like an
tube
radius American football.
Radius Defines the radius of the tube.
torus
Diameter Defines the diameter of the tube.
radius Specify diameter: Specify a nonzero distance
Diameter
Defines the diameter of the torus.
Specify diameter: Specify a distance
1042 | TORUS
tube Radius Defines the radius of the tube.
diameter
Diameter Defines the diameter of the tube.
Specify diameter: Specify a nonzero distance
See Also
torus See “Create 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide.
diameter
Commands The Torus option of the 3D command creates a surface-
meshed torus.
TRACE
Creates solid lines
Command line: trace
2
3 Specify trace width <current>: Specify a distance or press ENTER
Specify start point: Specify a point (1)
1 Specify next point: Specify a point (2)
Specify next point: Specify a point (3) or press ENTER to end the command
specify endpoint
The endpoints of a trace are on the center line and are always cut square.
TRACE automatically calculates the correct bevels for connection to adjacent
segments. AutoCAD delays drawing each segment until you either specify
the next segment or press ENTER . Because of the way bevels are handled,
endpoint TRACE has no undo option.
Traces are solid filled when Fill mode is on. When Fill mode is off, only the
outline of a trace is displayed.
See Also
TRACE completed Commands FILL turns interior filling of objects on or off. PLINE
draws two-dimensional polylines.
System Variables TRACEWID stores the current width used for TRACE.
TRACE | 1043
TRANSPARENCY
Controls whether background pixels in an image are transparent or opaque
Several image file formats allow images with transparent pixels. Setting
image transparency to On allows AutoCAD to recognize the transparent
pixels so that graphics on the screen show through those pixels. Transpar-
ency is available for both bitonal and nonbitonal (Alpha RGB or gray-scale)
images. By default, images are attached with transparency turned off.
Transparency is controlled on a per-object basis.
TRANSPARENCY supports the PICKFIRST system variable, and you can select
multiple images. Objects that are not images are filtered from the selection
set.
Note The PALETTEOPAQUE system variable controls whether windows can be

made transparent.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ Image ➤ Transparency
Shortcut menu: Select an image, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Image ➤ Transparency.
Command line: transparency
Select image(s):
Enter transparency mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
On Turns transparency on so that objects beneath the

image are visible.
Off Turns transparency off so that objects beneath the
image are not visible.
See Also
brightness, contrast, and fade values for individual
images. IMAGEATTACH attaches an image object and
definition. IMAGECLIP creates new clipping boundaries
for single image objects. IMAGEFRAME controls whether
the image frame is displayed on the screen or is hidden
from view.
1044 | TRANSPARENCY
TRAYSETTINGS
Controls the display of icons and notifications in the status bar tray
Shortcut menu: Right-click the status bar and click Tray Settings.
Command line: traysettings
The Tray Settings dialog box is displayed.
Tray Settings Dialog Box

Controls the display of icons and notifications in the tray at the right end of
the status bar.
Display Icons from Services
Displays the tray at the right end of the status bar and displays icons from
services. When this option is cleared, the tray is not displayed.
Display Notifications from Services
Displays notifications from services. When the Display Icons from Services
option is cleared, this option is unavailable.
Display Time Sets the time in seconds that a notification is displayed.
Display Until Displays a notification until you click the Close button.
Closed
See Also
Commands STANDARDS displays an icon in the status bar tray if the
drawing has a standards file attached. SECURITY-
OPTIONS displays an icon in the status bar tray if the
drawing has a digital signature. The XREF and XATTACH
commands display an icon in the status bar tray if there
are xrefs attached to the drawing.
System Variables TRAYICONS controls whether the status bar tray is dis-
played. TRAYNOTIFY controls whether service notifica-
tions are displayed in the status bar tray. TRAYTIMEOUT
controls the length of time (in seconds) that service
notifications are displayed.
TRAYSETTINGS | 1045
TREESTAT
Displays information about the drawing’s current spatial index
AutoCAD indexes objects in a region by recording their positions in space.
The result is called a spatial index. The spatial index is tree structured and has
branching nodes to which objects are attached. The index has two major
branches. The paper space branch is called a quad-tree and treats objects as
two-dimensional. The model space branch is called an oct-tree and treats
objects as either two- or three-dimensional. The model space branch can also
be changed to a quad-tree when you are working on two-dimensional
drawings.
Command line: treestat (or 'treestat for transparent use)
AutoCAD displays information about each branch. The most important

information is in the first two lines of the report—number of nodes, number
of objects, maximum depth of the branch, and average number of objects per
node.
If REDRAW and object selection are very slow, you can improve their perfor-
mance. For example, if AutoCAD has 50 megabytes of memory available and
the current drawing has 50,000 objects with only 1,000 nodes in the index
tree, increase the TREEDEPTH value to improve performance.
Each node consumes about 80 bytes of memory. The fewer objects per node
of the oct-tree, the better the performance.
See Also
System Variables TREEDEPTH specifies the maximum depth of a drawing’s
spatial index. TREEMAX limits memory consumption
during regeneration by limiting the maximum number
of nodes in a drawing’s spatial index.
1046 | TREESTAT
TRIM
Trims objects at a cutting edge defined by other objects
Modify toolbar:
Modify menu: Trim
Command line: trim
Current settings: Projection = current Edge = current

Select cutting edges...
Select objects: Select one or more objects and press ENTER , or press ENTER to
select all objects (implied selection)
Objects that can be trimmed include arcs, circles, elliptical arcs, lines, open
2D and 3D polylines, rays, splines, and xlines.
Select the objects that define the cutting edges at which you want to trim an
object or press ENTER to select all objects as potential cutting edges. Valid
cutting edge objects include 2D and 3D polylines, arcs, circles, ellipses, lines,
layout viewports, rays, regions, splines, text, and xlines. TRIM projects the
selected cutting edges and the objects to be trimmed onto the XY plane of the current
cutting edge user coordinate system (UCS).
Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]: Select an object to trim, press SHIFT
and select an object to extend, or enter an option
When AutoCAD prompts you to select boundary edges, you can press ENTER
and select the object to be trimmed. AutoCAD trims the object against the
nearest candidate. You can use only the single, crossing, fence, and implied
selection options to select boundaries that include blocks.
Object to Trim
Specifies the object to trim. AutoCAD repeats the prompt for the object to
trim so that you can trim multiple objects. Pressing SHIFT while selecting an
object extends it to the nearest boundary rather than trimming it. Pressing
ENTER ends the command.
If the selection point is between the end of the object and a cutting edge,
TRIM removes the portion of the object that extends beyond the cutting edge.
If the selection point is between two cutting edges, the portion between is
objects to trim deleted and the portions outside are preserved, turning one object into two.
TRIM | 1047
AutoCAD trims 2D wide polylines at their center lines. If the polyline is
tapered, the width at the cutting edge is the same after trimming. The ends
of a wide polyline are always square. Cutting a wide polyline at an angle
causes portions of the end to extend beyond the cutting edge. Trimming a
spline-fit polyline removes the curve-fit information and changes the spline-
fit segments into ordinary polyline segments.
Project
Specifies the projection AutoCAD uses when trimming objects.
Enter a projection option [None/Ucs/View] <current>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
None Specifies no projection. AutoCAD trims only objects

that intersect with the cutting edge in 3D space.
object not intersecting

with cutting edge in
3D space
object intersecting with

cutting edge in 3D
space
UCS Specifies projection onto the XY plane of the current

UCS. AutoCAD trims objects that do not intersect with
the cutting edge in 3D space.
projection of objects onto

current UCS intersecting
with cutting edge
View Specifies projection along the current view direction.

AutoCAD trims objects that intersect the boundary in
the current view.
1048 | TRIM
left viewport right viewport
object to trim Edge

Determines whether an object is trimmed at another object’s implied edge or
only to an object that intersects it in 3D space.
selected cutting Enter an implied edge extension mode [Extend/No extend] <current>: Enter an
edge option or press ENTER
Extend Extends the cutting edge along its natural path to

intersect an object in 3D space.
No Extend Specifies that the object is trimmed only at a cutting
Extend
edge that intersects it in 3D space.
Undo
Reverses the most recent change made by TRIM.
No extend See Also

See “Trim or Extend Objects” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BREAK erases parts of an object or splits an object in two.
EXTEND extends an object to meet another object.
FILLET rounds and fillets the edges of objects. CHAMFER
bevels the edges of objects.
System Variables EDGEMODE determines whether an object is trimmed to
another object’s implied edge or only to an object that
intersects it in 3D space. PROJMODE specifies the
Projection AutoCAD uses when trimming objects.
TRIM | 1049
1050
U
Reverses the most recent operation
Standard toolbar:
Edit menu: Undo
Shortcut menu: With no commands active and no objects selected, right-
click in the drawing area and choose Undo.
Command line: u
You can enter u as many times as you wish, backing up one step at a time,
until the drawing is as it was when you began the current editing session.
When an operation cannot be undone, AutoCAD displays the command
name but performs no action. Operations external to the current drawing,
such as plotting or writing to a file, cannot be undone.
If you changed modes or used transparent commands during a command,
their effects are undone, along with the effects of the main command.
You can also press CTRL +Z to undo.
The U command is equivalent to entering undo 1.
UCS
Manages user coordinate systems
The user coordinate system (UCS) is a movable coordinate system for
coordinate entry, planes of operation, and viewing. Most AutoCAD
geometric editing commands are dependent on the location and orientation
of the UCS; objects are drawn on the XY plane of the current UCS.
The UCS command sets the orientation of the user coordinate system in
three-dimensional space. It defines the orientation for two-dimensional
objects and the extrusion direction for the THICKNESS system variable. It also
provides the axis of rotation for ROTATE and the default projection plane for
specifying points.
When you use the pointing device to locate a point, it’s normally placed on
the XY plane. If the UCS is rotated so that the Z axis lies in a plane parallel
to the viewing plane—that is, if the XY plane is edge-on to the viewer—it
may be difficult to visualize where the point will be located. In this case, the
point will be located on a plane parallel to your viewing plane that also con-
tains the UCS origin point. For example, if the viewing direction is along the
U | 1051
X axis, coordinates specified with a pointing device will be located on the YZ
plane, which contains the UCS origin point.
Changing from one UCS to another does not change the drawing view unless
the UCSFOLLOW system variable is on.
UCS toolbar:
Tools menu: New UCS
Command line: ucs
Enter an option [New/Move/orthoGraphic/Prev/Restore/Save/Del/Apply/?/

World] <World>:
New
Defines a new coordinate system by one of six methods.
Specify origin of new UCS or [ZAxis/3point/OBject/Face/View/X/Y/Z] <0,0,0>:
UCS at new Origin

origin
Defines a new UCS by shifting the origin of the current UCS, leaving the
direction of its X, Y, and Z axes unchanged.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>: Specify a point
Specify a new origin point relative to the origin of the current UCS. If you do
before after
not specify a Z coordinate value for the origin, this option uses the current
elevation.
Z Axis
Defines a UCS with a particular positive Z axis.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>: Specify a point
Specify point on positive portion of Z-axis <current>: Specify a point
Specify a new origin and a point that lies on the new positive Z axis. The Z
axis option tilts the XY plane.
1052 | UCS
3 Point
Specifies the new UCS origin and the direction of its positive X and Y axes.
The Z axis follows by applying the right-hand rule. (For information about
the right-hand rule, see “Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D” in
the User’s Guide.) You can use this option to specify any possible coordinate
system.
Specify new origin point <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1)
Specify point on positive portion of X-axis <current>: Specify a point (2)
Specify point on positive-Y portion of the UCS XY plane <current>: Specify a
point (3)
2
1
The first point specifies the origin of the new UCS. The second point defines
the positive X axis. The third point defines the positive Y axis. The third
point can be anywhere on the positive Y portion of the new UCS XY plane.
Object
Defines a new coordinate system based on a selected 3D object. The new UCS
has the same extrusion direction (positive Z axis) as that of the selected
object.
Select object to align UCS: Select an object
select object
The following objects cannot be used with this option: 3D solids, 3D poly-
lines, 3D meshes, viewports, mlines, regions, splines, ellipses, rays, xlines,
leaders, multiline text.
For objects other than 3D faces, the XY plane of the new UCS is parallel to
new UCS established
the XY plane in effect when the object was drawn. However, the X and Y axes
can be rotated differently.
UCS | 1053
The new UCS is defined as shown in the following table.
Define a UCS by selecting an object
Object Method of determining UCS
Arc The center of the arc becomes the new UCS origin. The X axis passes
through the arc endpoint that is closest to the selection point.
Circle The center of the circle becomes the new UCS origin. The X axis
passes through the selection point.
Dimension The midpoint of the dimension text becomes the new UCS origin.
The direction of the new X axis is parallel to the X axis of the UCS in
effect when the dimension was drawn.
Line The endpoint nearest the selection point becomes the new UCS
origin. AutoCAD chooses the new X axis so that the line lies in the XZ
plane of the new UCS. The line’s second endpoint has a Y coordinate
of zero in the new system.
Point The point becomes the new UCS origin.
2D polyline The start point of the polyline is the new UCS origin. The X axis
extends along the line segment from the start point to the next
vertex.
Solid The first point of the solid determines the new UCS origin. The new
X axis lies along the line between the first two points.
Trace The “from” point of the trace becomes the UCS origin, with the X
axis lying along its centerline.
3D face The new UCS origin is taken from the first point, the X axis from the
first two points, and the Y positive side from the first and fourth
points. The Z axis follows by application of the right-hand rule.
Shape, text, The insertion point of the object becomes the new UCS origin, and
block reference, the new X axis is defined by the rotation of the object around its
attribute definition extrusion direction. The object you select to establish a new UCS has
a rotation angle of zero in the new UCS.
1054 | UCS
Face
Aligns the UCS to the selected face of a solid object. To select a face, click
within the boundary of the face or on the edge of the face. The face is high-
lighted and the UCS X axis is aligned with the closest edge of the first face
found.
Select face of solid object:
Enter an option [Next/Xflip/Yflip] <accept>:
Next Locates the UCS on either the adjacent face or the back
face of the selected edge.
Xflip Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the X axis.
Yflip Rotates the UCS 180 degrees around the Y axis.
Accept If you press ENTER , accepts the location. The prompt
repeats until you accept a location.
View
Establishes a new coordinate system with the XY plane perpendicular to your
viewing direction (parallel to your screen). The UCS origin remains
unchanged.
X, Y, Z
before after
Rotates the current UCS about a specified axis.
Specify rotation angle about n axis <0>: Specify an angle
In the prompt, n is X, Y, or Z. Enter a positive or negative angle to rotate the

UCS. AutoCAD uses the right-hand rule to determine the positive direction
of rotation around the axis. (For information about the right-hand rule, see
“Use World and User Coordinate Systems in 3D” in the User’s Guide.)
You can define any UCS by specifying an origin and one or more rotations
around the X, Y, or Z axes.
world coordinate rotation about rotation about rotation about Z

system X axis = 90 Y axis = 90 axis = 90
UCS | 1055
Move
Redefines a UCS by shifting the origin or changing the Z-depth of the current
UCS, leaving the orientation of its XY plane unchanged. Changing the
Z-depth moves the UCS along its Z axis in a positive or negative direction
relative to the current origin.
Specify new origin point or [Zdepth] <0,0,0>: Specify a point or enter z
New Origin Changes the origin of the UCS.

Zdepth Specifies the distance along the Z axis to move the UCS
origin.
Specify Zdepth <0>: Enter a distance or press ENTER
If you have multiple viewports active, and you change viewports to specify a
new origin or Z-depth, the change is applied to the UCS of the viewport that
was current when the command was started and that viewport becomes
current once the command has finished.
Note The UCS Move option does not add a UCS to the Previous list.
Orthographic
Specifies one of the six orthographic UCSs provided with AutoCAD. These
UCS settings are typically used when viewing and editing 3D models.
Enter an option [Top/Bottom/Front/BAck/Left/Right] <current>: Enter an option
or press ENTER
1056 | UCS
left
back
front
right top
origin
bottom
By default the orthographic UCS settings orient the current UCS relative to
the world coordinate system (WCS) origin and orientation. The UCSBASE
system variable controls the UCS upon which the orthographic settings are
based. The origin or Z-depth of the orthographic UCS settings can be
changed using the Move option of the UCS command (see page 1056).
Prev
Restores the previous UCS. AutoCAD retains the last 10 coordinate systems
created in paper space and the last 10 coordinate systems created in model
space. Repeating the Prev option steps back through one set or the other,
depending on which space is current.
If you have saved different UCS settings in individual viewports and you
switch between viewports, AutoCAD does not retain the different UCSs in
the Previous list. However, if you change a UCS setting within a viewport,
AutoCAD does retain the last UCS setting in the Previous list. For example,
changing the UCS from World to UCS1 would retain World at the top of the
Previous list. If you then switch viewports with Front as the current UCS, and
then change the UCS to Right, the Front UCS is retained at the top of the
Previous list. If you then choose the UCS Previous option twice in this view-
port, the UCS setting changes to Front, and then back to World. See the
UCSVP system variable.
UCS | 1057
Restore
Restores a saved UCS so that it becomes the current UCS. Restoring a saved
UCS does not reestablish the viewing direction in effect when the UCS was
saved.
Enter name of UCS to restore or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Name Specifies a named UCS.

?—List UCSs Lists the names of currently defined UCSs. AutoCAD
prompts:
Enter UCS name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER to list all UCSs
Save
Saves the current UCS to a specified name. The name can have up to 255
characters and can include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special
character not used by Microsoft® Windows® and AutoCAD for other
purposes.
Enter name to save current UCS or [?]: Enter a name or enter ?
Name Saves the current UCS with the specified name.

?—List UCSs Lists the names of currently defined UCSs. AutoCAD
prompts:
UCS name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
to list all UCSs
Del
Removes the specified UCS from the list of saved user coordinate systems.
Enter UCS name(s) to delete <none>: Enter a name list or press ENTER
AutoCAD deletes the named UCS you enter. If you delete a named UCS that
is current, AutoCAD renames the current UCS UNNAMED.
1058 | UCS
Apply
Applies the current UCS setting to a specified viewport or all active viewports
when other viewports have a different UCS saved in the viewport. The UCSVP
system variable determines whether a UCS is saved with a viewport.
Pick viewport to apply current UCS or [All] <current>: Specify a viewport by
clicking inside it, enter a, or press ENTER
Viewport Applies the current UCS to the specified viewport and

ends the UCS command.
All Applies the current UCS to all active viewports.
?—List UCSs
Lists names of user coordinate systems and provides the origin and X, Y, and
Z axes for each saved UCS relative to the current UCS. If the current UCS is
unnamed, it is listed as WORLD or UNNAMED, depending on whether it’s the
same as the WCS.
UCS name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list
World
Sets the current user coordinate system to the world coordinate system. The
WCS is the basis for all user coordinate systems and cannot be redefined.
See Also
For information about 3D orientation, see “Control the User Coordinate Sys-
before after
tem in 3D” in the User’s Guide.
Commands UCSMAN renames, restores, deletes, lists defined coordi-
nate systems, and selects a preset user coordinate sys-
tem. PLAN displays the plan view of a specified user
coordinate system. UCSICON controls the style, display,
and placement of the UCS icon.
UCS | 1059
System Variables UCSVP determines whether a viewport saves a UCS
setting applied to it or always updates to display the
same UCS as the current viewport. UCSBASE controls the
orientation of the orthographic UCSs and views and the
initial origin of the orthographic UCSs. UCSORTHO
determines whether one of the six orthographic UCSs is
automatically restored when an orthographic view is
restored. UCSFOLLOW displays the new UCS in plan
view. UCSAXISANG sets the default angle to rotate the
UCS around an axis when the UCS X,Y, and Z command
options are used (current default is always zero).
UCSICON controls visibility and placement of the UCS
icon in viewports. UCSNAME displays the name of the
current coordinate system for the current viewport.
UCSORG displays the origin point of the current coordi-
nate system for the current viewport in the current
space. UCSXDIR displays the X direction of the current
UCS for the current viewport in the current space.
UCSYDIR displays the Y direction of the current UCS for
the current viewport in the current space.
UCSICON
Controls the visibility and placement of the UCS icon
The UCS icon represents the orientation of the user coordinate system (UCS)
axes and the location of the current UCS origin relative to your viewing
direction. A UCS can be stored with a viewport if the UCSVP system variable
is set to 1 for that viewport. If the UCSVP system variable is set to 0 for a view-
port, the current UCS is active in that viewport regardless of the viewport in
which the UCS is changed.
View menu: Display ➤ UCS Icon
Command line: ucsicon
AutoCAD displays different UCS icons in paper space and model space. In
both cases, a plus sign (+) appears at the base of the icon when it is positioned
at the origin of the current UCS. With the 2D UCS icon, the letter W appears
in the Y portion of the icon if the current UCS is the same as the world
coordinate system. With the 3D UCS icon, a square is displayed in the XY
plane at the origin when the UCS is the same as the world coordinate system.
1060 | UCSICON
With the 2D UCS icon, a box is formed at the base of the icon if you are
viewing the UCS from above (positive Z axis). The box is missing if you are
viewing the UCS from below. With the 3D UCS icon, the Z axis is solid when
viewed from above the XY plane and dashed when viewed from below the
XY plane.
If the UCS is rotated so that the Z axis lies in a plane parallel to the viewing
plane—that is, if the XY plane is edge-on to the viewer—the 2D UCS icon is
replaced by a broken pencil icon. The 3D UCS icon does not use a broken
pencil icon.
model space 2D model space

UCS icon 3D UCS icon
paper space 2D paper space 3D

UCS icon UCS icon
Enter an option [ON/OFF/All/Noorigin/ORigin/Properties] <current>: Enter an

(0,0,0) (0,0,0)
All No origin Origin
On Displays the UCS icon.

Off Turns off display of the UCS icon.
UCSICON | 1061
All Applies changes to the icon in all active viewports.
Otherwise, UCSICON affects only the current viewport.
Enter an option [ON/OFF/Noorigin/ORigin] <current>:
Enter an option to apply to all active viewports or press
ENTER
No Origin Displays the icon at the lower-left corner of the

viewport regardless of the location of the UCS origin.
Origin Displays the icon at the origin (0,0,0) of the current
coordinate system. If the origin is off the screen, or if
the icon cannot be positioned at the origin without
being clipped at the viewport edges, the icon appears at
the lower-left corner of the viewport.
Properties Displays the UCS Icon dialog box, in which you can
control the style, visibility, and location of the UCS
icon.
UCS Icon Dialog Box

Controls the display properties of the UCS icon.
1062 | UCSICON
UCS Icon Style
Specifies display of either the 2D or the 3D UCS icon and its appearance.
2D Displays a 2D icon without a representation of the Z
axis.
3D Displays a 3D icon.
Cone Displays 3D cone arrowheads for the X and Y axes if the
3D UCS icon is selected. If Cone is cleared, 2D
arrowheads are displayed instead.
Line Width Controls the line width of the UCS icon if the 3D UCS
icon is selected. Available selections are 1, 2, or 3 pixels.
Preview
Displays a preview of the UCS icon in model space.
UCS Icon Size

Controls the size of the UCS icon as a percentage of viewport size. The default
value is 12, and the valid range is from 5 to 95. Note that the size of the UCS
icon is proportional to the size of the viewport in which it is displayed.
UCS Icon Color

Controls the colors of the UCS icon in model space viewports and in layout
tabs.
Model Space Icon Controls the color of the UCS icon in model space
Color viewports. Click Select Color to open the Select Color
dialog box. You can use the Select Color dialog box to
define the color of window elements by selecting from
the 255 AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) colors, True
Colors, and Color Book colors.
Layout Tab Icon Controls the UCS icon color in layout tabs. Click Select
Color Color to open the Select Color dialog box. You can use
the Select Color dialog box to define the color of
window elements by selecting from the 255 AutoCAD
Color Index (ACI) colors, True Colors, and Color Book
colors.
UCSICON | 1063
See Also
See “Control the Display of the User Coordinate System Icon” in the User’s
Guide.
Commands UCSMAN and UCS save, restore, rename, delete, and list
defined coordinate systems. PLAN displays the plan
view of a specified user coordinate system.
System Variables The UCSICON system variable controls the icon setting
for the current viewport. UCSFOLLOW generates a plan
view when the UCS changes. UCSNAME displays the
name of the current coordinate system. UCSORG dis-
plays the origin point of the current coordinate system
for the current viewport and space. UCSXDIR displays
the X direction of the current UCS for the current view-
port and space. UCSYDIR displays the Y direction of the
current UCS for the current viewport and space.
UCSMAN
Manages defined user coordinate systems
UCS toolbar:
Tools menu: Named UCS
Command line: ucsman
The UCS dialog box is displayed.
UCS Dialog Box

Displays and modifies defined and unnamed user coordinate systems,
restores named and orthographic UCSs, and specifies UCS icon and UCS set-
tings for viewports.
Named UCSs Tab (UCS Dialog Box)

Lists user coordinate systems and sets the current UCS.
1064 | UCSMAN
Current UCS
Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and
named, it is listed as UNNAMED.
UCS Names List
Lists the coordinate systems defined in the current drawing. If there are
multiple viewports and multiple unnamed UCS settings, the list includes
only the unnamed UCS of the current viewport. Unnamed UCS definitions
that are locked to other viewports (when the UCSVP system variable is set to
1 in that viewport) are not listed in the current viewport. A pointer indicates
the current UCS.
UNNAMED is always the first entry if the current UCS is unnamed. World is
always listed and cannot be renamed or deleted. If you define other coordi-
nate systems for the active viewport during the current editing session, a
Previous entry is next. You can step back through these coordinate systems
by selecting Previous and Set Current repeatedly.
To add a UCS name to this list, use the Save option of the UCS command. To
rename or delete a customized UCS, right-click the UCS name in the list and
use the shortcut menu.
Set Current
Restores the selected coordinate system. You can also restore a selected coor-
dinate system by double-clicking its name in the list, or by right-clicking the
name and choosing Set Current. The Current UCS text is updated.
UCSMAN | 1065
Details
Displays the UCS Details dialog box (see page 1069), which displays UCS
coordinate data. You can also view the details about a selected coordinate sys-
tem by right-clicking the name and choosing Details.
Rename (Shortcut Menu Only)
Renames a customized UCS. You cannot rename the World UCS. You can also
rename a UCS by double-clicking its name in the list.
Delete (Shortcut Menu Only)
Deletes a customized UCS. You cannot delete the World UCS.
Orthographic UCSs Tab (UCS Dialog Box)

Changes the UCS to one of the orthographic UCS settings.
Current UCS
Displays the name of the current UCS. If the UCS has not been saved and
named, it is listed as UNNAMED.
Orthographic UCS Names
Lists the six orthographic coordinate systems defined in the current drawing.
The orthographic coordinate systems are defined relative to the UCS
specified in the Relative To list. The Depth column lists the distance between
the orthographic coordinate system and the parallel plane passing through
the origin of the UCS base setting (stored in the UCSBASE system variable).
Name Specifies the name of the orthographic coordinate
system.
1066 | UCSMAN
Depth Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the
orthographic UCS and a parallel plane that passes
through the origin of the coordinate system specified
by the UCSBASE system variable. The parallel plane of
the UCSBASE coordinate system can be an XY, YZ, or XZ
plane.
Note You can specify the depth or a new origin for the
selected orthographic UCS. See “Depth (Shortcut Menu or
Double-Click)” on page 1067.
Set Current
Restores the selected coordinate system. You can also restore a selected coor-
dinate system by double-clicking its name in the list, or by right-clicking the
name and choosing Set Current.
Details
Displays the UCS Details Dialog BoxUCS Details dialog box (see page 1069),
which displays UCS coordinate data. You can also view the details about a
selected coordinate system by right-clicking the name and choosing Details.
Relative To
Specifies the base coordinate system for defining the orthographic UCSs. By
default, WCS is the base coordinate system. The list displays all the named
UCSs in the current drawing.
Whenever you change the Relative To setting, the origin of the selected
orthographic UCS is restored to its default position.
If you save an orthographic coordinate system in a drawing as part of a view-
port configuration, or if you select a setting in Relative To other than World,
the orthographic coordinate system name changes to UNNAMED to distin-
guish it from the predefined orthographic coordinate system.
Reset (Shortcut Menu Only)
Restores the origin of the selected orthographic coordinate system. The
origin can be changed from its default 0,0,0 position using the Move option
of the UCS command. To reset the origin of the selected orthographic coor-
dinate system, right-click the name in the list and choose Reset Origin from
the shortcut menu. The origin is restored to its default location (0,0,0) rela-
tive to the specified base coordinate system.
Depth (Shortcut Menu or Double-Click)
Specifies the distance between the XY plane of the orthographic UCS and a
parallel plane that passes through the origin of the coordinate system. In the
Orthographic UCS Depth dialog box, enter a value or choose the Select New
Origin button to use the pointing device to specify a new depth or a new
origin.
UCSMAN | 1067
Settings Tab (UCS Dialog Box)
Displays and modifies UCS icon settings and UCS settings saved with a
viewport.
UCS Icon Settings

Specifies the UCS icon display settings for the current viewport.
On Displays the UCS icon in the current viewport.
Display at UCS Displays the UCS icon at the origin of the current
Origin Point coordinate system in the current viewport. If this
option is cleared, or if the origin of the coordinate
system is not visible in the viewport, the UCS icon is
displayed at the lower-left corner of the viewport.
Apply to All Applies the UCS icon settings to all active viewports in
Active Viewports the current drawing.
UCS Settings
Specifies UCS behavior when the UCS setting is updated.
Save UCS with Saves the coordinate system setting with the viewport.
Viewport This option sets the UCSVP system variable. If this
option is cleared, the viewport reflects the UCS of the
viewport that is current.
Update View to Restores Plan view when the coordinate system in the
Plan When UCS Is viewport is changed. (UCSFOLLOW system variable)
Changed
1068 | UCSMAN
UCS Details Dialog Box
Displays information about the origin and axes of the selected UCS.
By default, the origin and the values for the X, Y, and Z axes are calculated
relative to the world coordinate system.
Name Displays the name of the current named UCS. By
default, this is set to World.
Origin Displays the UCS origin relative to the UCS selected in
Relative To.
X Axis Displays the values for the X axis relative to the UCS
selected in Relative To.
Y Axis Displays the values for the Y axis relative to the UCS
Z Axis Displays the values for the Z axis relative to the UCS
Relative To Sets a base coordinate system for calculating the values
for Origin, X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis. This option resets
the UCSBASE system variable.
See Also
Commands UCS defines or modifies the current user coordinate
system on the command line. VIEW creates, restores,
renames, and deletes named views or restores ortho-
graphic or isometric views.
UCSMAN | 1069
System Variables UCSVP determines whether the coordinate system
setting is saved with the viewport. UCSFOLLOW displays
the new UCS in plan view whenever the UCS is
changed. UCSAXISANG presets the angle of rotation for
UCS orientation. UCSICON controls visibility and place-
ment of the UCS icon in viewports. UCSNAME displays
the name of the current coordinate system in the cur-
rent viewport. UCSORG displays the origin point of the
current coordinate system in the current viewport.
UCSXDIR displays the X direction of the current UCS in
the current viewport. UCSYDIR displays the Y direction
of the current UCS in the current viewport.
UNDEFINE
Allows an application-defined command to override an internal AutoCAD command
Command line: undefine
Enter command name:
Entering an AutoCAD command name suppresses that command. The sup-

pressed command name can then be redefined to perform some other
function.
You can undefine only built-in AutoCAD commands. You cannot undefine
commands defined by AutoLISP®. This includes ObjectARX® application
commands registered via acedDefun(). You also cannot undefine external
commands and aliases defined in the acad.pgp file.
If an AutoLISP or ObjectARX application has redefined a command with the
same name as a built-in AutoCAD command, the application-defined
command is active.
You can restore an undefined command with REDEFINE.
You can always access a built-in AutoCAD command by preceding the
command name with a period (.).
For ObjectARX application commands registered via acedRegCmd, you can
access them by preceding the command name with a period (.), followed by
the command’s group name, followed by another period (.). For example, the
MTEXT command can be accessed with .acad_mtext.mtext.
To determine command names and groups of an ObjectARX application, use

the ARX command, and choose the Commands option to see a listing of all
currently loaded ObjectARX commands and their group names.
1070 | UNDEFINE
See Also
Commands REDEFINE restores AutoCAD built-in commands that
have been disabled with UNDEFINE.
UNDO
Reverses the effect of commands
Reverses your last action. To reverse more than one action at a time, click the
arrow next to the Undo button on the Standard toolbar and select the last in
the sequence of actions you want to undo.
You can use the options of UNDO on the command line to undo more than
one action at a time. Begin and End define a number of actions as a group,
and Mark and Back work together to undo all actions back to a predeter-
mined point.
When you use Back or Number to undo multiple actions, AutoCAD regener-
ates or redraws the drawing, if necessary. This occurs at the end of the UNDO
command; therefore, entering undo 5 causes one regeneration, and u u u u u
could cause as many as five.
UNDO has no effect on some commands and system variables, including
those that open, close, or save a window or a drawing, display information,
change the graphics display, regenerate the drawing, or export the drawing
in a different format.
Standard toolbar:
Command line: undo
Enter the number of operations to undo or [Auto/Control/BEgin/End/Mark/

Back]: Enter a positive number, enter an option, or press ENTER to undo a single
operation
UNDO displays the command or system variable name on the command line
to indicate that you have stepped past the point where the command was
used.
Number
Undoes the specified number of preceding operations. The effect is the same
as entering u multiple times.
UNDO | 1071
Auto
Groups the actions of a single command, making them reversible by a single
U command. When the Auto option is on, starting a command groups all
actions until you exit that command. You can undo the group of actions as
if it were one action.
UNDO Auto is not available if the Control option has turned off or limited
the UNDO feature.
Enter UNDO Auto mode [ON/OFF] <current>: Enter on or off, or press ENTER
Control
Limits or turns off UNDO.
Enter an UNDO control option [All/None/One] <All>: Enter an option or press
ENTER
All Turns on the full UNDO command.

None Turns off the U and UNDO commands and discards any
UNDO command information saved earlier in the
editing session. The Undo button on the Standard
toolbar is unavailable.
The Auto, Begin, and Mark options are not available
when None or One is in effect. If you attempt to use
UNDO while it is turned off, the following prompt is
displayed:
Enter an UNDO control option [All/None/One] <All>:
One Limits UNDO to a single operation.

The Auto, Begin, and Mark options are not available
when None or One is in effect. The main prompt for the
UNDO command changes to show that only a Control
option or a single step of the UNDO command is
available when the One option is in effect.
Control/<1>:
If you enter c, AutoCAD returns to the previous prompt:

Enter an UNDO control option [All/None/One] <All>:
1072 | UNDO
Begin, End
Groups a sequence of actions into a set. After you enter the Begin option, all
subsequent actions become part of this set until you use the End option.
Entering undo begin while a group is already active ends the current set and
begins a new one. UNDO and U treat grouped actions as a single action.
If you enter undo begin without undo end, using the Number option undoes
the specified number of commands but does not back up past the begin
point. If you want to go back to before the begin point, you must use the End
option, even if the set is empty. The same applies to the U command. A mark
placed by the Mark option disappears inside an UNDO group.
Mark, Back
Mark places a mark in the undo information. Back undoes all the work done
back to this mark. If you undo one operation at a time, AutoCAD informs you
when you reach the mark.
You can place as many marks as necessary. Back moves back one mark at a
time, removing the mark. If no mark is found, Back displays the following
prompt:
This will undo everything. OK? <Y>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
Entering y undoes all commands entered since you last started AutoCAD.
Entering n causes AutoCAD to ignore the Back option.
When you use the Number option to undo multiple actions, UNDO stops if
it encounters a mark.
See Also
Commands U undoes the most recent operation.
System Variables UNDOCTL stores a bitcode indicating the state of the

Auto and Control options of the UNDO command.
UNDOMARKS stores the number of marks placed in the
UNDO control stream by the Mark option.
UNDO | 1073
UNION
Combines selected regions or solids by addition
A composite region is the result of combining the total area of two or more
existing regions. A composite solid is the result of combining the total vol-
ume of two or more existing solids. You can join regions or solids that do not
share a common area or volume.

Modify menu: Solids Editing ➤ Union
Command line: union
selecting objects
solids before UNION solids after UNION

solids before UNION
The selection set can contain regions and solids that lie in any number of
arbitrary planes. AutoCAD divides the selection sets into subsets that are
joined separately. Solids are grouped in the first subset. The first selected
region and all subsequent coplanar regions are grouped in the second set.
The next region that is not coplanar with the first region and all subsequent
coplanar regions are grouped in the third set, and so on until all regions
belong to a subset.
regions before UNION regions after UNION
The resulting composite solid includes the volume enclosed by all of the
selected solids. Each of the resulting composite regions encloses the area of
all regions in a subset.
1074 | UNION
See Also
Commands INTERSECT creates composite solids or regions from the
intersection of several objects. SUBTRACT creates a com-
posite region or solid by subtraction.
UNITS
Controls coordinate and angle display formats and precision
Format menu: Units
Command line: units (or 'units for transparent use)
The Drawing Units dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -units at the Command prompt, UNITS displays prompts on the
Drawing Units Dialog Box

Defines the unit and angle formats.
Length
Specifies the current unit of measurement and the precision for the current
units.
UNITS | 1075
Type Sets the current format for units of measure. The values
include Architectural, Decimal, Engineering,
Fractional, and Scientific. The Engineering and
Architectural formats produce feet-and-inches displays
and assume that each drawing unit represents one inch.
The other formats can represent any real-world unit.
Precision Sets the number of decimal places or fractional size
displayed for linear measurements.
Angle
Specifies the current angle format and the precision for the current angle
display.
Type Sets the current angle format.
Precision Sets the precision for the current angle display.
AutoCAD uses the following conventions for the
various angle measures: decimal degrees appear as
decimal numbers, grads appear with a lowercase g
suffix, and radians appear with a lowercase r suffix. The
degrees/minutes/seconds format uses d for degrees, ' for
minutes, and " for seconds, for example:
123d45'56.7"
Surveyor’s units show angles as bearings, using N or S
for north or south, degrees/minutes/seconds for how
far east or west the angle is from direct north or south,
and E or W for east or west, for example:
N 45d0'0" E
The angle is always less than 90 degrees and is displayed
in the degrees/minutes/seconds format. If the angle is
precisely north, south, east, or west, only the single
letter representing the compass point is displayed.
Clockwise Calculates positive angles in the clockwise direction.
The default direction for positive angles is
counterclockwise.
When AutoCAD prompts for an angle, you can point in
the desired direction or enter an angle regardless of the
setting specified for Clockwise.
1076 | UNITS
Drag and Drop Scale
Controls the unit of measurement for blocks that are dragged into the cur-
rent drawing using a tool palette, DesignCenter™, or i-drop™ . A block or a
drawing that is created with units that are different from the units specified
with this option is scaled when inserted. The insertion scale is the ratio of the
units used in the source block or drawing and the units used in the target
drawing. Select Unitless to insert the block without scaling it to match the
specified units.
Note In the Options dialog box, User Preferences tab, the Source Content
Units and Target Drawing Units settings are used when, either in the source
block or the target drawing, the Drag-and-Drop Scale is set to Unitless.
Sample Output
Displays an example of the current settings for units and angles.
Direction
Displays the Direction Control dialog box.
Direction Control Dialog Box

Defines the angle for 0 degrees and specifies the direction angles are mea-
sured. When AutoCAD prompts for an angle, you can locate a point in the
desired direction or enter an angle.
Base Angle
Sets the direction of the zero angle. The following options affect the entry of
angles, the display format, and the entry of polar, cylindrical, and spherical
coordinates.
UNITS | 1077
East Specifies the compass direction east (the default).
North Specifies the compass direction north.
West Specifies the compass direction west.
South Specifies the compass direction south.
Other Specifies a direction different from the points of the
compass.
Angle Specifies a value for the zero angle when Other is
selected. You can specify the angle by entering a value.
Pick an Angle Defines the zero angle in the graphics area based on the
angle of an imaginary line that connects any two points
you specify with the pointing device. Available only
when Other is selected.
UNITS Command Line

If you enter -units at the Command prompt, UNITS displays prompts on the
command line.
The text window displays the following prompt:
Report formats: (Examples)
1. Scientific 1.55E+01
2. Decimal 15.50
3. Engineering 1'-3.50"
4. Architectural 1'-3 1/2"
5. Fractional 15 1/2
Enter choice, 1 to 5 <current>: Enter a value (1–5) or press ENTER
AutoCAD prompts for decimal precision if you specify the scientific, decimal,
or engineering format.
Enter number of digits to right of decimal point (0 to 8) <current>: Enter a value
(0–8) or press ENTER
1078 | UNITS
AutoCAD prompts for the denominator of the smallest fraction if you specify
the architectural or fractional format.
Enter denominator of smallest fraction to display
(1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256) <current>: Enter a value (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64, 128, or 256) or press ENTER
AutoCAD prompts for angle formats and precision:

Systems of angle measure: (Examples)
1. Decimal degrees 45.0000
2. Degrees/minutes/seconds 45d0'0"
3. Grads 50.0000g
4. Radians 0.7854r
5. Surveyor's units N 45d0'0" E
Enter choice, 1 to 5 <current>: Enter a value (1–5) or press ENTER
Enter number of fractional places for display of angles (0 to 8) <current>: Enter

a value (0–8) or press ENTER
AutoCAD prompts for the direction for angle 0:

Direction for angle 0:
East 3 o'clock = 0
North 12 o'clock = 90
West 9 o'clock = 180
South 6 o'clock = 270
Enter direction for angle 0 <current>: Enter a value or press ENTER
The default direction for 0 degrees is to the east quadrant, or 3 o’clock. The
default direction for positive angular measurement is counterclockwise.
Measure angles clockwise? [Yes/No] <current>: Enter y or n or press ENTER
UNITS | 1079
See Also
See “Set Units of Measurement” in the User’s Guide.
Commands INSERT places a named block or drawing into the cur-
rent drawing.
System Variables ANGBASE stores the angle 0 direction with respect to the
current UCS. ANGDIR stores the setting for clockwise or
counterclockwise direction with respect to the current
UCS. AUNITS stores the Angular Units mode. AUPREC
stores the number of decimal places for angular units.
LUNITS stores the setting for Linear Units mode. LUPREC
stores the number of decimal places or the denomina-
tor for linear units. UNITMODE controls the display for-
mat for units. INSUNITS determines how units are
assigned to applicable content that you insert with
DesignCenter. Applicable content includes drawings,
blocks, images with resolution, and custom content.
AutoCAD stores entries from User Preferences in the
Options dialog box in INSUNITSDEFSOURCE to use
source content units setting, and in INSUNITSDEFTAR-
GET to use target drawing units setting when Insert
Units are not defined.
1080 | UNITS
VBAIDE
Displays the Visual Basic Editor
Tools menu: Macro ➤ Visual Basic Editor
Command line: vbaide
AutoCAD® displays the Visual Basic Editor.

Use the Visual Basic Editor to edit code, forms, and references for any loaded
global VBA project or any embedded VBA project in an open drawing. You
can also debug and run projects from the Visual Basic Editor.
See Also
For more information about using the Visual Basic Editor, see the ActiveX and
VBA Developer’s Guide.
Commands VBAMAN displays the VBA Manager. VBARUN runs a VBA
macro.
VBALOAD
Loads a global VBA project into the current AutoCAD session
Tools menu: Macro ➤ Load Project
Command line: vbaload
AutoCAD displays the Open VBA Project dialog box (a standard file selection
dialog box).
There is no limit to the number of VBA projects you can load. Any project
referenced by the selected project will also be loaded, if available.
You cannot use this dialog box to load embedded VBA projects. Embedded
projects are loaded when you open the drawing containing the project, and
they are unloaded when you close the drawing.
If you select Open Visual Basic Editor, AutoCAD opens the Visual Basic Editor
after the selected project is loaded. For information about the Visual Basic
Editor, see the ActiveX and VBA Developer’s Guide.
VBAIDE | 1081
If FILEDIA is set to 0 (zero) or if you enter -vbaload at the Command prompt,
VBALOAD displays prompts on the command line.
Open VBA project <>: Enter the path and file name of the project to open
If the selected project contains macros, AutoCAD displays the AutoCAD

Macro Virus Protection dialog box.
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection Dialog Box

Disables macro viruses. A macro virus is a type of computer virus that’s stored
in the macros of a VBA project. If you open a drawing or project file that con-
tains macros, a macro virus can become active and be transmitted to your
computer. From that point on, every drawing or project file you save can
become infected with the macro virus. When other users open the infected
drawing or project file, the macro virus can also be transmitted to their
computers.
The AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box that is displayed when you
open a drawing or project file that contains macros gives you the opportu-
nity to disable the macros. A macro virus can only be harmful if it is allowed
to run. If you disable the macros, you can open the drawing or project file
safely.
The AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box provides the following
options:
Always Ask Before When cleared, prevents the AutoCAD Macro Virus
Opening Projects Protection dialog box from displaying again. You can
with Macros later enable macro virus protection using the VBA
Options dialog box, available from the VBARUN
command (see page 1088).
Disable Macros Loads the drawing or project file with the macros
disabled. Use Disable Macros if you do not expect the
drawing or project file to contain useful macros, or
aren’t certain about the reliability of their source.
Once you disable the macros, you can’t run any macros.
However, you can still view, edit, and save the macros.
You can close the drawing or project file later and open
it again with the macros enabled.
Enable Macros Loads the drawing or project file with the macros
enabled. Use Enable Macros if the drawing or project
file is from a reliable source, or you expect the drawing
or project file to contain useful macros.
1082 | VBALOAD
Do Not Load If you are loading a project file, the process is canceled
and the project file is not loaded. If you are opening an
AutoCAD drawing with an embedded project, the
drawing is opened with the macros disabled.
See Also
For more information about loading projects, see the ActiveX and VBA Devel-
oper’s Guide.
Commands VBAMAN displays the VBA Manager. VBAUNLOAD
unloads a global project from the current AutoCAD
session.
VBAMAN
Loads, unloads, saves, creates, embeds, and extracts VBA projects
Tools menu: Macro ➤ VBA Manager
Command line: vbaman
AutoCAD displays the VBA Manager.
VBA Manager
Loads, unloads, saves, creates, embeds, and extracts VBA projects.
VBAMAN | 1083
Drawing
Specifies the active drawing. The list contains all of the drawings open in the
current AutoCAD session.
Embedded Specifies the name of the embedded project for the
Project drawing. If the drawing does not contain an embedded
project, “(none)” is displayed.
Extract Moves the embedded project out of the drawing and
into a global project file. If you have never saved the
project, AutoCAD prompts you to save it.
If you choose Yes, the File Save dialog box is displayed,
in which you can specify a file name and location for
the project.
If you choose No, the project is extracted and assigned
a temporary project name.
If you choose Cancel, the extraction is canceled and
you are returned to the VBA Manager.
Projects
Lists the name and location of all the projects currently available in the
AutoCAD session.
Embed Embeds the selected project in the specified drawing. A
drawing can contain only one embedded project. You
cannot embed a project in a drawing that already
contains an embedded project.
New Creates a new project with the default name “Global n,”
where n is a session-based number incremented with
each new project.
Save As Saves a global project. This option is available only
when an unsaved global project is selected.
Load Displays the Open VBA Project dialog box (see
VBALOAD), in which you can load an existing project
into the current AutoCAD session.
1084 | VBAMAN
Unload Unloads the selected global project.
Macros Displays the Macros dialog box (see page 1086), in
which you can run, edit, or delete a VBA macro.
Visual Basic Editor Displays the Visual Basic Editor in which you can edit
code, forms, and references for any loaded global VBA
project or any embedded VBA project in an open
drawing. You can also debug and run projects from the
Visual Basic Editor.
See Also
For more information about using the VBA Manager, see the ActiveX and VBA
Developer’s Guide.
Commands VBARUN displays the Macros dialog box.
VBARUN
Runs a VBA macro
A macro is a public (executable) subroutine. Each project usually contains at
least one macro.
Tools menu: Macro ➤ Macros
Command line: vbarun
AutoCAD displays the Macros dialog box.

If you enter -vbarun at the Command prompt, VBARUN displays a prompt on
VBARUN | 1085
Macros Dialog Box
Runs, edits, or deletes a VBA macro. You can also create new macros, set the
VBA options, and display the VBA Manager.
Macro Name Specifies the name of the macro you want to run, edit,
delete, or create. Select a name from the list of available
macros, or enter a name.
Macro List Lists all macros found in the drawing and/or project
selected in Macros In. You can double-click a macro
name in this list to run the macro.
Macros In Specifies the project and/or drawing whose macros are
available from the macro list. You can choose to list the
macros in
■ All drawings and projects
■ All drawings
■ All projects
■ Any individual drawing currently open in AutoCAD
■ Any individual project currently loaded in AutoCAD
If your project or drawing is not listed, choose VBA

Manager to display the VBA Manager (see page 1083),
in which you can load the desired project.
1086 | VBARUN
Description Describes the selected macro. You can add or modify
the description by directly entering your changes.
AutoCAD saves the new description when you move to
a different part of the dialog box.
Run Runs the selected macro.
Step Into Displays the Visual Basic Editor and begins execution of
the macro. Execution is paused at the first executable
line of code.
Edit Displays the Visual Basic Editor and the selected macro.
Create Creates a macro with the name specified in Macro
Name, and then displays the Visual Basic Editor and the
empty procedure for the new macro.
If no project file or drawing is specified for the new
macro, AutoCAD displays the Select Project dialog box.
If a macro with the specified name already exists, a
prompt asks if you want to replace the existing macro.
If you choose Yes, the code in the existing macro is
deleted and a new, empty macro is created with the
specified name.
If you choose No, you are returned to the Macros dialog
box, in which you can enter a new name for the macro.
Delete Deletes the selected macro.
VBA Manager Displays the VBA Manager (see page 1083).
Options Displays the VBA Options dialog box (see page 1088).
VBARUN | 1087
Select Project Dialog Box
Prompts you to select a project or drawing in which to create the new macro.
Select a project or drawing from the list and choose OK. The macro is created
in the selected project or drawing, and the Visual Basic Editor is opened.
VBA Options Dialog Box

Sets VBA-specific options for the AutoCAD session.
Enable Auto Automatically creates an embedded VBA project for all

Embedding drawings when you open the drawing.
Allow Break on Allows VBA to enter Break mode when an error is
Errors encountered. Break mode is a temporary suspension of
program execution in the development environment.
In Break mode, you can examine, debug, reset, step
through, or continue program execution.
When you select Allow Break on Errors, unhandled
errors found during the execution of a VBA macro
suspend the execution of the macro and display the
1088 | VBARUN
Visual Basic Editor at the point of the error in the
macro.
When you clear Allow Break on Errors, untrapped errors
found during the execution of a VBA macro display a
message alerting you to the error and then end
execution of the macro.
Enable Macro Enables the virus protection mechanism for VBA
Virus Protection macros. The virus protection mechanism displays a
built-in warning message whenever you open a
drawing that might contain macro viruses.
VBARUN Command Line

If you enter -vbarun at the Command prompt, VBARUN displays prompts on
the command line.
Macro name: Enter the name of the macro to run
For embedded or loaded global projects, enter the name of the macro to run.
If the macro name is not unique among all the currently loaded projects, you
must also include the name of the project and module in which the macro is
found. For example, to run a macro named Test in a project named Project1,
and a module named Module1, enter the following information at the Macro
name prompt:
Project1.Module1.Test
To run a macro in a global project that is not currently loaded, enter the
name of the DVB file that contains the macro, as well as the project and mod-
ule names. For example, if the Test macro described previously is contained
in a file called Acad_Projects.dvb, and that file is not loaded, you can execute
the Test macro by entering the following at the Macro name prompt:
Acad_Projects.dvb!Project1.Module1.Test
AutoCAD automatically loads the Acad_Projects.dvb file and executes the Test
macro. The Acad_Projects.dvb file remains loaded once the macro has been
completed.
See Also
For more information about running VBA macros, see the ActiveX and VBA
Commands VBAMAN displays the VBA Manager. VBALOAD loads a
global project into the current AutoCAD session.
VBARUN | 1089
VBASTMT
Executes a VBA statement on the AutoCAD command line
Command line: vbastmt
Expression: Enter the VBA statement to execute
A Visual Basic statement is a complete instruction that can contain keywords,

operators, variables, constants, and expressions. A statement generally occu-
pies a single line, although you can use a colon (:) to include more than one
statement on a line.
VBA statements are executed in the context of the current active drawing.
See Also
Commands VBARUN displays the Macros dialog box. VBAMAN
displays the VBA Manager.
VBAUNLOAD
Unloads a global VBA project
Command line: vbaunload
Unload VBA Project: Enter the name of the project to unload
If you do not enter a project name, the active global project is unloaded.
See Also
For more information about unloading projects, see the ActiveX and VBA
Commands VBAMAN displays the VBA Manager. VBALOAD loads a
global VBA project into the current AutoCAD session.
VIEW
Saves and restores named views
A view is a portion of a drawing that is displayed in a viewport. You can save
and restore views by name for convenient access. Views are saved separately
in model space and paper space.
Note The VIEW command cannot be used transparently.
1090 | VBASTMT
View menu: Named Views
Command line: view
The View dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -view at the Command prompt, VIEW displays prompts on the
View Dialog Box

Saves and restores named views and orthographic views.
Named Views Tab (View Dialog Box)

Creates, sets, renames, and deletes named views.
Current View Displays the name of the current view. When the View
dialog box is first displayed, it lists the current view as
CURRENT.
View Names Lists the named views in the current drawing. A pointer
indicates the current view. The list also indicates
whether the view represents Model space or a layout,
the name of any user coordinate system (UCS) saved
with the view, and whether the view was saved in
perspective or clipped. To sort the list of named views,
click any of the column headings. If the UCS that was
saved with the view is unnamed, the list displays
UNNAMED. If no UCS was saved with the view, the UCS
column is blank.
VIEW | 1091
Set Current Restores the selected view. You can also restore a
selected view by double-clicking its name in the list or
by right-clicking the name and choosing Set Current.
New Displays the New View dialog box (see page 1093).
Details Displays the View Details dialog box (see page 1094).
You can also display details by right-clicking the view
name and choosing Details.
Rename Renames the selected view. Select a view, right-click,
(Shortcut Menu and choose Rename from the shortcut menu, or press
Only) F2 . You cannot use this option to rename the current
view. To rename the current view, select it, choose New,
and enter a new name in the New View dialog box.
Delete (Shortcut Deletes a named view. Select a view, right-click, and
Menu Only) choose Delete from the shortcut menu. You cannot
delete the current view.
Orthographic and Isometric Views Tab (View Dialog Box)

Restores orthographic or isometric views.
Current View Displays the name of the current view. The default
value is CURRENT.
View Names Lists the orthographic and isometric views. A pointer
indicates the current orthographic or isometric view.
The views are relative to the UCS listed in the Relative
To list.
1092 | VIEW
Set Current Restores the selected orthographic view. You can also
restore a selected view by double-clicking its name in
the list or by right-clicking the name and choosing Set
Current. When an orthographic view is restored,
AutoCAD automatically zooms to the extents of the
view.
Relative To Specifies the base coordinate system for defining the
orthographic view. By default, the world coordinate
system (WCS) is the base coordinate system. Relative To
sets the value of the UCSBASE system variable.
The UCSBASE system variable controls the orientation of
orthographic UCSs relative to the WCS or to named
UCSs. Changing this setting also changes the
orientation of the predefined orthographic UCSs.
AutoCAD displays a warning message when you change
the value of the UCSBASE system variable.
Restore Restores the associated UCS when you make an
Orthographic orthographic view current. This option sets the
UCS with View UCSORTHO system variable.
New View Dialog Box

Creates a view.
View Name
Specifies the view name. View names can have up to 255 characters and can
include letters, numbers, blank spaces, and any special character not used by
Microsoft® Windows® and AutoCAD for other purposes.
Current Display
Uses the current display as the new view.
VIEW | 1093
Define Window
Uses a window as the new view, defined in the drawing area by specifying
two opposite corners.
Define View Window Button

Temporarily closes the dialog boxes so that you can use the pointing device
to define the opposite corners of the new view window. This option is avail-
able only if Define Window is selected.
UCS Settings
Provides options for saving a UCS.
Save UCS with Saves a UCS with the new view. This option sets the
View UCSVIEW system variable.
UCS Name Specifies the UCS saved with the new view. This option
is available only when Save UCS with View is selected.
View Details Dialog Box

Displays information about the selected view.
Name Displays the name of the current view. The default

value is CURRENT.
Area Displays view area in width, height, and twist.
Target Displays view target location as a coordinate.
Direction Displays view direction as a normal vector coordinate.
1094 | VIEW
Clipping Displays the front and back clipping distance and
whether each clipping plane is turned on or off.
Perspective Displays lens length and whether perspective is turned
on or off.
Relative To Sets the base coordinate system that defines the
orientation of the view.
VIEW Command Line

If you enter -view at the Command prompt, VIEW displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter an option [?/Orthographic/Delete/Restore/Save/Ucs/Window]:
?—List Views Lists the named views in the drawing.

Enter view names(s) to list <*>: Enter a wild-card pattern
or press ENTER
AutoCAD lists the name of each specified view and the

space in which it was defined. M designates model
space, and P designates paper space.
Orthographic Restores the predefined orthographic view you specify
to the current viewport.
Enter an option [Top/Bottom/Front/BAck/Left/Right]
<Top>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Y Z Y
top view isometric view
X X
Z Z
front view right side view
X Y
The view orientation of the specified orthographic view

is based on the UCSBASE system variable, which is set to
the world coordinate system by default. When one of
the orthographic views is restored, AutoCAD zooms to
the extents in the current viewport.
VIEW | 1095
Delete Deletes one or more named views.
Enter view name(s) to delete: Enter a name or a list of
names separated by commas
Restore Restores the view you specify to the current viewport. If

a UCS setting was saved with the view, it is also restored.
Enter view name to restore: Enter a name
AutoCAD also restores the center point and

magnification of the saved view. If you restore a model
space view while working in paper space, AutoCAD
prompts you to select a viewport in which to restore
that view.
Restoring model space view.
Select Viewport for view: Select a viewport
Select the viewport by choosing its border. The

viewport you select must be on and active. AutoCAD
switches to model space and restores the view in the
selected viewport.
If you restore a paper space view while working in
model space in a layout tab, AutoCAD switches to paper
space and restores the view. You can’t restore a paper
space view if you are working in the Model tab.
Save Saves the display in the current viewport using the
name you supply.
Enter view name to save: Enter a name
The current value of the UCSVIEW system variable is

displayed when you save a view. To change the setting
and turn this option on or off, use the UCS option of
VIEW.
1096 | VIEW
UCS Determines whether the current UCS and elevation
settings are saved when a view is saved.
Save current UCS with named views? [Yes/No]
The UCS option of VIEW sets the UCSVIEW system

variable. Turning this option on saves the current UCS
for each named view that you save.
Window Saves a portion of the current display as a view.
Enter view name to save: Enter a name
Specify opposite corner:
Restoring such a view may display objects outside the

window you specified because the shape of the window
may differ from that of the viewport in which you are
restoring the view. However, plotting the view plots
only the objects inside the window, not the entire
viewport display.
See Also
See “Save and Restore Views” in the User’s Guide.
viewport. PSPACE switches from a model space viewport
to paper space. DVIEW defines parallel projection or
perspective views on the screen as you change views.
PLOT prints a drawing to a plotter, printer, or file.
System Variables UCSORTHO determines whether the associated ortho-

graphic UCS is restored automatically when an ortho-
graphic view is restored. UCSVIEW determines whether
the current UCS is saved with a named view when it is
saved. TILEMODE turns paper space on and off.
VIEW | 1097
VIEWRES
Sets the resolution for objects in the current viewport
Command line: viewres
Do you want fast zooms [Yes/No] <Y>: Press ENTER (Fast Zoom is no longer a
functioning option of this command and remains for script compatibility only.)
Enter circle zoom percent (1–20000) <current>: Enter an integer from 1 to
20,000 or press ENTER
AutoCAD regenerates the model.

VIEWRES controls the appearance of circles, arcs, ellipses, and splines using
short vectors. The greater the number of vectors, the smoother the appear-
ance of the circle or arc. For example, if you create a very small circle and
then zoom in, it might appear to be a polygon. Using VIEWRES to increase the
VIEWRES at 15
zoom percentage and regenerate the drawing updates and smooths the cir-
cle's appearance. Decreasing the zoom percentage has the opposite effect.
Note Increasing the zoom percentage in VIEWRES may increase the time it takes
VIEWRES at 500 to regenerate the drawing.
When a paper space layout is made current for the first time and a default
viewport is created in the layout, the viewing resolution for this initial view-
port is the same as the viewing resolution for the Model tab viewport.
The VIEWRES setting is saved in the drawing. To change the default for new
drawings, consider specifying the VIEWRES setting in the template files on
which you base your new drawings.
See Also
Commands PAN moves the drawing display in the current viewport.
REDRAW refreshes the current viewport by removing
marker blips and redrawing partially erased objects.
VIEW saves and restores named views. ZOOM increases
or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current
viewport. REGEN regenerates the drawing and refreshes
System Variables FACETRES further adjusts the smoothness of rendered
objects, shaded objects, and objects with hidden lines
removed. WHIPARC controls whether the display of
circles and arcs is smooth.
1098 | VIEWRES
VLISP
Displays the Visual LISP interactive development environment (IDE)
Tools menu: AutoLISP ➤ Visual LISP Editor
Command line: vlisp
AutoCAD displays the Visual LISP™ interactive development environment

(IDE). Use Visual LISP to develop, test, and debug AutoLISP™ programs.
Note VLIDE is used by AutoCAD to transfer control to Visual LISP. It performs

the same function as the VLISP command.
See Also
For information about using the Visual LISP interactive development
environment, see the Visual LISP Developer’s Guide.
VPCLIP
Clips viewport objects
Clips the specified viewport objects. Reshapes the viewport border to
conform to a user-drawn boundary.
Shortcut menu: Select the viewport to clip, right-click in the drawing area,
and choose Viewport Clip.
Command line: vpclip
Select viewport to clip:

Select clipping object or [Polygonal/Delete] <Polygonal>:
Object Specifies an object to act as a clipping boundary.

Objects that are valid as clipping boundaries include
closed polylines, circles, ellipses, closed splines, and
regions.
Polygonal Draws a clipping boundary. You can draw line segments
or arc segments by specifying points. The following
Specify start point:
Specify next point or [Arc/Close/Length/Undo]:
VLISP | 1099
The descriptions of the Next Point, Arc, Close, Length,
and Undo options match the descriptions of the
corresponding options in the PLINE command (see page
713).
Delete Deletes the clipping boundary of a selected viewport.
This option is available only if the selected viewport has
already been clipped. If you clip a viewport that has
been previously clipped, the original clipping boundary
is deleted, and the new clipping boundary is applied.
VPLAYER
Sets layer visibility within viewports
VPLAYER makes a layer visible in one or more viewports and invisible in all
other viewports.
The VPLAYER command can be used only while you are working in a layout
tab.
Command line: vplayer
Enter an option [?/Freeze/Thaw/Reset/Newfrz/Vpvisdflt]:
?—List Frozen Layers

Displays the names of frozen layers in a selected viewport.
Select a viewport:
Freeze
Freezes a layer or set of layers in one or more viewports. AutoCAD does not
display, regenerate, or plot objects on frozen layers.
Enter layer name(s) to freeze: Enter one or more layer names
Enter an option [All/Select/Current] <Current>: Enter an option or press ENTER
All Applies the changes in all viewports.

Select Temporarily switches to paper space, allowing you to
select the viewports where you can apply the layer
settings.
1100 | VPLAYER
Select objects: Select one or more viewports and press
ENTER
Current Applies the changes in the current viewport only.
Thaw
Thaws layers in specific viewports.
Enter layer name(s) to thaw: Enter one or more layer names

Select Applies the changes in selected viewports.
ENTER
Reset
Sets the visibility of layers in specified viewports to their current default
setting.
Enter layer name(s) to reset: Enter one or more layer names

Select Applies the changes in selected viewports.
ENTER
Newfrz (New Freeze)

Creates new layers that are frozen in all viewports.
Enter name(s) of new layers frozen in all viewports: Enter one or more layer
names
VPLAYER | 1101
Vpvisdflt (Viewport Visibility Default)
Thaws or freezes the specified layers in subsequently created viewports.
Enter layer name(s) to change viewport visibility: Enter one or more layer names
Enter a viewport visibility option [Frozen/Thawed] <current>: Enter f or t, or
press ENTER
See Also
Commands LAYER controls layer creation and visibility and other
layer settings.
VPOINT
Sets the viewing direction for a three-dimensional visualization of the drawing
VPOINT puts the viewer in a position to look at the drawing as if looking back
at the origin (0,0,0) from a specified point in space. VPOINT cannot be used
in paper space.
View menu: 3D Views ➤ Viewpoint
Command line: vpoint
Current view direction: VIEWDIR=current

Specify a view point or [Rotate] <display compass and tripod>: Specify a point,
enter r, or press ENTER to display a compass and axis tripod
View Point Using the X,Y,Z coordinate you enter, creates a vector
that defines a direction from which the drawing can be
viewed. The view defined is as if the viewer is looking
from the point back at the origin (0,0,0).
viewing
Z Y
direction
(0,0,0) Y
X
X
as seen by viewer
1102 | VPOINT
Rotate Specifies a new viewing direction using two angles.
Enter angle in XY plane from X axis <current>: Specify an
angle
The first angle is specified with respect to the X axis, in

the XY plane.
Enter angle from XY plane <current>: Specify an angle
The second angle is specified up or down from the XY

plane.
viewing direction
angle from XY plane
(0,0,0)
angle from X axis
compass
Z Compass and Displays a compass and axis tripod, which you use to
Y
Axis Tripod define a viewing direction in the viewport.
The compass is a two-dimensional representation of a
globe. The center point is the north pole (0,0,n), the
X
inner ring is the equator (n,n,0), and the entire outer
axis tripod ring is the south pole (0,0,–n).
You can move the small crosshairs on the compass to
any portion of the globe with your pointing device. As
you move the crosshairs, the axis tripod rotates to
conform to the viewing direction indicated on the
compass. To select a viewing direction, move your
pointing device to a location on the globe and click.
VPOINT | 1103
See Also
See “Define a 3D View with Coordinate Values or Angles” in the User’s Guide.
System Variables TARGET is the location, expressed as a UCS coordinate,
of the target point for the current viewport. VIEWDIR is
the current viewport viewing direction. WORLDVIEW
determines whether input to VPOINT, DVIEW, and
3DORBIT are relative to the WCS (default), the current
UCS, or the UCS specified by the UCSBASE system vari-
able.
VPORTS
Creates multiple viewports
The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are
called viewport configurations.
VPORTS determines the viewport configuration for model space and paper
space (layout) environments. In model space (the Model tab), you can create
multiple model viewport configurations. In paper space (a layout tab), you
can create multiple layout viewport configurations.
Layouts toolbar:
View menu: Viewports
Command line: vports
The Viewports dialog box is displayed.

If you enter -vports at the Command prompt, VPORTS displays prompts on
Viewports Dialog Box

Creates new viewport configurations, or names and saves a model viewport
configuration. The options available in this dialog box depend on whether
you are configuring model viewports (on the Model tab) or layout viewports
(on a layout tab).
New Viewports Tab—Tiled (Viewports Dialog Box)

Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures model
viewports.
1104 | VPORTS
New Name Specifies a name for the new model viewport
configuration you are creating. If you do not enter a
name, the viewport configuration you create is applied
but not saved. If a viewport configuration is not saved,
it cannot be used in a layout.
Standard Lists and sets the standard viewport configurations,
Viewports including CURRENT, which is the current configuration.
Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you
select and the default views assigned to each individual
viewport in the configuration.
Apply To Applies the model viewport configuration to the entire
display or to the current viewport.
■ Display: Applies the viewport configuration to the

entire Model tab display. Display is the default
setting.
■ Current Viewport: Applies the viewport configuration
to the current viewport only.
VPORTS | 1105
Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D,
the new viewport configuration is initially created with
the current view in all of the viewports. When you
select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is
applied to the viewports in the configuration.
Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the
view you select from the list. You can choose a named
view, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can select
from the list of standard views. Use the Preview area to
see the choices.
Named Viewports Tab—Tiled (Viewports Dialog Box)

Displays any saved viewport configurations in the drawing. When you select
a viewport configuration, the layout of the saved configuration is displayed
in Preview.
Current Name Displays the name of the current viewport

configuration.
New Viewports Tab—Floating (Viewports Dialog Box)

Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and configures layout
viewports.
1106 | VPORTS
Standard Displays a list of standard viewport configurations and
Viewports configures layout viewports.
Viewport Spacing Specifies the spacing you want to apply between the
layout viewports you are configuring.
Preview Displays a preview of the viewport configuration you
select and the default views assigned to each individual
viewport in the configuration.
Setup Specifies either a 2D or a 3D setup. When you select 2D,
the new viewport configuration is initially created with
the current view in all of the viewports. When you
select 3D, a set of standard orthogonal 3D views is
applied to the viewports in the configuration.
Change View To Replaces the view in the selected viewport with the
view you select from the list. You can choose a named
view, or if you have selected 3D setup, you can select
from the list of standard views. Use the Preview area to
see the choices.
VPORTS | 1107
Named Viewports Tab—Floating (Viewports Dialog Box)
Displays any saved and named model viewport configurations for you to use
in the current layout. You cannot save and name a layout viewport
configuration.
VPORTS Command Line

The prompts available on the command line depend on whether you are
configuring model viewports (on the Model tab) or layout viewports (on a
layout tab).
VPORTS Command Line—Tiled Viewports

If you enter –vports at the Command prompt from the Model tab, VPORTS
displays prompts on the command line.
Enter an option [Save/Restore/Delete/Join/SIngle/?/2/3/4]<3>: Enter an option
Save Saves the current viewport configuration using a

specified name.
Enter name for new viewport configuration or [?]: Enter
a name or enter ? to list saved viewport configurations
Restore Restores a previously saved viewport configuration.

Enter name of viewport configuration to restore or [?]:
Enter a name or enter ? to list saved viewport configurations
Delete Deletes a named viewport configuration.

Enter name(s) of viewport configurations to delete
<none>: Enter a name or enter ? to list saved viewport
configurations
1108 | VPORTS
Join Combines two adjacent viewports into one larger
viewport. The resulting viewport inherits the view of
the dominant viewport.
Select dominant viewport <current>: Press ENTER or
select a viewport
Select viewport to join: Select a viewport
dominant viewport
viewport to join viewports after Join
Single Returns the drawing to a single viewport view, using the

view from the current viewport.
current viewport
viewport after Single
?—List Viewport Displays the identification numbers and screen

Configurations positions of the active viewports.
Enter name(s) of viewport configuration(s) to list <*>:
Enter a name or press ENTER
The lower-left and upper-right corners of the viewport

define its location. For these corners, AutoCAD uses
values between 0.0,0.0 (for the lower-left corner of the
drawing area) and 1.0,1.0 (for the upper-right corner).
The current viewport is listed first.
2 Divides the current viewport in half.
Enter a configuration option [Horizontal/Vertical]
<Vertical>: Enter h or press ENTER
VPORTS | 1109
3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports.
Enter a configuration option [Horizontal/Vertical/Above/
Below/Left/Right] <Right>: Enter an option or press ENTER
The Horizontal and Vertical options split the area into

thirds. The Above, Below, Left, and Right options specify
where the larger viewport is placed.
4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal
size.
VPORTS Command Line—Floating Viewports

If you enter –vports at the Command prompt from a layout tab, VPORTS
displays prompts on the command line.
Specify corner of viewport or ON/OFF/Fit/Shadeplot/Lock/Object/Polygonal/
Restore/2/3/4 <Fit>: Enter an option
The number and layout of active viewports and their associated settings are
called viewport configurations.
On Turns on a viewport, making it active and making its
objects visible.
Off Turns off a viewport. When a viewport is off, its objects
are not displayed, and you cannot make that viewport
current.
Fit Creates one viewport that fills the available display area.
The actual size of the viewport depends on the
dimensions of the paper space view.
Shadeplot Specifies how viewports in layouts are plotted.
Shade plot? [As displayed/Wireframe/Hidden/Rendered]
<As displayed >: Enter a shade plot option
■ As Displayed: plots the same way it is displayed

■ Wireframe: plots wireframe regardless of display
■ Hidden: plots with hidden lines removed regardless of
display
■ Rendered: plots rendered regardless of display
Lock Locks the current viewport. This is similar to layer

locking.
Object Specifies a closed polyline, ellipse, spline, region, or circle
to convert into a viewport. The polyline you specify must
1110 | VPORTS
be closed and contain at least three vertices. It can be self-
intersecting, and it can contain arcs as well as line
segments.
Polygonal Creates an irregularly shaped viewport defined by
specifying points. For a description of this option, see the
Polygonal option under XCLIP (see page 1134).
Enter an arc boundary option
[Angle/CEnter/CLose/Direction/Line/Radius/Second pt/
Undo/Endpoint of arc] <Endpoint>: Enter an option
Restore Restores a previously saved viewport configuration.

Enter viewport configuration name or [?]: Enter a name or
enter ? to list saved viewport configurations
2 Divides the current viewport in half.

Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/
Vertical]<Vertical>: Enter h or press ENTER
2/Vertical
3 Divides the current viewport into three viewports.

Enter viewport arrangement [Horizontal/Vertical/Above/
Below/Left/Right] <Right>: Enter an option or press ENTER
Horizontal and Vertical split the area into thirds. The

other options create one large viewport in half the
3/Right available area and two smaller ones in the other half.
Above, Below, Left, and Right specify where the larger
viewport is placed.
4 Divides the current viewport into four viewports of equal
size.
See Also
See “Set Model Tab Viewports” in the User’s Guide.
Commands MVIEW creates viewport objects in paper space and
4
controls the display of objects in those viewports.
System Variables CVPORT sets the current viewport. PSVPSCALE sets the
current scale for new viewports. MAXACTVP specifies the
maximum number of viewports to be regenerated at one
time. TILEMODE controls paper space access and viewport
behavior.
VPORTS | 1111
VSLIDE
Displays an image slide file in the current viewport
Command line: vslide
The Select Slide File dialog box, a standard file selection dialog box, is
displayed. Enter a slide file name (.sld extension) to display. When you
press ENTER or choose Open, the slide file is opened in AutoCAD.
To display a slide in a slide library (.slb extension), set FILEDIA to 0, enter
vslide, and then specify the slide library file name followed by the slide file
name enclosed in parentheses slidelibrary(slide).
When you view slides of images shaded with the -SHADE command in a larger
window or a higher resolution than was used for creating the slide, black
lines may appear interspersed among the lines of the shaded image. To avoid
this situation, use a full screen that is set at the highest resolution when
creating the slides.
See Also
See “View Slides” in the Customization Guide.
Commands REDRAW restores the current drawing. MSLIDE creates
slide files for viewing.
Utilities SLIDELIB creates slide libraries (SLB files). This utility is
found in the AutoCAD support folder.
1112 | VSLIDE
WBLOCK
Writes objects or a block to a new drawing file
Command line: wblock
The Write Block dialog box is displayed.

Entering –wblock at the Command prompt displays a standard file selection
dialog box in which to specify a name for the new drawing file, followed by
prompts on the command line (see page 1115). If FILEDIA is set to 0, the
standard file selection dialog box is suppressed.
Write Block Dialog Box

Saves objects or converts a block to a file.
The Write Block dialog box displays different default settings depending on
whether nothing is selected, a single block is selected, or objects other than
blocks are selected.
Source
Specifies blocks and objects, saves them as a file, and specifies insertion
points.
WBLOCK | 1113
Block
Specifies an existing block to save as a file. Select a name from the list.
Entire Drawing
Selects current drawing as a block.
Objects
Specifies objects to be saved as a file.
Base Point
Specifies a base point for the block. The default value is 0,0,0.
X Specifies the X coordinate value for the base point.
Y Specifies the Y coordinate value for the base point.
Z Specifies the Z coordinate value for the base point.
Pick Insertion Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can
Base Point specify an insertion base point in the current drawing.
Objects
Sets the effect of block creation on objects used to create a block.
Retain Retains the selected objects in the current drawing after
saving them as a file.
Convert to Block Converts the selected object or objects to a block in the
current drawing after saving them as a file. The block is
assigned the name in File Name.
Delete from Deletes the selected objects from the current drawing
Drawing after saving them as a file.
Select Objects Temporarily closes the dialog box so that you can select
Button one or more objects to save to the file.
Quick Select Opens the Quick Select dialog box, which you can use
Button to filter your selection set.
Objects Selected Indicates the number of objects selected.
Destination
Specifies the new name and location of the file and the units of measurement
to be used when the block is inserted.
File Name and Specifies a file name and path where the block or
Path objects will be saved.
[...] Displays a standard file selection dialog box.
1114 | WBLOCK
Insert Units Specifies the unit value to be used for automatic scaling
when the new file is dragged from DesignCenter and
inserted as a block in a drawing that uses different units.
Select Unitless if you do not want to automatically scale
the drawing when you insert it. See INSUNITS.
WBLOCK Command Line

If FILEDIA is set to 1, entering -wblock at the Command prompt displays a
standard file selection dialog box in which to specify a name for the new
drawing file. If FILEDIA is set to 0, entering -wblock at the Command prompt
displays a prompt on the command line.
Enter name of output file:
Once you specify a filename—either through the dialog box or through the
command line—the following prompt is displayed.
Enter name of existing block or
[= (block=output file)/* (whole drawing)] <define new drawing>: Enter the
name of an existing block, enter =, enter *, or press ENTER
Entering the name of an existing block writes that block to a file. You cannot
enter the name of an external reference (xref) or one of its dependent blocks.
Entering an equal sign (=) specifies that the existing block and the output file
have the same name. If no block of that name exists in the drawing, the
prompt is displayed again.
Entering an asterisk (*) writes the entire drawing to the new output file,
except for unreferenced symbols. Model space objects are written to model
space, and paper space objects are written to paper space.
If you press ENTER , AutoCAD® prompts you for an insertion base point for
the block file and then prompts you to select the objects to write to the block
file.
1 Specify insertion base point: Specify a point (1)

selecting objects
After AutoCAD creates the file, the selected objects are deleted from the
drawing. You can use OOPS to restore the objects.
In the new drawing, the world coordinate system (WCS) is set parallel to the
user coordinate system (UCS).
objects selected
for a block
WBLOCK | 1115
See Also
See “Create Drawing Files for Use as Blocks” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BLOCK saves a block definition in the current drawing
or as a separate drawing file using a dialog box. -BLOCK
saves a block definition in the current drawing using
the command line. INSERT places a previously defined
block or drawing in the current drawing. INSUNITS
specifies a unit value when you drag an object into a
drawing. EXPORT saves objects to other file formats.
MINSERT inserts multiple instances of a block in a rect-
angular array. OOPS restores erased objects. QSAVE saves
the current drawing. SAVE saves the current drawing
with the current file name or a specified name. SAVEAS
saves an unnamed drawing with a file name and
renames the current drawing. XREF controls external
references to drawing files.
WEDGE
Creates a 3D solid with a sloped face tapering along the X axis
Solids toolbar:
Draw menu: Solids ➤ Wedge
Command line: wedge
1
Specify first corner of wedge or [CEnter] <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1), enter ce,
or press ENTER
Corner of Wedge
Defines the first corner of the wedge.
Specify corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
1116 | WEDGE
Corner Specifies the other corner of the wedge. If both corner
points have the same Z value, you must specify the
height height of the wedge. Otherwise, AutoCAD uses the
difference in Z values for the height.
2 Specify height:

positive Z axis of the current user coordinate system
(UCS). Entering a negative value draws the height along
the negative axis.
Cube Creates a wedge with sides of equal length.
Specify length:

positive X axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative
value draws the length along the negative axis.
Length Creates a wedge with specified length, width, and

height values. The length corresponds to the X axis, the
height width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.
Specify length:
length Specify width:
width Specify height:
Entering a positive value draws the length, width, and

height along the positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current
UCS. Entering a negative value draws them along the
negative axes.
Center
Creates the wedge by a specified center point.
Specify center of wedge <0,0,0>: Specify a point (1) or press ENTER
Specify opposite corner or [Cube/Length]: Specify a point (2) or enter an option
WEDGE | 1117
Corner Specifies the corner of the wedge.
1 Specify height:

positive Z axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative
value draws the height along the negative axis.
Cube Creates a wedge with sides of equal length.
Specify length:
height Entering a positive value draws the length along the
2 positive X axis of the current UCS. Entering a negative
value draws the length along the negative axis.
Length Creates a wedge with specified length, width, and
height values. The length corresponds to the X axis, the
width to the Y axis, and the height to the Z axis.
Specify length:
Specify width:
Specify height:
Entering a positive value draws the length, width, and

height along the positive X, Y, and Z axes of the current
UCS. Entering a negative value draws them along the
height negative axes.
length See Also

width See “Create 3D Solids” in the User’s Guide.
Commands The Wedge option of 3D creates a meshed wedge.
WHOHAS
Displays ownership information for opened drawing files
Command line: whohas
You can use WHOHAS to track which users have certain drawing files open.
WHOHAS displays the Select Drawing to Query dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). After you select a file, AutoCAD displays the ownership
information on the command line. The information includes the current
user’s computer name, login ID, and full name (if available) and the date and
time the drawing file was opened.
1118 | WHOHAS
Note AutoCAD displays similar information automatically when you try to
open a drawing file that another user has open.
WIPEOUT
Covers existing objects with a blank area
Creates a polygonal area that masks underlying objects with the current
background color. This area is bounded by the wipeout frame. You can turn
on the wipeout frame for editing and turn it off for plotting.
Draw menu: Wipeout
Command line: wipeout
Specify first point or [Frames/Polyline]<Polyline>: Specify a point or an option
First Point Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout

object from a series of points.
Next point: Specify the next point or press ENTER to exit
Frames Determines whether the edges of all wipeout objects are

displayed or hidden.
ON/OFF:<varies> Enter on or off
Enter on to display all wipeout frames. Enter off to

suppress the display of all wipeout frames.
Polyline Determines the polygonal boundary of the wipeout
objects from a selected polyline.
Select a closed polyline: Use an object selection method to
select a closed polyline
Erase polyline? [Yes/No]<N>: Enter y or n
Enter y to erase the polyline that was used to create the

wipeout object. Enter n to retain the polyline.
WIPEOUT | 1119
WMFIN
Imports a Windows metafile
Unlike bitmaps or raster files, metafiles contain vector information, which
can be scaled and printed without loss of resolution.
Insert menu: Windows Metafile
Command line: wmfin
The Import WMF dialog box (a standard file selection dialog box) is
displayed. Enter a file name. AutoCAD adds the .wmf file extension.
In the Import WMF dialog box, if you choose Tools ➤ Options, AutoCAD
displays the WMF In Options dialog box (see page 1125). You can also open
this dialog box directly by using WMFOPTS. After opening the selected WMF
file, AutoCAD displays the following prompt:
Insertion Point
Places a copy of the metafile with its base point at the specified insertion
point.
X Scale Factor Sets the X and Y scale factors.

AutoCAD multiplies all X and Y dimensions of the

metafile by the X and Y scale factors supplied. The
metafile is rotated by the angle specified, using the
insertion point as the center of rotation.
Corner Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the
insertion point and another point as the corners of a
box. The X and Y dimensions of the box become the X
1120 | WMFIN
and Y scale factors. The insertion point is the first
corner.
The rotation angle sets the angle of the WMF file.

XYZ Scales the metafile in all three dimensions.

point and the insertion point determine the X and Y
scale factors for the WMF file.
Scale
X
WMFIN | 1121
Y
Z
Rotate
Sets the angle of insertion for the WMF file.
specify a point, enter an option, or press ENTER
X Scale Factor Sets the X and Y scale factors.

Corner Defines the X and Y scales at the same time, using the
insertion point and another point as the corners of a
box. The X and Y dimensions of the box become the X
and Y scale factors. The insertion point is the first
corner.
1122 | WMFIN
XYZ Scales the metafile in all three dimensions.

point and the insertion point determine the X and Y
scale factors for the block.
PScale
Sets the temporary scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes to control the display
of the WMF file as it is dragged into position.
The descriptions of the X Scale Factor, Corner, and XYZ options match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under Rotate (see page 1122).
PX
Sets the temporary scale factor for the X axis to control the display of the
WMF file as it is dragged into position.
WMFIN | 1123
PY
Sets the temporary scale factor for the Y axis to control the display of the
PZ
Sets the temporary scale factor for the Z axis to control the display of the
PRotate
Sets the temporary rotation angle of the WMF file as it is dragged into
position.
See Also
Commands IMPORT imports various file formats into AutoCAD.
EXPORT exports AutoCAD drawings to various file
formats. WMFOPTS sets options for WMFIN. WMFOUT
saves selected objects to a Windows® metafile format
file.
1124 | WMFIN
WMFOPTS
Sets options for WMFIN
Controls the way objects such as rectangles, polygons, and circles are
imported from Windows metafiles.
Command line: wmfopts
The WMF In Options dialog box is displayed.
WMF In Options Dialog Box

Controls whether metafiles maintain relative line widths and whether they
are imported as wireframes or solid objects.
Wire Frame (No Imports objects as wireframes. If you clear this option,
Fills) objects are imported as filled objects.
Wide Lines Maintains the relative line width of lines and borders. If
you clear this option, lines are imported with zero
width.
See Also
Commands COPYCLIP copies vector objects to the Clipboard.
WMFIN imports a file in WMF format. WMFOUT saves
selected objects to a WMF file.
WMFOUT
Saves objects to a Windows metafile
Command line: wmfout
The Create WMF standard file selection dialog box is displayed. Enter a file
name. AutoCAD adds a .wmf file extension.
selecting objects
WMFOPTS | 1125
The selected objects are saved to a file in Windows metafile format.
Note If one or more raster objects are attached to the drawing and if the image
application (ism.arx) is loaded, the maximum resolution of the resulting WMF file
is 2K by 2K. The image application is loaded the first time you run IMAGE, IMAGE-
ADJUST, IMAGEATTACH, IMAGECLIP, IMAGEFRAME, or IMAGEQUALITY.
See Also
Commands WMFIN imports a file in WMF format. WMFOPTS sets
options for WMFIN.
System Variables WMFBKGND controls the background and border of the
Windows metafile that results from the WMFOUT
command.
1126 | WMFOUT
XATTACH
Attaches an external reference to the current drawing
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: External Reference
Command line: xattach
AutoCAD displays the Select Reference File dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box). The External Reference dialog box is displayed after a
file is selected.
External Reference Dialog Box

Attaches a drawing as an external reference (xref). If you attach a drawing
that itself contains an attached xref, the attached xref appears in the current
drawing. Like blocks, attached xrefs can be nested. If another person is
currently editing the xref, the drawing attached is based on the most recently
saved version.
XATTACH | 1127
Name
Displays the xref name in the list after an xref is attached. When an attached
xref is selected in the list, its path is displayed in Path.
Browse
Choose Browse to display the Select a Reference dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), in which you can select new xrefs for the current
drawing.
Found In
Displays the path where the xref was found.
If no path was saved for the xref or if the xref is no longer located at the
specified path, AutoCAD searches for the xref in the following order:
■ Current folder of the host drawing

■ Project search paths defined on the Files tab in the Options dialog box and
in the PROJECTNAME system variable
■ Support search paths defined on the Files tab in the Options dialog box
■ Start-in folder specified in the Windows® application shortcut
Saved Path
Displays the saved path, if any, that is used to locate the xref. This path can
be an absolute (fully specified) path, a relative (partially specified) path, or no
path.
Reference Type
Specifies whether the xref is an attachment or an overlay.
See “Attach External References” and “Nest and Overlay External References”
Path Type
Specifies whether the saved path to the xref is the full path, a relative path,
or no path. You must save the current drawing before you can set the path
type to Relative Path. For a nested xref, a relative path always references the
location of its immediate host and not necessarily the currently open
drawing.
The Relative Path option is not available if the referenced drawing is located
on a different local disk drive or on a network server.
1128 | XATTACH
Insertion Point
Specifies the insertion point of the selected xref.
Specify Displays prompts on the command line and makes the
On-Screen X, Y, and Z options unavailable. The descriptions of the
options displayed on the command line match the
descriptions of the corresponding options under
Insertion Point in INSERT (see page 440).
X Specifies the X coordinate value for the point at which
an xref instance is inserted into the current drawing.
The insertion point in the current drawing is aligned
with the insertion point defined in the BASE command
in the referenced file.
Y Specifies the Y coordinate value for the point at which
with the insertion point defined in the BASE system
variable in the referenced file.
Z Specifies the Z coordinate value for the point at which
with the insertion point defined in the BASE system
variable in the referenced file.
Scale
Specifies the scale factors for the selected xref.
On-Screen X, Y, and Z Scale Factor options unavailable. The
descriptions of the options displayed on the command
line match the descriptions of the corresponding
options under Insertion Point in INSERT (see page 440).
X Scale Factor Specifies the X scaling factor for the xref instance.
Y Scale Factor Specifies the Y scaling factor for the xref instance.
Z Scale Factor Specifies the Z scaling factor for the xref instance.
XATTACH | 1129
Rotation
Specifies the rotation angle for the xref instance.
On-Screen Angle option unavailable. AutoCAD prompts for a
rotation angle, as described in INSERT.
Angle Specifies the rotation angle at which an xref instance is
inserted into the current drawing.
See Also
See “Attach External References” in the User’s Guide.
Commands XREF controls xrefs (external references).
XBIND
Binds one or more definitions of named objects in an xref to the current drawing
An external reference (xref) is a drawing that you attach to or overlay on your
current drawing. In xrefs, dependent definitions are named objects such as
blocks, dimension styles, layers, linetypes, and text styles.
XBIND adds the selected dependent definitions to the current drawing and
saves them with the drawing at the end of the session. You can manipulate
them as you would any other named object. AutoCAD replaces the vertical
bar symbol (|) from each dependent definition name with three new charac-
ters: a number (usually 0) between two dollar signs ($).
If you specify a layer whose associated linetype is not CONTINUOUS,
AutoCAD also binds the referenced linetype. If you apply XBIND to a block,
all named objects that are referenced by the objects in the block are also
bound. If the block contains a reference to an xref, AutoCAD binds that xref
and all of its dependent definitions.
Note Use the Bind option of XREF binds the xref file. Use XBIND for individual
dependent definitions.
Reference toolbar:
Modify menu: Object ➤ External Reference ➤ Bind
Command line: xbind
The Xbind dialog box is displayed.
1130 | XBIND
If you enter -xbind at the Command prompt, XBIND displays prompts on the
Xbind Dialog Box

Adds xref-dependent named objects (such as blocks, dimension styles, layers,
linetypes, and text styles) to your drawing.
Xrefs Lists the xrefs currently attached to the drawing.

Selecting an xref (double-clicking) displays the named
object definitions in the attached xref.
Definitions to Lists the xref-dependent named object definitions to
Bind bind to the host drawing.
Add Moves the named object definitions selected in the
Xrefs list into the Definitions to Bind list.
Remove Moves the xref-dependent named object definition
selected in the Definitions to Bind list back to its xref-
dependent definition table.
XBIND Command Line

If you enter -xbind at the Command prompt, XBIND displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter symbol type to bind [Block/Dimstyle/LAyer/LType/Style]: Enter an option
Depending on the option, AutoCAD prompts for a xref-dependent named

object (symbol) such as a block, dimension style, layer, linetype, or text style.
Enter dependent Symbol name(s): Enter a name list or * to bind all xref-
dependent named objects (symbols) from that definition table
XBIND | 1131
The name you specify must be the full name, including the vertical bar
character ( | ).
The xref-dependent named objects you specify are added to your drawing.
You can manipulate them as you would any other named object. AutoCAD
replaces the vertical bar character ( | ) from each xref-dependent named
object with three new characters: a number (usually 0) between two dollar
signs ($).
If you specify a layer whose associated linetype is not CONTINUOUS,
AutoCAD also binds the referenced linetype. If you apply XBIND to a block,
any block, dimension style, layer, linetype, or text style that’s referenced by
objects in the block is also bound. If the block contains a reference to an xref,
AutoCAD binds that xref and all its dependent named objects.
See Also
For information about xref-dependent named objects and how they’re
named, see “Resolve Name Conflicts in External References” in the User’s
Guide.
Commands XREF controls xrefs. The Bind option of the XREF com-
mand makes the entire reference a permanent part of
the host drawing.
XCLIP
Defines an xref or block clipping boundary and sets the front or back clipping planes
XCLIP is used on external references and blocks to set both a clipping
boundary and a front or back clipping plane. A clipping boundary consists
of planar straight line segments. Clipping boundaries can also be generated
from polylines. If the polyline has arcs, the clipping boundary is created as if
it had been decurved before it was used as a clipping boundary. If the
polyline is a curve-fit polyline, the clipping boundary is created as a straight-
edged representation of the curve-fit polyline. When a clipping boundary is
defined by a splined polyline, the spline is recognized, and it is not converted
back to a straight-edged representation. XCLIP can be applied to single or
multiple external references or blocks, and it can generate or delete a clipping
boundary, generate a polyline from the clipping boundary, or suppress the
appearance of the clip on an external reference. When XCLIP is turned off for
an xref or a block, the clipping boundary is ignored and the entire xref or
block is displayed.
Reference toolbar:
1132 | XCLIP
Shortcut menu: Select an xref, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Xref Clip.
Command line: xclip
selecting objects
Enter clipping option [ON/OFF/Clipdepth/Delete/generate Polyline/
New boundary] <New>: Select an option or press ENTER
On
Displays the clipped portion of the xref or block in the host drawing.
Off
Displays all of the geometry of the xref or block in the host drawing, ignoring
the clipping boundary.
Clipdepth
Sets the front and back clipping planes on an xref or block. Objects outside
the volume defined by the boundary and the specified depth are not
displayed.
Specify front clip point or [Distance/Remove]:
Front Clip Point Creates a clipping plane passing through and

perpendicular to the clipping boundary.
Specify back clip point or [Distance/Remove]:
Distance Creates a clipping plane the specified distance from and

parallel to the clipping boundary.
Specify distance from boundary:

Remove Removes both the front and back clipping planes.
Delete
Removes a clipping boundary for the selected xref or block. To temporarily
turn off a clipping boundary, use the Off option. Delete erases the clipping
boundary and the clipdepth. The ERASE command cannot be used to delete
clipping boundaries.
XCLIP | 1133
Generate Polyline
Automatically draws a polyline coincident with the clipping boundary. The
polyline assumes the current layer, linetype, lineweight, and color settings.
Use this option when you want to modify the current clipping boundary
using PEDIT and then redefine the clipping boundary with the new polyline.
To see the entire xref while redefining the boundary, use the Off option.
New Boundary
Defines a rectangular or polygonal clipping boundary or generates a
polygonal clipping boundary from a polyline. If a boundary already exists,
AutoCAD prompts:
Delete old boundary? [Yes/No] <Yes>:
AutoCAD continues the command only if all previous boundaries are

deleted.
Specify clipping boundary(s):
[Select polyline/Polygonal/Rectangular] <Rectangular>: Specify a clipping
boundary option or press ENTER
Select Polyline Defines the boundary using the selected polyline. The
polyline can be open but must consist of straight line
segments and cannot intersect itself. The boundary
created using this method is parallel to the user
coordinate system (UCS) plane on which the polyline
lies.
Polygonal Defines a polygonal boundary by using the points you
specify for the vertices of a polygon. The clipping
boundary is applied in the current UCS regardless of the
current view.
Rectangular Defines a rectangular boundary by using the points you
specify for opposite corners. The clipping boundary is
applied in the current UCS and is independent of the
current view.
See Also
See “Clip External References and Blocks” in the User’s Guide.
Commands XREF controls external references to drawing files.
1134 | XCLIP
System Variables XCLIPFRAME turns the display of the clipping boundary
on or off.
XLINE
Creates an infinite line
XLINE creates infinite lines, which are commonly used as construction lines.
Draw toolbar:
Draw menu: Construction Line
Command line: xline
Specify a point or [Hor/Ver/Ang/Bisect/Offset]: Specify a point or enter an option
Point
Specifies the location of the infinite line using two points through which it
passes.
1
Specify through point: Specify the point (2) through which you want the xline to
2
pass, or press ENTER to end the command
AutoCAD creates the xline through the specified point.
Hor
Creates a horizontal xline passing through a specified point.
1 AutoCAD creates the xline parallel to the X axis.
Ver
Creates a vertical xline passing through a specified point.
AutoCAD creates the xline parallel to the Y axis.
XLINE | 1135
Ang
Creates an xline at a specified angle.
1 Enter angle of xline (0) or [Reference]: Specify an angle or enter r
Angle of Xline Specifies the angle at which to place the line.

Specify through point:
AutoCAD creates an xline through the specified point,

using the specified angle.
Reference Specifies the angle from a selected reference line. The
1 angle
angle is measured counterclockwise from the reference
line.
Select a line object: Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline
Enter angle of xline <0>:
Specify through point: Specify the point through which
you want the xline to pass, or press ENTER to end the
command
AutoCAD creates an xline through the specified point,

using the specified angle.
Bisect
Creates an xline that passes through the selected angle vertex and bisects the
angle between the first and second line.
3 Specify angle vertex point: Specify a point (1)
1 Specify angle start point: Specify a point (2)
Specify angle end point: Specify a point (3) or press ENTER to end the command
2
The xline lies in the plane determined by the three points.
Offset
Creates an xline parallel to another object.
Specify offset distance or [Through] <current>: Specify an offset distance, enter
t, or press ENTER
1136 | XLINE
Offset Distance Specifies the distance the xline is offset from the
selected object.
Select a line object: Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline, or
press ENTER to end the command
Specify side to offset? Specify a point and press ENTER to
exit the command
Through Creates an xline offset from a line and passing through

a specified point.
Select a line object: Select a line, polyline, ray, or xline, or
press ENTER to end the command
Specify through point: Specify the point through which
you want the xline to pass and press ENTER to exit the
command
See Also
See “Draw Construction Lines (and Rays)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands PROPERTIES modifies the properties of an xline. LINE
creates straight line segments. MLINE creates multiple
parallel lines. PLINE creates two-dimensional polylines.
RAY creates a semi-infinite line.
System Variables OFFSETDIST stores the current offset value.
XOPEN
Opens a selected external reference (xref) in a new window
XOPEN opens the selected xref for editing in a new window. The new window
is displayed after the Xref Manager is closed.
Command line: xopen
Select Xref: Select an object in the external reference
After an object is selected, the xref to which it belongs opens in a separate

window. If the xref contains nested xrefs, the deepest-level xref of the
selected object is opened.
XOPEN | 1137
XPLODE
Breaks a compound object into its component objects
A compound object comprises more than one AutoCAD object. For example,
a block is a compound object. You can explode multiple compound objects
at the same time and change the color, layer, lineweight, and linetype of each
object individually or change the entire selection set globally. You can specify
block before a color, layer, lineweight, and linetype, or these properties can be inherited
XPLODE from the object being exploded.
You can explode blocks with scale factors of equal absolute value. Equal
absolute value means the scale factors are equal if you remove any minus
signs (–). For example, you can explode blocks with X, Y, and Z scale factors
of 1, –1, and 1, including mirrored blocks.
component ob
after XPLODE Command line: xplode
Select objects to XPlode.

selecting objects
AutoCAD reports how many objects were selected and, of those, how many
objects cannot be exploded. If you select more than one valid object,
AutoCAD displays the following prompt.
Enter an option [Individually/Globally] <Globally>: Enter i, enter g, or press
ENTER
Individually
Applies changes to the selected objects one at a time. AutoCAD displays the
following prompt for each object.
Enter an option [All/Color/LAyer/LType/Inherit from parent block/Explode]
<Explode>: Enter an option or press ENTER
All Sets the color, linetype, lineweight, and layer of the

component objects after you explode them. AutoCAD
displays the prompts associated with the Color,
Linetype, Lineweight, and Layer options.
Color Sets the color of the objects after you explode them.
[Red/Yellow/Green/Cyan/Blue/Magenta/White/BYLayer/
BYBlock/Truecolor/Colorbook] <BYLAYER>: Enter an
option, enter a color number, or press ENTER
1138 | XPLODE
Entering bylayer causes the component objects to
inherit the color of the exploded object’s layer. Entering
byblock causes the component objects to inherit the
color of the exploded object.
Enter t for a true color to be used for the selected object.
Enter c for a color from a loaded color book to be used

for the selected object.

selected color book such as PANTONE® 573
Layer Sets the layer of the component objects after you

explode them. The default option is to inherit the
current layer rather than the layer of the exploded
object.
Enter new layer name for exploded objects <current>:
Enter an existing layer name or press ENTER
LType Sets the linetype of the component objects after you

explode them.
Enter new linetype name for exploded objects <BYLAYER>:
Enter a linetype name, or press ENTER
You can enter the name of any linetype that is loaded

in the drawing. Entering bylayer causes the component
objects to inherit the linetype of the exploded object’s
layer. Entering byblock causes the component objects
to inherit the linetype of the exploded object.
Inherit from Sets the color, linetype, lineweight, and layer of the
Parent Block component objects to that of the exploded object if the
component objects’ color, linetype, and lineweight are
BYBLOCK and the objects are drawn on layer 0.
XPLODE | 1139
Explode Breaks a compound object into its component objects
exactly as the EXPLODE command does.
Globally
Applies changes to all the selected objects.
Enter an option [All/Color/LAyer/LType/Inherit from parent block/Explode]
<Explode>: Enter an option or press ENTER
The descriptions of the All, Color, Layer, LType, Inherit from Parent Block,
and Explode options match the descriptions of the corresponding options
under Individually (see page 1138).
See Also
Commands EXPLODE breaks a compound object into its component
objects regardless of the X, Y, and Z scale factors. It does
not provide control over the final layer, color,
lineweight, and linetype of the component objects.
XREF
Controls external references to drawing files
An external reference (xref) is a drawing that you attach to or overlay on your
current drawing. When you open or plot a drawing containing xrefs,
AutoCAD automatically reloads the latest version of each xref.
Attaching or overlaying an xref is similar to inserting an entire drawing as a
block. The contents of the specified drawing, and any attached xrefs within
it, are copied into a new block definition. Instances of the xref in the drawing
are block references. If the xref has overlaid, not attached, xrefs within it,
they are not displayed when the xref is attached to or overlaid on another
drawing.
Because the xref is linked to but not inserted in the drawing, attaching an
xref does not significantly increase the drawing file size.
Reference toolbar:
Insert menu: Xref Manager
Shortcut menu: Select an xref, right-click in the drawing area, and choose
Xref Manager.
Command line: xref
The Xref Manager is displayed.
1140 | XREF
If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, XREF displays prompts on the
Xref Manager
Attaches, overlays, lists, binds, detaches, reloads, unloads, renames, and
modifies paths to external references (xrefs) in the current (or host) drawing.
List of External References

Displays the xrefs in the drawing in a tree view or a list view. You can use the
F3 and F4 keys to switch between list view and tree view. Selecting any field
selects the xref.
List View
Displays a flat listing of the attached xrefs and their associated data. You can
sort the list of references by name, status, type, file date, file size, or the saved
path and file name.
Reference Name Lists the names of the xrefs as stored in the definition
table for the drawing.
XREF | 1141
Status Shows whether the xref is loaded, unloaded,
unreferenced, not found, unresolved, orphaned, or
marked for unloading or reloading.
■ Loaded: Currently attached to the drawing.

■ Unloaded: Marked to be unloaded from the drawing
once the Xref Manager is closed.
■ Unreferenced: Attached to the drawing but erased.
■ Not Found: No longer exists in the valid search paths.
■ Unresolved: Cannot be read by AutoCAD.
■ Orphaned: Attached to another xref that is
unreferenced, unresolved, or not found.
Size Shows the file size of the corresponding reference

drawing. The size is not displayed if the xref is
unloaded, not found, or unresolved.
Type Indicates whether the xref is an attachment or an
overlay.
Date Displays the last date the associated drawing was
modified. This date is not displayed if the xref is
unloaded, not found, or unresolved.
Saved Path Shows the saved path of the associated xref (this is not
necessarily where the xref is found).
Tree View
Displays a hierarchical representation of the xrefs, displaying the relation-
ships between xref definitions. Tree view shows the level of nesting
relationship of the attached xrefs, whether they are attached or overlaid, and
whether they are loaded, unloaded, marked for reload or unload, or not
found, unresolved, or unreferenced.
Attach
Displays the External Reference dialog box if an external reference is selected
or displays the Select Reference File dialog box if no external reference is
selected. See XATTACH.
Detach
Detaches one or more xrefs from your drawing, erasing all instances of a
specified xref and marking the xref definition for deletion from the
definition table. Only the xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current
drawing can be detached; nested xrefs cannot be detached. AutoCAD cannot
detach an xref referenced by another xref or block.
1142 | XREF
Reload
Marks one or more xrefs for reloading. This option rereads and displays the
most recently saved version of the drawing.
Unload
Unloads one or more xrefs. Unloaded xrefs can be easily reloaded. Unlike
detaching, unloading does not remove the xref permanently. It merely
suppresses the display and regeneration of the xref definition to improve
performance.
Bind
Displays the Bind Xrefs dialog box (see page 1143). The Bind option makes
the selected xref and its dependent named objects (such as blocks, text styles,
dimension styles, layers, and linetypes) a part of the current drawing.
Open
Opens the selected xref for editing in a new window. The new window is
displayed after the Xref Manager is closed.
Xref Found At
Displays the full path of the currently selected xref. This is where the xref is
actually found and is not necessarily the same as the saved path.
Browse Displays the Select New Path dialog box (a standard file
selection dialog box), in which you can select a
different path or file name.
Save Path Saves the path, as it appears in Xref Found At, to the
currently selected xref.
Bind Xrefs Dialog Box

Converts xref definitions to standard local block definitions. If you bind an
xref into the current drawing, the xref and all its dependent named objects
become a part of the current drawing. Use XBIND to add individual xref-
dependent named objects, such as blocks, text styles, dimension styles,
layers, and linetypes, to the local definition table. The two methods of bind-
ing xrefs to the current drawing are Bind and Insert. Bind alters the definition
table names of an xref when it is inserted. Insert does not alter the definition
table names of an xref when it is inserted. To bind a nested xref, you must
also select the parent xref.
XREF | 1143
Bind Binds the selected xref definition to the current
drawing. Xref-dependent named objects are changed
from blockname|definitionname to
blockname$n$definitionname syntax. In this manner,
unique named objects are created for all xref-dependent
definition tables bound to the current drawing.
For example, if you have an xref named FLOOR1
containing a layer named WALL, after binding the xref,
the xref-dependent layer FLOOR1|WALL becomes a
locally defined layer named FLOOR1$0$WALL. The
number in $n$ is automatically incremented if a local
named object with the same name already exists. In this
example, if FLOOR1$0$WALL already existed in the
drawing, the xref-dependent layer FLOOR1|WALL would
be renamed FLOOR1$1$WALL.
Insert Binds the xref to the current drawing in a way similar
to detaching and inserting the reference drawing.
Rather than being renamed using
blockname$n$definitionname syntax, xref-dependent
named objects are stripped of the xref name. As with
inserting drawings, no name-incrementing occurs if a
local named object shares the same name as a bound
xref-dependent named object. The bound xref-
dependent named object assumes the properties of the
locally defined named object.
For example, if you have an xref named FLOOR1
containing a layer named WALL, after binding with the
Insert option, the xref-dependent layer FLOOR1|WALL
becomes the locally defined layer WALL.
1144 | XREF
XREF Command Line
If you enter -xref at the Command prompt, XREF displays prompts on the
command line.
Enter an option [?/Bind/Detach/Path/Unload/Reload/Overlay/Attach] <Attach>:
?—List Xrefs Lists the xref name, path, and type and the number of
xrefs currently attached to your drawing. AutoCAD
Enter xref name(s) to list <*>: Enter a name list or press
ENTER to list all xrefs in the drawing
Bind Converts a specified xref into a block, making it a

permanent part of the drawing.
Enter xref name(s) to bind: Enter a name or a list of names
separated by commas
The xref-dependent named objects, such as layer

names, of the former xref are added to your drawing. In
each xref-dependent named object, AutoCAD replaces
the vertical bar (|) with three new characters: a number
(usually 0) between two dollar signs ($). The number is
incremented if the same name already exists in the
current drawing.
Detach Detaches one or more xrefs from your drawing, erasing

all instances of a specified xref and marking the xref
definition for deletion from the definition table. Only
the xrefs attached or overlaid directly to the current
drawing can be detached; nested xrefs cannot be
detached.
Enter xref name(s) to detach:
AutoCAD does not detach an xref referenced by

another xref or block.
XREF | 1145
Path Displays and edits the path name associated with a
particular xref. This option is useful if you change the
location of or rename the drawing file associated with
the xref.
Edit xref name(s) to edit path:
AutoCAD lists the xref and its old path and prompts for
the new path:
xref name: “name”
Old path: path
Enter new path: Enter new path and drawing name
If you enter an invalid path, or AutoCAD cannot find

the drawing at the location you enter, you are
prompted for the new path name.
Unload Unloads the selected xrefs.
Enter xref name(s) to unload:
A marker is left in place of the xref so that it can be

reloaded later.
Reload Reloads one or more xrefs. This option reloads and
displays the most recently saved version of that
drawing.
Enter xref name(s) to reload:
If AutoCAD encounters an error while reloading, it ends

XREF and undoes the entire reloading sequence.
Overlay Displays the Enter Name of File to Overlay dialog box (a

standard file selection dialog box). Select the file you
want to attach to a drawing as an external reference
(xref) overlay. If you reference a drawing that contains
an overlaid xref, the overlaid xref does not appear in the
current drawing.
Unlike blocks and attached xrefs, overlaid xrefs cannot
be nested. If another person is currently editing the xref
file, AutoCAD overlays the most recently saved version.
1146 | XREF
If the xref you specify is not already overlaid, AutoCAD
creates a new xref, using the name of the referenced file.
AutoCAD then prompts you for an insertion point,
scale, and rotation angle, as described for the INSERT
command.
If FILEDIA is set to 0, AutoCAD presents the following
prompt:
Enter name of file to overlay:
For example, to attach a file named !.dwg to the current

drawing, enter the following (where myxref substitutes
a drawing file name):
Enter name of file to attach: Enter myxref=!
Attach Displays the External Reference dialog box, if an xref is

selected, or the Select Reference File dialog box, if no
xref is selected. See XATTACH.
If you reference a drawing that contains an attached
xref, the attached xref appears in the current drawing.
Like blocks, attached xrefs can be nested. If another
person is currently editing the xref file, AutoCAD
attaches the most recently saved version.
If the xref you specify is not already attached or
overlaid, AutoCAD creates a new xref, using the name
of the referenced file. AutoCAD then prompts you for
an insertion point, scale, and rotation angle, as
described for the INSERT command.
When reading objects from the xref into the new block,
AutoCAD copies only those objects created in model
space and ignores objects created in paper space. Thus,
viewports and other objects in paper space do not
become a part of the block definition.
XREF | 1147
In a master drawing, the 0 and DEFPOINTS layers and
the CONTINUOUS linetype override entries with the
same name that exist in the attaching or overlaying
xref. Any objects on these layers remain unaffected. If
the DEFPOINTS layer exists in the attaching or
overlaying xref but not in the master drawing, the
DEFPOINTS layer becomes a permanent part of the
master drawing.
If FILEDIA is set to 0, AutoCAD displays the following
prompt:
Enter name of file to attach:
You can enter a tilde (~) to display a dialog box.
See Also
See “Attach, Update, and Bind External References” in the User’s Guide.
Commands BLOCK creates a compound object (a block definition)
from a group of objects. PROPERTIES modifies the prop-
erties of an xref instance. INSERT places a previously
defined block or drawing into the current drawing.
LAYER controls the creation and visibility of layers along
with layer settings. XBIND binds xref-dependent named
objects to a drawing. XCLIP defines an xref clipping
boundary and sets the front or back clipping planes.
System Variables FILEDIA controls the display of dialog boxes used to read
and write files. XREFCTL controls the creation of the xref
log file. INDEXCTL controls whether layer or spatial
indexes are saved with the drawing. XLOADCTL controls
whether demand loading is enabled. XLOADPATH
controls the location of temporary xref drawing files
used for demand loading. PROJECTNAME controls the
search paths used to find xrefs. VISRETAIN controls
whether changes to xref-dependent layers and line-
types and nested xref paths are saved with the current
drawing.
1148 | XREF
ZOOM
Increases or decreases the apparent size of objects in the current viewport
You cannot use ZOOM transparently during VPOINT or DVIEW or while ZOOM,
PAN, or VIEW is in progress.
Standard toolbar:
View menu: Zoom
Shortcut menu: With no objects selected, right-click in the drawing area and
choose Zoom to zoom in real time.
Command line: zoom (or 'zoom for transparent use)
Specify corner of window, enter a scale factor (nX or nXP), or

[All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Previous/Scale/Window] <real time>:
All Zooms to display the entire drawing in the current

viewport. In a plan view, AutoCAD® zooms to the
drawing limits or current extents, whichever is greater.
In a 3D view, ZOOM All is equivalent to ZOOM Extents.
The display shows all objects even if the drawing
extends outside the drawing limits.
before ZOOM All after ZOOM All
In the illustration, LIMITS is greater than the extents of

the drawing.
Because it always regenerates the drawing, you cannot
use ZOOM All transparently.
Center Zooms to display a window defined by a center point
and a magnification value or height. A smaller value for
the height increases the magnification. A larger value
decreases the magnification.
Specify center point: Specify a point (1)
Enter magnification or height <current>: Enter a value or
press ENTER
ZOOM | 1149
1
before ZOOM Center after ZOOM Center,

magnification increased
Dynamic Zooms to display the generated portion of the drawing

with a view box. The view box represents your
viewport, which you can shrink or enlarge and move
around the drawing. Positioning and sizing the view
box pans or zooms to fill the viewport with the image
inside the view box.
view box new view
The panning view box is displayed first. Drag it to the

location you want and click. The zooming view box is
then displayed. Resize it and press ENTER to zoom, or
click to return to the panning view box.
Press ENTER to fill the current viewport with the area
currently enclosed by the view box.
Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents and results in the
largest possible display of all the objects.
before ZOOM Extents after ZOOM Extents
1150 | ZOOM
Previous Zooms to display the previous view. You can restore up
to 10 previous views.
original view current view after ZOOM Previous
Note If you change the shading with the SHADEMODE

command, the view is changed. If you enter ZOOM
Previous after changing the shading, it restores the
previous view, which is shaded differently, but not zoomed
differently.
Scale Zooms the display at a specified scale factor.
Enter a scale factor (nX or nXP): Specify a value
Enter a value followed by x to specify the scale relative

to the current view. For example, entering .5x causes
each object to be displayed at half its current size on the
screen.
ZOOM .5x
Enter a value followed by xp to specify the scale relative

to paper space units. For example, entering .5xp
displays model space at half the scale of paper space
units. You can create a layout with each viewport
displaying objects at a different scale.
Enter a value to specify the scale relative to the limits of
the drawing. (This option is rarely used.) For example,
entering 2 displays objects at twice the size they would
appear if you were zoomed to the limits of the drawing.
ZOOM | 1151
ZOOM 2
Window Zooms to display an area specified by two opposite

corners of a rectangular window.
Specify first corner: Specify a point (1)
Specify opposite corner: Specify a point (2)
before ZOOM Window after ZOOM Window
Real Time Using the pointing device, zooms interactively to a

logical extent.
ZOOM Realtime cursor
Press ESC or ENTER to exit, or right-click to display the
shortcut menu
The cursor changes to a magnifying glass with plus (+)

and minus (–) signs. See “Zoom Shortcut Menu” on
page 1153 for a description of the options that are
available while zooming in real time.
The current drawing area is used to determine the
zooming factor. ZOOM uses half of the window height
to move to a zoom factor of 100%. Holding down the
pick button at the midpoint of the window and moving
vertically to the top of the window zooms in to 100%.
Conversely, holding the pick button down at the
1152 | ZOOM
midpoint of the window and moving vertically to the
bottom of the window zooms out by 100%.
Note If you place the cursor at the bottom of the window,
hold down the pick button, and move vertically to the top
of the window, the zoom-in factor is 200%.
When you have reached the zoom-in limit, the plus
sign in the cursor disappears, indicating that you can
no longer zoom in. When you have reached the zoom-
out limit, the minus sign in the cursor disappears,
indicating that you can no longer zoom out.
When you release the pick button, zooming stops. You
can release the pick button, move the cursor to another
location in the drawing, and then press the pick button
again and continue to zoom the display from that
location.
To exit zooming at the new position, press ENTER or
ESC .
Zoom Shortcut Menu

When the ZOOM command is active, you can exit ZOOM or switch to PAN or
3DORBIT using the options on the Zoom shortcut menu. To access the Zoom
shortcut menu, right-click in the drawing area while ZOOM is active.
Exit Cancels ZOOM or PAN.
Pan Switches to PAN.
Zoom Switches to ZOOM in real time.
3D Orbit Switches to 3DORBIT.
Zoom Window Zooms to display an area specified by a rectangular
window.
Zoom Original Restores the original view.
Zoom Extents Zooms to display the drawing extents.
ZOOM | 1153
See Also
See “Magnify a View (Zoom)” in the User’s Guide.
Commands DVIEW creates and restores perspective and parallel
projection views. LIMITS sets and controls the drawing
boundaries. PAN moves the drawing display in the
current viewport. VIEW saves and restores named views.
VIEWRES sets the resolution for circle, arc, and linetype
generation in the current viewport. VPOINT sets the
viewing direction for a 3D visualization of the current
drawing.
1154 | ZOOM
Command Aliases
Command aliases are shortcuts or alternative names for In this appendix

commands that you enter at the keyboard. This table ■ Command aliases
lists the command aliases provided in the standard
acad.pgp file. You can change or delete these aliases, or
you can add some of your own by editing the acad.pgp
file.
The acad.pgp file also defines aliases for external com-
mands for Windows® and DOS, which are not listed
here.
1155
Command aliases Command aliases (continued)
Command Alias Command Alias
3DARRAY 3a CHANGE -ch
3DFACE 3f CIRCLE c
3DORBIT 3do COLOR col, colour, ddcolor
3DPOLY 3p COPY co, cp
ADCENTER adc DBCONNECT aad, aex, ali, asq, aro,

ase, dbc
ALIGN al
DDEDIT ed
APPLOAD ap
DDVPOINT vp
ARC a
DIMALIGNED dal, dimali
AREA aa
DIMANGULAR dan, dimang
ARRAY ar
DIMBASELINE dba, dimbase
-ARRAY -ar
DIMCENTER dce
ATTDEF att, ddattdef
DIMCONTINUE dco, dimcont
-ATTDEF -att
DIMDIAMETER ddi, dimdia
ATTEDIT ate
DIMEDIT ded, dimed
-ATTEDIT -ate, atte
DIMDISASSOCIATE dda
ATTEXT ddattext
DIMLINEAR dli, dimlin
BHATCH h, bh
DIMORDINATE dor, dimord
BLOCK b
DIMOVERRIDE dov, dimover
-BLOCK -b
DIMRADIUS dra, dimrad
BOUNDARY bo
DIMSTYLE d, ddim, dst, dimsty
-BOUNDARY -bo
DIMREASSOCIATE dre
BREAK br
DIMTEDIT dimted
CHAMFER cha
DIST di
1156 | Appendix A Command Aliases

Command aliases (continued) Command aliases (continued)
DIVIDE div IMAGECLIP icl
DONUT do IMPORT imp
DRAWORDER dr INSERT ddinsert, i
DSETTINGS ds, ddrmodes, rm, se -INSERT -i
DSVIEWER av INTERFERE inf
DVIEW dv INTERSECT in
ELLIPSE el INSERTOBJ io
ERASE e LAYER ddlmodes, la
EXPLODE x -LAYER -la
EXPORT exp -LAYOUT lo
EXTEND ex LEADER lead
EXTRUDE ext LENGTHEN len
FILLET f LINE l
FILTER fi LINETYPE lt, ltype, ddltype
GROUP g -LINETYPE -lt, -ltype
-GROUP -g LIST li, ls
HATCH -h LTSCALE lts
HATCHEDIT he LWEIGHT lw, lineweight
HIDE hi MATCHPROP ma
IMAGE im MEASURE me
-IMAGE -im MIRROR mi
IMAGEADJUST iad MLINE ml
IMAGEATTACH iat MOVE m
Command Aliases | 1157

MSPACE ms QLEADER le
MTEXT t, mt QUIT exit
-MTEXT -t RECTANG rec
MVIEW mv REDRAW r
OFFSET o REDRAWALL ra
OPTIONS ddgrips, gr, op, pr REGEN re
OSNAP ddosnap, os REGENALL rea
-OSNAP -os REGION reg
PAN p RENAME ren
-PAN -p -RENAME -ren
PASTESPEC pa RENDER rr
PEDIT pe REVOLVE rev
PLINE pl RPREF rpr
PLOT print ROTATE ro
POINT po SCALE sc
POLYGON pol SCRIPT scr
PREVIEW pre SECTION sec
PROPERTIES ch, ddchprop, SETVAR set

ddmodify, mo, props
SLICE sl
PROPERTIESCLOSE prclose
SNAP sn
PSPACE ps
SOLID so
PUBLISHTOWEB ptw
SPELL sp
PURGE pu
SPLINE spl
-PURGE -pu
1158 | Appendix A Command Aliases

SPLINEDIT spe XCLIP xc
STRETCH s XLINE xl
STYLE st XREF xr
SUBTRACT su -XREF -xr
TABLET ta ZOOM z
THICKNESS th
TILEMODE ti, tm
TOLERANCE tol
TOOLBAR to
TORUS tor
TRIM tr
UNION uni
UNITS un, ddunits
-UNITS -un
VIEW ddview, v
-VIEW -v
VPOINT -vp
WBLOCK w
-WBLOCK -w
WEDGE we
XATTACH xa
XBIND xb
-XBIND -xb
Command Aliases | 1159

1160
System Variables
AutoCAD® stores the values for its operating environ- In this appendix
ment and some of its commands in system variables. ■ Descriptions of the AutoCAD
system variables, including data
Each system variable has an associated type: integer, types, initial values, and
whether the values are stored
real, point, switch, or text string. You can examine any in the drawing or the system
registry
system variable and change any writable system variable
directly on the command line by entering the system
variable name, or by using the SETVAR command or the
AutoLISP® getvar and setvar functions. Many system
variables are also accessible through dialog box options.
1161
System Variables
Variable Characteristic Description

ACADLSPASDOC Type: Integer Controls whether AutoCAD loads the acad.lsp file into
Saved in: Registry every drawing or just the first drawing opened in an
Initial value: 0 AutoCAD session.
0 Loads acad.lsp into just the first drawing opened in

an AutoCAD session
1 Loads acad.lsp into every drawing opened
ACADPREFIX (Read-only) Stores the directory path, if any, specified by the ACAD
Type: String environment variable, with path separators appended if
Not saved necessary.
ACADVER (Read-only) Stores the AutoCAD version number. This variable differs
Type: String from the DXF file $ACADVER header variable, which
Not saved contains the drawing database level number.
ACISOUTVER Type: Integer Controls the ACIS version of SAT files created using the
Not saved ACISOUT command. ACISOUT only supports a value of
Initial value: 70 15 through 18, 20, 21, 30, 40, 50, 60, and 70.
ADCSTATE (Read-only) Determines whether DesignCenter is active or not. For

Type: Integer developers who need to determine status through
Not saved AutoLISP.
Initial value: varies
0 DesignCenter is not active
1 DesignCenter is active
AFLAGS Type: Integer Sets attribute flags for ATTDEF bitcode. The value is the
Not saved sum of the following:
Initial value: 0
0 No attribute mode selected
1 Invisible
2 Constant
4 Verify
8 Preset
ANGBASE Type: Real Sets the base angle to 0 with respect to the current UCS.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000
ANGDIR Type: Integer Sets the direction of positive angles. Angle values are
Saved in: Drawing measured from angle 0 relative to the orientation of the
Initial value: 0 current UCS.
0 Counterclockwise
1 Clockwise
1162 | Appendix B System Variables

APBOX Type: Integer Turns the AutoSnap™ aperture box on or off. The aper-
Saved in: Registry ture box is displayed in the center of the crosshairs when
Initial value: 0 you snap to an object.
0 Aperture box is not displayed

1 Aperture box is displayed
APERTURE Type: Integer Sets the display size for the aperture, in pixels. The aper-
Saved in: Registry ture is the selection tool used in drawing commands.
Initial value: 10
AREA (Read-only) AREA is both a command and a system variable. The

Type: Real AREA system variable stores the last area computed by
Not saved the AREA command. Because entering area at the
Command prompt invokes the AREA command, you
must use the SETVAR command to access the AREA
system variable.
ATTDIA Type: Integer Controls whether the INSERT command uses a dialog box
Saved in: Registry for attribute value entry. See “INSERT Command Line” on
Initial value: 0 page 442.
0 Issues prompts on the command line

1 Uses a dialog box
ATTMODE Type: Integer Controls display of attributes.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1 0 Off: Makes all attributes invisible
1 Normal: Retains current visibility of each attribute:
visible attributes are displayed; invisible attributes
are not
2 On: Makes all attributes visible
ATTREQ Type: Integer Determines whether the INSERT command uses default
Saved in: Registry attribute settings during insertion of blocks.
Initial value: 1
0 Assumes the defaults for the values of all attributes
1 Turns on prompts or dialog box for attribute values,
as specified by ATTDIA
AUDITCTL Type: Integer Controls whether the AUDIT command creates an audit
Saved in: Registry report (ADT) file.
Initial value: 0
0 Prevents writing of ADT files
1 Writes ADT files
AUNITS Type: Integer Sets units for angles.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Decimal degrees
1 Degrees/minutes/seconds
2 Gradians
3 Radians
4 Surveyor’s units
APBOX | 1163
AUPREC Type: Integer Sets the number of decimal places for all read-only angular
Saved in: Drawing units displayed on the status line, and for all editable angu-
Initial value: 0 lar units whose precision is less than or equal to the current
AUPREC value. For editable angular units whose precision
is greater than the current AUPREC value, the true preci-
sion is displayed. AUPREC does not affect the display preci-
sion of dimension text (see DIMSTYLE).
AUTOSNAP Type: Integer Controls AutoSnap marker, tooltip, and magnet. Also turns
Saved in: Registry on polar and object snap tracking, and controls the display
Initial value: 63 of polar and object snap tracking tooltips. The system vari-
able value is the sum of the following bit values:
0 Turns off the AutoSnap marker, tooltips, and magnet.

Also turns off polar tracking, object snap tracking, and
tooltips for polar and object snap tracking
1 Turns on the AutoSnap marker
2 Turns on the AutoSnap tooltips
4 Turns on the AutoSnap magnet
8 Turns on polar tracking
16 Turns on object snap tracking
32 Turns on tooltips for polar tracking and object snap
tracking
BACKZ Type: Real Stores the back clipping plane offset from the target
Saved in: Drawing plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. Mean-
ingful only if the back clipping bit in VIEWMODE is on.
The distance of the back clipping plane from the camera
point can be found by subtracting BACKZ from the
camera-to-target distance.
BINDTYPE Type: Integer Controls how xref names are handled when binding xrefs
Not Saved or editing xrefs in place.
Initial value: 0
0 Traditional binding behavior ("xref1|one" becomes
"xref$0$one")
1 Insert-like behavior ("xref1|one" becomes "one")
BLIPMODE Type: Integer Controls whether marker blips are visible. BLIPMODE is
Saved in: Registry both a command and a system variable. Use the SETVAR
Initial value: 0 command to access this variable.
0 Turns off marker blips

1 Turns on marker blips
CDATE (Read-only) Sets calendar date and time.

Type: Real
Not saved

CECOLOR Type: String Sets the color of new objects. Valid values include
Saved in: Drawing BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and an integer from 1 to 255.
Initial value: "BYLAYER" Valid values for True Colors are a string of integers each
from 1 to 255 separated by commas and preceded by
RGB. The True Color setting is entered as follows:
RGB:000,000,000.
CELTSCALE Type: Real Sets the current object linetype scaling factor. Sets the
Saved in: Drawing linetype scaling for new objects relative to the LTSCALE
Initial value: 1.0000 command setting. A line created with CELTSCALE = 2 in
a drawing with LTSCALE set to 0.5 would appear the
same as a line created with CELTSCALE = 1 in a drawing
with LTSCALE = 1.
CELTYPE Type: String Sets the linetype of new objects.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: "BYLAYER"
CELWEIGHT Type: Integer Sets the lineweight of new objects.

Saved In: Drawing
Initial value: -1 -1 Sets the lineweight to "BYLAYER."
-2 Sets the lineweight to "BYBLOCK."
-3 Sets the lineweight to "DEFAULT." "DEFAULT" is con-
trolled by the LWDEFAULT system variable.
Other valid values entered in hundredths of millimeters

include 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60,
70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120, 140, 158, 200, and 211.
All values must be entered in hundredths of millimeters.

(Multiply a value by 2540 to convert values from inches to
hundredths of millimeters.)
CHAMFERA Type: Real Sets the first chamfer distance.

Saved in: Drawing
CHAMFERB Type: Real Sets the second chamfer distance.

Saved in: Drawing
CHAMFERC Type: Real Sets the chamfer length.

Saved in: Drawing
CHAMFERD Type: Real Sets the chamfer angle.

Saved in: Drawing
CECOLOR | 1165
CHAMMODE Type: Integer Sets the input method by which AutoCAD creates
Not saved chamfers.
Initial value: 0
0 Requires two chamfer distances
1 Requires one chamfer distance and an angle
CIRCLERAD Type: Real Sets the default circle radius. A zero indicates no default.
Not saved
CLAYER Type: String Sets the current layer.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: "0"
CMDACTIVE (Read-only) Stores the bitcode that indicates whether an ordinary

Type: Integer command, transparent command, script, or dialog box
Not saved is active. The value is the sum of the following:
1 Ordinary command is active

2 Ordinary command and a transparent command are
active
4 Script is active
8 Dialog box is active
16 DDE is active
32 AutoLISP is active (only visible to an ObjectARX-
defined command)
64 ObjectARX command is active
CMDECHO Type: Integer Controls whether AutoCAD echoes prompts and input
Not saved during the AutoLISP command function.
Initial value: 1
0 Turns off echoing
1 Turns on echoing
CMDNAMES (Read-only) Displays the names of the active and transparent com-
Type: String mands. For example, LINE'ZOOM indicates that the
Not saved ZOOM command is being used transparently during the
LINE command.
This variable is designed for use with programming

interfaces such as AutoLISP, DIESEL, and
ActiveX® Automation.
The following is a simple example that demonstrates

how to use DIESEL to display the current command at
the status line.
Command: modemacro
New value for MODEMACRO, or . for none <"">:
$(getvar, cmdnames)
For additional information on AutoCAD programming

interfaces, see “Introduction to Programming Interfaces”
in the Customization Guide.

CMLJUST Type: Integer Specifies multiline justification.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Top
1 Middle
2 Bottom
CMLSCALE Type: Real Controls the overall width of a multiline. A scale factor of
Saved in: Drawing 2.0 produces a multiline twice as wide as the style defini-
Initial value: tion. A zero scale factor collapses the multiline into a single
1.0000 (imperial) or line. A negative scale factor flips the order of the offset lines
20.0000 (metric) (that is, the smallest or most negative is placed on top
when the multiline is drawn from left to right).
CMLSTYLE Type: String Sets the multiline style that AutoCAD uses to draw the
Saved in: Drawing multiline.
Initial value: "STANDARD"
COMPASS Type: Integer Controls whether the 3D compass is on or off in the

Not saved current viewport.
Initial value: 0
0 Turns off the 3D compass
1 Turns on the 3D compass
COORDS Type: Integer Controls when coordinates are updated on the status
Saved in: Registry line.
Initial value: 1
0 Coordinate display is updated as you specify points
with the pointing device
1 Display of absolute coordinates is updated
continuously
2 Display of absolute coordinates is updated continu-
ously, and distance and angle from last point are
displayed when a distance or angle is requested
CPLOTSTYLE Type: String Controls the current plot style for new objects. If the
Saved in: Drawing current drawing you are working in is in color-dependent
mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1), CPLOTSTYLE is read-
only and has a value of “BYCOLOR.” If the current
drawing you are working in is in named plot styles mode
(PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0), CPLOTSTYLE can be set to the
following values (“BYLAYER” is the default)
"BYLAYER"
"BYBLOCK"
"NORMAL"
"USER DEFINED"
To convert the current drawing to use named or color-

dependent plot styles, use CONVERTPSTYLES.
CMLJUST | 1167
CPROFILE (Read-only) Displays the name of the current profile. For more infor-
Type: String mation on profiles, see the OPTIONS command.
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: <<Unnamed
Profile>>
CTAB (Read-only) Returns the name of the current (model or layout) tab in
Type: String the drawing. Provides a means for the user to determine
Saved in: Drawing which tab is active.
CURSORSIZE Type: Integer Determines the size of the crosshairs as a percentage of

Saved in: Registry the screen size. Valid settings range from 1 to 100
Initial value: 5 percent. When set to 100, the crosshairs are full-screen
and the ends of the crosshairs are never visible. When
less than 100, the ends of the crosshairs may be visible
when the cursor is moved to one edge of the screen.
CVPORT Type: Integer Sets the identification number of the current viewport.
Saved in: Drawing You can change this value, which changes the current
Initial value: 2 viewport, if the following conditions are met:
■ The identification number you specify is that of an

active viewport.
■ A command in progress has not locked cursor
movement to that viewport.
■ Tablet mode is off.

DATE (Read-only) Stores the current date and time. This value is
Type: Real represented as a Modified Julian Date (MJD), which is the
Not saved Julian day number and decimal fraction of a day in the
format :
<Julian day number>.<Decimal fraction of a day>
The Modified Julian Date, conventionally called UT1, is a

worldwide scientific standard that assigns day numbers
beginning at an essentially arbitrary date and time of
12:00 a.m. on 1 January 4713 B.C. (B.C.E.). With this
system, 4 July 1997 at 2:29:58 p.m. corresponds to
2450634.60387736, and 1 January 1998 at 12:00 noon
corresponds to 2450815.50000000.
You can compute differences in date and time by

subtracting the numbers returned by DATE. To extract
the seconds since midnight from the value returned by
DATE, use AutoLISP expressions:
(setq s (getvar "DATE"))

(setq seconds (* 86400.0 (- s (fix s))))
Because your computer clock provides the date and time,

the DATE system variable returns a true Julian date only if
the system clock is set to UTC/Zulu (Greenwich Mean
Time). TDCREATE and TDUPDATE have the same format
as DATE, but their values represent the creation time and
last update time of the current drawing.
DBCSTATE (Read-only) Stores the state of the dbConnect Manager, active or not
Type: Integer active.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 The dbConnect Manager is not displayed.
1 The dbConnect Manager is displayed.
DBMOD (Read-only) Indicates the drawing modification status using bitcode.

Type: Integer The value is the sum of the following:
Not saved
1 Object database modified
4 Database variable modified
8 Window modified
16 View modified
AutoCAD resets the DBMOD value to 0 when you save

the drawing.
DATE | 1169
DCTCUST Type: String Displays the path and file name of the current custom
Saved in: Registry spelling dictionary.
Initial value: ""
DCTMAIN Type: String Displays the file name of the current main spelling dictio-
Saved in: Registry nary. The full path is not shown because this file is
Initial value: varies by expected to reside in the support directory.
country
You can specify a default main spelling dictionary using
the SETVAR command. When prompted for a new value
for DCTMAIN, you can enter one of the keywords below.
Depending on the language version of AutoCAD, not all
dictionaries may be available.
Keyword Language name

enu American English
ena Australian English
ens British English (ise)
enz British English (ize)
ca Catalan
cs Czech
da Danish
nl Dutch (primary)
nls Dutch (secondary)
fi Finnish
fr French (unaccented capitals)
fra French (accented capitals)
de German (Scharfes s)
ded German (Dopple s)
it Italian
no Norwegian (Bokmal)
non Norwegian (Nynorsk)
pt Portuguese (Iberian)
ptb Portuguese (Brazilian)
ru Russian (infrequent io)
rui Russian (frequent io)
es Spanish (unaccented capitals)
esa Spanish (accented capitals)
sv Swedish
DEFLPLSTYLE Type: String Specifies the default plot style for layer 0. If the current
Saved in: Registry drawing you are working in is in color-dependent mode
(PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1), DEFLPLSTYLE is read-only and
has a value of “BYCOLOR.” If the current drawing you are
working in is in named plot styles mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is
set to 0), DEFLPLSTYLE is writable and has a default value
of “NORMAL.”


DEFPLSTYLE Type: String Specifies the default plot style for new objects. If the
Saved in: Registry current drawing you are working in is in color-dependent
mode (PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 1), DEFPLSTYLE is read-
only and has a value of “BYCOLOR.” If the current
drawing you are working in is in named plot styles mode
(PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0), DEFPLSTYLE is writable and
has a default value of “BYLAYER.”

DELOBJ Type: Integer Controls whether objects used to create other objects are
Saved in: Registry retained or deleted from the drawing database.
Initial value: 1
0 Objects are retained
1 Objects are deleted
DEMANDLOAD Type: Integer Specifies if and when AutoCAD demand-loads a third-

Saved in: Registry party application if a drawing contains custom objects
Initial Value: 3 created in that application.
0 Turns off demand-loading.

1 Demand-loads the source application when you
open a drawing that contains custom objects. This
setting does not demand-load the application when
you invoke one of the application’s commands.
invoke one of the application’s commands. This set-
ting does not demand-load the application when
you open a drawing that contains custom objects.
open a drawing that contains custom objects or
when you invoke one of the application’s com-
mands.
DIASTAT (Read-only) Stores the exit method of the most recently used dialog
Type: Integer box.
Not saved
0 Cancel
1 OK
DIMADEC Type: Integer Controls the number of precision places displayed in

Saved in: Drawing angular dimensions.
Initial value: 0
-1 Angular dimension is drawn using the number of
decimal places corresponding to the DIMDEC
setting.
0-8 Angular dimension is drawn using the number of
decimal places corresponding to the DIMADEC
setting.
DEFPLSTYLE | 1171
DIMALT Type: Switch Controls the display of alternate units in dimensions.
Saved in: Drawing See also DIMALTD, DIMALTF, DIMALTTD, DIMALTTZ,
Initial value: Off DIMALTZ, and DIMAPOST.
Off Disables alternate units

On Enables alternate units
DIMALTD Type: Integer Controls the number of decimal places in alternate units.
Saved in: Drawing If DIMALT is turned on, DIMALTD sets the number of
Initial value: 2 digits displayed to the right of the decimal point in the
alternate measurement.
DIMALTF Type: Real Controls the multiplier for alternate units. If DIMALT is
Saved in: Drawing turned on, DIMALTF multiplies linear dimensions by a
Initial value: 25.4000 factor to produce a value in an alternate system of
measurement. The initial value represents the number of
millimeters in an inch.
DIMALTRND Type: Real Rounds off the alternate dimension units.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.00
DIMALTTD Type: Integer Sets the number of decimal places for the tolerance
Saved in: Drawing values in the alternate units of a dimension.
Initial value: 2
DIMALTTZ Type: Integer Toggles suppression of zeros in tolerance values.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches
1 Includes zero feet and precisely zero inches
2 Includes zero feet and suppresses zero inches
3 Includes zero inches and suppresses zero feet
To suppress leading or trailing zeros, add the following

values to one of the preceding values:
4 Suppresses leading zeros

8 Suppresses trailing zeros

DIMALTU Type: Integer Sets the units format for alternate units of all dimension
Saved in: Drawing style family members except Angular.
Initial value: 2
1 Scientific
2 Decimal
3 Engineering
4 Architectural (stacked)
5 Fractional (stacked)
6 Architectural
7 Fractional
8 Windows® Desktop (decimal format using Control
Panel settings for decimal separator and number
grouping symbols)
DIMALTZ Type: Integer Controls the suppression of zeros for alternate unit di-
Saved in: Drawing mension values. DIMALTZ values 0–3 affect feet-and-inch
Initial value: 0 dimensions only.
0 Suppresses zero feet and precisely zero inches

4 Suppresses leading zeros in decimal dimensions (for
example, 0.5000 becomes .5000)
8 Suppresses trailing zeros in decimal dimensions (for
example, 12.5000 becomes 12.5)
12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for ex-
ample, 0.5000 becomes .5)
DIMAPOST Type: String Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the alternate
Saved in: Drawing dimension measurement for all types of dimensions
Initial value: "" except angular.
For instance, if the current units are Architectural, DIMALT

is on, DIMALTF is 25.4 (the number of millimeters per
inch), DIMALTD is 2, and DIMAPOST is set to "mm," a dis-
tance of 10 units would be displayed as 10"[254.00mm].
To turn off an established prefix or suffix (or both), set it

to a single period (.).
DIMASO Type: Switch Controls the associativity of dimension objects.

Saved in: Drawing Obsolete. See DIMASSOC.
Initial value: On
DIMALTU | 1173
DIMASSOC Type: Integer Controls the associativity of dimension objects.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2 0 Creates exploded dimensions. There is no association
between the various elements of the dimension. The
lines, arcs, arrowheads, and text of a dimension are
drawn as separate objects.
1 Creates non-associative dimension objects. The
elements of the dimension are formed into a single
object. If the definition point on the object moves,
the dimension value is updated.
2 Creates associative dimension objects. The elements
of the dimension are formed into a single object, and
one or more definition points of the dimension are
coupled with association points on geometric
objects. If the association point on the geometric
object moves, the dimension location, orientation,
and value is updated.
DIMASSOC is not stored in a dimension style.
Drawings saved in a format previous to AutoCAD 2002

retain the setting of the DIMASSOC system variable.
When the drawing is reopened in AutoCAD 2002 or later,
the dimension associativity setting is restored. If a legacy
drawing is opened in AutoCAD 2002, the DIMASSOC
system variable takes on the value of the legacy drawing’s
DIMASO system variable.
DIMASZ Type: Real Controls the size of dimension line and leader line arrow-
Saved in: Drawing heads. Also controls the size of hook lines.
Multiples of the arrowhead size determine whether di-
mension lines and text should fit between the extension
lines. DIMASZ is also used to scale arrowhead blocks if
set by DIMBLK. DIMASZ has no effect when DIMTSZ is
other than zero.
DIMATFIT Type: Integer Determines how dimension text and arrows are arranged
Saved in: Drawing when space is not sufficient to place both within the
Initial value: 3 extension lines.
0 Places both text and arrows outside extension lines

1 Moves arrows first, then text
2 Moves text first, then arrows
3 Moves either text or arrows, whichever fits best
A leader is added to moved dimension text when

DIMTMOVE is set to 1.

DIMAUNIT Type: Integer Sets the units format for angular dimensions.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Decimal degrees
1 Degrees/minutes/seconds
2 Gradians
3 Radians
DIMAUNIT sets this value when entered on the com-

mand line or when set from the Primary Units area in the
Annotation dialog box.
DIMAZIN Type: Integer Suppresses zeros for angular dimensions.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Displays all leading and trailing zeros
3 Suppresses leading and trailing zeros (for example,
0.5000 becomes .5)
DIMBLK Type: String Sets the arrowhead block displayed at the ends of
Saved in: Drawing dimension lines or leader lines. To return to the default,
Initial value: "" closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.).
Arrowhead block entries and the names used to select
them in the New, Modify and Override Dimension Style
dialog boxes are shown below. You can also enter the
names of user-defined arrowhead blocks.
"" closed filled

"_DOT" dot
"_DOTSMALL" dot small
"_DOTBLANK" dot blank
"_ORIGIN" origin indicator
"_ORIGIN2" origin indicator 2
"_OPEN" open
"_OPEN90" right angle
"_OPEN30" open 30
"_CLOSED" closed
"_SMALL" dot small blank
"_NONE" none
"_OBLIQUE" oblique
"_BOXFILLED" box filled
"_BOXBLANK" box
"_CLOSEDBLANK" closed blank
"_DATUMFILLED" datum triangle filled
"_DATUMBLANK" datum triangle
"_INTEGRAL" integral
"_ARCHTICK" architectural tick
DIMAUNIT | 1175
DIMBLK1 Type: String Sets the arrowhead for the first end of the dimension line
Saved in: Drawing when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-filled
Initial value: "" arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list of
arrowheads, see DIMBLK.
DIMBLK2 Type: String Sets the arrowhead for the second end of the dimension
Saved in: Drawing line when DIMSAH is on. To return to the default, closed-
Initial value: "" filled arrowhead display, enter a single period (.). For a list
of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK.
DIMCEN Type: Real Controls drawing of circle or arc center marks and
Saved in: Drawing centerlines by the DIMCENTER, DIMDIAMETER, and
Initial value: 0.0900 DIMRADIUS commands. For DIMDIAMETER and
DIMRADIUS, the center mark is drawn only if you place
the dimension line outside the circle or arc.
0 No center marks or lines are drawn

<0 Centerlines are drawn
>0 Center marks are drawn
The absolute value specifies the size of the center mark.
DIMCLRD Type: Integer Assigns colors to dimension lines, arrowheads, and

Saved in: Drawing dimension leader lines. Also controls the color of leader
Initial value: 0 lines created with the LEADER command. The color can
be any valid color number. Integer equivalents for the
BYBLOCK and BYLAYER properties are 0 and 256,
respectively.
DIMCLRE Type: Integer Assigns colors to dimension extension lines. The color can
Saved in: Drawing be any valid color number. See DIMCLRD.
Initial value: 0
DIMCLRT Type: Integer Assigns colors to dimension text. The color can be any
Saved in: Drawing valid color number. See DIMCLRD.
Initial value: 0
DIMDEC Type: Integer Sets the number of decimal places displayed for the
Saved in: Drawing primary units of a dimension. The precision is based on
Initial value: 4 the units or angle format you have selected.
DIMDLE Type: Real Sets the distance the dimension line extends beyond the
Saved in: Drawing extension line when oblique strokes are drawn instead of
Initial value: 0.0000 arrowheads.
DIMDLI Type: Real Controls the spacing of the dimension lines in baseline
Saved in: Drawing dimensions. Each dimension line is offset from the previ-
Initial value: 0.3800 ous one by this amount, if necessary, to avoid drawing
over it. Changes made with DIMDLI are not applied to
existing dimensions.

DIMDSEP Type: Single character Specifies a single-character decimal separator to use when
Saved in: Drawing creating dimensions whose unit format is decimal.
Initial value: Decimal
point When prompted, enter a single character at the com-
mand line. If dimension units is set to Decimal, the
DIMDSEP character is used instead of the default decimal
point. If DIMDSEP is set to NULL (default value, reset by
entering a period), AutoCAD uses the decimal point as
the dimension separator.
DIMEXE Type: Real Specifies how far to extend the extension line beyond the
Saved in: Drawing dimension line.
DIMEXO Type: Real Specifies how far extension lines are offset from origin
Saved in: Drawing points. If you point directly at the corners of an object to
Initial value: 0.0625 be dimensioned, the extension lines do not touch the
object.
DIMFIT Type: Integer Obsolete. Has no effect except to preserve the integrity
Saved in: Drawing of scripts. DIMFIT is replaced by DIMATFIT and DIMT-
Initial value: 3 MOVE.
DIMFRAC Type: Integer Sets the fraction format when DIMLUNIT is set to 4
Saved in: Drawing (Architectural) or 5 (Fractional).
Initial value: 0
0 Horizontal
1 Diagonal
2 Not stacked (for example, 1/2)
DIMGAP Type: Real Sets the distance around the dimension text when the
Saved in: Drawing dimension line breaks to accommodate dimension text.
Initial value: 0.0900 Also sets the gap between annotation and a hook line
created with the LEADER command. If you enter a nega-
tive value, DIMGAP places a box around the dimension
text.
AutoCAD also uses DIMGAP as the minimum length for

pieces of the dimension line. When calculating the
default position for the dimension text, AutoCAD
positions the text inside the extension lines only if doing
so breaks the dimension lines into two segments at least
as long as DIMGAP. Text placed above or below the
dimension line is moved inside only if there is room for
the arrowheads, dimension text, and a margin between
them at least as large as DIMGAP: 2 * (DIMASZ +
DIMGAP).
DIMDSEP | 1177
DIMJUST Type: Integer Controls the horizontal positioning of dimension text.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Positions the text above the dimension line and cen-
ter-justifies it between the extension lines
1 Positions the text next to the first extension line
2 Positions the text next to the second extension line
3 Positions the text above and aligned with the first
extension line
4 Positions the text above and aligned with the second
extension line
DIMLDRBLK Type: String Specifies the arrow type for leaders. To return to the
Saved in: Drawing default, closed-filled arrowhead display, enter a single
Initial value: "" period (.). For a list of arrowhead entries, see DIMBLK.
DIMLFAC Type: Real Sets a scale factor for linear dimension measurements. All
Saved in: Drawing linear dimension distances, including radii, diameters,
Initial value: 1.0000 and coordinates, are multiplied by DIMLFAC before being
converted to dimension text.
DIMLFAC has no effect on angular dimensions, and is not

applied to the values held in DIMRND, DIMTM, or
DIMTP.
If you create associative dimensions in paper space,

AutoCAD multiplies the model space distance measured
by the absolute value of DIMLFAC. In model space,
negative values for DIMLFAC are ignored, and the value
1.0 is used instead. For nonassociative dimensions,
DIMLFAC must be set manually to accommodate viewport
scaling.
DIMLIM Type: Switch Generates dimension limits as the default text. Setting
Saved in: Drawing DIMLIM to On turns DIMTOL off.
Initial value: Off
Off Dimension limits are not generated as default text
On Dimension limits are generated as default text
DIMLUNIT Type: Integer Sets units for all dimension types except Angular.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2 1 Scientific
2 Decimal
3 Engineering
4 Architectural
5 Fractional
6 Windows desktop
DIMLWD Type: Enum Assigns lineweight to dimension lines. Values are standard
Saved in: Drawing lineweights.
Initial value: -2
-3 BYLAYER
-2 BYBLOCK
integer representing 100th of mm

DIMLWE Type: Enum Assigns lineweight to extension lines. Values are standard
Saved in: Drawing lineweights.
Initial value: -2
-3 BYLAYER
-2 BYBLOCK
integer representing 100th of mm
DIMPOST Type: String Specifies a text prefix or suffix (or both) to the dimension
Saved in: Drawing measurement. For example, to establish a suffix for milli-
Initial value: "" meters, set DIMPOST to mm; a distance of 19.2 units
would be displayed as 19.2 mm.
If tolerances are turned on, the suffix is applied to the

tolerances as well as to the main dimension.
Use <> to indicate placement of the text in relation to the

dimension value. For example, enter <>mm to display a
5.0 millimeter radial dimension as "5.0mm." If you
entered mm <>, the dimension would be displayed as
"mm 5.0." Use the <> mechanism for angular
dimensions.
DIMRND Type: Real Rounds all dimensioning distances to the specified value.
Saved in: Drawing For instance, if DIMRND is set to 0.25, all distances round
Initial value: 0.0000 to the nearest 0.25 unit. If you set DIMRND to 1.0, all dis-
tances round to the nearest integer. Note that the number
of digits edited after the decimal point depends on the
precision set by DIMDEC. DIMRND does not apply to
angular dimensions.
DIMSAH Type: Switch Controls the display of dimension line arrowhead blocks.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off Off Use arrowhead blocks set by DIMBLK
On Use arrowhead blocks set by DIMBLK1 and DIMBLK2
DIMSCALE Type: Real Sets the overall scale factor applied to dimensioning
Saved in: Drawing variables that specify sizes, distances, or offsets. Also
Initial value: 1.0000 affects the scale of leader objects created with the
LEADER command.
0.0 AutoCAD computes a reasonable default value based

on the scaling between the current model space
viewport and paper space. If you are in paper space
or model space and not using the paper space fea-
ture, the scale factor is 1.0.
>0 AutoCAD computes a scale factor that leads text
sizes, arrowhead sizes, and other scaled distances to
plot at their face values.
DIMSCALE does not affect measured lengths,

coordinates, or angles.
DIMLWE | 1179
DIMSD1 Type: Switch Controls suppression of the first dimension line.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension
line and arrowhead between the first extension line and
the text.
DIMSD2 Type: Switch Controls suppression of the second dimension line.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off When turned on, suppresses the display of the dimension
line and arrowhead between the second extension line
and the text.
DIMSE1 Type: Switch Suppresses display of the first extension line.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off Off Extension line is not suppressed
On Extension line is suppressed
DIMSE2 Type: Switch Suppresses display of the second extension line.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off Off Extension line is not suppressed
On Extension line is suppressed
DIMSHO Type: Switch Obsolete. Has no effect except to preserve the integrity of
Saved in: Drawing scripts.
Initial value: On
DIMSOXD Type: Switch Suppresses drawing of dimension lines outside the

Saved in: Drawing extension lines.
Initial value: Off
Off Dimension lines are not suppressed
On Dimension lines are suppressed
If the dimension lines would be outside the extension

lines and DIMTIX is on, setting DIMSOXD to On sup-
presses the dimension line. If DIMTIX is off, DIMSOXD
has no effect.
DIMSTYLE (Read-only) DIMSTYLE is both a command and a system variable.

Type: String The DIMSTYLE system variable shows the current
Saved in: Drawing dimension style. To display the DIMSTYLE system
variable, use the SETVAR command. The DIMSTYLE
system variable is read-only; you cannot change its
value on the command line. To change the current
dimension style, use the DIMSTYLE command.

DIMTAD Type: Integer Controls the vertical position of text in relation to the
Saved in: Drawing dimension line.
Initial value: 0
0 Centers the dimension text between the extension
lines.
1 Places the dimension text above the dimension line
except when the dimension line is not horizontal
and text inside the extension lines is forced horizon-
tal (DIMTIH = 1). The distance from the dimension
line to the baseline of the lowest line of text is the
current DIMGAP value.
2 Places the dimension text on the side of the dimen-
sion line farthest away from the defining points.
3 Places the dimension text to conform to Japanese
Industrial Standards (JIS).
DIMTDEC Type: Integer Sets the number of decimal places to display in tolerance
Saved in: Drawing values for the primary units in a dimension.
Initial value: 4
DIMTFAC Type: Real Specifies a scale factor for the text height of fractions and
Saved in: Drawing tolerance values relative to the dimension text height, as
Initial value: 1.0000 set by DIMTXT. For example, if DIMTFAC is set to 1.0, the
text height of fractions and tolerances is the same height
as the dimension text. If DIMTFAC is set to 0.100, the text
height of fractions and tolerances is three-quarters the
size of dimension text.
DIMTIH Type: Switch Controls the position of dimension text inside the exten-
Saved in: Drawing sion lines for all dimension types except Ordinate.
Initial value: On
0 or Off Aligns text with the dimension line
1 or On Draws text horizontally
DIMTIX Type: Switch Draws text between extension lines.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off 0 or Off Varies with the type of dimension. For
linear and angular dimensions, AutoCAD places text
inside the extension lines if there is sufficient room.
For radius and diameter dimensions that don’t fit
inside the circle or arc, DIMTIX has no effect and
always forces the text outside the circle or arc.
1 or On Draws dimension text between the exten-
sion lines even if AutoCAD ordinarily places it outside
those lines.
DIMTAD | 1181
DIMTM Type: Real Sets the minimum (or lower) tolerance limit for dimen-
Saved in: Drawing sion text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. AutoCAD
Initial value: 0.0000 accepts signed values for DIMTM. If DIMTOL is on and
DIMTP and DIMTM are set to the same value, AutoCAD
draws a tolerance value.
If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is

drawn above the lower, and a plus sign is added to the
DIMTP value if it is positive.
For DIMTM, AutoCAD uses the negative of the value you

enter (adding a minus sign if you specify a positive
number and a plus sign if you specify a negative
number).
DIMTMOVE Type: Integer Sets dimension text movement rules.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Moves the dimension line with dimension text
1 Adds a leader when dimension text is moved
2 Allows text to be moved freely without a leader
DIMTOFL Type: Switch Controls whether a dimension line is drawn between the
Saved in: Drawing extension lines even when the text is placed outside. For
Initial value: Off radius and diameter dimensions (when DIMTIX is off),
draws a dimension line inside the circle or arc and places
the text, arrowheads, and leader outside.
Off Does not draw dimension lines between the

measured points when arrowheads are placed out-
side the measured points
On Draws dimension lines between the measured points
even when arrowheads are placed outside the
measured points
DIMTOH Type: Switch Controls the position of dimension text outside the exten-
Saved in: Drawing sion lines.
Initial value: On
0 or Off Aligns text with the dimension line
1 or On Draws text horizontally
DIMTOL Type: Switch Appends tolerances to dimension text. Setting DIMTOL

Saved in: Drawing to on turns DIMLIM off.
Initial value: Off
DIMTOLJ Type: Integer Sets the vertical justification for tolerance values relative
Saved in: Drawing to the nominal dimension text.
Initial value: 1
0 Bottom
1 Middle
2 Top

DIMTP Type: Real Sets the maximum (or upper) tolerance limit for dimen-
Saved in: Drawing sion text when DIMTOL or DIMLIM is on. DIMTP accepts
Initial value: 0.0000 signed values. If DIMTOL is on and DIMTP and DIMTM
are set to the same value, AutoCAD draws a tolerance
value.
If DIMTM and DIMTP values differ, the upper tolerance is

drawn above the lower and a plus sign is added to the
DIMTP value if it is positive.
DIMTSZ Type: Real Specifies the size of oblique strokes drawn instead of
Saved in: Drawing arrowheads for linear, radius, and diameter dimensioning.
0 Draws arrowheads.
>0 Draws oblique strokes instead of arrowheads. The
size of the oblique strokes is determined by this value
multiplied by the DIMSCALE value.
DIMTVP Type: Real Controls the vertical position of dimension text above or
Saved in: Drawing below the dimension line. AutoCAD uses the DIMTVP
Initial value: 0.0000 value when DIMTAD is off. The magnitude of the vertical
offset of text is the product of the text height and
DIMTVP. Setting DIMTVP to 1.0 is equivalent to setting
DIMTAD to on. AutoCAD splits the dimension line to
accommodate the text only if the absolute value of
DIMTVP is less than 0.7.
DIMTXSTY Type: String Specifies the text style of the dimension.

Saved in: Drawing
DIMTXT Type: Real Specifies the height of dimension text, unless the current
Saved in: Drawing text style has a fixed height.
DIMTZIN Type: Integer Controls the suppression of zeros in tolerance values.

Saved in: Drawing DIMTZIN stores this value when you enter it on the com-
Initial value: 0 mand line or set it under Primary Units in the Annotation
dialog box. DIMTZIN values 0–3 affect feet-and-inch
dimensions only.

12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for exam-
ple, 0.5000 becomes .5)
DIMTP | 1183
DIMUNIT Type: Integer Obsolete. Has no effect except to preserve the integrity of
Saved in: Drawing scripts. DIMUNIT is replaced by DIMLUNIT and DIMFRAC.
Initial value: 2
DIMUPT Type: Switch Controls options for user-positioned text.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off 0 Cursor controls only the dimension line location
1 or On Cursor controls both the text position and the
dimension line location
DIMZIN Type: Integer Controls the suppression of zeros in the primary unit value.
Saved in: Drawing DIMZIN stores this value when you enter it on the com-
Initial value: 0 mand line or set it under Primary Units in the Annotation
dialog box. DIMZIN values 0–3 affect feet-and-inch
dimensions only.

12 Suppresses both leading and trailing zeros (for
DIMZIN also affects real-to-string conversions performed

by the AutoLISP rtos and angtos functions.
DISPSILH Type: Integer Controls display of silhouette curves of solid objects in

Saved in: Drawing Wireframe mode. Also controls whether mesh is drawn or
Initial value: 0 suppressed when a solid object is hidden.
0 Off
1 On
DISTANCE (Read-only) Stores the distance computed by the DIST command.

Type: Real
Not saved
DONUTID Type: Real Sets the default for the inside diameter of a donut.
Not saved
DONUTOD Type: Real Sets the default for the outside diameter of a donut. The
Not saved value must be nonzero. If DONUTID is larger than
Initial value: 1.0000 DONUTOD, the two values are swapped by the next
command.

DRAGMODE Type: Integer Controls the display of objects being dragged. When
Saved in: Registry Drag mode is on, AutoCAD shows the image of an object
Initial value: 2 as you drag it to another position. With some computer
configurations, dragging can be time-consuming. Use
DRAGMODE to suppress dragging.
0 Does not display an outline of the object as you drag

it
1 Displays the outline of the object as you drag it only
if you enter drag on the command line after select-
ing the object to drag
2 Auto; always displays an outline of the object as you
drag it
DRAGP1 Type: Integer Sets the regen-drag input sampling rate.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 10
DRAGP2 Type: Integer Sets the fast-drag input sampling rate.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 25
DWGCHECK Type: Integer Checks drawings for potential problems when opening
Saved in: Registry them.
Initial Value: 0
0 If a drawing that you try to open is found to have a
potential problem, you are warned before the draw-
ing is opened.
potential problem, or if it was saved by an applica-
tion other than AutoCAD or AutoCAD LT, you are
warned before the drawing is opened.
potential problem, you are notified on the command
line after the drawing is opened.
potential problem, or if it was saved by an applica-
tion other than AutoCAD or AutoCAD LT, you are
notified on the command line after the drawing is
opened.
DWGCODEPAGE (Read-only) Stores the same value as SYSCODEPAGE (for compatibility

Type: String reasons).
Saved in: Drawing
DWGNAME (Read-only) Stores the drawing name as entered by the user. If the
Type: String drawing has not been named yet, DWGNAME defaults to
Not saved “Drawing.dwg.” If the user specified a drive/directory
prefix, the prefix is stored in DWGPREFIX.
DWGPREFIX (Read-only) Stores the drive/directory prefix for the drawing.

Type: String
Not saved
DRAGMODE | 1185
DWGTITLED (Read-only) Indicates whether the current drawing has been named.
Type: Integer
Not saved 0 Drawing has not been named
1 Drawing has been named
EDGEMODE Type: Integer Controls how the TRIM and EXTEND commands deter-
Saved in: Registry mine cutting and boundary edges.
Initial value: 0
0 Uses the selected edge without an extension
1 Extends or trims the selected object to an imaginary
extension of the cutting or boundary edge
Lines, arcs, elliptical arcs, rays, and polylines are objects

eligible for natural extension. The natural extension of a
line or ray is an unbounded line (xline), an arc is a circle,
and an elliptical arc is an ellipse. A polyline is broken down
into its line and arc components, which are extended to
their natural boundaries.
ELEVATION Type: Real Stores the current elevation relative to the current UCS
Saved in: Drawing for the current viewport in the current space.
(viewport specific)
ERRNO (Read-only) Displays the number of the appropriate error code when
Type: Integer an AutoLISP function call causes an error that AutoCAD
Not saved detects. AutoLISP applications can inspect the current
Initial value: 0 value of ERRNO with (getvar "errno").
The ERRNO system variable is not always cleared to zero.

Unless it is inspected immediately after an AutoLISP
function has reported an error, the error that its value
indicates may be misleading. This variable is always
cleared when starting or opening a drawing.
See the AutoLISP Developer’s Guide for more information.

EXPERT Type: Integer Controls whether certain prompts are issued.
Not saved
Initial value: 0 0 Issues all prompts normally.
1 Suppresses “About to regen, proceed?” and “Really
want to turn the current layer off?”
2 Suppresses the preceding prompts and “Block al-
ready defined. Redefine it?” (BLOCK) and “A draw-
ing with this name already exists. Overwrite it?”
(SAVE or WBLOCK).
3 Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued
by the LINETYPE command if you try to load a line-
type that’s already loaded or create a new linetype in
a file that already defines that linetype.
4 Suppresses the preceding prompts and those issued
by UCS Save and VPORTS Save if the name you sup-
ply already exists.
5 Suppresses the prompt, “That name is already in
Use, redefine it?” issued by the -DIMSTYLE Save
option when you supply the name of an existing
dimension style.
When a prompt is suppressed by EXPERT, the operation

in question is performed as though you entered y at the
prompt. Setting EXPERT can affect scripts, menu macros,
AutoLISP, and the command functions.
EXPLMODE Type: Integer Controls whether the EXPLODE command supports

Not saved nonuniformly scaled (NUS) blocks.
Initial value: 1
0 Does not explode NUS blocks
1 Explodes NUS blocks
EXTMAX (Read-only) Stores the upper-right point of the drawing extents.

Type: 3D Point Expands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only
Saved in: Drawing with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world
coordinates for the current space.
EXTMIN (Read-only) Stores the lower-left point of the drawing extents. Ex-
Type: 3D Point pands outward as new objects are drawn; shrinks only
Saved in: Drawing with ZOOM All or ZOOM Extents. Reported in world
coordinates for the current space.
EXPERT | 1187
EXTNAMES Type: Integer Sets the parameters for named object names (such as
Saved in: Drawing linetypes and layers) stored in definition tables.
Initial value: 1
0 Uses Release 14 parameters, which limit names to 31
characters in length. Names can include the letters
A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9, and the special charac-
ters, dollar sign ($), underscore (_), and hyphen (-).
1 Uses AutoCAD 2000 (and later releases) parameters.
Names can be up to 255 characters in length, and
can include the letters A to Z, the numerals 0 to 9,
spaces, and any special characters not used by
Microsoft® Windows® and AutoCAD for other
purposes.
FACETRATIO Type: Integer Controls the aspect ratio of faceting for cylindrical and
Not saved conic ShapeManager solids. A setting of 1 increases the
Initial Value: 0 density of the mesh to improve the quality of rendered
and shaded models.
0 Creates an N by 1 mesh for cylindrical and conic

ShapeManager solids
1 Creates an N by M mesh for cylindrical and conic
ShapeManager solids
FACETRES Type: Real Adjusts the smoothness of shaded and rendered objects
Saved in: Drawing and objects with hidden lines removed. Valid values are
Initial value: 0.5 from 0.01 to 10.0.
FILEDIA Type: Integer Suppresses display of file navigation dialog boxes and the
Saved in: Registry Create New Drawing dialog boxes.
Initial value: 1
0 Does not display dialog boxes. You can still request a
file dialog box to appear by entering a tilde (~) in re-
sponse to the command’s prompt.
The same is true for AutoLISP and ADS functions.
1 Displays dialog boxes. However, if a script or
AutoLISP/ObjectARX™ program is active, AutoCAD
displays an ordinary prompt.
FILLETRAD Type: Real Stores the current fillet radius.

Saved in: Drawing
FILLMODE Type: Integer Specifies whether hatches (including solid fills and
Saved in: Drawing gradient fills), two-dimensional solids, and wide polylines
Initial value: 1 are filled in.
0 Objects are not filled

1 Objects are filled

FONTALT Type: String Specifies the alternate font to be used when the specified
Saved in: Registry font file cannot be located. If an alternate font is not
Initial value: specified, AutoCAD displays the Alternate Font dialog box
"simplex.shx" (see page 664). The dialog box is displayed in the
following cases:
1. A Release 13 drawing is opened; FONTALT is not set

or not found; and a TrueType®, SHX, or PostScript
font is not found for a defined text style.
2. A Release 14 drawing is opened, FONTALT is not set
or not found, and an SHX or PostScript font is not
found for a defined text style. For missing TrueType
fonts in Release 14 drawings, AutoCAD automatically
substitutes the closest TrueType font available.
3. The Browse button is chosen in the Options dialog
box (see page 633) when you specify an alternate
font.
AutoCAD validates the alternate font specified for

FONTALT. If the font name or font file name is not found,
the message “Font not found” is displayed. Enter either a
TrueType font name (for example, Times New Roman
Bold) or a TrueType file name (for example timebd.ttf).
When a TrueType file name is entered for FONTALT,
AutoCAD returns the font name in place of the file name
if the font is registered with the operating system.
For more information about font substitution, see

“Substitute Fonts” in the User’s Guide.
FONTMAP Type: String Specifies the font mapping file to be used. A font map-
Saved in: Registry ping file contains one font mapping per line; the original
Initial value: "acad.fmp" font used in the drawing and the font to be substituted
for it are separated by a semicolon (;). For example, to
substitute the Times TrueType font for the Roman font,
the line in the mapping file would read as follows:
romanc.shx;times.ttf
If FONTMAP does not point to a font mapping file, if the

FMP file is not found, or if the font file name specified in
the FMP file is not found, AutoCAD uses the font defined
in the style. If the font in the style is not found, AutoCAD
substitutes the font according to substitution rules.
For more information about font substitution, see

“Substitute Fonts” in the User’s Guide.
FONTALT | 1189
FRONTZ Type: Real Stores the front clipping plane offset from the target
Saved in: Drawing plane for the current viewport, in drawing units. Mean-
ingful only if the front clipping bit in VIEWMODE is on
and the front-clip-not-at-eye bit is also on. The distance
of the front clipping plane from the camera point is
found by subtracting FRONTZ from the camera-to-target
distance.
FULLOPEN (Read-only) Indicates whether the current drawing is partially open.

Type: Integer
Not saved 0 Indicates a partially open drawing
1 Indicates a fully open drawing
GFANG Type: Integer Specifies the angle of a gradient fill. Valid values are 0
Not saved through 360 degrees.
Initial value: 0
GFCLR1 Type: String Specifies the color for a one-color gradient fill or the first
Not saved color for a two-color gradient fill. Valid values are “RGB
Initial value: “RGB 000, 000, 000, 000” through “RGB 255, 255, 255.”
000, 255”
GFCLR2 Type: String Specifies the second color for a two-color gradient fill.
Not saved Valid values are “RGB 000, 000, 000” through “RGB 255,
Initial value: “RGB 255, 255, 255.”
255, 153”
GFCLRLUM Type: Real Makes the color a tint (mixed with white) or a shade
Not saved (mixed with black) in a one-color gradient fill. Valid values
Initial value: 1.0000 are 0.0 (darkest) to 1.0 (lightest).
GFCLRSTATE Type: Integer Specifies whether a gradient fill uses one color or two
Not saved colors.
Initial value: 1
0 Two-color gradient fill
1 One-color gradient fill
GFNAME Type: Integer Specifies the pattern of a gradient fill. Valid values are 1
Not saved through 9.
Initial value: 1
1 Linear
2 Cylindrical
3 Inverted cylindrical
4 Spherical
5 Inverted spherical
6 Hemispherical
7 Inverted hemispherical
8 Curved
9 Inverted curved

GFSHIFT Type: Integer Specifies whether the pattern in a gradient fill is centered
Not saved or is shifted up and to the left.
Initial value: 0
0 Centered
1 Shifted up and to the left
GRIDMODE Type: Integer Specifies whether the grid is turned on or off.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Turns the grid off
1 Turns the grid on
GRIDUNIT Type: 2D point Specifies the grid spacing (X and Y) for the current
Saved in: Drawing viewport.
Initial value:
0.5000,0.5000
GRIPBLOCK Type: Integer Controls the assignment of grips in blocks.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0 0 Assigns a grip only to the insertion point of the block
1 Assigns grips to objects within the block
GRIPCOLOR Type: Integer Controls the color of nonselected grips. The valid range is
Saved in: Registry 1 to 255.
Initial value: 160
GRIPHOT Type: Integer Controls the color of selected grips. The valid range is 1
Saved in: Registry to 255.
Initial value: 1
GRIPHOVER Type: Integer Controls the fill color of a grip when the cursor pauses
Saved in: Registry over the grip. The valid range is 1 to 255.
Initial value: 3
GRIPOBJLIMIT Type: Integer Suppresses the display of grips when the initial selection
Saved in: Registry set includes more than the specified number of objects.
Initial value: 100 The valid range is 0 to 32,767. When the value is set to 0,
grips are always displayed on selected objects.
GRIPS Type: Integer Controls the use of selection set grips for the Stretch,
Saved in: Registry Move, Rotate, Scale, and Mirror Grip modes.
Initial value: 1
0 Turns off grips
1 Turns on grips
To adjust the size of the grips and the effective selection

area used by the cursor when you snap to a grip, use
GRIPSIZE.
GFSHIFT | 1191
GRIPSIZE Type: Integer Sets the size of the grip box in pixels. The valid range is
Saved in: Registry 1 to 255.
Initial value: 5
GRIPTIPS Type: Integer Controls the display of grip tips when the cursor hovers
Saved in: Registry over grips on custom objects that support grip tips.
Initial value: 1
0 Turns off the display of grip tips
1 Turns on the display of grip tips
HALOGAP Type: Integer Specifies a gap to be displayed where an object is hidden

Saved in: Drawing by another object.
Initial value: 0
The value is specified as a percent of one unit and is
independent of the zoom level. A haloed line is shortened
at the point where it is hidden when HIDE or the Hidden
option of SHADEMODE are used.
The HALOGAP setting can also be set in the Hidden Line

Settings dialog box (see page 414), Halo Gap Percentage
area.
HANDLES (Read-only) Reports whether object handles can be accessed by

Type: Integer applications. Because handles can no longer be turned
Saved in: Drawing off, has no effect except to preserve the integrity of
Initial value: On scripts.
HIDEPRECISION Type: Integer Controls the accuracy of hides and shades. Hides can be
Not saved calculated in double precision or single precision. Setting
Initial Value: 0 HIDEPRECISION to 1 produces more accurate hides by
using double precision, but this setting also uses more
memory and can affect performance, especially when
hiding solids.
0 Single precision; uses less memory

1 Double precision; uses more memory
The HIDEPRECISION setting can also be set in the Hidden

Line Settings dialog box (see page 414), Hide Precision
area.
HIDETEXT Type: Integer Specifies whether text objects created by the TEXT,
Saved in: Drawing DTEXT, or MTEXT commands are processed during a
Initial Value: 1 HIDE command.
0 Text is not hidden and does not hide other objects.

1 Text is hidden but does hide other objects.
When dealing with text objects, legacy behavior is

achieved by setting HIDETEXT to 0.
The HIDETEXT setting can also be set in the Hidden Line

Settings dialog box (see page 414).

HIGHLIGHT Type: Integer Controls object highlighting; does not affect objects
Not saved selected with grips.
Initial value: 1
0 Turns off object selection highlighting
1 Turns on object selection highlighting
HPANG Type: Real Specifies the hatch pattern angle.

Not saved
Initial value: 0
HPASSOC Type: Integer Controls whether hatch patterns and gradient fills are
Saved in: Registry associative.
Initial value: 1
0 Hatch patterns and gradient fills are not associated
with their boundaries
1 Hatch patterns and gradient fills are associated with
their boundaries and are updated when the bound-
aries change
HPBOUND Type: Integer Controls the object type created by the BHATCH and
Not saved BOUNDARY commands.
Initial value: 1
0 Creates a region
1 Creates a polyline
HPDOUBLE Type: Integer Specifies hatch pattern doubling for user-defined

Not saved patterns. Doubling specifies a second set of lines drawn at
Initial value: 0 90 degrees to the original lines.
0 Turns off hatch pattern doubling

1 Turns on hatch pattern doubling
HPNAME Type: String Sets a default hatch pattern name of up to 34 characters

Not saved without spaces. Returns "" if there is no default. Enter a
Initial value: "ANSI31" period (.) to reset HPNAME to the default value.
HPSCALE Type: Real Specifies the hatch pattern scale factor, which must be
Not saved nonzero.
HPSPACE Type: Real Specifies the hatch pattern line spacing for user-defined
Not saved simple patterns, which must be nonzero.
HYPERLINKBASE Type: String Specifies the path used for all relative hyperlinks in the
Saved in: Drawing drawing. If no value is specified, the drawing path is used
Initial value: "" for all relative hyperlinks.
IMAGEHLT Type: Integer Controls whether the entire raster image or only the
Saved in: Registry raster image frame is highlighted.
Initial value: 0
0 Highlights only the raster image frame
1 Highlights the entire raster image
HIGHLIGHT | 1193
INDEXCTL Type: Integer Controls whether layer and spatial indexes are created
Saved in: Drawing and saved in drawing files.
Initial value: 0
0 No indexes are created
1 Layer index is created
2 Spatial index is created
3 Layer and spatial indexes are created
INETLOCATION Type: String Stores the Internet location used by the BROWSER
Saved in: Registry command and the Browse the Web dialog box.
Initial value: "http://
www.autodesk.com"
INSBASE Type: 3D point Stores the insertion base point set by BASE, which gets
Saved in: Drawing expressed as a UCS coordinate for the current space.
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000,0.0000
INSNAME Type: String Sets a default block name for the INSERT command. The
Not saved name must conform to symbol naming conventions.
Initial value: "" Returns "" if no default is set. Enter a period (.) to set no
default.
INSUNITS Type: Integer Specifies a drawing-units value for automatic scaling of

Saved in: Drawing blocks or images dragged from DesignCenter™ and
Initial value: 1 inserted into a drawing.
0 Unspecified (No units)

1 Inches
2 Feet
3 Miles
4 Millimeters
5 Centimeters
6 Meters
7 Kilometers
8 Microinches
9 Mils
10 Yards
11 Angstroms
12 Nanometers
13 Microns
14 Decimeters
15 Decameters
16 Hectometers
17 Gigameters
18 Astronomical Units
19 Light Years
20 Parsecs

INSUNITSDEFSOURCE Type: Integer Sets source content units value. Valid range is 0 to 20.
Saved in: Registry 0 Unspecified (No units)
Initial value: 1 1 Inches
2 Feet
3 Miles
4 Millimeters
5 Centimeters
6 Meters
7 Kilometers
8 Microinches
9 Mils
10 Yards
11 Angstroms
12 Nanometers
13 Microns
14 Decimeters
15 Decameters
16 Hectometers
17 Gigameters
19 Light Years
20 Parsecs
INSUNITSDEFTARGET Type: Integer Sets target drawing units value. Valid range is 0 to 20.
Saved in: Registry 0 Unspecified (No units)
Initial value: 1 1 Inches
2 Feet
3 Miles
4 Millimeters
5 Centimeters
6 Meters
7 Kilometers
8 Microinches
9 Mils
10 Yards
11 Angstroms
12 Nanometers
13 Microns
14 Decimeters
15 Decameters
16 Hectometers
17 Gigameters
19 Light Years
20 Parsecs
INSUNITSDEFSOURCE | 1195
INTERSECTIONCOLOR Type: Integer Specifies the color of intersection polylines. Value 0
Saved in: Drawing designates entity color BYBLOCK, value 256 designates
Initial value: 257 entity color BYLAYER, and value 257 designates entity
color BYENTITY. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD
color index (ACI).
An intersection polyline is what displays as the face-to-

face intersection of 3D surfaces when the HIDE
command is used or the SHADEMODE command is set
to Hidden.
The INTERSECTIONCOLOR setting is visible only if the

INTERSECTIONDISPLAY is turned on by setting it to a
value of 1.
The INTERSECTIONCOLOR setting can also be specified

in the Hidden Line Settings dialog box (see page 414),
Face Intersections area, Color control.
INTERSECTIONDISPLAY Type: Switch Specifies the display of intersection polylines.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: Off 0 or Off Turns off the display of intersection
polylines
1 or On Turns on the display of intersection
polylines
An intersection polyline displays at the face-to-face

intersection of 3D surfaces when the HIDE command is
used or the SHADEMODE command is set to Hidden.
The INTERSECTIONDISPLAY setting can also be set in

the Hidden Line Settings dialog box (see page 414),
Face Intersections area, Display Intersections check box.

ISAVEBAK Type: Integer Improves the speed of incremental saves, especially for
Saved in: Registry large drawings. ISAVEBAK controls the creation of a
Initial value: 1 backup file (BAK). In Windows, copying the file data to
create a BAK file for large drawings takes a major portion
of the incremental save time.
0 No BAK file is created (even for a full save)

1 A BAK file is created
WARNING In some cases (such as a power failure in the

middle of a save), it’s possible that drawing data can be
lost.
ISAVEPERCENT Type: Integer Determines the amount of wasted space tolerated in a

Saved in: Registry drawing file. The value of ISAVEPERCENT is an integer
Initial value: 50 between 0 and 100. The default value of 50 means that
the estimate of wasted space within the file does not ex-
ceed 50 percent of the total file size. Wasted space is
eliminated by periodic full saves. When the estimate ex-
ceeds 50 percent, the next save will be a full save. This
resets the wasted space estimate to 0. If ISAVEPERCENT
is set to 0, every save is a full save.
ISOLINES Type: Integer Specifies the number of contour lines per surface on
Saved in: Drawing objects. Valid integer values are from 0 to 2047.
Initial value: 4
LASTANGLE (Read-only) Stores the end angle of the last arc entered relative to the
Type: Real XY plane of the current UCS for the current space.
Not saved
LASTPOINT Type: 3D point Stores the last point entered, expressed as a UCS coordi-
Not saved nate for the current space; referenced by the at symbol
Initial value: (@) during keyboard entry.
0.0000,0.0000,0.0000
LASTPROMPT (Read-only) Stores the last string echoed to the command line. This
Type: String string is identical to the last line seen at the command
Not saved line and includes any user input.
Initial value: ""
ISAVEBAK | 1197
LAYOUTREGENCTL Type: Integer Specifies how the display list is updated in the Model tab
Saved in: Registry and layout tabs. For each tab, the display list is updated
Initial value: 2 either by regenerating the drawing when you switch to
that tab or by saving the display list to memory and
regenerating only the modified objects when you switch
to that tab. Changing the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting can
improve performance.
0 The drawing is regenerated each time you switch

tabs.
1 For the Model tab and the last layout made current,
the display list is saved to memory and regenerations
are suppressed when you switch between the two
tabs. For all other layouts, regenerations still occur
when you switch to those tabs.
2 The drawing is regenerated the first time you switch
to each tab. For the remainder of the drawing
session, the display list is saved to memory and
regenerations are suppressed when you switch to
those tabs.
The performance gain achieved by changing the

LAYOUTREGENCTL setting is dependent on several
factors, including the drawing size and type, the objects
contained in the drawing, the amount of available
memory, and the effect of other open drawings or
applications. When LAYOUTREGENCTL is set to 1 or 2,
the amount of additional memory used is the size of the
Model tab’s display list multiplied by the number of
viewports in each layout for which the display list is
saved.
If LAYOUTREGENCTL is set to 1 or 2 and performance

seems slow in general or when you switch between tabs
for which the display list is saved, consider changing to a
setting of 0 or 1 to find the optimal balance for your work
environment.
NOTE Regardless of the LAYOUTREGENCTL setting, if

you redefine a block or undo a tab switch, the drawing is
regenerated the first time you switch to any tab that
contains saved viewports.
LENSLENGTH (Read-only) Stores the length of the lens (in millimeters) used in
Type: Real perspective viewing for the current viewport.
Saved in: Drawing
LIMCHECK Type: Integer Controls the creation of objects outside the drawing
Saved in: Drawing limits.
Initial value: 0
0 Objects can be created outside the limits
1 Objects cannot be created outside the limits

LIMMAX Type: 2D point Stores the upper-right drawing limits for the current
Saved in: Drawing space, expressed as a world coordinate. LIMMAX is
Initial value: read-only when paper space is active and the paper
12.0000,9.0000 background or paper margins are displayed.
LIMMIN Type: 2D point Stores the lower-left drawing limits for the current space,
Saved in: Drawing expressed as a world coordinate. LIMMIN is read-only
Initial value: when paper space is active and the paper background or
0.0000,0.0000 paper margins are displayed.
LISPINIT Type: Integer When single-document interface is enabled, specifies

Saved in: Registry whether AutoLISP-defined functions and variables are
Initial value: 1 preserved when you open a new drawing or whether
they are valid in the current drawing session only.
0 AutoLISP functions and variables are preserved from

drawing to drawing
1 AutoLISP functions and variables are valid in the cur-
rent drawing only
When SDI is set to 0, AutoLISP always behaves as if

LISPINIT were set to 1. For information about the
behavior of AutoLISP-defined functions and variables in
a multiple-document interface, see “Designing for a
Multiple Document Environment”in the AutoLISP
LOCALE (Read-only) Displays the International Standards Organization (ISO)

Type: String language code of the current AutoCAD version you’re
Not saved running.
Initial value: "enu"
LOCALROOTPREFIX (Read-only) Stores the full path to the root folder where local
Type: String customizable files were installed. These files are stored in
Saved in: Registry the product folder under the Local Settings folder; for
Initial value: "pathname" example, "C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local
Settings\Application
Data\productname\version\language".
The Template and Textures folders are in this location, and

you can add any customizable files that you do not want
to roam on the network. See ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX for
the location of the roamable files.
LOGFILEMODE Type: Integer Specifies whether the contents of the text window are
Saved in: Registry written to a log file.
Initial value: 0
0 Log file is not maintained
1 Log file is maintained
LOGFILENAME (Read-only) Specifies the path and name of the log file for the current
Type: String drawing. The initial value varies depending on the name
Saved in: Drawing of the current drawing and where you installed AutoCAD.
LIMMAX | 1199
LOGFILEPATH Type: String Specifies the path for the log files for all drawings in a
Saved in: Registry session. You can also specify the path by using the
OPTIONS command. The initial value varies depending
on where you installed AutoCAD.
LOGINNAME (Read-only) Displays the user’s name as configured or as input when

Type: String AutoCAD is loaded. The maximum length for a login
Not saved name is 30 characters.
LTSCALE Type: Real Sets the global linetype scale factor. The linetype scale
Saved in: Drawing factor cannot equal zero.
LUNITS Type: Integer Sets linear units.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 2 1 Scientific
2 Decimal
3 Engineering
4 Architectural
5 Fractional
LUPREC Type: Integer Sets the number of decimal places displayed for all read-
Saved in: Drawing only linear units, and for all editable linear units whose
Initial value: 4 precision is less than or equal to the current LUPREC
value. For editable linear units whose precision is greater
than the current LUPREC value, the true precision is dis-
played. LUPREC does not affect the display precision of
dimension text (see DIMSTYLE).
LWDEFAULT Type: Enum Sets the value for the default lineweight. The default
Saved in: Registry lineweight can be set to any valid lineweight value in
Initial value: 25 hundredths of millimeters, including: 0, 5, 9, 13, 15, 18,
20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 53, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 106, 120,
140, 158, 200, and 211.
All values must be entered in hundredths of millimeters.

(Multiply a value by 2540 to convert values from inches
to hundredths of millimeters.)
LWDISPLAY Type: Integer Controls whether the lineweight is displayed. The setting
Saved in: Drawing is saved with each tab in the drawing.
Initial value: 0
0 Lineweight is not displayed
1 Lineweight is displayed
LWUNITS Type: Integer Controls whether lineweight units are displayed in inches
Saved In: Registry or millimeters.
Initial value: 1
0 Inches
1 Millimeters
MAXACTVP Type: Integer Sets the maximum number of viewports that can be
Saved in: Drawing active at one time in a layout. MAXACTVP has no effect
Initial value: 64 on the number of viewports that are plotted.

MAXSORT Type: Integer Sets the maximum number of symbol names or block
Saved in: Registry names sorted by listing commands. If the total number of
Initial value: 1000 items exceeds this value, no items are sorted.
MBUTTONPAN Type: Integer Controls the behavior of the third button or wheel on the
Saved in: Registry pointing device.
Initial Value: 1
0 Supports the action defined in the menu (.mnu) file
1 Supports panning when you hold and drag the
button or wheel
MEASUREINIT Type: Integer Sets the initial drawing units as imperial or metric. Specif-
Saved in: Registry ically, MEASUREINIT controls which hatch pattern and
Initial value: varies by linetype files an existing drawing uses when it’s opened.
country Also controls which template is used.
0 Imperial; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file

designated by the ANSIHatch and ANSILinetype
registry settings
1 Metric; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file
designated by the ISOHatch and ISOLinetype
registry settings
MEASUREMENT Type: Integer Sets drawing units as imperial or metric for the current
Saved in: Drawing drawing only. Specifically, MEASUREMENT controls which
Initial value: 0 hatch pattern and linetype files an existing drawing uses
when it is opened.
0 Imperial; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file

designated by the ANSIHatch and ANSILinetype
registry settings
1 Metric; uses the hatch pattern file and linetype file
designated by the ISOHatch and ISOLinetype
registry settings
The drawing units for new drawings are controlled by

MEASUREINIT (MEASUREINIT uses the same values as
MEASUREMENT). The MEASUREMENT setting of a
drawing always overrides the MEASUREINIT setting.
MENUCTL Type: Integer Controls the page switching of the screen menu.
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1 0 Screen menu does not switch pages in response to
keyboard command entry
1 Screen menu does switch pages in response to key-
board command entry
MAXSORT | 1201
MENUECHO Type: Integer Sets menu echo and prompt control bits. The value is the
Not saved sum of the following:
Initial value: 0
1 Suppresses echo of menu items (^P in a menu item
toggles echoing)
2 Suppresses display of system prompts during menu
4 Disables ^P toggle of menu echoing
8 Displays input/output strings; debugging aid for
DIESEL macros
MENUNAME (Read-only) Stores the menu file name, including the path for the file
Type: String name.
Saved in: Registry
MIRRTEXT Type: Integer Controls how the MIRROR command reflects text.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Retains text direction
1 Mirrors the text
MODEMACRO Type: String Displays a text string on the status line, such as the name
Not saved of the current drawing, time/date stamp, or special
Initial value: "" modes.
Use MODEMACRO to display a string of text, or use spe-

cial text strings written in the DIESEL macro language to
have AutoCADevaluate the macro from time to time and
base the status line on user-selected conditions. For de-
tails, see “DIESEL” in the Customization Guide.
MTEXTED Type: String Sets the name of the application to use for editing
Saved in: Registry multiline text objects. You can specify a different text
Initial value: "Internal" editor for the MTEXT and DDEDIT commands. If you set
MTEXTED to internal or to null, AutoCAD displays the
internal Multiline Text Editor. You set MTEXTED to null
by entering a period (.). If you specify a path and the
name of the executable file for another text editor or
word processor, AutoCAD displays that path and file
name instead.
If the multiline text object is fewer than 80 characters,

you can specify :lisped to use the LISP editor.
Text editors other than the internal one show the

formatting codes in paragraph text.

MTEXTFIXED Type: Integer Controls the appearance of the Multiline Text Editor.
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0 0 Displays both the Multiline Text Editor and the text
within it at the size and position of the multiline text
object in the drawing. Text too large or too small to
be edited is displayed at a minimum or maximum
size.
1 Displays the Multiline Text Editor at a fixed position
and size based on last use, and displays text in the
editor at a fixed height.
MTJIGSTRING Type: String Sets the content of the sample text displayed at the
Saved in: Registry cursor location when the MTEXT command is started.
Initial value: "abc" The text string is displayed in the current text size and
font. You can enter any string of up to ten letters or
numbers or enter . (period) to display no sample text.
MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX(Read-only) Stores the full path to the My Documents folder for the
Type: String user currently logged-on. These files are stored in the
Saved in: Registry product folder under the Local Settings folder; for
Initial value: "pathname" example, "C:\Documents and Settings\username\My
Documents".
NOMUTT Type: Short Suppresses the message display (muttering) when it

Not Saved wouldn’t normally be suppressed. Displaying messages
Initial Value: 0 is the normal mode of AutoCAD, but message display is
suppressed during scripts, AutoLISP routines, and so on.
0 Resumes normal muttering behavior

1 Suppresses muttering indefinitely
OBSCUREDCOLOR Type: Integer Specifies the color of obscured lines. Value 0 designates
Saved in: Drawing byBlock, value 256 designates byLayer, and value 257
Initial value: 257 designates byEntity. Values 1-255 designate an AutoCAD
color index (ACI).
An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by

changing its color and linetype and is visible only when
the HIDE or SHADEMODE commands are used.
The OBSCUREDCOLOR setting is visible only if the

OBSCUREDLTYPE is turned ON by setting it to a value
other than 0.
The OBSCUREDCOLOR setting can also be set in the

Hidden Line Settings dialog box (see page 414),
Obscured Lines area, Color pull-down menu.
MTEXTFIXED | 1203
OBSCUREDLTYPE Type: Integer Specifies the linetype of obscured lines. Obscured
Saved in: Drawing linetypes are independent of zoom level, unlike regular
Initial value: 0 AutoCAD linetypes. Value 0 will turn off display of
obscured lines and is the default. The linetype values are
defined as follows:
0 Off
1 Solid
2 Dashed
3 Dotted
4 Short Dash
5 Medium Dash
6 Long Dash
7 Double Short Dash
8 Double Medium Dash
9 Double Long Dash
10 Medium Long Dash
11 Sparse Dot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
An obscured line is a hidden line made visible by

changing its color and linetype and is visible only when
the HIDE or SHADEMODE commands are used.
The OBSCUREDLTYPE setting can also be set in the

Hidden Line Settings dialog box (see page 414),
Obscured Lines area, Linetype pull-down menu.
OFFSETDIST Type: Real Sets the default offset distance.

Not saved
Initial value: 1.0000 <0 Offsets an object through a specified point
>0 Sets the default offset distance

OFFSETGAPTYPE Type: Integer Controls how potential gaps between segments are
Saved in: Registry treated when polylines are offset.
Initial value: 0
0 Fills the gaps by extending the polyline segments
1 Fills the gaps with filleted arc segments (the radius of
each arc segment is equal to the offset distance)
2 Fills the gaps with chamfered line segments (the per-
pendicular distance to each chamfer is equal to the
offset distance)
fillet
radius
offset with gaps OFFSETGAPTYPE=0
offset distance from

distance vertex to chamfer
OFFSETGAPTYPE=1 OFFSETGAPTYPE=2
OLEHIDE Type: Integer Controls the display of OLE objects in AutoCAD.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0 0 All OLE objects are visible
1 OLE objects are visible in paper space only
2 OLE objects are visible in model space only
3 No OLE objects are visible
OLEHIDE affects both screen display and printing.
OLEQUALITY Type: Integer Controls the default quality level for embedded OLE
Saved in: Registry objects.
Initial value: 1
0 Line art quality, such as an embedded spreadsheet
1 Text quality, such as an embedded Word® document
2 Graphics quality, such as an embedded pie chart
3 Photograph quality
4 High quality photograph
OFFSETGAPTYPE | 1205
OLESTARTUP Type: Integer Controls whether the source application of an embedded
Saved in: Drawing OLE object loads when plotting. Loading the OLE source
Initial value: 0 application may improve the plot quality.
0 Does not load the OLE source application

1 Loads the OLE source application when plotting
ORTHOMODE Type: Integer Constrains cursor movement to the perpendicular. When

Saved in: Drawing ORTHOMODE is turned on, the cursor can move only
Initial value: 0 horizontally or vertically relative to the UCS and the cur-
rent grid rotation angle.
0 Turns off Ortho mode

1 Turns on Ortho mode
OSMODE Type: Integer Sets running Object Snap modes using the following
Saved in: Registry bitcodes:
Initial value: 4133
0 NONe
1 ENDpoint
2 MIDpoint
4 CENter
8 NODe
16 QUAdrant
32 INTersection
64 INSertion
128 PERpendicular
256 TANgent
512 NEArest
1024 QUIck
2048 APParent Intersection
4096 EXTension
8192 PARallel
To specify more than one object snap, enter the sum of

their values. For example, entering 3 specifies the
Endpoint (bitcode 1) and Midpoint (bitcode 2) object
snaps. Entering 16383 specifies all object snaps.
When object snaps are switched off using the Osnap but-
ton on the status bar, a bitcode of 16384 (0x4000) is
returned, in addition to the normal value of OSMODE.
With this additional value, developers can write applica-
tions for AutoCAD, and distinguish this mode from
Object Snap modes that have been turned off from
within the Drafting Settings dialog box. Setting this bit
toggles running object snaps off. Setting OSMODE to a
value with this bit off toggles running object snaps on.

OSNAPCOORD Type: Integer Controls whether coordinates entered on the command
Saved in: Registry line override running object snaps.
Initial value: 2
0 Running object snap settings override keyboard
coordinate entry
1 Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings
2 Keyboard entry overrides object snap settings except
in scripts
PALETTEOPAQUE Type: Integer Controls whether windows can be made transparent.

Saved in: Registry When transparency is unavailable or turned off, all
Initial Value: 0 palettes are opaque. Transparency is unavailable when
palettes or windows are docked, when transparency is
not supported by the current operating system, and
when hardware accelerators are in use.
When transparency is available and turned on, you can

use the Transparency option on the shortcut menu to set
a different degree of transparency in individual palettes.
0 Transparency turned on by user

1 Transparency turned off by user
2 Transparency unavailable though turned on by user
3 Transparency unavailable and turned off by user
PAPERUPDATE Type: Integer Controls the display of a warning dialog when attempt-
Saved in: Registry ing to print a layout with a paper size different from the
Initial Value: 0 paper size specified by the default for the plotter configu-
ration file.
0 Displays a warning dialog box if the paper size speci-

fied in the layout is not supported by the plotter
1 Sets paper size to the configured paper size of the
plotter configuration file
PDMODE Type: Integer Controls how point objects are displayed. For information
Saved in: Drawing about values to enter, see the POINT command.
Initial value: 0
PDSIZE Type: Real Sets the display size for point objects.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0.0000 0 Creates a point at 5 percent of the drawing area
height
>0 Specifies an absolute size
<0 Specifies a percentage of the viewport size
OSNAPCOORD | 1207
PEDITACCEPT Type: Integer Suppresses display of the Object Selected Is Not a
Saved in: Registry Polyline prompt in PEDIT. The prompt is followed by “Do
Initial value: 0 you want it to turn into one?” Entering y converts the
selected object to a polyline. When the prompt is
suppressed, the selected object is automatically
converted to a polyline.
0 The prompt is displayed

1 The prompt is suppressed
PELLIPSE Type: Integer Controls the ellipse type created with ELLIPSE.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Creates a true ellipse object.
1 Creates a polyline representation of an ellipse.
PERIMETER (Read-only) Stores the last perimeter value computed by the AREA,
Type: Real DBLIST, or LIST commands.
Not saved
NOTE The LIST command does not update the
computed perimeter for circles.
PFACEVMAX (Read-only) Sets the maximum number of vertices per face.

Type: Integer
Not saved
PICKADD Type: Integer Controls whether subsequent selections replace the

Saved in: Registry current selection set or add to it.
Initial value: 1
0 Turns off PICKADD. The objects most recently se-
lected become the selection set. Previously selected
objects are removed from the selection set. Add
more objects to the selection set by pressing SHIFT
while selecting.
1 Turns on PICKADD. Each object selected, either indi-
vidually or by windowing, is added to the current
selection set. To remove objects from the set, press
SHIFT while selecting.
PICKAUTO Type: Integer Controls automatic windowing at the Select Objects

Saved in: Registry prompt.
Initial value: 1
0 Turns off PICKAUTO
1 Draws a selection window (for either a window or a
crossing selection) automatically at the Select
Objects prompt

PICKBOX Type: Integer Sets the object selection target height, in pixels.
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 3
PICKDRAG Type: Integer Controls the method of drawing a selection window.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 0 0 Draws the selection window using two points. Click
the pointing device at one corner, and then click to
select another corner.
1 Draws the selection window using dragging. Click
one corner and drag the pointing device; release the
button at the other corner.
PICKFIRST Type: Integer Controls whether you select objects before (noun-verb
Saved in: Registry selection) or after you issue a command.
Initial value: 1
0 Turns off PICKFIRST; you select objects after you issue
a command
1 Turns on PICKFIRST; you select objects before you
issue a command
PICKSTYLE Type: Integer Controls the use of group selection and associative hatch
Saved in: Registry selection.
Initial value: 1
0 No group selection or associative hatch selection
1 Group selection
2 Associative hatch selection
3 Group selection and associative hatch selection
PLATFORM (Read-only) Indicates which AutoCAD platform is in use.

Type: String
Not saved
PLINEGEN Type: Integer Sets how linetype patterns generate around the vertices
Saved in: Drawing of a 2D polyline. Does not apply to polylines with tapered
Initial value: 0 segments.
0 Generates polylines to start and end with a dash at

each vertex
1 Generates the linetype in a continuous pattern
around the vertices of the polyline
PICKBOX | 1209
PLINETYPE Type: Integer Specifies whether AutoCAD uses optimized 2D polylines.
Saved in: Registry PLINETYPE controls both the creation of new polylines
Initial value: 2 with the PLINE command and the conversion of existing
polylines in drawings from previous releases.
0 Polylines in older drawings are not converted when

opened; PLINE creates old-format polylines
1 Polylines in older drawings are not converted when
opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines
2 Polylines in R14 or older drawings are converted
when opened; PLINE creates optimized polylines
For more information on the two formats, see the

CONVERT command.
PLINETYPE also controls the polyline type created with the

following commands: BOUNDARY (when object type is
set to Polyline), DONUT, PEDIT (when selecting a line or
arc), POLYGON, and SKETCH (when SKPOLY is set to 1).
PLINEWID Type: Real Stores the default polyline width.

Saved in: Drawing
PLOTROTMODE Type: Integer Controls the orientation of plots.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2 0 Rotates the effective plotting area so the corner with
the Rotation icon aligns with the paper at the lower
left for 0, top left for 90, top right for 180, and lower
right for 270.
X and Y origin offsets are calculated relative to the
lower-left corner.
1 Aligns the lower-left corner of the effective plotting
area with the lower-left corner of the paper.
2 Works the same as 0 value except that the X and Y
origin offsets are calculated relative to the rotated
origin position.
PLQUIET Type: Integer Controls the display of optional dialog boxes and nonfatal
Saved in: Registry errors for batch plotting and scripts.
Initial Value: 0
0 Displays plot dialog boxes and nonfatal errors
1 Logs nonfatal errors and doesn’t display plot-related
dialog boxes

POLARADDANG Type: String Contains user-defined polar angles. You can add up to 10
Saved in: Registry angles. Each angle can be up to 25 characters, separated
Initial value: null with semicolons (;). AutoCADdisplays angles in the for-
mat set in the AUNITS system variable.
Unlike POLARANG, POLARADDANG angles do not result

in multiples of their values.
NOTE When using fractions of an angle, set the AUPREC

system variable (angular precision) to a higher value.
Otherwise, the POLARADDANG value will be rounded off.
POLARANG Type: Real Sets the polar angle increment. Values are 90, 45, 30,
Saved in: Registry 22.5, 18, 15,10, and 5.
Initial value: 90
POLARDIST Type: Real Sets the snap increment when the SNAPTYPE system
Saved in: Registry variable is set to 1 (PolarSnap).
POLARMODE Type: Integer Controls settings for polar and object snap tracking. The
Saved in: Registry value is the sum of four bitcodes:
Initial value: 0
Polar angle measurements
0 Measure polar angles based on current UCS
(absolute)
1 Measure polar angles from selected objects (relative)
Object snap tracking

0 Track orthogonally only
2 Use polar tracking settings in object snap tracking
Use additional polar tracking angles

0 No
4 Yes
Acquire object snap tracking points

0 Acquire automatically
8 Press SHIFT to acquire
POLYSIDES Type: Integer Sets the default number of sides for the POLYGON
Not saved command. The range is 3 to 1024.
Initial value: 4
POLARADDANG | 1211
POPUPS (Read-only) Displays the status of the currently configured display
Type: Integer driver.
Not saved
0 Does not support dialog boxes, the menu bar, and
icon menus
1 Supports these features
PRODUCT (Read-only) Returns the product name.

Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "AutoCAD"
PROGRAM (Read-only) Returns the program name.

Type: String
Not saved
Initial value: "acad"
PROJECTNAME Type: String Assigns a project name to the current drawing. Used
Saved in: Drawing when an xref or image is not found in its original path.
Initial value: "" The project name points to a section in the registry that
can contain one or more search paths for each project
name defined. Project names and their search directories
are created from the Files tab of the Options dialog box.
Project names make it easier for users to manage xrefs

and images when drawings are exchanged between
customers, or if users have different drive mappings to
the same location on a server.
If the xref or image is not found at the original path, the

project paths associated with the project name are
searched. If the xref or image is not found there, the
AutoCAD search path is searched.
PROJMODE Type: Integer Sets the current Projection mode for trimming or
Saved in: Registry extending.
Initial value: 1
0 True 3D mode (no projection)
1 Project to the XY plane of the current UCS
2 Project to the current view plane
PROXYGRAPHICS Type: Integer Specifies whether images of proxy objects are saved in
Saved in: Drawing the drawing.
Initial value: 1
0 Does not save image with the drawing; a bounding
box is displayed instead
1 Saves image with the drawing

PROXYNOTICE Type: Integer Displays a notice when a proxy is created. A proxy is
Saved in: Registry created when you open a drawing containing custom
Initial value: 1 objects created by an application that is not present. A
proxy is also created when you issue a command that
unloads a custom object’s parent application.
0 No proxy warning is displayed

1 Proxy warning is displayed
PROXYSHOW Type: Integer Controls the display of proxy objects in a drawing.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1 0 Proxy objects are not displayed
1 Graphic images are displayed for all proxy objects
2 Only the bounding box is displayed for all proxy
objects
PROXYWEBSEARCH Type: Integer Specifies whether AutoCAD checks for Object Enablers.
Saved in: Registry Object Enablers allow you to display and use custom
Initial value: 1 objects in drawings even when the ObjectARX
application that created them is unavailable.
PROXYWEBSEARCH is also controlled with the Live
Enabler options on the System tab of the Options dialog
box.
0 Prevents checking for Object Enablers.

1 Checks for Object Enablers only if a live Internet con-
nection is present.
For more information about Object Enablers, see “Work

with Custom and Proxy Objects,” in the User’s Guide.
PSLTSCALE Type: Integer Controls paper space linetype scaling.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1 0 No special linetype scaling. Linetype dash lengths are
based on the drawing units of the space (model or
paper) in which the objects were created. Scaled by
the global LTSCALE factor.
1 Viewport scaling governs linetype scaling. If
TILEMODE is set to 0, dash lengths are based on
paper space drawing units, even for objects in
model space. In this mode, viewports can have
varying magnifications, yet display linetypes identi-
cally. For a specific linetype, the dash lengths of a
line in a viewport are the same as the dash lengths
of a line in paper space. You can still control the
dash lengths with LTSCALE.
When you change PSLTSCALE or use a command such

as ZOOM with PSLTSCALE set to 1, objects in viewports
are not automatically regenerated with the new linetype
scale. Use the REGEN or REGENALL commands to up-
date the linetype scales in each viewport.
PROXYNOTICE | 1213
PSTYLEMODE (Read-only) Indicates whether the current drawing is in a Color-
Type: Integer Dependent or Named Plot Style mode.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1 0 Uses named plot style tables in the current drawing
1 Uses color-dependent plot style tables in the current
drawing
PSTYLEPOLICY Type: Integer Controls whether an object’s color property is associated

Saved in: Registry with its plot style. The new value you assign affects only
Initial value: 1 newly created drawings and pre-AutoCAD2000
drawings.
0 No association is made between color and plot style.

The plot style for new objects is set to the default
defined in DEFPLSTYLE. The plot style for new layers
is set to the default defined in DEFLPLSTYLE.
1 An object’s plot style is associated with its color.
PSVPSCALE Type: Real Sets the view scale factor for all newly created viewports.
Saved in: Drawing The view scale factor is defined by comparing the ratio of
Initial Value: 0 units in paper space to the units in newly created model
space viewports. The view scale factor you set is used
with the VPORTS command. A value of 0 means the scale
factor is Scaled to Fit. A scale must be a positive real
value.
PUCSBASE Type: String Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and
Saved in: Drawing orientation of orthographic UCS settings in paper space
Initial value: "" only.
QTEXTMODE Type: Integer Controls how text is displayed.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Turns off Quick Text mode; displays characters
1 Turns on Quick Text mode; displays a box in place of
text
RASTERPREVIEW Type: Integer Controls whether BMP preview images are saved with the
Saved in: Registry drawing.
Initial value: 1
0 No preview image is created
1 Preview image created
REFEDITNAME (Read-only) Displays the name of the reference being edited.

Type: String
Not Saved
Initial value: ""

REGENMODE Type: Integer Controls automatic regeneration of the drawing.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1 0 Turns off the REGENAUTO command
1 Turns on the REGENAUTO command
RE-INIT Type: Integer Reinitializes the digitizer, digitizer port, and acad.pgp file
Not saved by using the following bitcodes:
Initial value: 0
1 Digitizer input/output port reinitialization
4 Digitizer reinitialization
16 PGP file reinitialization (reload)
To specify more than one reinitialization, enter the sum

of the bitcode values. For example, enter 5 to specify
both digitizer port (1) and digitizer reinitialization (4).
REMEMBERFOLDERS Type: Integer Controls the default path for the Look In or Save In
Saved in: Registry option in standard file selection dialog boxes.
Initial value: 1
0 This setting restores the legacy behavior of
AutoCAD 2000 and previous releases. When you
start AutoCAD by double-clicking an AutoCAD icon,
if a Start In path is specified for the icon, that path is
used as the default for all standard file selection dia-
log boxes.
1 The last used paths in each particular standard file
selection dialog box are remembered across and
within sessions. The Start In folder specified for the
AutoCAD icon is not used.
REPORTERROR Type: Integer Controls whether an error report can be sent to

Saved in: Registry Autodesk if AutoCAD closes unexpectedly.
Initial value: 1
Error reports help Autodesk diagnose problems with the
software.
0 The Error Report message is not displayed, and no

report can be sent to Autodesk.
1 The Error Report message is displayed, and an error
report can be sent to Autodesk.
ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX(Read-only) Stores the full path to the root folder where roamable
Type: String customizable files were installed. If you are working on a
Saved in: Registry network that supports roaming, when you customize
Initial value: "pathname" files that are in your roaming profile they are available to
you regardless of which machine you are currently using.
These files are stored in the product folder under the

Application Data folder; for example, "C:\Documents and
Settings\username\Application
Data\productname\version\language".
REGENMODE | 1215
RTDISPLAY Type: Integer Controls the display of raster images during Realtime
Saved in: Registry ZOOM or PAN.
Initial value: 1
0 Displays raster image content
1 Displays raster image outline only
RTDISPLAY is saved in the current profile.
SAVEFILE (Read-only) Stores the current automatic save file name.

Type: String
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: ""
SAVEFILEPATH Type: String Specifies the path to the directory for all automatic save
Saved in: Registry files for the AutoCADsession. You can also change the
Initial value: "C:\TEMP\" path on the Files tab in the Options dialog box (see page
633).
SAVENAME (Read-only) Stores the file name and directory path of the current
Type: String drawing after you save it.
Not saved
Initial value: ""
SAVETIME Type: Integer Sets the automatic save interval, in minutes.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 10 0 Turns off automatic saving
>0 Saves the drawing at intervals specified by the non-
zero integer automatically
The SAVETIME timer starts as soon as you make a change

to a drawing. It is reset and restarted by a manual QSAVE,
SAVE, or SAVEAS. The current drawing is saved to the
path specified by the SAVEFILEPATH system variable. The
file name is stored in the SAVEFILE system variable.
SCREENBOXES (Read-only) Stores the number of boxes in the screen menu area of
Type: Integer the drawing area. If the screen menu is turned off,
Not saved SCREENBOXES is zero. On platforms that permit the
drawing area to be resized or the screen menu to be
reconfigured during an editing session, the value of this
variable might change during the editing session.
SCREENMODE (Read-only) Stores a bitcode indicating the graphics/text state of the

Type: Integer AutoCAD display. It is the sum of the following bit values:
Not saved
0 Text screen is displayed
1 Drawing area is displayed
2 Dual-screen display is configured
SCREENSIZE (Read-only) Stores current viewport size in pixels (X and Y).

Type: 2D point
Not saved

SDI Type: Integer Controls whether AutoCADruns in single- or multiple-
Saved in: Registry document interface. Helps third-party developers update
Initial value: 0 applications to work smoothly with the AutoCAD
multiple-drawing mode.
0 Turns on multiple-drawing interface.

1 Turns off multiple-drawing interface.
2 (Read-only) Multiple-drawing interface is disabled
because AutoCADhas loaded an application that
does not support multiple drawings. SDI setting 2 is
not saved.
3 (Read-only) Multiple-drawing interface is disabled
because the user has set SDI to 1 and AutoCAD has
loaded an application that does not support multiple
drawings. (SDI was set to 1 before the application
was loaded.) SDI setting 3 is not saved.
If SDI is set to 3, AutoCAD switches it back to 1 when

the application that doesn’t support multiple draw-
ings is unloaded.
SHADEDGE Type: Integer Controls the shading of edges in rendering.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 3 0 Faces shaded, edges not highlighted
1 Faces shaded, edges drawn in background color
2 Faces not filled, edges in object color
3 Faces in object color, edges in background color
SHADEDIF Type: Integer Sets the ratio of diffuse reflective light to ambient light in
Saved in: Drawing percentage of diffuse reflective light, when SHADEDGE is
Initial value: 70 set to 0 or 1.
SHORTCUTMENU Type: Integer Controls whether Default, Edit, and Command mode
Saved in: Registry shortcut menus are available in the drawing area.
Initial value: 11 SHORTCUTMENU uses the following bitcodes:
0 Disables all Default, Edit, and Command mode short-

cut menus, restoring R14 legacy behavior.
1 Enables Default mode shortcut menus.
2 Enables Edit mode shortcut menus.
4 Enables Command mode shortcut menus. In this
case, the Command mode shortcut menu is available
whenever a command is active.
8 Enables Command mode shortcut menus only when
command options are currently available from the
command line.
To enable more than one type of shortcut menu at once,

enter the sum of their values. For example, entering 3
enables both Default (1) and Edit (2) mode shortcut
menus.
SDI | 1217
SHPNAME Type: String Sets a default shape name that must conform to symbol-
Not saved naming conventions. If no default is set, it returns "".
Initial value: "" Enter a period (.) to set no default.
SIGWARN Type: Integer Controls whether a warning is presented when a file with
Saved in: Registry an attached digital signature is opened. If the system
Initial value: 1 variable is on and you open a file with a valid signature,
the digital signature status is displayed. If the variable is
off and you open a file, the digital signature status is
displayed only if a signature is invalid. You can set the
variable using the Display Digital Signature Information
option on the Open and Save tab of the Options dialog
box.
0 Warning is not presented if a file has a valid

signature.
1 Warning is presented.
SKETCHINC Type: Real Sets the record increment for the SKETCH command.
Saved in: Drawing
SKPOLY Type: Integer Determines whether the SKETCH command generates

Saved in: Drawing lines or polylines.
Initial value: 0
0 Generates lines
1 Generates polylines
SNAPANG Type: Real Sets the snap and grid rotation angle for the current
Saved in: Drawing viewport. The angle you specify is relative to the current
Initial value: 0 UCS.
Changes to this variable are not reflected in the grid until

the display is refreshed. AutoCADdoes not redraw auto-
matically when system variable settings are changed.
SNAPBASE Type: 2D point Sets the snap and grid origin point for the current view-
Saved in: Drawing port relative to the current UCS.
Initial value:
0.0000,0.0000 Changes to this variable are not reflected in the grid until
the display is refreshed. AutoCADdoes not redraw auto-
matically when system variable settings are changed.
SNAPISOPAIR Type: Integer Controls the isometric plane for the current viewport.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Left
1 Top
2 Right
SNAPMODE Type: Integer Turns the Snap mode on and off.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Snap off
1 Snap on for the current viewport

SNAPSTYL Type: Integer Sets the snap style for the current viewport.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Standard (rectangular snap)
1 Isometric snap
SNAPTYPE Type: Integer Sets the type of snap for the current viewport.
Saved in: Registry
Initial Value: 0 0 Grid, or standard snap.
1 PolarSnap. Snaps along polar angle increments. Use
PolarSnap with polar and object snap tracking.
SNAPUNIT Type: 2D point Sets the snap spacing for the current viewport. If SNAPSTYL
Saved in: Drawing is set to 1, AutoCAD adjusts the X value of SNAPUNIT auto-
Initial value: matically to accommodate the isometric snap.
0.5000,0.5000
Changes to this system variable are not reflected in the
grid until the display is refreshed. AutoCADdoes not re-
draw automatically when system variable settings are
changed.
SOLIDCHECK Type: Integer Turns the solid validation on and off for the current
Saved in: Not Saved AutoCAD session.
Initial value: 1
0 Turns off solid validation
1 Turns on solid validation
SORTENTS Type: Integer Controls the OPTIONS command (from the User
Saved in: Drawing Preferences tab) object sort order operations. SORTENTS
Initial value: 127 uses the following bitcodes:
0 Disables SORTENTS
1 Sorts for object selection
2 Sorts for object snap
4 Clears all the checkboxes
8 Sorts for MSLIDE command slide creation
16 Sorts for REGEN commands
32 Sorts for plotting
64 Clears all the checkboxes
To select more than one setting, enter the sum of the

settings’ codes. For example, enter 3 to specify sorting for
both object selection and object snap.
The initial value of 96 enables sorting for plotting and

PostScript output only. Setting additional sorting options
can result in slower regeneration and redrawing times.
SNAPSTYL | 1219
SPLFRAME Type: Integer Controls the display of splines and spline-fit polylines.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Does not display the control polygon for splines and
spline-fit polylines. Displays the fit surface of a poly-
gon mesh, not the defining mesh. Does not display
the invisible edges of 3D faces or polyface meshes.
1 Displays the control polygon for splines and spline-fit
polylines.
SPLINESEGS Type: Integer Sets the number of line segments to be generated for
Saved in: Drawing each spline-fit polyline generated by the Spline option of
Initial value: 8 the PEDIT command.
Valid settings range from –32768 to 32767. If you set

SPLINESEGS to a negative value, AutoCADgenerates seg-
ments using the absolute value of the setting, and then
applies a fit-type curve to those segments. Fit-type curves
use arcs as the approximating segments. Using arcs yields
a smoother generated curve when few segments are
specified, but the curve can take longer to generate.
SPLINETYPE Type: Integer Sets the type of curve generated by the Spline option of
Saved in: Drawing the PEDIT command.
Initial value: 6
5 Quadratic B-spline
6 Cubic B-spline
Type: Integer
STANDARDSVIOLATION Specifies whether a user is notified of standards violations
Saved in: Registry that exist in the current drawing when a non-standard
Initial value: 2 object is created or modified.
0 Notification is turned off

1 An alert is displayed when a standards violation
occurs in the drawing
2 Displays an icon in the status bar when you open a
file associated with a standards file and when you create
or modify non-standard objects.
STARTUP Type: Integer Controls whether the Create New Drawing dialog box is
Saved in: Registry displayed when starting a new drawing with the NEW
Initial Value: 0 and QNEW commands. Also controls whether the Startup
dialog box is displayed when the application is started.
If the FILEDIA system variable is set to 0, no dialog boxes

are displayed.
0 Displays the Select Template dialog box, or uses a

default drawing template file set in the Options dia-
log box, on the Files tab.
1 Displays the Startup and the Create New Drawing
dialog boxes.

SURFTAB1 Type: Integer Sets the number of tabulations to be generated for the
Saved in: Drawing RULESURF and TABSURF commands. Also sets the mesh
Initial value: 6 density in the M direction for the REVSURF and
EDGESURF commands.
SURFTAB2 Type: Integer Sets the mesh density in the N direction for the REVSURF
Saved in: Drawing and EDGESURF commands.
Initial value: 6
SURFTYPE Type: Integer Controls the type of surface-fitting to be performed by

Saved in: Drawing the Smooth option of the PEDIT command.
Initial value: 6
5 Quadratic B-spline surface
6 Cubic B-spline surface
8 Bezier surface
SURFU Type: Integer Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the M
Saved in: Drawing direction.
Initial value: 6
SURFV Type: Integer Sets the surface density for PEDIT Smooth in the N
Saved in: Drawing direction.
Initial value: 6
SYSCODEPAGE (Read-only) Indicates the system code page, which is determined by

Type: String the operating system. To change the code page, see Help
Not saved in your operating system.
TABMODE Type: Integer Controls the use of the tablet. For more information on
Not saved using and configuring a tablet, see the TABLET
Initial value: 0 command.
0 Turns off Tablet mode

1 Turns on Tablet mode
TARGET (Read-only) Stores the location (as a UCS coordinate) of the target
Type: 3D point point for the current viewport.
Saved in: Drawing
TDCREATE (Read-only) Stores the local time and date the drawing was created.
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
TDINDWG (Read-only) Stores the total editing time, which is the total elapsed
Type: Real time between saves of the current drawing. The format is:
Saved in: Drawing
<number of days>.<decimal fraction of a day>
To compute the number of seconds, multiply the decimal

fraction in TDINDWG by 86400 seconds.
SURFTAB1 | 1221
TDUCREATE (Read-only) Stores the universal time and date that the drawing was
Type: Real created.
Saved in: Drawing
TDUPDATE (Read-only) Stores the local time and date of the last update/save.
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
TDUSRTIMER (Read-only) Stores the user-elapsed timer.

Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
TDUUPDATE (Read-only) Stores the universal time and date of the last update/save.
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
TEMPPREFIX (Read-only) Contains the directory name (if any) configured for
Type: String placement of temporary files, with a path separator
Not saved appended.
TEXTEVAL Type: Integer Controls the method of evaluation of text strings entered
Not saved with the TEXT or -TEXT commands.
Initial value: 0
0 All responses to prompts for text strings and
attribute values are taken literally
1 All text starting from an opening parenthesis [( ] or
an exclamation mark [!] is evaluated as an AutoLISP
expression, as for nontextual input
The TEXT command takes all input literally regardless of

the setting of TEXTEVAL unless it is executed completely
with a script or AutoLISP expression. The -TEXT
command honors the setting of TEXTEVAL.
TEXTFILL Type: Integer Controls the filling of TrueType fonts while plotting and
Saved in: Registry rendering.
Initial value: 1
0 DIsplays text as outlines
1 Displays text as filled images
TEXTQLTY Type: Integer Sets the resolution tessellation fineness of text outlines for
Not saved TrueType fonts while plotting and rendering. 0 represents
Initial value: 50 no effort to refine the smoothness of the text; 100
represents a maximum effort to smooth text characters.
Lower values decrease resolution and increase plotting
speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease
plotting speed.
TEXTSIZE Type: Real Sets the default height for new text objects drawn with
Saved in: Drawing the current text style (has no effect if the style has a fixed
Initial value: 0.2000 height).

TEXTSTYLE Type: String Sets the name of the current text style.
Saved in: Drawing
THICKNESS Type: Real Sets the current 3D thickness.

Saved in: Drawing
TILEMODE Type: Integer Makes the Model tab or the last layout tab current.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1 0 Makes the last active layout tab (paper space) active
1 Makes the Model tab active
TOOLTIPS Type: Integer Controls the display of tooltips.

Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1 0 Turns off the display of tooltips
1 Turns on the display of tooltips
TPSTATE (Read-only) Determines whether the Tool Palettes window is active or

Type: Integer not.
Not saved
Initial value: varies 0 The Tool Palettes window is not active
1 The Tool Palettes window is active
TRACEWID Type: Real Sets the default trace width.

Saved in: Drawing
TRACKPATH Type: Integer Controls the display of polar and object snap tracking
Saved in: Registry alignment paths.
Initial value: 0
0 Displays full-screen object snap tracking path
1 Displays object snap tracking path only between the
alignment point and From point to cursor location
2 Does not display polar tracking path
3 Does not display polar or object snap tracking paths
TRAYICONS Type: Integer Controls whether a tray is displayed on the status bar.
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 1 0 Does not display a tray
1 Displays a tray
TRAYNOTIFY Type: Integer Controls whether service notifications are displayed in the
Saved in: Registry status bar tray.
Initial value: 1
0 Does not display notifications
1 Displays notifications
TRAYTIMEOUT Type: Integer Controls the length of time (in seconds) that service
Saved in: Registry notifications are displayed. Valid values are 0 to 10.
Initial value: 5
TEXTSTYLE | 1223
TREEDEPTH Type: Integer Specifies the maximum depth, that is, the number of
Saved in: Drawing times the tree-structured spatial index can divide into
Initial value: 3020 branches.
0 Suppresses the spatial index entirely, eliminating the

performance improvements it provides in working
with large drawings. This setting assures that objects
are always processed in database order, making it
unnecessary ever to set SORTENTS.
>0 Turns on spatial indexing. An integer of up to five
digits is valid. The first three digits refer to model
space, and the remaining two digits refer to paper
space.
<0 Treats model space objects as 2D (Z coordinates are
ignored), as is always the case with paper space ob-
jects. Such a setting is appropriate for 2D drawings
and makes more efficient use of memory without
loss of performance.
NOTE You cannot use TREEDEPTH transparently.
TREEMAX Type: Integer Limits memory consumption during drawing regenera-

Saved in: Registry tion by limiting the number of nodes in the spatial index
Initial value: 10000000 (oct-tree).
By imposing a fixed limit with TREEMAX, you can load

drawings created on systems with more memory than
your system and with a larger TREEDEPTH than your sys-
tem can handle. These drawings, if left unchecked, have
an oct-tree large enough to eventually consume more
memory than is available to your computer. TREEMAX
also provides a safeguard against experimentation with
inappropriately high TREEDEPTH values.
The initial default for TREEMAX is 10000000 (10 million),

a value high enough to effectively disable TREEMAX as a
control for TREEDEPTH. The value to which you should
set TREEMAX depends on your system’s available RAM.
You get about 15,000 oct-tree nodes per megabyte of
RAM.
If you want an oct-tree to use up to, but no more than, 2

megabytes of RAM, set TREEMAX to 30000 (2 x 15,000).
If AutoCAD runs out of memory allocating oct-tree nodes,
restart AutoCAD, set TREEMAX to a smaller number, and
try loading the drawing again.
AutoCAD might occasionally run into the limit you set

with TREEMAX. Follow the resulting prompt instructions.
Your ability to increase TREEMAX depends on your com-
puter’s available memory.

TRIMMODE Type: Integer Controls whether AutoCAD trims selected edges for
Saved in: Registry chamfers and fillets.
Initial value: 1
0 Leaves selected edges intact
1 Trims selected edges to the endpoints of chamfer
lines and fillet arcs
TSPACEFAC Type: Real Controls the multiline text line-spacing distance mea-
Not saved sured as a factor of text height. Valid values are 0.25 to
Initial value: 1.0 4.0.
TSPACETYPE Type: Integer Controls the type of line spacing used in multiline text.
Saved in: Registry At Least adjusts line spacing based on the tallest
Initial value: 1 characters in a line. Exactly uses the specified line
spacing, regardless of individual character sizes.
1 At Least
2 Exactly
TSTACKALIGN Type: Integer Controls the vertical alignment of stacked text.

Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 1 0 Bottom aligned
1 Center aligned
2 Top aligned
TSTACKSIZE Type: Integer Controls the percentage of stacked text fraction height
Saved in: Drawing relative to selected text’s current height. Valid values are
Initial value: 70 from 25 to 125.
UCSAXISANG Type: Integer Stores the default angle when rotating the UCS around
Saved in: Registry one of its axes using the X, Y, or Z options of the UCS
Initial value: 90 command. Its value must be entered as an angle in
degrees (valid values are: 5, 10, 15, 18, 22.5, 30, 45, 90,
180).
UCSBASE Type: String Stores the name of the UCS that defines the origin and
Saved in: Drawing orientation of orthographic UCS settings. Valid values
Initial value: "WORLD" include any named UCS.
TRIMMODE | 1225
UCSFOLLOW Type: Integer Generates a plan view whenever you change from one
Saved in: Drawing UCS to another. Set UCSFOLLOW separately for each
(viewport specific) viewport. If UCSFOLLOW is on for a particular viewport,
Initial value: 0 AutoCAD generates a plan view in that viewport when-
ever you change coordinate systems. Once the new UCS
has been established, you can use DVIEW, PLAN, VIEW, or
VPOINT to change the view of the drawing. It will change
to a plan view again the next time you change coordinate
systems.
0 UCS does not affect the view

1 Any UCS change causes a change to the plan view of
the new UCS in the current viewport
The setting of UCSFOLLOW is maintained separately for

paper space and model space and can be accessed in
either, but the setting is ignored while in paper space (it is
always treated as if set to 0). Although you can define a
non-world UCS in paper space, the view remains in plan
view to the world coordinate system.
UCSICON Type: Integer Displays the UCS icon for the current viewport using
Saved in: Drawing bitcode. UCSICON is both a command and a system
(viewport specific) variable. It is the sum of the following:
Initial value: 3
0 No icon displayed
1 On; icon is displayed
2 Origin; if icon is displayed, the icon floats to the UCS
origin if possible
3 On and displayed at origin
The UCSICON command controls the visibility and place-

ment of the UCS icon. Because entering ucsicon at the
Command prompt invokes the UCSICON command, you
must use the SETVAR command to access the UCSICON
system variable.
UCSNAME (Read-only) Stores the name of the current coordinate system for the
Type: String current viewport in the current space. Returns a null
Saved in: Drawing string if the current UCS is unnamed.
(viewport specific)
UCSORG (Read-only) Stores the origin point of the current coordinate system
Type: 3D point for the current viewport in the current space. This value is
Saved in: Drawing always stored as a world coordinate.
(viewport specific)

UCSORTHO Type: Integer Determines whether the related orthographic UCS
Saved in: Registry setting is restored automatically when an orthographic
Initial value: 1 view is restored.
0 Specifies that the UCS setting remains unchanged

when an orthographic view is restored
1 Specifies that the related orthographic UCS setting is
restored automatically when an orthographic view is
restored
UCSVIEW Type: Integer Determines whether the current UCS is saved with a
Saved in: Registry named view.
Initial value: 1
0 Does not save current UCS with a named view
1 Saves current UCS whenever a named view is created
UCSVP Type: Integer Determines whether the UCS in viewports remains fixed
Saved in: Drawing or changes to reflect the UCS of the current viewport.
(viewport specific)
Initial value: 1 0 Unlocked; UCS reflects the UCS of the current
viewport
1 Locked; UCS stored in viewport, and is independent
of the UCS of the current viewport
UCSXDIR (Read-only) Stores the X direction of the current UCS for the current
Type: 3D point viewport in the current space.
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
UCSYDIR (Read-only) Stores the Y direction of the current UCS for the current
Type: 3D point viewport in the current space.
Saved in: Drawing
(viewport specific)
UNDOCTL (Read-only) Stores a bitcode indicating the state of the Auto and
Type: Integer Control options of the UNDO command. It’s the sum of
Not saved the following values:
0 UNDO is turned off

1 UNDO is turned on
2 Only one command can be undone
4 Auto is turned on
8 A group is currently active
UNDOMARKS (Read-only) Stores the number of marks placed in the UNDO control
Type: Integer stream by the Mark option. The Mark and Back options
Not saved are not available if a group is currently active.
UCSORTHO | 1227
UNITMODE Type: Integer Controls the display format for units.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Displays fractional, feet-and-inches, and surveyor’s
angles as previously set
1 Displays fractional, feet-and-inches, and surveyor’s
angles in input format
USERI1-5 Type: Integer USERI1, USERI2, USERI3, USERI4, and USERI5 are used for
Saved in: Drawing storage and retrieval of integer values.
Initial value: 0
USERR1-5 Type: Real USERR1, USERR2, USERR3, USERR4, and USERR5 are used
Saved in: Drawing for storage and retrieval of real numbers.
USERS1-5 Type: String USERS1, USERS2, USERS3, USERS4, and USERS5 are used
Not saved for storage and retrieval of text string data.
Initial Value: ""
VIEWCTR (Read-only) Stores the center of view in the current viewport.

Type: 3D point Expressed as a UCS coordinate.
Saved in: Drawing
VIEWDIR (Read-only) Stores the viewing direction in the current viewport. Ex-
Type: 3D vector pressed in UCS coordinates. This describes the camera
Saved in: Drawing point as a 3D offset from the target point.
VIEWMODE (Read-only) Stores the View mode for the current viewport using
Type: Integer bitcode. The value is the sum of the following:
Saved in: Drawing
0 Turned off.
1 Perspective view active.
2 Front clipping on.
4 Back clipping on.
8 UCS Follow mode on.
16 Front clip not at eye. If on, the front clip distance
(FRONTZ) determines the front clipping plane. If off,
FRONTZ is ignored, and the front clipping plane is
set to pass through the camera point (vectors behind
the camera are not displayed). This flag is ignored if
the front-clipping bit (2) is off.

VIEWSIZE (Read-only) Stores the height of the current viewport in drawing
Type: Real units.
Saved in: Drawing
VIEWTWIST (Read-only) Stores the view twist angle for the current viewport.
Type: Real
Saved in: Drawing
VISRETAIN Type: Integer Controls the visibility, color, linetype, lineweight, and plot
Saved in: Drawing styles (if PSTYLEPOLICY is set to 0) of xref-dependent
Initial value: 1 layers.
0 The layer table, as stored in the reference drawing

(xref) takes precedence. Changes made to xref-
dependent layers in the current drawing are valid in
the current session only and are not saved with the
drawing. When the current drawing is reopened, the
layer table is reloaded from the reference drawing
and the current drawing reflects those settings. The
layer settings affected are On, Off, Freeze, Thaw,
Color, Ltype, LWeight, and PStyle (if PSTYLEPOLICY is
set to 0).
1 Xref-dependent layer changes made in the current
drawing take precedence. Layer settings are saved
with the current drawing’s layer table and persist
from session to session.
VSMAX (Read-only) Stores the upper-right corner of the current viewport’s

Type: 3D point virtual screen. Expressed as a UCS coordinate.
Saved in: Drawing
VSMIN (Read-only) Stores the lower-left corner of the current viewport’s

Type: 3D point virtual screen. Expressed as a UCS coordinate.
Saved in: Drawing
WHIPARC Type: Integer Controls whether the display of circles and arcs is
Saved in: Registry smooth.
Initial value: 0
0 Circles and arcs are not smooth, but rather are dis-
played as a series of vectors
1 Circles and arcs are smooth, displayed as true circles
and arcs
VIEWSIZE | 1229
WHIPTHREAD Type: Integer Controls whether to use an additional processor (known
Saved in: Registry as multithreaded processing) to improve the speed of
Initial value: 3 operations such as ZOOM and PAN that redraw or
regenerate the drawing. WHIPTHREAD has no effect on
single processor machines.
0 No multithreaded processing; restricts regeneration

and redraw processing to a single processor. This
setting restores the legacy behavior of AutoCAD
2000 and previous releases.
1 Regeneration multithreaded processing only; regen-
eration processing is distributed across two
processors on a multiprocessor machine.
2 Redraw multithreaded processing only; redraw pro-
cessing is distributed across two processors on a
multiprocessor machine.
3 Regeneration and redraw multithreaded processing;
regeneration and redraw processing is distributed
across two processors on a multiprocessor machine.
NOTE When multithreaded processing is used for

redraw operations (value 2 or 3), the order of objects
specified with the DRAWORDER command is not
guaranteed to be preserved for display but is preserved
for plotting.
WMFBKGND Type: Integer Controls whether the background display of AutoCAD

Not saved objects is transparent in other applications when these
Initial value: Off objects are
■ Output to a Windows metafile using the WMFOUT

command
■ Copied to the Clipboard in AutoCAD and pasted as a
Windows metafile
■ Dragged and dropped from AutoCAD as a Windows
metafile
The AutoCAD defined values are:
Off The background color is transparent. The foreground

color will depend on the setting of WMFFOREGND.
On The background color is the same as the AutoCAD
current background color, whether in model space
or in a layout. The foreground color remains
unchanged.

WMFFOREGND Type: Integer Controls the assignment of the foreground color of
Not saved AutoCAD objects in other applications when these
Initial value: Off objects are:
■ Output to a Windows metafile using the WMFOUT

command
■ Copied to the Clipboard in AutoCAD and pasted as a
Windows metafile
■ Dragged and dropped from AutoCAD as a Windows
metafile
WMFFOREGND applies only when WMFBKGND is set to

Off.
The AutoCAD defined values are:
Off The foreground and background colors are swapped

if necessary to ensure that the foreground color is
darker than the background color
On The foreground and background colors are swapped
if necessary to ensure that the foreground color is
lighter than the background color
WORLDUCS (Read-only) Indicates whether the UCS is the same as the WCS.
Type: Integer
Not saved 0 UCS differs from the WCS
1 UCS matches the WCS
WORLDVIEW Type: Integer Determines whether input to the 3DORBIT, DVIEW, and
Saved in: Drawing VPOINT commands is relative to the WCS (default) or the
Initial value: 1 current UCS.
0 UCS remains unchanged

1 UCS changes to the WCS for the duration of the
command; the command input is relative to the cur-
rent UCS
WRITESTAT (Read-only) Indicates whether a drawing file is read-only or can be

Type: Integer written to. For developers who need to determine write
Not saved status through AutoLISP.
Initial value: 1
0 Can’t write to the drawing
1 Can write to the drawing
WMFFOREGND | 1231
XCLIPFRAME Type: Integer Controls the visibility of xref clipping boundaries.
Saved in: Drawing
Initial value: 0 0 Clipping boundary is not visible
1 Clipping boundary is visible
XEDIT Type: Integer Controls whether the current drawing can be edited in-
Saved in: Drawing place when being referenced by another drawing.
Initial value: 1
0 Can’t use in-place reference editing
1 Can use in-place reference editing
XFADECTL Type: Integer Controls the fading intensity percentage for references
Saved in: Registry being edited in-place. Valid values are from 0 to 90
Initial value: 50
XLOADCTL Type: Integer Turns xref demand-loading on and off, and controls
Saved in: Registry whether referenced drawing files are opened or copies of
Initial value: 2 referenced drawing files are opened.
0 Turns off demand-loading; the entire drawing is

loaded.
1 Turns on demand-loading. Referenced drawings are
kept open and locked.
2 Turns on demand-loading. Copies of referenced
drawings are opened and locked; referenced draw-
ings are not locked.
When XLOADCTL is set to 2, a copy of each referenced

drawing file is stored in the folder specified by the
XLOADPATH system variable or the temporary files folder
(set in the Options dialog box). Additionally, xrefs load
faster when you work across a network: the performance
enhancement is most pronounced when you open
drawings with many xrefs.

XLOADPATH Type: String Creates a path for storing temporary copies of demand-
Saved in: Registry loaded xref files. For more information, see XLOADCTL.
Initial value: ""
XREFCTL Type: Integer Controls whether AutoCAD writes external reference log
Saved in: Registry (XLG) files.
Initial value: 0
0 Does not write log files
1 Writes log files
XREFNOTIFY Type: Integer Controls the notification for updated or missing xrefs.
Saved in: Registry
Initial value: 2 0 Disables xref notification
1 Enables xref notification. Notifies you that xrefs are
attached to the current drawing by displaying the
xref icon in the lower-right corner of the application
window (the notification area of the status bar tray).
When you open a drawing, alerts you to missing
xrefs by displaying the xref icon with a yellow alert
symbol (!).
2 Enables xref notification and balloon messages. Dis-
plays the xref icon as in 1 above. Also displays bal-
loon messages in the same area when xrefs are
modified. The number of minutes between checking
for modified xrefs is controlled by the system registry
variable XNOTIFYTIME.
ZOOMFACTOR Type: Integer Accepts an integer between 3 and 100 as valid values.
Saved in: Registry The higher the number, the more incremental the
Initial value: 60 change applied by each forward/backward movement of
a mouse-wheel.
XLOADPATH | 1233
1234
Dimension Variables
Quick Reference
This section shows where dimension variables are set on In this appendix
each tab in the Dimension Styles dialog box and lists the ■ Map of Dimension Variables in
Dimension Style Dialog Boxes
dimension variable settings to use for certain dimension
■ Dimension Variable Settings for
standards. Common Dimensioning
Standards
1235
Map of Dimension Variables in Dimension
Style Dialog Boxes
The illustrations show how the dimension system variables are organized on
tabs in the New Dimension Style dialog box. These system variables are orga-
nized the same way in the Modify Dimension Style and Override Dimension
Style dialog boxes.
DIMCLRD
DIMLWD
DIMDLE
DIMDLI
DIMSD1
DIMSD2
DIMCLRE DIMBLK1
DIMLWE DIMBLK2
DIMLDRBLK
DIMEXE
DIMASZ
DIMEXO
DIMSE1 DIMCEN
DIMSE2
Lines & Arrows tab (New Dimension Style dialog box)
1236 | Appendix C Dimension Variables Quick Reference

DIMTXSTY
DIMCLRT
DIMTXT
DIMTFAC
DIMGAP DIMTOH
DIMTIH
DIMTAD
DIMJUST
DIMGAP
Text tab (New Dimension Style dialog box)
DIMATFIT
DIMTIX
DIMSOXD DIMSCALE
DIMUPT
DIMTMOVE
DIMTOFL
Fit tab (New Dimension Style dialog box)
Map of Dimension Variables in Dimension Style Dialog Boxes | 1237

DIMLUNIT
DIMDEC
DIMFRAC
DIMDSEP
DIMRND
DIMPOST
DIMAUNIT
DIMLFAC
DIMADEC
DIMZIN
DIMAZIN
Primary Units tab (New Dimension Style dialog box)
DIMALT
DIMALTU
DIMALTD
DIMALTF
DIMALTRND
DIMAPOST DIMAPOST
DIMALTZ
Alternate Units tab (New Dimension Style dialog box)

DIMTOL
DIMTDEC
DIMTP
DIMTM
DIMTFAC
DIMTOLJ DIMALTTD
DIMALTTZ
DIMTZIN
Tolerances tab (New Dimension Style dialog box)
Dimension Variable Settings for Common

Dimensioning Standards
The following table lists the dimension system variable settings for certain
common dimensioning standards.
■ ANSI (American National Standards Institute) is the same as the

STANDARD dimension style when you select imperial in Start From
Scratch. ANSI is also the default style for ANSI templates.
■ ISO-25 is the default when you select metric units, and the default ISO
(International Standards Organization) template dimension style.
■ DIN is the default DIN (Deutsches Insitut für Normung eV) template style.
■ JIS is the default JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) template style.
Dimension Variable Settings for Common Dimensioning Standards | 1239

Dimension Style Variables
Variable Description ANSI ISO-25 DIN JIS
DIMADEC Decimal places for angular 0 0 0 0

dimensions
DIMALT Alternate units selected Off Off Off Off
DIMALTD Alternate unit decimal places 2 4 2 2
DIMALTF Alternate unit scale factor 25.4000 0.0394 0.0394 0.0394
DIMALTRND Alternate units rounding 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

value
DIMALTTD Alternate tolerance decimal 2 4 2 2

places
DIMALTTZ Alternate tolerance zero 0 0 0 0

suppression
DIMALTU Alternate units 2 8 8 2
DIMALTZ Alternate unit zero 0 0 0 0

suppression
DIMAPOST Prefix and suffix for alternate

text
DIMASZ Arrow size 0.1800 2.5000 2.5000 2.5000
DIMATFIT Arrow and text fit 3 3 3 3
DIMAUNIT Angular unit format 0 0 0 0
DIMAZIN Angular zero suppression 0 0 0 0
DIMBLK Arrow block name ClosedFilled ClosedFilled ClosedFilled ClosedFilled
DIMBLK1 First arrow block name ClosedFilled ClosedFilled ClosedFilled ClosedFilled
DIMBLK2 Second arrow block name ClosedFilled ClosedFilled ClosedFilled ClosedFilled
DIMCEN Center mark size 0.0900 2.500 2.500 0.0000
DIMCLRD Dimension line and leader ByBlock ByBlock ByBlock ByBlock

color
DIMCLRE Extension line color ByBlock ByBlock ByBlock ByBlock

Dimension Style Variables (continued)
DIMCLRT Dimension text color ByBlock ByBlock ByBlock ByBlock
DIMDEC Decimal places for 4 4 4 4

dimensions
DIMDLE Dimension line extension 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
DIMDLI Dimension line spacing 0.3800 3.7500 3.7500 7.0000
DIMDSEP Decimal separator . , , .
DIMEXE Extension above dimension 0.1800 1.2500 1.2500 1.0000

line
DIMEXO Extension line origin offset 0.0625 0.0625 0.0625 1.0000
DIMFRAC Fraction format 0 0 0 0
DIMGAP Gap from dimension line to 0.0900 0.6250 0.6250 0.0000

text
DIMJUST Justification of text on 0 0 0 0

dimension line
DIMLDRBLK Leader arrowhead block ClosedFilled ClosedFilled ClosedFilled ClosedFilled

name
DIMLFAC Linear unit scale factor 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
DIMLIM Generate dimension limits Off Off Off Off
DIMLUNIT Linear unit format 2 6 6 2
DIMLWD Dimension line and leader -2 -2 -2 -2

lineweight
DIMLWE Extension line lineweight -2 -2 -2 -2
DIMPOST Prefix and suffix for

dimension text
DIMRND Rounding value 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
DIMSAH Separate arrow blocks Off Off Off Off
DIMSCALE Overall scale factor 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000

DIMSD1 Suppress the first dimension Off Off Off Off

line
DIMSD2 Suppress the second Off Off Off Off

dimension line
DIMSE1 Suppress the first extension Off Off Off Off

line
DIMSE2 Suppress the second Off Off Off Off

extension line
DIMSOXD Suppress outside dimension Off Off Off On

lines
DIMTAD Place text above the 0 1 1 1

dimension line
DIMTDEC Tolerance decimal places 4 4 4 4
DIMTFAC Text height within tolerance 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000

objects
DIMTIH Text inside extensions is On Off Off Off

horizontal
DIMTIX Place text inside extensions Off Off Off On
DIMTM Minus tolerance 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
DIMTMOVE Text movement 0 0 0 0
DIMTOFL Force line inside extension Off On On On

lines
DIMTOH Text outside horizontal On Off Off Off
DIMTOL Tolerance dimensioning Off Off Off Off
DIMTOLJ Tolerance vertical justification 1 1 1 1
DIMTP Plus tolerance 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
DIMTSZ Tick size 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
DIMTVP Text vertical position 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

DIMTXSTY Text style STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD
DIMTXT Text height 0.1800 2.5000 2.5000 2.5000
DIMTZIN Tolerance zero suppression 0 0 0 0
DIMUPT User positioned text Off Off Off Off
DIMZIN Zero suppression 0 8 8 8

1244
Utilities
This section describes the AutoCAD® utilities. You run In this appendix
these utilities separately from AutoCAD. ■ Attach Digital Signatures
■ Batch Standards Checker
■ Batch Plot
■ SLIDELIB
1245
Attach Digital Signatures
Attaches a digital signature to files
Start menu (Windows): Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD ➤ Attach Digital
Signatures
Command line: (DOS) AcSignApply.exe
The Attach Digital Signatures dialog box is displayed.
Attach Digital Signatures Dialog Box

Selects the files for attachment of digital signatures.
Files to Be Signed
Lists the names of the files to be signed, the folder in which each file resides,
and the current status of the file.
Add Files
Opens the Select File dialog box, where you select the files for digital signa-
ture.
Search Folders
Opens the Search Folders dialog box, where you can search for files in the
folder you specify.
Remove
Removes selected files from the Files to Be Signed list.
Clear List
Removes all files from the Files to Be Signed list.
Number of Files to Sign
Displays the number of files that the Attach Digital Signatures program will
attempt to sign.
Select a Digital ID (Certificate)
Displays a list of digital IDs that you can use to sign files. Includes informa-
tion about the organization or individual to whom the digital ID was issued,
the digital ID vendor who issued the digital ID, and when the digital ID
expires.
Signature Information
Provides a list of time services you can use to add a time stamp to your digital
signature, the status of the time server connection, and a Comments area (to
include information relevant to the digital signature or to the files you are
signing).
1246 | Appendix D Utilities

Get Time Stamp From
Provides a list of time servers you can use to time stamp your digital signature
and includes the connection status of the time server.
Time Service Status
Displays the connection status (Successfully Contacted Time Server or Could
Not Contact Time Server) of the time service.
Comment
Provides a place to include information relevant to the digital signature or to
the files you are signing.
Sign Files
Attaches a digital signature to every file listed in this dialog box.
Search Folders Dialog Box

Searches for folders that contain files you want to digitally sign.
Start in Folder
Enters the name of the folder where you want to begin the search for files you
want to sign.
Include Subfolders
Searches subfolders of the folder in the Start in Folder box.
Browse
Opens the Browse for Folder dialog box, where you can choose a folder to
search.
Search for Files Named
Searches for the file type you specify.
You can specify DWG, DWS, and DWT files, as well as EXE and ZIP files gen-
erated by eTransmit.
Batch Standards Checker

Audits a set of drawings for standards violations
Start menu (Windows): Programs ➤ Autodesk ➤ AutoCAD ➤ Batch
Standards Checker
The Batch Standards Checker is displayed.
Attach Digital Signatures | 1247

Batch Standards Checker
The Batch Standards Checker audits a series of drawings for standards viola-
tions and creates an XML-based summary report detailing all violations. To
use the Batch Standards Checker, you must first create a standards check file
that specifies the drawings to audit and the standards files used for the audit.
The Batch Standards Checker contains the following tabs:
■ Drawings
■ Standards
■ Plug-ins
■ Notes
■ Progress
The Batch Standards Checker toolbar contains additional options.
Drawings Tab (Batch Standards Checker)

Allows you to create a list of drawings to audit for standards violations.
Drawings to Lists the drawings to audit for standards violations. To
Check add a drawing, click Add Drawing. To remove a
drawing, click Remove Drawing. An exclamation mark
precedes any drawings that the Batch Standards
Checker can’t locate. Drawings are audited in the order
in which they are listed. To reorder drawings in the list,
click Move Up or Move Down.
Add Standards Opens a standard file selection dialog box, where you
File can locate and select a drawing to audit.
Remove Drawing Removes a drawing from the list displayed in Drawings
to Check.
Move Up Moves the currently selected drawing up one position
in the list displayed in Drawings to Check.
Move Down Moves a standards file down one position in the list
displayed in Standards Used for Checking All Drawings.
Description Provides summary information about the drawing file
currently selected in Drawings to Check.
Check External Determines if external references (xrefs) are added to
References of the Drawings to Check list. If checked, external
Listed Drawings references are added to the list as soon as you start a
batch standards audit.

Standards Tab (Batch Standards Checker)
Allows you to specify what standards files are used to verify named objects
during the batch standards audit.
Check Each Specifies auditing each drawing using the standards files
Drawing Using that are associated with it. If this option is selected, the
Its Associated remaining options on the tab are not available.
Standards Files
Check All Specifies ignoring the standards files that are associated
Drawings with individual drawings and using the ones you select in
Using the Standards Used for Checking All Drawings instead.
Following
Standards Files
Standards Lists the standards files used to audit the drawings. To add
Used for a standards file, click Add Standards File. To remove a
Checking All standards file, click Remove Standards File. If conflicts
Drawings arise between multiple standards in this list (for example,
if two standards files specify layers of the same name but
with different properties), the standards file that is shown
first in the list takes precedence. To change the position of
a standards file in the list, select it and click Move Up or
Move Down.
Add Standards Adds a standards file to the list displayed in Standards
File Used for Checking All Drawings.
Remove Removes a standards file from the list displayed in
Standards File Standards Used for Checking All Drawings.
Move Up Moves a standards file up one position in the list displayed
in Standards Used for Checking All Drawings.
Move Down Moves a standards file down one position in the list
displayed in Standards Used for Checking All Drawings.
Description Provides summary information about the standards file
Plug-ins Tab (Batch Standards Checker)

Lists the standards plug-ins that are installed on the current system. A stan-
dards plug-in is installed for each of the named objects for which standards
can be defined (layers, dimension styles, linetypes, and text styles). In the
future, it is expected that third-party applications will be able to install
additional plug-ins.

Plug-ins Used Displays a list of all the standards plug-ins on the current
When system. You specify at least one plug-in to use when
Checking auditing a drawing by selecting from the list. The selected
Standards plug-ins are used when checking standards for the entire
series of drawings.
Description Provides summary information about the plug-in
Notes Tab (Batch Standards Checker)

Allows you to add notes to the XML report.
Enter Notes to Allows you to enter additional notes for inclusion in the
Include in report.
Report
Progress Tab (Batch Standards Checker)

Provides summary information about the status of the current batch stan-
dards audit.
Batch Standards Checker Toolbar
New Creates a new standards

check file with a .chx file
name extension. Standards
check files specify what
drawings and standards files
are used by the batch audit.
Open Opens a standard file

selection dialog box, where
you can select a standards
check file.
Save Saves the current standards

check file.
Save As Opens a standard file save

dialog box, where you can
specify a name and location
to save a standards check file.

Start Check Begins a batch audit using the
currently loaded standards
check file. This button is
available only when you have
added drawings, associated a
standards file, and selected at
least one plug-in to use when
checking for standards
violations.
Stop Check Stops a previously started

batch audit operation. This
button is available only if a
batch audit is currently in
progress.
View Report Displays an HTML report

summarizing the results of
the batch audit. This button is
available when a batch audit
report is available for viewing.
The contents of the report are
included with the standards
check file.
Export Report Exports an HTML report that

can be distributed to other
users. This button is available
only when a batch audit has
been completed and a report
is available to export. This
button also allows you to
optimize existing XML reports
that were created with a
previous version of the CAD
Standards feature, in order to
improve report printing
quality.

AutoCAD Batch Plot
Automatically plots multiple AutoCAD drawings on one or more devices
The Batch Plot utility builds a list of AutoCAD drawings to be plotted. You
can use the list to plot immediately or save the list in a batch plot list (BP3)
file.
For more information about using the Batch Plot utility, see “Plot Batches of
Drawings” in the User’s Guide.
SLIDELIB
Compiles slide files listed in an ASCII file into a slide library file
You can construct slide library files (SLB) from slide files (SLD) by using the
SLIDELIB utility program supplied in the AutoCAD support directory. The fol-
lowing operating system command line syntax constructs a slide library:
slidelib library [ < slidelist ]
where
library specifies the slide library file (extension .slb) into which the slide files
(extension .sld) are added. slidelist specifies a list of slide files. If you want to
specify a file extension, it must be .sld.
SLIDELIB reads a list of slide file names. This list is normally supplied by redi-
recting a list of files (one per line in another file created using a text editor or
a user-supplied utility program) to standard input.
The operating system commands shown below will create a slidelist file that
can be used with SLIDELIB. All the slide files you want to compile into a slide
library should be placed in a single directory. At a DOS prompt (version 5.0
or newer), enter the following:
dir *.sld /b > mylist
This creates the mylist file, which you can pass to SLIDELIB. You can also
create the mylist file with a text editor by listing the slide file names (and
paths, if necessary), such as lobby, d:\slides\office, and \aec\slides\stairs. The
slide file name, but not the drive and directory information, is saved in the
library file. Because only the file name is included, a library can contain slides
with the same name from different directories, but AutoCAD can access only
one of the slides.
To generate the slide library mlib from mylist, enter the following:
slidelib mlib < mylist

This entry creates the file mlib.slb, which contains the names and definitions
of the slides listed in mylist.
Warning! Do not delete your original slides. SLIDELIB has no provision for
updating a slide library once it is created. If you want to add or delete a slide,
update the slidelist file and re-create the library with SLIDELIB. All the original
slides must be present in order to do this.

1254
Standard Libraries
AutoCAD® provides standard library files for you to In this appendix

define linetypes, hatch patterns, text fonts, and symbols ■ Standard Linetypes
■ Complex Linetypes
for geometric dimensioning and tolerancing. This sec-
■ Standard Hatch Patterns
tion provides illustrations of the contents of these files.
■ PostScript Fill Patterns
■ Standard Text and Symbol Fonts
■ TrueType Fonts
■ Geometric Characteristic
Symbols
1255
Standard Linetypes
AutoCAD provides a library of standard linetypes in the acad.lin file.
Border
Border2
BorderX2
Center
Center2
CenterX2
Dashdot
Dashdot2
DashdotX2
Dashed
Dashed2
DashedX2
Divide
Divide2
DivideX2
Dot
Dot2
DotX2
Hidden
Hidden2
HiddenX2
Phantom
Phantom2
PhantomX2
1256 | Appendix E Standard Libraries

AutoCAD provides a library of ISO linetypes in the acad.lin file.
ACAD_ISO02W1000
ACAD_ISO03W1000
ACAD_ISO04W1000
ACAD_ISO05W1000
ACAD_ISO06W1000
ACAD_ISO07W1000
ACAD_ISO08W1000
ACAD_ISO09W1000
ACAD_ISO010W1000
ACAD_ISO011W1000
ACAD_ISO012W1000
ACAD_ISO013W1000
ACAD_ISO014W1000
ACAD_ISO015W1000
Complex Linetypes
AutoCAD provides some sample complex linetypes in the ltypeshp.lin file.
FENCELINE1
FENCELINE2
TRACKS
BATTING
HOW_WATER_SUPPLY
GAS_LINE
ZIGZAG
Complex Linetypes | 1257

Standard Hatch Patterns
AutoCAD provides a library of standard hatch patterns in the acad.pat file.
ANGLE ANS131 ANS132
ANS133 ANS134 ANS135
ANS136 ANS137 AND138
AR-B816 AR-B816C AR-B88

AR-BRELM AR-BRSTD AR-CONC
AR-HBONE AR-PARQ1 AR-RROOF
AR-RSHAKE AR-SAND AR-BOX
BRASS BRICK BRSTONE
Standard Hatch Patterns | 1259

CLAY CORK CROSS
DASH DOLMIT DOTS
EARTH ESCHER FLEX
GRASS GRATE HEX

HONEY HOUND INSUL
LINE MUDST NET
NET3 PLAST PLASTI
SACNCR SQUARE STARS

STEEL SWAMP TRANS
TRIANG ZIGZAG ACAD_ISO02W100
ACAD_ISO03W100 ACAD_ISO04W100 ACAD_ISO05W100
ACAD_ISO06W100 ACAD_ISO07W100 ACAD_ISO08W100

ACAD_ISO09w 100 ACAD_ISO10w 100 ACAD_ISO11w 100
ACAD_ISO12w 100 ACAD_ISO13 100 ACAD_ISO14w 100
ACAD_ISO15w 100

PostScript Fill Patterns
AutoCAD provides standard PostScript fill patterns in the acad.psf file.
RGBCOLOR is designed for color output. On monochrome output, it appears
aaaaa
as a shade of gray.
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa

GRAYSCALE RGBCOLOR
aaaaaAILOGO

LINEARGRAY RADIALGRAY SQUARE

WAFFLE ZIGZAG STARS

BRICK SPECKS

Standard Text and Symbol Fonts
AutoCAD provides numerous text and symbol fonts. You can expand, com-
press, or slant these fonts as needed. You can also draw text of any height, at
any baseline angle, and with horizontal or vertical orientation.
In all but the monospaced text font (monotxt), characters are proportionally
spaced; that is, the space needed for the letter i is narrower than that for the
letter m. Each font resides in a separate disk file with the name font.shx.
AutoCAD provides font.shp files that you can use as examples if you want to
define your own text fonts.
Each font includes the standard punctuation characters and numbers, but
several fonts provide special alphabets or symbols that you access by typing
particular keys on the keyboard.
List of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts

The fonts in the table are supplied with AutoCAD.
Standard text and symbol fonts
Font Description
txt The standard AutoCAD text font. This simple font is described by a minimum
of vectors so it can be drawn very quickly.
monotxt Monospaced txt font. The characters in this font are the same as those in the
txt font, except that the space allotted to each character is the same (mono-
spaced). Thus, this font is preferable for construction of lists or tables where
the items must line up vertically.
romans A simplex (single stroke, sans serif) roman font drawn by means of many
short line segments. This font produces smoother-looking characters than
those of the txt font.
romand Similar to the romans font, but defined using double strokes. This font
produces thicker, darker characters and is highly recommended for plot-
ting on high-resolution printers such as laser printers.
romanc A complex (double stroke, with serifs) roman font.
romant A triplex (triple stroke, with serifs) roman font similar to romanc.
italicc A complex italic font (double stroke, with serifs).
italict A triplex italic font (triple stroke, with serifs).
Standard Text and Symbol Fonts | 1265

Standard text and symbol fonts (continued)
Font Description
scripts A simplex script font (single stroke).
scriptc A complex script font (double stroke).
greeks A simplex Greek font (single stroke, sans serif).
greekc A complex Greek font (double stroke, with serifs).
gothice Gothic English.
gothicg Gothic German.
gothici Gothic Italian.
syastro Astronomical symbols.
symap Mapping symbols.
symath Mathematical symbols.
symeteo Meteorological symbols.
symusic Musical symbols.

Examples of Standard Text and Symbol Fonts
The fonts in the following examples are supplied with AutoCAD.
Fast fonts
txt
monotxt
Simplex fonts
romans
scripts
greeks
Duplex fonts
romand
ISO fonts
isocp
isoct
Triplex fonts
romant
italict
Complex fonts
romanc
italicc
scriptc
greekc
Gothic fonts
gothice
gothicg
gothici
Standard Text and Symbol Fonts | 1267

Symbol Fonts
syastro
symap
symath
symeteo
symusic
TrueType Fonts
The following TrueType® fonts (file name extension .ttf ) are provided with
AutoCAD. To see an example of each font, open the truetype.dwg drawing.
TrueType fonts
TrueType font family Type Font name Description
Swiss 721 Regular sans serif swiss roman

swissl light
swissli light italic
swissi italic
swissb bold
swissbi bold italic
swissk black
swisski black italic
Swiss 721 Condensed sans serif, swissc condensed

condensed swisscl condensed light
swisscli condensed light italic
swissci condensed italic
swisscb condensed bold
swisscbi condensed bold italic
swissck condensed black
swisscki condensed black italic
Swiss 721 Expanded sans serif, swisse expanded

expanded swisseb expanded bold
swissek expanded black
Swiss 721 Outline sans serif, swissbo bold outline

outlined swissko black outline
swisscbo condensed bold outline

TrueType fonts (continued)
TrueType font family Type Font name Description
Monospace 821 sans serif, monos roman

monospace monosi italic
monosb bold
monosbi bold italic
Dutch 801 Regular serif dutch roman

dutchi italic
dutchb bold
dutchbi bold italic
Dutch 801 Expanded serif, expanded dutcheb expanded bold
Bank Gothic all caps bgothl light

bgothm medium
Commercial Script script comsc regular
Vineta shadow vinet regular
Commercial Pi symbol compi regular
Universal Math 1 math umath regular
Geometric Characteristic Symbols

The following table shows the geometric characteristic symbols used in geo-
metric tolerancing. These symbols adhere to both ANSI and ISO standards.
Geometric characteristic symbols
Symbol Name
Position
Concentricity/coaxiality
Symmetry
Parallelism
Perpendicularity
Angularity
Geometric Characteristic Symbols | 1269

Geometric characteristic symbols (continued)
Symbol Name
Cylindricity
Flatness
Circularity or roundness
Straightness
Profile of a surface
Profile of a line
Circular runout
Total runout
Diameter
Maximum material condition (MMC)
Least material condition (LMC)
Regardless of feature size (RFS)
Projected tolerance

AutoCAD Graphical
Objects
Every piece of geometry you create is a distinct In this appendix

AutoCAD® object type. Most AutoCAD object types ■ Descriptions of the AutoCAD
object types with related
can take several forms. For example, polygons and commands
rectangles are both polyline objects. Boxes, cones, and
cylinders are all three-dimensional solid (3DSolid)
objects.
1271
The table lists the AutoCAD object types and their descriptions. Use LIST to
identify the object type of any piece of geometry.
AutoCAD Graphical Objects
Object type Description
3DFace A 3D triangular or quadrilateral plane section.

Related command: 3DFACE
3DSolid A solid object with free-form surface support.

Related commands: AMECONVERT, BOX, CONE, CYLINDER,
EXTRUDE, INTERSECT, REVOLVE, SLICE, SPHERE, SUBTRACT,
TORUS, WEDGE, UNION
Arc A circular arc.

Related command: ARC
Attribute Definition A text string that describes the characteristics of an attribute.

Related command: ATTDEF
Attribute An object containing text that links to a block.

Related commands: ATTEXT, BLOCK, INSERT, MINSERT
Body Any structure that uniformly represents solids and free-form,

trimmed, nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS) surfaces.
Related commands: ACISIN, EXPLODE
Circle A full circle.

Related command: CIRCLE
Dimension An object that can be composed of a dimension line, extension

lines, arrowheads, a leader, and annotative text including
alphanumeric characters and tolerances. Dimensions are
measurements of a particular type, which include Aligned,
Rotated, Radial, Diametric, 2LineAngular, 3PointAngular, and
Ordinate.
Related commands: DIMALIGNED, DIMANGULAR,
DIMBASELINE, DIMCENTER, DIMCONTINUE, DIMDIAMETER,
DIMLINEAR, DIMORDINATE, DIMRADIUS
Ellipse (including A full ellipse.

elliptical arcs)
Related command: ELLIPSE
1272 | Appendix F AutoCAD Graphical Objects

AutoCAD Graphical Objects (continued)
End Sequence An object that marks the ending vertex of a polyline or the end
of an inserted block’s attributes. Optimized polylines do not
have an end sequence.
Related commands: 3DMESH, 3DPOLY, BOUNDARY, ELLIPSE,
INSERT, MINSERT, PFACE, PLINE, POLYGON
Hatch A pattern of lines repeated at a specified angle and spacing. The

object is repeated or clipped to fit the area being hatched.
Related commands: BHATCH, HATCH
Image An object that contains and displays a raster or bit-mapped

bitonal, 8-bit gray, 8-bit color, or 24-bit color image file. Valid file
types include BMP, TIFF, RLE, JPG, PCX, and TGA.
Related commands: IMAGE, IMAGEATTACH
Insert (also known as An object that references and displays an external reference or a
a Block Reference) block (this includes both single block instances inserted with
INSERT and multiple block instances inserted in a rectangular
array with MINSERT).
Related commands: INSERT, MINSERT, XATTACH, XREF
Leader A polyline with or without an arrow at one end and annotative

text at the other.
Related command: LEADER
Line A single line segment.

Related command: LINE
Lwpolyline A 2D line of adjustable width composed of line and arc

segments. Lightweight polylines are optimized to display more
quickly than standard polylines and save system resources. The
decision to use a lightweight polyline or a standard polyline is
controlled by the PLINETYPE system variable.
Related commands: BOUNDARY, DONUT, PLINE, POLYGON,
RECTANG
Mline An object composed of multiple parallel lines.

Related command: MLINE
Multiline Text A paragraph of alphanumeric characters.

Related command: MTEXT
AutoCAD Graphical Objects | 1273

Point A point marker that can appear as a dot, square, circle, X, tick, or
plus sign (+), or as a combination of these figures.
Related commands: POINT, DIVIDE, MEASURE
Polyline A 2D line or mesh of adjustable width or a 3D line or mesh of

nonadjustable width composed of line and arc segments. The
decision to use a polyline or a lightweight polyline is con-
trolled by the PLINETYPE system variable.
Related commands: 3DMESH, 3DPOLY, BOUNDARY, DONUT,
EDGESURF, ELLIPSE, PFACE, PLINE, POLYGON, RECTANG,
REVSURF, RULESURF, TABSURF
Proxy A substitute object that represents an original object whose

parent ObjectARX™ application is currently not loaded.
Ray A construction line infinite in one direction.

Related command: RAY
Region A bounded planar face that can contain lines, circles, arcs,
elliptical arcs, and spline curves.
Related commands: AMECONVERT, BOUNDARY, EXPLODE,
INTERSECT, REGION, SECTION, SUBTRACT, UNION
Shape An object containing lines, arcs, and circles and defined in an

SHX file.
Related commands: COMPILE, LOAD, SHAPE
Solid A filled 2D area.

Related command: SOLID
Spline A quadratic or cubic nonuniform rational B-spline (NURBS)

curve.
Related command: SPLINE
Text A single line of alphanumeric characters.

Related commands: STYLE, TEXT
Tolerance An object that shows deviations of form, profile, orientation,

location, and runout of a feature, contained in a feature control
frame.
Related command: TOLERANCE
Trace A 2D solid line of specified width.

Related command: TRACE
1274 | Appendix F AutoCAD Graphical Objects

Wipeout Covers existing objects with a blank area.

Related command: WIPEOUT
Vertex For 3D meshes, the point at which the sides of an angle

intersect. For polylines, the point at which line or arc segments
intersect.
Related commands: 3DMESH, 3DPOLY, EDGESURF, PFACE,
PLINE, REVSURF, RULESURF, TABSURF
Viewport A rectangular area in paper space that contains a view of model

space.
Related command: VPORTS
Xline A construction line infinite in both directions.

Related command: XLINE
AutoCAD Graphical Objects | 1275

1276
Unicode
When you open drawings created in other countries, In this appendix

you may need to be familiar with Unicode fonts. ■ Overview of Unicode Fonts
■ Code Page Independent Format
Understanding Unicode fonts is also required if you
(CIF)
frequently enter hexadecimal equivalents of Unicode ■ Multibyte Interchange Format
(MIF)
characters while using one of the text commands. This
■ Code Page Information
topic describes Unicode fonts and how they are used
with AutoCAD®.
1277
Overview of Unicode Fonts
AutoCAD supports the Unicode character encoding standard, which pro-
vides a unique number for every character, regardless of the platform, pro-
gram, or language. A Unicode font can contain 65,535 characters, including
those for many languages. Unicode fonts contain many more characters than
those defined in your operating system’s code page. Most AutoCAD fonts are
Unicode-encoded. Fonts that are not Unicode-encoded include
■ Syastro
■ Symath
■ Symeteo
■ Symbol
■ Symusic
■ Symap
Code Page Independent Format (CIF)

The Code Page Independent format (CIF) enables drawings to be opened
both in the language the drawing was created and in the language of a
different country to which the drawing might be sent without any loss of
information.
The current code page is dependent upon the operating system. To change
the code page, see your operating system documentation. When you open a
drawing containing fonts or characters unsupported by your operating
system, the unsupported characters are converted to control characters with
the format \U+xxxx before a text string is actually drawn. U represents the
Unicode shape number, and xxxx is the hexadecimal value of the Unicode
character.
You can enter Unicode hexadecimal values for all Unicode-encoded fonts
using any of the text commands.
For example, if the phrase
were converted to CIF, it would look like this:

JA, DET \U+00C4R DANS PA BR\U+00C4NN\U+00D6 BRYGGA
Converting this string back to its original Unicode font would bring back all
the original characters.
1278 | Appendix G Unicode

Note These control characters are also used by the AutoCAD database handler.
Any Unicode shape numbers not representable in the current code page are
converted to such control codes.
Characters in text strings that are unavailable in the current font, including
any Unicode control characters, are displayed as question marks. However,
Unicode control characters are not interpreted if the current font does not
support Unicode. In that case, the control characters are displayed literally.
You can use Unicode fonts (as the normal font) in conjunction with Big
Fonts.
The special dimensioning symbols degree sign (°), plus-or-minus sign(±), and
diameter symbol (∅) in a font are assigned to the hexadecimal Unicode
values in the following table.
Special symbol values
Symbol Value
Degree sign 0x00B0
Plus or minus sign 0x00B1
Diameter symbol 0x2205
Note You can also use the (degree sign) %%d (°), (plus or minus sign) %%p
(±), and (diameter symbol) %%c (∅) with Unicode fonts, as with regular
AutoCAD fonts. These symbols can also be accessed from the shortcut menu
in the Multiline Text Editor.
You can mix \U+ (CIF) sequences with normal text, for example
"A \U+0074ext string"
This string is displayed as
"A text string"
Because t exists in every system code page, the sequence is converted to a real
character when the object is regenerated.
Warning! If you are using CIF sequences as symbol table names, they must be
entered correctly. Otherwise, you can corrupt your drawing.
Code Page Independent Format (CIF) | 1279

Multibyte Interchange Format (MIF)
The Multibyte Interchange format (MIF) converts Asian language character
strings. The following string represents an Asian character displayed on a
system other than the native one:
\M+nxxxx
Multibyte shape number. The n is a digit identifying the originating multi-
byte code page ID. The xxxx is the hexadecimal value of the multibyte
character.
The code page identifications that AutoCAD supports are listed in the
following table.
Supported code page identification
Code page ID Code page number Language
0 undefined Undefined
1 932 Japanese (Shift-JIS)
2 950 Traditional Chinese (Big 5)
3 949 Wansung (KS C-5601-1987)
4 1361 Johab (KS C-5601-1992)
5 936 Simplified Chinese (GB 2312-80)
If a Big Font is used, the sequence is converted to a 16-bit value, and if a

character exists for it, that character is drawn in the drawing area.
Characters that don’t readily map in the system-character representation
appear in DXF as \U+xxxx sequences or as \M+nxxxx sequences for multibyte
code pages (non-Unicode mapped). Also, 8-bit and multibyte characters, as
well as \U+xxxx and \M+nxxxx sequences, are accepted in symbol table
names.
Warning! If you are using MIF sequences as symbol table names, they must
be entered correctly. Otherwise, you can corrupt your drawing.
1280 | Appendix G Unicode

Code Page Information
You can find out which code page or language is installed on your operating
system by double-clicking the Regional Settings or Regional Options icon in
the Control Panel. (On some platforms you need to choose the International
Settings icon.) For more information, see your Windows® documentation.
To find out which code page AutoCAD is referencing, enter syscodepage at
the Command prompt.
The following table lists all the ANSI code pages supported by Windows.
ANSI code pages supported by Windows
Identifier Meaning
874 Thai
932 Japanese
936 Chinese (PRC, Singapore)
949 Korean
950 Chinese (Taiwan, Hong Kong)
1200 Unicode (BMP of ISO 10646)
1250 Windows 3.1 Eastern European
1251 Windows 3.1 Cyrillic
1252 Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (U.S., Western Europe)
1253 Windows 3.1 Greek
1254 Windows 3.1 Turkish
1255 Hebrew
1256 Arabic
1257 Baltic
Code Page Information | 1281

1282
Command Modifiers
You can use command modifiers to help you locate In this appendix
points or select objects while a command is in progress. ■ Coordinate Filters (Command
Modifier)
Use the Coordinate Filter, Direct Distance Entry, From,
■ Direct Distance Entry
and Tracking command modifiers at any prompt that (Command Modifier)
■ FROM (Command Modifier)
requires point specification. Use the Selection Mode
■ TRACKING (Command
command modifiers at any prompt that requires object Modifier)
selection. ■ Object Snaps (Command

Modifier)
■ Selection Modes (Command
Modifier)
1283
Coordinate Filters (Command Modifier)
Combines X, Y, and Z values from different points to specify a single point
Command line: Enter .x, .y, .xy, .xz, or .yz
At any AutoCAD prompt for locating a point, you can enter point filters to
specify a single coordinate by extracting the X, Y, and Z values of several
points. In the following example, the start point for the line has a coordinate
constructed from the X value of the midpoint of the first object you select,
with the Y and Z values of the midpoint of the second object you select.
Command: line
Specify first point: .x
of mid
of Select an object
of (need YZ) mid
of Select another object
To point: Specify a point
Direct Distance Entry (Command Modifier)

Locates the next point at a specified distance in the direction of your cursor
Command line: At a prompt to locate a point, enter a numeric value
With direct distance entry, you can quickly specify a point relative to the last
point you entered. At any AutoCAD prompt for a point location, you move
the cursor first to specify the direction, and then enter a numeric distance.
In the following example, the second point for the line will be located 5 units
toward the direction of the cursor. The direct distance that you enter is mea-
sured along the path from the last point to the current location of the cursor.
This feature is usually used with Ortho or Snap mode turned on.
Command: line
Specify next point: Move the cursor in the desired direction and enter 5
1284 | Appendix H Command Modifiers

FROM (Command Modifier)
Locates a point offset from a reference point within a command
Object Snap toolbar:

Command line: At a prompt to locate a point, enter from
Base Point: Specify a point to use as a base point

of <offset>: Enter a relative offset
At an AutoCAD prompt for locating a point, enter from, and then enter a
temporary reference or base point from which you can specify an offset to
locate the next point. Enter the offset location from this base point as a
relative coordinate, or use direct distance entry.
Note You cannot use this method during dragging in commands such as
MOVE and COPY. Specifying an absolute coordinate, either by keyboard entry or
with a pointing device, cancels the FROM command.
TRACKING (Command Modifier)

Locates a point from a series of temporary points
Command line: At a prompt to locate a point, enter tracking
Tracking turns on Ortho mode and can be used with Snap mode.
At any AutoCAD prompt to locate a point, enter tracking, track, or tk.
First tracking point: Specify a location or distance
Next point (Press ENTER to end tracking): Specify a second location or distance
Tracking specifies a series of temporary points, each offset from the previous
one. Thus, you specify a new point location from a series of directions and
distances. To determine the location of each temporary point, you can use
direct distance entry. First move the cursor to specify the direction, and then
enter a numeric distance.
FROM (Command Modifier) | 1285

Alternatively, tracking can establish a new point by combining the X and Y
values of two specified points. You can specify these two points in any order,
depending on the cursor direction after the first point. Direct distance entry
specifies a distance in the direction of the current location of your cursor.
Coordinate filters combine X, Y, and Z values from different points into a sin-
gle point. Relative coordinate entry locates a point relative to the last point
entered.
You can also access tracking by holding down SHIFT and right-clicking to dis-
play the object snap shortcut menu.
Object Snaps (Command Modifier)

Specifies a snap point at an exact location on an object
Command line: At a prompt to locate a point, enter one of the valid object snap
modes described in the -OSNAP command, or choose an object snap from the Object
Snap toolbar
When you specify an object snap, the cursor changes to an object snap target
box. When you select an object, AutoCAD snaps to the eligible snap point
closest to the center of the target box or aperture.
If you choose an individual object snap on the toolbar, or enter its name on
the command line, the snap stays in effect only for the next point you spec-
ify. Using the OSNAP command, you can set running object snaps, that is, one
or more object snaps that remain in effect as you work. Choose None to turn
off both single and running object snaps.
Selection Modes (Command Modifier)

Controls how you create selection sets
Command line: At a prompt to select objects, enter one of the valid selection modes
described in the SELECT command
The selection mode you enter remains active only for the current Select
Objects prompt.
1286 | Appendix H Command Modifiers

Index
.chx extension for standards check files, 1250 3D objects (continued)

< > (angle brackets), 752 removing hidden lines in. See removing
$#$ prefixes on names, 834 hidden lines in 3D objects
255 AutoCAD colors. See AutoCAD Color Index rendering options, 23
(ACI) 3DCONFIG command
< > (angle brackets) about, 20
generated measurement indicators, 269, acceleration, 25
272 adaptive degradation, 21
prefixes and suffixes in annotations, 484 dynamic tessellation, 22
' (apostrophe), transparent command character, geometry, 24
3 render options, 23
* (asterisk) ° (degree sign), creating, 589, 1027
as a wild-card character, 843 ∅ (diameter symbol), entering, 589, 1027, 1031
to write an entire drawing to an output file, $ (dollar sign)
1115 external reference names, 1144, 1145
as a wild-card character, 50 in dependent symbols, 1130, 1132
finding files, 626 3DORBITCTR command, 35
@ (at sign) .dxx extension for DXF template extraction files,
to reference the last point, 423 92, 94
\ (backslash) [...] (ellipsis) button, 458
in attribute definitions, 90 = (equal sign)
to select null attribute values, 89 specifying same name for a block and output
^ (caret) file, 1115
stacked text indicator, 578, 584 (Euro symbol), 580
crtc notation, 590 ! (exclamation mark), for drawings not located in
3D Graphics System Configuration dialog box batch standards audits, 1248
about, 667 / (forward slash), stacked text indicator, 578, 584
displaying, 652 % (percent sign)
dynamic tessellation, 667 entering, 1027
object smoothness, 667 . (period), to access a built-in AutoCAD
3D objects command, 1070
adaptive degradation, 21 + (plus sign)
command line options, 20 UCS icon symbol, 1060
display options, 651 # (pound sign), stacked text indicator, 578, 584
dynamic tessellation, 22
geometry, 24
1287
? (question mark) 3D solid faces (continued)
as wild card for searching, 50 moving, 952
finding files, 626 of polyface meshes, defining, 711
[ ] (square brackets) offsetting, 956
generated measurement indicators, 273 properties of, 774
~ (tilde) render options for, 885, 887, 890
to display a standard file selection dialog rotating, 953
box, 544, 691, 826, 1002, 612, tapering, 956
632 undoing actions to, 949, 959, 963
± (tolerance symbol), entering, 589, 1027, 589 3D solid properties, 774
_ (underscore character), in field names, 354 3D solids
| (vertical bar) See also solids
in dependent symbols, 1130, 1132, 1145 3D Studio File Export Options dialog box, 40
2D UCS icon, 1061, 1063 3D Studio File Import Options dialog box, 37
broken pencil icon replacement, 1061 3D Studio files
2D viewport configuration setup, 1106, 1107 exporting to, 39
2P circle specification, 168 importing, 37
3 Point method for defining a UCS, 1053 3D UCS icon, 1061, 1063
3D arrays, 16 3D viewing direction, setting, 250
3D boxes, 7 3D viewport configuration setup, 1106, 1107
3D command, 7 3DARRAY command, 16
3D face properties, 774 3DCLIP command
3D faces about, 18
changing edge visibility of, 355 3DCORBIT command, 26, 32
creating, 27 3DDISTANCE command, 27, 32
3D mirror images, 554 3DFACE command, 27
3D Orbit shortcut menu, 33 3DFace object type, 1272
3D Orbit view 3DMESH command, 29
properties displayed in, 773 3DORBIT command
3D Orbit view, center of rotation, 35 about, 30
3D Orbit view properties, 773 cursor icons, 31
3D polygon mesh objects presetting the view, 34
creating, 357 projection options, 33
editing, 707 resetting the view, 34
3D polylines shading modes, 33
adding vertices to, 705 starting 3DCLIP with, 18
aligning the axis of rotation with, 954 starting 3DCORBIT with, 26
closed, 704 starting 3DDISTANCE with, 27
converting to splines, 981 starting 3DPAN with, 35
creating, 36 starting 3DSWIVEL with, 42
decurving, 707 starting 3DZOOM with, 42
editing vertices of, 705 target point of, 30
exploding, 369 view options, 32
opening, 704 visual aids, 34
properties of, 788 3DORBIT shortcut menu, 32
trimming, 1047 3DPAN command, 32, 35
3D projection coordinates for mapping, 927 3DPOLY command, 36
3D rectangular arrays, 16 3DSIN command
3D solid edges about, 37
changing color of, 960 3DSolid object type, 1272
copying, 959 3DSOUT command
removing from a selection set, 960 about, 39
undoing changes to, 960, 963 3DSWIVEL command, 32, 42
3D solid faces, 957 3DZOOM command, 32, 42
changing color of, 958 3P circle specification, 167
creating, 27 ° (degree sign), creating, 1027
extruding, 948
1288 | Index
3DCONFIG command adaptive sampling
using Lights option to display lights in render options, 889
drawing, 489 ADCCLOSE command, 44
ADCENTER command
DesignCenter, 45
A Search dialog box, 49
ABOUT command, 43 ADCNAVIGATE command, 52
abs function (CAL command), 143 ADCSTATE system variable, 1162
AC$ (temporary) files, 645 Add mode (AREA command), 65
acad.dwt file, 1220 Add object selection method, 919
acad.lin (linetype library) file, 1256 Add Plot Style Table wizard, 677
acad.lsp file, 653, 1162 Add Profile dialog box, 669
acad.mln (multiline library) file, 568, 569 Add/Modify FTP Locations dialog box
acad.mnu (template menu) file, 540 about, 628
acad.pat (hatch pattern library) file, 110, 117, displaying, 624
403, 1258 Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, 1004
acad.pgp (program parameters) file, 842, 1070, Add-a-Plotter wizard, 747
1155 adding
acad.psf (PostScript fill pattern library) file, 1258, drawing sheets from other drawings, 802
1264 standards files to current drawings, 989
acad_asi.hlp file, 225 Adjust Background Bitmap Placement dialog
acadiso.pat (pattern) file, 110, 117, 403 box, 100
ACADLSPASDOC system variable, 653, 1162 Adjust Clipping Planes window, 19
ACADPREFIX system variable, 1162 shortcut menu, 19
ACADVER system variable, 1162 Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates dialog box, 924
acceleration Adjust Material Bitmap Placement dialog box,
in 3D view, 25 865
accelerator key options, 655 Adjust Object Bitmap Placement dialog box, 928
accumulation options, 227 Adjust Planar Coordinates dialog box, 922
AcEd-registered commands, 75 Adjust Spherical Coordinates dialog box, 926
ACI. See AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) Adjust UVW Coordinates dialog box, 927
ACIS files (SAT format) ADT (audit) files, 96
exporting to, 44 Advanced Options dialog box, 739, 916
importing, 43 Advanced Settings for COM dialog box, 762
ACISIN command, 43 Advanced Setup wizard, starting drawings, 610
ACISOUT command, 44 Advanced tab
ACISOUTVER system variable, 1162 Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box, 112
Active Assistance Hatch Edit dialog box, 409
display settings, 78 Search dialog box (DesignCenter), 51
opening, 76 Aerial View window
Active Assistance icon shortcut menu (Windows about, 328
system tray), 76 Auto Viewport and Dynamic Update options
Active Assistance Settings dialog box (Options menu), 330
about, 78 zoom and view options, 329
displaying, 77 Affine transformation type, 1016
Active Assistance window AFLAGS system variable, 81, 83, 1162
displaying, 76, 77, 78 alerts
navigating, 77 beep on error, 653
shortcut menu, 77 standards violations, 990
specifying when to display, 78 aliases
adaptive adjustment linetype setting, 1009 for commands, table listing of, 1155
adaptive degradation ALIGN command, 53
bounding box, 21 aligned dimensions
display options, 21 linear, 255, 282
flat shaded, 21 aligning
FPS speed, 21 attribute tags, 82
wireframe, 21 axis of rotation, 878, 954
Index | 1289
aligning (continued) angles (continued)
cutting planes, 939, 940 DIMDIAMETER command and, 267
dimension text, 296, 312 DIMEDIT command and, 270
landscape objects, 519, 521 DIMLINEAR command and, 273
mirroring planes, 555 DIMORDINATE command and, 278
objects in 2D or 3D, 44 DIMRADIUS command and, 281
sectioning planes, 912 DIMTEDIT command and, 313
text, 455, 1022 for elliptical arcs, 360
fractions in text, 583 for extrusion, 375
multiline text, 586 format and precision settings, 1075
viewport base points, 596 formatting for CAL command, 137
alignment vector display options, 659 for gradient fills, 116
All object selection method, 918 for hatch patterns, 111, 403, 406
Alternate Font dialog box, 636, 664 for leader segments, 818
alternate font file, specifying location of, 636 for multiline end caps, 572
alternate units (for dimensions) obtaining, 149
settings, 302, 307 between points, measuring, 314
Alternate Units tab (New Dimension Style dialog for polar arrays, 74
box), 302 positive, calculating, 1076, 1079
system variables updated by, 1238 of revolution, 856
altitude setting format and direction with the
displayed in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500 Advanced Setup wizard, 611
for distant light, 495 setting viewing angles, 250
ambient color (of materials) of taper, for extrusion, 950
adjusting, 862 angtos AutoLISP function, 302, 307
ambient light angular dimensions
adjusting, 491 arc selection, 258
turning on, 489, 931 associativity, 282
AME (Advanced Modeling Extension) circle selection, 259
converting to AutoCAD solids, 55 creating
AMECONVERT command, 55 with DIMBASELINE, 261
ang function (CAL command), 149 with DIMCONTINUE, 264
ANGBASE system variable, 1162 format and precision settings, 302
ANGDIR system variable, 1162 line selection, 259
angle brackets three-point specification, 259
open and close (< >), 269 zero suppression, 302
generated measurement indicators, annotation layers, creating, 464
272 Annotation tab (Leader Settings dialog box), 817
plotter setting changes, 752 annotations
prefixes and suffixes in annotations, for leader lines, in XML standards reports,
484 483, 814
angle direction anonymous logons, 628
settings (in Advanced Setup wizard), 611 ANSI (American National Standards Institute),
angle measure settings, Advanced Setup wizard, 116
611 ANSI code pages supported by Windows, 1281
angled alignment for viewports, 597 anti-aliasing
angles lines
for arc segments, 714 in 3D view, 26
for arcs, 62, 63 render options
changing with LENGTHEN, 486 and anti-aliasing lines, 26
base angle direction controls, 1077 for Photo Raytrace rendering type, 888
for camera positioning, 333, 335 for Photo Real rendering type, 886
for construction lines, 1136 APBOX system variable, 659, 660, 1163
current, precision for, 1076 aperture box (AutoSnap), 659
for dimension text APERTURE command, 56
DIMALIGNED command and, 258 aperture display size option, 660
DIMANGULAR command and, 260 APERTURE system variable, 660, 1163
1290 | Index
apex point ARG (profile text) files, 664
cones, 176 ARRAY command, 66
elliptical cones, 177 Array dialog box
pyramids, 12 about, 67
tetrahedrons, 13 displaying, 67
apostrophe ('), transparent command character, arrays (multiple copies)
3 creating, 66
Apparent Intersection object snap, 672 offsetting copies, 68
applications polar, 69, 73
adding to the history list, 59 rectangular, 67, 72
adding to the Startup Suite, 61 rotated, 73, 75
loading/unloading, 57 arrowheads
APPLOAD command dimension, properties of, 291
about, 57 including with leader lines, 292, 484, 818
applications/file types supported by, 57 placement of, 296
Load/Unload Applications dialog box, 58 ARX command, 75
Startup Suite dialog box, 60 ARX files, loading, 57
ARC command, 61 ASCII text files. See text files
arc-fit polylines, 701 ASCII text, pasting from the Clipboard, 693
Arc object type, 1272 ASE commands. See DBCONNECT command
arc properties, 775 ASE links, converting to format of AutoCAD 2000
arc segments, adding to 2D polylines, 714 or later, 235
arcball (3D Orbit view), 30 ASE Select dialog box. See Link Select dialog box
architectural units, 1076, 1078 Asian-language fonts. See Big Font file
specifying, 609 Aspect grid setting, 394, 944
arcs aspect ratio
adding segments to 2D polylines, 714 for backgrounds, 100
aligning the axis of rotation with, 879, 954 for material bitmaps, 866, 929
center marks/centerlines, 263, 266 for OLE objects, 619
cloud shapes, 854 for rendering output files, 892
creating, 61 for solid material mapping, 928
creating regions from, 841 ASSIST command
for defining angular dimensions, 258 about, 76
diameter dimensions for, 266 Active Assistance icon shortcut menu, 76
display resolution option, 640 Active Assistance Settings dialog box, 77,
dividing, 314 78
exploding, 369 Active Assistance window shortcut menu,
extending, 371 77
filleting, 377 associative dimensions
joining to polylines, 697 disassociating, 268
properties of, 775 options, 657
radial dimensions for, 279 reassociating, 282
tangents for arcs, 63 system variables, 1173, 1174
trimming, 1047 updating
VIEWRES and, 1098 dimension locations, 284
See also elliptical arcs manually, 284
AREA command, 64 associative gradient fills
AREA system variable, 64, 1163 BHATCH and, 109
areas boundaries, 117
calculating associative hatches
selecting objects, 64, 66 associativity, 109
selecting points, 64, 65 BHATCH and, 106, 109, 117, 120
using Add mode, 65 disassociating, 410
using Subtract mode, 66 effects of chamfering, 154
defining filleting, 378
with the Advanced Setup wizard, 611 selecting, 662
with the Quick Setup wizard, 609 updating, 178
Index | 1291
asterisk (*) attribute prompts
finding files, 626 for constant attributes, 83
as wild card for searching, 50 displaying, 349
to write an entire drawing to an output file, editing, 248
1115 Attribute tab
at sign (@) Edit Attribute dialog box, 104
reference to the last point, 423 Enhanced Attribute Editor, 350
Attach by AutoCAD Color Index dialog box, 873 attribute tags
Attach by Layer dialog box, 874 aligning, 82
Attach Digital Signatures dialog box, 1246 changing, 160
Attach Digital Signatures utility displaying, 80, 349
about, 1246 duplicate tags, 105
Attach Digital Signatures dialog box, 1246 editing, 248
Search Folders dialog box, 1247 specifying, 81, 83, 104
attaching attribute values
digital signatures, 1246 for constant attributes, 83
hyperlinks, to objects, 416 display modes, 81, 104
images, to drawings, 425, 428, 433 editing, 85, 104, 349
leader lines, 818 preset defaults, 104
materials, 535, 861, 873, 874, 934 specifying the default, 248
overlays vs. attaching method, 1140 verification, 104
xrefs, 1142, 1147 attributes (of blocks), 102, 349, 351
with External Reference dialog box, assigned to redefined blocks, 94
1127 Attribute Extraction wizard, 351
with XATTACH, 1127 Block Attribute Manager, 102, 105
attachment methods for materials, 934 changing text and text properties of, 104,
Attachment tab (Leader Settings dialog box), 818 160, 455
ATTACHURL command, 79 constant attributes, 104
ATTDEF command defaults, 104
about, 80 defining, 80, 104
Attribute Definition dialog box, 80 displaying/hiding, 84, 104
command line prompts, 82 editing, 85, 102, 247, 349
ATTDIA system variable, 1163 Enhanced Attribute Editor, 349
ATTDISP command, 81, 84 extracting information from, 91, 351
ATTEDIT command formatting text display, 350
about, 85 properties of, 776
command line prompts, 86 spell checking, 975
Edit Attributes dialog box, 86 updating, 95
editing attribute values verification, 104
independent of a block, 85, 86 attributes (of files), displaying information
for a specific block, 85 about, 343
attenuation of light attributes (of materials)
point light, 492 adjusting
spotlight, 496 for granite material, 868
ATTEXT command for marble material, 869
about, 91 for materials, 862
Attribute Extraction dialog box, 91 for wood material, 871
command line prompts, 93 ATTSYNC command, 95
ATTMODE system variable, 84, 1163 AUDIT command, 95
ATTREDEF command, 94 AUDITCTL system variable, 96, 1163
ATTREQ system variable, 1163 auditing drawings
Attribute Definition dialog box, 80 for standards violations, 991, 1247
Attribute Definition object type, 1272 AUNITS system variable, 1163
attribute definition properties, 776 AUPREC system variable, 322, 1164
Attribute Extraction dialog box, 91 author of drawings, displaying/specifying, 344
Attribute Extraction wizard, 351 Auto Axis
Attribute object type, 1272 for material bitmap mapping, 867
1292 | Index
Auto object selection method, 919 AutoTrack
Auto Viewport (Options menu in Aerial View settings, 659
window), 330 tracking vector colors, 666
AutoCAD auxiliary views, creating, 971
environment axis of cylindrical coordinate system, 924
customizing, 633 axis (UCS icon symbols), 1062
file formats used by, 897 axis endpoint
graphical objects, table listing of, 1271 for ellipses, 359
rendering type, 882, 885 for elliptical arcs, 360
serial number and license information, 43 for elliptical cylinders, 198
version and service pack installed, 43 axis of revolution/rotation
AutoCAD Batch Plot utility, 1252 aligning with a viewport, 955
AutoCAD Color Index (ACI) aligning with an object, 954
applying aligning with X, Y, or Z axis, 955
to layers, 462, 470 defining with points, 953
to window elements, 666 rotating a point about, 146
attaching materials by, 861 specifying
distant light colors, 495 with REVOLVE, 856
selecting colors from, 169, 289, 290, 293 with REVSURF, 858
specifying colors by ACI number, 171 with ROTATE3D, 878
spotlight colors, 497 axis tripod (in 3D model space)
AutoCAD DesignCenter. See DesignCenter defining a viewing direction with, 1103
AutoCAD drawings. See drawings azimuth
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog box, displayed in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500
621, 1082 for distant light, 495
AutoCAD Runtime Extension. See ObjectARX
applications, 7
AutoCAPS (for multiline text), 580 B
Autodesk DesignCenter. See DesignCenter back faces (of 3D objects)
Autodesk Express Viewer 3D graphics view, 24
starting, 807 back faces (of 3D solids)
Autodesk Favorites folder (DesignCenter), 47 rendering, 885, 887, 890
Autodesk Map, 822 Back option in undoing, 1071
Autodesk Plotter Manager. See Plotter Manager background colors
AutoLISP (LSP) applications background fills, for multilines, 572
AutoCAD system variables for, 1162 background transparency for WMFOUT,
creating splines and, 703 Clipboard, and drag and drop
developing applications, 1099 objects, 1230
entering AutoLISP expressions, 1028 BACKGROUND command, 97
loading applications, 57 Background dialog box, 97
LSP routines and standards violations, 990 backgrounds (for scenes)
using AutoLISP variables with CAL, 139 adjustment controls, 100
automatic Active Assistance, 78 applying fog to, 390
automatic regeneration of drawings, 840 aspect ratio, 100
automatic saves environment definition, 99
options, 644 previewing, 98
search path for, 637 specifying, 97
automatic stacking of multiline text, 584 types of, 97
Autosave files, 644 backslash (\)
AutoSnap in attribute definitions, 90
options, 658 to select null attribute values, 89
AUTOSNAP system variable, 321, 323, 658, 659, backup copy option, 644
1164 backup files
AutoSpool saving, automatically, 644
option, 751 backwards character display, 577, 1000, 1002
AutoStack Properties dialog box, 584 BACKZ system variable, 1164
AutoTarget feature, overriding, 35 base angle direction controls, 1077
Index | 1293
BASE command, 101, 1129 binary files
base points DXF, 901
for locating offset points, 1285 importing, 347
base points (as reference points) storing solids in, 995
for copying Bind Xrefs dialog box, 1143
3D faces, 958 binding
edges, 959 dependent named objects to drawings,
objects, 183 1131, 1144
for scaling text objects, 906 xref-dependent symbols to a drawing, 1130
for moving selected faces, 953 xrefs to drawings, 1143, 1145
for panning, 684 binding options (press) in PC3 files, 730
for specifying objects, polar arrays, 71 BINDTYPE system variable, 1164
for stretching objects, 997 bisecting
for taper angle of faces, 956 construction lines, 1136
base points (for grid), 944 bitmap blend, 863, 864
base points (for insertion point) granite material and, 869
for inserting blocks, 1114, 1115 marble material and, 871
setting, 101 wood material and, 872
base points (for object rotation), 877 bitmaps (BMP images)
baseline dimensions format, saving objects in, 127
creating, 261 material, 865
a series of, 813 placement values of materials, adjusting,
dimension line spacing, 290 928
baselines of text, 587 See also BMP (bitmap) files
batch audit reports blank drawings
adding notes to, 1250 starting, 605, 819
creating, 1248 blank spaces before fractions, 584
exporting, 1251 BLIPMODE command, 121
batch plot lists, 1252 BLIPMODE system variable, 1164
Batch Plot utility, 1252 BLK files, 352
Batch Standards Checker, 1247, 1248 Block Attribute Manager, 102, 105
Drawings tab, 1248 BLOCK command
exclamation marks in lists, 1248 about, 122
Notes tab, 1250 Block Definition dialog box, 122
Plug-ins tab, 1249 command line prompts, 124
Progress tab, 1250 Block Definition dialog box, 122
standards files, 1248 block definitions
Standards tab, 1249 associating hyperlinks with, 124
toolbar, 1250 converting xref definitions to, 1143, 1145
BATTMAN command, 102 descriptions, 124
Block Attribute Manager, 102, 105 editing attributes, 103
Edit Attribute dialog box, 103 listing, 102
Settings dialog box, 105 Block Reference (Insert) object type, 1273
baud rate block reference properties, 777
adjusting, 761 BLOCKICON command, 126
beep on error option, 653 blocks
beveling objects. See chamfering Attribute Extraction wizard, 351
BHATCH command binding referenced objects, 1130
about, 106 Block Attribute Manager, 102, 105
Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box, 107 changing position of, 160
command line prompts, 117 colors
Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box, 116 text, 579
See also HATCH command defining, 122
Big Font file, 999, 1002, 1280 defining clipping boundaries and clipping
Big Fonts planes, 1132
substituting, 665 as DesignCenter content, 45, 49
editing
1294 | Index
blocks (continued) bottom-up render option, 892
attribute definitions, 834, 836 boundaries
attribute properties, 102, 349 creating, 127
attribute values, 85, 95, 349 clipping boundaries, 436
in-place, adding/removing objects, frame-only display option, 642
837 nonprinting
selecting for, 102, 349, 832 multiline text and, 576, 585
exploding, 369, 1138 of regions, 841
generating for hidden/visible profile lines, setting drawing limits for, 502
964 See also gradient boundaries
grips in, 662 See also hatch boundaries
inserting BOUNDARY command
into the current drawing, 440 about, 127
with leader lines, 484, 815 Boundary Creation dialog box, 127
multiple instances of, 544 command line prompts, 128
prompts, 104 Boundary Creation dialog box, 127
unit of measure for, 1077 boundary edges
listing by name, 102, 443 for extending objects, 371
naming, 122, 124, 834 Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box
nested, 352 about, 107
object selection, 123, 125 Advanced tab, 112
pasting into drawings, 693 Gradient tab, 115
placing Hatch tab, 110
at equal intervals, 315 boundary sets
at measured intervals, 537 for gradient boundaries, 114
preview icons for, 123, 126 for hatch boundaries, 114
previously defined, 125 defining, 118, 127, 129
properties bounding box
of multiple block insertions, 786 adaptive degradation, 21
of objects in, 777 BOX command, 129
purging from the drawing database, 811 Box object selection method, 918
redefining, 94, 443 boxes
renaming, 844 2D UCS icon symbol, 1061
saving or discarding changes to, 830, 836 rectangular polylines, 826
saving to a file, 1113 BREAK command, 131
specifying the insertion point, 123, 124 Break mode, Visual Basic Editor and, 1088
synchronizing instances, 102 break points, specifying, 131
in translated layers, 481 breaking
updating 2D polylines, 699
attributes, 95 3D polylines, 705
definitions of, 443 double lines, 327
vs. xrefs, 1140 brightness (of image display), adjusting, 431,
blue components of colors, 172 433
BMAKE command. See BLOCK command broken pencil icon, 1061
BMP (bitmap) files Browse for Folder dialog box, 638
displaying images, 852 Browse the Web dialog box
options for rendering output, 891 displaying, 623
saving browser (Web), launching, 133
objects to, 127 BROWSER command, 133
rendered images to, 903 browsing
BMPOUT command, 127 for folders or files, 634, 638
Body object type, 1272 the Internet, 623
body objects B-spline curves
exploding, 370 fitting to control points, 703, 706
properties of, 778 bump maps, 864
body properties, 778 granite material and, 869
bold typeface, formatting multiline text in, 578 marble material and, 871
Index | 1295
bump maps (continued) CAL command (continued)
specifying, 863 vectors used with, 138
wood material and, 872 calculating
Button Editor dialog box areas, 64
about, 193 dimension text tolerances, 306
displaying, 188 distances, 147
Button Properties tab (Customize dialog box), length of vectors, 143
188 mass properties of regions or solids, 527
buttons. See pick button (mouse) mathematical and geometric expressions,
Buzzsaw icon 135
in Places list, 622 normal vectors, 150
project hosting sites, 623 perimeters, 64
BYBLOCK property points on lines, 146
color values, 161, 164, 168, 170, 174, 579, positive angles, 1076, 1079
1139 sun position, 500
linetype values, 507, 512, 1139 using shortcut functions, 152
lineweight values, 522, 524 vectors from two points, 141
BYLAYER property See also CAL command
color values, 161, 164, 168, 170, 174, 579, calculator. See CAL command
1139 calibrating
in layer translations, 480 digitizing tablets, 1015
linetype values, 507, 512, 964, 1139 calibration points, 1015, 1017
lineweight values, 522, 524 camera (in 3D views)
changing the target location, 153
positioning, 153
C rotating about the target point, 333
cache swiveling, 42
3D, 22 camera point, specifying, 337
file, writing rendering information to, 846 caps, of multilines, 571
regeneration and, 652 caret (^), stacked text indicator, 578, 584
CAD Standards Settings dialog box, 990 cascading windows, 1013
CAL command case of text, 580
about, 135 CDATE system variable, 1164
angles CDF (comma-delimited) files
formatting, 137 for storing extracted attribute data, 92
obtaining, 149 CDF (comma-delimited format) files
AutoCAD system variables used with, 139 for storing extracted attribute data, 93
AutoLISP variables used with, 139 CECOLOR system variable, 994, 1165
converting points between UCS and WCS, Cell shortcut menu (Data View window in
145 dbConnect), 211
converting units of measurement, 140 CELTSCALE system variable, 509, 1165
feet and inches, formatting, 136 CELTYPE system variable, 507, 994, 1165
filtering components of points or vectors, CELWEIGHT system variable, 994, 1165
145 center marks
intersection point, obtaining, 147 creating, 263
last-specified point, obtaining, 143 diameter dimensions and, 266
normal vectors, calculating, 150 dimension properties of, 292
numeric expression operators, 135 Center object snap, 324, 672
numeric functions supported by, 140 center points
point by cursor, obtaining, 143 arc segments, 715
point calculations, 141 arcs, 62
points used with, 137 base of cones, 176
rotating a point about an axis, 146 base of elliptical cones, 177
rules of precedence for evaluating boxes, 130
expressions, 135 center definition of polygons, 765
snap modes used with, 144 circles, 167
vector expression operators, 136 ellipses, 361
1296 | Index
center points (continued) Check Spelling dialog box, 975
elliptical arcs, 361 Check Standards dialog box, 163
elliptical cylinders, 198 checking
gradient fills, 116 solids, 963
polar arrays, 73 spelling, 975
for specifying objects, polar arrays, 69 CHECKSTANDARDS command
wedges, 1117 about, 163
zooming to, 1149 Check Standards dialog box, 163
centering chkdsk, SHELL command and, 934
background images, 101 chord length, for arcs, 62, 63
text, 586, 1023, 1024 CHPROP command, 164
centerlines CHX (standards check) files, 1250
creating, 263 CIF, Unicode fonts and, 1278
diameter dimensions and, 266 CIRCLE command, 166
dimension properties of, 292 Circle object type, 1272
certificate authorities, 937 circle properties, 778
certificates. See digital IDs Circle tool, 194
chain fillets, 381 CIRCLERAD system variable, 1166
CHAMFER command, 154 circles
hatch associativity and, 154 aligning
chamfer distances axis of rotation with, 879, 954
for rectangular polylines, 827 cutting plane with, 939
setting, 156 center marks/centerlines, 263, 266
CHAMFERA system variable, 1165 changing the radius of, 159
CHAMFERB system variable, 1165 converting into viewports, 1110
CHAMFERC system variable, 1165 creating, 166, 316
CHAMFERD system variable, 1165 creating regions from, 841
chamfering for defining angular dimensions, 259
angle setting for, 157 diameter dimensions for, 266
distance setting for, 156 display resolution option, 640
entire 2D polylines, 156 dividing, 314
layers and, 154 exploding, 370
polyline segments, 154 extruding, 374
specifying filled circles, 316
base surface for, 155 filleting, 377
edges for, 154 isometric circles, 167, 362
and trimming, 157 measuring, 538
CHAMMODE system variable, 1166 properties of, 778
CHANGE command radial dimensions for, 279
about, 158 revolving, 856
selecting objects, 158 trimming, 1047
specifying change point for selected using VIEWRES for, 1098
objects, 159 circular arcs, aligning the cutting plane with,
specifying properties to change, 160 939
Change Dictionaries dialog box, 977 cities, displaying latitude and longitude for, 501
Change Icon dialog box, 617 CLAYER system variable, 459, 994, 1166
Change Page Setup dialog box, 804 cleanup (of 3D solids), 962
about, 805 Clear to Send handshaking, 762
change point, 159 Clipboard (Windows)
Change Profile dialog box, 670 controlling the background for metafiles,
Changes to a Printer Configuration File dialog 1230
box, 682 copying command line history to, 184
character display effects, 1000 copying objects to, 183
changing, 1002 copying the current view to, 185
character maps for fonts, 578 cutting objects to, 195
characters inserting data from, 693
restricted in database fields, 354
Index | 1297
clipping color book colors (continued)
creating, 436 specifying properties for objects, 161
defining, 1099, 1132 window elements, 666
options for, DVIEW command, 340 Color Books tab (Select Color dialog box), 173
turning on or off, 340, 436 COLOR command
viewport objects, 1099 about, 169
clipping boundaries (for viewports), 1099 command line prompts, 173
defining with VPCLIP, 1099 Select Color dialog box, 169
deleting, 1100 color controls for backgrounds, 98
clipping planes color-dependent plot styles, 179, 180, 1004,
defining 1006
with 3DCLIP, 18 names, 1007
with XCLIP, 1132 color depth
setting (adjusting), 18 PC3 file settings, 730
turning on/off, 20 plot settings, 756
clockwise direction of angles, 611 rendering settings, 850
CLOSE command, 168 color mapping tables, 1006
CLOSEALL command, 169 Color Options dialog box, 665
closed-cross intersection between multilines, color palettes
557 for toolbar buttons, 194
closed polygon meshes, 29 color systems
closed polylines for fog, 390
creating regions from, 841 for materials, 864
revolving, 856 selecting, 171, 172
closed splines See also hue, lightness, saturation (HLS) color
extruding, 374 system
revolving, 856 See also red, green, blue (RGB) color system
closed-tee intersection between multilines, 558 color-dependent plot styles
closing defined, 649
2D polylines, 697, 715, 717 colors
3D polyline mesh objects, 709 for 3D faces, 711, 958
3D polylines, 704 ACI. See AutoCAD Color Index (ACI)
Adjust Clipping Planes window, 20 for ambient light, 491
dbConnect Manager, 201 assigning
DesignCenter, 44 foreground color of AutoCAD objects,
drawings, 168 1231
all, 169 for attribute text, 88, 105, 350
log file, 514 AutoSnap markers, 659
Properties palette, 798 changing
splines, 980, 983, 985 toolbar button colors, 194
clouds. See revision clouds (markups) color book colors, 289, 290, 293
CMDACTIVE system variable, 1166 applying to layers, 462, 471
CMDECHO system variable, 1166 applying to objects, 165
CMDNAMES system variable, 1166 exploded objects, 1139
CMLJUST system variable, 1167 search path for files, 637
CMLSCALE system variable, 1167 selecting, 173, 174
CMLSTYLE system variable, 1167 specifying properties for objects, 161
Code Page Independent format (CIF), Unicode window elements, 666
fonts and, 1278 color systems
code pages HSL color model, 171
ANSI, Windows support for, 1281 RGB model, 172
AutoCAD support for, 1280 converting to grayscale, 1008
color book colors, 289, 290, 293 copying
applying to layers, 462, 471 with MATCHPROP, 531
applying to objects, 165, 1139 current color
search path for files, 637 displaying, 994
selecting, 173, 174
1298 | Index
colors (continued) colors (continued)
custom colors (true colors), 289, 290, 293, selecting, 171, 174
1007, 1165 specifying properties for objects, 161
applying to layers, 462, 470 window elements, 666
applying to objects, 165 UCS icon, 1063
exploded objects, 1139 for window elements, 665, 666
raster images, 642 for wood material, 871
selecting, 171, 174 Column shortcut menu (Data View window in
specifying properties for objects, 161 dbConnect), 210
window elements, 666 Column Values dialog box, 222
depth of columns (of arrays), specifying, 68
for plotting, 756 COM ports. See serial ports
for rendered images, 850 combining
for dimension lines, 289 paragraphs, 580
for dimension text, 293 Comma Separated Values files, 806
display options for the AutoCAD window, comma-delimited format (CDF) files
639 for storing extracted attribute data, 92, 93
for edges, 960 command aliases
for exploded objects, 1138 table listing of, 1155
for extension lines, 290 command line
for fog, 390 displaying
for gradient fills, 115 in a separate window, 1028
for granite material, 869 entering
for grips, 662, 1191 data on, 5
HLS color system history text, copying to the Clipboard, 184
See hue, lightness, saturation (HLS) responding to prompts on, 4
color system using wild-card characters on, 5
for intersection polylines, 415, 1196 Command Line Window Font dialog box
for layers, 470, 480, 481 about, 667
light colors, 494 displaying, 640
mapping tables, 1006 command modifiers, 1283
for marble material, 870 Command shortcut menu
for materials enabling/disabling, 669
adjusting, 862, 863 command window
for multiline style elements, 570 display options, 639, 666
for multiline text, 579 commands
for new objects, 169, 1165 accessing
for obscured lines, 414 recently used commands, 5
plotting pens, 754 Active Assistance, 78
for point light, 493 adding toolbar buttons for, 186
as property of objects, 770 assigning shortcut keys to, 190
for rendering output files, 892 command modifiers, 1283
RGB colors. See red, green, blue (RGB) color executing, 2
system repeating, 5, 590
for selected layers, 460, 462, 470 reversing
for selected objects, 161, 164 with U, 1051
for solid or gradient background, 98 with UNDO, 1071
specifying reversing with MREDO, 574
by ACI number, 171 reversing, with UNDO, 1071
mixing methods, 174 Commands tab (Customize dialog box), 185
for plot styles, 1007 comma-separated format (CSV) files, for storing
for spotlight, 497 extracted attribute data, 355
true color values, 289, 290, 293, 1165 comments
applying to layers, 462, 470 on digital signatures, 916, 937
applying to objects, 165 to use for locating drawings, 345
exploded objects, 1139 in XML standards reports, 1250
raster images, 642 Compare Dimension Styles dialog box, 308
Index | 1299
compass and axis tripod, 1103 content (in DesignCenter)
COMPASS system variable, 932, 1167 See also ADCENTER command
complex linetypes content area (DesignCenter), 46
standard library file of, 1257 Content tab, (Search dialog box, DesignCenter),
complex linetypes, standard library file of, 1257 50
component objects continued dimensions, 264, 813
exploding compound objects into CONTINUOUS linetype, 507, 512
with EXPLODE, 368 continuous orbit (in 3D Orbit view)
with XPLODE, 1138 setting 3D objects in, 26
composite 3D solids contrast (of image display), 431, 432
creating with INTERFERE, 450 control codes, 589, 1027
creating with INTERSECT, 451 control points
creating with UNION, 1074 adding to splines, 986
composite regions, creating, 1074 conventions, typographical, ??–6
compound objects CONVERT command, 178
exploding into components Convert dialog box, 616
with EXPLODE, 368 CONVERTCTB command, 179, 650
with XPLODE, 1138 converting
compression AME solid models to AutoCAD solids, 55
file compression render option, 892 length values between model and paper
TGA image compression options, 904 space, 901, 974
TIFF image compression options, 904 links created in earlier releases of AutoCAD,
concentric circles, 613 235
cones OLE object types, 616
creating, 9 plot style tables, 179, 180
elliptical, 177 plot styles, 650
configuration files (for plotters) polylines and hatches created in earlier
updating PC3 files, 729 releases of AutoCAD, 178
Configure a Data Source dialog box, 225 shape files into SHX files, 175
Configure LPT Port dialog box, 761 CONVERTPSTYLES command, 180, 650
Configure Standards dialog box Coons surface patch meshes
about, 988 EDGESURF command and, 357
Plug-ins tab, 989 coordinate data entry priority options, 656
Standards tab, 988 coordinate filter command modifier, 1284
configuring coordinates
digitizer menu and pointing areas, 1018 combining to locate objects, 1284
external databases of a location, displaying, 423
for AutoCAD access, 225 for xref instance insertion, 1129
OLE DB data sources, 225 COORDS system variable, 1167
Confirm Password dialog box coplanar regions, mass properties displayed for,
about, 916 527, 528
confirming passwords, 804, 916 COPY command, 182
conserving memory and disk space, with COPYBASE command, 183
CONVERT, 178 COPYCLIP command, 183
constant attributes, 83, 104 COPYHIST command, 184
constraining cursor movement, 670 copying
construction lines (xlines) 3D faces, 958
creating, 1135 command line history to the Clipboard,
filleting, 377 184
properties of, 797 current view to the Clipboard, 185
trimming, 1047 drawing sheets, 804
containers, displayed in DesignCenter content edges of 3D solids, 959
area, 46 layouts, 476
content (for drawings) (DesignCenter) mapping coordinates to selected objects,
content area, 46 922
searching for, 49 named page setups, 806
view options for, 48 object properties, 531
1300 | Index
copying (continued) cubic spline curves, 703, 979
objects, 182 cubic spline-fit polylines, 701
to the Clipboard, 183, 195 cur function (CAL command), 143
as mirror images, 553, 554 current dictionary for spelling checker, 976
with a specified base point, 183 Current Plot Style dialog box, 745
rendered images, 849 cursor
size of text objects, 907 with 3DCORBIT command, 26
COPYLINK command, 185 with 3DDISTANCE command, 27
corner joint between multilines, 560 with 3DORBIT command, 31
corner points with 3DPAN command, 35
for boxes, 130 with 3DZOOM command, 42
for calculating area and perimeter, 64, 65 color of, 666
for inserting multiple instances of blocks, constraining movement, 670
545, 550 hyperlink cursor, displaying/hiding, 421,
for meshes, 12 656
for partially open drawings, 688 with PREVIEW command, 766
for pyramids, 12 with direct distance entry, 1284
for rectangular polylines, 826 with ZOOM (Real Time) command, 1152
for tetrahedrons, 13 cursor menus. See shortcut menus
for viewports, 591 CURSORSIZE system variable, 640, 1168
for wedges, 16, 1116 curve fitting, removing from polylines, 697
for zooming a window, 1152 curve tessellation, 22
counterclockwise direction of angles, 611 curves. See arcs
CPLOTSTYLE system variable, 994, 1167 custom colors (true colors)
CPolygons (crossing polygon selections), 918 applying to layers, 462, 470
CPROFILE system variable, 634, 1168 applying to objects, 165
CRC validation option, 644 exploded objects, 1139
Create New Dimension Style dialog box, 288 raster images, 642
Create New Drawing dialog box, 605, 1220 selecting, 171, 174
Create Raster File dialog box, 127, 455, 763, specifying for plot styles, 1007
1029 specifying properties for objects, 161
Create Transmittal dialog box, 363 window elements, 666
crop window for rendering, 883 custom dictionaries (spelling checker), 636, 977
cropping custom hatch patterns
material bitmaps, 866, 867, 930 listing, 111
crosshairs selecting, 110, 117
color of, 666 specifying, 403
sizing, 640 custom objects
crosshatching. See hatching displaying/using in drawings, 1213
crossing-face objects, 519 saving proxy images of, 899
crossing object selection method, 918 Custom Paper Size wizard, 759
CSV files, 355, 806 custom plot resolution, 681, 735
CTAB system variable, 1168 custom properties
CTB (plot style table) files of drawings, 346
Add Plot Style Table wizard, 1004 custom scales (for plots), 680, 726
color mapping tables, 1006 Custom tab (Drawing Properties dialog box), 346
converting to STBs, 179, 180 CUSTOMIZE command
default plot style tables, 650 about, 185
names, 1007 Button Editor dialog box, 193
options for new drawings, 649 Customize dialog box, 185
search path settings for, 637 New Toolbar dialog box, 193
CTRL+C keys, copying objects to the Clipboard, Transparency dialog box, 195
184 Customize dialog box
CTRL+V keys, pasting objects from the about, 185
Clipboard, 693 Button Properties tab, 188
CTS handshaking, 762 Commands tab, 185
cubes, 8, 130 Flyout Properties tab, 189
Index | 1301
Customize dialog box (continued) database connectivity feature
Keyboard tab, 190 options, 653
Properties tab, 188 database file format, 354
Tool Palettes tab, 192 database objects associated with a drawing
Toolbars tab, 186 displaying information in the text window,
customizing 246
settings. See options selecting, 242
CUTCLIP command, 195 Database Objects shortcut menu (dbConnect
cutting Manager), 204
elements from multilines, 562 database records
multilines, 562, 563 display format, 230
objects to the Clipboard, 195 database source files
cutting planes search path for, 637
aligning, 939, 940 database tables
defining, 940, 942 viewing/editing. See Data View window (in
CVPORT system variable, 1168 dbConnect)
cvunit function (CAL command), 140 Date Modified tab
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) validation Find dialog box, 627
option, 644 Search dialog box (DesignCenter), 51
CYLINDER command, 196 DATE system variable, 1169
cylinders (solid), 196 date/time
cylindrical coordinates (in image mapping), 924 drawing statistics, displaying, 1029
finding files by date or time modified, 627
searching for content by, 51
D specifying in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500
damaged files time servers, 916, 1247
repairing, 825 valid periods for digital IDs, 937
Data Objects shortcut menu (dbConnect datum (for baseline dimensions)
Manager), 206 setting, 813
Data Set Ready handshaking, 762 datum (for geometric tolerances), 1032
data sources identifier symbols, 1033
selecting a table from, 243 datum (for ordinate dimensions)
Data Sources Node shortcut menu (dbConnect setting, 813
Manager), 206 See also ordinate dimensions
Data Terminal Ready output, 763 DBCCLOSE command, 201
Data View and Query Options dialog box, 225 DBCONNECT command
linked object display options, 226 about, 201
Data View buttons, 208 Column Values dialog box, 222
Data View Print Preview window, 214 Configure a Data Source dialog box, 225
Data View window (in dbConnect) Data View and Query Options dialog box,
about, 207 225
accumulation options, 227 Data View window, 207
Cell shortcut menu, 211 dbConnect Manager, 202
Column shortcut menu, 210 Export Links dialog box, 227
displaying, 207 Export Query Set dialog box, 228
Grid Header shortcut menu, 213 Find dialog box, 229
grid window, 210 Format dialog box, 230
linked record display options, 226 Import Query Set dialog box, 230
navigating, 213 Import Template Set dialog box, 231
Print Preview window, 214 Label Template dialog box, 231
query options, 227 Label Template Properties dialog box, 233
record display formats, 230 Link Conversion dialog box, 234
Record shortcut menu, 212 Link Manager, 237
searching/replacing text or values, 229, 241 Link Select dialog box, 222
sort order Link Template dialog box, 238
options, 243 Link Template Properties dialog box, 239
toolbar button descriptions, 208 New Label Template dialog box, 240
1302 | Index
DBCONNECT command (continued) decimal places of accuracy, for DXF file output,
New Link Template dialog box, 240 901
New Query dialog box, 241 decimal separator for linear dimensions, 300
Query Editor, 215 decimal units, 609, 1076, 1078
Replace dialog box, 241 decurving polylines, 704
Select a Database Object dialog box, 242 defaults
Select Data Object dialog box, 243 attribute properties, 102
Sort dialog box, 243 attribute values, 81, 83, 104, 160, 248
Synchronize dialog box, 244 encryption types, 915
dbConnect Manager file format for saved drawings, 900
about, 202 Internet location search path, 635
buttons, 203 lineweight values, 522, 524, 525
closing, 201 new object elevation values, 358
Data Objects shortcut menu, 206 new object extrusion thickness values, 358
Data Sources Node shortcut menu, 206 for plot style behavior, 650
Database Objects shortcut menu, 204 for plotting, 647
Drawing Nodes shortcut menu, 204 Deferred Perpendicular object snap mode, 325
toolbar button descriptions, 203 DEFLPLSTYLE system variable, 650, 1170
tree view, 203 DEFPLSTYLE system variable, 1171
DBCSTATE system variable, 1169 degree sign (°), creating, 589, 1027
DBLCLKEDIT command, 246 DELAY command, 252
DBLIST command, 246 deleting
DBMOD system variable, 1169 block attributes, 103
DBQ (query set) files, 204, 228 clipping boundaries, 1100, 1133
DBT (template set) files, 228 color mapping tables, 1006
DBX files, loading, 57 drawing sheets from drawing sets, 803
DCTCUST system variable, 636, 1170 external references, 1145
DCTMAIN system variable, 636, 1170 faces of 3D solids, 957
DDATTDEF command. See ATTDEF command files, SHELL and, 934
DDATTE command. See ATTEDIT command files/folders, 624
DDATTEXT command. See ATTEXT command fit points from splines, 984
DDCHPROP command. See PROPERTIES FTP sites from list, 629
command groups, 398
DDCOLOR command. See COLOR command hyperlinks, 419, 420
DDEDIT command invalid links/link templates, 245
about, 247 landscape objects from libraries, 518
Edit Attribute Definition dialog box, 248 layer states, 467, 474
Edit Text dialog box, 248 layer translation mappings, 480
DDGRIPS command. See OPTIONS command layers, 459
DDIM command. See DIMSTYLE command layouts, 476
DDINSERT command. See INSERT command lights, 490
DDMODIFY command. See PROPERTIES linetypes, 507
command mapping coordinates, 921
DDPTYPE command, 249 materials, 534, 535
DDRENAME command. See RENAME command measurement markers, 537
DDRMODES command. See DSETTINGS multiline style elements, 569
command named views, 1092, 1096
DDSELECT command. See OPTIONS command nonstandard objects, 163
DDUCS command. See UCSMAN command objects, 837
DDUCSP command. See UCSMAN command objects from groups, 396, 400
DDUNITS command. See UNITS command profile, 664
DDVIEW command. See VIEW command profiles and sections in viewports, 946
DDVPOINT command, 250 scenes from model space, 908
decimal degrees shortcut key assignments, 191
angle measure conventions, 1076 shortcuts from History list, 622
entering angles in, 137, 611 standards files, 989, 1249
tangential edges, 966
Index | 1303
deleting (continued) DETACHURL command, 252
text styles, 999 Device and Document Settings tab (Plotter
tiled viewport configurations, 1108 Configuration Editor), 752
title block objects, 602, 603 device drivers
tool palettes, 192 displaying names of, 729
toolbar buttons, 185 search path for, 635
toolbars, 187 diagnostic tools, AUDIT command, 95
UCSs, 1058 diagonal fractions
user-defined page setups, 682 multiline text and, 583, 584
VBA macros, 1087 dialog boxes
vertices from multilines, 561 Active Assistance, 78
viewports, 598 See also names of specific dialog boxes
words from a custom dictionary, 978 standard file selection options, 621
See also erasing; removing suppressing, 3
DELOBJ system variable, 981, 1171 warning message option, 653
Delta option (LENGTHEN command), 486 diameter
demand loading (of xrefs) for circles, 167
options, 645, 1232, 1233 for cones, 9, 10, 176
demand loading options, for ObjectARX for cylinders, 197
applications, 646 for dishes, 11
DEMANDLOAD system variable, 646, 1171 for domes, 12
density of revolved surfaces, 859 entering, 1027
depth cueing, 389 entering symbol for, 589, 1031
depth map shadow render options, 887, 890 for isometric circles, 362
depth of orthographic UCSs, 1067 for spheres, 14, 978
descriptions for torus/tori, 14, 15, 1042
in DesignCenter, 47 diameter dimensions
descriptions in Properties palette, 770 associativity, 282
DesignCenter creating
about, 45 for circles and arcs, 266
closing window, 44 series of, 813
content area options, 46 diameter symbol (∅), entering, 589, 1027, 1031
DesignCenter Online web page, 49 DIASTAT system variable, 1171
displaying/hiding descriptions of items, 47 dictionaries for spelling checker
displaying/hiding tree view, 47 changing, 977
home folder, 47 custom, 977
loading file name, folder location displaying current, 976
or network path, 52 language-specific, 977
navigating to specific locations, 52 making current, 638
Search dialog box, 49 options for, 636
source/target content unit options, 655 specifying, 636
system variables, 1162 digital IDs, 1246
See also DesignCenter window digital signatures, 916
DesignCenter folder, 47 displaying a list of, 916
DesignCenter Online web page, 49 ownership information, 936
DesignCenter Online web page, accessing from Digital Signature Contents dialog box, 936
DesignCenter, 49 Digital Signature tab (Security Options dialog
desktop contents, accessing, 623 box), 915
Desktop icon (Places list in standard file selection digital signatures
dialog boxes), 623 Attach Digital Signatures utility, 1246
desmoothing 3D polyline mesh objects, 709 attaching to drawings, 915
destination options for rendering, 847, 891 certificates, 1246
destination points for aligning objects, 44 comments on, 916, 937, 1247
detaching displaying contents of, 645, 935, 936
materials, 861, 873, 874 list of files to be signed, 1246
raster images, 425 notifications for files, 1218
xrefs, 1142, 1145 options, 645
1304 | Index
digital signatures (continued) dimension lines (continued)
settings, 1246 for linear dimensions, 272
status of signed files, 935, 936, 1246 for radial dimensions, 280
time stamps, 1247 properties of, 289
validating, 936 specifying arrowheads for, 291
xrefs in signed files, 936 text movement and, 298
digitizing tablets Dimension object type, 1272
calibrating, 1015 dimension properties, 779
configuring menu and screen pointing Dimension Style Manager, 285
areas, 1018 dimension styles
options, 652 about, 285
reinitializing, 842 alternate units settings, 302
DIM and DIM1 commands, 253 applying, 311
DIMADEC system variable, 302, 393, 1171, arrowhead
1240 placement options, 297
DIMALIGNED command, 255 properties, 291
DIMALT system variable, 303, 1172, 1240 center marks for circles, 292
DIMALTD system variable, 303, 1172, 1240 command line prompts for, 309
DIMALTF system variable, 304, 1172, 1240 comparing properties, 308
DIMALTRND system variable, 304, 1172, 1240 conversion factor between primary and
DIMALTTD system variable, 307, 1172, 1240 alternate units, 303
DIMALTTZ system variable, 308, 1172, 1240 copying with MATCHPROP, 532
DIMALTU system variable, 303, 1173, 1240 creating, 288
DIMALTZ system variable, 304, 1173, 1240 dimension line properties, 289
DIMANGULAR command, 258 displaying, 286, 309
DIMAPOST system variable, 304, 1173, 1240 extension line properties, 289
DIMASO system variable, 1173 making current, 286, 309
DIMASSOC system variable, 657, 1174 naming, 288, 309
DIMASZ system variable, 292, 1174, 1240 overall scale options, 299
DIMATFIT system variable, 279, 297, 1174, prefixes/suffixes for text, 301
1240 primary units settings, 299
DIMAUNIT system variable, 302, 1175, 1240 renaming, 844
DIMAZIN system variable, 302, 1175, 1240 secondary styles, 285
DIMBASELINE command, 261 standards files for, 989, 1249
DIMBLK system variable, 1175, 1240 system variable settings of, 309, 311
DIMBLK1 system variable, 291, 1176, 1240 text
DIMBLK2 system variable, 291, 1176, 1240 movement options, 298
DIMCEN system variable, 263, 266, 279, 292, placement options, 297
1176, 1240 properties, 292
DIMCENTER command, 263 dimension system variables
DIMCLRD system variable, 289, 1176, 1240 clearing overrides, 279
DIMCLRE system variable, 290, 1176, 1240 overriding, 278
DIMCLRT system variable, 293, 1176, 1241 saving to a style, 311
DIMCONTINUE command, 264 table listing of, 1239
DIMDEC system variable, 300, 1176, 1241 updated by the New Dimension Style dialog
DIMDIAMETER command, 266 box
DIMDISASSOCIATE command, 268 Alternate Units tab, 1238
DIMDLE system variable, 290, 1176, 1241 Fit tab, 1237
DIMDLI system variable, 290, 1176, 1241 Lines and Arrows tab, 1236
DIMDSEP system variable, 300, 1177, 1241 Primary Units tab, 1238
DIMEDIT command, 269 Text tab, 1237
dimension lines Tolerances tab, 1239
extending past extension lines, 290 dimension text
location of for aligned linear dimensions, 257
for aligned linear dimensions, 257 aligning, 296, 312
for angular dimensions, 259 alternate units tolerance settings, 307
for diameter dimensions, 266 for angular dimensions, 260
Index | 1305
dimension text (continued) DIMLWE system variable, 290, 1179, 1241
for diameter dimensions, 266 DIMORDINATE command, 276
editing, with DIMEDIT, 269 DIMOVERRIDE command, 278
formatting, 293 DIMPOST system variable, 301, 1179, 1241
frames around, 294 DIMRADIUS command, 279
generated measurements, 269, 272 DIMREASSOCIATE command, 282
for linear dimensions, 272 DIMREGEN command, 284
movement options, 298 DIMRND system variable, 300, 1179, 1241
moving, 312 DIMSAH system variable, 1179, 1241
for ordinate dimensions, 277 DIMSCALE system variable, 299, 855, 1179,
overall scale value, 299 1241
placing, 294, 297 DIMSD1 system variable, 290, 1180, 1242
prefixes and suffixes, 301 DIMSD2 system variable, 290, 1180, 1242
properties, 785 DIMSE1 system variable, 291, 1180, 1242
for radial dimensions, 281 DIMSE2 system variable, 291, 1180, 1242
tolerance settings, 305 DIMSHO system variable, 312, 1180
dimension units DIMSOXD system variable, 297, 298, 1180,
converting primary to alternate, 303 1242
dimensional values DIMSTYLE command
for plot stamps, 741 about, 285
Dimensioning mode command line prompts, 309
accessing, 253 Compare Dimension Styles dialog box, 308
command equivalents, 254 Create New Dimension Style dialog box,
command list, 253 288
exiting, 253 Dimension Style Manager, 285
dimensionless values for plot stamps, 741 Modify Dimension Style dialog box, 288
dimensions New Dimension Style dialog box, 288
aligned linear, 255 Override Dimension Style dialog box, 288
angular. See angular dimensions DIMSTYLE system variable, 1180
associative DIMTAD system variable, 279, 294, 1181, 1242
associative dimensions, 1173, 1174 DIMTDEC system variable, 306, 1181, 1242
disassociating and reassociating, 268, DIMTEDIT command, 312
282 DIMTFAC system variable, 294, 300, 303, 307,
nonassociative. See nonassociative 1181, 1242
dimensions DIMTIH system variable, 270, 279, 296, 1181,
options, 657 1242
baseline, 261 DIMTIX system variable, 297, 298, 1181, 1242
clearing, dimension linear factors, 284 DIMTM system variable, 306, 1182, 1242
creating with QDIM, 813 DIMTMOVE system variable, 298, 1182, 1242
diameter, 266 DIMTOFL system variable, 279, 299, 1182, 1242
editing, 269, 813 DIMTOH system variable, 270, 279, 296, 1182,
linear. See linear dimensions 1242
ordinate. See ordinate dimensions, creating DIMTOL system variable, 306, 1182, 1242
properties of, 779 DIMTOLJ system variable, 307, 1182, 1242
updating dimension locations, 284 DIMTP system variable, 306, 1183, 1242
DIMEXE system variable, 1177, 1241 DIMTSZ system variable, 1183, 1242
DIMEXO system variable, 256, 291, 1177, 1241 DIMTVP system variable, 1183, 1242
DIMFIT system variable, 1177 DIMTXSTY system variable, 293, 1183, 1243
DIMFRAC system variable, 300, 1177, 1241 DIMTXT system variable, 294, 1183, 1243
DIMGAP system variable, 294, 306, 1177, 1241 DIMTZIN system variable, 307, 1183, 1243
DIMJUST system variable, 279, 295, 1178, 1241 DIMUNIT system variable, 1184
DIMLDRBLK system variable, 292, 1178, 1241 DIMUPT system variable, 279, 299, 1184, 1243
DIMLFAC system variable, 301, 1178, 1241 DIMZIN system variable, 302, 1184, 1243
DIMLIM system variable, 306, 1178, 1241 direct distance entry
DIMLINEAR command, 271 command modifier, 1284
DIMLUNIT system variable, 300, 1178, 1241 direction
DIMLWD system variable, 290, 1178, 1241 for 2D polyline arc segments, 715
1306 | Index
Direction Control dialog box, 1077 displaying (continued)
direction vectors, defining tabulated surfaces nonstandard objects, 991
with, 1020 paper size and units, 678, 724
directories plan view of a UCS, 712
See folders Plot Style Manager, 1003
directory search path options. See paths plot styles in drawings, 677
disassociating rendering statistics, 991
dimensions, 268 shortcut menus, 421, 655, 656
discarding slide files, 1112
back faces, 24 tangential edges of profiles, 966
changes to blocks or xrefs, 831, 836 text onscreen, 1021
dishes TGA images, 852
creating, 11 TIFF images, 852
disk space toolbars, 1035, 1036
conserving, with CONVERT, 178 tooltips, 421, 656
displaying free space, 994 translated layers in drawing area, 481
displacement tree view (DesignCenter), 47
coordinates, for copied objects, 182 UCS icon, 1061
panning by, 684 view details, 1094
vector, for moving selected faces, 953 Visual Basic Editor, 1081
displacing objects, using MOVE, 573 DISPSILH system variable, 413, 642, 1184
display (image) DIST command, 314
3D graphics configuration options, 20, 667 dist function (CAL command), 147, 152
display (of images) DISTANCE system variable, 1184
the last rendering created, 851 distances
BMP images, 852 adjusting for 3D objects, 27
image frames, 438 calculating, 147
slide files, 1112 between camera and target, specifying, 336
TGA images, 852 chamfer distances, 156
TIFF images, 852 between objects, fog and depth cueing, 389
display (screen). See screen display between points, measuring, 314
Display Drawing File Path Names setting, 802, in text line spacing, 588
805 distant light, 494
Display tab (Options dialog box), 638 distant lights, 490, 494
displaying turning on, 489, 931
attributes, 84, 349, 350 dithering
batch audit reports, 1251 in plotted graphics, 756, 1008
BMP images, 852 DIVIDE command, 314
date/time statistics of a drawing, 1029 dividing
dimension styles, 286, 309 objects, 314
drawing properties, 342 viewports, 1111
edges, 355 docking
extracted attribute information, 353 Data View window (in dbConnect), 207
groups, 396 toolbars, 1036
hidden database table columns, 210, 213 documents
hidden profile lines, 964 See drawings; files
hyperlink cursor, 421, 656 doglegs (hook lines), 266, 279, 482
hyperlink shortcut menus, 421, 656 dollar signs ($)
hyperlink tooltips, 656 $#$ prefixes on names, 834
image frames, 438 symbol
labels, 204, 205 in dependent symbols, 1130, 1132,
the last rendering created, 851 1144, 1145
lights for rendering, 489 domes, 11
a list of layers, 458, 460 DONUT command, 316
marker blips, 121 DONUTID system variable, 1184
multiline joints, 571 DONUTOD system variable, 1184
Index | 1307
donuts drawing (DWG) files
drawing, 316, 1042 adding sheets from, 802
extruding, 374 digital signatures, 936
revolving, 856 displaying with Autodesk Express Viewer,
dots per inch (dpi), 681, 735 807
double-clicking objects, 246 i-drop content, 920
double hatching (crosshatching), 409 names of, 802, 805
double-sided printing, 753 drawing area
dpi (dots per inch), 681, 735 layout viewports in, 1106, 1110
draft plot resolution, 681, 727, 735 switching to the text window from, 393
Drafting Settings dialog box, 318 tiled viewports in, 1104, 1108
Object Snap tab, 323, 672 drawing database, reindexing, 838, 839
Polar Tracking tab, 321 Drawing Exchange Binary (DXB) files,
Snap and Grid tab, 319 importing, 347
Drafting tab (Options dialog box), 658 drawing extents
drag mode, suppressing, 316 displaying, 993
dragged objects, display controls for, 316 logical, 1152
dragging plotting to, 679, 725, 732
controlling background transparency of zooming to, 1150, 1152
AutoCAD objects, 1230 drawing interchange format (DXF) files. See DXF
DRAGMODE command, 316 (drawing interchange format) files
DRAGMODE system variable, 641, 1185 drawing modes, displaying status of, 994
DRAGP1 system variable, 1185 Drawing Nodes shortcut menu (dbConnect
DRAGP2 system variable, 1185 Manager), 204
drawing drawing order (of objects)
3D arrays, 16 changing, 317
3D boxes, 7 Drawing Properties dialog box, 342
3D faces, 27 Custom tab, 346
3D free-form polygon meshes, 29 General tab, 342
3D polygon mesh objects, 7 searching fields, 50
3D polylines, 36 Statistics tab, 345
arcs, 61 Summary tab, 344
circles, 166, 316 drawing sets
clipping boundaries, 1099 adding sheets, 802
cones, 9 loading lists of sheets, 803
construction lines, 1135 saving, 800
cubes, 8, 130 sheet names, 802
cylinders, 196 viewing, 807
dishes, 11 drawing sheets
domes, 11 copying, 804
donuts, 316 deleting, 803
ellipses, 359 drawing path names, 802, 805
elliptical arcs, 360 failure to plot, 804
filled circles, 316 layout names, 802
freehand sketches, 937 layout page setup, 802, 804
line segments, 504 managing in Publish Drawing Sheets dialog
polygons, 765 box, 801
pyramids, 12 Model tab, 805
rays, 825 page setup, 804, 805
rectangular arrays, 72 path names, 802, 805
rectangular polylines, 826 renaming, 802, 804
rings, 316 reordering, 803
splines, 979 saving lists of sheets, 803
tetrahedrons, 13 sheet names, 802
torus/tori, 14, 1042 drawing specifications
traces, 1043 setting up using a layout tab, 596
wedges, 16 setting up using the Model tab, 596
1308 | Index
drawing statistics, displaying, 993 drawings (continued)
drawing template options, 899 saving
Drawing Units dialog box, 1075 AutoCAD options with, 634
drawings default path for, 1215
attaching as xrefs, 1127 to DXF format, 643
checking as earlier file formats, 898
for standards violations, 163, 1247 as HTML pages, 808
closing, 168 performance issues, 897
closing all, 169 with QSAVE, 820
creating, 605, 819, 1220 with SAVE, 897
from the current drawing, 460 with SAVEAS, 897
digital signatures, 915, 935, 1218, 1246 versions of, 901
displaying security, 914
with Autodesk Express Viewer, 807 setting custom properties for, 346
in the Aerial View window, 328 spatial indexes, 1046
information about, 342, 344, 345 standards files and, 988
ownership of opened files, 1118 title display, 645
encryption, 915, 916 transmittal sets, 363
examining with AUDIT, 95 viewing without AutoCAD, 807
exporting Drawings tab (Batch Standards Checker), 1248
attribute information from, 351 DRAWORDER command, 317
file format, 643 drivers
finding, 49, 624, 626 displaying names of, 729
inserting memory information and, 755
blocks into, 440 plotter driver information, 750
linked or embedded objects into, 448 plotting with different, 729
layout specifications for, 675, 678, 723 search path for, 635
loading geometry into drives, accessing, 623
with PARTIALOAD, 685 DSD (Drawing Set Descriptions) files
with PARTIALOPEN, 690 command line options, 807
with OPEN, using the Partial Open loading lists of drawing sheets from, 803
option, 625 saving, 803
loading layers from, 479 DSETTINGS command
markups for redlining, 875, 876 about, 318
naming, 897 Drafting Settings dialog box, 318
opening DSR handshaking, 762
default path for, 1215 DSVIEWER command, 328
partially, 625, 629 DSVIEWER command, Aerial View window, 328
using OPEN, 621 DTEXT command. See TEXT command
orientation, 678, 724 DTR output, 763
partially open duplex printing, 753
loading geometry into, 625, 629 duplicate attribute tags, 105
passwords, 914, 916 duplicate names in extracted block attribute
plotting, 719 files, 353
previewing, 625, 643, 719, 766 duplicating
problems with notifications, 1185, 1247 materials, 861
properties of, 342 sheet names, 802
publishing DVB files, loading, 57
in drawing sets, 800 DVIEW command, 331
reducing DVIEWBLOCK, displaying a preview image
redraw/regenerate times for, 824 with, 332
regenerating, 838, 839 DWF (Design Web Format) files
suppressing when switching to layout command line options, 807
tabs/Model tab, 573, 1198 naming, 803
suppressing, when switching to layout page setup, 802, 804, 805
tabs/Model tab, 652 passwords, 803
repairing, 825 publishing, 803
Index | 1309
DWF (Design Web Format) files (continued) edges
viewing displaying/hiding, 355, 1119
with Autodesk Express Viewer, 807 effects of PFACE on, 711
DWG (drawing) files, 476, 480 filleting, 377
adding sheets from, 802 of polygons, 766
displaying with Autodesk Express Viewer, trimming objects at, 1049
807 See also 3D solid edges
names of, 802, 805 EDGESURF command, 357
DWG option of SAVEAS, 899 Edit Attribute Definition dialog box, 248
DWG Options tab (Saveas Options dialog box), double-clicking attribute objects and, 246
899 Edit Attribute dialog box, 103
DWGCHECK system variable, 345, 1185 Edit Attributes dialog box, 86
DWGCODEPAGE system variable, 1185 Edit Hyperlink dialog box, 419
DWGNAME system variable, 634, 1185 Edit Layer dialog box, 481
DWGPREFIX system variable, 1185 Edit Lineweights dialog box, 1011
DWGPROPS command, 342 Edit shortcut menu
Drawing Properties dialog box, 342 enabling/disabling, 669
DWGTITLED system variable, 1186 Edit Text dialog box, 246, 248
DWS (standards) files editing
listing, 989 2D polylines, 697
recommended replacements for violations, 3D polygon mesh objects, 707
991 3D solid edges, 959
DWT (template) files, 476, 606 3D solid faces, 948
DXB (drawing interchange binary) files attribute definitions, 247
importing, 347 attributes
DXBIN command, 347 independent of a block, 85, 86
DXF (drawing interchange format) files, 476 properties, 102
binary format, 901 for a specific block, 85, 349
decimal places of accuracy for output, 901 current drawing while referenced by
DXF options of SAVEAS, 900 another, 646
.dxx extension for template extraction files, dimensions, 269, 813
92, 94 a series of, 813
performance and, 897 external database tables. See Data View
precision in, 901 window (in dbConnect)
saving AutoCAD files as, 643, 901 external references, 645, 832, 837
DXF Options tab (Saveas Options dialog box), filters, 385
900 generated dimensions, 269, 273
DXFIN command. See OPEN command gradient fills, 106, 408
DXFOUT command. See SAVEAS command hatched geometry, 106
Dynamic option HTML pages, 808
of LENGTHEN, 488 hyperlinks, 419
of ZOOM, 1150 landscape objects, 515
dynamic tessellation, 22, 667 layer
dynamic updating of the Aerial View window, properties, 481
330 states, 467, 474, 475
linked object key fields, 237
multilines, 556
E objects
earlier versions of AutoCAD on locked layers, 836
file formats, 897 locking objects not in working sets,
saving files as, 898, 901 835
EATTEDIT command, 349 plot style tables, 1006
EATTEXT command, 351 plot styles, 677
EDGE command, 355 references
edge extension modes, 373 in-place, 830, 832, 1232
EDGEMODE system variable, 1186 shaded objects, 931
solids, 961
1310 | Index
editing (continued) enabling
splines, 981 grips, 662
text created with TEXT or DTEXT, 247 macros, 1082
toolbar button images, 188, 193 Encapsulated PostScript files. See PostScript (EPS)
VBA macros, 1087 files
editing time, displaying for a drawing, 1030 encryption
elapsed timer, turning on/off or resetting, 1030 providers, 915, 916
Element Properties dialog box, 569 security options, 915
elements of multilines, controlling, 566 end caps (for multilines), 571
ELEV command, 358 styles, 1010
elevation (default Z value) End option in undoing, 1071
displaying, 994 End Sequence object type, 1273
of new objects, setting, 358 end tangent for spline curves, 980, 984
of rectangular polylines, 827 Endpoint object snap, 323, 672
ELEVATION system variable, 994, 1186 endpoints
elevation, of 2D objects, changing, 161 arc segments, 714
ELLIPSE command, 359 edges, 766
isometric circles, 167 lines
Ellipse object type, 1272 changing, 159
ellipse properties, 779 for ordinate dimension leader lines,
ellipses 276
aligning specifying, 504
axis of rotation with, 954 styles, 1010
cutting plane with, 939 engineering units, 609, 1076, 1078
converting into viewports, 1110 English units. See imperial units
creating, 359 Enhanced Attribute Editor, 349
regions from, 841 enlarging selected objects, 905, 906
display resolution option for, 640 environment definition for backgrounds, 99
dividing, 314 EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) files
extruding, 374 See also PostScript files
isometric circles, 167 equal sign (=)
properties of, 779 to specify the same name for a block and
revolving, 856 output file, 1115
using VIEWRES for, 1098 ERASE command, 362
elliptical arcs See also OOPS command
aligning the cutting plane with, 939 Erase tool, 194
creating, 360 erased objects, restoring, 620
regions from, 841 erasing
dividing, 314 objects from drawings, 362
extending, 371 restoring erased objects, 620
filleting, 377 selected filters, 385
trimming, 1047 temporary sketched lines, 938
elliptical cones, 177 See also deleting; removing
elliptical cylinders, 197 ERRNO system variable, 1186
E-mail Address tab (Insert Hyperlink dialog error
box), 418 detection/correction, using AUDIT, 96
email addresses errors
linking to, 418 CRC error-checking, 644
embedded objects ETRANSMIT command, 363
inserting into drawings, 448 Create Transmittal dialog box, 363
pasting from the Clipboard, 693 Password dialog box, 368
plotting, 729 Euro symbol, 580, 1028
embedding evaluating expressions. See CAL command
VBA projects, 1084, 1088 exact line spacing, 588
emulation mode plotting, 758 exclamation mark (!), 1248
Index | 1311
executing extension lines
commands, 2 for aligned linear dimensions, 255
queries, 203 for angular dimensions, 259
VBA statements, 1090 for baseline dimensions, 262
Existing File or Web Page tab (Insert Hyperlink for continued (chain) dimensions, 264
dialog box), 417 extending above dimension lines, 290
exiting origins of
AutoCAD, 824 for linear dimensions, 272, 275
Dimensioning mode, 253 properties of, 289
EXPERT system variable, 1187 text placement options and, 297
expiration of digital IDs, 916 Extension object snap, 672
EXPLMODE system variable, 1187 Extension object snap mode, 325
EXPLODE command, 368 Extents option (ZOOM command), 1150
See also XPLODE command extents. See drawing extents
exploding external applications
blocks, 369, 442, 443, 1138 using SYSWINDOWS with, 1013
compound objects external databases
using EXPLODE, 368 configuring
compound objects, using XPLODE, 1138 for AutoCAD access, 225
groups, 398, 400 constructing/executing queries of, 203, 215
EXPORT command, 370 creating link selection sets, 222
Export Data dialog box, 370 label templates for, 203, 231
export file formats linked object display options, Data View and
JPEG format, 455 Query Options dialog box, 226
TIFF format, 1029 linking to, 203, 208
Export Links dialog box, 227 record display formats, 230
Export page (Attribute Extraction wizard), 354 searching for text/values in, 229
Export Query Set dialog box, 228 selecting for the current operation, 243
Export Template Set dialog box, 228 updating links to, 244
exporting using the dbConnect Manager, 202
block attribute information to files, 351 viewing and editing, 207
drawings External Reference dialog box, 1127
as 3D Studio files, 39 external reference properties, 780
as ACIS files, 44 external references (xrefs)
drawings, in PNG files, 763 adding/removing objects during in-place
layer editing of, 837
states, 467, 474 attaching, 1127, 1142
link template sets, 228 with External Reference dialog box,
links (database), 227 1127
materials, 533 with XATTACH, 1127
profiles, 664 in batch standards audits, 1248
query sets, 228 binding
tool palettes, 192 definitions to drawings, 1131, 1143,
expressions (in geometry calculator), evaluating. 1145
See CAL command dependent symbols to drawings, 1130
EXTEND command, 371 vs. blocks, 1140
Extended Apparent Intersection object snap defining clipping boundaries and clipping
mode, 326 planes, 1132
Extended Intersection object snap mode, 324 as DesignCenter content, 45
extending objects detaching, 1142, 1145
implied edge extension modes, 373 digital signatures and, 936, 937
projection options for, 372 displaying
rather than trimming, 1047 information about, 1141
selecting boundary edges, 371 path for, 1142, 1143, 1146
trimming objects rather than, 372 displaying information about, 1145
undoing changes, 374 displaying path for, 1128
editing options, 645
1312 | Index
external references (xrefs) (continued) Fast Load AutoLISP (FAS) applications, loading,
exporting attribute information for, 352 57
insertion point, 1129 favorite documents
layer states, accessibility, 459 accessing, 623
listing, 1131 adding, 624
loading, 1140 Favorites folder
loading partially open drawings and, 632, displaying the contents, 623
685, 687, 691 Favorites folder (DesignCenter)
nested, 833, 834, 835, 1127, 1140, 1143 displaying the contents, 47
notifications for updated or missing xrefs, Favorites icon (Places list in standard file selection
1233 dialog boxes), 623
opening in new windows, 1136 FAX G III files, options for rendering, 891
project files and, 635 feature control frames, 1031
properties of, 780 feature locations for base dimensions
reloading, 1143, 1146 baseline dimensions, 262
removing from lists, 1131 continued dimensions, 265
retaining changes to layers, 646 feet and inches, formatting for CAL command,
rotation angle, 1130 136
saving back changes to, 830, 836 fence object selection method, 918
scale factor, 1129 file compression, render option, 892
selecting for editing, 832 file conversion. See converting
temporary file location option, 638 file formats
unloading, 687, 1143, 1146 for attribute information files, 91, 354
updating DSD files, 803
notifications, 1233 DWF files, 807
xref-dependent layers, 1229 DXF files, 901
EXTMAX system variable, 1187 for exporting, 370
EXTMIN system variable, 1187 for rendered images, 903
EXTNAMES system variable, 122, 653, 1188 for saving drawings, 643, 897, 898, 900,
extracting 901
attribute information, 91, 351 See also names of specific formats
VBA projects, 1084 File menu, recently used files list, 645
EXTRUDE command, 374 file names
extruded for background image files, 98
objects displaying information about, 343
HIDE command and, 412 drawing file names, 802, 805
extruding DWF files, 802, 803
3D faces, 948 for extracted attribute output files, 93
objects for plotter configuration files, 749
to create solids, 374 for temporary plot files, 636
extrusion See also naming conventions
height of, 950 File Output Configuration dialog box, 891
paths for, 375, 951 file selection dialog boxes. See standard file
thickness of, setting for new objects, 358 selection dialog boxes
file types
of drawings, displaying, 343
F supported for
Face method for defining a UCS, 1055 background images, 98, 99
faces (of 3D solids) rendered file output, 891
See also 3D solid faces FILEDIA system variable, 429, 476
FACETRATIO system variable, 1188 about, 1188
FACETRES system variable, 641, 996, 1188 BMPOUT and, 127
fade setting of image display, 431, 432, 1232 IMPORT and, 440
falloff angle (of spotlights), 497 JPGOUT and, 455
FAS files MENULOAD and, 540, 543
loading, 57 MENUUNLOAD and, 543
NEW and, 605, 612
Index | 1313
FILEDIA system variable (continued) files (continued)
OPEN and, 621, 632 working support file list, 635
PARTIALOPEN and, 690 See also image files
PNGOUT and, 763 Files list (standard file selection dialog boxes)
PSETUPIN and, 798 about, 625
PUBLISH and, 807 view options, 624
RECOVER and, 825 Files tab
SAVEAS and, 898, 901 Create Transmittal dialog box, 365
SCRIPT and, 911 Options dialog box, 634
TIFOUT and, 1029 FILL command, 377
VBALOAD and, 1082 Fill mode, turning on or off, 377
VSLIDE and, 1112 filled circles, 316
WBLOCK and, 1115 fillet arcs, 381
XREF and, 1148 FILLET command, 377
files fillet radius, 827
accessing, 621 Fillet Trim mode, 382
browsing for, 634 filleting objects
deleting, 624 polyline segments, 378
SHELL and, 934 FILLETRAD system variable, 1188
digital signatures, 935, 936, 1246 FILLMODE system variable, 642, 948, 1188
displaying fills
information about, 342 display option for solid fills, 642
ownership of opened drawing files, filled circles, 316
1118 for hatches, 405
displaying Files list, 624 of multilines, 572
encryption, 916 patterns in plot styles, 1005
exporting block attribute information to, PostScript fills, standard library file of, 1264
351 See also gradient fills
favorite documents, 623, 624 FILTER command, 382
filtering by types Object Selection Filters dialog box, 383
names filter.nfl (default filters) file, 385
or locations, 626 filtering
filtering by types, names, or locations, 625 files by type, name, or location, 625, 626
finding, 626 filters
format for, 643 applying, 386
hyperlinks to, 417 creating/editing, 382
i-drop content, 920 for layer translation, 479
importing, 440 for named layer display, 458, 464
names point filters, 1284
drawing files, 802, 805 properties and parameters of, 383
DWF files, 802, 803 for selection sets, 820
opening, 625 Find and Replace dialog box, 386
password protection, 914, 916 Find and Replace Options dialog box, 389
plotting to, 723, 751 FIND command, 386
DWF files, 804 Find dialog box
project files, 635 about, 626
recently used, 622, 645 Date Modified tab, 627
safety precautions options, 644 displaying, 624
saving Name & Location tab, 626
options for, 643 Find dialog box (DBCONNECT), 229
with QSAVE, 820 finding
with SAVE, 897 drawing files, 626
with SAVEAS, 897 first line indents, 581
in standard dialog boxes, 625 fit curves
standards files for auditing, 1249 for 2D polylines, 702
temporary files, 645 effects of editing commands on, 702
viewing in Autodesk Express Viewer, 807 vs. spline curves, 701
1314 | Index
fit data FONTALT system variable, 636, 664, 1189
purging from the drawing database, 984 FONTMAP system variable, 636, 1189
spline editing options, 982 fonts
fit points (for spline curves) alternate, specifying location of, 636, 664
adding to splines, 982 changing, 1001
deleting from splines, 984 character maps for, 578
moving, 984 command window fonts, 640, 667
Fit tab (New Dimension Style dialog box), 296 listing font family names, 665
system variables updated by, 1237 for OLE objects, changing, 620
fit tolerance specifications for, in Data View window
for spline curves, 980, 985 (dbConnect), 230
FITS files, options for rendering, 891 specifying, 578, 999
fitting standard libraries, 1265
backgrounds to screen, 100 Unicode fonts, 1277
plots on paper, 733 Windows system font, 639
text within an area, 1022 forgotten passwords, 914, 916
fixed screen-pointing area (on digitizing Form View style settings tab (Plot Style Table
tablets), 1019 Editor), 1006
fixing standards violations, 163, 991 Format dialog box, 230
flagging nonstandard objects, 164, 991, 1247 format of database record display, 230
Flat Shaded shading option, 21, 932 formatting
flat shaded, adaptive degradation, 21 attribute text, 104, 350
Flat Shaded, Edges On shading option, 932 labels, 231
floating screen-pointing area (on digitizing forward slash (/)
tablets), 1019 stacked text indicator, 578, 584
floating toolbars, 1037 FPS speed
flood island detection, 115 adaptive degradation, 21
floppy disks, SHELL command and, 934 fractional units, 609, 1076, 1078
flow control (in plotting) fractions
setting, 761 blank spaces before, 584
Flyout Properties tab (Customize dialog box), format for linear dimensions, 300
189 height of, 294
flyouts (in toolbar buttons) in stacked text, 578, 583, 584
displaying, 189 styles for, 583
fog frames per second display speed, 21
choosing a color system for, 390 free-form polygon meshes, 29
defining distance and percentages of, 391 freehand drawings, sketching, 937
turning on or off, 390 freezing
FOG command, 389 layers, 460, 463, 472
Fog/Depth Cue dialog box, 390 in viewports, 461, 1100, 1101
folder search path options, 634 FROM command modifier, 1285
folders FRONTZ system variable, 1190
accessing, 623 frozen layers, 463
adding to Places list, 624 FTP Locations icon (Places list in standard file
browsing for, 634 selection dialog boxes), 623
creating, 624 FTP sites
default path in standard file selection dialog accessing, 623
boxes, 1215 adding, 624, 628
deleting, 624 logging on, 628
Web folders, 623 full paths for external references, 1128
See also paths FULLOPEN system variable, 1190
folding options (press) in PC3 files, 730 full-screen tracking vector display option, 659
font mapping files fuzz distance
specifying location of, 636 between endpoints, 697
Index | 1315
G gradient fills (continued)
editing geometry, 106
general properties of objects, 770 patterns, 116
General tab selecting objects for, 108
Create Transmittal dialog box, 363 Gradient tab
Drawing Properties dialog box, 342 Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box, 115
Plotter Configuration Editor, 749 Hatch Edit dialog box, 409
generated measurements, 269, 273 grads
Geographic Location dialog box, 501 angle measure conventions, 1076
geometric entering angles in, 137, 611
expressions, evaluating. See CAL command granite material attributes, 868
tolerances graphical objects
creating, 1030 attaching hyperlinks to, 416
geometric characteristic symbols pasting from the Clipboard, 693
standard library file of, 1269 table listing of, 1271
table listing of, 1033 See also objects (AutoCAD)
Geometric Tolerance dialog box, 483, 1031 graphical objects. See objects (AutoCAD)
geometry GRAPHSCR command, 393
acceleration in 3D view, 24, 25 gray shades, 1008
of landscape objects, specifying, 519, 516, green components of colors, 172
521 grid (drawing area)
loading into partially open drawings grid snap type, 320, 946
with PARTIALOAD, 685 grid spacing, 393, 994
with PARTIALOPEN, 690 setting drawing limits for, 502
selecting turning on/off, 394
for partially open drawings, 621 grid (toolbar button editor), 194
getvar AutoLISP function, 139 GRID command, 393
GFANG system variable, 116, 1190 grid dots
GFCLR1 system variable, 1190 setting spacing of, 320
GFCLR2 system variable, 1190 turning on or off, 320
GFCLRLUM system variable, 116, 1190 Grid Header shortcut menu (Data View window
GFCLRSTATE system variable, 1190 in dbConnect), 213
GFNAME system variable, 116, 1190 grid limits
GFSHIFT system variable, 1191 displaying, 993
global plotting, 679, 725, 732
editing of attributes, 89 setting, 502
linetype scale, 509 grid snap type, 320, 946
material in materials libraries, 533 grid spacing, 393, 994
VBA projects, unloading, 1085 GRIDMODE system variable, 320, 1191
GOTOURL command, 393 GRIDUNIT system variable, 320, 994, 1191
Gouraud render quality option, 885 GRIPBLOCK system variable, 662, 1191
Gouraud Shaded shading option, 932 GRIPCOLOR system variable, 662, 1191
Gouraud Shaded, Edges On shading option, 932 GRIPHOT system variable, 662, 1191
gradient background for scenes, 97 GRIPHOVER system variable, 662, 1191
gradient boundaries GRIPOBJLIMIT system variable, 663, 1191
associativity controls, 109 grips
defining, using BHATCH, 112, 117 determining color of, 662, 1191
island detection methods, 114 display size of, 662
previewing, 109 enabling, 662
redefining boundary sets, 114, 117 grip tips, 663, 1192
removing islands from, 108 turning on/off, 1191, 1192
retaining as objects, 113 GRIPS system variable, 662, 1191
viewing, 109 GRIPSIZE system variable, 662, 1192
gradient fills GRIPTIPS system variable, 663, 1192
angles, 116 GROUP command
centers, 116 about, 394
defining, 115 command line prompts, 399
editing, 408
1316 | Index
GROUP command (continued) Hatch object type, 1273
Object Grouping dialog box, 395 Hatch Pattern Palette dialog box, 116
Order Group dialog box, 398 hatch patterns
Group object selection method, 919 angles, changing, 111
groups (of objects) copying with MATCHPROP, 533
adding objects to, 397, 400 custom, 110, 111, 117, 403
creating, 396, 400, 661 displaying preview images of, 109
deleting (exploding), 398, 400 ISO patterns, 112, 117
descriptions of, 396, 398, 401 listing names of, 117, 404
displaying, 396, 399 predefined, 110, 117, 403
inserting, 442 properties of, 117, 411
naming, 396, 401 scaling, 111
removing objects from, 396, 400 solid, fill style options, 118
renaming, 397, 400 specifying, 110, 117
reordering objects in, 397, 398, 399 standard library file of, 1258, 1264
ungrouping, 400 user-defined, 110, 118, 406
GSHEIDI10 (Heidi3D graphics display system), hatch properties, 781
651 hatch style codes, 407, 410
GSHIFT system variable, 116 Hatch tab (Boundary Hatch and Fill dialog box),
110
Hatch tab (Hatch Edit dialog box), 409
H hatched
halfwidth specifications for 2D polyline geometry
segments, 715, 717 editing, 106
haloed lines, shortening, 414, 1192 objects, editing, 408
HALOGAP system variable, 414, 1192 HATCHEDIT command
HANDLES system variable, 1192 about, 408
handshaking (in plotting) command line prompts, 410
setting, 761, 762 Hatch Edit dialog box, 408
hardware hatches
acceleration, 25 associative. See associative hatches
handshaking, 762 converting those created in earlier releases,
hatch boundaries 178
associativity controls, 109, 120 as DesignCenter content, 45, 49
chamfering and, 154 double, 109
defining filleting, 378
using BHATCH, 112, 117 filling, 377, 1188
using HATCH, 403 properties of, 781
island detection methods, 114, 119 selecting objects for, 108, 118
island detection styles, 112, 120 hatching, crosshatching, 409
previewing, 109 Heidi 3D Graphics System, 651, 667
redefining boundary sets, 114, 117 height
removing islands from, 108, 118 for attribute text, 88, 160
retaining as objects, 113, 119, 404, 406 for cones, 176
specifying, 404, 405, 406 for cylinders, 196
viewing, 109 of dimension text, 294
HATCH command for dimension tolerance text, 307
about, 403 for elliptical cones, 177
hatch style codes, 407 for elliptical cylinders, 198
pattern specifications, 403 of extrusion, 375, 950
solid fill specifications, 405 for geometric tolerance zones, 1033
user-defined patterns, 406 for landscape objects
See also BHATCH command specifying, 516, 522
Hatch Edit dialog box for multiline text, 578, 585
about, 408 for OLE objects, 619
double-clicking hatch objects and, 246 for shapes, 933
for text, 159, 999, 1002, 1022
Index | 1317
height (continued) hiding, objects, 1192
for wedges, 1117 HIGHLIGHT system variable, 1193
for zoom magnification, 1149 history
height (second color) setting for backgrounds, list
99 adding applications to, 59
Help removing applications from, 60
accessing, 411 History icon (Places list in standard file selection
HELP command, 411 dialog boxes), 622
Help file history, listing recently-used files, 622
search path for, 635 HLS color system
Help menu, accessing user or developer See also hue, lightness, saturation (HLS) color
documentation from, 2 system
Help, Active Assistance, 76 HLSETTINGS command
hemisphere, specifying in the Sun Angle about, 413
Calculator, 501 Hidden Line Settings dialog box, 414
Hidden Line Settings dialog box, 414 home folder (for DesignCenter), 47
hidden lines (in 3D objects) hook lines, 266, 279, 482
colors, 414 horizon (unrotated height), setting for
haloed lines, 414 backgrounds, 99
linetypes, 414 horizontal
options, 657 construction lines, 1135
of profiles, display options, 964 fractions
removing hidden lines in 3D objects multiline text and, 583, 584
for plotting, 592, 1110 grid spacing, 944
shade plot settings, 680, 726 justification of dimension text, 295
SOLVIEW placement of, 967 linear dimensions, 274
suppressing, 341, 412, 413 resolution of rendered images, 850
HIDDEN linetype, 964 tiling of windows, 1013
Hidden shading option, 932 hotspot angle (of spotlights), 497
hidden text, 415 HPANG system variable, 111, 946, 1193
HIDE command, about, 412 HPBOUND system variable, 1193
HIDEPRECISION system variable, 415, 1192 HPDOUBLE system variable, 109, 409, 1193
hides, precision of, 415, 1192 HPNAME system variable, 110, 113, 407, 410,
HIDETEXT system variable, 412, 413, 1192 946, 1193
hiding HPSCALE system variable, 111, 946, 1193
attribute text, 104 HPSPACE system variable, 111, 1193
attributes, 84 HSL (Hue, Saturation, and Luminance color
database table columns, 210 model)
edges, 355 See hue, lightness, saturation (HLS) color
hyperlink cursor, 421, 656 system
hyperlink shortcut menus, 421, 656 HTML pages
hyperlink tooltips, 656 creating/editing, 808
image frames, 438 hue
intersection polylines, 415 specifying, 171
labels, 204, 205 hue, lightness, saturation (HLS) color system, 98
linetype details, 507 adjusting for material color, 864
multiline joints, 571 specifying, 171
paper space objects for plotting, 682, 727, using for fog, 391
735 hyperlink
Properties palette, 770 base address to use for a drawing, 345
shortcut menus, 421, 656 HYPERLINK command
system printers, 649 about, 416
toolbars, 1035, 1038 command line prompts, 420
tooltips, 421, 656 Edit Hyperlink dialog box, 419
tree view (DesignCenter), 47 Insert Hyperlink dialog box, 416
UCS icon, 1061 Select Place in Document dialog box, 419
See also hidden lines (in 3D objects) HYPERLINKBASE system variable, 418, 1193
1318 | Index
HYPERLINKOPTIONS command, 421 image files (continued)
hyperlinks in landscape libraries, 519
associating with block definitions, 124 listing names of, 423, 427
attaching to graphical objects, 416 naming conventions, 429
cursor display options, 421, 656 properties of, 782
defining a bounding rectangle for, 420 reloading/unloading, 426, 428
editing, 419 renaming, 425, 429
options for, 656 transparency, 1044
as property of objects, 771 updating the path name, 427, 428
removing, 419, 420 viewing details of, 426, 435
shortcut menu display options, 421, 656 See also display (of images)
tooltip display options, 421, 656 image frames
displaying, 438
Image Manager, 424
I Image object type, 1273
icons image properties, 782
arranging in windows, 1013 image slide files, displaying, 1112
for blocks, 126 Image Specifications dialog box, 852
in status bar tray, 1045 IMAGEADJUST command
for OLE objects, 616, 617 about, 430
in standard file selection dialog boxes, 622 command line prompts, 432
standards violation icon, 990 Image Adjust dialog box, 431
UCS, 1061, 1068 IMAGEATTACH command, 433
ID command, 423 IMAGECLIP command, 436
Identity Reference tab (Reference Edit dialog IMAGEFRAME command, 438
box), 832 IMAGEHLT system variable, 642, 1193
i-drop IMAGEQUALITY command, 439
list of available content, 920 imperial units
location of associated data files, 920 current drawing settings, 1201
log file, 920 starting drawings based on, 606, 1201
SETIDROPHANDLER command and, 920 implied
setting default i-drop content type, 920 edge extension modes, for extending
viewing name of file, 920 objects, 373
viewing URL for source of, 920 implied, windowing option, for object
i-drop Options dialog box, 920 selection, 661
IDs, digital, See digital IDs IMPORT command, 440
IFF files, options for rendering, 891 Import File dialog box, 440
ignoring nonstandard objects, 164, 991 Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard, 696
ill/ilp functions (CAL command), 147, 152 Import Query Set dialog box, 230
image (bitmap file) background for scenes, 98 Import Template Set dialog box, 231
Image Adjust dialog box, 431 Import User Defined Page Setups dialog box, 798
image application, WMFOUT and, 1126 Import WMF dialog box, 1120
IMAGE command importing
about, 423 3D Studio files, 37
command line prompts, 427 ACIS files, 43
Image Manager, 424 DXB files, 347
Image dialog box, 434 files of various formats, 440
image display. See display (image) layer
Image File Details dialog box, 426 states, 467, 474
image files link templates
attaching new images, 433 sets, 231
attaching/detaching, 425, 427, 428 materials, 533
defining offset and size of, 852 PCP/PC2 configuration file plot settings,
display quality controls for, 439 696
displaying, 852 plotter configuration settings, 760
Image Manager, 424 profiles, 664
image slide files, displaying, 1112 text files
Index | 1319
importing (continued) insertion point
into the Multiline Text Editor, 580 for attributes, 81, 87, 160
tool palettes, 192 for blocks, 160, 441, 443
user-defined page setups into layouts, 682, for current drawing, 101
798 displaying, 994
WMF files, 1120 for images, 435
imprinting objects on 3D solids, 961 for multiple instances of blocks, 544
inches for shapes, 933
and feet, formatting for CAL command, 136 for text, 159
Inches.pss file, 737 for WMF files, 1120
Include Model Layout When Adding Sheets for xrefs, 1129
setting, 802 INSERTOBJ command, 448
included angles, for surfaces of revolution, 858 INSNAME system variable, 1194
incremental save percentage option, 644 INSUNITS system variable, 435, 655, 1194
Indents and Tabs dialog box, 581 INSUNITSDEFSOURCE system variable, 655,
indents in text, 579, 581 1195
index INSUNITSDEFTARGET system variable, 655,
status for partially open drawings, 687 1195
type created when saving drawings, 900 intensity
Index Color tab (Select Color dialog box), 170 of ambient light, 491
index, colors, 170 of point light, 492
INDEXCTL system variable, 687, 1194 of spotlight, 496
INETLOCATION system variable, 1194 INTERFERE command, 450
infinite lines interference solids, 450
See also construction lines; rays Interlace render option, 892
inheritance Internet (Web)
gradient fills, 409 browsing, 623
hatches, 409 folders on the Web, 623
object properties i-drop content, 920
exploded objects, 1139 Live Enablers, 654
initialization strings publishing drawings as HTML pages, 808
plot configurations, 758 Internet Explorer, 133
inner arc start/end caps on multilines, 572 interrupted scripts, resuming running of, 854
in-place reference editing INTERSECT command, 451
adding/removing objects during, 837 Intersection object snap, 324, 672
saving back changes, 830 intersection point, obtaining, 147
selecting references for, 832 intersection polylines
system variables, 1232 color, 415, 1196
INSBASE system variable, 101, 994, 1194 display, 1196
Insert (Block Reference) object type, 1272 hiding, 415
INSERT command INTERSECTIONCOLOR system variable, 1196
about, 440 INTERSECTIONDISPLAY system variable, 412,
command line prompts, 442 415, 1196
Insert dialog box, 441 intersections (of lines)
Insert Hyperlink dialog box, 124, 416 raster plotter output, 757
Insert Markup dialog box, 875 invalid links/link templates, updating, 244
Insert Object dialog box, 448 inverse linear attenuation of light
inserting of point light, 492, 493
content, from DesignCenter, 46 of spotlight, 497
data from the Clipboard, 693 inverse square attenuation of light
drawings, 440 of point light, 492, 493
external references, 1144 of spotlight, 497, 498
linked or embedded objects, 448 invisible
shapes, 933 attributes, 84, 90
inserting blocks, 440 edges of a 3D face, 28
Insertion object snap, 325, 672 lines. See hidden lines
ISAVEBAK system variable, 644, 1197
1320 | Index
ISAVEPERCENT system variable, 644, 1197 L
islands (within boundaries)
detection methods, 127, 129 Label Template dialog box
islands (within hatches and fills) about, 231
detection methods, 114, 119 displaying, 203
detection style, 112, 120 Label Fields tab, 232
removing, 108, 118 Label Offset tab, 232
ism.arx (image application), WMFOUT and, Label Template Properties dialog box, 233
1126 label templates
ISO (International Standards Organization) creating, 203, 240
patterns, 112, 117 exporting
pen widths, 509 sets of, 228
isolines formatting, 231
display in 3D view, 24 importing
ISOLINES system variable, 641, 1197 sets of, 231
isometric landings. See hook lines
circles, 167, 362 Landscape Edit dialog box, 516
planes, 453 Landscape Library dialog box, 517
views Landscape Library Edit dialog box, 518
restoring, 1092 Landscape New dialog box, 520
Isometric snap grid, 945 landscape objects
Isometric snap mode, 320 aligning, 519, 521
ISOPLANE command, 453 defining libraries, 517
italic typeface, formatting multiline text in, 578 deleting from libraries, 518
editing, 515
inserting into drawings, 520
J listing, 517, 521
previewing, 516, 520
joining
landscape orientation, 679, 724, 732
cut multiline segments, 563
languages
lines, 1010
AutoCAD support for, 1277
polylines, 697, 702
language-specific dictionaries, 977
joints
large toolbar buttons, 187
of multilines, 571
LAS files, 467
styles, 1010
Last object selection method, 917
JPEG files, 455
LASTANGLE system variable, 1197
JPGOUT command, 455
LASTPOINT system variable, 143, 144, 1197
justification
LASTPROMPT system variable, 1197
dimension text, 313 latitude
multiline text, 579, 586 displaying for a selected city, 501
multilines, 565 specifying in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500
text, 455, 1022 layer colors, assigning, 579
JUSTIFYTEXT command, 455
LAYER command
about, 457
K command line prompts, 469
Layer Properties Manager, 457
key Layer States Manager, 460, 467
fields Lineweight dialog box, 468
for link templates, 238 Named Layer Filters dialog box, 464
for linked objects, 237 Save Layer States dialog box, 459, 466
keyboard shortcuts, command aliases, 1155 Select Linetype dialog box, 468
Keyboard tab (Customize dialog box), 190 layer index, for partially open drawings, 632
keyboard, running object snaps entry, 656 layer indexes
keys (encryption), 915, 916 for partially open drawings, 687
keywords for saved drawings, 900
for locating drawings, 345 layer linetypes, binding referenced linetypes,
1130
Index | 1321
layer plot styles, default plot styles, 650 layers (continued)
layer properties, 459 standards files for, 989, 1249
editing, 481 thawing, 460, 464, 473, 1101
restoring, 467, 475 tracking changes to, 475
saving, 459, 466, 473 translating to other standards, 478
Layer Properties Manager, 457 turning on/off, 460, 463
layer states, 459 undoing changes to settings, 475
exporting, 467, 474 visibility, 1101
importing, 467, 474 xref-dependent layers, 646, 1229
managing, 467, 473 LAYOUT command, 475
restoring, 467, 473 layout elements, customizing, 640
saving, 459, 466, 473 Layout Settings tab (Page Setup dialog box), 678
Layer States Manager, 467 layout tabs
displaying, 460 plotting and, 675, 719, 722, 732, 745, 746
Layer Translator, 478 suppressing regeneration when switching
LAYERP command, 475 to, 573, 1198
LAYERPMODE command, 475 Layout tabs (Color Options dialog box), 665
layers layout tabs, suppressing regeneration when
for 3D faces created with PFACE, 711 switching to, 652
annotation layers, 464 layout viewports
attaching materials by, 861 creating with SOLVIEW, 966
for attribute text, 88, 105, 350 creating with VPORTS, 1106, 1110
changing properties of, 796
properties of, 460 LAYOUTREGENCTL system variable, 573, 652,
copying 1198
objects to, with MATCHPROP, 531 layouts
created by SOLVIEW, 967 changing window element color in, 665,
creating, 459, 469, 470, 479 666
deleting, 459 copying, 476
displaying creating, 476
current layer, 994 with the Layout wizard, 477
displaying, in xrefs, 834 customizing, 640
for exploded objects, 1139 deleting, 476
filtering displaying name of, for plotting, 719
display of, 458, 464 importing
freezing, 460, 461, 463, 472, 1100, 1101 user-defined page setups into, 798
frozen layers, 463 listing, 477, 802
geometry to load for partially open making current, 477
drawings, 631 markup layouts, 876
listing, 460, 469, 478, 480, 687, 688, 691 options, setting, 640
loading geometry from, into partially open page setups for, 675, 802, 804
drawings saving, 477
with PARTIALOAD, 687, 688 SOLPROF and, 964
with PARTIALOPEN, 690, 692 for viewport creation, 591, 598
locking/unlocking, 460, 463, 473, 836 LAYOUTWIZARD command, 477
making current, 459, 469 LAYTRANS command, 478
MARKUP layer, 875 Edit/New Layer dialog box, 481
naming, 459, 462, 469 Layer Translator, 478
plotting, 461, 463 Settings dialog box, 480
profile blocks and, 964 leader annotations
purging multiline text options for, 816
from the drawing database, 479, 811 properties, 785
referenced and unreferenced, 479 reusing, 817
renaming, 844 specifying, 814
for selected objects, 165 types of, 816
changing, 162 LEADER command, 482
as property of objects, 771 leader dimensions, associativity, 282
1322 | Index
Leader Line & Arrow tab (Leader Settings dialog New or Modify Distant Light dialog box,
box), 817 494
leader lines New or Modify Point Light dialog box, 492
about, 482 New or Modify Spotlight dialog box, 496
arrowhead formats, 292, 818 North Location dialog box, 498
attaching, 818 Shadow Options dialog box, 499
formatting, 484 Sun Angle Calculator dialog box, 500
inserting annotations for, 483 light source vector, for distant light, 496
for ordinate dimensions, 276 lights (for rendering), 489, 931
specifying, 482, 817 ambient light, 491
undoing the last vertex on, 485 colors of, 494, 497
Leader object type, 1273 creating, 490
leader properties, 783 deleting, 490
Leader Settings dialog box displaying in drawing, 489
Annotation tab, 817 listing, 490
Attachment tab, 818 modifying, 490
Leader Line & Arrow tab, 817 for scenes, 909, 910
leader text selecting, 490
justifying, 455 turning on, 489, 931
properties, 785 See also distant light
leaders Lights dialog box, 489
attaching, 818 lightweight polylines, properties of, 787
creating with QLEADER, 814 LIMCHECK system variable, 1198
exploding, 370 limits
properties of, 783, 785 checking
See also leader annotations turning on or off, 609, 611
See also leader lines checking, turning on or off, 502
leading, See line spacing LIMITS command, 502
left-justifying text, 586, 1024, 1026 LIMMAX system variable, 993, 1199
legacy drawings, clearing dimension linear LIMMIN system variable, 993, 1199
factors, 284 LIN (linetype library) files, 506, 509, 510
LENGTHEN command, 486 LINE command, 504
lengths (of objects) Line object type, 1273
2D polyline segments, 715, 718 line properties, 784
changing line segments
by Dynamic Dragging, 488 drawing, 504
by specified increments, 486 sketching freehand, 937
converting between model and paper See also lines
space, 901, 974 line spacing, for multiline text, 587
setting line start/end caps
by a percentage, 487 on multilines, 571
by specifying total length, 487 styles, 1010
wedges, 1117 Line tool, 194
LENSLENGTH system variable, 1198 linear dimensions
libraries aligned, 255
of landscape objects, creating and editing, alternate units settings, 302
517 associativity, 282
of materials, importing/exporting to, 533 creating, 271
standard. See standard libraries with DIMBASELINE, 261
license information, AutoCAD, 43 with DIMCONTINUE, 264
light blocks, scale factor for rendering, 846, 883 format and precision settings, 300
LIGHT command prefixes/suffixes for text, 301
about, 489 rounding rules for, 300
Geographic Location dialog box, 501 scale options, 301
Lights dialog box, 489 zero suppression, 302
Index | 1323
lines linetypes, standards files for, 1249
aligning the axis of rotation with, 878, 954 Lineweight dialog box, 468
changing endpoints of, 159 Lineweight Settings dialog box, 523
construction, 1135 lineweights
creating regions from, 841 adjusting display scale for, 525
crossing, raster plotter output, 757 for attribute text, 105, 350
for defining angular dimensions, 259 copying with MATCHPROP, 532
extending, 371 of dimension lines, 290
filleting, 377 displaying
infinite, 1135 available values for, 524, 526
join styles, 1010 the current setting, 994
joining to polylines, 697 in model space, 525
properties of, 784 for exploded objects, 1139
spacing in hatch patterns, 111 of extension lines, 290
specifying endpoints of, 504, 1010 listing, 468, 1011
traces, 1043 modifying, 1011
trimming, 1047 options, 657
Lines and Arrows tab (New Dimension Style plot options, 681, 727, 1010, 1011
dialog box), 289 as property of objects, 771
system variables updated by, 1236 saved in format of earlier releases, 526
LINETYPE command, 165 for selected layers, 461, 462, 471, 481
about, 506 for selected objects, 162, 165
command line prompts, 510 setting, 523, 525
Linetype Manager, 506 sorting, 1012
Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, 509 specifying units for, 524, 1011
LINETYPE command, loading linetypes, 162 Link Conversion dialog box, 234
Linetype Manager, 506 Link Manager, 237
linetype scale, as property of objects, 771 Link Select
linetypes creating selection sets, 222
for attribute text, 105, 350 executing, 224
binding referenced linetypes, 1130 link templates and, 222, 224
complex, standard library file of, 1257 queries and, 223
copying with MATCHPROP, 531 status bar information, 224
creating at the command line, 510 Link Select dialog box, 222
deleting, 507 Link Template dialog box, 203, 238
displaying, 468, 507, 510, 994 Link Template Properties dialog box, 239
for exploded objects, 1139 link templates
filtering, 507 creating, 203, 240
generating for 2D polylines, 704 exporting, 228
hiding/displaying details of, 507 importing, 231
loading, 162, 507, 509, 511 specifying key fields for, 238
making current, 507, 512 updating, 244
of multiline style elements, 570 linked objects (database links)
naming conventions for, 508, 509 display options, Data View and Query
of obscured lines, 414 Options dialog box, 226
in plot styles, 1009 editing key field values, 237
as property of objects, 771 in external database tables, 208
purging from the drawing database, 811 linked objects (OLE links)
renaming, 844 inserting into drawings, 448
scale factor, 162, 165, 509, 522, 532, 1005 pasting from the Clipboard, 693
for selected layers, 460, 462, 471 links (in databases)
for selected objects, 162, 165 converting from AutoCAD releases 12 and
standard library file of, 1256 14, 235
standards files for, 989 creating, 208
for translated layers, 481 deleting, 205, 238
exporting, 227
template
1324 | Index
links (in databases) (continued) Lock Aspect Ratio option, for OLE objects, 619
exporting, 204 locked layers, 836
importing, 231 locking
updating, 244 attribute color to the main color, 861
Links dialog box, 615 layers, 460, 463, 473, 836
Links index for databases, 653 objects not in working sets, 835
LISP routines. See AutoLISP (LSP) applications viewports, 593, 1110
LISPINIT system variable, 1199 log files
LIST command, 513 closing, 514
list view continuously repeating scripts and, 893
in the Image Manager, 424 for i-drop content, 920
in the Xref Manager, 1141 layer translation, 481
listing plot stamps, 741, 742
drawing sheets, 802, 803 plotting failures log, 804
DWS (standards) files, 989 saving, 806
font family names, 665 search path for, 637, 645
hatch patterns, 111, 117, 404 turning on/off, 645
recently-used files, 622 writing text window contents to, 515
standards files, 989 LOGFILEMODE system variable, 645, 1199
user profiles, 663 LOGFILENAME system variable, 645, 1199
xrefs, 1131 LOGFILEOFF command, 514
Live Enabler LOGFILEON command, 515
options, 654 LOGFILEPATH system variable, 637, 1200
LOAD command, 514 logging on, to FTP sites, 628
Load dialog box, 46 logical
Load Multiline Styles dialog box, 569 extents, zooming to, 1152
Load or Reload Linetypes dialog box, 509 operators, 384
Load/Unload Applications dialog box, 58 LOGINNAME system variable, 1200
loading longitude
applications, with APPLOAD, 57 displaying for a selected city, 501
color books, 173 specifying in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500
DesignCenter content, 46 lost passwords, 914, 916
drawing sheets, 803 lowercase text, 580
geometry LPT ports, 761
into partially open drawings, with LSEDIT command, 515
OPEN (using the Partial Open LSLIB command, 517
option), 625, 630 LSNEW command, 520
geometry, into partially open drawings LSP (AutoLISP) files, loading, 57
with PARTIALOAD, 685 LTSCALE command, 522
with PARTIALOPEN, 690 LTSCALE system variable, 509, 1200
layers from other files, 479 ltypeshp.lin (complex linetype library) file, 1257
linetypes, 507, 509, 511 luminance of colors, 172
menu files, 539 LUNITS system variable, 1200
multilines, 569 LUPREC system variable, 1200
ObjectARX applications, 75 LW polylines, aligning the axis of rotation with,
partial menu files, 540 954
selected views and geometry, 621 LWDEFAULT system variable, 469, 524, 525,
shape files, 514, 933 526, 1200
title blocks, 603 LWDISPLAY system variable, 525, 1200
VBA projects, 1081, 1084 LWEIGHT command
xrefs, 687, 1140 about, 523
LOCALE system variable, 1199 command line prompts, 525
LOCALROOTPREFIX system variable, 1199 Lineweight Settings dialog box, 523
locating Lwpolyline object type, 1273
files, 624, 626 LWUNITS system variable, 524, 1200
files with path names, 802, 805
Index | 1325
M MARKUP layer, 875
markups (markup objects), mapping layouts to
macros drawing layouts, 875
AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog mass properties
box, 621, 1082 calculating for 2D and 3D objects, 527
disabling, 1082 for coplanar regions, 527, 528
displaying toolbar button macros, 188 for noncoplanar regions, 527
enabling, 1082 parameters that control calculation units,
stepping through, 1087 530
VBA, 1085 for solids, 529
Macros dialog box, 1086 writing to a text file, 527
magnet (AutoSnap lock), 658 MASSPROP command, 527
magnification value for zooming, 1149 matching text object sizes, 907
See also zoom scale factor MATCHPROP command, 531
main dictionary for spelling checker, 636, 977 material attachment methods, 934
maintain aspect ratio settings. See aspect ratio material bitmaps
managing drawing content. See ADCENTER auto axis option, 867
command; DesignCenter map style for, 867
Map Markup dialog box, 875 offset and scale settings, 866
map style, for material bitmaps, 867 previewing, 865
map, for Sun Angle Calculator, displaying, 501 soft matte (feathered) effects on, 867
mapped materials tiling, 867
assigning coordinates, 921 Material Condition dialog box, 1035
cylindrical coordinates, 924 material condition symbols, 1032, 1035
placement of, 928 materials (for rendering)
planar coordinates, 922 3D configuration options, 23
previewing, 922, 924, 925, 927, 928 adjusting mapping coordinates, 922
projection types for, 921 applying, 846
solid coordinates, 927 attaching, 861, 873
spherical coordinates, 926 by ACI values, 873
mapping by layer, 874
layers for translation, 479 attributes, 862
markup layouts to drawing layouts, 875, color adjustments, 862, 863
876 creating, 861, 862
mapping coordinates detaching, 861, 873
acquiring from a selected object, 922 displaying, 23
adjusting, 922 duplicating, 861
assigning, 921 granite, creating/modifying, 868
copying to selected objects, 922 libraries, 533
deleting, 921 mapping onto objects, 920
Mapping dialog box, 920 marble, creating/modifying, 869
marble material attributes, 869 modifying, 861, 862
margin display option, 640 named, reconciling after
Mark option in undoing, 1071 importing/exporting, 535
marker blips naming/renaming, 862
displaying/removing, 121 previewing, 860, 865
removing selecting, 860
with REDRAW, 829 types and attachment methods, 934
with REDRAWALL, 830 wood, creating/modifying, 871
markers, AutoSnap, 658 Materials dialog box, 860
marking materials libraries
vertices importing/exporting to, 533
of 2D polylines, 698 Materials Library dialog box, 533
of 3D polyline mesh objects, 707 mathematical expressions, evaluating. See CAL
of 3D polylines, 705 command
1326 | Index
MATLIB command metric units
about, 533 current drawing settings, 1201
Materials Library dialog box, 533 starting drawings based on, 606, 1201
Reconcile Exported Material Names dialog Microsoft Access file format, 354, 355
box, 536 Microsoft Excel file format, 355
Reconcile Imported Material Names dialog Midpoint object snap, 324, 672
box, 535 MIF, Unicode fonts and, 1280
MAXACTVP system variable, 592, 1200 MINSERT command
MaxArray system registry variable, 68, 73 about, 544
MaxHatch system registry variable, 106, 403 REFEDIT and, 833, 835
maximum plot resolution, 681, 727, 735 setting
MAXSORT system variable, 1201 preview rotation angles, 552
MBUTTONPAN system variable, 1201 preview scale factor for X, Y, Z axes,
MDB (Microsoft Access) files, 355 551
MEASURE command, 537 rotation angles, 549
measured intervals, placing points or blocks at, scale factors for X, Y, Z axes, 546
537 specifying block insertion point, 544
MEASUREINIT system variable, 605, 612, 1201 minutes/seconds, entering angles in, 611
measurement scale. See scale MIRROR command, 553
MEASUREMENT system variable, 1201 MIRROR3D command, 554
media sources and destinations in PC3 files, 730 mirroring
media types for plotting, 753 creating, 553
memory (RAM) about a plane (3D), 554
amount available, displaying, 995 material reflection attribute and, 864
conserving, with CONVERT, 178 MIRRTEXT system variable, 553, 1202
plotting and, 729, 755 miters (joints of multilines), 571, 1010
MENU command, 539 MLEDIT command, 556
Menu Customization dialog box, 540 MLI (materials library) files, 533
menu files MLINE command, 564
loading, 539 Mline object type, 1273
partial, loading, 540 See also multilines
search path for, 635 MLN (multiline library) files, 568, 569
menu groups/menu bars MLSTYLE command
customizing display of, 540 about, 566
listing, 187 Element Properties dialog box, 569
shortcut keys and, 191 Load Multiline Styles dialog box, 569
MENUCTL system variable, 1201 Multiline Properties dialog box, 570
MENUECHO system variable, 1202 Multiline Styles dialog box, 567
MENULOAD command MM.pss file, 737
about, 540 MNU (template menu) files, 190, 540
command line prompts, 543 Mode attribute properties, 102
Menu Customization dialog box, 540 MODEL command, 573
MENUNAME system variable, 1202 Model layout
menus applying, 802, 805
menu groups, 187, 191 including in drawing sets, 805
shortcut keys for items on, 190 listing for drawing sheets, 802
MENUUNLOAD command, 543 model space
merged-cross intersection between multilines, adding scenes to, 908, 909
558 converting length values from paper space,
merged-tee intersection between multilines, 560 901, 974
merging creating
background for scenes, 98 slide files in, 575
meshes (faceted surfaces) tiled viewport configurations in, 1104
creating, 12 deleting scenes from, 908
metafiles. See WMF files geometry, loading into partially open
drawings, 686, 687, 688
modifying scenes in, 908, 910
Index | 1327
model space (continued) MSPACE command, 575
plotting before paper space, 682 MTEXT command
in spatial index, 1046 about, 576
switching from paper space to, 575 AutoStack Properties dialog box, 584
model space, changing window element color command line prompts, 585
in, 665 control codes and special characters, 580,
Model tab 589
plotting and, 719, 722, 732, 745, 746 hiding text, 412, 415
suppressing regeneration when switching Indents and Tabs dialog box, 581
to, 1198 Multiline Text Editor, 577
switching Replace dialog box, 582
to, from a layout tab, 573 Stack Properties dialog box, 582
Model tab (Color Options dialog box), 665 Unicode character strings and, 589
Model tab, suppressing regeneration when mtext.
switching to, 652 See MTEXT command; multiline text
MODEMACRO system variable, 1202 MTEXTED system variable, 636, 1202
Modify Dimension Style dialog box, 288 MTEXTFIXED system variable, 1203
Alternate Units tab, 302 MTJIGSTRING system variable, 1203
Fit tab, 296 Multibyte Interchange format (MIF), Unicode
Primary Units tab, 299 fonts and, 1280
Text tab, 292 Multiline Edit Tools dialog box, 556
Tolerances tab, 305 double-clicking mline objects and, 246
Modify Distant Light dialog box, 494 Multiline Properties dialog box, 570
Modify Granite Material dialog box, 868 Multiline Styles dialog box, 567
Modify Marble Material dialog box, 869 multiline text
Modify Point Light dialog box, 492 about, 576
Modify Scene dialog box, 910 AutoCAPS and, 580
Modify Spotlight dialog box, 496 automatic stacking feature, 584
Modify Standard Material dialog box, 862 bold, 578
Modify Wood Material dialog box, 871 case of, 580
modifying character height specification, 578
lights, 490 color assignment, 579
materials, 861, 862 combining paragraphs, 580
plot style tables, 1006 drawing display, 585
symbols, for geometric tolerances, 1032, editing, stacked text, 582
1035 exploding, 370
See also editing finding/replacing, 582
monochrome plotters, 1007 by matching case, 582
mouse, pointing device options, 652 by matching whole word, 582
MOVE command, 573 formatting, 577
moving fractions in, 583, 584
dimension text, 312 height, setting, 585
faces of 3D solids, 952 importing, 580
fit points on splines, 984 including with leader lines, 484
marked vertices indents and tabs, 579, 581
of 2D polylines, 699 inserting symbols in, 580, 589
of 3D polyline mesh objects, 708 italic, 578
of 3D polylines, 706 justification, 579
objects justification and alignment for, 455, 586
about a 3D axis, 878 leader annotations and, 816, 818
about a base point, 877 line spacing, specification, 587
with STRETCH, 996 opposite corner of, 585
spline control vertices, 985 properties, 785
UCSs, 1056 redoing actions, 578
moving, Properties palette, 770 removing formatting, 580
MREDO command, 574 resizing, 907
MSLIDE command, 575 rotation angle for, 588
1328 | Index
multiline text (continued) multiple
selecting all, 580 drawings, opening, 653
setting width in drawing units, 579 instances of a block
stacking, 578 block insertion properties, 786
stacking/unstacking, 580 inserting into rectangular arrays, 544
style property, 577 synchronizing instances, 102
styles mappings of markup layouts, 877
default, 585 multiple block insertion properties, 786
specifying, 589 MULTIPLE command, 590
underlining, 578 Multiple object selection method, 919
undoing actions, 578 multiple parallel lines. See multilines
width of, 585, 589 multiple undo actions, 574
Multiline Text Editor multi-sheet drawing files
about, 577 publishing, 803
double-clicking multithreaded processing, 1230
leader text and, 246 MVIEW command, 591
multiline text and, 246 MVSETUP command
editing dimension text about, 595
with DIMALIGNED, 257 setting preferences for, 601
with DIMANGULAR, 260 using
with DIMDIAMETER, 267 on a layout tab, 596
with DIMEDIT, 269 on the Model tab, 596
with DIMLINEAR, 272 My Documents folder, 622
with DIMORDINATE, 277 My Documents icon (Places list in standard file
with DIMRADIUS, 280 selection dialog boxes), 622
shortcut menu options, 579 My Network Places folder, 623
Multiline Text object type, 1273 MYDOCUMENTSPREFIX system variable, 1203
multiline text objects myspool.bat file, 636
AutoCAPS and, 580
case of, 580
combining paragraphs, 580 N
justification, 579 Name & Location tab (Find dialog box), 626
removing formatting, 580 named
selecting all, 580 drawing files, 802, 805
setting width in drawing units, 579 drawing sheets, 802
stacking/unstacking, 580 materials, reconciling after
multiline text properties, 785 importing/exporting, 535
multilines objects
background fills, 572 changing names of, 843
creating, 564 external references, 834, 1144
editing, 556, 567 in partially open drawings, 629
elements of, 566, 567, 569 purging, 809
exploding, 370 viewing purgeable/nonpurgeable, 809
filling, 377 page setups, listing, 806
joints, 571 plot styles, 1004, 1007
justification type, 565 converting CTBs to, 179, 180
loading, 569 for use in existing drawings, 744
making current, 567 for use in new drawings or
naming/renaming, 568 pre-AutoCAD 2000
patterns illustrated, 557 drawings, 744
properties, 785 plot styles, settings, 650
purging from the drawing database, 811 selection sets. See groups
scale, 565 views, displaying, 625
setting properties for, 569 Named Layer Filters dialog box, 464
start and end caps of, 571 Named UCSs tab (UCS dialog box), 1064
style for, 566 Named Viewports tab (Viewports dialog box)
floating, 1108
Index | 1329
tiled, 1106 New Dimension Style dialog box
Named Views tab (View dialog box), 1091 Alternate Units tab, 302
naming system variables updated by, 1238
blocks, 122, 124, 353 Fit tab, 296
dimension styles, 288, 309 system variables updated by, 1237
drawings, 897 Lines and Arrows tab, 289
DWF files, 802, 803 system variables updated by, 1236
groups, 396, 401 Primary Units tab, 299
imported/exported materials, 354, 535 system variables updated by, 1238
label templates, 240 Text tab, 292
layers, 459, 462, 469, 481 system variables updated by, 1237
link templates, 241 Tolerances tab, 305
materials, 862 system variables updated by, 1239
multilines, 568 New Distant Light dialog box, 494
plot files, 723 New Granite Material dialog box, 868
plot style tables, 1005 New Label Template dialog box, 203, 240
plot styles, 1007 New Landscape Library dialog box, 518
queries, 241 New Layer dialog box, 481
text styles, 1001 New Link Template dialog box, 203, 240
tiled viewport configurations, 1106, 1108 New Marble Material dialog box, 869
user coordinate systems, 1058 New Point Light dialog box, 492
user-defined page setups, 682 New Query dialog box, 203, 241
VBA projects, 1084 New Scene dialog box, 909
views, 1093 New Spotlight dialog box, 496
See also renaming New Standard Material dialog box, 862
naming conventions New Toolbar dialog box, 193
for attribute tags, 81, 83 New View dialog box, 1093
for blocks, 122 New Viewports tab (Viewports dialog box)
for attribute field names, 354 floating, 1106
for linetypes, 509 tiled, 1104
when exporting to 3D Studio files, 40 New Wood Material dialog box, 871
when importing 3D Studio files, 36 Node object snap, 672
See also file names Node object snap mode, 324
naming, drawings, 897 NOMUTT system variable, 1203
navigating nonassociative
the Data View window (in dbConnect), 213 dimensions
navigating, to specific DesignCenter locations, converting associative dimensions
52 into, 268
Nearest object snap, 672 converting into associative
Nearest object snap mode, 326 dimensions, 282
nested gradient fills, 109
blocks, 352 hatches
xrefs creating with BHATCH, 106, 109
attaching, 1127 creating with HATCH, 403
binding, 1143 noncoplanar regions, mass properties displayed
in-place reference editing and, 833, for, 527
834, 835 nonstandard objects in drawings, 1220, 1247,
Netscape Navigator, 133 1248
NEW command automatically fixing violations, 991
about, 605 deleting and replacing, 163
Advanced Setup wizard, 610 flagging as ignored, 164
command line prompts, 612 nonuniform rational B-splines (NURBS)
Create New Drawing dialog box, 605 mathematics, 979
Quick Setup wizard, 608 nor function (CAL command), 150, 152
Select Template dialog box, 605 normal plot resolution, 681, 726, 735
NEW command (continued) normal vectors, calculating, 150
STARTUP system variable and, 1220 North Location dialog box, 498
1330 | Index
north location, setting, 498, 501 Object Snap taVb (Drafting Settings dialog box),
Notes tab (Batch Standards Checker), 1250 323, 672
notifications in status bar tray object snaps
settings, 1045 command modifier, 1286
xrefs, 1233 object types
notifications in status bar tray, standards specifying for boundaries, 127, 129
violations, 990 table listing of, 1271
noun/verb selection, 661 ObjectARX applications, 75
number of actions to undo, 1071 EXPLODE command and, 369
number of tessellations to cache, 22 loading, 57
numeric options for, 646
expression operators, 135 search path for, 637
functions, supported by the CAL objects (AutoCAD)
command, 140 adding to groups, 397, 400
adding to working sets during in-place
editing, 837
O calculating
object classifications, 822 area and perimeter of, 64
object colors, setting (making current), 1165 mass properties of, 527
Object DBX applications, loading, 57 classification, selecting by, 822
Object Enablers as clipping boundaries, 1099
checking for, 1213 color assignment in other applications,
options, 654 1230
Object Grouping dialog box, 395 converting
object linking and embedding. See OLE to blocks, 1114
Object method for defining a UCS, 1053 to viewports, 593, 1110
object properties creating
changing multiple copies of, 66
with CHANGE command, 160 displacing using MOVE, 573
with Properties palette, 767 display order of, 317
object selection double-clicking to display Properties palette
options for, 660 or a special editor, 246
sets, creating with QSELECT, 820 exporting attribute information for, 351
sort order, 656 extending
Object Selection Filters dialog box, 383 rather than trimming, 1047
object smoothness trimming rather than, 372
curve tessellation, 22 extruding, 374
dynamic tessellation, 22, 667 graphical
surface tessellation, 22 3D display options, 20, 667
object snap attaching hyperlinks to, 416
modes pasting from the Clipboard, 693
customizing AutoSnap settings, 658 table listing of, 1271
displaying status of, 994 lengthening, 486
setting, 323, 671 listing information for, 513
sort order option, 657 locking objects not in working sets, 835
spline frame control points and, 703 nonstandard objects, 1220, 1248
turning on/off, 322, 327 automatically fixing violations, 991
running object data entry option, 656 deleting and replacing, 163
target box, sizing, 56 flagging as ignored, 164
tracking offsetting, 613
turning on/off, 323 pasting
tracking, settings, 659 from the Clipboard, 693
object snap modes placing in the Previous selection set, 917
command modifier, 1286 in polar arrays, 69
using in arithmetic expressions, 144 properties of, 164
removing
from the drawing database, 811
Index | 1331
objects (AutoCAD) (continued) OLE objects, plot options for, 648
resolution for, 1098 OLE Properties dialog box, 618
saving to a file, 1114, 1115 OLE Properties dialog box, controlling display,
scaling, 905 653
selecting OLEHIDE system variable, 1205
for attribute data extraction, 92, 94 OLELINKS command
with Quick Select, 820 about, 614
for UCS definition, 1053 Change Icon dialog box, 617
with command modifiers, 1286 Convert dialog box, 616
shading, 931 Links dialog box, 615
snap points on, 1286 OLEQUALITY system variable, 648, 1205
splitting in two, 131 OLESCALE command, 618
stretching, 996 OLESTARTUP system variable, 649, 1206
in translated layers, 481 online Help. See Help
trimming OOPS command, 620
extending rather than, 1047 opacity maps, 519
rather than extending, 372 opaque images, 1044
using coordinates from, 1284 opaque surfaces, 341, 412
obliquing angle (text), 270, 1000, 1002 Open and Save tab (Options dialog box), 643
obscured lines, 414 OPEN command
OBSCUREDCOLOR system variable, 414, 1203 about, 621
OBSCUREDLTYPE system variable, 414, 1204 Add/Modify FTP Locations dialog box, 628
oct-trees in spatial index, 1046 AutoCAD Macro Virus Protection dialog
OFFSET command, 613 box, 621
offset, gaps between polyline segments, 1205 command line prompts, 632
OFFSETDIST system variable, 1204 Find dialog box, 626, 627
OFFSETGAPTYPE system variable, 1205 Partial Open dialog box, 621, 629
offsetting Select File dialog box, 621
faces of 3D solids, 956 standard file selection dialog boxes, 621
background controls for, 100 open-cross intersection between multilines, 557
construction lines, 1136 open polygon meshes, 29
dimension text, 296 open polylines, calculating area and perimeter
distance for, 613 of, 65, 66
extension lines, 291 open-tee intersection between multilines, 559
locating points, 1285 Open VBA project dialog box, 1081
material bitmaps, 866, 929 opening
multiline style elements, 569 2D polylines, 697
plotting areas, 681, 727 3D polyline mesh objects, 709
projection cylinders, 925 3D polylines, 704
projection planes, 924 Adjust Clipping Planes window, 18
projection spheres, 927 drawings
rendered images, in viewports, 903 default path for, 1215
offsetting, rectangular arrays, 68 with OPEN, 621
OLE DB (Microsoft) portions, 625, 629
configuring data sources with, 225 from standard file selection dialog
OLE objects boxes, 625
about, 614 rendered images, 848
changing splines, 983, 985
text size for, 620 text window, 1028
the icon for, 616 Visual Basic Editor, 1081
the source application for, 616 operating system commands, accessing from
inserting into drawings, 448 AutoCAD, 934
listing/modifying, 615 operators
pasting, 693 for link selections, 223
plot options for, 729, 757 for queries, 216, 218, 221
resizing, 618 for reusable filters, 384
scaling, 619 for selection set filters, 823
1332 | Index
optimizing OPTIONS command
performance of AutoCAD about, 633
improving plot speed, 728 Add Profile dialog box, 669
polylines and hatches, created in Alternate Font dialog box, 664
pre-AutoCAD 2000 releases, 178 Change Profile dialog box, 670
options Color Options dialog box, 665
3D graphics display, 651 Command Line Window Font dialog box,
accelerator key, 655 667
alignment vector display, 659 Options dialog box, 633
aperture display size, 660 Right-Click Customization dialog box, 667
associative dimensioning, 657 Options dialog box
AutoSnap, 658 about, 633
AutoTrack, 659 Display tab, 638
beep on error, 653 Drafting tab, 658
coordinate data entry priority, 656 Files tab, 634
crosshairs size, 640 Open and Save tab, 643
database connectivity, 653 Plotting tab, 647
DesignCenter source/target content units, Profiles tab, 663
655 Selection tab, 660
dialog box warning messages, 653 System tab, 651
dictionary, 636 User Preferences tab, 654
digital signatures, 645 Options dialog box (for i-drop). See i-drop
display resolution and performance, 640 Options dialog box
external reference (xref), 645 Order Group dialog box, 398
file safety precautions, 644 order of sheets in drawing sets, 803
file save, 643 ordinate dimensions
folder search paths, 634 creating
font file, 636 with DIMBASELINE, 261
grips, 662 with DIMCONTINUE, 264
hidden lines, 657 with DIMORDINATE, 276
hyperlink display, 656 a series of, 813
layout elements, 640 ordinate dimensions, creating, associativity, 282
lineweight, 657 orientation
Live Enablers, 654 of drawings, 678, 724, 732
loading of acad.lsp file, 653 of orthographic user coordinate systems,
long symbol name, 653 1067, 1093, 1095
menu group/menu bar display, 540 origin
MVSETUP, 601 for orthographic user coordinate systems
object selection methods, 660 resetting, 1067
ObjectARX application, 646 for a user coordinate system, 1052, 1069
OLE Properties dialog box display, 653 for viewports, 602
performance improvement, 641 ORTHO command, 670
pickbox size, 660 Ortho mode
plot style, 649 for cursor positioning, 670
plotting, 636, 647 Orthogonal transformation type, 1016
pointing device, 652 orthographic
profiles, 663 UCSs
proxy graphics, 646 changing to, 1066
reference fading intensity, 642 orientation relative to a base coordinate
rendering. See rendering preferences system, 1067
shortcut menu display, 655 resetting the origin of, 1067
single and multiple drawing options, 653 specifying, 1056
sort order of objects, 656 specifying depth of, 1067
Startup dialog box display, 654 views
temporary file locations, 638 creating, 971
text editor, 636 restoring, 1092, 1095
window elements, 639
Index | 1333
Orthographic and Isometric Views tab (View Pantone colors
dialog box), 1092 applying to exploded objects, 1139
Orthographic UCSs tab (UCS dialog box), 1066 selecting, 173
ORTHOMODE system variable, 1206 specifying properties for objects, 161
OSMODE system variable, 323, 1206 paper
OSNAP command, 671 printable area of, 720, 724
Osnap. See object snap modes paper background display option, 640, 666
OSNAPCOORD system variable, 656, 1207 paper sizes
outer arc start/end caps on multilines, 571 availability, 678, 724
output folders for DWF files, 804 available for the plotting device, 730
overlapping custom, 759
solids displaying, 720
INTERFERE and, 450 filtering, in dialog box lists, 760
INTERSECT and, 451 modifying
overlaying xrefs, 1140, 1146 standard sizes, 759
Override Dimension Style dialog box, 288 plotting options, 648, 752
Alternate Units tab, 302 units for plotting, 724, 732
Fit tab, 296 width/height, specifying with MVSETUP,
Primary Units tab, 299 596
Text tab, 292 paper source, 752
Tolerances tab, 305 paper space
See also New Dimension Style dialog box applying layouts, 802, 805
overriding dimension system variables, 278 converting length values from model
overscoring text, control code for, 1027 space, 901, 974
creating layout viewport configurations in,
1106, 1110
P creating slide files in, 575
page layout settings, 678 geometry, loading into partially open
Page Setup dialog box drawings, 686, 687, 688
about, 675 hiding objects for plotting, 682, 727, 735
display option, 640 loading geometry into partially open
filtering paper size lists, 760 drawings, 686, 687, 688
Layout Settings tab, 678 MVSETUP and, 602
limiting the devices listed, 649 plotting after model space, 682
Plot Device tab, 676 scaling hatch patterns to, 111
page setups in spatial index, 1046
displaying, for plotting, 719 switching
named to model space from, 575
listing, 802, 806 zoom scale factor and, 1151
plotters named in, 804 PAPERUPDATE system variable, 648
settings, 802, 804, 805 parallel
user-defined curves, 613
importing into a layout, 798 dimensions. See baseline dimensions
saving, 682 lines, 613
PAGESETUP command, 675 lines. See also multilines
palettes parallel dimensions, See baseline dimensions
color palettes for toolbar button colors, 194 Parallel object snap, 672
Properties palette, 769 Parallel object snap mode, 327
tool palettes, 192 parallel ports
Pan shortcut menu, 684 configuring, 761
panning plotter settings, 750
a view, 35 parallel projections (of 3D views)
DVIEW specifications, 338 perspective views, 331
to linked objects, 226 partial degrees, entering angles in, 611
panning, raster images, 641 partial files
opening, 625, 629
partial images, specifying for rendering, 903
1334 | Index
Partial Load dialog box, 685 paths (continued)
loading geometry from layers, 687 for hardware configuration file, 635
loading geometry from views, 686 for Help file, 635
partial menu files for i-drop content associated data files, 920
loading, 540 for image files, 426, 428, 429, 434
unloading, 543 for locating files, 624
Partial Open dialog box for log file, 637
about, 629 for menu file, 635
displaying, 621, 625 moving up or down, 638
partially open drawings for ObjectARX applications, 637
loading geometry into for print support files, 637
with PARTIALOAD, 685 for project files, 635
with PARTIALOPEN, 690 removing, 638
with PARTIALOAD, 685 for rendering texture maps, 638
with PARTIALOPEN, 690 search path options, 634
partially open drawings, loading geometry into, for selected references, 834
with OPEN, 629 setting the default, 1215
PARTIALOAD command, 685 for support files, 635
Partial Load dialog box, 685 for template files, 637
PARTIALOPEN command, 690 for temporary files, 638
Password dialog box, 368 for tool palette files, 637
Password dialog box, displaying, 365 for xrefs, 1128, 1143, 1146
Password tab (Security Options dialog box), 914 patterns
passwords gradient fills, 116
adding to drawings, 914 hatches. See hatch patterns
confirming, 916 pauses within scripts, 252
for DWF files, 803 PC2 (legacy plotter configuration) files
encryption options, 916 converting plot style tables from, 181
FTP sites, 629 importing, 696
lost or forgotten, 916 settings from, 760
options, 645 PC3 (plotter configuration) files, 676, 678, 721,
passwords, for transmittal sets, 368 724, 731, 747
Paste Special dialog box, 695 attaching/detaching PMP files to/from,
PASTEBLOCK command, 693 758, 760
PASTECLIP command, 183, 693 changes to, 682, 728
PASTEORIG command, 694 device settings, 752
PASTESPEC command, 694 Plotter Configuration Editor and, 748
pasting PC3 files (plotter configuration files)
a copied block into a drawing, 693 default output devices, 647
data from the Clipboard, 693 displaying device driver names for, 729
pasting, text, from other application, 577 search paths for, 637
PAT files (pattern files), 117 PCINWIZARD command, 696
path curves, defining tabulated surfaces with, PCP (legacy plotter configuration) files
1020 converting plot style tables from, 181
paths import wizard for, 696
adding, 638 importing
for alternate font files, 636 settings from, 760
for Automatic Save files, 637 PCX files, options for rendering output, 891
for backup files, 644 PDMODE system variable, 249, 315, 538, 764,
for blocks, 443, 1114 1207
for color book files, 637 PDSIZE system variable, 250, 764, 1207
for database source files, 637 PEDIT command
default, 1215 about, 696
for default Internet location, 635 editing 2D polylines, 697
for device drivers, 635 editing 3D polygon meshes, 707
displaying, 802, 805 editing 3D polylines, 704
for extrusion, 375, 951 PEDITACCEPT system variable, 696
Index | 1335
PELLIPSE system variable, 1208 plan views
pen configuration, 753, 754, 1008 setting viewing angles to, 251
pen mapping, 734, 1006 planar coordinates, for mapped materials, 922
pen swapping, 754 PLATFORM system variable, 1209
pen width, setting, 112 PLINE command, 713
Pencil tool, 194 PLINEGEN system variable, 714, 1209
Percent option of LENGTHEN, 487 PLINETYPE system variable, 179, 1210
percent sign (%), entering, 1027 PLINEWID system variable, 1210
performance improvement PLOT command
3D acceleration, 25 about, 719
back face discarding and, 24 Changes to a Printer Configuration File
database links and, 653 dialog box, 728
display settings, 641 command line prompts, 731
improving plot speed, 728, 754, 755 Plot dialog box, 719
legacy behavior of single processor in Plot Progress dialog box, 728
pre-AutoCAD 2000i releases, 1230 PLOT command, Update PC3 File with New
lineweights and, 523 Printer dialog box, 729
for redrawing/regenerating operations, Plot Device tab (Page Setup dialog box), 676
1230 Plot dialog box
SAVEAS command and, 897 filtering paper size lists, 760
suppressing regeneration when switching to Plot Device tab, 720
layout tabs/Model tab, 573, 652, Plot Settings tab, 723
1198 Plot dialog box, limiting the devices listed, 649
PERIMETER system variable, 64, 1208 plot files
perimeters, calculating, 64 naming, 723
period (.), to access a built-in AutoCAD Plot Preview shortcut menu, 766
command, 1070 Plot Progress dialog box, 728
Perpendicular object snap, 325, 672 plot settings
personal documents, accessing, 622 changes to when changing plotters, 730
Personal folder, 622 configuration, 676, 721, 748
Personal icon (Places list in standard file selection graphics settings, 755
dialog boxes), 622 hiding paperspace objects, 682, 727, 735
perspective view. See parallel importing, 760
projection/perspective views lineweight option, 682, 727
PFACE command, 710 naming specification options, 636
PFACEVMAX system variable, 1208 offset specifications, 681, 727
PFB files, 175 OLE object options, 620, 648
Phong render quality option, 885 options for, 647
Photo Raytrace Render Options dialog box, 888 plot area specifications, 679, 725
Photo Raytrace rendering type, 882, 888 Plot Paperspace Last option, 682
Photo Real Render Options dialog box, 886 plot style option, 682, 727
Photo Real rendering type, 499, 882, 886 retaining, 647
pick button (mouse) scale specifications, 680, 725
zooming with, 1153 screening, 1009
Pick Points option, 107 shaded and rendered viewports, 680, 726,
PICKADD system variable, 661, 770, 918, 1208 734
PICKAUTO system variable, 661, 1208 style table specifications, 677, 722
pickbox cursor, resizing, 660 viewports, 592, 1110
PICKBOX system variable, 660, 1209 plot speed, improving, 728
PICKDRAG system variable, 661, 1209 Plot Stamp dialog box, 736
PICKFIRST system variable, 661, 844, 1044, displaying, 723, 736
1209 plot stamps
PICKSTYLE system variable, 661, 1209 date/time format for, 737
placement of mapped materials, 928 location, 739, 743
Places list (standard file selection dialog boxes), log file, 735, 739, 741, 742
622 option to turn on, 722
PLAN command, 712 pen number for, 736
1336 | Index
plot stamps (continued) plot.log file, 741
previewing, 735, 737 PLOTROTMODE system variable, 724, 1210
specifying information for, 722, 736 plots
text properties, 739, 740, 744 See also plotting
turning on, 735 PLOTSTAMP command, 735
units, 739, 741, 744 command line prompts, 742
user-defined fields, 737 Plot Stamp dialog box, 736
plot style Plotstamp Parameter File Name dialog box, 738
name, copying with MATCHPROP, 532 PLOTSTYLE command, 744
tables. See plot style tables command line prompts, 747
Plot Style Manager, 651, 1003 Current Plot Style dialog box, 745
Plot Style Table Editor and, 1004 Select Plot Style dialog box, 746
Plot Style Table Editor, 1004 Plotter Calibration wizard, 758, 760
General tab, 1005 Plotter Configuration Editor, 748
Table View and Form View tabs, 1006 Device and Document Settings tab, 752
plot style tables General tab, 749
active tables, 745 Ports tab, 750
Add Plot Style Table wizard, 677 plotter configurations, 676, 721, 748
adding plot styles to, 1010 buffers, 761
converting, 179, 180 changes to, 682, 728
default plot style tables, 650 custom properties, 757
deleting plot styles in, 1010 dithering, 1008
displaying tables, 677 importing settings, 760
listing plot styles in, 1006 initialization strings, 758
naming tables, 1005 pen settings, 753, 754, 1008
older color mapping tables, 1006 timeouts, 761
options for new drawings, 649 Plotter Manager
Plot Style Table Editor, 1004, 1005, 1006 adding or configuring plotters, 648
saving tables, 1011 PLOTTERMANAGER command, 747
search path settings for files, 637 Add-a-Plotter wizard, 747
settings, 677, 722 Advanced Settings for COM dialog box, 762
plot styles Configure LPT Port dialog box, 761
adding Plotter Configuration Editor, 748
styles to tables, 1010 Settings for COM Port dialog box, 761
tables, 1004 plotters
adding tables, 651 adding, 648
for attributes, 105, 350 calibrating, 760
colors configuring, 682, 761
specifying, 1007 configuring, with Plotter Manager, 648
converting maximum printable areas, 759
between CTBs and STBs, 179, 180 monochrome, 1007
copying names with MATCHPROP, 532 named in page setups, 804
deleting names of, 730
styles from tables, 1010 updating PC3 files for, 729
displaying, 745, 746, 994, 1006 plotting
editing, 651 batch plotting, 1252
linetypes in, 1009 changing order of, 317
lineweights in, 1010, 1011 default settings, 647
named, 650, 1004, 1007 defining what to plot, 722
for new objects, 745, 747 device specifications for
options for, 649 Page Setup dialog box, 676
plotting with, 733, 745 Plot dialog box, 720
as property of objects, 771 displaying
renaming, 843 layout and page setup names, 719
for selected layers, 461, 463, 472, 481 progress information, 728
for selected objects, 162, 166 dithering, 1008
See also plot style tables duplex printing, 753
Index | 1337
plotting (continued) points (continued)
emulation mode, 758 calculation examples, 141
to files, 723, 751 for calibrating a digitizer, 1015
DWF files, 804 for camera position and target, 153, 337
layers, 461, 472 for circles, 166
layout specifications for for clipping boundaries, 437
Page Setup dialog box, 678 combining coordinates to specify, 1284
Plot dialog box, 723 for construction lines, 1135
layouts converting between UCS and WCS, 145
viewports and, 592, 1110 coordinate filter command modifier, 1284
media types for, 753 for creating viewports, 1111
previewing plot stamps for, 737 for cutting planes, 940, 973
QTEXT mode and, 824 for drawing clipping boundaries, 1099
sort order option for, 657 filtering components of, 145
specifying formatting for use with CAL, 137
number of copies, 722 for inclined planes for auxiliary projection,
plot stamp information for, 736 972
viewports, 592, 1110 for leaders, 482, 815, 818
Plotting tab (Options dialog box), 647 for lines, 504
PLQUIET system variable, 1210 locating
PLT (plot) files, 636, 723 by relative offset, 1285
plug-ins (standards), listing, 988 by series of temporary points, 1285
Plug-ins tab (Batch Standards Checker), 1249 by specified distance relative to last
Plug-ins tab (Configure Standards dialog box), point entered, 1284
989 for making copies, 182
plug-ins, standards, 989 measuring distance and angle between, 314
plus sign (+) for mirroring planes, 554, 555
UCS icon symbol, 1060 for multilines, 565
PMP (plot model parameter) files obtaining a point by cursor, 143
attaching/detaching to/from PC3 files, 758, obtaining an intersection point, 147
760 obtaining the last-specified point, 143
PMP files (plot model parameter files), path for, for offset objects, 613
637 for ordinate dimension leader lines, 276
PNG (Portable Network Graphics) format, 763 placing at measured intervals, 537
PNGOUT command, 763 for polygonal viewports, 593
POINT command, 763 for projection cylinders, 925
point display mode and size, 249 for projection planes, 924
point filters. See coordinate filters for projection spheres, 927
point lights rotating
about, 490 about an axis, 146, 953
creating or modifying, 492 for sectioning planes, 911
turning on, 489, 931 for solid-filled polygons, 947
point objects. See points (point objects) specifying, 764
point properties, 787 for splines, 979
point size, for OLE objects, 620 temporary points, 1285
Point Style dialog box, 249 for text objects, 1022
pointing devices for UCSs, 1053
options, 652 points (geometric)
See also mouse for boundaries, 404, 405, 406
points for gradient areas, 117
for 3D projection, 928 for hatch areas, 107, 117
aligning the axis of rotation with, 881 points (point objects)
for angular dimensions, 259 creating, 763
for arcs, 61 placing at equal intervals, 314
for block definitions, 123, 124 properties of, 787
for boundaries, 128 specifying display mode and size of, 249
for breaking objects, 131 type, 1274
1338 | Index
polar arrays, 16, 73 polylines (continued)
creating, 69 aligning the axis of rotation with, 954
rotating objects in, 70 arc-fit polylines, 701
polar axis of spherical coordinate system, 926 calculating areas/perimeters, 64, 66
polar tracking chamfering, 154, 156
angle settings, 321, 322 closed, 697, 715, 717
AutoTrack, 659 converting
object snap settings, 322 into viewports, 1110
turning on/off, 321 those created in earlier releases of
vector display option, 659 AutoCAD, 178
Polar Tracking tab (Drafting Settings dialog creating
box), 321 fit curves for, 701
POLARADDANG system variable, 322, 1211 regions from, 841
POLARANG system variable, 321, 1211 splines for, 701
POLARDIST system variable, 320, 321, 1211 with PLINE, 713
POLARMODE system variable, 1211 decurving, 702, 704
PolarSnap type, 946 dividing, 314
polyface meshes, 710 editing, 697
exploding, 370 vertices of, 698, 703
properties of, 790 exploding, 369
POLYGON command, 765 extending, 371
polygon mesh objects extruding, 374
constructing with TABSURF, 1020 filleting, 377
creating, 7, 29, 357 generating with XCLIP, 1134
desmoothing, 709 intersection, 1196
editing vertices of, 707 joining, 697, 702
fitting a smooth surface, 708 linetypes
properties, 789 generating, 704
See also 3D polygon mesh objects measuring, 538
polygonal viewports, 593 opening, 697
polygons properties of, 787
calculating areas/perimeters, 64, 65 copying with MATCHPROP, 532
creating, 765 rectangular, drawing, 826
extruding, 374 revolving, 856
revolving, 856 specifying width of, 698, 701
solid-filled, creating, 947 spline-fit polylines, 701
polyline (2D and lightweight) properties, 787 trimming, 1047
polyline (3D polygon mesh) properties, 789 wipeout frames and, 1119
polyline (3D) properties, 788 See also 3D polylines
polyline (polyface mesh) properties, 790 polylines, cloud shapes, 854
polyline curves, display resolution option, 641 POLYSIDES system variable, 1211
Polyline object type, 1274 POPUPS system variable, 1212
polyline properties Portable Network Graphics (PNG) format, 763
copying with MATCHPROP, 532 portrait orientation, 679, 724, 732
polyline segments ports
aligning configuring, 761, 762
axis of rotation with, 879 port settings, 750, 761
cutting plane with, 939 reinitializing, 842
chamfering Ports tab (Plotter Configuration Editor), 750
between, 154 position of the sun, calculating, 500
converting to splines, 981 positioning
filleting, 378 landscape objects, 522
polyline segments, offset gaps between, 1205 point light, 493
polylines spotlight, 497
adding positioning, attribute text, 88
arc segments to, 714 positive angles
vertices to, 699 clockwise calculation of, 1076, 1079
Index | 1339
positive axis direction, of revolution, 856 previewing
post-initialization strings, 758 background settings, 98
PostScript (EPS) files block attribute changes, 103
options for rendering, 891 colors in gradient fills, 115
PostScript fills, standard library file of, 1264 drawings, 719, 766
PostScript output options, 892 extracted block attributes, 353
pound sign (#) gradient boundaries, 109
stacked text indicator, 578, 584 hatch boundaries, 109
pre-initialization strings, 758 hatch patterns, 111
precedence, of standards files, 989 images, 432, 852
precision landscape objects, 516, 520
for alternate tolerance units, 307 layout viewport configurations, 1107
for alternate units, 303 materials, 534, 860
for angular dimensions, 302 with mapping coordinates, 922, 924,
for current angle, 1076 925, 927, 928
for current units, 1076 printable area of paper, 720
for dimension text tolerance, 306 replaced nonstandard objects, 163
drawing units, 609, 610 selected files, 624, 625
in DXF files, 901 selected references, 833
for linear dimensions, 300 tables, in the Data View window
precision, for hides and shades, 415 (dbConnect), 214
predefined hatch patterns text style changes, 1000
displaying, 117 tiled viewport configurations, 1105
specifying, 110, 117, 403 the UCS icon, 1063
preferences previewing, templates, 607
See options; rendering preferences Previous object selection method, 919
PREFERENCES command. See OPTIONS primary units (for dimensions), 299
command Primary Units tab (New Dimension Style dialog
prefixes (for dimension text) box), 299
alternate, 304 system variables updated by, 1238
primary, 301 Print Preview window (Data View), 214
presentation plot resolution, 681, 726, 735 print spoolers, 636, 648, 728
preset attribute defaults, 104 print support files, search path settings for, 637
press and drag selection, 661 print/plot settings, 636
Preview area (standard file selection dialog printable area, 724
boxes), 625 previewing, 720
PREVIEW command, 766 printing
preview cube, for material bitmaps, adjusting, dimension style properties, 309
866 rendered images, 848
preview images See also plotting
DesignCenter items, 47 problems with drawings, 1185, 1247
external references, 831 problems with nonstandard objects, 163, 1247
preview images (of drawings) PRODUCT system variable, 1212
displaying, 624, 625 profile blocks and lines, 964
saving drawings with, 643 profiles (solids)
preview images (of drawings), displaying, 607 choosing 2D or 3D projection, 965
preview plot resolution, 681, 726, 735 creating, 964
preview rotation angles generating in viewports, 946
for inserting multiple instances of blocks, hidden line display options, 964
552 tangential edge display options, 966
for inserting WMF files, 1124 profiles (user)
preview scale factors for X, Y, Z axes creating, 634, 669
for inserting multiple instances of blocks, options for, 663
551 renaming, 670
for inserting WMF files, 1123 Profiles tab (Options dialog box), 663
program parameters file
reinitializing, 842
1340 | Index
PROGRAM system variable, 1212 properties (continued)
Progress tab (Batch Standards Checker), 1250 of multilines, 569, 785
project files of multiple block insertions, 786
accessing, 623 of objects, 164, 531
making current, 638 of point objects, 787
search path for, 635 of polyface meshes, 790
project hosting sites, 623 of polylines, 787
projected tolerance of rays, 790
zones, 1033 of regions, 791
projection cylinder for mapping, 924 of shapes, 791
projection options of solids, 792
for extending objects, 372 of splines, 792
for mapped materials, 921 of text, 793
for trimming objects, 1048 of third-party application objects, 767
projection plane, 922 of tolerance objects, 794
projection sphere, 926 of trace segments, 795
Projective transformation type, 1017 of xrefs, 780
PROJECTNAME system variable, 434, 635, 1212 See also Properties window
ProjectPoint. See Buzzsaw PROPERTIES command
PROJMODE system variable, 1212 about, 767
Prompt attribute properties, 102 Properties palette, 769
prompts Properties dialog box. See Drawing Properties
for attributes, 81, 83, 102 dialog box
for block insertion, 104 Properties palette, 246
command modifiers, 1283 3D face properties, 774
responding to, 4 3D Orbit view properties, 773
prompts, for attributes, 160 3D solid properties, 774
properties about, 769
of 3D faces, 774 arc properties, 775
of 3D polygon meshes, 789 attribute definition properties, 776
of 3D polylines, 788 auto-hide option, 770
of 3D solids, 774 block reference properties, 777
of arcs, 775 body properties, 778
of attribute definitions, 776 circle properties, 778
of attributes, 86, 87, 350 closing, 798
of blocks, 777 creating selection sets with filters, 769
of body objects, 778 dimension properties, 779
of circles, 778 displaying
of construction lines, 797 when no objects are selected, 771
of dimension text, 785 displaying object types, 769
of dimensions, 308, 779 ellipse properties, 779
displayed external reference properties, 780
in 3D Orbit view, 773 hatch properties, 781
displayed in Properties palette image properties, 782
with no objects selected, 771 leader properties, 783
of drawings, 342 line properties, 784
of ellipses, 779 moving and resizing, 770
of filters, 383 multiline properties, 785
general, 770 multiline text properties, 785
of gradient fills, 109 multiple block insertion properties, 786
of hatches, 109, 117, 411, 781 object descriptions in, 770
of images, 782 point properties, 787
of layers, 460, 470 polyline (2D and lightweight) properties,
of layout viewports, 796 787
of leaders, 783, 785 polyline (3D polygon mesh) properties, 789
of lightweight polylines, 787 polyline (3D) properties, 788
of lines, 784 polyline (polyface mesh) properties, 790
Index | 1341
Properties palette (continued) Publish to Web wizard
ray properties, 790 about, 808
region properties, 791 starting, 808
selecting objects, 769 Publishing Complete dialog box
shape properties, 791 about, 806
solid properties, 792 PUBLISH command, 800
spline properties, 792 publishing drawings (as DWF files) on the Web
text properties, 793 drawing sheets, 803
tolerance properties, 794 PUBLISHTOWEB command
trace properties, 795 about, 808
viewport properties, 796 Publish to Web wizard, 808
xline properties, 797 PUCSBASE system variable, 1214
Properties tab PURGE command, 809
Edit Attribute dialog box, 105 command line options, 811
Enhanced Attribute Editor, 350 Purge dialog box, 809
Properties tab (Customize dialog box), 188 Purge dialog box, 809
PROPERTIESCLOSE command, 798 purging
property fields, searching, 50 layers, 479
Property Settings dialog box, 531 named objects, 809
protocol objects from the drawing database, 811
setting for ports, 761 See also deleting
proxy fonts, 578 See also removing
proxy graphics options, 646, 1213 pyramids, 12
Proxy object type, 1274
PROXYGRAPHICS system variable, 899, 1212
PROXYNOTICE system variable, 647, 1213 Q
PROXYSHOW system variable, 646, 1213 QDIM command, 813
PROXYWEBSEARCH system variable, 1213 QLEADER command
PSETUPIN command, 798 about, 814
PSLTSCALE system variable, 509, 1213 Leader Settings dialog box
PSPACE command, 799 Annotation tab, 817
PSS (plot stamp parameter) files Attachment tab, 818
inches.pss file, 737 Leader Line & Arrow tab, 817
mm.pss file, 737 point specification, 815
values saved for dimensional file formats, QNEW command, 637, 819
741 QSAVE command, 820
values saved for dimensionless file formats, QSELECT command, 820
741 QTEXT command, 824
PSTYLEMODE system variable, 1214 QTEXTMODE system variable, 642, 1214
PSTYLEPOLICY system variable, 649, 1214 quad-trees in spatial index, 1046
PSVPSCALE system variable, 1214 Quadrant object snap, 672
public key encryption, 915, 916 Quadrant object snap mode, 324
PUBLISH command quadratic spline curves, 703, 979
about, 800 quadratic spline-fit polylines, 701
Change Page Setup dialog box, 805 queries (in databases)
command line options, 807 based on multiple search criteria, 217
Publish Complete dialog box, 800, 806 creating, 203, 241
Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box, 800, executing, 203
801 exporting
PUBLISH command, about, 800 sets of, 228
Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box importing
about, 800, 801 sets of, 230
lists of drawing sheets in, 803 Link Select operations and, 222
resizing, 802 naming, 241
Publish Drawing Sheets shortcut menu, 804 parenthetical grouping, 217
within a range of values, 217
saving, 216, 217, 220, 221
1342 | Index
queries (in databases) (continued) raster objects, WMFOUT and, 1126
simple, 215 raster plotters
sort order for, 219 crossing lines output, 757
specifying fields for, 219 RASTERPREVIEW system variable, 643, 901,
SQL queries, 220 1214
using the query builder grid, 218 ray casting, 115, 119
Query Builder tab, 217 RAY command, 825
Query Editor Ray object type, 1274
about, 215 ray properties, 790
displaying, 203 rays
Query Builder tab, 217, 220 creating, 825
Quick Query tab, 215 extending, 371
Range Query tab, 216 filleting, 377
SQL Query tab, 220 properties of, 790
query sets trimming, 1047
exporting, 228 raytrace rendering type, 882, 888
importing, 230 raytraced shadows, 499, 884
question mark (?) RE-INIT system variable, 1215
wild-card character, 50, 626 Re-initialization dialog box, 842
question mark (?), wild-card character, 843 read-only information
Quick object snap, 672 about drawing files, 342, 345
Quick Query tab (Query Editor), 215 about objects, modes, and extents, 993
Quick Select dialog box, 769, 821 about rendering, 992
Quick Setup wizard, starting drawings, 608 Readme file, 2
Quick Text mode, turning on/off, 824 read-only files, opening, 625
QUIT command, 824 read-only mode, database tables, 653
quitting AutoCAD, 824 real time
panning in, 683
zooming in, 330, 1152
R reassociating dimensions, 282
radians Received Line Signal Detector handshaking, 762
angle measure conventions, 1076 recently used files
entering angles in, 137 accessing, 622
radians, entering angles in, 611 setting the number of, 645
radius recommended fixes for flagged objects, 991
for arc segments, 715, 716 Reconcile Exported Material Names dialog box,
for circles, 167, 168 536
for cones, 9, 10, 176 Reconcile Imported Material Names dialog box,
for cylinders, 196 535
for dishes, 11 record increment values, SKETCH command
for domes, 11 and, 938
for fillet arcs, 381 record indication settings (Data View window in
for fillets, 381 dbConnect), 226
for isometric circles, 362 Record shortcut menu (Data View window in
for spheres, 14, 978 dbConnect), 212
for torus/tori, 14, 15, 1042 recording sketched lines, 937, 938
radius dimensions RECOVER command, 825
for circles and arcs, 279 RECTANG command, 826
creating rectangular arrays
a series of, 813 creating, 72
radius dimensions, associativity, 282 inserting multiple instances of blocks into,
radius, for circles, 159 544
RAM. See memory (RAM) rectangular arrays, creating, 67
Range Query tab (Query Editor), 216 rectangular polylines, 826
raster images, 756 Rectangular snap mode, 320
colors, 642 red components of colors, 172
panning and zooming, 641
Index | 1343
red, green, blue (RGB) color system, 98 REGENAUTO command
adjusting for material color, 864 text style changes and, 997
selecting, 172 turning on or off, 840
using for fog, 390 regenerating
REDEFINE command, 828 2D polylines, 700
redefining 3D polyline mesh objects, 708
blocks, 94 3D polylines, 706
boundary sets, 114, 118, 127, 129 associative dimensions, 284
redisplaying the last rendering, 851 drawings
redline markup language (RML) files, 875, 876 in all viewports, 839
REDO command, 829 automatically, 840
redoing in the current viewport, 838
Multiline Text Editor actions, 578 lineweights and, 523
redoing actions, 574 in plan view, 713
REDRAW command, 829 suppressing when switching to layout
slow redraw times, 1046 tabs/Model tab, 573, 1198
REDRAWALL command, 830 drawings, after undoing actions, 1071
reducing selected objects, 905 regenerating, drawings, suppressing when
REFCLOSE command, 830 switching to layout tabs/Model tab,
REFEDIT command 652
about, 832 REGENMODE system variable, 840, 1215
command line prompts, 835 REGION command, 841
MINSERT and, 833, 835 Region object type, 1274
Reference Edit dialog box, 832 region properties, 791
Refedit toolbar, 830, 837 regions
REFEDITNAME system variable, 1214 converting into viewports, 1110
reference angles creating
for 3D faces, 953 with INTERSECT, 452
ROTATE and, 878 with REGION, 841
ROTATE3D and, 878 with SECTION, 911
Reference Edit dialog box with UNION, 1074
about, 832 exploding, 370
double-clicking block objects and, 246 extruding, 374
Identity Reference tab, 832 properties of, 527, 791
Settings tab, 834 revolving, 856
referenced layers, 479 subtracting
references area or volume from, 1012
in-place editing, 837 registry variables. See system variables
nested, 833, 834, 835, 1127 reindexing the drawing database, 838, 839
saving back or discarding changes to, 830, REINIT command, 842
835, 836 reinitializing
selecting for editing, 832 digitizer, port, and program parameters file,
selecting nested objects, 834 842
reflection color (of materials) rejoining multiline segments, 563
adjusting, 862 relative offset point locations, 1285
granite, 869 relative paths in external references, 1128
marble, 870 relative paths in hyperlinks, 418
wood, 872 Reload Linetypes dialog box, 509
refraction, adjusting, 863 reloading
refreshing the display image files, 426, 428
in all viewports, 830, 839 xrefs, 1143
in the current viewport, 829, 838 REMEMBERFOLDERS system variable, 623, 1215
REFSET command Remove object selection method, 919
about, 837 removing
REFEDIT and, 837 applications
REGEN command, 657, 838 from history list, 60
REGENALL command, 657, 839 from Startup Suite, 61
1344 | Index
removing (continued) renaming (continued)
back faces, 24 viewport configurations, 844
block attributes, 103 views, 844, 1092
clipping boundaries, 436 See also naming
curve fitting from polylines, 697 RENDER command
dimension overrides, 279 about, 844
dimension points, 813 Render dialog box, 845
drawing sheets from drawing sets, 803 Render window, 847
edges from a selection set, 960 Windows Render Options dialog box, 849
external references, 1145 Render dialog box, 845
faces from a selection set, 948, 949 Render Options dialog box, 885
FTP sites from list, 629 Render rendering type, 885
group definitions, 398 Render window, 847
hidden lines render.mli library file, 534
from profiles, 964 rendered images
hyperlinks, 419, 420 3D configuration options, 23
islands from hatch boundaries, 108, 118 color depth for rendered images, 850
layer translation mappings, 480 copying, 849
mappings of markup layouts, 875 display resolution option, 641
marker blips, 121 opening, 848
menu groups, 541, 542 printing, 848
objects redisplaying, 851
from the drawing database, 811 saving, 848, 902
from drawings, 362 scaling to fit the display window, 850
from groups, 396, 400 shade plot settings, 680, 726, 734
nonstandard objects, 163 specifying size in pixels, 850
from a selection set, 919 rendering
from working sets, 837 destination options for, 847
search paths, 638 display options for, 846
spline fit data from the database, 984 displaying statistics for, 991
standards files, 989, 1249 partial image specifications, 903
text formatting, 580 plotting and, 592, 1110
xrefs from the Definitions to Bind list, 1131 procedures for, 845
See also deleting; erasing sub sampling settings, 847
removing hidden lines in 3D objects rendering preferences
suppressing lines, 341, 412, 413 default procedure, 882
RENAME command destination, 847
about, 843 file output configuration, 891
command line prompts, 844 light block size, 883
Rename dialog box, 843 Photo Raytrace, 499, 888
Rename Tool Palette dialog box, 192 Photo Real, 499, 886
renaming PostScript output, 892
extracted blocks with duplicate names, 353 for Render, 885
groups, 397, 400 shadow generation, 884
image files, 425, 429 smoothing angle, 883
layer states, 467, 474 sub sampling, 847
layouts, 477 surface material, 883
linetypes, 508, 509 writing information to a cache file, 846
multilines, 568 Rendering Preferences dialog box, 882
named objects, 843 RENDSCR command, 851
plot styles, 844 reordering sheets in drawing sets, 803
profiles, 664, 670 repairing damaged files, 825
sheets in drawing sets, 802, 804 repeating
text styles, 844, 999 commands, 590
tool palettes, 192 scripts, 893
toolbars, 187 repeating scripts, 893
user-defined page setups, 682 Replace dialog box, 582
Index | 1345
Replace dialog box (DBCONNECT), 241 revision clouds (markups), 854
replacing REVOLVE command, 856
attribute values, 88 revolving. See rotating
nonstandard objects, 163, 991 revolving. See rotating/revolving
text, 386 REVSURF command, 858
in DBCONNECT, 241 RFILEOPT command. See RENDER command
REPLAY command, 853 RGB color system
Report tab (Create Transmittal dialog box), 367 color book equivalents, 173
REPORTERROR system variable, 1215 distant light colors, 494
reports for selected colors, 170
batch audit, 1251 specifying, 172
reports, Batch Standards reports, 1248 spotlight colors, 497
Request To Send output, 762 RGB color system.
resetting See also red, green, blue (RGB) color system
the user’s elapsed timer, 1030 ridge, for pyramids, 13
resetting, profiles, 664 right-justifying text, 1024, 1025
residuals (on transformation table), 1018 Right-Click Customization dialog box
resizing about, 667
See also scale displaying, 655
resizing, the Properties palette, 770 right-click menus. See shortcut menus
resizing, the Publish Drawing Sheets dialog box, right-clicking
802 time-sensitive, 668
resolution right-justifying text, 586
changing PC3 files and, 730 rings
display options, 640 drawing, 316
in plotting, 756 in wood material, 872
partial image renderings, 903 RLSD handshaking, 762
setting for objects in the current viewport, RMAT command
1098 about, 860
shaded and rendered viewport plotting Adjust Material Bitmap Placement dialog
options, 681, 726, 735 box, 865
restoring Attach by AutoCAD Color Index dialog
commands suppressed by UNDEFINE, 828, box, 873
1070 Attach by Layer dialog box, 874
dimensioning system variable settings, 310 Materials dialog box, 860
erased objects, 620 New or Modify Granite Material dialog
isometric views, 1092 box, 868
layer states/properties, 467, 473, 475 New or Modify Marble Material dialog box,
named views, 1092, 1096 869
orthographic views (in 3D space), 1092, New or Modify Standard Material dialog
1095 box, 862
previous UCS, 1057 New or Modify Wood Material dialog box,
previous zoom views, 1151 871
a saved UCS, 1058 RML (redline markup language) files, 875
viewport configurations, 1108, 1111 command line prompts for, 876
restricted characters in database fields, 354 defined, 875
RESUME command, 854 mapping markups, 875
resuming running of an interrupted script, 854 RMLIN command
REVCLOUD command, 854 about, 875
reversing command line prompts, 876
effects of commands with UNDO, 1071 Map Markup dialog box, 875
the most recent operation (U command), RMS (root mean square) error, 1017, 1018
1051 ROAMABLEROOTPREFIX system variable, 1215
spline direction, 987 rot function (CAL command), 146
reversing, effects of commands with UNDO, ROTATE command, 877
1071 ROTATE3D command, 878
reversing, effects of UNDO, 829 rotated arrays, 73, 75
1346 | Index
rotated dimensions rows (of arrays), specifying, 68
linear, 274 RPREF command
rotating about, 882
2D objects about an axis, 856 File Output Configuration dialog box, 891
3D faces, 953 Photo Raytrace Render Options dialog box,
about a 3D axis, 878 888
about a base point, 877 Photo Real Render Options dialog box, 886
around a major axis Render Options dialog box, 885
ellipses, 359 Rendering Preferences dialog box, 882
elliptical arcs, 360 RSCRIPT command, 893
a camera about the target point, 332 RTDISPLAY system variable, 641, 1216
dimension text, 269, 270, 312 RTF files, importing, 580
objects rtos AutoLISP function, 302, 307
in 3D Orbit view, 35 RTS output, 762
in polar arrays, 70 rubber-band line, 337, 972, 974
path curves or profiles about a selected rubber sheeting, projective transformation and,
axis, 858 1017
a point about an axis, 146 run-length-encoded compression, 904
target point about a camera, 334 running
a UCS about an axis, 1055 object snap modes. See object snap modes
viewing direction, 1103 a script, 911
views in viewports, 598 VBA macros, 1085
rotation angle running object snaps, data entry option, 656
for 3D faces, 953
for attribute text, 88, 160
for backgrounds, 99 S
for blocks, changing, 160 safety precaution options, 644
for boxes, 8 sampledesigncenter folder, 48
for cubes, 8 SAT (ASCII) ACIS files
for defining a UCS, 1055 exporting to, 44
for images, 435 importing, 43
for inserted blocks, 442, 445, 447 saturation, of colors, specifying, 171
for inserting SAVE command, 897
multiple instances of blocks, 549 Save Image dialog box, 902
WMF files, 1120, 1124 Save Layer States dialog box, 459, 466
for projection cylinders, 925 displaying, 459
for projection planes, 924 Save List As dialog box, 803
for projection spheres, 927 Save Template page (Attribute Extraction
ROTATE and, 877 wizard), 354
ROTATE3D and, 878 SAVEAS command
for rotated rectangular arrays, 73 about, 897
for shapes, 933 command line prompts, 901
for the snap grid, 944 Saveas Options dialog box, 899
for text, 159, 1023 Template Description dialog box, 899
for xrefs, 1130 Saveas Options dialog box
rotation angle, for multiline text, 588 displaying, 898
roughness (of materials) DWG Options tab, 899
adjusting, 863 DXF Options tab, 900
granite, 869 SAVEFILE system variable, 644, 1216
marble, 870 SAVEFILEPATH system variable, 637, 644, 1216
wood, 872 SAVEIMG command
rounding edges of objects, 377 Save Image dialog box, 902
rounding rules TGA Options dialog box, 904
for alternate dimension units, 304 TIFF Options dialog box, 904
for fractional angles, 322 SAVENAME system variable, 1216
for linear dimensions, 300 SAVETIME system variable, 644, 1216
for primary dimension units, 300
Index | 1347
saving scale (continued)
attribute templates, 354 for marble material, 871
AutoCAD profiles, 634 for material bitmaps, 866, 929
blocks (block definitions), to a file, 1113 for multilines, 565
changes back to xrefs or blocks, 830 for OLE objects, 619
Design Publishing log files, 806 in plot style table definitions, 1005
drawings for plotting, 733
default file format for, 901 for sectional views of solids, 973
default path for, 1215 for text objects, 906
to earlier versions of AutoCAD, 901 for wood material, 872
to other file formats, 370 See also scale factors
performance issues, 897 SCALE command, 905
to previous release formats, 898 scale factors
using QSAVE, 820 dimension style settings, 299
using SAVE, 897 dimension text fraction height, 294
using SAVEAS, 897 for inserting
files multiple instances of blocks, 544
backup copies, 644 WMF files, 1120
customizing settings for, 643 of light blocks
incremental saves, 644 for rendering, 846, 883
in standard file selection dialog boxes, setting, 905
625 text objects, 907
using Automatic Save, 644 viewports, 593, 600
landscape library files, 518 for zooming, 593, 1151
layer states/properties, 459, 466, 473 scale factors, xrefs, 1129
layer translation mappings, 480 SCALETEXT command, 906
layouts, 477 scaling
lists of drawing sheets, 803 objects, 905
materials library files, 534 text, 906
memory and disk space, with CONVERT, SCENE command
178 about, 908
objects Modify Scene dialog box, 910
to bitmap files, 127 New Scene dialog box, 909
to JPEG files, 455 Scenes dialog box, 908
to TIFF files, 1029 scenes
to WMF files, 1125 about, 844, 908
objects, to PNG files, 763 adding to model space, 908, 909
PC3 files, 682, 728 deleting, 908
plot style tables, 1011 modifying, 908, 910
preview images, 624 rendering, 882
proxy images of custom objects, 899 setting background for, 97
queries, 216, 217, 220, 221 Scenes dialog box, 908
rendered images, 848, 902 scientific units, 609, 1076, 1078
rendering statistics to a file, 992 screen display
UCSs, 1058 brightness, contrast, and fade controls, 430
VBA projects, 1084 changing drawing/plotting order of, 317
views, 1096 customization options, 638
scale high or draft quality control, 439
background controls, 100 redrawing, 829, 830
for dimension style settings, 299, 301 rendering options for, 846
for text objects, 906 resolution and performance options, 640
for granite material, 869 screen menu
for hatch patterns, 111, 403 displaying, 639
for images, 435 font options, 667
for inserted blocks, 441, 445 screen offset and size for image display, 852
for linetypes, 509, 522 screen pointing area, configuring, 1018
for lineweight display, 525 screen-based sketching pen, 937
1348 | Index
SCREENBOXES system variable, 1216 Select Attributes page (Attribute Extraction
screening wizard), 352
color density, 1009 Select Color dialog box
SCREENMODE system variable, 1216 about, 169
SCREENSIZE system variable, 1216 Color Books tab, 173
SCRIPT command, 911 displaying, 1007
scripts Index Color tab, 170
continuously repeating, 893 True Color tab, 171
EXPLODE command and, 369 window elements, 666
resuming after interruption, 854 SELECT command, 917
running, 911 command modifiers, 1286
specifying pauses in, 252 Select Data Object dialog box, 243
scripts, standards violations and, 990 Select Drawing page (Attribute Extraction
scroll bar display option, 639 wizard), 351
SDF (space-delimited format) files Select DWF File dialog box, 803
for storing extracted attribute data, 92, 93 Select File dialog box, 621
SDI system variable, 653, 1217 Select Linetype dialog box, 468
search and replace feature, 386 Select Place in Document dialog box, 419
in DBCONNECT, 241 Select Plot Style dialog box, 746
Search dialog box (DesignCenter) Select Project dialog box, 1088
Advanced tab, 51 Select Template dialog box, 605, 612, 1220
basic use of, 49 selecting objects
Content tabs, 50 for gradient fills, 108, 118
Date Modified tab, 51 for hatching, 108, 118
Search Folders dialog box, 1247 nested objects, 834
search paths (for support files) using Properties palette, 769
See also paths selection modes command modifiers, 1286
searching selection sets
for drawing content, 49 adding
for files, 624 faces to, 949
for standards violations, 163 objects to, 917
for text in content, 50, 51 command modifiers, 1286
for text/values in external databases, 229 creating
searching, for standards violations, 1247 with QSELECT, 820
secondary dimension styles, 285 with UNION, 1074
SECTION command, 911 named. See groups
sectional views, 973 removing
sectioning faces from, 949
planes, 911 selection sets, associative dimensions, 268
sections, generating in viewports, 946 selection sets, creating with Properties palette,
security of files 769
digital signatures, 915 Selection tab (Options dialog box), 660
encrypting drawings, 915, 916 semi-infinite lines (rays), 825
password protection, 914, 916 separating composite 3D solids, 961
Security Options dialog box serial numbers
about, 914 AutoCAD, 43
Digital Signature tab, 915 digital IDs, 937
Password tab, 914 serial ports
SECURITYOPTIONS command configuring, 761, 762
about, 914 plotter settings, 750
Advanced Options dialog box, 916 SHELL command and, 934
Confirm Password dialog box, 916 series of dimensions, creating with QDIM, 813
Security Options dialog box, 914 servers, time servers, 916
Select a Database Object dialog box, 242 service pack, of AutoCAD, displayed, 43
Select a File dialog box, 638 Set Default i-drop Content Type dialog box, 920
Select a Template File dialog box, 607 Set Mtext Width dialog box, 579
Index | 1349
SETIDROPHANDLER command shape files
about, 920 inserting, 933
i-drop Options dialog box, 920 listing, 933
Set Default i-drop Content Type dialog box, loading, 514, 933
920 Shape object type, 1274
Settings dialog box shape properties, 791
BATTMAN command, 105 shapes
LAYTRANS command, 480 properties of, 791
Settings for COM Port dialog box, 761 purging from the drawing database, 811
Settings page (Attribute Extraction wizard), 352 sharpness
Settings tab (Reference Edit dialog box), 834 of granite material, 869
Settings tab (UCS dialog box), 1068 of marble material, 871
settings, customizing. See options SHELL command, 934
SETUV command shelling
Adjust Cylindrical Coordinates dialog box, solids, 962
924 SHIFT key
Adjust Object Bitmap Placement dialog extending rather than trimming objects,
box, 928 1047
Adjust Planar Coordinates dialog box, 922 trimming rather than extending objects,
Adjust Spherical Coordinates dialog box, 372
926 SHIFT key, options, 661
Adjust UVW Coordinates dialog box, 927 shortcut functions, 152
Mapping dialog box, 920 shortcut keys
SETVAR command, 931 assigning to menu items/toolbar buttons,
SHADE command. See SHADEMODE command 190
shade plot options, 592, 680, 726, 734, 1110 displaying on toolbar buttons, 187
shaded images options, 655
VSLIDE command and, 1112 Shortcut Keys dialog box, 191
shaded viewports, 680, 726, 734 shortcut menus
SHADEDGE system variable, 1217 3DORBIT, 32
SHADEDIF system variable, 1217 Adjust Clipping Planes, 19
SHADEMODE command, 489, 931 Cell (Data View window in dbConnect),
3dOrbit view and, 652 211
REFEDIT and, 836 Column (Data View window in
shadeplot options, 592, 1110 dbConnect), 210
shades, precision of, 1192 Command, 669
shading Data Objects (dbConnect Manager), 206
objects, 931 Data Sources Node (dbConnect Manager),
shading, in gradient fills, 116 206
shadow bounding objects, 499 Database Objects (dbConnect Manager),
shadow maps 204
controlling size of, 499 display options, 655, 667
Shadow Options dialog box, 499 Drawing Nodes (dbConnect Manager), 204
shadows Edit, 669
controlling softness of, 499 Grid Header (Data View window in
for distant light, 495 dbConnect), 213
generating, 846 hyperlink, 421, 656
for point light, 494 Pan, 684
rendering preference, 884 Plot Preview, 766
specifying type and options, 499 Record (Data View window in dbConnect),
for spotlight, 498 212
shadows, paper background shadow, 640 turning off, in the drawing area, 667
SHAPE command, 933 Zoom, 1153
loading files for use by, 514 SHORTCUTMENU system variable, 3, 655, 667,
1217
shortcuts (aliases) for commands, table listing
of, 1155
1350 | Index
SHOWMAT command, 934 slide libraries
SHP creating
font files, 1265 from slide files (SLIDELIB utility), 1252
shape files, 514 displaying a slide in, 1112
SHPNAME system variable, 1218 SLIDELIB (slide library creation) utility, 1252
SHX (font) files, 999, 1001, 1265 slidelist file, 1252
compiling other font files to, 175 slow plotting problems, 728
in transmittal drawings, 367 smoothing angle, 846, 883
SHX font files, specifying fonts, 578 smoothness options
SHX fonts, listing font family names, 665 dynamic tessellation, 22
signed files tessellation lines, 667
Attach Digital Signatures utility, 1246 snap (snap grid)
attaching digital signatures to drawings, spacing and grid settings, 319
915 style and type settings, 320
comments for, 1247 turning on/off, 319, 944
current status, 1246 Snap and Grid tab (Drafting Settings dialog
list of time services for timestamped files, box), 319
915 SNAP command, 943
notifications for, 1218 rotated arrays and, 73
number of, 1246 snap grid, 943
settings, 1246 snap interval, grid spacing and, 393
status, 935, 936 snap point, specifying with object snap modes,
time services for timestamping, 1247 671, 1286
SIGVALIDATE command snap spacing, 944, 994
about, 935 snap types, 946
Digital Signature Contents dialog box, 936 SNAPANG system variable, 73, 319, 1218
Validate Digital Signatures dialog box, 935 SNAPBASE system variable, 320, 1218
SIGWARN system variable, 645, 1218 SNAPISOPAIR system variable, 1218
silhouettes, displaying as wireframes, 642 SNAPMODE system variable, 319, 1218
single-face objects, 519 SNAPSTYL system variable, 320, 1219
single mappings of markup layouts, 876 SNAPTYPE system variable, 320, 1219
Single object selection method, 919 SNAPUNIT system variable, 319, 994, 1219
Single-drawing Compatibility Mode, 653 software acceleration, 25
single-sheet drawing files, 803 solar time, displayed in the Sun Angle
sizing Calculator, 486
object snap target box, 56 SOLDRAW command, 946
OLE objects, 618 See also SOLVIEW command
UCS icon, 1063 solid background for scenes, 97
sizing, fractions in text, 584 SOLID command, 947
SKETCH command, 937 solid coordinates for mapping, 927
SKETCHINC system variable, 1218 solid fills
SKPOLY system variable, 938, 1218 display option for, 642
SLA (Stereolithography Apparatus), compatible for hatches, 118, 405, 410
file format, 996 Solid object type, 1274
SLB (slide library) files, 1112, 1252 solid primitives, creating by extruding objects,
SLD (slide) files, 575, 1112, 1252 374
SLICE command solid profiles
about, 939 choosing 2D or 3D projection, 965
aligning cutting planes, 939, 940 creating, 964
defining cutting planes, 940, 942 generating in viewports, 946
slicing 3D solids hidden line display options, 964
with a plane, 939 tangential edge display options, 966
slide files solid properties, 792
creating, 575 SOLIDCHECK system variable, 1219
displaying, 1112 SOLIDEDIT command
3D solid edges, 959
3D solid faces, 948
Index | 1351
SOLIDEDIT command (continued) spatial indexes
about, 948 displaying information about, 1046
entire solids, 961 for partially open drawings, 687
solids for saved drawings, 900
boxes, 129 spatial indexes, for partially open drawings, 631
checking, 963 special characters, 1027
cleaning, 962 special characters, inserting, 589
composite, creating with UNION, 1074 speed. See performance optimization
creating SPELL command, 975
with INTERFERE, 450 Change Dictionaries dialog box, 977
profile images of, 964 Check Spelling dialog box, 975
with REVOLVE, 856 spelling checker, 636, 975
with SOLID, 947 Spelling dialog box, 975
with UNION, 1074 SPHERE command, 978
cylinders, 196 spheres, 14, 978
exploding, 369 SPLFRAME system variable, 702, 706, 711, 774,
filling, 377 1220
mass properties displayed for, 529 SPLINE command, 979
profile images, creating, 964 spline curves
properties of, 774, 792 2D, fitting to control points, 701
separating, 961 3D, fitting to control points, 706
slicing with a plane, 939 vs. fit curves, 701
spheres, 978 spline-fit polylines, 701, 702
storing in ASCII or binary files, 995 spline frames, 702
subtracting area or volume from, 1012 Spline object type, 1274
undoing editing actions, 963 spline properties, 792
wedges, 1116 SPLINEDIT command
See also 3D solid edges; 3D solid faces about, 981
solids.arx application splines
SOLDRAW and, 947 fit tolerance for, 985
SOLVIEW and, 974 splines (NURBS curves), 1274
SOLPROF command, 964 for 2D polylines, 701
SOLVIEW command for 3D polylines, 706
about, 966 adding
layers created by, 967 control points to, 986
See also SOLDRAW command fit points to, 982
Sort dialog box, 243 aligning
sort order options axis of rotation with, 954
for block attributes, 103 cutting plane with, 939
for lineweights, 1012 changing weight at control points, 987
for queries, 219 closing, 980, 983, 985
for records displayed in Data View window converting
(dbConnect), 243 2D or 3D polylines to, 981
sort order options, general settings, 656 into viewports, 1110
SORTENTS system variable, 656, 657, 1219 creating regions from, 841
source applications, 616 deleting fit points from, 984
source content units settings, 655 dividing, 314
source file for OLE objects, 615 editing
source points for aligning objects, 44 fit data, 982
space-delimited format (SDF) files, for storing effects of editing commands on, 702
extracted attribute data, 92, 93 filleting, 377
spaces before fractions, 584 fit tolerance for, 980, 985
SPACETRANS command, 901, 974 frames, 702
spacing factor in text line spacing, 588 increasing the order of, 987
moving
control vertices, 985
fit points, 984
1352 | Index
splines (NURBS curves) (continued) Standard snap grid, 945
opening, 983, 985 standards
precision approximation of, 703 Batch Standards Checker, 1248
properties of, 792 checking drawings for violations, 163, 1247
purging fit data from the database, 984 for named objects, plug-ins, 989
reversing the direction of, 987 plug-ins, 1249
specifying points for, 979 translating layers to different standards,
spline-fit polylines, 701, 702 478
tangent continuity, 983 standards check files
tangents for, 980, 984 .chx file extension, 1250
trimming, 1047 STANDARDS command
undoing last editing action to, 982, 988 about, 988
using VIEWRES for, 1098 CAD Standards Settings dialog box, 990
SPLINESEGS system variable, 641, 703, 1220 Configure Standards dialog box, 988
SPLINETYPE system variable, 703, 1220 standards files
splitting objects in two, 131 associating with drawings, 988, 989
spoolers, 636, 648, 728, 751 deleting from current drawing, 989
spotlights listing ones associated with current
about, 490 drawing, 989
creating or modifying, 496 loading layers from, 479
turning on, 489, 931 precedence, 989
spotlights, colors, 497 specifying for audits, 1249
SQL 92 protocol compatibility, 220 using with Batch Standards Checker, 1248
SQL Query tab (Query Editor), 220 standards plug-ins, 989
square Standards tab (Batch Standards Checker), 1249
3D UCS icon symbol, 1060 Standards tab (Configure Standards dialog box),
rectangular polylines, 826 988
square brackets ([ ]) STANDARDSVIOLATION system variable, 990,
generated measurement indicators, 273 1220
Stack Properties dialog box, 582 start angles (for surfaces of revolution), 858
stacked text (multiline text) start caps
automatic stacking feature, 584 of multilines, 571
editing, 582 styles, 1010
fractions in, 578, 583 start tangent for spline curves, 980, 984
positioning/sizing, 583 starting
turning on or off, 578 drawings
stacking text, 580 from scratch, 605
staggered dimensions, creating a series of, 813 with setup wizards, 605
standard color palette, 170 system variables, 1220
standard deviation (on transformation table), with templates, 819
1018 startup dialog box, controlling display of, 1220
standard file selection dialog boxes startup dialog box, display options, 654
default path, 1215 Startup Suite dialog box, 60
legacy behavior for default path, 1215 STARTUP system variable, 1220
standard file selection dialog boxes, opening, startup wizards. See wizards
621 statistics
standard libraries for drawings
complex linetypes, 1257 author, title, subject, 344
geometric characteristic symbols, 1269 date/time created and modified, 345,
hatch patterns, 1258 1029
linetypes, 1256 disk file information, 342
PostScript fill patterns, 1264 for objects, modes,
text and symbol fonts, 1265 and extents, 993
TrueType fonts, 1268 for rendering, 991
standard numeric functions, supported by the Statistics dialog box, 992
CAL command, 140 Statistics tab (Drawing Properties dialog box),
standard scales for plots, 680, 725 345
Index | 1353
STATS command, 991 suppressing
status bar tray arrowheads, 298
icon and notification settings, 1045 AutoCAD commands, 1070
status bar tray, notifications, 990 dimension line display, 290
STATUS command, 993 dragging, 316
STB (plot style table) files extension line display, 291
Add-a-Plot-Style-Table wizard, 1004 hidden lines, 341, 412, 413
converting CTBs to, 179, 180 hidden profile lines, 964
default plot style tables, 650 zeros
options for new drawings, 650 for alternate dimension units, 304
search path settings for, 637 for alternate tolerance units, 308
stereolithography apparatus file compatibility, for angular dimensions, 302
996 for dimension tolerances, 307
STL files, 996 for linear dimensions, 302
STLOUT command, 995 surface of revolution meshes, creating, 858
straightening marked vertices surface patches, EDGESURF command and, 357
of 2D polylines, 700 surface tessellation, 22
of 3D polylines, 706 SURFTAB1 system variable, 357, 707, 859, 1020,
STRETCH command, 996 1221
stretching SURFTAB2 system variable, 357, 707, 859, 1221
objects, 996 SURFTYPE system variable, 708, 1221
STYLE command SURFU system variable, 1221
about, 997 SURFV system variable, 1221
command line prompts, 1001 surveyor units
Text Style dialog box, 998 angle measure conventions, 1076
style settings tabs (Plot Style Table Editor), 1006 surveyor units, entering angles in, 611
styles swap file, available space in, 995
for attribute text, 88, 160 swatches of hatch patterns, 111
for multilines, 566 switching viewports
for multiline text, 577, 589 from model space to paper space, 799
names in xrefs, 834 from paper space to model space, 575
for stacked text, 583 swiveling the camera, 42
standards files for, 1249 symbol and text fonts, standard library file of,
for text, changing, 159 1265
STYLESMANAGER command, 1003 Symbol dialog box, 1033
Edit Lineweights dialog box, 1011 symbol names, enabling display in xrefs, 834
sub sampling rendering settings, 847 symbols
subject of drawings, displaying/specifying, 344 inserting in multiline text, 580, 589
substitute fonts, 664 symbol and text fonts, standard library file
SUBTRACT command, 1012 of, 1265
Subtract mode of AREA command, 66 symbol names, enabling display in xrefs,
subtraction method for creating composite 834
regions, 1012 UCS icon symbols, 1061
suffixes xref-dependent, binding to drawings, 1130
for alternate dimension text, 304 Synchronize dialog box, 244
for primary dimension text, 301 synchronizing
Summary tab (Drawing Properties dialog box), block instances, 102
344 syntax of expressions evaluated by CAL
Sun Angle Calculator dialog box, 500 command, 135
SUN files, options for rendering, 891 SYSCODEPAGE system variable, 1221
sun, calculating the position of, 495, 500 system-level file attributes, displaying
support files, working support file list, 635 information about, 343
System tab (Options dialog box), 651
1354 | Index
system variables TDUUPDATE system variable, 1222
changing values of, 931 Template Description dialog box, 899
clearing overrides, 279 template directory, 606
displaying values and descriptions of, 993 template files
listing, 931 for attribute data extraction, 92, 352, 354
overriding, 278 template files, search path for, 637
table listing of, 1162, 1233 templates
using with CAL, 139 for attribute data extraction, 93
SYSWINDOWS command, 1013 for attribute definitions, 247
for labels. See label templates
for layouts, creating, 476
T for links. See link templates
tab stops, 581 loading layers from, 479
Table View style settings tab (Plot Style Table templates (template files) (DWT files)
Editor), 1006 starting drawings with, 606, 819
tables, read-only database tables, 653 templates, for HTML pages, 808
tablet temporary files
menu areas file extension for, 645
configuring, 1018 search path for, 638
screen pointing area, configuring, 1018 temporary points, 1285
TABLET command TEMPPREFIX system variable, 638, 1222
about, 1015 termination strings, 758
calibrating the digitizer, 1015 tessellation
configuring menu and screen pointing dynamic, 22, 667
areas, 1018 tessellation lines
Tablet mode defined, 22
SKETCH and, 937 settings, 667
turning on/off, 1015 tetrahedrons, 13
TABMODE system variable, 1015, 1221 text
tabs in text, 579, 581 alignment (justification), 455, 1022
tab-separated file format, for attribute extraction of attributes
files, 355 editing, 81, 87, 103, 160, 350
TABSURF command, 1020 baselines, 587
tabulated surface meshes, 1020 CHANGE command options, 159
tabulation lines on revolved surfaces, 859 checking spelling, 975
Tag attribute properties, 102 in command line window
tangent continuity, 983 display options, 639, 666
Tangent object snap, 672 controlling with QTEXT, 824
Tangent object snap mode, 326 copying format with MATCHPROP, 532
tangential edges of profiles, 966 editing, 247
tangents finding and replacing, 386
for arcs, 63 in DBCONNECT, 241
for spline curves, 980, 984 formatting attribute text, 104, 350
taper angle hiding, 415
for extrusion, 375 importing, 580
for faces, 956 including with leader lines, 483
Targa. See TGA file format indents and tabs, 579
target drawing units settings, 655 justification options, 1022
target point mirroring, 553
rotating about a camera, 334 position and properties of, changing, 793
specifying, 337 properties of, 793
TARGET system variable, 1221 resizing text objects, 906
TDCREATE system variable, 345, 1221 searching for in content, 50, 51
TDINDWG system variable, 346, 1221 selecting
TDUCREATE system variable, 1222 with FIND, 388
TDUPDATE system variable, 346, 1222 size of, for OLE objects, 620
TDUSRTIMER system variable, 1222 specifying the start point of, 1021
Index | 1355
text (continued) TEXTQLTY system variable, 1222
upper- and lowercase, 580 TEXTSCR command, 1028
using special characters and control codes, TEXTSIZE system variable, 578, 585, 1222
1027 TEXTSTYLE system variable, 577, 1223
zooming with FIND, 388 texture maps
See also dimension text; fonts; multiline text sampling render options, 888, 891
text and symbol fonts, standard library file of, texture maps, search path for, 638
1265 textures
text boundaries, nonprinting, MTEXT command enabling, 24
and, 585 TGA file format, 903
TEXT command, 1021 images
command line options, 1028 compression options, 904
hiding text, 412, 415 displaying, 852
text editor options, 636 options for rendering output, 891
text files TGA Options dialog box, 904
CSV format, 355 thawing layers, 460, 461, 464, 473, 1101
DXF format, 901 thickness
storing solids in, 995 of 2D objects, 162, 166
template extraction files, 355 copying with MATCHPROP, 532
writing mass property calculations to, 527 displaying, 994
text files, importing, 580 of new objects, setting, 358
Text Formatting toolbar, 577 as property of objects, 771
Text object type, 1274 of rectangular polylines, 828
text objects THICKNESS system variable, 994, 1223
scale factors and, 907 third-party application object properties, 767
scaling, 906 third-party color books, 173
based on specified length, 907 third-party content, 46
to match text object’s size, 907 through point for offset objects, 614
text objects, boundary options, 642 thumbnail preview image option, 643
Text Options tab TIFF file format
Edit Attribute dialog box, 104 displaying images, 852
Enhanced Attribute Editor, 350 image compression options, 904
text properties, 793 options for rendering, 891
Text Style dialog box, 998 saving images, 903
text styles TIFF images, saving, 1029
applying changes to, 1001 TIFF Options dialog box, 904
changing character display effects, 1000, TIFOUT command, 1029
1002 tilde (~), opening Select Template dialog box,
changing fonts, 999, 1001 612
creating, 998, 1001 tilde (~), to display a standard file selection dialog
deleting, 999 box, 632
names, 998, 1003 TILE button (status bar). See Model tab
previewing changes, 1000 tiled viewports
renaming, 844, 999 creating with VPORTS, 1104, 1108
specifying, 998, 1001, 1026 TILEMODE system variable, 299, 573, 596, 1223
text styles, standards files for, 989, 1249 tiling controls
Text tab (New Dimension Style dialog box), 292 for backgrounds, 100
system variables updated by, 1237 for material bitmaps, 866, 867, 930
text window tiling windows, 1013
displaying TIME command, 1029
database information in, 246 time servers, 916, 937, 1247
opening, 1028 time services for digital signatures
switching connection status of, 916, 1247
to the drawing area from, 393 displaying list of, 916, 1247
writing contents to the log file, 515 displaying service used, 937
TEXTEVAL system variable, 1028, 1222 time stamps on digital signatures, 916, 1247
TEXTFILL system variable, 1222
1356 | Index
time/date toolbars
drawing statistics, displaying, 1029 Batch Standards Checker toolbar, 1250
searching for content by, 51 creating, 186, 193
specifying in the Sun Angle Calculator, 500 deleting, 187
time servers, 916, 1247 displaying/hiding, 187, 1035, 1038
timestamps for digital signatures, 916 docking, 1036
timeouts during plotting, 761 floating, 1037
time-sensitive right-clicking, 668 Refedit toolbar, 830, 837
timestamps on digital signatures, 1247 renaming, 187
tints in gradient fills, 116 Toolbars tab (Customize dialog box), 186
title bars, drawing path name display, 645 toolbars, Text Formatting, 577
title blocks tooltips
options for viewports, 602 AutoTrack display options, 659
titles of drawings, displaying/specifying, 344 displaying, 187
tk command modifier, 1285 hyperlink, 421
TOLERANCE command hyperlink display options, 656
about, 1030 TOOLTIPS system variable, 1223
Geometric Tolerance dialog box, 1031 TORUS command, 1042
Material Condition dialog box, 1035 torus/tori (solid), 14, 1042
Symbol dialog box, 1033 TPSTATE system variable, 1223
Tolerance object type, 1274 TRACE command, 1043
tolerance objects, properties of, 794 Trace object type, 1274
tolerance properties, 794 trace properties, 795
tolerance symbol (±) traces
entering, 589, 1027 filling, 377
tolerance symbol (±), entering, 589 properties of, 795
tolerances TRACEWID system variable, 1223
for dimension text, 305 track command modifier, 1285, 1286
entering symbol for, 589, 1027 tracking
for leader line annotations, 483, 815 AutoTrack, 659
for spline curves, 980, 985 layer changes, 475
for stacked text, 583 vector colors, 666
values, 1031 vectors display, 659
Tolerances tab (New Dimension Style dialog TRACKING command modifier, 1285
box), 305 TRACKPATH system variable, 659, 1223
system variables updated by, 1239 transformation table, 1017
tool palettes transformation types for calibrating a digitizer,
creating and editing, 192 1016
search paths for files, 637 translating layers to other standards, 478
Tool Palettes tab (Customize dialog box), 192 transmittal sets, 363
Tool Palettes window, 192 creating, 363
toolbar buttons listing files, 365
adding/deleting, 185 password protection, 368
assigning shortcut keys to, 190 report information, 367
displaying large buttons, 187 transparency
displaying macros associated with, 188 adjusting, 24, 863
displaying shortcut keys on, 187 transparent images, 1044
displaying tooltips on, 187 windows, 195
in file selection dialog boxes, 623 TRANSPARENCY command, 1044
flyouts, 189 Transparency dialog box, 195
images transparent commands, 3
changing (replacing), 189 Tray Settings dialog box, 1045
displaying large images, 188 TRAYICONS system variable, 1223
editing, 188, 193 TRAYNOTIFY system variable, 1223
properties, 188 TRAYSETTINGS command
TOOLBAR command, command line prompts, about, 1045
1036 Tray Settings dialog box, 1045
Index | 1357
TRAYTIMEOUT system variable, 1223 twist angle specification, DVIEW command, 339
tree view .txt extension for template extraction files, 92,
dbConnect Manager, 203 93, 355
for designating hyperlinks, 418, 419 typographical conventions used in this manual,
Image Manager, 425 6
Plotter Configuration Editor, 752
Xref Manager, 1142
tree view (DesignCenter) U
about, 48 U command, 1051
displaying, 47 See also REDO command; UNDO command
hiding, 47 u2w function (CAL command), 145
TREEDEPTH system variable, 1046, 1224 UCS command, 1051
TREEMAX system variable, 1224 UCS coordinate values of a location, 423
TREESTAT command, 1046 UCS Details dialog box, 1069
TRIM command, 1047 UCS dialog box
Trim mode Named UCSs tab, 1064
for chamfering, 157 Orthographic UCSs tab, 1066
for filleting, 382 Settings tab, 1068
trimming UCS icon
objects changing
extending objects rather than, 1047 settings, 1068
rather than extending objects, 372 coloring, 1063
TRIMMODE system variable, 157, 377, 1225 displaying/hiding, 1061
True Color colors, 289, 290, 293, 1165 placement of, 1062
True Color dialog box previewing, 1063
displaying, 1007 sizing, 1063
True Color tab (Select Color dialog box), 171 styles, 1061, 1063
True Colors symbols, 1061
specifying for plot styles, 1007 UCS Icon dialog box, 1062
true colors UCS settings
applying to layers, 462, 470 restoring with a view, 1093, 1096
applying to objects, 165 saving with a view, 1094, 1097
exploded objects, 1139 specifying for the current viewport, 1068
raster images, 642 UCS. See user coordinate systems (UCSs)
selecting, 171, 174 UCSAXISANG system variable, 1225
specifying properties for objects, 161 UCSBASE system variable, 1057, 1066, 1069,
storing as RGB, 172 1093, 1095, 1225
using in toolbar buttons, 194 UCSFOLLOW system variable, 1052, 1068, 1226
window elements, 666 UCSICON command, 1060
TrueType fonts, 999, 1000, 1001 UCS Icon dialog box, 1062
listing font family names, 665 UCSICON system variable, 1226
plotting, 757 UCSMAN command
SHX proxy fonts, 578 UCS Details dialog box, 1069
standard library file of, 1268 UCS dialog box, 1064
truetype.dwg file, 578, 1268 UCSNAME system variable, 1226
TSPACEFAC system variable, 1225 UCSORG system variable, 1226
TSPACETYPE system variable, 1225 UCSORTHO system variable, 1093, 1227
TSTACKALIGN system variable, 1225 UCSVIEW system variable, 1097, 1227
TSTACKIZE system variable, 1225 UCSVP system variable, 1060, 1068, 1227
TTF (TrueType font) files, 1268 UCSXDIR system variable, 1227
TTR (tangent, tangent, radius) circle UCSYDIR system variable, 1227
specification, 168 unassigned materials, 534
turbulence, of marble material, 870 unattached materials, 534
turning the camera, 42 UNDEFINE command, 1070
REDEFINE and, 828
undefining an AutoCAD command, 1070
underlining multiline text, 578
1358 | Index
_ (underscore character) Unicode fonts
in field names, 354 about, 1277
underscoring text, control code for, 1027 Code Page Independent format (CIF) and,
UNDO command 1278
Auto option, 1072 code page information, 1280, 1281
commands and system variables unaffected Multibyte Interchange format (MIF) and,
by, 1071 1280
continuously repeating scripts and, 893 UNION command, 1074
grouping sequences of operations UNITMODE system variable, 1228
(Begin/End options), 1073 UNITS command
limiting or turning off (Control option), command line prompts, 1078
1072 Direction Control dialog box, 1077
marking undo information (Mark/Back Drawing Units dialog box, 1075
options), 1073 units format
reversing several commands, 574 for dimension types, 302, 303
for a specified number of preceding for linear dimensions, 300
operations, 1071 units of measurement
See also REDO command; U command converting, 140
UNDO command, REDO and, 829 setting
UNDOCTL system variable, 1227 with the Advanced Setup wizard, 610
undoing current format and precision, 1075,
command operations (using UNDO), 1071 1078
DDEDIT command changes, 248 with the Quick Setup wizard, 609
DVIEW command actions, 341 with system variables, 1201
EXTEND command changes, 374 See also imperial units
last baseline dimension, 262 unloading
last continued (chain) dimension, 265 applications
layer changes, 475 with APPLOAD, 58, 59
LEADER command vertex points, 485 image files, 426, 428
LINE command segments, 505 ObjectARX applications, 75
a menu selection as a single command, partial menu files, 543
1072 VBA projects, 1085, 1090
most recent operation, using U, 1051 xrefs, 687, 1143, 1146
Multiline Text Editor actions, 578 unlocking layers, 460, 473
MVSETUP command operations, 602, 604 unreferenced layers, 479
object selection action, 919 unstacking text, 580
PEDIT command actions, 704, 707, 709 Update PC3 File with New Printer dialog box,
PLINE command actions, 716, 718 729
SOLDRAW command actions, 947 updating
SOLIDEDIT command actions, 949, 959, block attributes, 95
960, 963 links/link templates, 244
a specified number of preceding updating, PC3 files, 729
operations, 1071 uppercase text, 580
SPLINE command-specified points, 980 upside-down character display, 577, 1000, 1002
SPLINEDIT command actions, 982, 988 upside-down plotting, 679, 724, 732
TRIM command actions, 1049 URLs
See also restoring; U command; UNDO attaching to area or object in drawings, 79
command detaching from area or object in drawings,
undoing, REFCLOSE command changes, 831 252
UNDOMARKS system variable, 1227 URLs (Uniform Resource Locators), for i-drop
ungrouping groups, 400 content, 920
Unicode characters Use Template page (Attribute Extraction
creating, 1027 wizard), 352
Unicode characters, creating, 589 user coordinate systems (UCSs)
about, 1051
applying to viewports, 1059
changing to orthographic, 1066
Index | 1359
user coordinate systems (UCSs) (continued) VBA macros
defining, 1053 creating/editing, 1087
Face method, 1055 deleting, 1087
Object method, 1053 displaying a list of, 1086
by specifying origin points, 1052 running, 1085, 1089
View method, 1055 virus protection for, 1082, 1089
X, Y, Z method, 1055 VBA Manager, 1083
Z Axis method, 1052 VBA Options dialog box, 1088
deleting, 1058 VBA projects
displaying embedding, 1084, 1088
names of, 970, 1059, 1064 extracting, 1084
plan view of, 712 loading, 1081, 1084
making current, 1065, 1067 saving, 1084
moving, 1056 setting options for, 1088
origin and axis information, 1069 unloading, 1085, 1090
orthographic, 1056 VBA statements, executing, 1090
renaming, 844 VBA. See Visual Basic Editor
restoring, 1057, 1058 VBAIDE command, 1081
with an associated orthographic view, VBALOAD command, 1081
1093 VBAMAN command, 1083
saving, 1058 VBARUN command
with a view, 1094, 1097 command line prompts, 1089
setting to WCS, 145, 1059 Macros dialog box, 1086
specifying settings for the current Select Project dialog box, 1088
viewport, 1068 VBA Options dialog box, 1088
User Defined Fields dialog box, 738 VBASTMT command, 1090
User Defined Page Setups dialog box, 682 VBAUNLOAD command, 1090
User-defined Paper Sizes and Calibration node vec and vec1 functions (CAL command), 141,
(Plotter Configuration Editor Device 152
and Document Settings tab), 758 vector expression operators, 136
user-defined scales for plots, 680 vector graphics, plot options, 756
user elapsed timer, turning on/off or resetting, vectors
1030 calculating normal vectors, 150
User Preferences tab (Options dialog box), 654 calculating with CAL, 141
user profiles filtering components of, 145
creating, 669 formatting for use with CAL, 137
options for, 663 versions of AutoCAD
renaming, 670 file formats, 897, 898
user-defined hatch patterns, 110, 118, 406 installed, 43
USERI1-5 system variables, 1228 saving files as, 901
USERR1-5 system variables, 1228 Vertex object type, 1275
USERS1-5 system variables, 1228 vertex tangent direction, of 2D polylines, 700
utilities vertical-alignment character display, 798
Attach Digital Signatures, 1246 vertical bar (|) (pipe character)
Batch Plot (batch plotting), 1252 in dependent symbols, 1130, 1132, 1145
Batch Standards Checker, 1247 vertical construction lines, 1135
SLIDELIB (slide library creation), 1252 vertical grid spacing, 944
UVW coordinates for mapping, adjusting, 927 vertical justification
of dimension text, 294, 307
of dimension tolerance text, 307
V vertical linear dimensions, 274
Validate Digital Signatures dialog box, 935 vertical resolution of rendered images, 850
validating digital signatures, 935, 936 vertical tiling of windows, 1013
variables. See system variables vertical-alignment character display, 1002
VBA applications (DVB files), loading, 57 vertices
of 2D polylines, 698, 703
of 3D polyface meshes, 710
1360 | Index
vertices (continued) viewport configurations (continued)
of 3D polyline mesh objects, 707 changing, 1107
of 3D polylines, 705 creating, 1106, 1110
adding displaying, 1106, 1108
to 2D polylines, 699 dividing, 1111
to 3D polylines, 705 fitting, 1110
to multilines, 561 previewing, 1107
deleting from multilines, 561 restoring, 1111
view box (Aerial View window) turning on or off, 1110
zooming and, 1150 renaming, 844
VIEW command tiled
about, 1090 applying, 1105
command line prompts, 1095 changing, 1106, 1109
New View dialog box, 1093 creating, 1104, 1108
View Details dialog box, 1094 deleting, 1108
View dialog box, 1091 displaying, 1106, 1109
View Details dialog box, 1094 joining, 1109
View dialog box, 1091 previewing, 1105, 1106
Named Views tab, 1091 restoring, 1108
Orthographic and Isometric Views tab, viewport handles, profile blocks and, 964
1092 Viewport object type, 1275
view direction, aligning the axis of rotation viewport objects, clipping, 1099
with, 880 viewport properties, 796
view geometry to load for partially open copying with MATCHPROP, 532
drawings, 630 viewports
View method for defining a UCS, 1055 aligning the axis of rotation with, 955
View of This Drawing tab (Insert Hyperlink dialog assigning UCSs to, 1059
box), 418 clipping viewport objects, 1099
View Output page (Attribute Extraction wizard), converting objects to, 593
353 creating, 591, 598, 640, 968
view point, setting for 3D visualization, 1102 slide files of, 575
VIEWCTR system variable, 1228 dividing the area into equal parts, 594, 595
VIEWDIR system variable, 1228 fitting within margins, 592
viewing floating
drawings converting objects into, 1110
in the Aerial View window, 328 creating with SOLVIEW, 966
in plan view, 712 locking, 1110
DWF files, 807 properties of, 796
external database tables. See Data View freezing/thawing layers in, 461, 1100, 1101
window (in dbConnect) handles, profile blocks and, 964
extracted attribute information, 353 irregularly shaped (polygonal), 593
geometry to load into partially open layout options for, 598
drawings, 630 number of available, 592
gradient boundaries, 109 plotting settings, 592, 1110
hatch boundaries, 109 properties of
objects, in 3D. See 3DORBIT command copying with MATCHPROP, 532
partially open drawings, 629 refreshing the display of, 829, 830, 838,
viewing direction (in 3D model space) 839
defining, 250 setting layer visibility in, 1100
fog and depth cueing and, 389 setting MVSETUP preferences, 601
setting, 1102 shaded and rendered viewport options,
VIEWMODE system variable, 1228 680, 726, 734
Viewpoint Presets dialog box, 250 shadeplot settings, 592, 1110
viewport configurations switching
converting into individual viewport from model space to paper space, 799
objects, 594, 595 from paper space to model space, 575
floating title block options for, 602
Index | 1361
viewports (continued) visible attributes, editing, 89
turning on or off, 592 visible lines
using SOLDRAW in, 946 of profiles, 964
zoom options, 1149 SOLVIEW placement of, 967
zoom scale factor settings for, 600 VISRETAIN system variable, 646, 1229
See also views Visual Basic Editor
Viewports dialog box displaying, 1081
Named Viewports tab (floating), 1108 entering Break mode, 1088
Named Viewports tab (tiled), 1106 opening, 1081
New Viewports tab (floating), 1106 Visual LISP executables (VLX), loading, 57
New Viewports tab (tiled), 1104 Visual LISP interactive development
VIEWRES command, 1098 environment, 1090
VIEWRES command, smoothness and, 641 VLIDE. See VLISP command
views VLISP command, 1099
auxiliary, 971 VLX (Visual LISP executable) files, loading, 57
copying to the Clipboard, 185 volumetric shadows, 499
creating, 1093 VPCLIP command, 1099
defining windows as, 1094, 1097 VPLAYER command, 1100
deleting, 1092, 1096 VPOINT command, 1102
displaying VPORTS command
information about, 1094 about, 1104
names of, 692, 1091, 1095 command line prompts, 1108
isometric, restoring, 1092 Viewports dialog box, 1104
loading geometry from into partially open VSLIDE command, 1112
drawings VSMAX system variable, 1229
with OPEN, 625, 630 VSMIN system variable, 1229
loading geometry from, into partially open
drawings
with PARTIALOAD, 686, 688 W
with PARTIALOPEN, 690 W (in 2D UCS icon), 1060
named w2u function (CAL command), 145
making current, 1091, 1092 warning messages
plotting, 679, 725, 733 options, 653
naming, 1093 standards violations, 990
orthographic WBLOCK command
creating, 971 command line prompts, 1115
restoring, 1092 Write Block dialog box, 1113
panning, 35 WCS (world coordinate system)
parallel projection/perspective, 331 converting points to UCS, 145
renaming, 844, 1092 creating a profile viewport from, 969
restoring setting the current UCS to, 1059
previous, 1092, 1096 specifying for mapped materials, 923
saving, 1096 Web
for scenes, 909, 910 DesignCenter content as Web-based, 46
sectional, 973 i-drop content, 920
See also viewports Live Enablers, 654
VIEWSIZE system variable, 1229 paths for Web locations, 635
VIEWTWIST system variable, 1229 publishing HTML pages, 808
violations in drawings web browser, launching, 133
checking for, 163 Web Folders directory, 623
flagging as ignored, 164 Web folders, creating, 623
notifying users of, as they occur, 990 web pages
violations in drawings, checking for, 1247 linking to, 417
virtual pens, 1009 Web Publish wizard. See Publish to Web wizard
virus protection for VBA macros, 621, 1082, WEDGE command, 1116
1089 wedges (solid), 16, 1116
visible attributes, 84 weight, changing at spline control points, 987
1362 | Index
welding multiline segments, 563 wizards (continued)
WHIPARC system variable, 1229 Custom Paper Size wizard, 759
WHIPTHREAD system variable, 1230 Import PCP or PC2 Plot Settings wizard, 696
WHOHAS command, 1118 Plotter Calibration wizard, 758, 760
wide polylines Publish to Web wizard, 808
calculating areas/perimeters, 65, 66 Quick Setup wizard, 608
exploding, 369 for starting new drawings, 607
filling, 377 WMF files, 1120, 1125
lineweights, 523 importing, 1120
width saving objects to, 1125
of 2D polyline segments, 715, 716, 718 setting import options for, 1125
of multiline text paragraphs, 585, 589 WMF In Options dialog box, 440, 1125
of OLE objects, 619 WMFBKGND system variable, 1230
of pens, 755 WMFFOREGND system variable, 1231
of polylines, 698, 701 WMFIN command, 1120
of rectangular polylines, 828 WMFOPTS command, 1125
of wedges, 1117 WMFOUT command, 1125
width factor for character spacing, 1000, 1002 wood material attributes, 871
wild-card characters wopeng18.hdi driver, 667
for finding files, 626 wopengl8.hdi driver, 25
for searching text, 50 working sets (of reference objects)
using about, 836
on the command line, 5 adding objects to, 837
to rename groups of objects, 843 locking objects not in sets, 835
Window object selection method, 917 removing objects from, 837
windows working support file list, 635
arranging, 1013 world coordinate system (WCS)
defining as a view, 1094, 1097 converting points to UCS, 145
options for, 639, 665 creating a profile viewport from, 969
plotting portions of drawings specified by, plan views of, 713
679, 725, 733 setting the current UCS to, 1059
transparency of, 195 specifying for mapped materials, 923
zoom specifications in, 1152 WORLDUCS system variable, 1231
Windows (operating system) WORLDVIEW system variable, 1231
ANSI code pages supported by, 1281 WPolygon object selection method, 918
standard behavior options, customizing, wrap line for bitmap projection
655 cylindrical coordinate system, 924
system font, AutoCAD screen menu and, spherical coordinate system, 926
639 Write Block dialog box, 1113
Windows Render Options dialog box, 849 WRITESTAT system variable, 1231
Windows system printers writing objects or blocks to a drawing file, 1113
creating/editing paper sizes, 759
hiding display of, in the Plot/Page Setup
dialog boxes, 649 X
WIPEOUT command, 1119 X axis
wipeout frames, 1119 aligning the axis of rotation with, 880, 955
Wipeout object type, 1275 displaying UCS values, 1069
wireframes scale factors, for inserting multiple instances
3D graphics adaptive degradation, 21 of blocks, 546, 551
displaying silhouettes as, 642 UCS icon symbols, 1063
plotting and, 592, 1110 X scale factor
shade plot settings, 680, 726, 734 for inserted blocks, 445, 446
wizards for WMF files, 1121
Add Plot Style Table wizard, 677, 1004 X, Y, Z method for defining a UCS, 1055
Add-a-Plotter wizard, 747 XATTACH command
Advanced Setup wizard, 610 about, 1127
Attribute Extraction wizard, 351 External Reference dialog box, 1127
Index | 1363
XBIND command Y
about, 1130
command line prompts, 1131 Y axis
Xbind dialog box, 1131 aligning the axis of rotation with, 880, 955
Xbind dialog box, 1131 displaying UCS values, 1069
XCLIP command scale factors, for inserting multiple instances
about, 1132 of blocks, 546, 551
defining clipping boundaries, 1134 UCS icon symbols, 1063
deleting clipping boundaries, 1133 Y scale factor
generating polylines, 1134 for inserted blocks, 445, 446
setting clipping planes, 1133 for WMF files, 1122
turning on or off, 1133 YZ plane, aligning cutting planes with, 941
XCLIPFRAME system variable, 1232
XEDIT system variable, 646, 1232
XFADECTL system variable, 642, 836, 1232
Z
XLINE command, 1135 Z axis
Xline object type, 1275 3D UCS icon symbol, 1061
xline properties, 797 aligning the axis of rotation with, 880, 955
xlines. See construction lines defining
XLOADCTL system variable, 645, 1232 cutting planes with, 940
XLOADPATH system variable, 638, 1233 UCS with, 1052
XLS (Microsoft Excel) files, 355 displaying UCS values, 1069
XLT files (tool palette export files), 192 scale factors, for inserting multiple instances
XML reports, 1248, 1250 of blocks, 546, 552
XOPEN command, 1136 Z Axis method for defining a UCS, 1052
XPLODE command Z scale factor
about, 1138 for inserted blocks, 445, 447
applying changes globally, 1140 for WMF files, 1122
applying changes to objects individually, zero suppression
1138 for alternate dimension units, 304
See also EXPLODE command for alternate tolerance units, 308
XREF command for angular dimensions, 302
about, 1140 for dimension tolerance text, 307
Bind Xrefs dialog box, 1143 ZOOM command, 1149
command line prompts, 1145 zoom scale factor
Xref Manager, 1141 Data View AutoPan feature and, 226
xref copies (for demand loading) DVIEW and, 338
creating, 1232, 1233 for viewports, 593, 600
Xref Manager, 1141 Zoom shortcut menu, 1153
xref paths ZOOMFACTOR system variable, 1233
in batch standards audits, 1248 zooming
notifications for updated or missing xrefs, with Aerial View, 329
1233 centering a portion of the drawing, 1149
xref-dependent layers, 1229 Data View AutoPan feature and, 226
xref paths, displaying, 1128 to display
XREFCTL system variable, 1233 generated portion of the drawing with a
XREFNOTIFY system variable, 1233 view box, 1150
xrefs (external references) drawing extents, 1150
attaching, 1147 previous view, 1151
overlaying, 1146 entire drawing, 1149
xrefs. See external references (xrefs) to a logical extent, 1152
XY plane (construction plane) to a specific area of a window, 1152
aligning cutting planes with, 941 at a specified scale factor, 1151
of a UCS, creating viewports and, 968 text, with FIND, 388
on a view, 42
zooming, raster images, 641
ZX plane, aligning cutting planes with, 942
1364 | Index

Autocad 2004 Command Reference

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Autocad 2004 Command Reference

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AutoCAD ®

Appendix B System Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

Appendix C Dimension Variables Quick Reference . . . . . . 1235

Appendix D Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Appendix E Standard Libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . 1255

Appendix F AutoCAD Graphical Objects . . . . . . . . . 1271

Appendix G Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277

The Command Reference, a comprehensive guide to In this chapter

In addition to the command listings, the Command ■ Typographical Conventions

Reference covers several topics in the appendixes:

command aliases, system variables, dimension

variables, utilities, standard libraries, graphical

database objects, and Unicode fonts.

The index for the Command Reference is at the end of

Using This Reference

The availability of certain shortcut menus depends on the current setting of

In the Command Reference, the command access sections identify commands

Using This Reference | 3

Terminology in command line prompts

If the prompt starts with... You can...

Select Select objects on the screen using your pointing

Enter Enter text on the command line.

Specify Use your pointing device or enter text on the

Selecting Options on the Command Line

To accept the default value, press ENTER or SPACEBAR .

Accessing Recently Used Commands

References to Other Sections

Using This Reference | 5

Text element Example

AutoCAD commands ADCENTER, DBCONNECT, SAVE

Prompts Select object to trim or [Project/Edge/Undo]:

Text you enter At the Command prompt, enter shape.

Keys you press on the keyboard CTRL, F10, ESC, ENTER

Keys you press simultaneously on the keyboard CTRL + C

AutoLISP and DIESEL function names command ads_command( )

■ Click the command name on a menu, toolbar, status bar, or shortcut

You can define a reference angle by specifying two

To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point

You can define a reference angle by specifying two

To specify the new angle of rotation, specify a point

Diameter for Base

Radius Defines the dish by its radius.

Diameter Defines the dish by its diameter.

Radius Defines the dome by its radius.

1 Specify first corner point of mesh: Specify a point (1)

apex point 5 Fourth Corner Point

4 Specify apex point of pyramid or [Ridge/Top]: Specify a point (5) or enter an

Top Defines the top of the pyramid as a rectangle. If the top

Apex Point Defines the top of the tetrahedron as a point (apex).

radius Radius Defines the sphere by its radius.

diameter Diameter Defines the sphere by its diameter.

tube Specify radius of tube or [Diameter]: Specify a distance or enter d

Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter.

Diameter Defines the tube by its diameter.

Select objects: Use an object selection method

The entire selection set is treated as a single element in the array.

Rectangular Array Copies objects in a matrix of rows (X axis), columns (Y

Specifying one row requires that more than one

If you specify more than one column, AutoCAD

If you specify more than one level, AutoCAD prompts:

Positive values generate the array along the positive X,

Entering y or pressing ENTER rotates each array

AutoCAD displays the Adjust Clipping Planes window.